U.S. Department of the Interior 

Bureau of Reclamation October 2009 

Reclamation Safety and Health 

Standards 
Mission Statements 

The mission of the Department of the Interior is to protect and 

provide access to our Nation’s natural and cultural heritage and 

honor our trust responsibilities to Indian Tribes and our 

commitments to island communities. 

The mission of the Bureau of Reclamation is to manage, develop, 

and protect water and related resources in an environmentally and 

economically sound manner in the interest of the American public. 
October 2009 iii

Foreword 

A contemporary water management agency, the Bureau of Reclamation is the 

largest wholesale water supplier in the United States, with operations and 

facilities in the 17 Western States. Today, these facilities include 348 reservoirs 

with the capacity to store 245 million acre-feet of water. Reclamation projects 

supply one out of five western farmers with irrigation water for approximately 

10 million farmland acres. 

Reclamation facilities also provide water to about 31 million people for municipal 

and industrial uses. In addition, Reclamation is the Nation’s second largest 

producer of hydroelectric power, generating more than 42 billion kilowatthours of 

energy each year from 58 hydroelectric powerplants. Its facilities also provide 

substantial flood control, recreation, and fish and wildlife benefits. 

Though the times and needs have changed, one goal has remained constant— 

Reclamation is committed to maintaining a safe place for employees, visitors, and 

the public. Procedures, processes, and regulations have changed with technology, 

but the commitment and value of safety excellence has not. This mission requires 

safety to be at the forefront of every job, in all phases of planning and operations, 

and of highest priority at all times. Excellence in safety is a core value that must 

be consistently emphasized and maintained. 

Most activities involve risk, but using a systematic process of identifying hazards, 

developing and implementing countermeasures, and evaluating and overseeing 

the activity reduces accident potential. The Reclamation Safety and Health 

Standards, the foundation of the safety program, will be used for all activities in 

Reclamation to perform work safely and maintain safe working conditions. 

By incorporating safe work procedures in all activities, safety becomes more than 

mere compliance. Safety is a lifetime value. 

October 2009 v 

Contents 

Page

Section 1 – Authority, Purpose, and Scope............................................. 1-1 

1.1 Authority for Reclamation Safety and Health Standards................... 1-1 

1.2 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................. 1-1 

Section 2 – General Requirements .......................................................... 2-1 

2.1 General Duty Requirements............................................................... 2-1 

2.2 Other Codes and Statutes................................................................... 2-1 

2.3 Variances............................................................................................ 2-1 

2.4 Requirements for Accident, Injury, and Illness Investigation 

and Reporting..................................................................................... 2-2 

2.5 Alcohol, Drugs, and Firearms............................................................ 2-2 

2.6 Public Safety ...................................................................................... 2-2 

2.7 Training ............................................................................................. 2-2 

2.8 Work Site Requirements.................................................................... 2-3 

Section 3 – Contractor Requirements..................................................... 3-1 

3.1 Contractor Responsibilities................................................................ 3-1 

3.2 Certification Requirements ................................................................ 3-1 

3.3 Required Safety Programs ................................................................. 3-1 

3.4 Required Meetings............................................................................. 3-2 

3.5 Safety and Health Professional Support ............................................ 3-2 

3.6 Required Inspections.......................................................................... 3-2 

3.7 Accident and Incident Investigating and Reporting........................... 3-3 

3.8 Contractor Monthly Accident Summary Reports .............................. 3-3 

3.9 Training Requirements....................................................................... 3-4 

3.10 Refusal to Comply With Occupational Safety and Health 

Requirements .................................................................................... 3-4 

3.11 Dispute Resolution............................................................................. 3-4 

Section 4 – Work Planning....................................................................... 4-1 

4.1 Hazard Assessments........................................................................... 4-1 

4.2 Requirements for Job Hazard Analysis.............................................. 4-1 

4.3 Employee Training and Physical Qualifications................................ 4-2 

4.4 Working Alone................................................................................... 4-2 

4.5 Requirements for Lightning Hazard Plan .......................................... 4-3 

Section 5 – Medical Services and First Aid ............................................ 5-1 

5.1 General Requirements........................................................................ 5-1 

5.2 Requirements for Medical Services................................................... 5-1 

5.3 Requirements for First Aid Kits......................................................... 5-2 

5.4 Ambulance Services........................................................................... 5-3 
vi October 2009 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Section 6 – Emergency Plans ................................................................... 6-1 

6.1 General Requirements of Emergency Plans ...................................... 6-1 

6.2 Emergency Plans................................................................................ 6-1 

6.3 Employee Orientation ........................................................................ 6-2 

6.4 Alert Systems for Emergency Situations ........................................... 6-2 

6.5 Emergency Communications............................................................. 6-2 

6.6 Resuming Normal Operations............................................................ 6-2 

6.7 Emergency Response to Hazardous Substance Releases................... 6-2 

Section 7 – Occupational Health.............................................................. 7-1 

7.1 Employee Exposure Standards .......................................................... 7-1 

7.2 Requirements for Health Hazard Assessments.................................. 7-1 

7.3 Requirements for Exposure Control .................................................. 7-2 

7.4 Requirements for the Hazard Control Plans ...................................... 7-2 

7.5 Recordkeeping Requirements ............................................................ 7-3 

7.6 Requirements for Medical Surveillance............................................. 7-3 

7.7 Hazard Communication Program Requirements ............................... 7-4 

7.8 Requirements for Respiratory Protection........................................... 7-5 

7.9 Requirements for Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation .......... 7-17 

7.10 Requirements for Sanitation .............................................................. 7-20 

7.11 Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories........................... 7-23 

7.12 Bloodborne Pathogens ....................................................................... 7-25 

7.13 Heat Stress ......................................................................................... 7-28 

7.14 Cold Stress ......................................................................................... 7-28 

7.15 Ionizing Radiation.............................................................................. 7-30 

7.16 Non-Ionizing Radiation and Fields.................................................... 7-36 

7.17 Asbestos ............................................................................................. 7-39 

7.18 Lead ............................................................................................. 7-42 

7.19 Illumination........................................................................................ 7-46 

Section 8 – Personal Protective Equipment............................................ 8-1 

8.1 Requirements for Personal Protective Equipment ............................. 8-1 

8.2 Requirements for Head Protection..................................................... 8-1 

8.3 Requirements for Eye and Face Protection........................................ 8-2 

8.4 Requirements for Hearing Protection ................................................ 8-6 

8.5 Requirements for Protective Clothing ............................................... 8-6 

8.6 Protection Against Drowning ............................................................ 8-10 

8.7 Other Protective Equipment............................................................... 8-11 

8.8 Safety Nets......................................................................................... 8-11 

8.9 Lifesaving Skiffs................................................................................ 8-13 
October 2009 vii 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Section 9 – Signs, Signals, and Barricades.............................................. 9-1 

9.1 Requirements for Signs...................................................................... 9-1 

9.2 Accident Prevention Tags.................................................................. 9-4 

9.3 Requirements for Radiation Hazard Signs......................................... 9-5 

9.4 Traffic Control Signals ...................................................................... 9-5 

9.5 Barrier Tape ....................................................................................... 9-5 

Section 10 – Fire Prevention and Protection .......................................... 10-1 

10.1 Fire Prevention Requirements............................................................ 10-1 

10.2 Requirements for Heating Devices .................................................... 10-2 

10.3 Application of Fire Protection Requirements .................................... 10-6 

Section 11 – Standards for Material Handling, Storage, 

and Disposal......................................................................................... 11-1 

11.1 General Requirements for Storage of Materials ................................ 11-1 

11.2 Storing Materials in an Open Yard .................................................... 11-1 

11.3 Requirements for Storing Materials Indoors...................................... 11-2 

11.4 Requirements for Stacking Bagged Material..................................... 11-2 

11.5 Requirements for Storing Material in Bulk ....................................... 11-2 

11.6 Requirements for Lumber Storage..................................................... 11-3 

11.7 Requirements for Storing Bricks and Masonry Blocks ..................... 11-3 

11.8 Requirements for Handling and Storing Cement and Lime............... 11-3 

11.9 Requirements for Handling and Storing Reinforcing, Sheet, 

and Structural Steel............................................................................ 11-3 

11.10 Requirements for Handling and Storing Pipe, Conduit, 

and Cylindrical Material ................................................................. 11-3 

11.11 Requirements for Storing Sand, Gravel, and Crushed Stone.......... 11-4 

11.12 Requirements for Handling Flammable and Combustible 

Liquids ............................................................................................ 11-4 

11.13 Requirements for Handling Asphalt and Tar Products................... 11-9 

11.14 Requirements for Handling Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG)......... 11-10 

11.15 Requirements for Storing and Handling Paints, Varnishes, 

and Thinners.................................................................................... 11-11 

11.16 Housekeeping.................................................................................. 11-12 

Section 12 – Electrical Safety Requirements.......................................... 12-1 

12.1 General Electrical Safety Requirements ......................................... 12-1 

12.2 Restricted Areas.............................................................................. 12-2 
viii October 2009 

Contents (continued) 

Page

12.3 Working Near Exposed Energized Overhead Lines or Parts.......... 12-3 

12.4 Operating Equipment Near Radio and Microwave Transmission 

Towers............................................................................................. 12-6 

12.5 Working on Electrical Equipment and Systems ............................. 12-7 

12.6 Personal Protective Grounding ....................................................... 12-10 

12.7 Temporary Wiring .......................................................................... 12-10 

12.8 Disconnect and Overcurrent Protection.......................................... 12-11 

12.9 Ground-Fault Protection ................................................................. 12-12 

12.10 Hazardous Locations....................................................................... 12-13 

12.11 Wet Locations ................................................................................. 12-14 

12.12 Battery Charging............................................................................. 12-14 

Attachment 12-1 – Training Requirements for Electrically 

Qualified Persons............................................................................ 12-16 

Section 13 – Walking and Working Surfaces......................................... 13-1 

13.1 Safe Access to Work.......................................................................... 13-1 

13.2 Safe Use of Scaffolds......................................................................... 13-5 

13.3 Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms............................................ 13-20 

13.4 Design and Construction of Guardrails.............................................. 13-20 

13.5 Safeguarding Floor and Roof Openings ............................................ 13-21 

13.6 Safeguarding Wall Openings ............................................................. 13-22 

13.7 Safeguarding Open Floors and Platforms.......................................... 13-23 

13.8 Requirements for Roofing Protection ................................................ 13-23 

Section 14 – Confined Spaces................................................................... 14-1 

14.1 Purpose and Scope ............................................................................. 14-1 

14.2 Applicable Definitions....................................................................... 14-1 

14.3 Requirements for Confined Spaces.................................................... 14-3 

14.4 Program Requirements for Confined Spaces..................................... 14-3 

14.5 Training Requirements....................................................................... 14-7 

14.6 Duties of Entrants .............................................................................. 14-8 

14.7 Duties of Attendants .......................................................................... 14-8 

14.8 Duties of the Entry Supervisor........................................................... 14-9 

Section 15 – Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) ............. 15-1 

15.1 Scope and Purpose of Lockout/Tagout Program ............................... 15-1 

15.2 Requirements of the Hazardous Energy Program.............................. 15-4 

15.3 Application of Energy Control........................................................... 15-9 
October 2009 ix 

Contents (continued) 

Page

15.4 Release From Lockout or Tagout ...................................................... 15-10 

15.5 Requirements of Operating Equipment Under Clearance ................. 15-11 

15.6 Requirements for Outside Personnel (Contractors, etc.) ................... 15-12 

Section 16 – Fall Protection and Rope Supported Work ...................... 16-1 

16.1 Fall Protection.................................................................................... 16-1 

16.2 Rope Supported Safety Requirements ............................................... 16-5 

Section 17 – Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels, Compressors, 

 and Welding...................................................................................... 17-1 

17.1 General Requirements for Hand and Power Tools ............................ 17-1 

17.2 Requirements for Pneumatic Tools.................................................... 17-2 

17.3 Requirements for Airless Spray Guns................................................ 17-3 

17.4 Requirements for Using Grinding Tools............................................ 17-3 

17.5 Requirements for Woodworking Tools ............................................. 17-4 

17.6 Requirements for Power Saws........................................................... 17-5 

17.7 Requirements for Hydraulic-Powered Tools ..................................... 17-6 

17.8 Requirements for Powder-Actuated Tools......................................... 17-6 

17.9 Requirements for Hand-Powered Winches and Hoists...................... 17-8 

17.10 Requirements for Lever and Ratchet, Screw, and 

Hydraulic Jacks............................................................................... 17-9 

17.11 Requirements for Hand Tools......................................................... 17-9 

17.12 General Requirements for Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels .. 17-10 

17.13 Requirements for Unfired Pressure Vessels ................................... 17-10 

17.14 Requirements for Compressors....................................................... 17-11 

17.15 Requirements for Gas Cylinders..................................................... 17-12 

17.16 Standards for Welding and Cutting................................................. 17-13 

17.17 Requirements for Gas Welding and Cutting................................... 17-17 

17.18 Requirements for Arc Welding and Cutting ................................... 17-18 

17.19 Requirements for Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding ............................ 17-18 

Section 18 – Slings, Chains, and Accessories.......................................... 18-1 

18.1 General Requirements for Using Slings, Chains, and Accessories ... 18-1 

18.2 Requirements for Using Alloy Steel Chains...................................... 18-2 

18.3 Requirements for Using Wire Rope Slings........................................ 18-2 

18.4 Requirements for Using Synthetic Fiber Rope .................................. 18-5 

18.5 Requirements for Using Synthetic Webbing Slings .......................... 18-6 

18.6 Requirements for Synthetic Roundslings........................................... 18-7 

18.7 Requirements for Shackles, Hooks, and Other Rigging Hardware ... 18-8 
x October 2009 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Section 19 – Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors ............ 19-1 

19.1 General Requirements for Hoisting Equipment................................. 19-1 

19.2 Requirements for Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections, 

and Testing......................................................................................... 19-2 

19.3 Availability and Retention of Records............................................... 19-5 

19.4 Qualifications for Operating Hoisting Equipment............................. 19-5 

19.5 Operating Requirements for Hoisting Equipment ............................. 19-6 

19.6 Requirements for Critical Lifts .......................................................... 19-8 

19.7 Requirements for Working with Wire Rope...................................... 19-8 

19.8 Requirements for Mobile and Locomotive Cranes............................ 19-10 

19.9 Requirements for Overheard, Gantry, Monorail, and Underslung 

Cranes ............................................................................................. 19-10 

19.10 Requirements for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes ........................ 19-12 

19.11 Requirements for Derricks.............................................................. 19-13 

19.12 Requirements for Floating Cranes and Derricks............................. 19-13 

19.13 Requirements for Material Hoists................................................... 19-14 

19.14 Requirements for Overhead Hoists................................................. 19-17 

19.15 Requirements for Elevators and Personnel Hoists.......................... 19-17 

19.16 Requirements for Personnel Hoists................................................. 19-18 

19.17 Requirements for Conveyors and Related Equipment.................... 19-20 

19.18 Requirements for Cableways and Highlines................................... 19-21 

19.19 Requirements for Base-Mounted Drum Hoists............................... 19-23 

19.20 Requirements for Specialized Hoisting Systems ............................ 19-23 

19.21 Requirements for Piledrivers .......................................................... 19-24 

19.22 Helicopter Operations ..................................................................... 19-25 

Attachment 19-1 – Inspection Elements for Hoisting Equipment.............. 19-29 

Attachment 19-2 – Crane Performance and Load Testing 

Requirements Tables with Associated Testing Elements .................. 19-35 

Attachment 19-3 – Boom Stop Testing Requirements ............................... 19-45 

Section 20 – Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment............... 20-1 

20.1 Operational Requirements ................................................................. 20-1 

20.2 Inspection Requirements.................................................................... 20-5 

20.3 Maintenance Requirements................................................................ 20-6 

20.4 Testing Requirements ........................................................................ 20-7 

20.5 Requirements for On-Highway Equipment ....................................... 20-7 

20.6 Crawler Equipment Requirements..................................................... 20-9 

20.7 Requirements for Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines ....... 20-10 

20.8 Requirements for Agricultural and Industrial Equipment ................. 20-11 
October 2009 xi 

Contents (continued) 

Page

20.9 Requirements for Personnel Transport Vehicles and Buses.............. 20-11 

20.10 Requirements for Industrial Trucks ................................................ 20-12 

20.11 Requirements for A-Frame Trucks ................................................. 20-14 

20.12 Requirements for Aerial Lifts ......................................................... 20-14 

20.13 Requirements for Other Mechanized Construction 

Equipment Standards ...................................................................... 20-16 

20.14 Requirements for Roads.................................................................. 20-17 

Section 21 – Hazardous Waste Site Operations ..................................... 21-1 

21.1 Scope ............................................................................................. 21-1 

21.2 Hazardous Waste Operations Safety and Health Program ................ 21-1 

21.3 Work Plan .......................................................................................... 21-1 

21.4 Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP) ................................... 21-2 

21.5 Hazard Evaluation and Control.......................................................... 21-2 

21.6 Hazard Communication ..................................................................... 21-2 

21.7 Training ............................................................................................. 21-2 

21.8 Medical Evaluation ............................................................................ 21-4 

21.9 Inspections ......................................................................................... 21-5 

21.10 Contaminant/Exposure Monitoring ................................................ 21-5 

21.11 Site Control ..................................................................................... 21-6 

21.12 Control of Worker Exposure to Hazardous Substances.................. 21-6 

21.13 Personal Protective Equipment....................................................... 21-6 

21.14 Communications ............................................................................. 21-7 

21.15 Decontamination............................................................................. 21-7 

21.16 Emergency Planning ....................................................................... 21-8 

21.17 Underground Storage Tank Removal ............................................. 21-9 

21.18 Handling Drums and Containers..................................................... 21-9 

Section 22 – Excavation Operations........................................................ 22-1 

22.1 General Requirements for Excavation Operations ............................ 22-1 

22.2 Requirements for Excavation Protective Systems ............................. 22-5 

22.3 Requirements for Structure Footings................................................. 22-7 

22.4 Requirements for Cofferdams............................................................ 22-7 

Section 23 – Tunnel and Shaft Construction.......................................... 23-1 

23.1 General Requirements for Tunnel and Shaft Construction................ 23-1 

23.2 Emergency Provisions ....................................................................... 23-2 

23.3 Requirements for Ventilation............................................................. 23-4 

23.4 Requirements for Air Quality ............................................................ 23-6 

23.5 Requirements for Dust Control.......................................................... 23-8 
xii October 2009 

Contents (continued) 

Page

23.6 Requirements for Combustion Engines ............................................. 23-8 

23.7 Requirements for Noise Control ........................................................ 23-10 

23.8 Requirements for Fire Prevention and Control.................................. 23-10 

23.9 Requirements for Excavation Operations .......................................... 23-11 

23.10 Requirements for Ground Support.................................................. 23-13 

23.11 Requirements for Transportation and Haulage............................... 23-13 

23.12 Requirements for Shafts.................................................................. 23-15 

23.13 Requirements for Tunneling in Soil................................................ 23-18 

23.14 Requirements for Compressed-Air Work ....................................... 23-18 

Section 24 – Blasting Operations............................................................. 24-1 

24.1 General Requirements for Blasting Operations ................................. 24-1 

24.2 Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation ............................................... 24-4 

24.3 Requirements for Transporting Explosives ....................................... 24-4 

24.4 Requirements for Transporting Explosives Underground ................. 24-6 

24.5 Explosives Storage............................................................................. 24-7 

24.6 Requirements for Handling Explosives ............................................. 24-8 

24.7 Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents .......................................... 24-9 

24.8 Wiring Operations.............................................................................. 24-10 

24.9 Firing ............................................................................................. 24-11 

24.10 Inspections Following a Blast......................................................... 24-12 

24.11 Requirements Regarding Misfires .................................................. 24-12 

24.12 Requirements for Using Safety Fuses............................................. 24-13 

24.13 Use of Detonating Cord .................................................................. 24-13 

24.14 Underwater Blasting ....................................................................... 24-14 

Section 25 – Concrete, Masonry Construction, and Formwork........... 25-1 

25.1 Plant and Equipment.......................................................................... 25-1 

25.2 Concrete Conveyance Systems.......................................................... 25-2 

25.3 Reinforcing Steel ............................................................................... 25-10 

25.4 Surface Preparation............................................................................ 25-11 

25.5 Formwork and Falsework .................................................................. 25-11 

25.6 Vertical Shoring................................................................................. 25-12 

25.7 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring......................................................... 25-13 

25.8 Tube and Coupler Shoring................................................................. 25-13 

25.9 Single-Post Shores ............................................................................. 25-14 

25.10 Vertical Slip-Forms......................................................................... 25-14 

25.11 Releasing and Moving Forms ......................................................... 25-15 

25.12 Precast Concrete.............................................................................. 25-16 

25.13 Lift-Slab .......................................................................................... 25-16 

25.14 Masonry Construction..................................................................... 25-17 
October 2009 xiii 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Section 26 – Steel Erection ....................................................................... 26-1 

26.1 General Requirements for Erecting Steel Structures ......................... 26-1 

26.2 Requirements for Installing Permanent Flooring............................... 26-1 

26.3 Requirements for Installing Temporary Flooring.............................. 26-2 

26.4 Requirements for Installing Other Flooring....................................... 26-2 

26.5 Requirements for Structural Steel Erections...................................... 26-2 

26.6 Requirements for Plumbing-Up......................................................... 26-3 

26.7 Requirements for Bolting................................................................... 26-3 

26.8 Requirements for Riveting................................................................. 26-4 

26.9 Requirements for Fire Protection....................................................... 26-4 

Section 27 – Reclamation Drilling Standards......................................... 27-1 

27.1 Standards for Site Selection and Working Platforms ........................ 27-1 

27.2 General Requirements for Drill Rigs ................................................. 27-2 

27.3 Truck-Mounted Drills ........................................................................ 27-3 

27.4 Skid-Mounted Units........................................................................... 27-4 

27.5 Drilling Operations ............................................................................ 27-4 

27.6 Underground Drilling Operations...................................................... 27-5 

Section 28 – Watercraft and Dredging.................................................... 28-1 

28.1 General Requirements for Watercraft Operations ............................. 28-1 

28.2 Dredging Operations.......................................................................... 28-2 

Section 29 – Marine and Diving Operations........................................... 29-1 

29.1 Requirements for Contractor Diving Operations............................... 29-1 

29.2 Requirements for Reclamation Diving Operations............................ 29-4 

Tables 

Table Page

7-1 Permissible noise exposures ........................................................... 7-18 

7-2 Toilets at temporary jobsites........................................................... 7-22 

7-3 Toilets at permanent facilities......................................................... 7-22 

7-4 Heat stress control measures........................................................... 7-28 

7-5 Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) in degrees Fahrenheit 

for different combinations of temperature and air speed (also 

called Windchill Index)................................................................... 7-29 

7-6 Exposure to ionizing radiation........................................................ 7-32 

7-7 Laser hazard classes........................................................................ 7-36 
xiv October 2009 

Tables (continued) 

Table Page

7-8 TLVs for static magnetic fields....................................................... 7-37 

7-9 Asbestos work classification........................................................... 7-41 

7-10 Minimum lighting requirements ..................................................... 7-46 

8-1 Eye and face protector selection guide ........................................... 8-3 

8-2 Filter lenses for protection against radiant energy.......................... 8-4 

10-1 Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment.......................... 10-8 

11-1 Maximum allowable size of containers and portable tanks, 

combustible..................................................................................... 11-6 

12-1 Approach boundaries to exposed energized conductors/parts 

for qualified employees................................................................... 12-4 

12-2 Equipment in transit clearances ...................................................... 12-5 

12-3 Equipment clearances for operations near energized 

overhead lines ................................................................................. 12-6 

12-4 Working spaces around enclosures and equipment ........................... 12-8 

13-1 Permissible spans for wood scaffold planks ...................................... 13-8 

13-2 Tube and coupler scaffold dimensions .............................................. 13-12 

13-3 Figure-four scaffold dimensions........................................................ 13-14 

19-1 Crane and hoisting equipment design and construction standards .... 19-2 

19-2 Crane and hoist equipment inspection criteria................................... 19-3 

19-3 Safety factors for hoisting ropes used in personnel hoists................. 19-19 

20-1 Applicable standards and regulations ................................................ 20-4 

29-1 Dive team recordkeeping ................................................................... 29-6 

Figures 

Figure Page

3-1 Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness .............................. 3-5 

3-2 Contractor monthly summary of occupational injuries/illnesses 

experience ....................................................................................... 3-7 

7-1 Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-II .............. 7-13 

7-2 Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-III............. 7-14 

7-3 Biohazard symbol ........................................................................... 7-26 

7-4 Radiation symbol ............................................................................ 7-34 

8-1 Recommended eye and face protectors........................................... 8-5 

9-1 Danger, warning, and caution signs................................................ 9-2 

12-1 Boundaries ...................................................................................... 12-3 

12-2 Access and working space requirements around enclosures 

and equipment................................................................................. 12-8 

12-3 Working space requirements for rear or side access.......................... 12-9 
October 2009 xv 

Figures (continued) 

Figure Page

12-4 Working space requirements for doors and hinged panels ................ 12-9 

25-1 Pipe couplings.................................................................................... 25-4 

25-2 Crane boom mounted concrete conveyor system .............................. 25-6 

29-1 Diving flag ......................................................................................... 29-9 

Appendices 

Page

A Job Hazard Analysis .......................................................................... A-1 

B Contractor Safety Program ................................................................ B-1 

C Electrical Grounding.......................................................................... C-1 

D Wire Rope .......................................................................................... D-1 

E Slings ............................................................................................. E-1 

F Record of Performance Inspection and Test—Crawler, 

 Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes ....................................... F-1 

G Record of Performance Inspection and Brake Test— 

 On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment ........................................ G-1 

H Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake Test 

 Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction Machines, 

 Loaders, Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders, Tractor Water 

 Wagons, and Similar-Type Machines........................................... H-1 

I Cleanout Operations........................................................................... I-1 

J Explosives.......................................................................................... J-1 

K Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms ................................ K-1 

L Referenced Material........................................................................... L-1 
October 2009 1-1 

Section 1 

Authority, Purpose, and Scope 

This section sets forth the authority, purpose, and scope of Reclamation Safety 

and Health Standards. 

1.1 Authority for Reclamation Safety and Health Standards 

Federal law and departmental regulations provide the authority to expend funds 

and manpower to develop and implement programs that protect the safety and 

health of Federal and contractor employees and prevent accidental damage of 

Government property. (See 5 United States Code [U.S.C.] 7902; Sections 6 

and 19 of Public Law 91-596, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970; 

29 U.S.C. 651 et. seq., 43 U.S.C. 1457, Executive Order 12196, 29 Code of 

Federal Regulations [CFR] 1960; Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act; 

and Departmental Manual, 485 DM.) 

These standards are incorporated into the Reclamation Manual by reference 

through SAF 01-01, Safety and Occupational Health – General, Para. 3.E. under a 

waiver authorized by the Commissioner dated December 22, 2009. 

1.2 Purpose and Scope 

The standards prescribe the safety and health requirements for all Bureau of 

Reclamation (Reclamation) activities and operations. 

All contracts or agreements for performance of work on Reclamation facilities 

must incorporate provisions for compliance with these standards. These standards 

are consistent with the health and safety standards prevalent in industry, the 

Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 91-596, and Department 

of the Interior regulations. 

This section sets forth the authority, purpose, and scope of Reclamation Safety 

and Health Standards. 
October 2009 2-1 

Section 2 

General Requirements 

This section sets forth the general requirements of Reclamation Safety and Health 

Standards. The section applies to all operations on Reclamation facilities and 

lands. 

2.1 General Duty Requirements 

2.1.1 Organization Duty. The operating organization must provide 

employees a safe and healthful work environment. This responsibility 

includes, but is not limited to, implementing and enforcing all applicable 

program elements and provisions of these standards. Equipment and facilities 

must conform fully with the standards contained and referenced in these 

standards. 

2.1.2 Employee Duty. Employees must observe all safety and health 

regulations and comply with instructions issued to them by their supervisors. 

Employees must promptly correct unsafe working conditions or report them to 

their supervisor or other proper authority. 

2.2 Other Codes and Statutes 

In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, all operations on 

Reclamation facilities and operations utilizing Reclamation equipment must 

comply with applicable provisions of Federal, State, and municipal safety, health, 

and sanitary statutes and codes. If there is a difference between the provisions of 

these standards and the safety and health regulations promulgated by the 

U.S. Department of Labor in Title 29 CFR, Parts 1910 and 1926, Occupational 

Safety and Health Act of 1970, or approved State plans, the more stringent 

provision will prevail. 

2.3 Variances 

No variance to the provisions of these standards must be approved that endangers 

the health and safety of any person, is not consistent with the intent of the 

provisions of these standards, or would be a variance to Federal or State 

regulations. If a literal application of a Reclamation provision of these standards 

is impractical or creates conflicts, the appropriate office head or contracting 

officer (CO), in consultation with safety and health professionals, may authorize a 

variation to the provision. All requests for a variance must be in writing and 

directed to the appropriate office head or contracting officer’s representative 

(COR). The written request must include: (a) a reference to the specific 

provision of the standard, (b) an explanation as to why the provision is considered 

impractical, and (c) the proposed adaptation to the standard. The request must 

contain pertinent technical data, drawings, material or equipment specifications, 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

2-2 October 2009 

and other information that will enable the office head or CO to make a decision. 

The operation in question must not proceed until the Reclamation office head or 

CO provides written approval. 

2.4. Requirements for Accident, Injury, and Illness Investigation and 

Reporting 

2.4.1 Reclamation. Investigate and report accidents and incidents using the 

Department of the Interior Safety Management Information System. Any 

accident involving a fatality must be reported to the appropriate Occupational 

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) office within 8 hours. 

2.4.2 Non-Federal Operators of Reclamation Facilities. Operators must 

report to the appropriate Reclamation office all third party injuries, deaths, or 

substantial property losses that result or could result in claims against the 

Government. 

2.4.3 Contractor. Contractors must report and investigate injuries and 

incidents in accordance with the section entitled, "Contractor Requirements." 

2.5. Alcohol, Drugs, and Firearms 

Using intoxicating beverages and narcotics on Government property is not 

permitted. No one under the influence of alcohol or narcotics is permitted on the 

jobsite. Employees using medication(s) must ensure that their performance will 

not be impaired. Unauthorized firearms are not permitted on Reclamation 

property. 

2.6. Public Safety 

Reclamation facilities must be operated and maintained in a manner that poses no 

excessive risk to the public. 

2.7 Training 

2.7.1. General. All employees must receive training about hazards and 

hazard control methods specific to their jobs. The employer is responsible for 

providing these instructions, together with ensuring that employees possess 

the necessary qualifications, licenses, and permits required to perform such 

work. 

2.7.2 Employee Orientation. All employees must receive an orientation on 

provisions of the safety and health program. The orientation must include 

applicable requirements of safety and health policies, reporting accidents and 

injuries, first aid and medical care, emergency response, applicable safety and 

health standards, and sources of information on safety and health questions. 
Section 2—General Requirements 

October 2009 2-3 

2.7.3 Documentation. Document all training with, at least, the title, date, 

and length of training, instructor or provider, and names of employees 

completing the training. 

2.8 Work Site Requirements 

All work sites and areas must be maintained to avoid potential hazards introduced 

by poor housekeeping and shoddy work practices. 

2.8.1 Housekeeping. Good housekeeping, including provisions for routine 

scrap and debris removal, must be maintained in all areas. 

2.8.2 Environmental Stewardship. Handling, storing, using, and disposing 

of waste must not contaminate or pollute water, air, or ground. Disposal must 

comply with Federal, State, and local regulations. 
October 2009 3-1 

Section 3 

Contractor Requirements 

This section sets forth requirements for contractors. It specifically addresses 

contractor responsibilities, certification requirements, safety programs, required 

meetings, safety and health professional support, inspection requirements, 

accident and incident investigating and reporting, monthly accident summary 

report, training requirements, dismissal of employees who refuse to comply with 

occupational safety and health requirements, and dispute resolution. The 

requirements of this section apply to Reclamation contractors. 

3.1 Contractor Responsibilities 

The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all work under contract meets or 

exceeds the OSHA standards in addition to complying with the Reclamation 

Safety and Health Standards contained herein. The contractor is responsible for 

ensuring safe work performance of employees and subcontractors. These 

standards also apply to offsite activities, equipment, and facilities that primarily 

support the contract work. Contractors must include provisions for coordination 

with the safety and health requirements of these standards in the terms and 

conditions of all contracts, subcontracts, and supply contracts. 

3.2 Certification Requirements 

The manufacturer or a professional engineer (PE) must certify that the design of 

major or critical facilities, equipment, support structures, or systems, 

embankments, shoring systems, and formwork (falsework) is structurally suitable 

for the intended use. This certification must be in writing and submitted to the 

Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) before construction or use of such 

facilities, equipment, or support systems. 

3.3 Required Safety Programs 

The contractor must submit a comprehensive written safety program covering all 

aspects of onsite and applicable offsite operations and activities associated with 

the contract. (See appendix entitled, "Contractor Safety Program.") Unless 

adequately covered in the original plan, the contractor must submit a 

supplementary detailed plan before starting each major phase of work or when 

requested by the COR. Onsite work must not begin until the COR has accepted 

the program or appropriate supplementary submittals. Initial and supplementary 

submittals must include a timetable for completing required, detailed, job hazard 

analysis (JHAs). Accepting contractor initial and supplementary programs only 

signifies that the contractor has provided adequate documentation to perform the 

work safely. It does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for providing 

employees with a safe and healthful work environment or compliance with stated 

requirements and applicable specification paragraphs. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

3-2 October 2009 

3.4 Required Meetings 

3.4.1 Contractor Safety Program Review. After the contractor submits the 

written safety program requirements, a meeting must be held to review the 

program. The contractor must be prepared to discuss in detail the procedures 

to control the hazards likely to happen during major phases of the work, and 

the organizational assignments involved in administering the program. The 

contractor's principal onsite representative, general superintendent, the COR, 

and the safety representative must attend this meeting. 

3.4.2 Joint Safety Policy Meeting. The COR, the contractor's principal 

onsite representative, and designated members of respective staffs must 

participate in scheduled monthly safety meetings. These meetings must 

review the effectiveness of the contractor's safety effort, resolve health and 

safety problems relating to current operations, and provide a forum for 

planning safe future activities. The contractor must prepare and maintain 

meeting minutes in a manner prescribed by the COR. 

3.4.3 Supervisory Safety Meetings. The contractor must conduct regularly 

scheduled (at least monthly) supervisory safety meetings for all levels of job 

supervision. The contractor must maintain a summary report containing 

subject matter and signatures of all attendees and make it available for review 

by the COR. 

3.4.4 Tool Box Safety Meetings. Each field supervisor or foreman must 

conduct at least one on-the-job or toolbox safety meeting each week, and all 

employees under their supervision must attend. The field supervisor or 

foreman must maintain a record of each meeting, including signatures of 

attendees, and make it available for review by the COR. 

3.5 Safety and Health Professional Support 

When the contract does not require the services of a full-time safety professional, 

the contractor must designate, in writing, a competent supervisory employee, 

acceptable to the COR, to administer the safety program. However, if the CO 

considers the contractor's safety effort inadequate, the CO may require the 

contractor to employ a full-time qualified safety professional in place of a safety 

representative. These standards make further provisions for using safety and 

health specialists where special or technical expertise is required. 

3.6 Required Inspections 

The contractor must ensure competent employees conduct frequent and regular (at 

least weekly) safety inspections of the worksites, materials, and equipment. The 

contractor must maintain detailed written inspection records and make them 

available for review by the COR. The contractor must prohibit the use of any 

machinery, tool, material, or equipment that is not safe and/or does not comply 
Section 3—Contractor Requirements 

October 2009 3-3 

with applicable requirement of these standards. The contractor must identify such 

machine, tool, material, or equipment as unsafe, by tagging or locking the controls 

to make them inoperable or by physically removing it from its place of operation. 

3.7 Accident and Incident Investigating and Reporting 

3.7.1 Report accidents and incidents immediately to the COR and appropriate 

contractor personnel. The contractor is responsible for providing and 

obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and notifying the 

coroner, fire and law enforcement agencies, the Occupational Safety and 

Health Administration, and family members. Except for rescue and 

emergency measures, do not disturb the scene of the accident or incident, and 

do not resume the operation until authorized by COR. The contractor must 

assist and cooperate fully with the COR in conducting the investigations of the 

accident/incident and ensure availability of all information, personnel, and 

data pertinent to the investigation. When ordered by the COR, the contractor 

must conduct a separate and complete independent investigation of the 

accident or incident and submit a comprehensive report of findings and 

recommendations to the COR. The contractor must arrange, and be 

financially responsible for, the independent investigation and any equipment 

or material inspections or tests, or diagnostic studies required by the 

Government or contractor investigators. Further, for each injured person, the 

contractor must complete Reclamation form 7-2077, Contractor's Report of 

Recordable Injury/Illness, and submit it to the COR. See figure 3-1. 

3.7.2 The contractor must report nonserious accidents or incidents 

immediately to the contractor's supervisor delegated authority to arrange for 

medical assistance and to investigate the accident or incident. After arranging 

for required medical assistance, the responsible supervisor must investigate 

the accident/incident. Within 3 working days following the accident, the 

contractor must submit to the COR a completed Reclamation form 7-2077, 

Contractor's Report of Recordable Injury/Illness, for all personal injuries, and 

a comprehensive narrative report for property damage accidents. 

3.7.3 The contractor must report potentially serious accidents or incidents 

immediately to the COR. The contractor's involved equipment and worksite 

must remain secured until the contractor has completed a comprehensive 

investigation, acceptable to the COR, and the COR has given permission to 

resume work. Within 5 days following the investigation, the contractor must 

submit a detailed, written investigation report to the COR. 

3.8 Contractor Monthly Accident Summary Report 

By the first day of each month, the contractor must submit a completed 

Reclamation reporting form 7-2218, Contractor Recordable Accident 

Experience, or equivalent, acceptable to the COR. See figure 3-2. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

3-4 October 2009 

3.9 Training Requirements 

3.9.1 Orientation. The contractor must give each new contractor employee a 

written notice containing pertinent provisions of the safety and health 

program. The notice must indicate general policy and set forth procedures 

and regulations applying to the work environment, accident reporting, and 

first aid and medical care. Each employee must acknowledge receiving these 

instructions. The contractor must file this acknowledgment and make it 

available for review. 

3.9.2 First Aid and CPR Training. Every contractor foreman must possess 

a current first aid and CPR certificate from a recognized provider. 

3.9.3 Contractor Supervisor Training. All contractor onsite supervisors, 

including foremen, must attend a classroom review of applicable safety and 

health requirements within 30 days after construction begins and annually 

thereafter. Supervisors and foremen who begin work between formal training 

sessions must receive initial instructions from the contractor's safety 

representative and attend all subsequent annual reviews. Use these standards 

and the contractor's safety program as a text for all training sessions. The 

contractor must maintain records detailing course content and names of 

attendees and make them available for review by the COR. A Reclamation 

safety professional will be available for the formal classroom reviews to assist 

with safety and health standards. The COR may grant exceptions to 

supervisory training requirements for short-term contracts or other 

discretionary reasons. 

3.10 Refusal to Comply With Occupational Safety and Health 

Requirements 

The contractor must remove employees who refuse or repeatedly fail to comply 

with safe work practices and standards, or supervisors who fail to enforce 

compliance, from the associated work assignments. 

3.11 Dispute Resolution 

If disputes involve safety issues, the work must not proceed until the dispute is 

resolved. 
Section 3—Contractor Requirements 

October 2009 3-5 

Figure 3-1.—Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

3-6 October 2009 

Figure 3-1.—Contractor's report of recordable injury/illness (continued). 
Section 3—Contractor Requirements 

October 2009 3-7 

Figure 3-2.—Contractor monthly summary of occupational injuries/illnesses experience. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

3-8 October 2009 

Figure 3-2.—Contractor monthly summary of occupational injuries/illnesses experience 

(continued). 
October 2009 4-1 

Section 4 

Work Planning 

This section sets forth the requirements of work planning. It includes hazard 

assessment, job hazard analysis, communications, emergency response plan, and 

lightning hazards. This section applies to all Reclamation and contractor 

activities. 

4.1 Hazard Assessments 

The responsible supervisor, consulting with a safety or health professional if 

needed, must assess the workplace and work activities to determine if hazards are 

present or are likely to be present. The supervisor must develop a written Job 

Hazard Analysis (JHA) if warranted by identified or potential hazards. If there is 

potential exposure to any chemical, physical, or biological agent which may have 

a detrimental effect, the supervisor must ensure that a health hazard assessment is 

included in the JHA. 

4.2 Requirements for Job Hazard Analysis 

4.2.1 Requirement. The responsible supervisor, consulting with employees 

who will perform the work and a safety and health representative, if needed, 

must develop a written JHA if required by the hazard assessment. The 

supervisor and employees must review the JHA at the Tool Box Safety 

meeting before performing the work. A copy of the JHA must be available at 

the work site. 

4.2.2 Written Procedure. Written procedures for selected operations must 

prescribe how actions should be accomplished, the proper sequence, 

equipment required, specific instructions or limitations, potential hazards with 

preventive measures, and instructions. Written procedures also must 

reference appropriate codes, standards, and regulations. 

4.2.3 Basic Elements of JHA. Record developed written procedures in 

narrative form or on a standard printed form. See example in the “Job Hazard 

Analysis” appendix. 

At a minimum, the JHA must include the following basic elements: 

a. Title: Identifies project and specifies operation. 

b. Number: Used for recording and indexing. 

c. Date: Required to ensure procedure is current. Include annual or 

biennial revision dates with reviewer's initials. 

d. Description of work to be performed. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

4-2 October 2009 

e. Equipment, tools, and facilities involved. 

f. Employee knowledge, skills, physical ability, and certification required. 

g. Principal steps of operation in sequence: break down operations only 

into the sequence of significant steps necessary to ensure adequate 

consideration of important items. 

h. Identification of hazards: 

1. Physical 

2. Chemical 

3. Biological 

i. Identification of hazard control measures: 

1. Engineering controls 

2. Administrative controls 

3. Safety equipment and apparel 

j. References: Reference to codes, standards, or regulations. 

k. Signatures of the supervisor and the reviewing official. 

4.2.4 As work is performed under a JHA, reassess the JHA to ensure that 

hazards have been addressed and adequate hazards controls have been 

implemented. Job site monitoring and observation of work activities must be 

a basis for assessment and revision. Where controls are determined to be 

insufficient, halt work until adequate controls can be developed. 

4.3 Employee Training and Physical Qualifications 

4.3.1 Training Qualifications. Do not assign any work until the employee 

has been adequately trained to perform the task. 

4.3.2 Physical Qualifications. All employees must be physically and 

medically qualified, as appropriate, for performing their assigned duties. 

4.4 Working Alone 

When employees must work alone and when the possibility of injury and inability 

to provide medical treatment could create life-threatening situations, supervisors 

must implement protective measures. The JHA process will determine 

appropriate measures and will address the specific situations and hazards. 

4.4.1 Communication. An effective means of communication must be 

available. This communication could include cellular phone, two-way radios, 
Section 4—Work Planning 

October 2009 4-3 

hard line telephones, and check-in and check-out procedures. Selected 

communication must be tested prior to start of operation to verify that 

equipment will operate efficiently in the environment. 

When an employee is working alone in an isolated location, make frequent 

checks to ensure the employee’s safety. 

In some instances, employees (dam tenders) are stationed in isolated work 

areas and generally perform their duties alone. At a minimum, daily 

communication identifying activities and locations for that day are required. 

4.4.2 Emergency Response Procedures. An emergency response plan must 

be written and all employees informed about the plan and procedures. 

Employees working alone must have an effective way to obtain emergency 

assistance. If an employee misses a pre-determined check-in, initiate 

emergency procedures. 

4.4.3 Emergency Response Plan. Emergency response plan must include 

provisions for emergency medical care and treatment. Include arrangements 

for ambulance service, emergency treatment, and maintain a list of phone 

numbers. The plan must be submitted to and approved by the COR prior to 

the start of operation. 

4.5 Requirements for Lightning Hazard Plan 

When outdoor work is performed where a lightning hazard has been identified, a 

lightning hazard plan shall be developed. This plan shall contain, as a minimum, 

the following items: 

• A designated person(s) responsible to monitor the weather to initiate the 

evacuation process when appropriate. 

• A protocol to notify all persons at risk from the lightning threat. 

Depending on the number of individuals involved, a team of people may 

be needed to coordinate the evacuation plan. 

• Safer sites identified beforehand, along with a means to route the people to 

those locations. 

• An “All Clear” signal identified that is considerably different than the 

“Warning” signal. 
October 2009 5-1 

Section 5 

Medical Services and First Aid 

5.1 General Requirements 

This section sets forth the requirements for medical services and first aid. 

5.1.1 Requirement. Emergency medical services must be readily available 

for employees and employees must know how and where to access the 

services or supplies. Adequately train employees to render first aid and 

cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). Provide adequate first aid supplies to 

address medical emergencies. 

5.1.2 Communication. Make reliable means of communication to contact 

emergency medical facilities. Provide specific guidance on actions to take 

when a medical emergency occurs. Conspicuously post emergency numbers 

(such as 911). 

5.1.3 Signs. Post signs to clearly indicate the location of a first aid station 

and first aid kits. 

5.2 Requirements for Medical Services 

5.2.1 Minimum requirements for medical first aid stations are as follows: 

a. In the absence of readily available medical services, facility locations 

with more than 99 employees (total number of employees on the largest 

shift) must have a first aid station equipped as directed by a consulting 

physician, preferably one specializing in occupational health medicine. 

The first aid station must have, at least, a stretcher, blanket, eye wash 

solutions, and supplies to treat anticipated hazards. 

b. A registered nurse (RN), an emergency medical technician (EMT), or a 

paramedic must be on duty at the on-site first aid station, except when on 

emergency call. 

5.2.2 Make an assessment to determine the number of employees to be 

trained to administer first aid and CPR, but at least one employee per shift. 

The assessment must include analysis of the injury and illness log experience, 

hazardous operations, work environment, and consultation with a health care 

professional. 

5.2.3 In isolated or remote work locations, all employees must be qualified to 

administer first aid and CPR. Where the job hazard analysis indicates 

significant risks, the job planning must include provisions for first aid 

assistance. Employee training intervals for first aid and CPR must be in 

accordance with the American Red Cross or the American Heart Association. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

5-2 October 2009 

5.3 Requirements for First Aid Kits 

On projects with less than 100 people, first aid supplies will be provided and 

accessible. At least one full kit must be provided for every 25 employees. 

5.3.1 Consensus standard ANSI Z308.1, Minimum Requirements for 

Industrial Unit-Type First Aid Kits, lists and establishes a minimum 

assortment of first aid treatment packages that first aid kits should contain. 

The basic fill kit must include the following: 

a. Absorbent compress (32 square inches, with no side smaller than 

4 inches) 

b. Adhesive bandages 

c. Adhesive tape 

d. Antiseptic applications (0.5 gram per application, total 0.14 fluid 

ounces) 

e. Burn treatment applications (0.5 gram per application, total 0.14 fluid 

ounces) 

f. Two pairs of medical exam gloves, and two additional pairs of latex 

gloves 

g. Sterile pads (3 by 3 inches) 

h. Triangular bandage (40 by 40 by 56 inches) 

i. Mouth protective valve for CPR 

j. Disinfectant 

k. Biohazard disposal receptacle 

However, when larger operations or multiple operations occur at the same 

location, supervisors must determine the need for additional first aid kits at the 

work site, additional types of first aid equipment and supplies, and additional 

quantities and types of supplies and equipment in first aid kits. The supervisor 

must choose first aid supplies in consultation with a health care professional 

or by a person competent in first aid and knowledgeable about the hazards of 

that workplace. 

5.3.2 Government-owned motor vehicles, aircraft, and watercraft must carry a 

first aid kit. 

5.3.3 Inspect first aid kits monthly (and weekly for construction activities). 

The label inside the kit lid must include an inventory of the kit’s contents. 

The inspector must verify that the listed items are available and that the sterile 

packaging is intact. Record the date of the last inspection. 
Section 5—Medical Services 

and First Aid 

October 2009 5-3 

5.4 Ambulance Services 

Provisions for ambulance or emergency services must be planned prior to 

operations. Acceptable ambulance service may be provided by a licensed agency 

that renders service or a standby emergency vehicle for that purpose at the jobsite. 
October 2009 6-1 

Section 6 

Emergency Plans 

This section describes emergency plans, including general requirements, what 

they must include, employee orientation, alert systems, emergency 

communications, and actions to resume normal operations. 

6.1 General Requirements of Emergency Plans 

Emergency plans must ensure employee and public safety, protection of property, 

and continuity of essential operations. These plans must address foreseeable 

emergency events, employee responsibilities, emergency response procedures, 

training, and equipment; must be in writing; and must be reviewed with all 

affected employees. Test emergency plans at least once every 12-month period to 

ensure effectiveness. 

6.1.1 Where outside emergency services are used, provide at least the 

following information to the outside responders: 

• Facility plans that provide the physical layout of the facility 

• Locations of hazardous chemicals 

• Locations of hazardous equipment 

• Conduct periodic tours of the facility to familiarize the responders 

• Function of the alarm, elevators, and communication systems 

• Location and function of emergency equipment in the facility 

6.1.2 Requirements for emergency responders include at least the following: 

• Specialized training commensurate with actual tasks 

• Specialized protective equipment and periodic drills with the 

equipment 

• Specialized rescue equipment and periodic drills with the equipment 

• Medical evaluations 

• At least four employees to conduct an initial entry by two individuals 

• Specialized, tested communications procedures and equipment 

• A detailed written plan 

6.2 Emergency Plans 

Plans must include: 

• Lines of authority for emergency procedures 

• Training requirements, including PPE, for all assisting in the emergency 

evacuation of personnel 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

6-2 October 2009 

• Training requirements for communicating the plan to affected personnel 

• Requirements for emergency equipment 

• Escape procedures and routes 

• Critical facility operations 

• Employee accounting following an emergency evacuation 

• Rescue and medical duties 

• Means of reporting emergencies 

• Contacts for information or clarification 

• Communication systems and procedures 

6.3 Employee Orientation 

Review the plan with all affected employees when first developed, whenever 

employees’ responsibilities change, when the plan changes, and periodically. 

Upon initial assignment, brief new employees. 

6.4 Alert Systems for Emergency Situations 

Alert systems are alarms or procedures designed to warn of existing or imminent 

emergency situations. They must be developed and tested to ensure all persons 

likely to be affected by emergency situations are familiar with the systems and 

will receive adequate warning to take appropriate actions. Alert systems may also 

be designed to alert and summon emergency response personnel. 

6.5 Emergency Communications 

Conspicuously post emergency telephone numbers and reporting instructions for 

ambulance, medical services, hospital, fire, and police. Familiarize all personnel 

with emergency communications procedures. Telephone lines and radio 

frequencies must be kept clear for use by those in charge during an emergency. 

6.6 Resuming Normal Operations 

Normal operations may resume only after appropriate actions have been taken to 

ensure that safe conditions exist before resuming normal operations. Do not 

jeopardize the safety of employees, the public, or property because of the urgency 

to resume operations or to restore service. 

6.7 Emergency Response to Hazardous Substance Releases 

In general, Reclamation requires a strategy for dealing with uncontrolled releases 

of hazardous substances. You are provided a choice which will determine the 

program elements and the complexity of implementation necessary to meet the 
Section 6—Emergency Plans 

October 2009 6-3 

requirements of these standards. You need to address whether or not you expect 

your employees to respond to emergency hazardous material spills. 

Emergency response is a response effort by employees from outside the 

immediate release area or by other designated responders to an occurrence 

that results, or is likely to result, in an uncontrolled release of a hazardous 

substance. 

Incidental releases, where the substance can be absorbed, neutralized, or 

otherwise controlled at the point of release by employees in the immediate 

release area or by maintenance personnel, are not considered to be emergency 

responses within the scope of this standard, as long as there is no potential 

safety or health hazard. 

6.7.1 General Requirements When Employees Are Expected to Respond. 

If you expect employees to respond to hazardous substance releases at 

locations other than identified hazardous waste sites which fall under the 

requirements of the hazardous waste site operations section, you are required 

to develop an Emergency Response Plan and ensure that employees are 

designated, trained, and equipped to safely deal with the emergency. 

a. Pre-planning. You must identify the types, quantities, and locations of 

hazardous substances; determine the relative hazard of each substance; 

and develop response procedures and training for worst-case scenarios. 

b. Emergency Response Plan. You must have a written plan in place 

prior to commencement of emergency response operations. This plan will 

be incorporated into the broader Emergency Action Plan developed for 

your site, covering responses by all employees to a broad range of 

potential emergencies. The plan must include at least all the following 

elements: 

• Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties 

• An outline of personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and 

communication 

• Emergency recognition and prevention procedures 

• Details about safe distances and places of refuge 

• Site security and control procedures 

• Evacuation routes and procedures 

• Emergency alerting and response procedures 

• Decontamination procedures 

• Emergency medical treatment and first aid procedures 

• Methods for evaluation of response and followup procedures 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

6-4 October 2009 

• Information on the location of Material Safety Data Sheets 

(MSDS), personal protective equipment (PPE), and emergency 

equipment 

c. Incident Command System. You must develop a system that 

identifies your senior emergency response official (Incident Commander) 

who has ultimate site control responsibility and authority. Responsibilities 

of the commander include: 

• Identifying, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or 

conditions present 

• Addressing site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum 

exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use 

of new technologies 

• Implementing appropriate emergency operations 

• Determining, through monitoring, when PPE or respiratory 

protection is required 

• Assuring that PPE worn is appropriate for the hazards encountered 

during emergencies 

d. Training. You are required to provide specialized training for 

responders based upon their duties and functions within your plan. The 

skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders must be 

conveyed to them through training before they are permitted to take part in 

actual emergency operations. There are a minimum of five types of 

responders, each with specific training expectations to be met. They are: 

• First responder awareness level 

• First responder operations level 

• Hazardous materials technician 

• Hazardous materials specialist 

• Onsite incident commander 

A first responder awareness level employee is an individual who is likely 

to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who, through 

training, is expected to initiate a response sequence by notifying 

appropriate authorities of the release. They are not expected to take 

further action. 

A first responder operations level employee is an individual who is 

expected to respond to releases as part of initial actions to protect nearby 

personnel, property, or the environment from the effects of the release. 

They are trained to respond defensively to a release without necessarily 

being expected to stop the release. 

A hazardous materials technician level employee is an individual who is 

expected to stop the release. They assume a more aggressive role, perhaps 
Section 6—Emergency Plans 

October 2009 6-5 

approaching the point of release in order to plug, patch, or otherwise stop 

the release of hazard substance. 

A hazardous material specialist level employee is an individual who is 

expected to respond with and provide support to technician level 

responders. They require more specific knowledge of the substances they 

may be called upon to contain. They act as a liaison with other outside 

authorities in regard to site activities. 

An onsite incident commander is an individual who is expected to assume 

control of the incident scene upon notification of release. 

You must provide training which meets the following minimum 

expectations associated with each type of responder. 

1. First responder awareness level. Training enabling the individual 

to demonstrate: 

• Understanding of hazardous substances and their risks 

• Ability to identify hazardous substances in an emergency 

• Understanding of their role in the plan 

• How to notify appropriate entities 

2. First responder operations level. A minimum 8 hours of training 

enabling the individual to demonstrate: 

• Knowledge of basic hazard and risk assessment techniques 

• How to select and use proper personal protective equipment 

• Understanding of basic hazardous materials terminology 

• How to perform basic control, containment, and/or 

confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources 

and equipment available 

• How to implement basic decontamination procedures 

• Understanding of the established standard operating procedures 

3. Hazardous materials technician. A minimum 24 hours of 

training enabling the individual to demonstrate: 

• How to implement the emergency response plan 

• Knowledge of the classification, identification, and verification 

of known and unknown material by using field survey 

instruments and equipment 

• Ability to function within the assigned role in the incident 

command system 

• Knowledge to select and use proper specialized chemical 

personal protective equipment provided 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

6-6 October 2009 

• Knowledge of hazard and risk assessment techniques 

• Performance of advance control, containment, and/or 

confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources 

available 

• Understanding of implementation of decontamination 

procedures 

• Understanding of termination procedures 

• Understanding of basic chemical and toxicological terminology 

4. Hazardous materials specialist. A minimum 24 hours of training 

enabling the individual to demonstrate: 

• How to implement the emergency response plan 

• Knowledge of the classification, identification, and verification 

of known and unknown material by using field survey 

instruments and equipment 

• Knowledge of the State emergency response plan 

• Knowledge on selecting and using proper specialized chemical 

personal protective equipment provided 

• Knowledge of in-depth hazard and risk assessment techniques 

• Performing advance control, containment, and/or confinement 

operations within the capabilities of the resources available 

• Understanding of implementation of decontamination 

procedures 

• Understanding of termination procedures 

• Understanding of basic chemical and toxicological terminology 

5. Onsite incident commander. A minimum 24 hours of training 

with elements included meeting first responder training as well as 

enabling the individual to demonstrate: 

• How to implement the incident command system 

• How to implement the site emergency response plan 

• Knowledge of the hazards and risks associated with employees 

working in chemical protective clothing 

• How to implement local, State, and Federal emergency 

response plans 

• Knowledge of decontamination procedures 

e. Annual refresher training. You must annually provide training to 

maintain individual competencies and substantiate that employees can 

demonstrate competency in their level of emergency response. If time 
Section 6—Emergency Plans 

October 2009 6-7 

periods lapse regarding these demonstrated competencies for more 

than 2 years, individuals must be provided training meeting the initial 

training requirements. 

6.7.2 General Requirements When Employees Are Not Expected to 

Respond. If you do not permit employees to respond to hazardous substance 

releases, and you will evacuate the employees from the danger area when an 

emergency occurs, you are required to specify this in the comprehensive 

emergency action plan (employee emergency and fire prevention plans) as 

required in other parts of this section. 
October 2009 7-1 

Section 7 

Occupational Health 

This section sets forth the requirements and standards for Reclamation’s 

occupational health programs. It covers the following specific areas: 

• Employee Exposure Standards 

• Health Hazard Assessments 

• Exposure Control 

• Hazard Control Plans 

• Recordkeeping 

• Medical Surveillance 

• Hazard Communication Program 

• Respiratory Protection 

• Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation 

• Sanitation 

• Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories 

• Bloodborne Pathogens 

• Heat Stress and Cold Stress 

• Ionizing and Non-ionizing Radiation 

• Asbestos 

• Lead 

• Illumination 

7.1 Employee Exposure Standards 

An employee exposure measures dose, toxicity, and route of entry to an employee 

for a specified period of time. Maintain employee exposures to airborne 

contaminants at or below the more protective requirements of the OSHA 

permissible exposure limits (PELs) or the American Conference of Governmental 

Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical 

Substances and Physical Agents. 

7.2 Requirements for Health Hazard Assessments 

A health hazard assessment is a study of the worksite, including identification of 

potential to hazardous materials or atmospheres, equipment, and work procedures. 

7.2.1 Exposure Assessment. The exposure assessment is a process that 

determines the magnitude (including dose and toxicity), duration, and route of 

entry of a potential health threat. Conduct health hazard assessments for all 

facilities and operations to determine the extent of existing, as well as 

introduced, health hazards (physical, chemical, and biological). 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-2 October 2009 

7.2.2 Exposure Monitoring. Conduct exposure monitoring when hazardous 

materials or physical agents are present in the workplace. Also use exposure 

monitoring to: 

• Evaluate new processes and establish baselines 

• Evaluate engineering controls 

• Investigate employee complaints 

• Comply with Federal, State, and local regulations 

• Conduct investigations or research 

Periodically monitor exposure when employees wear respiratory protection, use 

hearing protection devices, are exposed to radiation sources, or when monitoring 

is required by specific standards. A qualified person must direct and supervise 

employee exposure monitoring. 

7.3 Requirements for Exposure Control 

7.31 Engineering Controls. Use engineering controls as the primary means 

to minimize workplace health hazards. Engineering controls may include, but 

are not limited to, the use of enclosures, isolation, substitution of materials, or 

ventilation. 

7.3.2 Administrative Control Measures. Use administrative controls such 

as scheduling reduced work times in high exposure areas, erecting signs, 

training employees, and specific job procedures to reduce personnel 

exposures. 

7.3.3 Personal Protective Equipment. Use personal protective equipment 

to protect employees from their environment when engineering and 

administrative controls are not adequately protective. 

7.3.4 Assessment. Complete a written assessment on the feasibility of 

engineering controls when either of the following occurs: 

a. The air contaminant concentrations meet or exceed an action level 

(which is 50 percent of the more stringent of OSHA PEL’s, ACGIH 

TLVs, or other specific occupational-based exposure standard in effect). 

b. The source noise level meets or exceeds 85 dBA. 

7.4 Requirements for the Hazard Control Plans 

7.4.1 Air Contaminant Control Plan. Establish an air contaminant control 

plan when an air contaminant is produced by stationary or portable sources at 

concentrations that reach an Action Level. An Action Level is defined as onehalf of an established PEL or TLV, unless otherwise stated in a specific 

standard. The plan will reflect the means and processes used to: 

a. Identify all contaminant sources. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-3 

b. Track corrective actions associated with contaminant sources. 

c. Conduct area monitoring to determine the effectiveness of the controls 

applied. 

d. Complete job hazard analyses for operations with air contaminant 

exposure. 

e. Provide exposure control through the use of administrative controls or 

use of the personal protective devices when engineering control is 

infeasible. 

f. Implement a medical surveillance program, when necessary. 

7.4.2 Noise Control Plan. Establish a noise control plan when noise is 

produced by stationary or portable sources expose personnel to 85 or more 

decibels (dBA). The plan will reflect the means and processes used to: 

a. Conduct noise surveys to identify, inventory, and label all sources that 

expose personnel to 85 dBA or more. 

b. Track corrective actions associated with noise sources. 

c. Conduct area monitoring to determine the effectiveness of the controls 

applied. 

d. Complete job hazard analyses for operations with noise source 

exposure. 

e. Provide exposure control through the use of administrative controls or 

the use of personal protective devices when engineering control is 

infeasible. 

f. Implement a hearing conservation program, when necessary. 

7.5 Recordkeeping Requirements 

Maintain employee medical, exposure monitoring, and training records in 

accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1020, the Privacy Act of 1974 (P.L.93-

579), and FPM 293. Follow the employee medial records maintenance guidance 

found in the Department of the Interior’s Occupational Medicine Program 

Handbook. Medical and exposure monitoring records must be maintained for the 

duration of employment plus 30 years. 

7.6 Requirements for Medical Surveillance 

7.6.1 Requirements for Medical Surveillance are Determined by 

Exposure or Risk. Include an employee in a medical surveillance program 

after an initial hazard assessment for certain high demand jobs; where 

required by specific Federal regulations; after exposure monitoring verifies 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-4 October 2009 

the necessity; or when employees are exposed to or exhibit symptoms of 

exposure to chemicals, dust, noise, and other workplace hazards as determined 

by credible exposure monitoring. 

7.6.2 Medical Administration. When medical surveillance is required, it 

must be conducted under the direction of a physician who specializes in 

occupational medicine. The medical surveillance program must be based on a 

comprehensive evaluation of the workforce, worksites, and job duties. 

Provide the examining physician with a description of duties that relate to the 

hazardous workplace, results of employee exposure monitoring, a description 

of personal protective equipment used, and information from previous medical 

examinations. 

7.6.3 Notification. Notify employees of their inclusion in the program and 

educate them as to the program’s goals, benefits, and procedures. Provide 

employees with a written summary of any examination, as well as laboratory tests 

results. Recommendations for any additional tests relating to the medical 

surveillance program and information on non work-related problems requiring 

further medical evaluation must be conveyed to the employee in a timely manner. 

The medical provider will provide the employer with the physician’s opinion 

concerning: (1) any detected medical conditions that place the employee at 

increased risk of harm from continued performance on the job, (2) any 

recommended work modifications, and (3) a statement that the employee has been 

informed of the results and any other matters requiring further medical followup. 

7.7 Hazard Communication Program Requirements 

7.7.1 General Requirements. Obtain Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 

for any substance possessing combustible, flammable, corrosive, explosive, or 

toxic properties. Make MSDS readily available and accessible by employees. 

All persons who use hazardous materials must receive training. 

7.7.2 Written Program. Establish a written hazard communication program 

wherever employees use, store, or produce substances with hazardous 

properties. Exceptions to this requirement include laboratories where the 

chemical hygiene plan is required. The OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200 mandatory 

Appendices A, B, and D shall be included in all written programs. 

7.7.3 Program Requirements. The written program must identify the means 

used and the individuals responsible for performing the following: 

a. Maintaining an inventory of all hazardous substances that are available 

to employees and regulatory officials at the point of use or storage. 

b. Maintaining an MSDS for each inventoried substance that is available 

to employees and regulatory officials at the point of use or storage. 

c. Legibly and prominently label all containers of hazardous substances. 

The label must identify the material link it to other required information 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-5 

resources (inventory and MSDS), identify the primary hazard(s), and state 

appropriate precautions such as “Do not use near open flame.” 

d. Providing and documenting hazard communication training for each 

employee who uses or stores inventoried substances. The training must 

cover the following issues: 

1. Terminology used in, and elements of, an MSDS. 

2. Location(s) of written program, hazardous substance inventory, and 

MSDS files. 

3. Individuals responsible for hazard communication program. 

4. The physical and health hazards of substances used and stored in 

the workplace and specific protective measures. 

5. How to use the labeling system. 

6. How to recognize tasks that may lead to hazard exposure. 

7. How to use work practice, engineering controls, and PPE to limit 

exposure. 

8. How to obtain information on the types, selection, proper use, 

location, removal, handling, decontamination, and disposal of PPEs. 

9. Who to contact (and what to do) in an emergency. 

e. Responding to hazardous substance spills/emergencies. 

f. Annually assessing and reporting the status of implementation of the 

program elements. 

7.8 Requirements for Respiratory Protection 

Reclamation requires using respiratory protective equipment when inhalation 

hazards are anticipated to meet or exceed 50 percent of the PEL, TLV, or other 

accepted exposure limit. Reclamation requires written programs for respirator 

use. 

7.8.1 General Requirements for Respiratory Protection. If the worksite 

has respiratory hazards, measure the atmospheric contaminants and require 

employees to use protective equipment properly. 

a. Job Hazard Analysis. Provide a written job hazard analysis (JHA) for 

every operation during which a respirator of any type is used. The JHA 

must assess the perceived respiratory hazard. Measuring or estimating 

airborne contaminant concentrations with confidence allows for the 

determination of whether respirators are required and what respirator type 

will provide adequate protection. These determinations are generally 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-6 October 2009 

based on the relationship of the airborne contaminant concentration to an 

established exposure limit such as a permissible exposure limit (PEL) 

established by OSHA. 

b. Failure to Measure Airborne Contaminants. If you do not measure 

air contaminant concentrations or estimate based on supporting studies, 

you must consider the atmosphere to be “immediately dangerous to life or 

health” (IDLH). This assumption forces the use of the most stringent 

respiratory protection program requirements. The absence of a JHA that 

appropriately characterizes the workplace atmosphere requires the use of 

more restrictive, burdensome, and costly equipment, as well as additional 

personnel, to enter the contaminated atmosphere. (See the subsection on 

IDLH entry.) 

c. Written Program Requirement. Respiratory protective equipment 

will not be used by any person until a written program meeting the 

minimum requirements of these standards is established and all of the 

requirements of the program have been met. Base program requirements 

on the type of respirator used and whether respirator use is exclusively 

voluntary at a site. 

d. Delegation of Responsibility and Authority. Identify a program 

coordinator responsible for implementing the respiratory protection 

program for all sites where respiratory protection is used. Delegate this 

coordinator sufficient authority to implement the program. Select a 

coordinator who is qualified by appropriate training or by experience 

commensurate with the complexity of the program and the respirator use 

requirements. 

e. Mandatory Records. Maintain the following documents in a manner 

that allows for efficient program administration and evaluation: 

• Pertinent job hazard analysis 

• Written voluntary use requests 

• Respirator selection criteria 

• Medical evaluations 

• Fit testing documentation 

• Training records 

• Program evaluation records 

Keep the following available onsite: 

• Respirator selection criteria 

• Record of completion for medical qualification of all respirator 

users 

• Record of completion for fit testing of all respirator users 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-7 

• Record of completion for required respiratory protection training 

of all respirator users 

• Workplace airborne contaminant monitoring records 

Maintain the following records in the employee medical folder: 

• Results of personal physicals 

• Personal exposure monitoring results 

• Personal medical surveillance records 

7.8.2 Requirements for the Written Program. If you require personnel to 

use respiratory protection of any kind, provide a written program (except for 

the voluntary use of a filtering facepiece type). 

a. Program Elements for Sites Where Respirator Use is Required. 

Write your own site-specific program if respirators are required at your 

site. The written program will contain or reference all the applicable 

JHA(s) that indicate respirator use. The JHA will include exposure 

monitoring data and clarify the scope of the hazard and the need for 

respiratory protection. Include these elements in your site program: 

• Respirator selection 

• Respirator-user medical 

qualification 

• Fit testing 

• Program evaluation 

• User training 

• Respirator 

maintenance 

• Recordkeeping 

1. Selecting respirators. Use only respirators certified by the 

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). 

(a) Selection criteria. Base your selection of respirators for 

required use on known or anticipated atmospheric conditions, 

contaminant warning properties, worksite physical limitations, 

established respirator protection factors and user factors affecting 

respirator performance. 

(b) Protection against gases and vapors. Select an air-supplying 

respirator unless the respirator (air-purifying) is equipped with an 

end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) or a change schedule for the 

cartridges or canisters is included in the program, which is based 

upon objective information, data, or experience. 

(c) Protection against particulates. Select an air supplying 

respirator unless the respirator (air-purifying) has a filter with one 

of the following qualifications: 

• Certified by NIOSH as a high efficiency particulate air 

(HEPA) filter according to 30 CFR part 11 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-8 October 2009 

• Certified as a particulate filter according to 42 CFR part 84 

• The primary particulate contaminants have a mass median 

aerodynamic diameter (MMAD) greater than 2 

micrometers( ), in which case, a respirator (air-purifying) 

may be equipped with any particulate filter certified by 

NIOSH. 

2. Providing medical determinations. Allow respirator use only 

when there is no negative impact on the health of the employee using 

the respirator. Provide medical evaluations for employees before they 

are allowed to use respirators to determine their ability to wear a 

respirator without suffering adverse effects. 

(a) Medical evaluator. The evaluator must be a physician or 

licensed health care provider with the appropriate knowledge to 

make a judgement. Before the medical evaluation, employees 

must complete the OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation 

Questionnaire, 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix C for the medical 

evaluator. 

(b) Employee information. Before any evaluation, provide the 

medical evaluator the following information about the conditions 

of respirator use: 

• Type and weight of respirators to be used 

• Duration and frequency of use 

• Expected physical effort during use 

• Expected use of additional personal protective equipment 

• Expected temperature and humidity to be encountered 

• Anticipated workplace hazards and potential exposures 

(c) Medical evaluator information. The medical evaluator must 

furnish to the employer information that: 

• States the employee’s ability to wear the identified 

respirator types under the specified conditions without 

adverse effect 

• Specifies limitations on respirator use or provides another 

type respirator which would mitigate existing medical 

condition 

• Identifies any need and time limit for a followup 

examination 

• States that the employee has been given a copy of the 

recommendations 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-9 

(d) Additional medical evaluations. Provide subsequent medical 

evaluations or consultations not specified by the medical examiner 

when: 

• An employee using a respirator requires an explanation or 

consultation regarding the evaluation results 

• An employee using a respirator reports medical signs or 

symptoms related to his ability to use a respirator 

• A supervisor or program coordinator determines a need for 

reevaluation 

• Workplace conditions or expectations change and 

substantially increase the employee’s physiological burden 

3. Fit testing. Before using a respirator, provide a complete test for 

each individual that verifies a satisfactory fit of the selected tightfitting facepiece. This test will include each of the following: 

(a) Facepiece selection. Provide a suitable number of facepiece 

choices that allow a proper fit and acceptable comfort for the user. 

(b) Test protocol. Use the OSHA protocol, which may be found 

in 29 CFR 1910.134. 

(c) Test type. Require quantitative tests except where the 

negative pressure air-purifying respirator must achieve a fit factor 

of 100 or less, or where the tight fitting facepiece is used with an 

atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying system and is 

tested in the negative mode. 

(d) Retesting. Provide subsequent testing annually or when: 

• The use of a different facepiece configuration (size, style, 

model, or make) is required 

• The employee requests testing 

• A change in the user’s physical condition could affect 

facepiece fit 

• Specific OSHA standards require more frequent testing 

4. Providing respirator training. Before respirator use, provide 

training that enables the user to demonstrate the following respirator 

knowledge: 

• Understanding of the nature and degree of the respiratory 

hazard 

• How to select a respirator based on the hazard and the 

respirator’s capabilities and limitations 

• How to don the respirator and use the seal check procedures 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-10 October 2009 

• How to use the respirator 

• Limitations of the respirator 

• How to care for, maintain, clean, and store the respirator 

5. Providing retraining. Retrain respirator users in respiratory 

protection practices annually or in response to: 

• Changes in the workplace or type of respirator used 

• A supervisor’s or program coordinator’s determination of an 

individual’s need of retraining 

6. Providing respirator maintenance, cleaning, and inspection. 

You will: 

• Maintain respirators with all labeling and markings intact and 

in a sanitary condition. 

• Clean respirators frequently and in a manner that prevents the 

spread of any harmful agent to users. 

• Use either procedures recommended by the respirator 

manufacturer or specified in 29 CFR 1910.134. 

• Provide storage that protects against respirator damage or 

contamination. 

• Inspect all respirators for damage during cleaning and before 

each use. 

• Inspect emergency respirators in accordance with 

manufacturer’s recommendations at least monthly and before 

providing an escape-only respirator to an employee for his or 

her specific use. Document all emergency respirator 

inspections. Include identification of the respirator, the date of 

inspection, the name of the inspector, deficiencies found, and 

corrective actions taken in the documentation. Take cylinders 

of emergency respirators out of service when the pressure falls 

below 90 percent of manufacturer’s recommended pressure 

level. 

• Remove defective respirators from service until repairs are 

completed in a manner that maintains the integrity of the 

NIOSH certification. 

7. Entry into IDLH atmospheres. In addition to complying with the 

other parts of this section, implement the following requirements for 

any entry into an area classified as immediately dangerous to life or 

health (IDLH). 

(a) The atmosphere will be considered IDLH when any of the 

following apply: 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-11 

• A JHA has not been completed 

• The contaminant concentration has not been measured or 

estimated with confidence 

• The atmospheric contaminant exceeds an established IDLH 

concentration 

• The atmosphere contains less than 16 percent O2

• The atmosphere contains more than 16 percent but less than 

19.5 percent O2 (oxygen-deficient atmosphere), and it can 

not be demonstrated that the atmosphere can be maintained 

within the parameters set forth in CFR 1910.134, table II, 

under all foreseeable conditions. 

(b) All entries into IDLH atmospheres require that: 

• One employee or, when needed, more than one employee 

be located outside the IDLH atmosphere 

• Visual, voice, or signal line communication be maintained 

between the employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere and the 

employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere 

• The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere be 

trained and equipped to provide or activate effective 

emergency rescue 

• The employer or designee be notified before the 

employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere enter the 

IDLH atmosphere to activate or provide emergency rescue 

• The employer or designee authorized to do so by the 

employer, once notified, provide necessary assistance 

appropriate to the situation 

• The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmospheres be 

equipped with: 

o Pressure demand or other positive pressure SCBAs or a 

pressure demand or other positive pressure supplied-air 

respirator with auxiliary SCBA, and either 

o Appropriate retrieval equipment for removing the 

employee(s) who enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres 

where retrieval equipment would contribute to the 

rescue of the employee(s) and would not increase the 

overall risk resulting from entry, or 

o Equivalent means for rescue where retrieval equipment 

is not required under the previous paragraph. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-12 October 2009 

8. Supplied air respirators 

(a) Compressed breathing air odor and oxygen content. 

Compressed breathing air must have no noticeable odor and an 

oxygen content in the range of 19.5 to 23.5 percent. The supplied 

air must have no more than 5 milligrams per cubic meter 

condensed hydrocarbon, 10 parts per million (ppm) carbon 

monoxide (CO), or 1,000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2). 

(b) Purchasing cylinders of breathing air. Purchased cylinders 

containing breathing air must have an analytical certificate 

verifying the quality of the breathing air (must meet Type 1, 

Grade D breathing air specifications) and verifying that the 

moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of -

50 degrees F at 1 atmosphere pressure. Ensure that all cylinders 

used to supply breathing air are hydrostatically tested and 

maintained according to 49 CFR Part 173 and Part 178 and marked 

in accordance with 42 CFR Part 84. 

(c) Compressor use and maintenance. Use and maintain 

compressors (see figures 7-1 and 7-2) that are used to supply 

breathing air in a manner to: 

(1) Control moisture content so that a dew point at 1 

atmosphere pressure is 10 degrees F below the ambient 

temperature 

(2) Replace or maintain sorbent beds and filters according to 

manufacturer’s recommendation, and tag the compressor with 

the most recent change date, printed name, and signature of the 

employee performing the test. 

(3) Equip oil-lubricated compressors with a carbon monoxide 

and/or a high temperature alarm that is audible or otherwise 

detectable to the employee wearing the respirator. 

• Set carbon monoxide alarms to activate at or below 

10 ppm 

• Set high temperature alarms to activate according to the 

manufacturer’s specification, and, if used exclusively as 

the compressor monitor, conduct periodic monitoring to 

prevent carbon monoxide in the breathing air from 

exceeding 10 ppm 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-13 Figure 7-1.—Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-II. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-14 October 2009 Figure 7-2.—Respirator and respirable air system selection guide C-III. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-15 

(4) Prevent the use of couplings that allow attachment to nonrespirable worksite air or other gas systems. 

(5) Locate the air intake of the compressor in respirable quality 

air. 

(6) Ensure that compressors, hoses, vortex heater/coolers, 

connectors, filters, and valves are stored so as to prevent 

contamination with dust, mist, vapor, fume, toxic gases, heat, 

and intense light such as from welding operations. 

(d) Testing breathing air quality. Test the quality of breathing 

air at least every 6 months to ensure that the air meets Grade D 

quality as specified in ANSI-CGA G.7-1-1997 when non-vendor 

breathing air is produced or when breathing air is transferred from 

compressors, cascade system cylinders, storage receivers, and 

other breathing air manufacturing or storage equipment. 

9. Program Evaluation. Conduct evaluations of the implementation 

of the elements of the program. Workplace observation, document 

review, and consultation with employees will be used for this purpose. 

Conduct evaluations annually or more frequently when management 

determines it is necessary. Complete an abatement schedule when 

deficiencies are identified. 

10. Record Retention. Retain all records for time periods that meet 

specific records management requirements. The program will identify 

the locale of the following records: 

• Pertinent job hazard analyses 

• Medical evaluation 

• Training 

• Respiratory selection 

criteria 

• Fit testing 

• Program evaluations 

b. Program Elements for Sites With Exclusive Voluntary Use of 

Respirators. Write a site-specific program if there is exclusive voluntary 

use of any respirator other than a filtering facepiece at your site. The 

written program will contain or reference all the applicable JHAs that 

indicate respirator use. Your written program will contain or reference all 

the applicable JHAs, processes, and procedures that address the following 

minimum requirements: 

1. Have the employee submit a written request establishing a record 

for voluntary use of the respirator. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-16 October 2009 

2. Complete a written JHA that assesses the perceived hazard and 

indicates that respirator use is of a “voluntary” nature. The JHA 

will also assess the possibility of introduced hazards associated 

with respirator use. 

3. Provide basic training on respirators (appendix D of 29 CFR 

1910.134 may be used) and record the date and the content outline 

used to satisfy this element. 

4. The use of respirators will be allowed only if there is no negative 

impact on the health and well being of the user. Therefore, prior to use 

and periodically thereafter, provide a medical evaluation of the 

respirator user to determine the user’s ability to wear a respirator 

without being adversely affected. The evaluation must include the 

following items: 

(a) The evaluator will be a physician or licensed health care 

provider with the appropriate knowledge to render judgment. The 

evaluator will use the questionnaire in appendix C to 29 CFR 

1910.134, or an equivalent, as an element of each employee’s 

evaluation. 

(b) Before any evaluation or recommendation, provide the 

following workplace information relative to the respirator user to 

the physician or licensed health care provider: 

• Type and weight of respirator to be used 

• Duration and frequency of use 

• Expected physical effort during respirator use 

• Expected use of additional personal protective equipment 

• Expected temperature and humidity encountered 

(c) The medical evaluator will provide the following: 

• An evaluation of the individual’s ability to wear the 

identified respirator under the specified conditions without 

adverse effect. 

• Any limitations on respirator use or any other type of 

respirator that would mitigate any existing medical 

condition, when necessary 

• The need and time for follow-up examinations 

• A statement that the employee has been furnished a copy of 

the medical evaluator’s recommendations. 

5. Clean the respirator according to manufacturer’s recommendations 

or by disassembling, thoroughly washing in warm (a maximum of 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-17 

110 degrees Fahrenheit) water with a combination detergent or 

disinfectant, thoroughly rinsing, air drying, and reassembling. 

6. Inspect the respirator to ensure that all parts are working properly 

and are in good condition. 

7. Conduct evaluations of the implementation of the elements of the 

program. Use workplace observation, document review, and 

consultation with employees for this purpose. Conduct evaluations 

annually or more frequently when it is necessary. Complete an 

abatement plan when deficiencies are identified. 

8. Retain all records for time periods that meet specific records 

management requirements. The plan will identify the locale of the 

following records: 

• Pertinent job hazard analyses 

• Medical evaluation and 

physician name 

• Training 

• Respiratory selection 

criteria 

• Fit testing 

• Program evaluations 

c. Program Elements for Sites With Exclusive Voluntary Use of 

Filtering Facepiece Respirators. Exclusive voluntary use of filtering 

facepiece respirators (a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter 

as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed 

of the filtering media) necessitates the following minimum requirements: 

1. Require the employee to submit a written request establishing a 

record for voluntary use of the respirator. 

2. Complete a written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) that assesses the 

perceived hazard and indicates the determination that the respirator use 

is of a “voluntary” nature. The JHA will also assess the possibility of 

introduced hazards associated with respirator use. 

3. Provide the user with basic training on respirators (Appendix D of 

29 CFR 1910.134 may be used) and record the date and outline of the 

content used to satisfy this element. 

4. The program coordinator will retain the request, associated JHA’s, 

and training records. 

7.9 Requirements for Noise Exposure And Hearing Conservation 

7.10.1 General Requirements. Do not expose personnel to noise in excess 

of the limits indicated in table 7-1. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-18 October 2009 

Table 7-1.—Permissible noise exposures1

Duration per day 

(hours) 

Sound level, dBA, 

slow response 

8 90 

6 92 

4 95 

3 97 

2 100 

1.5 102 

1 105 

0.5 110 

0.25 115 

1

 When the daily noise exposure is composed 

of two or more periods of noise exposure of 

different levels, their combined effect should be 

considered, rather than the individual effect of 

each. If the sum of the following fractions: 

C(1)/T(1) + C(2)/T(2) + ... + C(n)/T(n) exceeds 

unity, the mixed exposure should be considered to 

exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total time 

of exposure at a specified noise level and Tn 

indicates the total time of exposure permitted at 

that level. Do not allow exposure to continuous, 

intermittent, or impact noise in excess of a peak of 

140 dB. 

a. Noise Monitoring Program. Establish a noise monitoring program, 

primarily based on dosimetry whenever information indicates that 

personal exposure is likely to exceed an 8-hour time weighted average of 

85 dBA. Integrate all continuous, intermittent, and impulsive sound levels 

from 80 decibels to 130 decibels into the noise measurement. Use 

representative personal monitoring for highly mobile workers if sound 

levels vary significantly or impulse noise is present. Calibrate 

instrumentation used in measuring the sound pressure levels in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s recommendations, allow employees to observe 

the monitoring procedures, and notify employees of the results of any 

exposure monitoring. Conduct the program in a manner that allows 

identification of individuals for inclusion in the hearing conservation 

program and enables the proper selection of hearing protective devices. 

Repeat monitoring when changes in the process, equipment, or controls 

increase noise levels. 

b. Hearing Protective Devices. When engineering and/or administrative 

controls do not reduce noise levels below 85 dBA, provide and ensure 

personal protective equipment (PPE) that it is used. The hearing 

protective device(s) provided must reduce the noise exposure to less than 

90 dBA TWA or to less than 85 dBA TWA for those enrolled in the 

hearing conservation program or who have experienced a standard 

threshold shift. In addition, hearing protective devices must be worn by 

employees until a baseline audiogram is obtained. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-19 

Employees must decide, with the help of a person who is trained in fitting 

hearing protectors, which size and type protector is most suitable for their 

working environment. The protector selected must be comfortable to wear 

and offer sufficient attenuation. The manufacturer’s NRR (noise reduction 

rating) for hearing protectors is used to calculate the attenuated level based 

on the equation: 

 Attenuated Level = measured sound level - [(NRR-7) / 2] 

When single protection does not provide the desired level of attenuation, 

use double hearing protection. For double hearing protection, add 5 dBA 

to the attenuated value. 

7.9.2 Hearing Conservation Program Requirements. When it is 

determined that noise levels exceed the 85 dBA 8-hour TWA, implement a 

written hearing conservation program. 

a. Enrollment. Enroll any employee whose noise exposure exceeds the 

action level of 85 dBA 8-hour TWA in a hearing conservation program. 

Dosimetry will be the means for substantiating exposure. Base continuing 

enrollment on dosimetry results from subsequent periodic monitoring. 

b. Audiometric Program. 

(1) Audiometric Testing. A qualified technician may give the 

audiogram, but the results must be reviewed by a qualified 

professional. A licensed or certified audiologist (specialist dealing 

with an individual having impaired hearing), an otolaryngologist 

(physician specializing in the diagnosis and treatment of disorders of 

the ear, nose, and throat), or a physician must be responsible for the 

program. The professional’s responsibilities include overseeing the 

program and the work of the technicians, reviewing problem 

audiograms, and determining whether referral is necessary. 

(2) Baseline Audiogram. The baseline audiogram is the reference 

audiogram against which future audiograms are compared. Provide 

baseline audiograms within 6 months of an employee’s first exposure 

at or above an 8-hour TWA of 85 dB. Do not expose employees to 

workplace noise for 14 hours preceding the baseline test unless 

appropriate hearing protectors are worn during this period. Instruct 

employees to avoid high, non-occupational noise levels in the 14 hours 

preceding the baseline audiometric examination. 

(3) Annual audiogram. Audiograms must be conducted yearly for 

employees enrolled in the hearing conservation program. Routinely 

compare annual audiograms to baseline audiograms to determine 

whether the audiogram is valid and to determine whether the employee 

has lost hearing ability, i.e., if a standard threshold shift (STS) has 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-20 October 2009 

occurred. STS is an average shift in either ear of 10 dB or more at 

2,000, 3,000, and 4,000 hertz. If an STS is detected, the employee 

may be retested within 30 days and the better of the two tests used. If 

an STS is identified, fit the employee or refit employees with adequate 

hearing protectors, show how to use them, and require the employees 

to wear them. Notify employees within 21 days from the time the 

determination is made that their audiometric test results showed an 

STS. A confirmed threshold shift is a reportable occupational illness 

in the OSHA 200 Log and electronic Safety Management Information 

System (SMIS). 

c. Training. Enrolled employees must receive training at least annually 

about the effects of noise; the purpose, advantages, and disadvantages of 

various types of hearing protectors; the selection, fit, and care of 

protectors; and the purpose and procedures of audiometric testing. 

d. Recordkeeping. Maintain records of audiometric test results for 

enrolled employees for the duration of employment of the affected 

employee. Audiometric test records must include the name and job 

classification of the employee, the date, the examiner’s name, the date of 

the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration, and measurements of the 

background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms. All area 

noise measurements must be retained for at least 2 years. 

7.9.3 Warnings and Labels. Post or label all areas and equipment which 

emit noise levels of 85 dBA or greater. Post areas where noise levels are of 

85 to 99 dBA and equipment that produces noise levels of 85 to 99 dBA in 

black lettering on a yellow background with wording such as: 

CAUTION 

High Intensity Noise 

Hearing Protection Required 

Post areas where noise levels are 100 dBA or greater and equipment that 

produces noise levels of 100dBA or greater in black lettering on a red and 

white background with wording such as: 

DANGER 

High Intensity Noise 

Hearing Protection Required 

7.10 Requirements for Sanitation 

7.10.1 General Requirements. Employers shall establish and maintain basic 

sanitation provisions for all employees in all places of employment. These 

provisions include, but are not limited to, a potable water, toilet, and waste 

collection and removal system. Provide washroom, showers, and separate 

eating facilities, as appropriate. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-21 

7.10.2 Potable Water. An adequate supply of potable water must be 

provided in all places of employment. Cool water must be provided during 

hot weather. Supply drinking water from sources that meets the quality 

standards prescribed in the U.S. Public Health Service Drinking Water 

Standards that are published in 42 CFR Part 72 that is approved for drinking 

purposes by the State or local authority having jurisdiction. Keep portable 

containers used to dispense drinking water tightly closed, equipped with a 

dispensing tap, labeled as “DRINKING WATER,” and in a sanitary condition. 

Water must not be dipped from any portable water container. Drinking 

directly from the container is prohibited unless a properly installed drinking 

fountain with guarded orifice is provided. Do not use containers used to 

dispense or distribute drinking water for any other purpose. Use of breakable 

cups or glasses is prohibited. Also provide fountain-type dispensers or oneuse cups at each dispenser and a waste receptacle. Conspicuously post outlets 

dispensing nonpotable water: 

CAUTION 

WATER UNSAFE FOR DRINKING, 

WASHING OR COOKING 

7.10.3 Toilet Facilities. 

a. Portable Toilet Facilities. When sewage disposal systems are not 

available, provide one or more of the following type toilet facilities unless 

they are prohibited by local codes: 

1. Chemical toilets 

2. Recirculating toilets 

3. Combustion toilets 

4. Other toilet systems as approved by State/local governments 

b. Design of Portable Toilets. Equip each toilet facility with a toilet seat 

and toilet seat cover. Design toilets to provide privacy and protection 

from weather and falling objects. Cracks must be sealed and the door 

tight-fitting, self-closing, and must be capable of being latched from the 

inside. Toilets must have adequate ventilation and light, and all windows 

and vents must be screened. 

c. Chemical Toilets. Provide for routine servicing and disposing of the 

sewage in accordance with Federal, State, and local health regulations. 

d. Toilets at Temporary Jobsites. Toilets will be provided at each 

temporary jobsite in accordance with table 7-2. 

Toilets must be within easy access to the worksite unless they are for a 

mobile crew and transportation is readily available. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-22 October 2009 

Table 7-2.—Toilets at temporary jobsites 

Number of 

employees 

Minimum number of units 

(per gender)1

1 to 20 1 toilet 

21 to 199 1 additional toilet and urinal for each 

additional 40 employees 

200 or more 1 additional toilet and urinal for each 

additional 50 employees 1

 Where toilet rooms may be occupied by no more than one person at a 

time, provide the doors with locks so that they can be locked from the inside, 

and provide the toiletrooms with at least one toilet seat. Separate toilet 

rooms for each gender are not needed. 

e. Permanent facilities. Toilets at permanent facilities will be provided 

in accordance with table 7-3. The number of units to be provided for each 

gender must be based on the number of employees of that gender for 

whom the facilities are furnished. 

Table 7-3.—Toilets at permanent facilities 

Number of 

employees 

Minimum water closets 

(per gender)1

1 to 15 1 

16 to 35 2 

36 to 55 3 

56 to 80 4 

 81 to 110 5 

111 to 150 6 

over 150 one for each additional 40 persons

1

 Where toilet rooms may be occupied by no more than one person at a 

time, provide the doors with locks so that they can be locked from the inside, 

and provide the toiletrooms with at least one toilet seat. Separate toilet rooms 

for each gender are not needed. 

f. Sanitation. Provide frequent inspections and maintenance at all toilet 

facilities to keep them clean and sanitary. Maintain an adequate supply of 

toilet paper with holder for each seat. 

7.10.4 Washing Facilities. Provide adequate washing facilities for all 

employees to maintain healthful and sanitary conditions. Such facilities must 

be near the worksite and furnished with cleaning materials that will remove 

the specific type of contaminant. Maintain each washing facility with water 

(either hot and cold running water or tepid running water), soap, and 

individual means of drying. 

7.10.5 Food Consumption. Designate a clean area for consuming food and 

drink at each work location. Also, establish the following minimum 

conditions: 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-23 

• Do not consume or store food or beverage in a toilet room or in any 

area exposed to biological or chemical hazard 

• Provide an adequate number of waste receptacles in the food 

consumption area. Construct receptacles of corrosion resistant or 

disposable material provided with solid, tight-fitting covers. Empty 

receptacles at least daily and maintain them in a sanitary condition. 

7.10.6 Sleeping Facilities. Sleeping quarters will comply with all applicable 

Federal, State, and local sanitation and fire protection codes. Sleeping 

quarters constructed on the jobsite must comply with the NFPA 101, Life 

Safety Code. 

7.10.7 Waste Disposal. Keep decomposing or foul-smelling waste in 

substantial, closed insect- and rodent-tight containers that are constructed to 

prevent leakage and to allow thorough cleaning and sanitary maintenance. 

Remove solid and liquid in a way that does not create a menace to health. 

Remove waste as often as necessary to maintain a sanitary environment. 

Dispose of garbage and similar refuse in designated areas. 

7.10.8 Vermin Control. Construct and maintain enclosed workplaces to 

prevent, to the extent practicable, the entrance and harborage of rodents, 

insects, and other vermin. If the presence of such vermin is detected, 

implement a control program. 

7.11 Exposure to Hazardous Chemicals in Laboratories 

7.11.1 Hazardous Chemicals. Laboratories where employees may be 

exposed to hazardous chemicals must develop and implement a written 

chemical hygiene plan and designate a chemical hygiene officer to ensure 

compliance with OSHA standard 1910.1450. This standard generally applies 

to all chemical laboratory activities and specifies that employee exposures to 

hazardous chemicals be at or below the PELs and TLVs. 

7.11.2 Employee Exposure Determination. Measure the employee’s 

exposure to any regulated substance if there is reason to believe that exposure 

levels for that substance routinely exceed the action level. Events or 

circumstances that might reasonably constitute overexposure include (1) an 

uncontrolled hazardous chemical leak or spill, (2) direct skin or eye contact 

with a hazardous chemical, (3) physical symptoms that disappear when the 

person is removed from the area but reappear soon after the person returns to 

work with the same hazardous chemical, and (4) two or more people in the 

same laboratory have similar complaints. Employees must be notified within 

15 working days after receipt of the monitoring results. 

7.11.3 Chemical Hygiene Plan. Where hazardous chemicals are used in a 

laboratory, develop and implement a written Chemical Hygiene Plan. The 

Chemical Hygiene Plan must include a chemical inventory, the necessary 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-24 October 2009 

work practices, procedures, and policies to ensure that employees are 

protected from all potentially hazardous chemicals in use in their work area. 

Keep the plan readily available. 

7.11.4 Employee Training and Information. Provide employees with 

information and training to ensure that they are aware of the hazards of 

chemicals in their work areas before their initial assignments and as any new 

substances are introduced. 

a. Inform employees of (1) the contents of the OSHA Laboratory 

Standard (29 CFR 1910.1450), (2) location of the Chemical Hygiene Plan, 

(3) PELs and TLVs for the chemicals used, (4) the signs and symptoms 

associated with exposures to these chemicals, (5) the location of known 

reference material on the hazards, safe handling, storage, and instructions 

for disposing of hazardous chemicals, including the MSDS, and (6) spill 

cleanup procedures. 

b. Educate employees about: (1) methods and observations that may be 

used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical, 

(2) physical and health hazards of chemicals in the work area, and (3) the 

measures the employees can take to protect themselves from these 

hazards. Include appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, 

personal protective equipment to be used in these specific procedures, and 

the applicable details of the Chemical Hygiene Plan. 

7.11.5 Hazard Identification. Do not remove or deface labels on incoming 

containers of hazardous chemicals. Retain MSDSs on incoming hazardous 

chemicals and make them available to laboratory employees. Label all 

solutions prepared in-house with the name of the chemical, the date of 

preparation, hazardous properties, emergency procedures, and the preparer’s 

name. 

7.11.6 Medical Consultation and Examinations. Give laboratory 

employees who have experienced events or circumstances that might 

reasonably constitute overexposure the opportunity for medical consultation. 

For these employees and those included in a medical surveillance program, 

provide the physician with (1) the identity of the hazardous chemical(s) to 

which the employee may have been exposed, (2) a description of the 

conditions of exposure and any quantitative exposure data available, and (3) a 

description of any signs and symptoms of exposure that the employee is 

experiencing. 

The examining physician will provide, in writing, (1) recommendations for 

follow-up, if warranted; (2) a record of the results of the consultation and, if 

applicable, the examination and any tests that were conducted; (3) conclusions 

concerning any other medical condition noted that could put the employee at 

risk; and (4) a statement that the employee has been informed both of the 

results of the consultation or examination and of any medical condition that 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-25 

may require further examination or treatment. These written statements and 

records must only address the occupational exposure. 

7.11.7 Records and Recordkeeping. All memos, notes, and reports related 

to a complaint of actual or possible exposure to hazardous chemicals must be 

maintained as part of the record. Retain monitoring data and medical records. 

7.11.8 Laboratory Equipment. Provide an emergency eyewash fountain or 

safety shower and ensure that it is immediately available where corrosive 

materials are used. Conduct work that involves hazardous and noxious 

materials that are toxic, odoriferous, volatile, or harmful within a laboratory 

hood. If there is a need to refrigerate a substance that is flammable, 

refrigerate it in an explosion-proof refrigerator that is either U.L. listed or 

approved by an accredited laboratory. 

7.12 Bloodborne Pathogens 

Blood pathogens are pathogenic microorganisms that are present in human blood 

and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but are not limited to, 

hepatitis B virus (HBV) and human immuno-deficiency virus (HIV) and are 

regulated by 29 CFR 1910.1030 for workplace exposures. 

7.12.1 Exposure Determination. Identify employees whose job duties place 

them at risk of exposure to bloodborne pathogens and develop and implement 

an exposure control program. Make this exposure determination without 

regard to personal protective clothing or equipment. 

7.12.2 Exposure Control Plan. Develop and implement a written exposure 

control plan where employees are determined to have an occupational 

exposure. The exposure control plan must include (1) the exposure 

determination based on the tasks, procedures, and job classifications; (2) the 

schedule and methods of compliance; and (3) procedures for evaluating 

circumstances surrounding exposure incidents. Review and update the plan at 

least annually. 

7.12.3 Universal Precautions. Universal precautions must be observed 

when any contact with blood or potentially infectious materials is possible. 

These precautions are applicable to all employees. Treat all body fluids and 

materials as if they are infectious. Use the following methods to eliminate or 

reduce risk for transmission of bloodborne pathogens: 

• Wash hands frequently and use disposable garments 

• Select gloves for the hazards of a specific job 

• Avoid spray or splash of bloodily fluids 

• Label and package contaminated wastes properly 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-26 October 2009 

After administering emergency care, wash hands and other skin surfaces 

immediately and thoroughly with warm water and soap. Wash hands 

immediately after removing protective gloves, even if the gloves appear to be 

intact. 

7.12.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Provide PPE to employees 

and ensure that they are used properly to eliminate or minimize the risk of 

infectious material entering the employees’ bodies. It is appropriate only if it 

prohibits potentially infectious materials from reaching the employees’ outer 

clothing, skin, eyes, mouth, or other mucous membranes under normal 

conditions of use. 

a. Gloves. Provide hand protection whenever contact with blood or other 

potentially infectious materials is possible. Disposable (single-use) 

gloves, if possible. 

b. Masks, Eye Protection and Face Shields. Use masks, eye protection, 

and face shields in combination whenever splashes, spray, or droplets of 

infectious materials are generated. 

c. Gowns, Aprons, and Other Protective Clothing. Wear gowns, 

aprons, and other protective clothing when splashing of body fluid on 

skin or clothing is possible. 

d. Resuscitation Equipment. Provide CPR mouthpieces, pocket masks, 

resuscitation bags, or other ventilation equipment to eliminate the need for 

direct mouth to mouth contact. 

7.12.5 Cleanup of Contaminated Areas. Use personal protective equipment 

when disinfecting areas. Presoak any spills of body fluid with an 

antibacterial/viral solution (one part chlorine bleach to 8 parts water). Clean 

up methods must prevent physical injury from direct handling of broken glass, 

needles, or other sharps. 

7.12.6 Handling Contaminated Materials. Waste handlers must not press 

down, smash, step on, or otherwise compress any biohazard waste containers. 

7.12.7 Hepatitis B Vaccination. Within 10 working days of assignment, the 

Hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination series will be 

made available to all employees who have 

occupational exposure. Make available postexposure evaluation and follow-up to all 

employees who have an exposure incident. 

Prompt reporting of incidents is necessary for 

exposed employees to be offered the vaccination 

series in a timely manner. 

7.12.8 Container Labeling. Use an approved 

biohazard container for blood, other potentially 

infectious material, or regulated waste a fluorescent 

Figure 7-3.—Biohazard 

symbol.
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-27 

orange or orange-red background label with lettering and biohazard symbol in 

a contrasting color (see figure 7-3). Infectious waste must be disposed of by 

an approved contractor in accordance with Federal, State, and local 

regulations. 

7.12.9 Training 

a. General Training. All employees must receive basic information 

about bloodborne pathogens and ways to reduce risks of exposure. The 

training must include those tasks identified with increased risk, the 

universal precautions about self-protection in the event of an incident, and 

determining where to find more information in the local exposure control 

plan. 

b. Employees With Increased Risk of Exposure. Employees with 

occupational exposure must have initial and annual training on the 29 CFR 

1910.1030 bloodborne pathogen standard, bloodborne diseases and their 

transmissions (a general discussion), exposure control plan, engineering 

and work practice controls, personal protective equipment, hepatitis B 

vaccine, response to emergencies involving blood, how to handle exposure 

incidents, proper handling and disposal methods of infectious waste, the 

post-exposure evaluation and follow-up program, and the signing and 

labeling program. There must be an opportunity for questions and 

answers about the bloodborne pathogen program. 

7.12.10 Recordkeeping 

a. Medical Records. Medical records for each employee with 

occupational exposure must be kept for the duration of employment plus 

30 years. Keep medical records confidential and include the name and 

social security number, hepatitis B vaccination status (including dates), 

results of any examinations, a copy of the health care professional’s 

written opinion, and a copy of information provided to the health care 

professional. Make medical records available to the subject employee or 

anyone with written consent of the employee, but not to the employer. 

b. Training Records. Training records must include dates, contents of 

the training program or a summary, trainer’s name and qualifications, and 

the names and job titles of all people attending. 

c. Sharps Record Log. A sharps injury log must be maintained at 

healthcare facilities for recording injuries resulting from contaminated 

sharps penetrating the skin. The information in the sharps injury log must 

be recorded and maintained in such manner as to protect the 

confidentiality of the injured employee. The log must contain the type and 

brand of device involved in the incident, the department or work area 

where the exposure incident occurred, and an explanation of how the 

incident occurred. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-28 October 2009 

d. SMIS (Safety Management Information System) Incident Report. 

Report bloodborne pathogen exposures as personal injuries in the 

automated SMIS. Information must include the method of injury, the 

work area and activity when incident occurred, and what post-exposure 

action followed. 

7.13 Heat Stress 

The combination of three risk factors (climatic conditions of the environment, 

work demands, and clothing) causes heat stress is evidenced by an increase in 

heat stress body temperature, heart rate, and sweating. 

7.13.1 Assessment. Conduct an assessment of the working conditions, if the 

environment is subjectively judged as being hot or the physiological markers 

of increased body temperature, increased heart rate, or excessive water loss 

are noted. Use a qualified individual who follows the guidelines stated in the 

latest ACGIH Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical 

Agents and Biological Exposure Indices to conduct the assessment. 

7.13.2 Training. Conduct training for employees and supervisors working 

on heat-related jobs. Training will include a description of heat stress; a 

recognition of the physiological symptoms of dehydration, heat exhaustion, 

fainting, heat cramps, and heat stroke; first-aid measures; personal hygiene 

practices such as the need to replace fluids and the importance of diet, lifestyle, general health and acclimation; and the specific engineering and 

administrative control measures used to manage the hot work environment. 

7.13.3 Controls. If the assessment concludes that employees may be at risk 

of heat stress, implement one or more of the various control measures listed in 

table 7-4 lists. 

Table 7-4.—Heat stress control measures 

Fluid replacement Medical surveillance Reduce radiant heat 

Self-determination Reduce physical work 

demands 

Pacing work 

Diet Reduce air temperature Sharing work 

Life style Reduce air humidity Scheduling of work 

Acclimation Change clothing Circulating air systems 

Circulating water systems Reflective clothing Ice garments 

7.14 Cold Stress 

Exposure to cold temperatures increases the likelihood and potential for worker 

disorders or conditions that could result in injury or illness. Cold stress is 

evidenced by the body trying to conserve body heat by reducing blood circulation 

through the skin and by shivering to increase the rate of metabolism. Extreme 

low temperatures or strong wind accompanied by cold temperatures can lead to 

hypothermia or localized tissue damage. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-29 

7.14.1 Recognition of Cold Stress. Subjective responses of workers provide 

a good tool for the recognition of cold stress. Behaviors such as seeking 

warm locations, adding layers of clothing, or increasing work rate are 

common indicators. Other behaviors are loss of manual dexterity, shivering, 

accidents, and unsafe behaviors. 

7.14.2 Evaluation of Cold Stress. When temperatures fall below 39 °F, 

begin workplace monitoring. Below 30 °F, the dry bulb temperature and air 

speed must be measured and recorded at least every 4 hours. When air speed 

is greater than 5 miles per hour (mph), determine the equivalent chill 

temperature from table 7-5. Do not expose employees to equivalent wind 

chill temperatures (ECT) below -25 °F dry bulb. 

Table 7-5.—Equivalent Chill Temperature (ECT) in degrees Fahrenheit for different 

combinations of temperature and air speed (also called Windchill Index) 

 Actual temperature reading ( °F) 

Estimated wind speed 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 

(in mph) Equivalent Chill Temperature ( °F) 

calm 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 

5 48 37 27 16 6 -5 -15 -26 -36 -47 

10 40 28 16 4 -9 -24 -33 -46 -58 -70 

15 36 22 9 -5 -18 -32 -45 -58 -72 -85 

20 32 18 4 -10 -25 -39 -53 -67 -82 -96 

25 30 16 0 -15 -29 -44 -59 -74 -88 -104 

30 28 13 -2 -18 -33 -48 -63 -79 -94 -109 

35 27 11 -4 -20 -35 -51 -67 -82 -98 -113 

40 26 10 -6 -21 -37 -53 -69 -85 -100 -116 

Winds greater than 40 mph 

have little additional effect. 

Little Danger in < hr with 

dry skin. Maximum 

danger of false sense of 

security. 

Increasing Danger. 

Danger from 

freezing exposed 

flesh within one 

minute. 

Great Danger. 

Flesh may freeze within 

30 seconds. 

7.14.3 Control of Cold Stress. General controls of cold stress include 

training, hygiene practices, and medical surveillance. When the temperature 

falls below 39 °F in the work environment, workers must be informed that 

cold stress is a hazard and what clothing is proper, what they should do to 

practice cold stress hygiene (such as replacing fluid with warm drinks, and 

proper diet), and how to self- monitor for discomfort or symptoms of 

hypothermia. When work is performed at or below 10 °F ECT, include safe 

work practices, recognition and treatment of hypothermia, and other coldrelated disorders in the training. Initiate medical surveillance on those who 

are routinely exposed below -11 °F ECT, and those workers who cannot 

properly thermoregulate. Other methods of controlling cold exposures 

include: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-30 October 2009 

a. Engineering controls to reduce loss of body heat such as general or 

spot heating, hand warming, minimizing air movement, reducing heat 

transfer, providing warming shelters where ECT is 20 °F or less, or using 

thermal insulating material on equipment handles when temperature drops 

below 30 °F. 

b. Administrative controls to reduce exposure time, such as establishing 

work-rest cycles; moving work to warmer areas; allowing individual 

control over work, such as self-pacing and extra breaks if requested; 

providing for mutual observation (buddy system); and adjusting for 

productivity reductions when wearing extra clothing. 

c. Protective clothing with proper insulating values, wind barriers, water 

barriers, and eye protection for snow or ice covered terrain. 

7.15 Ionizing Radiation 

• Anyone who procures, uses, possesses, transports, transfers, or disposes of 

regulated radioactive materials or radiation generating devices must: 

• Notify, in writing, the Designated Authority of the nature of the material 

or device and provide a description of the intended use, the location of use 

and storage, and all transportation and disposal requirements. 

• Secure appropriate authorization or a permit if a licensed or regulated 

radiological device or radioactive material is to be used on Reclamation 

property. 

7.15.1 Qualified Personnel 

a. Operations involving ionizing radiation hazards or use of radioactive 

material or radiation generating devices must be performed under the 

direct supervision of a person, designated in writing by the Radiation 

Safety Officer (RSO), who is qualified and responsible for radiological 

safety. This person will conduct surveys and evaluate and secure any 

specialized assistance needed to ensure compliance with radiation 

protection standards. 

b. The RSO must be technically qualified and meet the experience, 

training, and education requirements listed below: 

(1) Formally trained in radiation protection including the following 

topics: physics of radiation; radiation’s interaction with matter; 

mathematics necessary for the subject matter; biological effects of 

radiation; type and use of instruments for detection, monitoring, and 

surveying radiation; radiation safety techniques and procedures; and 

use of time, distance, shielding, engineering controls, and PPE to 

reduce radiation exposure. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-31 

(2) Hands-on training regarding all the equipment, instrumentation, 

procedures, and theory used. 

(3) Knowledge of regulations (NRC, EPA, Department of Energy 

(DOE), DOT, and DOI) pertaining to radioactive materials, radiation 

generating devices, and radioactive and mixed waste. 

(4) Knowledge of the standards and recordkeeping requirements for 

work with radioactive materials and radiation generating devices. 

7.15.2 Radiation Safety Program 

a. Operations involving regulated radiation hazards and users of 

radioactive material or radiation generating devices must develop and 

implement a Radiation Safety Program. The RSO must manage the 

program and base it on sound radiation safety principles that keep 

occupational doses and doses to the public ALARA (as low as reasonably 

acceptable). Review the program at least annually. 

b. Instruct all personnel entering an area where radioactive material or 

radiation generating devices are used and where there is a potential for an 

individual to receive a Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) of 

100 mrem or more in one year in: 

• The presence of the material or device 

• Health and safety problems associated with exposure to radiation, 

including the potential effects of radiation on a pregnant female, 

the fetus or embryo 

• Precautions and controls used to control exposure 

• Proper use of instrumentation and dosimetry in the area 

• The Radiation Safety Program 

• Their rights and responsibilities 

7.15.3 Dose Limits 

Occupational dose limits are based on the TEDE. See table 7-6. 

No employee under 18 years of age will perform work with or around ionizing 

radiation. 

The dose to an embryo/fetus must not exceed the monthly equivalent dose of 

0.05 rem during the entire gestation period. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-32 October 2009 

Table 7-6.—Exposure to ionizing radiation 

Body part 

Annual limits 

(NRC)1

 Suggested ALARA limits2

Whole body 5 rem (50 mSv 

{millisievert})3 0.1 rem (1 mSv) 

Lens of eye 15 rem (150 mSv) 0.15 rem (1.5 mSv) 

Skin 50 rem (500 mSv) 0.5 rem (5 mSv) 

Hands/feet 50 rem (500 mSv) 0.5 rem (5 mSv) 1

 An annual limit which is the more limiting of: 5 rems TEDE, 15 rems to the lens of the 

eye, or 50 rems shallow dose equivalent to the skin or any extremity. 2

 To keep doses ALARA, the user will set administrative action levels below the annual 

dose limits. These action levels must be realistic and attainable. Suggested action levels 

are the more limiting of: 0.1 rems TEDE, 0.15 rems to the lens of the eye, or 0.5 rems 

shallow dose equivalent to the skin or any extremity. 3

 10 mSv = 1 rem. 

7.15.4 Radiation Monitoring, Surveys and Dosimetry 

a. Users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must 

conduct surveys and monitoring to ensure occupational dose limits are not 

exceeded. 

b. Swipte-test each sealed source, other than those exempt by size or 

specific regulation, for leakage at not greater than 6-month intervals and 

maintain records for each test. If the sample indicated a contamination 

activity greater than 0.005 microcuries (μCi), withdraw the source from 

use and notify the RSO immediately. 

c. Use instruments for radiation monitoring and surveying that are 

appropriate for the type and intensity of radiation surveyed, calibrated to a 

traceable source, and operationally checked before each use. 

d. Users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices and 

visitors or personnel performing work tasks in the area must coordinate 

with the RSO for appropriate dosimetry use whenever either of the 

following situations exist: 

(1) an individual enters a Radiation Area (>5 mrem in any 1 hour) 

(2) an individual has the potential to receive greater than 0.5 rem in 

1 year. 

All individuals must wear personnel monitoring equipment within the 

radiation areas as defined above. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring 

compliance. 

e. Process all external dosimetry at a National Voluntary Laboratory 

Accreditation Program (NVLAP) certified laboratory. 

f. Users of unsealed radioactive material sources or personnel working on 

a radioactive hazardous waste site must institute an internal dosimetry 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-33 

program approved by the RSO when there is a potential for a worker to 

receive an internal dose of greater than 0.5 rem per year. 

7.15.5 Access, Storage, and Control 

a. Design, construct, install, use, store, transport, and dispose of all 

radiological devices and radioactive materials in such a manner as to 

ensure personnel exposures are kept ALARA. 

b. Users of radioactive materials or radiation generating devices must post 

signs and control access to radiation areas. 

c. Users must use engineering controls, shielding, access time limitation, 

and/or physical separation to keep doses to the public ALARA where 

radiation levels exceed 2 mrem (20 Sv) in any one hour. 

d. Users must secure radioactive material and radiation generating devices 

against theft or unauthorized use. 

e. Storage must be in accordance with any license or permit requirements. 

f. Conduct surveys to ensure that the public dose limit of 0.01 rem 

(0.0001 Sv) is not exceeded for operations involving regulated radiation 

hazards or users of regulated radioactive material or radiation generating 

devices. 

7.15.6 Respiratory Protection and Other Controls 

a. Users of radioactive material must, to the extent practicable, institute 

process or engineering controls to limit concentrations of radioactive 

materials in air. 

b. Users must increase monitoring and limit intakes of radioactive 

materials through control of access, limitation of exposure times, use of 

respiratory protection equipment, or other controls where process or 

engineering controls are unable to control airborne radioactive material 

concentrations. 

c. Users of respiratory protection equipment must comply with this 

section of the standard. Limit the use of respiratory protection equipment 

according to the protection factors listed in appendix A of 10 CFR 20. 

7.15.7 Signs, Labels, and Posting Requirements 

a. The RSO must post, in a conspicuous location, (1) a sign or signs 

bearing the standard radiation symbol shown in figure 7-4, and (2) the 

following words: 

(1) “Caution, Radiation Area” - areas where the radiation field is equal 

to or greater than 5 mrem (0.05 mSv) in any one hour and less than 

100 mrem (1 mSv) in any 1 hour 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-34 October 2009 

 (2) “Caution, High Radiation Area” - areas 

where radiation field is equal to or greater 

than 100 mrem in any one hour (0.1 mSv) 

and less than 500 rads in any 1 hour 

(3) “Caution, Airborne Radioactivity 

Area” – areas where airborne radioactive 

material concentrations are greater than the 

derived air concentration (DAC) limits 

listed in 10 CFR 20 appendix B. 

(4) “Caution, Radioactive Material” - rooms 

where quantities of radioactive materials in 

excess of 10 times the 10 CFR 20 appendix 

C quantities are used or stored. 

b. Users who receive or expect to receive a package containing 

radioactive material must follow the package receipt procedures listed in 

10 CFR 20.1906 “Procedures for Receiving and Opening Packages.” 

c. The RSO must post an NRC Form 3 “Notice to Employees” in a 

location visible to all employees who work with or around radioactive 

materials. 

7.15.8 Spills and Contamination Control 

a. Promptly clean up all spills of radioactive material, using appropriate 

PPE. Cleaning responsibility rests with the individual(s) working in the 

area involved and responsible for the spill. Survey the area after cleaning 

to verify that the cleaning has removed the radioactive material. Notify 

the RSO of all spills or incidents involving radioactive contamination. 

b. Where hand or shoe contamination is possible, all employees working 

with radioactive materials are to: 

(1) Accomplish decontamination before eating, smoking, applying 

makeup, or leaving work. 

(2) Wash protective gloves before removing from hands unless 

radiation level requires immediate removal. 

(3) Refrain from wearing protective clothing outside the radiation area 

if there is any possibility it has been contaminated. 

7.15.9 Radioactive Waste Disposal 

a. Radioactive sealed sources (and gauges), when no longer needed, may 

be returned (transferred) to the manufacturer. Notify the local RSO and 

amend or terminate any applicable licenses or permits. 

Figure 7-4.—Radiation 

symbol. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-35 

b. Dispose of radioactive waste appropriately, in accordance with Federal, 

State, and local regulations, only after coordinating with the designated 

RSO. 

7.15.10 Records 

a. All users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must 

prepare and maintain records of the Radiation Safety Program for 3 years 

after termination of the license or permit. 

b. For any individual who frequents a restricted or controlled area and 

may potentially be exposed to 100 mrem (1 mSv) or more per year, the 

licensee must prepare and maintain records to determine that person’s: 

(1) occupational dose during the current year 

(2) dose received, both internal and external 

The licensee must also attempt to obtain records of cumulative 

occupational radiation exposure. 

c. All users of radioactive material or radiation generating devices must 

prepare and maintain records of all calculated or monitored radiation doses 

to individual members of the public to document compliance with the 

section on “Radiation Monitoring, Surveys and Dosimetry.” 

7.15.11 Reports 

a. Report immediately upon discovery, to the RSO, any spills, loss, theft, 

damage, or overexposure. The RSO will then file a report with NRC in 

accordance with the requirements of 10 CFR 20. 

b. The RSO must issue annual reports and notify each individual radiation 

worker of the recorded or calculated dose assigned to that worker for the 

year or specific work project. These reports and notices must be 

maintained in such a manner that accumulated exposure can be determined 

at a future date. 

7.15.12 Transportation. Transportation, interstate or intrastate, must 

comply with the requirements of the DOT for transportation of radioactive 

materials contained in 49 CFR. 

7.15.13 Medical Examinations 

a. Medical examinations are not routinely required before work with 

ionizing radiation. 

b. Defer all cases of overexposure and suspected ingestion or inhalation 

of radioactive materials to a physician for examination. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-36 October 2009 

7.16 Non-ionizing Radiation and Fields 

Employers will use qualified, competent persons and appropriately calibrated 

monitoring equipment to assess, survey, and evaluate non-ionizing radiation and 

field strengths, employee exposures, and control measures. 

7.16.1 Lasers. Comply with the manufacturer’s requirements and restrictions 

in accordance with current ANSI Z136.1, American National Standard for the 

Safe Use of Lasers when installing and using lasers and laser systems. 

Table 7-7 explains the laser hazard classification system and some of the 

controls necessary. 

Table 7-7.—Laser hazard classes 

Class 1 Cannot emit laser radiation at known hazard levels (typically Continuous Wave: CW 0.4 

watts at visible wavelengths). Users of a Class 1 laser product are generally exempt 

from radiation hazard controls during operation and maintenance (but not necessarily 

during service). 

Class 2 Low power visible lasers which emit above Class 1 levels, but emit a radiant power not 

above 1 mW. The concept is that the human aversion reaction to bright 

light will protect a person. Only limited controls are specified. 

Class 2A is a special designation that is based on a 1,000 second exposure and applies 

only to lasers that are “not intended for viewing,” such as a supermarket laser scanner. 

The upper power limit of Class 2A is 4.0 W. These are products whose emission does 

not exceed the Class I limit for an emission duration of 1,000 

seconds. 

Class 3 CLASS 3A: intermediate power lasers (CW: 1-5 mW). Only hazardous for intrabeam 

viewing. Some limited controls are usually recommended. 

CLASS 3B: moderate power lasers (CW: 5-500 mW, pulsed: 10 J/cm(2) - or the diffuse 

reflection limit, which ever is lower). In general, Class 3B lasers will not be a fire hazard 

and are not generally capable of producing a hazardous, diffuse reflection, unless the 

diffuser is stored at from a short distance. Specific controls are recommended. 

Class 4 High power lasers (cw: 500 mW) are hazardous to view under any condition (directly or 

diffusely scattered) and are a potential fire hazard and a skin hazard. Significant controls 

are required of Class 4 laser facilities. 

a. Assign only qualified and trained employees to install, adjust, and 

operate laser equipment. The operator shall have proof of qualification of 

the laser equipment in his or her possession during operation. 

b. Laser equipment (except Class 1) must bear a label to indicate make, 

maximum output, and beam spread. 

c. Post areas in which Class 3 and Class 4 lasers are used with standard 

laser warning signs. 

d. Provide employees whose work requires exposure to Class 3b and 

Class 4 laser beams with appropriate laser safety goggles that will protect 

for the specific wavelength of the laser and be of optical density adequate 

for the energy involved. Label protective goggles with the following 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-37 

data: the laser wavelengths for which use is intended, the optical density 

of those wavelengths, and the visible light transmission. 

e. Use beam shutters or caps on Class 3b or Class 4, and ensure the laser 

is turned off when laser transmission is not required. When the laser is left 

unattended for a period of time (e.g., during lunch hour, overnight, or at 

change of shifts), turn the laser off. 

f. Use only mechanical or electronic means as a detector for guiding the 

internal alignment of the laser (except for Class 1 and 2a). 

g. Do not direct any laser beam at employees. Whenever possible, set 

laser units that are in operation above the heads of employees. 

h. When it is raining or snowing or when there is dust or fog in the air, the 

operation of outdoor laser systems will be prohibited. During such 

weather conditions, keep employees out of range of the areas of source 

and target if system operations continue. 

i. Keep employee exposure to laser power densities within the threshold 

limit values (TLVs) as specified by the ACGIH in “Threshold Limit 

Values and Biological Exposure Indices.” 

j. Do not direct lasers used as pointing devices toward employees. 

Handle and store these lasers in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

7.16.2 Static Magnetic Fields. Routine occupational exposure must not 

exceed 60 millitesla (mT), equivalent to 600 gauss (G), whole body or 600 

mT (6000 G) to the limbs on a daily, time-weighted average basis [1 tesla (T) 

= 104 G]. Ceiling values are 2 T for the whole body and 5 T for the limbs. 

Safety hazards may exist from the mechanical forces exerted by the magnetic 

field upon ferromagnetic tools and medical implants. Cardiac pacemaker and 

similar medical electronic device wearers must not be exposed to field levels 

exceeding 0.5 mT (5G). Areas exceeding 0.5 mT that are assumed to affect 

medical devices must be labeled and access limited. 

Table 7-8.—TLVs for static magnetic fields 

Body part 8-hour TWA Ceiling 

Whole body 60 mT 2 T 

Limbs 600 mT 5 T 

Medical electronic device 

wearers 

------ 0.5 mT 

7.16.3 Sub-Radio Frequency (30 kHz and below) Magnetic Fields 

a. Occupational exposures in the extremely-low frequency (ELF) range 

from 1 Hz to 300 Hz must not exceed the ceiling value given by the 

equation: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-38 October 2009 

BTLV = 60  f 

where f is the frequency in Hz and BTLV is the magnetic flux density in 

millitesla (mT). 

b. For frequencies in the range of 300 Hz to 30 kHz (which includes the 

voice frequency band from 300 Hz to 3 kHz and the very-low-frequency 

band from 3 kHz to 30 kHz, occupational exposures must not exceed the 

ceiling value of 0.2 mT. These ceiling values for frequencies of 300 Hz to 

30 kHz are intended for both partial-body and whole-body exposures. For 

frequencies below 300 Hz, the TLV for exposure of the extremities can be 

increased by a factor of 10 for the hands and feet and by a factor of 5 for 

the arms and legs. The magnetic flux density of 60 mT/f at 60 Hz 

corresponds to a TLV of 1 mT. At 30 kHz, the TLV is 0.2 mT. Limit the 

exposure of people wearing cardiac pacemakers or similar medical 

electronic devices to no more than 0.1 mT at power frequencies. 

7.16.4 Sub-Radio Frequency (30 kHz and below) and Static Electric 

Fields. Occupational exposures must not exceed a field strength of 25 kV/m 

from 0 Hz to 100 Hz. For frequencies in the range of 100 Hz to 4 kHz, the 

ceiling value is given by: 

ETLV = 2.5 x 106  f 

where f is the frequency in Hz and ETLV is electric field strength in volts per 

meter (V/m). 

A value of 625 V/m is the ceiling value for frequencies from 4 Hz to 30 Hz. 

These ceiling values for frequencies of 0 to 30 kHz are intended for both 

partial-body and whole-body exposures. Limit the exposure of people 

wearing cardiac pacemakers or similar medical electronic devices to no more 

than 0.1 kV/m. 

7.16.5 Radio Frequency and Microwave Radiation. The maximum 

microwave power density is 10 milliwatts per square centimeter for 

frequencies between 3 and 300 Ghz. For exposure limits at other frequencies, 

refer to the latest edition of the ACGIH TLVs and BEIs. 

7.16.6 Light and Near-Infrared and Ultraviolet Radiation. Do not operate 

near-infrared, visible, or ultraviolet radiation in excess of the values and 

indices specified in the ACGIH TLVs and BEIs. Although it is believed that 

employees may be exposed repeatedly up to these TLVs without adverse 

health effects, employers take all necessary measures to maintain exposures as 

low as reasonably achievable and prevent needless exposure to higher levels 

of radiation when simple measures will prevent exposure. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-39 

7.17 Asbestos 

Airborne concentrations of asbestos must not exceed 0.1 fibers per cubic 

centimeter of air averaged over 8 hours or 1.0 fiber per cubic centimeter of air 

averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes. When there is risk of exposure to 

asbestos in the workplace, the regulatory provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 

CFR 1926.1101, or more stringent State standards apply. 

7.17.1 Exposure Assessments and Monitoring. Assess all operations 

conducted with or on asbestos containing materials for the potential to 

generate airborne fibers. Employers must use exposure monitoring data to 

assess employee exposures. Records of all measurements taken to monitor 

employee exposure to asbestos must contain the date of measurement, 

operation involving exposure, sampling and analytical methods used, and 

evidence of their accuracy; number, duration, and results of samples taken; 

type of respiratory protective devices worn; and name, social security number, 

and results of all employee exposure measurements. Retain these records for 

30 years. 

7.17.2 Methods of Compliance. To the extent feasible, use engineering 

controls to control exposures. If engineering controls are not feasible to meet 

the exposure limit, use them to reduce employee exposures to the lowest 

levels attainable and supplement them with the use of respiratory protection. 

a. Control Measures. Use the following methods to reduce exposures: 

• Equip local exhaust ventilation with a HEPA (high-efficiency 

particulate air) filter dust collection system. 

• Enclose or isolate processes producing asbestos dust. 

• Ventilate regulated areas to move contaminated air to a collection 

device with a HEPA filter. 

• Control engineering and work practices to reduce exposures to the 

lowest possible level and supplement with respiratory protection. 

• Equip vacuum cleaners with HEPA filters to collect debris and 

dust. 

• Use wet methods or wetting agents, unless such methods would 

cause electrical hazards, equipment malfunction, slipping hazards 

or other hazards. 

• Promptly clean up and dispose of asbestos-contaminated wastes 

and debris in leak-tight containers. 

b. Prohibited Practices. Regardless of the measured exposure levels, the 

following practices are prohibited: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-40 October 2009 

• Use of high-speed abrasive disk saws unless they are equipped 

with point-of-cut ventilation or they are enclosed with HEPAfiltered exhaust air. 

• Use of compressed air to remove asbestos or asbestos-containing 

materials unless the compressed air is used with an enclosed 

ventilation system. 

• Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry cleanup of dust and debris. 

• Rotating employees to reduce exposure. 

7.17.3 Hazard Identification. In the absence of analytical data to the 

contrary, inventory and treat as all thermal insulation, sprayed, or troweled-on 

surfacing materials, and resilient flooring material installed before 1981 

asbestos containing materials. In addition, inventory all materials containing 

more than 1 percent asbestos. Indicate at least the material identity, location, 

and quantity present in the record of inventory. Maintain the records for the 

duration of ownership. 

7.17.4 Hazard Communication. Communicate the exposure hazards and 

exposure control measures that were implemented to: 

• All workers working with, on or adjacent to asbestos containing 

materials 

• All prospective employers applying or bidding for work in or adjacent 

to areas containing asbestos 

• All tenants who may occupy the areas containing asbestos 

7.17.5 Signs. Post warning signs at all regulated areas. Regulated areas are 

established where there are or a reasonable expectation of airborne 

concentrations in excess of permissible exposure limits or where there is a 

reasonable expectation of airborne concentrations in excess of permissible 

exposure limits. At entrances to rooms or areas containing asbestos thermal 

insulation and surfacing materials, the building owner must post signs 

identifying the material, its location, and the work practices that ensure it is 

not disturbed. The warning sign must contain at least the following 

information: 

DANGER 

ASBESTOS 

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD 

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY 

RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE 

REQUIRED IN THIS AREA 

7.17.6 Warning Labels. Warning labels with the following wording must be 

placed on all raw materials, mixtures, scrap, waste, debris, and other products 

containing asbestos fibers: 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-41 

DANGER 

Contains Asbestos Fibers 

 Avoid Creating Dust 

Cancer And Lung Disease Hazard 

7.17.7 Work Classification. Four classes of asbestos related work activities 

are defined in table 7-9. 

Table 7-9.—Asbestos work classification 

Class Definition and examples of asbestos work 

I Work involves the removal of asbestos-containing or presumed-asbestos-containing thermal 

insulation and sprayed-on or troweled-on surfacing. Thermal insulation includes asbestoscontaining materials applied to pipes, boilers, tanks, ducts, or other structural components to 

prevent heat loss or gain. Surfacing materials may include decorative plaster on ceilings, 

acoustical materials on decking, or fireproofing on structural members. 

II Work includes the removal of other types of asbestos-containing materials that are not thermal 

insulation, such as flooring and roofing materials. Removing intact incidental roofing materials 

such as cements, mastics, coatings, and flashings is not regulated as Class II. Examples of 

Class II work include removal of floor and ceiling tiles, siding, roofing, or transite panels. 

III Work that includes repair and maintenance operations where asbestos-containing or 

presumed-asbestos-containing materials are disturbed. 

IV Work includes maintenance and custodial activities in which employees contact but do not 

disturb asbestos-containing materials. These activities must be related to the construction 

project and usually result from Class I, II, or III activities. 

7.17.8 Training. Train employees performing Class I through IV asbestos 

operations before they begin these jobs and annually thereafter. The training 

course must inform employees of: 

• Ways to recognize asbestos 

• Adverse health effects of asbestos exposure 

• The relationship between smoking and asbestos in causing lung cancer 

• Operations that could result in asbestos exposure and the importance 

of protective controls 

• The purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of 

respirators 

• Appropriate work practices for performing asbestos jobs 

• Medical surveillance program requirements 

• The contents of the asbestos standard 

• The names, addresses, and phone numbers of public health 

organizations that provide information and materials or conduct 

smoking-cessation programs 

• The required signs and labels and their meanings 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-42 October 2009 

Additional training based on the work classification that is required: 

a. Class I. Equivalent in curriculum, method, and length to the 

EPA Model Accreditation Plan asbestos worker training, (40 CFR 763, 

Subpart E, appendix C). Eight hours of annual refresher training is 

required. 

b. Class II. Training must cover the elements listed above plus hands-on 

training and last at least 8 hours. Annual refresher is required. 

c. Class III. Training must be the equivalent in curriculum and method to 

the 16-hour “Operations and Maintenance” course developed by EPA for 

maintenance and custodial workers whose work disturbs asbestoscontaining materials (40 CFR 763.92). The course must include hand-on 

training in proper respirator use and work practices. Annual refresher 

training is required. 

d. Class IV. Training must be equivalent in curriculum and method to 

EPA awareness training. Focus on training locations of asbestoscontaining or presumed-asbestos-containing materials and ways to 

recognize damage and avoid exposure. The course must be at least 

2 hours long. Annual refresher training is required. 

7.17.9 Work Plans. All Class I-III operations will have a written program 

and plan in place before initiating activities that reflects the means 

implemented to meet the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1001 or 29 

CFR 1926.1101. For all Class IV operations, provide a written Job Hazard 

Analysis and Standard Operating Procedure reflecting the safety and health 

protective expectations associated with the applicable operations before 

initiating activities. 

7.18 Lead 

The permissible exposure limit (PEL) for lead is 50 μg/m3, averaged over an 

8-hour period. Conduct monitoring and medical surveillance at an action level of 

30 μg/m3 or more. OSHA standards regulating lead are at 29 CFR 1910.1025 

and 29 CFR 1926.62. The employer must ensure that no employee is exposed to 

lead at concentrations in excess of the PEL. 

7.18.1 Written Lead Program. When work is conducted on surfaces 

containing lead coatings, a lead compliance program containing the following 

elements must be developed: 

• Detailed description of work activities 

• Engineering controls used to reduce or control exposures 

• Work practice controls 

• Decontamination procedures 

• Personal hygiene practices 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-43 

• Training 

• A medical surveillance program and biological monitoring 

• Exposure monitoring 

• Respiratory protection 

• Personal protective equipment 

• Workplace inspections 

• Signing of work area 

• Recordkeeping 

7.18.2 Action Level. Several provisions of the lead standard, such as 

periodic exposure monitoring, biologic monitoring, and initial and annual 

employee training, are triggered whenever exposure measurements reach or 

exceed the action level (30 g/m3). For employees exposed to lead at or 

above the action level for more than 30 days per year, employers are also 

required to provide an ongoing medical surveillance program. 

7.18.3 Minimum Program Requirement if Lead Is Present. Until 

exposure monitoring is conducted that documents that employees are not 

exposed above the PEL, the employer must assume that the following tasks 

result in lead exposure and implement a full lead compliance program: 

a. Manual demolition of structures, manual scraping, manual sanding, or 

use of a heat gun when lead containing coatings are present or when the 

composition of the coatings has not been tested 

b. Abrasive blasting in an enclosure 

c. Power tool cleaning

d. Lead burning 

e. Using lead containing mortar or spray painting with lead-containing 

paint 

f. Abrasive blasting, welding, cutting, or burning on any structure where 

lead-containing coatings or paint are present 

g. Cleanup activities where dry expendable abrasives are used 

h. Gouging with copper jacketed resistance rods known to contain high 

amounts of lead 

i. Performing any other task the employer believes may cause exposures 

in excess of the PEL 

7.18.4 Interim Measures. When an employee performs a specified task 

where lead is present, interim protection must at least include: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-44 October 2009 

a. Appropriate respiratory protection 

b. Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment 

c. Change areas 

d. Hand washing facilities 

e. Biological monitoring 

f. Training, including hazard communication and respiratory training 

7.18.5 Housekeeping 

a. Maintain all surfaces as free as practicable of accumulated lead dust. 

Accomplish this primarily by vacuuming floors, rafters, and other surfaces 

or by employing methods equally effective in preventing the dispersal of 

lead into the workplace. Vacuuming is considered to be the most reliable 

method of cleaning surfaces on which dust accumulates, but equally 

effective methods may be used, for example, a wet floor scrubber. Where 

vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums must be equipped with 

HEPA filters. Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be 

used except where vacuuming or other methods have been tried and do not 

work. 

b. Do not allow employees to smoke, eat, apply cosmetics, or have 

tobacco products, food stuffs, or cosmetics in any work areas. 

c. Provide separate storage facilities in change areas for street and work 

clothing to prevent cross-contamination between the two. Employees 

exposed to lead during their work shift must shower before leaving the 

workplace, if showers are provided, and must not leave wearing protective 

work clothing. 

7.18.6 Medical Surveillance. If an employee’s airborne lead exposure is at 

or above the action level for more than 30 days a year, the employer must 

provide a medical surveillance program to the employee consisting of routine 

monitoring of an employee’s blood lead and ZPP (zinc protoporphyrin) levels, 

made available at least every 2 months for the first 6 months in the exposed 

job and every 6 months thereafter. If an employee’s blood lead exceeds 

40 μg/dl, the monitoring frequency must be increased to at least every 

2 months and not reduced until two consecutive blood leads are below 

40 μg/dl. 

7.18.7 Medical Removal Protection. When an employee’s blood lead level 

is at or above 50 μg/dl on a periodic and follow-up blood sampling test 

(within 2 weeks of the first report), remove the employee from any exposure 

to lead. Also remove the employee from work having an exposure to lead at 

or above the action level on each occasion when a final medical determination 

results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee has a 

detected medical condition that places the employee at increased risk of 

material impairment to health from exposure to lead. 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-45 

7.18.8 Training. Employees who are exposed at or above the action level 

must be trained in the following: 

• The content of the OSHA lead standard and its appendices 

• The specific nature of the operations that could result in exposure to 

lead above the action level 

• The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of 

respirators 

• The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program and 

the medical removal protection program, including information 

concerning the adverse health effects associated with excessive 

exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse reproductive 

effects on both males and females and hazards to the fetus and 

additional precautions for employees who are pregnant) 

• The engineering controls and work practices associated with the 

employee’s job assignment, including training of employees to follow 

relevant good work practices 

• The contents of any compliance plan in effect 

• Why chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove lead 

from employees’ bodies and why they should not be used at all except 

under the direction of a licensed physician 

• The employee’s right of access to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. 

7.18.9 Recordkeeping. Establish and maintain records of all exposure 

monitoring and other data used in conducting the exposure assessment. The 

records must include the name and job classification of employees monitored, 

the details of the sampling and the analytic techniques, the results, and the 

type of respiratory protection worn. Keep these records for 30 years in 

accordance with OSHA’s standard 29 CFR 1910.20, Access to Exposure and 

Medical records. Employers must establish and maintain records of medical 

surveillance (biological monitoring and medical examination results). These 

records must include the names of employees, the physician’s written opinion, 

exposure data provided to the physician, and any employee medical 

complaints associated with lead exposure. The employer is required to keep 

or must ensure that the examining physician keeps a record of the results of 

medical examinations, a description of laboratory procedures, and a copy of 

the results of biological monitoring. These records must be kept for at least 

the duration of employment plus 30 years. 

7.18.10 Observation of Monitoring. Employers must provide employees or 

their representatives with the opportunity to observe monitoring of employee 

exposures to toxic materials or harmful physical agents. To ensure that this 

right is meaningful, observers are entitled to an explanation of the 

measurement procedure, to observe all steps related to the measurement 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

7-46 October 2009 

procedure, and to record the results obtained. When results of the monitoring 

are returned by the laboratory, make them available to the employee. 

7.18.11 Signing. The following warning sign must be displayed in each work 

area where lead hazards exist: 

WARNING 

LEAD WORK AREA 

POISON 

NO SMOKING OR EATING 

7.19 Illumination 

While work is in progress, provide lighting in accordance with the current 

ANSI/IES RP-7, Recommended Practice for Industrial Lighting; ANSI/IES RP-1, 

Recommended Practice for Office Lighting; and UL 924, Emergency Lighting 

and Power Equipment. Table 7-10 is a summary of the minimum light intensities. 

7.19.1 Means of Egress. Provide a minimum of 11 lux (1 footcandle) of 

illumination, measured at the floor to the means of egress. 

Table 7-10.—Minimum lighting requirements 

Facility or function 

Illuminance – lux 

(footcandles) 

Accessways 

 - general indoor 

 - general outdoor 

 - exitways, walkways, ladders, stairs 

55 (5) 

33 (3) 

110 (10) 

Administrative areas (offices, drafting 

and meeting rooms, etc.) 

540 (50) 

Chemical laboratories 540 (50) 

Construction areas 

 - general indoor 

 - general outdoor 

 - tunnels and general underground 

 - tunnel and shaft heading during 

drilling, mucking, and scaling 

55 (5) 

33 (3) 

55 (5) 

110 (10) 

Conveyor routes 110 (10) 

Docks and loading platforms 33 (3) 

Elevators, freight, and passenger 215 (20) 

First aid stations and infirmaries 325 (30) 

Mechanical/electrical equipment 

rooms 

110 (10) 

Parking areas 33 (3) 

Toilets, wash rooms, dressing rooms 110 (10) 

Visitor areas 215 (20) 
Section 7—Occupational Health 

October 2009 7-47 

Table 7-10.—Minimum lighting requirements 

Facility or function 

Illuminance – lux 

(footcandles) 

Warehouses and storage 

rooms/areas 

 - indoor stockroom, active/bulk 

storage 

 - indoor stockroom, inactive 

 - indoor rack storage 

 - outdoor storage 

110 (10) 

55 (5) 

270 (25) 

33 (3) 

Work areas - general (not listed 

above) 

325 (30) 
October 2009 8-1 

Section 8 

Personal Protective Equipment 

8.1 Requirements for Personal Protective Equipment 

This section sets forth minimum personal protective equipment (PPE) 

requirements. It provides an overview of PPE requirements, including workplace 

assessment, PPE maintenance, and training. The supervisor must ensure 

availability, proper use, and maintenance of equipment specified in this section. 

The “Occupational Health” section details the requirements for respirator use. 

8.1.1 Workplace Assessment. Assess each workplace to determine if 

hazards are present (or likely to be present) that would make it necessary to 

use personal protective equipment. Document the assessment in writing or in 

the Job Hazard Analysis. 

8.1.2 PPE Maintenance. Each day, inspect PPE before use. Maintain and 

store PPE properly. After each use, clean and sanitize PPE (as appropriate). 

8.1.3 PPE Training. Provide training to each employee who wears PPE. 

This training must include answers to the following questions: 

• When will PPE be used? 

• What PPE is necessary? 

• How is the required PPE used? 

• What are the limitations of the PPE? 

• How is PPE properly maintained, inspected, and stored? 

8.2 Requirements for Head Protection 

8.2.1 Required Helmets (Hard Hats). All personnel, including contractors 

and visitors, must wear helmets (hard hats) when entering or working in 

designated hard hat areas. 

8.2.2 Hard Hat Areas. Hard hat areas include all areas where a person may 

be injured from overhead hazards, including overhead storage, and any kind 

of construction, maintenance, and repair work in progress. 

8.2.3 Posting of Hard Hat Areas. Post conspicuous signs at all entrances to 

hard hat areas and appropriate locations. Signs must state: 

“HARD HATS REQUIRED BEYOND THIS POINT” 

8.2.4 Hard Hat Design. Verify that hard hats comply with Type I, Class G 

or E, as specified in ANSI Z89.1-1997, “American National Standard for 

Industrial Head Protection.” Confirm that hard hats worn by linemen, 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-2 October 2009 

electricians, or employees working in tunnels, shafts, or near high-voltage 

conductors or apparatus conform to class E requirements of ANSI Z89.1-

1997. Hard hats must have a manufacturer’s label that indicates its design 

complies with ANSI requirements. 

8.3 Requirements for Eye and Face Protection 

Employees exposed to potential eye or face injury from physical, chemical, or 

radiation agents must be furnished and required to wear eye and/or face protection 

specifically designed for the exposure. 

8.3.1 Design. Eye and face protection required by this section must comply 

with the standards published in the current ANSI Z87.1, “Practice for 

Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection.” 

8.3.2 Corrective Lenses. Protect employees who wear corrective lenses, 

when required to wear eye protection, with one of the following: 

a. Protective spectacles with lenses that provide optical correction. 

b. Protective goggles or face shields that can be worn over corrective 

glasses or contact lenses. 

c. Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind protective 

lenses. 

8.3.3 Selection Guide. When selecting eye and face protection for the 

hazards and operations noted, use the information in table 8-1, table 8-2, and 

figure 8-1 as a guide. 

8.3.4 Electric Welding. Employees must wear nonflammable welding 

helmets with lift-front or stationary-front lens when engaged in electric 

welding operations. Employees must wear plano prescription safety glasses 

or flash goggles under the helmet to protect their eyes when raising the helmet 

for scaling operations. Helmet filter lens shades must conform with table 8-2. 

8.3.5 Gas-Torch Cutting and Welding. When gas-torch cutting and 

welding, employees must wear a welding mask, weld-view or cover-glass 

goggles, or similar goggles that provide equivalent eye and face protection. 

The eye protectors must have filter lenses that conform to the requirements in 

tables 8-1 and 8-2. Sunglasses do not meet this requirement. 

8.3.6 Welder Helper or Inspector. Welder helpers or welding inspectors 

must wear flash goggles with a minimum lens shade of 2 in the general 

welding area. Helpers or inspectors observing actual welding operations must 

wear the same protection as the welder. 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-3 

Table 8-1.—Eye and face protector selection guide 

Operation Hazards 

Recommended protectors 

(numbers refer to figure 8-1) 

Acetylene-burning, 

acetylene-cutting, 

acetylene-welding 

Sparks, harmful rays, 

molten metal, flying 

particles 

7, 8, 9 

Chemical handling Splash, acid burns, fumes 2, 10 (for severe exposure, add 

10 over 2) 

Chipping Flying particles 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A 

Electric (arc) welding Sparks, intense rays, 

molten metal 

9, 11 (11 in combination with 4, 

5, 6 in tinted lenses advisable) 

Furnace operations Glare, heat, molten metal 7, 8, 9 (for severe exposure, 

add 10) 

Grinding - light Flying particles 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 

Grinding - heavy Flying particles 1, 3, 7A, 8A (for severe 

exposure, add 10) 

Laboratory Chemical splash, glass 

breakage 

2 (10 when in combination with 

4, 5, 6) 

Machining Flying particles 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 

Molten metals Heat, glare, sparks, splash 7, 8 (10 in combination with 4, 5, 

6 in tinted lenses) 

Spot welding Flying particles, sparks 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-4 October 2009 

Table 8-2.—Filter lenses for protection against radiant energy 

Operations 

Electrode size in 

1/32 inches 

(0.8 millimeter) Arc current 

Minimum1

protective shade 

Shielded metal arc 

welding 

<3 

3-5 

5-8 

>8 

<60 

60-160 

160-250 

250-550 

7 

8 

10 

11 

Gas metal-arc 

welding and fluxcored arc welding 

 <60 

60-160 

160-250 

250-500 

7 

10 

10 

10 

Gas tungsten-arc 

welding 

 <50 

50-150 

150-500 

8 

8 

10 

Air carbon arc cutting (light) 

(heavy) 

<500 

500-1,000 

10 

11 

Plasma arc welding <20 

20-100 

100-400 

400-800 

6 

8 

10 

11 

Plasma arc cutting (light)2

(medium)2

(heavy)2

<300 

300-400 

400-800 

8 

9 

10 

Torch blazing 3 

Torch soldering 2 

Carbon arc welding 14 

Gas welding: 

Light 

Medium 

Heavy 

<1/8 

1/8-1/2 

>1/2 

<3.2 

3.2-12.7 

>12.7 

4 

5 

6 

Oxygen cutting: 

Light 

Medium 

Heavy 

<1 

1-6 

>6 

<25 

25-150 

>150 

3 

4 

5 

Source: 29 CFR 1910.133(a)(5), http://www.osha.gov/reg 

1

 As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then, go to a 

lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In 

oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to se a 

filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation. 2

 These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that 

lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece. 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-5 Figure 8-1.—Recommended eye and face protection. Source: 29 CFR 1926.102(a)(5) table E-1. 

* These are also available without side shields for limited use requiring only frontal protection. ** See Table 2, Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-6 October 2009 

8.3.7 Laser Protection. Install and use lasers and laser systems according 

to the manufacturer’s requirements and restrictions according to the 

ANSI Z136.1, “American National Standard for the Safe Use of Lasers.” 

Employees whose work involves Class 3b or 4 laser beams must wear 

appropriate laser safety goggles. 

8.4 Requirements for Hearing Protection 

8.4.1 Hearing Protective Devices. Use hearing protective devices whenever 

ambient noise levels equal or exceed 85 dBa. 

8.4.2 Noise Reduction Rating. Supervisor must verify that a noise reduction 

rating (NRR) of all hearing protective devices is used, which is based upon 

one of the following methods: 

a. One of the three methods developed by NIOSH (described in the “List 

of Personal Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data,” HEW Publication 

No. 76-120, 1975, pages 21-37). These methods are known as NIOSH 

methods No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3. 

b. ANSI S12.6-1984, “Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear 

Attenuation of Hearing Protectors.” 

c. ANSI S3.19-1974, “Measurement of Real-Ear Protection of Hearing 

Protectors and Physical Attenuation of Ear Muffs.” 

8.4.3 Hearing Device Labels. Use hearing protective devices labeled by 

manufacturer according to Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 40 

CFR Part 211. 

8.5 Requirements for Protective Clothing 

8.5.1 Welding Leathers. Employees engaged in overhead welding or 

burning where severe burn hazards exist must wear leather gloves, chrometanned leather chaps and coats, or a combination that provides equal 

protection to prevent exposure to sparks and slag. They must wear leather 

gloves and aprons when performing routine welding and burning. 

8.5.2 High-Visibility Clothing. Employees exposed to vehicular traffic 

on roadways or construction sites shall wear high-visibility safety apparel 

labeled as compliant with the appropriate conspicuity class as defined in 

ANSI/ISEA 107-1999 American National Standard for High-Visibility Safety 

Apparel. Contractor Safety Plans or Reclamation work plans shall contain 

justification for the class of clothing provided to workers. 

a. Conspicuity Class 1 apparel will be used in activities where traffic 

speeds do not exceed 25 miles per hour, traffic is well separated from 

workers, and work tasks permit undivided attention to approaching traffic. 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-7 

b. Conspicuity Class 2 apparel will be used where traffic speeds exceed 

25 miles per hour, work tasks divert employee attention from traffic, or 

work is not well separated from traffic. (Many construction activities will 

fall in this category.) 

c. Conspicuity Class 3 apparel will be used when workers are exposed to 

traffic at speeds above 50 miles per hour or other situations where 

visibility from a greater distance is needed. 

8.5.3 Gloves. Gloves must be provided and used to prevent contact with 

biological, chemical, and physical hazards. Substances which may require 

protection include acids, caustics, solvents, herbicides, infectious materials, 

and other toxic materials. Employees will wear leather-palm gloves when 

working with steel cables, barbed wire, rough-sawn timber, or other materials 

capable of causing lacerations. Insulating gloves will be worn when handling 

materials of extreme temperatures. 

8.5.4 Rubber Goods. Employees may use rubber gloves, sleeves, blankets, 

covers, and line hose only when required by special conditions for work on 

energized facilities. Rubber goods provided to protect employees who work 

on energized facilities must meet American Society of Testing and Materials 

(ASTM) specifications. Test, inspect, and maintain rubber goods according to 

current ASTM standards. At a minimum, perform a visual inspection prior to 

each use. 

8.5.5 Protective Chaps. Employees who operate chain saws, hand-held 

abrasive wheel cutoff saws, and other similar power tools must wear 

protective chaps that meet current U.S. Forest Service requirements. 

8.5.6 Foot Protection. When work endangers feet or requires special foot 

protection, employees must wear protective footwear that meets the 

requirements in ANSI Z41, “Protective Footwear.” This footwear must meet 

the basic I/75 “impact,” C/75 “compression” standards for the protective toe 

box. In addition, rubber footwear, including boots and packs, must meet the 

sole puncture-resistance requirements. Heavy-duty footwear must meet the 

MT/75 metatarsal requirements. Work environments that may require 

protective footwear include construction sites and activities, industrial areas, 

underground work, and working with chemicals. Advise visitors of the 

existing hazards in the area before planned visits or before permitting entrance 

to the area. 

8.5.7 Minimum Wearing Apparel. Along with other requirements of this 

paragraph, all employees who work outdoors must wear, as minimum 

protection, pants long enough to protect from environmental and physical 

hazards, and sleeved shirts with a minimum 4-inch sleeve. Cutoffs, tank tops, 

or modified shirts are not acceptable. Apparel must protect where irritants or 

toxic substances may come into contact with skin or clothing. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-8 October 2009 

8.5.8 Electric Flash Protection. Any person who enters the flash protection 

zone (the area between the flash protection boundary and its associated 

conductor (see NFPA 70E, Part II, 2-1.3.3.2) must wear flame-resistant 

clothing and personal protective equipment, based on the incident exposure 

associated with the specific task. Refer to NFPA tables 70E 3-3.8 and 3-4.11 

for PPE standards. 

a. Eye and Face Protection. Employees must wear protective eye 

equipment whenever there is a danger of injury from electric arcs, flashes, 

or from flying objects resulting from electrical explosion. Always wear 

eye protection (safety glasses or goggles) under face shields or hoods. 

b. Body Protection. Employees must wear flame resistant-clothing 

whenever they may be exposed to an electric arc flash. Flash suits 

and their closure design must permit easy and rapid removal. The 

entire flash suit, including the window, must have energy-absorbing 

characteristics suitable for arc-flash exposure. Use clothing and 

equipment to maximize worker protection. Clothing and equipment 

required by the degree of electrical hazard exposure can be worn alone 

or be integrated with normal apparel. Protective clothing and equipment 

must cover parts of the body subject to harm and all normal apparel that is 

not flash-flame resistant, while allowing movement and visibility. Do 

not wear meltable synthetic fibers next to the skin. 

c. Hand and Arm Protection. Employees must wear rubber insulating 

gloves where there is a danger of hand and arm injury from electric shock 

and burns, due to contact with energized parts. Wear hand and arm 

protection where you may be exposed to arc flash burn. Gloves made 

from layers of flame-resistant material provide the highest level of hand 

arc flash protection. Heavy-duty leather gloves also provide good 

protection. Where voltage-rated gloves are used, wear leather protectors 

over the rubber gloves. 

d. Foot and Leg Protection. Dielectric overshoes are required where 

electrically insulated footwear is used as protection against step and touch 

potential. Heavy-duty leather work shoes normally provide a significant 

degree of protection to the feet from arc flash. 

e. Flash Protection Boundary. The flash protection boundary, Dc, is 

defined as the distance, in feet, of a person from an arc source for a just 

curable burn (i.e., skin temperature remains below 80 degrees C or 

176 degrees F). 

The flash protection boundary can be calculated using either of the 

following equations: 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-9 

Dc = [2.65 x MVAbf x t]1/2 (preferred equation for calculations applying 

to generating and pumping facilities) 

Dc = [53 x MVA x t]1/2 (for systems with single sources of electric 

fault current) 

where: 

MVAbf = bolted fault MVA available at the point involved 

MVA = the MVA rating of the transformer. For 

transformers with MVA ratings below 0.75 MVA, 

multiply the transformer MVA rating by 1.25 

t = time or arc exposure in seconds 

You must know the voltage rating and fault current available to find the 

MVAbf factor in the first equation. The use of the second equation, based 

only on transformer rating, may not consider significant current 

contributions from large rotating machines, and its use for Reclamation 

facilities is discouraged. 

According to NFPA, the flash protection boundary for systems rated at 

600 volts and below, and with less than 50 kiloamperes of current 

available, is 4 feet. 

Calculate the flash protection boundary for each item of electrical 

equipment in the plant. Include the flash protection boundary in the 

facility Hazardous Energy Control Program. Personnel entering the flash 

protection boundary near exposed energized electrical equipment must 

wear appropriate electrical flash protective equipment. 

8.5.9 Determination of Appropriate Clothing. The NFPA system of 

hazard/risk classification associates many types of work on energized 

equipment and within the flash protection boundary and five levels of 

hazard/risk. Use the hazard/risk level to determine the required protective 

clothing characteristics appropriate for the work. The classification system is 

defined in several tables of the NFPA Standard No. 70E, Part II. 

Determine the appropriate protective clothing in two steps: 

• First, find the type of work planned in NFPA 70E, Part II, 

Table 3-3.9.1 (Hazard Risk Category Classifications). This four-page 

table lists over 70 of the various operations on various types of 

electrical equipment of various voltage ratings. A corresponding 

hazard/risk category from 0 to 4 (highest exposure) is listed for each 

type of work. The table also indicates whether voltage rated tools or 

gloves are required. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-10 October 2009 

• Second, determine what types and layers of clothing are required for 

the Hazard/Risk category by looking on NFPA 70E, Part II, 

Table 3-3.9.2 (Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment 

Matrix). Use the clothing and equipment indicated on this table when 

working on or near energized equipment within the flash protection 

boundary. Table 3-3.9.3 (Protective Clothing Characteristics) gives 

information on the weight of the clothing for the five levels of 

Hazard/Risk. 

As an alternative to using tables 3-3.9.1 and 3-3.9.2, Table F-1 (Simplified, 

Two Category, Flame-Resistant Clothing System) provides a quicker method 

of determining appropriate clothing for use within the flash protection 

boundary of energized electrical equipment. 

a. Synthetic Clothing Not Permitted. Do not wear clothing made from 

synthetic materials such as acetate, nylon, polyester, rayon, either alone or 

in blends with cotton. These materials will melt into the skin when 

exposed to high temperatures and can aggravate a burn injury. 

Do not wear conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as 

watchbands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, 

cloth with conductive thread, metal headgear, or unrestrained metal frame 

glasses) where they can present an electrical contact hazard with live parts, 

unless such articles are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or 

other insulating means. 

8.6 Protection Against Drowning 

Provide U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) approved type III or type V personal flotation 

devices (PFDs) to employees when working on or around water or where a 

drowning hazard exists. 

Do not use PFDs that depend solely on inflation to provide flotation (USCG 

Type III or V inflatables) onboard watercraft or in activities that subject the PFD 

to abrasion or to substances that might affect the device’s effectiveness. 

8.6.1 Design. The PFD must be international orange and must have at least 

200 square centimeters of retroreflective material attached to the front and 

200 square centimeters of retroreflective material attached to the back. If the 

PFD is reversible, retroreflective material must be attached to each of its 

reversible sides. 

8.6.2 Ring Buoys. Install ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line and 

approved by the U.S. Coast Guard at 200-foot intervals on worksites where a 

water hazard exists. 

8.6.3 Inspection and Replacement. Before each use, visually inspect each 

personal flotation device defects that would compromise its effectiveness. At 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-11 

annual intervals, conduct buoyancy test and discard any device with less than 

13 pounds buoyancy. 

8.7 Other Protective Equipment 

Other sections of these standards cover other protective equipment, fire and 

rescue devices, first aid and medical facilities, seatbelts, and special devices and 

equipment for protecting personnel from specific hazards. Employees must use 

such specified protective equipment when exposed to the respective hazards. 

8.8 Safety Nets 

The employer must install safety nets to protect employees when the workplace is 

more than 25 feet above adjoining surfaces and where use of scaffolding, catch 

platforms, temporary floors, safety belts, or lifelines is impractical. Use safety 

nets when required or directed by the office head or the COR, to protect 

employees or the public from overhead construction. 

8.8.1 Net Specifications. The mesh size of safety nets must not exceed 6 by 

6 inches. Nets must meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 footpounds minimum impact resistance, as determined and certified by the 

manufacturer, and must bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes must withstand 

a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. Line nets installed for 

overhead protection with wire or synthetic netting of not more than 1-inch 

mesh. Wire mesh must not be less than No. 22 gauge; synthetic must not be 

less than No. 18 twine. 

8.8.2 Installation. Design and construct the net suspension system with a 

minimum safety factor of four. The net suspension system must withstand 

test loading without permitting contact between the net and any surface or 

object below the net. Connections between panels must develop the full 

strength of the net. Use forged steel safety hooks or shackles to fasten the net 

to its supports. 

8.8.3 Positioning. Install safety nets as close under the work surface as 

practical, but not more than 25 feet below the working level. Extend nets at 

least 8 feet beyond the perimeter of the work area. 

8.8.4 Testing. Field test safety nets immediately following installation, 

repositioning, or major repair. Conduct the test by dropping a 400-pound bag 

of sand, more than 30 inches in diameter, from at least 25 feet high onto the 

center of the net. 

8.8.5 Inspection and Maintenance. The care, maintenance, and storage of 

nets must conform to the net manufacturer’s recommendations. Give due 

attention to the factors affecting net life. (See subsection on equipment.) 

Protect nets from debris, sparks, and hot slag resulting from welding and 

cutting operations. Nets must be capable of a minimum service life of 2 years 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

8-12 October 2009 

under normal, on-the-job exposure to weather, sunlight, and handling, 

excluding damage from misuse, mishandling, and exposure to chemicals and 

airborne contaminants. 

Inspect nets daily for damage, and make necessary replacement or repairs 

before work above the net resumes. Remove debris from nets at least daily. 

Maintain an up-to-date record for each personnel net. The record must 

include the following information: 

a. Net serial number. 

b. Date installed. 

c. Dates inspected. 

d. Inspection results. If results are unsatisfactory, state the reasons why 

and describe the corrections made for each deficiency. 

e. Dates tested. 

f. Test results . If unsatisfactory, state the reasons. 

g. Date removed. 

h. Disposition and reason. 

The responsible person conducting the net inspection must initial each set of 

entries in the record. 

8.8.6 Training. When using personnel nets, the employer must provide 

appropriate training, so employees will recognize the hazards of falling into 

nets and the procedures to follow to limit potential injury. The training 

program must include the following: 

a. The tested limits of installed nets. 

b. Avoiding falls. 

c. Recording and reporting of training. 

d. Location of inspection records and the responsible person. 

8.8.7 Factors Affecting Net Life 

a. Sunlight. Ropes of natural and synthetic fibers can lose a significant 

amount of strength after prolonged exposure to direct sunlight. Take 

special precautions to shield ropes one-half inch in diameter and less from 

the sun’s rays. When they are not in use, store properly and protect nets 

from direct and indirect sunlight. 

b. Abrasion. Keep in mind the adverse effects of abrasion. Do not drag 

nets or allow them to chafe over the ground or other rough surfaces. No 

test will predict the life of a net under the wide variety of abrasion 

conditions that may be encountered. 
Section 8—Personal 

Protective Equipment 

October 2009 8-13 

c. Sand. Embedded sand can cut into fibers, reducing the strength of 

nets. Keep nets as clean and free of sand as possible. 

d. Rust. Prolonged contact with rusting iron or steel can cause significant 

degradation and loss of strength. 

e. Airborne Contaminants. Many chemicals and airborne contaminants 

can adversely affect the strength of nets. Where such hazards exist, 

identify the chemicals and measure the concentrations. Determine the 

effect on the net materials by test, if not known. 

8.9 Lifesaving Skiffs 

Provide one or more lifesaving boats or skiffs where employees work over or 

immediately adjacent to water where a drowning hazard exists. Persons trained in 

launching and operating the skiff must be immediately available during working 

hours. Use the skiff only for drills and in emergencies. 

8.9.1 Equipment. Lifesaving skiffs must have the following equipment on 

board: 

a. Four oars (two, if motor powered). 

b. Oarlocks attached to the gunwales or to the oars. 

c. One ball-pointed boat hook. 

d. At least one ring buoy with 90 feet of line attached. 

e. One life preserver or work vest for each crew member, and additional 

devices necessary for rescued persons. 

f. Emergency lighting. 
October 2009 9-1 

Section 9 

Signs, Signals, and Barricades 

This section establishes design specifications for safety signs, tags, and barricades 

used on sites administered by Reclamation. This section also covers standard 

hoisting signals and provisions about the use of signal persons. 

9.1 Requirements for Signs 

9.1.1 Application. Signs described in this subsection must be visible at all 

times when work is in progress. Promptly remove or cover them when the 

hazard no longer exists. 

9.1.2 Standards. In addition to the design specifications set forth in this 

subsection, the design and application of signs must conform to the latest 

edition of the following standards: 

a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z535.1, Safety Color 

Code

b. ANSI Z35.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs 

c. ANSI Z35.5, Accident Prevention Tags (For Temporary Hazards) 

d. ANSI C95.2, Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbols 

e. 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.145, Specifications for 

Accident Prevention Signs and Tags 

f. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration, 

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways

(MUTCD) 

g. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) A13.1, Scheme 

for the Identification of Piping Systems

9.1.3 Danger Signs. Danger signs must conform to the following 

requirements: 

a. Application. Use danger signs only when the lives of employees or 

others are in danger. 

b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9-1, danger signs must have 

“DANGER” in white letters placed at the top of a rectangular safety sign 

with a red background. The safety alert symbol must precede 

“DANGER.” The base of the symbol must be on the same horizontal line 

as the base of “DANGER.” The safety alert symbol must be as high as or 

higher than “DANGER.” 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

9-2 October 2009 

Figure 9-1.—Danger, warning, and caution signs. 

c. Alternative. As an alternative, danger signs may have “DANGER” in 

white letters on a safety red oval background with a white border on a 

black rectangular field. This distinctive panel must appear in the 

uppermost portion of the sign. Do not use any other signal word or 

symbol within this distinctive shape and color arrangement. The message 

must be in black or red letters on a white background, or white letters on a 

black background. The symbol/pictorial panel, if used, must be square 

with a black, safety red, or black and safety red symbol on a white 

background. 

9.1.4 Warning Signs. Warning signs must conform to the following 

requirements: 

a. Application. Use warning signs to warn against a potential hazard 

that, if not avoided, may result in serious injury or death. Do not use 

warning signs for property damage hazards unless personal injury risk also 

exists. 

b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9-1, warning signs must have 

“WARNING” placed at the top of the sign in black letters on a rectangular 

orange background. The safety alert symbol must precede “WARNING.” 

The base of the symbol must be on the same horizontal line as the base of 

“WARNING.” The safety alert symbol must be as high as or higher than 

“WARNING.” 

c. Alternative. As an alternative, warning signs may have “WARNING” 

in black letters within a safety orange truncated diamond of a black 

! DANGER

! CAUTION

Figure 9-1. - Danger sign 

Figure 9-2. -Warning sign

! WARNING

Figure 9-3. - Caution sign

CAUTION

DANGER

Alternate

WARNING

Preferred
Section 9—Signs, 

Signals, and Barricades 

October 2009 9-3 

rectangular background. Locate this distinctive panel in the uppermost 

portion of the sign. See figure 9-1. Do not use any other word or symbol 

within this distinctive shape or color arrangement. The message panel 

must be in black letters on a white background or white letters on a black 

background. The message may, as an alternative, be black letters on a 

safety orange background. 

9.1.5 Caution Signs. Caution signs must conform to the following 

requirements: 

a. Application. Use caution signs to warn against a potential hazard that, 

if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Caution signs may 

also alert against unsafe practices that may cause property damage. 

b. Design. As illustrated in figure 9-1, caution signs must have 

“CAUTION” placed at the top of the sign in black letters on a rectangular 

yellow background. The safety alert symbol must precede “CAUTION” if 

the hazard is a potential personal injury hazard. The base of the symbol 

must be on the same horizontal line as the base of “CAUTION.” The 

safety alert symbol must be as high as or higher than “CAUTION.” 

c. Alternative. As an alternative, caution signs may have “CAUTION” 

in safety yellow letters within a black rectangular background located in 

the uppermost portion of the sign. See figure 9-1. Do not use any other 

signal word or symbol with this distinctive color or signal shape 

arrangement. Caution signs used to indicate accidents of property damage 

only do not include the safety alert symbol. These signs have 

“CAUTION” in black letters on a rectangular safety yellow background. 

The message panel must be in black letters on a white background or 

white letters on a black background. As an alternative, the message may 

be black letters on a safety yellow background. 

9.1.6 Exit and Fire Protection Signs. Identify fire exits, fire protection 

equipment, and physical hazards in accordance with ANSI Z35.1, “Safety 

Color Code,” or NFPA No. 101, “Life Safety Code.” 

9.1.7 Instructional Safety Signs. Signs intended for general safety 

instructions or information must have a green upper panel and white lower 

section. White letters on the green background must convey the principal 

message. Additional information must appear in safety green or black letters 

on the white background. 

9.1.8 Directional Arrow Sign Panels. The directional arrow symbol must 

be white on a black or colored background on a rectangular field. The symbol 

must appear in the uppermost portion of the visual alerting device if it appears 

by itself or with general safety or fire safety signs. When using these 

directional arrows along with DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or 

NOTICE signs, the arrow must be in the lower sign panel. The color of the 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

9-4 October 2009 

arrows must be the same arrangement as the message or symbol described 

above. The design of the directional arrows must be in accordance with ANSI 

Z35.2. 

9.1.9 Pipe Labels. Label pipes that carry hazardous materials to identify 

their contents in accordance with ASME 13.1, “Scheme for the Identification 

of Piping Systems.” 

9.1.10 Traffic Signs and Barricades. Traffic signs and barricades must 

conform to the following requirements. 

a. Design and Use. Traffic signs and barricades erected in areas under 

Reclamation jurisdiction must conform to the current U.S. Department Of 

Transportation Federal Highway Administration MUTCD. Signs and 

barricades erected on highways and roads must comply with MUTCD 

requirements or the highway or street department having jurisdiction, 

whichever are the more stringent. Do not use cable as a gate or road 

closure device. Single and double pole pipe gates are permitted if they 

comply with the standards set forth in MUTCD, section 3C-4, END OF 

ROADWAY provisions. Each gate must have at least two double-sided, 

18-inch by18-inch, red reflective diamond panels mounted on and spaced 

equally across the gate, as described in MUTCD section 3C-3. Mount the 

diamond panels 36 to 48 inches above the ground. When closed, the 

reflective panels must be visible from both directions of travel. 

Equip gate ends with reflective material to identify the open end of the 

gate. The gates must be designed to remain either fully opened or fully 

closed. 

b. Installation and Removal. Erect appropriate traffic control signs and 

devices immediately before need and promptly remove them when no 

longer required. 

c. Visibility. Keep signs and barricades clean and legible. Reflectorize 

or illuminate, as appropriate, any signs and barricades used at night. Signs 

and barricades must be visible at all times. Do not obscure them with 

parked equipment or other objects. 

d. Traffic Controls. When signs and barricades do not provide adequate 

protection, flag persons or other appropriate traffic controls must be 

provided. 

9.2 Accident Prevention Tags 

Accident prevention tags are intended to warn employees and others of an 

existing hazard. They are intended for temporary use to warn of equipment under 
Section 9—Signs, 

Signals, and Barricades 

October 2009 9-5 

repair, defective tools, or deflective equipment. Accident prevention tags must 

conform to the current ANSI Z35.5, “Accident Prevention Tags (For Temporary 

Hazards).” 

9.3 Requirements for Radiation Hazard Signs 

9.3.1 Lasers. Laser warning signs and symbols must conform to the design 

specifications in the current issue of ANSI Z35.2, “Environmental and Facility 

Safety Signs,” and ANSI Z136.1, “Safe Use of Lasers.” 

9.3.2 Ionizing Radiation. Ionizing radiation warning signs and symbols 

must conform to the design specifications in the current issue of ANSI Z35.2, 

“Environmental and Facility Safety Signs.” 

9.3.3 Radio Frequencies. Signs warning of harmful radio frequencies must 

display the standard warning symbol, as described in the current issue of 

ANSI C95.2, “Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol.” 

9.4 Traffic Control Signals 

9.4.1 Requirement. Flag persons directing traffic must use the signals and 

procedures contained in the current issue of the U.S. Department of 

Transportation Federal Highway Administration, MUTCD. It can be accessed 

on the Internet at the following website address: 

http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium.htm 

9.4.2 Flag Persons. Use only employees who are trained, qualified, and/or 

State certified as flag persons. Flag persons controlling traffic must wear high 

visibility fluorescent apparel. 

9.5 Barrier Tape 

9.5.1 Requirement. When using barrier tape to identify a temporary 

hazardous location, the employee in charge of the area must mark the tape 

with an accident prevention tag showing his/her name and phone extension. 

9.5.2 Red Plastic Tape. You may use red plastic tape to warn of dangerous 

locations. Red plastic tape will mean STOP, DANGER, or DO NOT ENTER. 

Instruct personnel working inside of the taped area on the requirements of the 

JHA for the taped area. The employee in charge of the area must provide a 

proper briefing and approval for other personnel requiring entry. Personnel 

must not cross over or under a red barrier tape without proper authorization. 

9.5.3 Yellow Plastic Tape. You may use yellow plastic tape marked 

“CAUTION” to identify hazardous locations where caution is needed. Using 

yellow plastic tape does not prevent employees from entering an area, but 

does warn them of a hazardous condition. 
October 2009 10-1 

Section 10 

Fire Prevention and Protection 

This section sets forth the requirements for fire prevention and protection. 

In addition to the fire prevention and protection requirements of this section, other 

sections of these standards address requirements relating to specific hazards and 

operations, welding and cutting, etc. Where these standards do not provide more 

specific instructions, they adopt, by reference, the current edition of the National 

Fire Codes, published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 

10.1 Fire Prevention Requirements 

10.1.1 Fire Prevention Plans. Write a fire prevention plan for each facility. 

Include a list of major workplace fire hazards; potential ignition sources; the 

type of fire suppression equipment of systems appropriate to control a fire; 

assignments of responsibilities for maintaining the equipment and systems; 

personnel responsible for controlling the fuel source hazards; and 

housekeeping procedures, including the removal of waste materials. Inform 

employees of the fire hazards of the materials and processes to which they are 

exposed. Brief new employees on the parts of the plan that are essential for 

their protection and emergency evacuations. Keep the written plan in the 

workplace and make it available for employee review. 

Provide additional training for personnel assigned tasks that require them to 

remain in a facility during a fire emergency. The work area where these 

individuals remain during a fire emergency must be evaluated as an area of 

refuge in accordance with NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 

10.1.2 Housekeeping. Maintain good housekeeping. Promptly remove and 

dispose of accumulations of combustible scrap and debris in all areas of the 

job site. Use self-closing metal containers to collect waste saturated with 

flammable or combustible liquids. At all facilities, properly collect, store, and 

remove combustible and flammable waste products at the end of each 

workday or at the end of each work shift. Use only noncombustible or UL 

labeled, nonmetallic containers to dispose of waste and rubbish. Keep 

combustible items separate from each other and from noncombustible items. 

Label the contents of containers. 

10.1.3 Grounds Maintenance. Don’t allow rubbish and waste to 

accumulate. Prevent the growth of tall dry grass, brush, and weeds adjacent to 

facilities with a maximum 3-foot fire break. Place combustible waste 

materials outdoors to await subsequent disposal, at least 20 feet from a 

structure. 

10.1.4 Smoking. Prohibit smoking and other sources of ignition in 

storage areas for flammable or explosive materials or near operations 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

10-2 October 2009 

that constitute a fire hazard. Conspicuously post “NO SMOKING OR 

OPEN FLAMES” in all such areas. 

10.1.5 Open Flame Devices. Do not leave fires and open flame devices, 

such as incinerators, torches, and controlled fires, unattended unless they have 

automatic temperature control and cutoff devices. 

10.1.6 Cleaning and Degreasing. Do not use gasoline or liquids with a 

flashpoint below 100 degrees Fahrenheit for cleaning and degreasing. Use 

only approved cleaners specifically for the type of equipment or material. 

10.1.7 Fireproofing. Maintain adequate clearance between heating facilities 

and combustible materials. 

10.1.8 Explosive Gases and Vapors. Do not use open flames or heating 

elements where flammable gases or vapors may be present. 

10.1.9 Buildings and Structures. Ensure non-fire-resistive buildings or 

structures are at least 25 feet apart. However, consider a group of non-fire 

resistive buildings with a total ground floor area of no more than 2,000 square 

feet as one building for this purpose, provided that each building in the group 

is at least 10 feet away, on each side, from other buildings. 

10.1.10 Building Exits. Ensure that exits from all buildings, shops, and other 

facilities in which personnel work, or which are open to the public, are 

sufficiently well marked and lighted. Evaluate the adequacy of the means of 

exit, based on NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 

10.1.11 Inspections. When justified by the size or nature of the operation, 

security services personnel or other assigned personnel must frequently 

inspect buildings, storage areas, employee quarters, and work areas. 

10.2 Requirements for Heating Devices 

10.2.1 General. The following requirements must be met prior to the use of 

heating devices: 

a. Approval. Use only heating devices accepted by the area/office 

manager. Include the following items in acceptance requests: 

1. The proposed placement, including distance from combustibles. 

2. The service, maintenance, and surveillance schedules. 

3. The proposed fuel storage and refueling system. 

4. The method for prompt detection of gaseous contamination or 

oxygen deficiency. 
Section 10—Fire Prevention 

and Protection 

October 2009 10-3 

b. Data Plates. Permanently affix a data plate to each heater that 

provides the following information: 

1. Required clearances. 

2. Ventilation requirements. 

3. Fuel type and input pressure. 

4. Lighting and extinguishing instructions. 

5. Electrical power supply characteristics. 

c. Wood Floors. Mark heaters that are not suitable for use on wood 

floors and do not place them on combustible materials. When using such 

heaters, rest them on appropriate noncombustible material equivalent to at 

least 1 inch of concrete. The noncombustible material must extend at least 

2 feet beyond the heater in all directions. 

d. Combustible Covering. Do not use heaters near covers such as 

tarpaulins, canvas, or similar combustible materials. Locate heaters at 

least 10 feet away from these and similar materials. Securely fasten or tie 

down the coverings. 

e. Stability. Place heaters on level surfaces to prevent tipping. 

f. Installation. Install, vent, operate, and maintain heaters in accordance 

with the manufacturers’ instructions. 

g. Spark arresters. Install spark arresters on smokestacks that could 

otherwise permit sparks to escape. 

h. Carbon monoxide monitors. Facilities where heating devices use 

combustible fuel require carbon monoxide (CO) monitors. 

i. Grounding. Ground the non-current carrying metal parts of cord and 

plug connected heaters. 

10.2.2 Portable Space Heaters. Use only electric-powered portable space 

heaters equipped with tipover safety devices and thermostatic controls in 

office spaces. Maintain 3 feet of clearance from combustible materials. 

10.2.3 Liquid-Fueled Heaters. The following requirements govern the use 

of liquid-fueled heaters: 

a. General. Heaters may be either direct or indirect fired. Kerosene, 

stove oil, fuel oil, and diesel oil are permissible fuels. The flashpoint of 

the fuel must be at least 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 

b. Stability. Securely anchor liquid-fueled heaters or locate them to 

prevent tipping. 

c. Design. Equip liquid-fueled heaters with an automatic flame loss 

device that will stop the flow of fuel when the flame is extinguished. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

10-4 October 2009 

d. Fueling. Train employees tasked with fueling to be thoroughly 

familiar with the manufacturer’s heater operation and fueling instructions. 

Before fueling, extinguish the heater and permit it to cool until cool to 

touch. Store fuel in, and dispense fuel from, approved flammable liquid 

containers. 

e. Maintenance. Maintain heaters in good operating condition in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

10.2.4 Natural Gas Heaters. The following requirements apply to the use of 

natural gas heaters: 

a. General. Install, operate, and maintain natural gas heaters in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

b. Stability. Securely anchor heaters or locate to prevent tipping. 

c. Piping. Leak-test piping, tubing, or hose after installation, using a safe 

detection means, such as soap suds. When using flexible gas supply lines, 

they must not be more than 5 feet long. Supply lines and hose must have a 

minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch, a 

minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch, and a pull 

test of 400 pounds without leakage. 

d. Fuel Cutoff. Equip heaters with an automatic flame loss device that 

will shut off the gas supply if the flame or pilot light is extinguished. 

10.2.5 Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) Heaters. The following 

requirements apply to the use of LPG heaters: 

a. General. Install, operate, and maintain LPG heaters in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not use, locate, or store LPG 

containers and heating devices below grade or in confined spaces. 

b. Protection. Protect heaters, when in use, from damage by location, 

anchoring, or barricading. 

c. Testing. Leak-test piping, tubing, hoses, and flexible hose connections 

following installation, using a means such as soap suds. Use only flexible 

gas supply lines that are less than 5 feet long. Supply lines and hose must 

have a minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch, a 

minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch, and a pull 

test of 400 pounds without leakage. 

d. Hoses. Use only a hose labeled “LP-gas” or “LPG.” Hoses must have 

a minimum working gauge pressure of 350 pounds per square inch and a 

minimum burst gauge pressure of 1,750 pounds per square inch. Keep the 

hose as short as practical, although long enough to comply with specified 

safe spacing requirements without kinking or straining the hose or causing 

it to be close enough to a burner to be damaged by heat. 
Section 10—Fire Prevention 

and Protection 

October 2009 10-5 

e. Hose Connections. The design capability of hose assemblies, after 

the application of connections, must withstand a pressure of at least 

700 pounds per square inch. Do not leak-test such assemblies at pressures 

higher than the working pressure (350 pounds per square inch minimum) 

of the hose. 

f. Regulator. Equip heaters with an approved regulator between the 

cylinder and the supply line. 

g. Check Valve. Provide fuel cylinder connectors with an excess flow 

check to minimize the flow of gas in case of fuel line ruptures. 

h. Fuel Cutoff. Equip heaters with an automatic flame loss device that 

will shut off the gas supply if the flame or pilot light is extinguished. 

i. Fuel Supply in Buildings. Allow gas cylinders or containers in 

buildings or structures only in accordance with the following provisions: 

1. Keep the maximum water capacity of individual cylinders to 

245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds LPG capacity) or less. 

2. For temporary heating, such as curing concrete, drying materials, or 

similar uses, keep heaters (other than integral heater-container units) at 

least 6 feet away from any LPG container. However, you may use 

heaters specifically designed for attachment to the LPG container or to 

a supporting structure with connecting hose less than 6 feet long, 

provided the heater does not directly radiate heat onto the container. 

Do not direct blower-type or radiant heaters toward any LPG container 

that is within 20 feet of the heater. 

3. Keep LPG supply containers at least 20 feet apart when two or 

more heaters are in an unpartitioned area on the same floor. 

4. LPG containers manifolded together supplying one or more heaters 

in an unpartitioned area on the same floor must not exceed 300-pound 

nominal LPG capacity. Keep such manifolds at least 20 feet apart. 

5. Containers may be manifolded together on floors where heaters are 

not connected for use, for connection to one or more heaters located on 

another floor, provided that: (a) the total nominal capacity of 

containers connected to any one manifold does not exceed 

1,000 pounds LPG and (b) where more than one manifold having a 

nominal capacity exceeding 300 pounds LPG is located in the same 

unpartitioned area, the manifolds must be at least 50 feet apart. 

j. Storage of Containers. Store LPG containers not in use outside, in 

accordance with the minimum distances identified in the section on 

material handling, storage, and disposal. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

10-6 October 2009 

10.2.6 Restricted Use. The following restrictions apply to the use of heating 

devices: 

a. Open Flame-Type Heaters. Do not use open flame-type heating 

devices with exposed fuel below the flame. 

b. Lubrication or Service Areas. You may install an approved-type 

heater in lubrication or service areas where employees do not dispense or 

transfer flammable liquids, only if the bottom of the heater is at least 18 

inches above the floor and protected from damage. If employees dispense 

flammable liquids in such areas, the heater must be of a type approved for 

garages and installed at least 8 feet above the floor. 

10.3 Application of Fire Protection Requirements 

10.3.1 Fire Fighting Response. Each facility must prepare an effective, 

detailed fire protection plan, including provisions for the fire protection and 

suppression equipment that are set forth in this section. The area/office 

manager will review and approve the plan. 

When community fire department services are not available, or are 

insufficient, you may provide a trained firefighting brigade meeting NFPA 

criteria, at the discretion of the area/office manager. Fire brigades must be 

organized, trained, equipped, and protected as required by 29 CFR 1910.156. 

Provide and install mobile and fixed firefighting equipment in accordance 

with NFPA standards. The area/office manager may elect to evacuate all 

persons and not fight any fire. 

Meet the following requirements in arranging for offsite assistance: 

a. Written Agreement. Secure a written agreement for fire response 

covering the nature and type of assistance available, if possible. 

Otherwise, provide a letter to the area/office manager, stating the nature of 

the assistance, together with the details covering the equipment and 

personnel to be made available. The agreement must be signed and dated, 

and reviewed at least annually. 

b. Standpipe and Hydrant Connections. When you receive offsite 

assistance, make sure that standpipe and hydrant connections are 

compatible with the equipment available from the fire department 

providing the assistance. 

c. Reporting. Post emergency telephone numbers and reporting 

instructions at the job site. 

10.3.2 Maintenance. Inspect and maintain fire protection systems, alarms, 

and fire extinguishers in accordance with NFPA standards. All equipment 

must be inspected periodically according to inspection table 10-1 and after 

each use. 
Section 10—Fire Prevention 

and Protection 

October 2009 10-7 

10.3.3 Fire Extinguishers. Select fire extinguishers for a given situation 

according to the character of the fire(s) anticipated, the construction and 

occupancy of the facility, the vehicle or hazard to be protected, ambienttemperature conditions, and other factors identified in NFPA Standard 10. 

Select fire extinguishers for the class(es) of hazards to be protected in 

accordance with the following: 

a. Class A hazards—ordinary combustibles. Use water and 

multipurpose dry chemical type fire extinguishers. 

b. Class B hazards—flammable liquids. Use aqueous film forming 

foam (FFF), film forming fluoroprotein foam (FFFP), carbon dioxide, 

and dry chemical type extinguishers. 

c. Class C hazards—energized electrical equipment. Use carbon 

dioxide and dry chemical type fire extinguishers. Note: carbon 

dioxide fire extinguishers equipped with metal horns are not safe for 

use on fires in energized electrical equipment and, therefore, are not 

classified for use on Class C hazards. 

d. Class D hazards—combustible metals. Use fire extinguishers that 

are approved for use on the specific combustible metal hazard. 

10.3.4. Water Supply. Install a temporary or permanent water supply with 

sufficient flow volume and duration to supply the standpipes, hose stations, 

and sprinkler systems, before or during the construction of the facility to be 

protected. In permanent structures under contract in which standpipes are 

installed, connect the standpipe to the water supply, install the standpipe 

concurrently with construction of the structure, and maintain the standpipe in 

operable condition for fire protection use. Provide the standpipes with fire 

department connections on the outside of the structure, conspicuously marked, 

and located in an accessible location at street or road level. 

10.3.5 Burning Areas. Do not burn waste materials, except in an approved 

and permitted incinerator. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

10-8 October 2009 

Table 10-1.—Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment 

Item 

Inspection 

interval Procedure 

1. All portable 

and wheeled 

extinguishers 

Monthly 

Annually 

Ensure that all extinguishers are in the proper 

locations, have clear access, and are plainly visible. 

Visually inspect extinguishers for damage, leakage, 

and to determine if they are fully charged and 

operable. If necessary, recharge extinguisher and 

correct deficiencies. 

Reference NFC Standard 10, “Standard for Portable 

Fire Extinguishers.” Ensure annual maintenance of 

extinguishers according to specific type. 

2. Main 

generator 

CO2 system 

Weekly 

Monthly 

Semiannually 

Annually 

Check nozzles for physical damage. Ensure that selfclosing doors or automatically releasing doors are in 

place. For low-pressure CO2 systems, check the 

liquid level in each low pressure gauge and refill if 

loss is greater than 10 percent. 

Check electrical control circuits and indicating lights. 

Check for signs of leakage at cylinders. Check for 

signs of physical damage to system components. 

Weigh all cylinders and refill if necessary. Operate 

control heads. Test and check system in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Conduct an actuating test of the system. Test all 

system components without discharging CO2. 

3. Sprinkler 

systems 

Weekly 

Monthly 

Quarterly 

Semiannually 

Annually 

Inspect sealed control valves. Check that water 

supply valves are open. Inspect condition of sprinkler 

heads. Maintain an 18-inch clear space. For dry pipe 

systems, inspect air and water pressure gauges, and 

record readings. 

Inspect fire department connections. Inspect control 

valves. Ensure that water supply valves are open. 

Determine dry pipe priming water level. Flow- test 

main drains. Test water flow alarms in wet pipe 

systems. Test low-air pressure alarms and water flow 

alarms in dry pipe systems. Exercise post indicator 

and valves. 

Close and drain cold weather valves in the fall, before 

freezing weather, and again in the spring, after 

freezing weather has passed. 

Test the freezing point of antifreeze solutions. Triptest the dry pipe valve on dry pipe systems. Lubricate 

all valve stems. Clean strainers, if installed. Drain all 

low pint drains on dry pipe systems.
Section 10—Fire Prevention 

and Protection 

October 2009 10-9 

Table 10-1.—Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment (continued) 

Item 

Inspection 

interval Procedure 

3. Sprinkler 

systems 

(continued) 

After 

50 years 

After the first 50 years that a sprinkler system has 

been in place, remove a representative sample of 

heads and send to a lab for testing. 

4. Fire pumps Monthly 

Annually 

Check the pressure of all gauges. Check for 

automatic indication of controller lights. Ensure that 

all valves are open. Conduct operational test, check 

packing gland tightness, suction, and discharge 

pressure gauges. 

Test pump performance. Test waterflow and alarm 

switches. Check valve position. Verify pump speed 

at each flow. Record suction and discharge pressure 

at each flow. 

5. Fire doors 

and dampers 

Monthly 

Quarterly 

Annually 

Inspect and manually operate doors. 

Test operation of automatic fire doors. 

Lubricate rollers, clean-out channels, and moving 

parts. Check operation of dampers and moving parts. 

6. Water 

supply 

systems 

Weekly 

Annually 

Check air pressure in pressure tanks. Check water 

level in storage and pressure tanks. Check control 

valves (usually in open position). 

Check accessibility and condition of fire department 

connections. Check condition of storage tanks for 

scale or rust; check storage tank access; check 

condition of paint or fabric. Conduct a flow test. 

7. Fire hose 

stations 

Monthly 

Semiannually 

Annually 

Every 5 

years 

Inspect nozzles, hoses, and connections. Replace 

defective hose and discard old hose. 

Check dry barrel hydrants for leaks and cracks; check 

the operating nut for wear and the nozzle threads for 

damage. 

Test flow and hydrant pressure. Wet barrel hydrants 

are checked for leaks and cracks, wear on the 

operating nut and nozzle threads. Thoroughly inspect 

and rerack hoses. Use graphite to lubricate swing-out 

hose racks or hose reels. 

Hydrostatically test dry standpipes. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

10-10 October 2009 

Table 10-1.—Inspection schedule for fire protection equipment (continued) 

Item 

Inspection 

interval Procedure 

8. Fire alarm 

systems 

Monthly 

Quarterly 

Semiannual 

Annually 

Ensure that all equipment is operable. Illuminate 

lamps and LEDs on fire alarm annunciator panels. 

Conduct operational test of engine generator (if 

connected to system). Check water level of 

rechargeable batteries. Test initiating and signaling 

device circuits. 

Test two-way communications. 

Check fuse ratings; check voltage of each 

rechargeable battery cell. Test all remote 

annunciators. Test smoke detectors. 

Test supervisory device circuits. Test primary and 

secondary power supply. Test lamps and LEDs. 

9. Transformer 

fog system 

Weekly 

Annually 

Every 5 

years 

Check pilot lights indicating that system is operable 

and that all control valves are open. Check that 

nozzles have not been blocked or repositioned. 

Test the control valve and automatic detection 

equipment (a full operational test with water flowing is 

not necessary). Inspect all piping for corrosion and 

ensure proper drainage. 

A full flow test of the system is required at least every 

5 years. This should be conducted when the 

transformer bank is out of service. 
October 2009 11-1 

Section 11 

Standards for Material Handling, Storage, 

and Disposal 

This section sets forth the requirements for handling, storage, and disposal of 

material. It specifically addresses the requirements for storing material in an open 

yard; stacking bagged material; storing material in bulk; storing lumber; storing 

bricks and masonry blocks; handling and storing cement and lime; handling and 

storing reinforcing sheet and structural steel; handling and storing pipe, conduit, 

and cylindrical material; storing sand, gravel, and crushed stone; handling and 

storing flammable and combustible liquids; handling asphalt and tar products; 

handling liquified petroleum gas; and housekeeping. 

11.1 General Requirements for Storage of Materials 

Store materials in a planned and orderly manner that does not endanger employee 

safety. Ensure stacks, tiers, and piles are stable and stacked to aid safe handling 

and loading. Store hazardous materials in accordance with the individual 

requirements. 

Store all materials on pallets to discourage rodent infestation. Immediately clean 

up spills and leaks that create such rodent habitat. 

Use slings to hoist bagged material, lumber, bricks, masonry blocks, and similar 

loosely stacked materials only if the slings are fully secured against falling by 

straps, sideboards, nets, or other suitable devices. 

11.2 Storing Materials in an Open Yard 

Storing materials in an open yard requires attention to combustible materials, 

access, powerlines, and fire protection. 

11.2.1 Combustible Materials. Stack combustible materials securely. 

Stacks or piles must be no more than 16 feet high. Store combustible material 

at least 10 feet away from a building or structure. 

11.2.2 Access. Driveways between and around combustible storage piles 

must be at least 15 feet wide. Keep them free from accumulations of material 

or rubbish. Use a map grid system of 50 by 150 feet when planning 

driveways in open-yard combustible material storage areas. 

11.2.3 Powerlines. Do not store materials under power lines or where 

materials may block egress or emergency equipment. 

11.2.4 Fire Protection. Provide portable fire extinguishing equipment rated 

2-A:40-B:C at accessible marked locations in the yard so that the nearest 

extinguisher is no more than 50 feet away for a Class B hazard or 75 feet 

away for a Class A hazard. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-2 October 2009 

11.3 Requirements for Storing Materials Indoors 

Storing materials indoors requires attention to access, fire prevention and 

protection, floor loading, and overhead hazards. Buildings under construction 

require special precautions. 

11.3.1 Access. Place or store materials so they do not interfere with access 

ways, doorways, electrical panels, fire extinguishers, or hoistways. Do not 

obstruct access ways or exits with accumulations of scrap or materials. Aisles 

must be wide enough to accommodate forklifts or firefighting equipment. 

11.3.2 Fire Prevention. When storing, handling, and piling materials, 

consider the fire characteristics. Store noncompatible materials that may 

create a fire hazard at least 25 feet apart or separate them with a barrier having 

at least a 1-hour fire rating. Pile material to minimize internal fire spread and 

to provide convenient access for firefighting. 

11.3.3 Fire Doors. Maintain a 24-inch clearance around the travel path of 

fire doors. 

11.3.4 Sprinklers. Maintain at least an 18-inch clearance between stored 

materials and sprinkler heads. 

11.3.5 Heating Appliances. Maintain at least a 3-foot clearance between 

stored materials and unit heaters, radiant space heaters, duct furnaces, and 

flues or the clearances shown on the approval agency label. 

11.3.6 Fire Protection. Emergency fire equipment must be readily 

accessible and in good working order. 

11.3.7 Floor Loading. Conspicuously post load limits in all storage areas, 

except for floors or slabs on grade. 

11.3.8 Buildings Under Construction. Store materials inside buildings 

under construction at least 6 feet away from any hoistway or inside floor 

openings, and 10 feet away from an exterior wall that does not extend above 

the top of the material stored. 

11.4 Requirements for Stacking Bagged Material 

Stack bagged materials by stepping back the layers and cross-keying the bags at 

least every 10 bags high, except when restrained by walls or partitions of adequate 

strength. 

11.5 Requirements for Storing Material in Bulk 

Ensure entry to bulk storage locations, such as silos, hoppers, tanks, or bins 

(which are also classified as confined spaces) complies with OSHA requirements 

and local operating procedures. 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-3 

11.6 Requirements for Lumber Storage 

Stack lumber on level and solidly supported sills so that the stacks are stable. Do 

not pile lumber more than 16 feet high. 

11.7 Requirements for Storing Bricks and Masonry Blocks 

Stack bricks and masonry blocks on level and solid surfaces. 

11.7.1 Bricks. Stack bricks no more than 7 feet high. Step back a loose 

brick stack at least 2 inches for every foot of height above 4 feet. Stack 

packaged brick no more than three units high. 

11.7.2 Masonry Blocks. Step back masonry blocks one-half block per tier 

above the 6-foot level. 

11.8 Requirements for Handling and Storing Cement and Lime 

Handling or storing cement or lime requires a job hazard analysis (JHA). Lime 

requires careful storage and handling procedures. 

11.8.1 Cement and Lime. Employees must wear appropriate personal 

protective equipment, as specified in the “Personal Protective Equipment” 

section and as identified in the JHA. Provide washing facilities, hand cream, 

chemical barrier cream, or similar preparations for protection from dermatitis. 

11.8.2 Lime. Store unslaked lime in a dry area and, because it presents a fire 

hazard, separate it from other materials. 

11.9 Requirements for Handling and Storing Reinforcing, Sheet, and 

Structural Steel 

Stack steel to prevent sliding, rolling, spreading, or falling. 

Use lagging (sleeve) when steel is handled by a crane or forklift to aid safe 

rigging. 

11.10 Requirements for Handling and Storing Pipe, Conduit, and 

Cylindrical Material 

Make sure cylindrical materials are stable when storing or handling. 

11.10.1 Stacking. Place pipe, conduit bar stock, and other cylindrical 

materials in racks or stack and block them on a firm, level surface to prevent 

spreading, rolling, or falling. Use either a pyramided or battened stack. Step 

back battened stacks at least one unit per tier and securely chock them on both 

sides of the stack. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-4 October 2009 

11.10.2 Removal. Remove round stock (e.g., wood poles, pipe, and conduit) 

from a stack from the ends of the stock. 

11.10.3 Unloading. Unload carriers so that employees are not exposed to the 

unsecured load. 

11.10.4 Taglines. Use taglines when working with round stock. 

11.11 Requirements for Storing Sand, Gravel, and Crushed Stone 

Locate stockpiles to provide safe access for withdrawing material. Material or 

vertical faces must not overhang. 

Store material against walls or partitions only in an amount that will not endanger 

the stability of the wall or partition. 

11.12 Requirements for Handling Flammable and Combustible 

Liquids 

Unless defined otherwise, terms used in this subsection are the same as those in 

the flammable and combustible liquids code, NFPA 30, or 29 CFR 1910.106. 

11.12.1 Classification of Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 

Flammable and combustible liquids are classified as follows: 

a. Flammable Liquids (Class I Liquids): 

1. Class I—Flashpoint below 100 °F (38 °C) 

2. Class IA—Flashpoint below 73 °F (23 °C) and boiling point below 

100 °F (38 °C) 

3. Class IB—Flashpoint below 73 °F (23 °C) and boiling point at or 

above 100 °F (38 °C) 

4. Class IC—Flashpoint at or above 73 °F (23 °C) but below 100 °F 

(38 °C) 

b. Combustible Liquids (Class II and III Liquids): 

1. Class II—Flashpoint at or above 100 °F (38 °C) and below 140 °F 

(60 °C) 

2. Class III—Flashpoint at or above 140 °F (60 °C) 

11.12.2 Class IA Flammable Liquids 

a. Restricted Use. Because of the extreme explosion hazard of Class IA 

liquids, purchase them only after you have reviewed the MSDS and the 

storage, dispensing, and use procedures have been approved. Submittals 

for approval must provide the name and description of the liquid, its 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-5 

characteristics, a detailed description of its intended use, the MSDS, and 

the safety and health precautions. This requirement does not apply to 

small quantities of aerosol starter fluid used for engines. 

b. Substitute Product. Wherever practical, use a less hazardous product. 

c. Controlled Use. A competent person must supervise storage, 

dispensing, and use of Class IA liquids, including design of the storage 

and dispensing system. 

11.12.3 Toxicity of Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Most 

flammable and combustible liquids are highly toxic. Use them only after 

determining their toxic characteristics. In handling toxic liquids, follow the 

appropriate safety and health requirements in the “Occupational Health” 

section. 

11.12.4 Closed Tanks and Containers 

a. Approved Types. Use only the following approved and labeled closed 

tanks and containers to store, handle, and dispense flammable and 

combustible liquids. 

1. Original Container. Store and use flammable and combustible 

liquids in the original Department of Transportation (DOT) shipping 

containers, as shown in table 11-1. However, store only up to 1-day’s 

use in the work area, up to a maximum of 25 gallons of a Class 1A 

liquid or a maximum of 120 gallons of any other class of liquid. When 

dispensing and using smaller quantities of flammable and combustible 

liquids, dispense them into properly labeled, approved safety 

containers. Exception: You may store and handle highly viscous 

(extremely hard to pour) liquids in any size original container. Liquids 

that are transferred from labeled containers to portable containers for 

immediate use are exempt from labeling. 

2. Safety Can. An approved container holding no more than 5 

gallons with a spring-closing lid, spout cover, and designed to safely 

relieve internal pressure when subjected to fire or heat exposure. 

3. Drum/Barrel. An approved container holding more than 5 gallons 

but no more than 60 gallons. 

4. Portable Tanks. An approved, closed storage vessel holding more 

than 60 but no more than 660 gallons and not intended to be a fixed 

installation. 

5. Tanks. Any vessel holding more than 60 gallons, intended for 

fixed installation, is not used for processing. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-6 October 2009 

Table 11-1.—Maximum allowable size of containers and portable tanks, combustible 

Flammable liquids Liquids 

Container type Class IA Class IB Class IB Class II Class III 

Glass 

Metal (other than 

approved DOT drums) 

or approved plastic 

Safety cans 

Metal drums (DOT 

specifications) 

Approved portable 

tanks 

Polyethylene DOT 

specification 34,or as 

authorized by DOT 

exemption 

1 pint 

1 gallon 

2 gallon 

60 gallons 

660 gallons 

1 gallon 

1 quart 

5 gallons 

5 gallons 

60 gallons 

660 gallons 

5 gallons 

1 gallon 

5 gallons 

5 gallons 

60 gallons 

660 gallons 

5 gallons 

1 gallon 

5 gallons 

5 gallons 

60 gallons 

660 gallons 

60 gallons 

5 gallons 

5 gallons 

5 gallons 

60 gallons 

660 gallons 

60 gallons 

11.12.5 Approved Storage Cabinets 

a. General Design and Construction. The design, construction, and 

approval of storage cabinets must comply with NFPA 30. 

11.12.6 Requirements for Storing Flammable or Combustible Liquids 

a. Indoor Storage. Do not store flammable and combustible liquids 

indoors, except as follows: 

1. Store no more than 25 gallons in a room or single fire area. 

2. Store no more than 60 gallons of Class I or II liquids, or more than 

120 gallons of Class III liquids, in an approved cabinet. Locate no 

more than three such cabinets in a single fire area. 

3. You may store larger quantities in separated indoor storage areas 

when such storage meets the requirements of NFPA 30, Section 4-4, 

“Design, Construction, and Operation of Inside Storage Areas.” 

4. Place at least one 2-A:40-B:C fire extinguisher 10 feet to 30 feet 

away from the stored material or cabinet. 

5. Place at least one 2-A:40-B:C fire extinguisher outside of, but not 

more than 10 feet from, the door opening into an inside liquid storage 

area. 

b. Outdoor Storage. Do not store flammable and combustible liquids 

outdoors, except as follows: 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-7 

1. Above ground in approved containers with no more than 60-gallon 

capacity, subject to the following restrictions: 

(a) The total capacity of any one group of containers stored 

together must not exceed 1,100 gallons. Each group of containers 

must be at least 5 feet apart, and each group must be at least 20 feet 

away from any building or other combustibles. 

(b) Each group of containers must be adjacent to an access way at 

least 12 feet wide to facilitate the use of firefighting equipment. 

2. Above ground in approved portable tanks with no more than 

660-gallon capacity, providing that you: 

(a) Keep a 5-foot clear area around groups of two or more tanks with 

a combined capacity of more than 2,200 gallons. 

(b) Keep portable tanks at least 20 feet away from any building or 

other combustibles. 

(c) Equip portable storage tanks with emergency venting and other 

devices, as required in NFPA 30. 

(d) Locate each tank adjacent to an access way at least 12 feet wide to 

facilitate use of firefighting equipment. 

3. Above ground in approved tanks installed in accordance with 

NFPA 30, Section 2-3, “Installation of Outside Above Ground Tanks.” 

4. Dike storage areas at least 12 inches high or grade and slope them, and 

seal them with a 50-mil plastic compatible sheeting or equivalent liner to 

contain leaks and spills equal to the capacity of all tanks or containers in 

each area. Keep the area free from vegetation or combustible material 

within 10 feet of the storage area perimeter. 

5. Place at least one portable fire extinguisher unit rated not less than 

2-A:40-B:C 25 feet to 75 feet away from each portable tank or group of 

tanks or containers. 

11.12.7 Handling and Dispensing Flammable or Combustible Liquids 

a. Dispensing Area. Separate areas where you transfer more than 5 

gallons of flammable or combustible liquids at a time from other 

operations by at least 25 feet or by a partition with a minimum 1-hour fire 

rating. Use drainage or an equally effective method to contain spills. 

b. Ventilation. Provide adequate natural or mechanical ventilation to 

maintain the concentrations of flammable vapor below 10 percent of the 

lower explosive limit (LEL). 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-8 October 2009 

c. Grounding. Transferring Class I flammable liquids from one 

container to another requires bonding of the containers and the transfer 

system. Electrically ground and bond all dispensing systems. 

d. Dispensing. Withdraw or transfer flammable and combustible liquids 

into vessels, containers, or tanks only (1) through a closed piping system, 

(2) from safety cans, (3) by means of a device drawing through the top, or 

(4) from containers or tanks by gravity or pump through a listed selfclosing valve. Do not transfer by injecting pressurized air into a tank or 

container. Use approved dispensing devises and nozzles. The dispensing 

units must be protected against collision damage. 

e. Lighting and Electrical Equipment. Use only electrical lighting to 

illuminate areas where Class I flammable liquids are handled or dispensed 

or where flammable vapor may be present. Wiring and all electrical 

equipment must meet the requirements of NFPA designation: Class I, 

Division 2, of the National Electrical Code. 

f. Covered Containers. Keep Class I and II liquids in covered containers 

when not in use. 

g. Flame and Ignition. Do not permit open flame, smoking, or other 

sources of ignition within at least 50 feet of areas where Class I flammable 

liquids are dispensed or used. Post approved “No Smoking” signs in such 

areas. 

h. Leakage or Spillage. Clean up leaking or spilled flammable or 

combustible liquids promptly and dispose of them safely. 

i. Refuse Containers. Provide self-closing metal refuse containers in all 

areas where employees use or dispense flammable or combustible liquids. 

11.12.8 Requirements for Refueling 

a. Equipment. Ensure that the design and installation of tanks and 

equipment used to refuel vehicles or equipment (fueled with flammable or 

combustible liquids) comply with the applicable provisions of the NFPA 

standards or nationally recognized testing laboratories or have the 

approval of the Government agency having jurisdiction. 

b. Tank Truck. Ensure that tank trucks comply with the requirements 

published in NFPA 385, “Standard for Flammable and Combustible 

Liquid Tank Vehicles.” 

c. Dispensing Stations. Mount dispensing devices, except those attached 

to containers, on a concrete platform elevated at least 5 inches above 

grade. Use guardrails or posts to protect them from collision with a motor 

vehicle. 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-9 

d. Dispensing Hose. To dispense flammable and combustible liquids, 

use an approved-type hose with an automatic self-closing valve or nozzle 

without a latch-open device. Ensure that a hanger or hose retracting 

system is in place to protect the hose from traffic abuse. 

e. Electrical Equipment. Ensure that electrical wiring, pumps, and 

equipment meet the appropriate requirements of NFPA designation, Class 

I of the National Electrical Code. Provide clearly marked and accessible 

switches at a location remote from dispensing devices to shut off all power 

to devices in an emergency. 

f. Refueling Equipment. During refueling, shut down vehicles or 

equipment that use gasoline, liquified petroleum gas (LPG), or other 

flammable or combustible liquid fuels. An exception is diesel equipment 

when fueled in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Use guardrails or posts to protect refueling tanks or dispensing islands 

from vehicular damage. 

g. Smoking. Post a “No Smoking Within 50 Feet” sign on all mobile 

refueling equipment and in established refueling areas. 

h. Emergency Shut-Off Switch. Ensure that an emergency shut-off 

switch is within 50 shall be located within 50 feet of the fuel dispensing 

equipment. Post a conspicuous sign to identify the switch location. 

i. Fire Protection. Provide each refueling area with one or more listed 

fire extinguishers with a minimum classification of 40B:C. Locate a fire 

extinguisher within 100 feet of each pump, dispenser, underground fill 

pipe opening, and lubrication or service room. 

11.13 Requirements for Handling Asphalt and Tar Products 

Employees who handle or work with these materials must complete a JHA, 

including exposure determinations. Make available and ensure employees follow 

the MSDS for storing, handling, and applying these materials. 

11.13.1 Protective Clothing and Equipment. Give full consideration to 

protective clothing, respiratory protection, and skin protection, as specified in 

the “Personal Protective Equipment” section, to protect employees handling or 

applying these materials. 

11.13.2 Confined Spaces. In enclosed or confined areas where hot tar, 

asphalt, enamel, or similar materials are heated or applied, the operation must 

conform fully with the “Confined Spaces” section. 

11.13.3 Heating Kettles. Do not leave asphalt or tar kettles unattended, 

when in use. Place them on a firm, level base and protect them from 

overturning. Kettles must have an effective lid or hood. They must have an 

operable temperature indicator and limiting device ensuring the asphalt or tar 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-10 October 2009 

remains at no less than 50 EF below the flashpoint. Do not use kettles in 

confined or unventilated spaces, underground, in conduits, or in or on 

enclosed buildings or structures. 

11.13.4 Fire Protection. Provide a fire extinguisher, rated not less than 

2-A:40-B:C, where heating devices or heating kettles are in use. 

11.13.5 Handling. Provide adequate unobstructed runways or access ways 

for employees handling hot materials. Employees must not carry hot 

materials up or down ladders. Instead, provide adequate hoisting devices. 

11.13.6 Thinners. Do not use gasoline or similar volatile liquids as thinners. 

11.13.7 Hand Spraying. The nozzle person applying hot tar asphalt must not 

work under the hoses supplying the material to the spray nozzle. Use flexible 

metallic hoses fitted with insulated handles in hand spraying operations. 

11.13.8 Housekeeping. Keep distributors, retorts, hoses, and related 

equipment reasonably free of asphalt and tar accumulations. 

11.14 Requirements for Handling Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) 

Store, handle, install, and use LPG and systems in accordance with NFPA 58, 

29 CFR 1910.110(f), and 29 CFR 1926.153. Cylinders must meet DOT 

specifications published in 49 CFR, Part 178, “Shipping Container 

Specifications.” 

11.14.1 Hazardous Locations. Do not use LPG containers and equipment in 

unventilated spaces, below grade in pits or trenches, below deck, or in 

confined areas. 

11.14.2 Tubing. Use only tubing or piping approved for use in LPG systems. 

Do not use aluminum or polyvinyl piping or tubing. 

11.14.3 Hose. Use only hoses labeled “LP-gas or LPG.” Hose must have a 

minimum working pressure of 250 pounds per square inch. 

11.14.4 Valves and Accessories. Valves, fittings, and accessories connected 

directly to the container, including primary shutoff valves, must have a 

minimum working gauge pressure of 250 pounds per square inch and be 

designed for LPG service. 

11.14.5 Shutoff Valves. Connections to containers, except safety relief 

connections, liquid level gauging devices, and plugged openings, must have a 

shutoff valve located as close to the container as possible. Shutoff valves 

must not be located between the safety relief device and the container, except 

when the location of the shutoff valve allows the fully required capacity flow 

through the safety relief device. 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-11 

11.14.6 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each container with one or more 

approved safety relief valves. These valves must allow free venting to the 

outer air. The discharge must be 5 feet away from any building opening. 

Place container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents at least 5 feet 

from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical 

ventilation air intakes. 

11.14.7 Dispensing 

a. Portable Containers. Fill portable containers from storage containers 

outside and at least 50 feet away from the nearest building. 

b. Motor Vehicles. Fill fuel containers on motor vehicles from bulk 

storage containers at least 10 feet away from a masonry-walled building 

and at least 25 feet away from any other building or structure. 

c. Refueling. Shut down equipment using LPG during refueling. 

11.14.8 Storage of Cylinders and Containers. Store LPG containers and 

cylinders not in use outside of buildings or structures, at not less than the 

following distances away from the nearest building or combustible material 

storage. 

Minimum distance 

Quantity of LP-gas stored 

(pounds) (a) and (b) 

(feet) 

(c) and (d) 

(feet) 

(e) 

(feet) 

720 or less 

721 to 2,500 

2,501 to 6,000 

6,001 to 10,000 

Over 10,000 

0 

0 

10 

20 

25 

0 

10 

10 

20 

25 

5 

10 

10 

20 

25 

(a) nearest building or storage area; (b) line of adjoining property; 

(c) thoroughfares or sidewalks; (d) line of adjoining property used for public 

gathering; (e) dispensing station. 

11.14.9 Fire Protection. Provide storage locations with at least one 

accessible portable fire extinguisher rated not less than 2-A:40-B:C, between 

25 feet and 75 feet away from the container. 

11.15 Requirements for Storing and Handling Paints, Varnishes, and 

Thinners 

Storing and handling paints, varnishes, or thinners requires special attention to 

flammability characteristics. 

11.15.1 Storage. Store and dispense paints, varnishes, lacquers, thinners, and 

other volatile paints or coatings according to their flammability 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

11-12 October 2009 

characteristics. Tightly close containers when not in use; store no more than a 

1-day supply in buildings under construction. 

11.15.2 Ventilation. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent hazardous 

concentrations of flammable vapors from accumulating where employees 

dispense or apply paints or coatings. 

11.15.3 Spray Painting. Do not allow smoking, open flame, exposed 

heating elements, or other sources of ignition where employees spray 

flammable or combustible paints or coating. Spray painting booths and 

equipment must be in accordance with NFPA 33, “Standard for Spray 

Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials.” 

11.15.4 Personal Protective Equipment. Make exposure determinations for 

employees who have been exposed to paints or coatings potentially hazardous 

to their health to document exposure and, when appropriate, provide 

appropriate protective equipment and hazard training. 

11.15.5 Electrostatic Paint Spraying 

a. Electrical. Locate transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and 

other electrical portions of the equipment, with exception of the gun and 

its connection to the power supply, outside the spraying area. 

b. Grounding. Ground the handle of the spray gun with a conductive 

device to ensure the gun and the operator are at the same ground potential. 

11.16 Housekeeping 

Keep work and storage areas clean and orderly and in a sanitary condition. Keep 

stairways, access ways, and exits free from scrap, supplies, materials, or 

equipment. 

11.16.1 Waste Disposal. Collect, store, and remove combustible waste 

products at the end of each workday or at the end of each work shift. Use 

only noncombustible containers to dispose of waste and rubbish and equip 

them with fitted or self-closing covers. Promptly remove and dispose of 

spills of flammable or combustible liquids. Place scrap lumber in containers 

and do not allow it to accumulate in work areas. Remove or bend over 

protruding nails unless the scrap lumber is placed directly in containers for 

removal. 

11.16.2 Segregation of Materials and Waste. Consider storage segregation 

precautions for all materials. Use MSDS to determine appropriate storage 

segregation. Identify and label segregated material containers. Following are 

some examples of materials that must be segregated: 

a. Ordinary combustibles such as paper, wood, and natural fiber fabrics. 
Section 11—Standards for Material 

Handling, Storage, and Disposal 

October 2009 11-13 

b. Oily or flammable materials, such as saturated oily or solvent rags. 

c. Corrosive and caustic materials, such as batteries. 

d. Infectious materials that may cause infection, disease, or death. 

e. Reactive materials that may self-decompose or self-ignite because of 

heat, chemical reaction, friction, or impact. 

f. Radioactive materials. 

g. Toxic materials that may be fatal if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed 

through the skin. 

11.16.3 Outdoor Housekeeping. Keep the areas adjacent to facilities free 

from rubbish, waste, and tall, dry vegetation. Place combustible waste 

materials stored outdoors to await subsequent disposal at least 20 feet away 

from facilities. 

11.16.4 Tools and Equipment. To prevent tripping or injury, keep floors 

clear of tools and portable equipment. Adequately secure tools, materials, and 

equipment where a tripping hazard exists. 

11.16.5 Wind. Store loose or light materials on roofs or unenclosed height 

only if they are safely tied down or secured. 

11.16.6 Sacks and Bags. Remove empty bags that contained cement, lime, 

or other dust-producing material from the work area at least daily. 

11.16.7 Working Aloft. Provide containers to store or carry rivets, bolts, 

drift pins, and similar items. Secure containers against accidental 

displacement. 

11.16.8 Excavated Materials. Keep roads and walkways clear of excavated 

materials wherever possible. Where this is not possible, adequately post or 

barricade these areas and provide other access. 

11.16.9 Dropping Material. Drop or throw waste material and debris more 

than 6 feet only if you: 

a. Completely enclose the area into which the material is dropped with 

barricades at least 6 feet back from the projected edge of the opening or 

level above. Post signs warning of the hazard at each level. 

b. Install safely designed chutes providing protection for persons below. 

Fully enclose chutes for debris and scrap for their entire run except for 

openings for inserting materials. Equip such openings with covers or 

enclosures. 
October 2009 12-1 

Section 12 

Electrical Safety Requirements 

This section sets forth requirements for electrical safety. It specifically addresses 

working in restricted areas; working near exposed energized overhead lines or 

parts; operating equipment near radio and microwave transmission towers; 

working on electrical equipment and systems; personal protective grounding; 

temporary wiring; disconnect and overcurrent protection; ground-fault protection; 

hazardous locations; wet locations; and battery charging. 

12.1 General Electrical Safety Requirements 

All electrical work practices must comply with applicable sections of the 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Fire Protection 

Association (NFPA), National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, 

and State adopted electrical codes. 

12.1.1 Approval Required. Use only electrical wire, conduit, apparatus, and 

equipment for the specific application that is approved or listed by 

Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or Factory Mutual Corporation (FMC). 

Install and use listed, labeled, or certified equipment according to the 

instructions included in the listing, labeling, or certification. 

12.1.2 Qualified Persons. Only qualified personnel familiar with code 

requirements, safety standards, and experienced in the type work may work 

on electrical circuits and equipment. NFPA 70E and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 

contain references for training requirements. See attachment at the end of this 

section. 

12.1.3 Safety Requirements Before Performing Electrical Work. The 

employer will determine, by inquiry, direct observation, or instruments, the 

location of any part of an energized electric power circuit, exposed or 

concealed. If the work may cause any person, tool, or machine to penetrate 

the boundaries set forth in table 12-1, de-energize the circuit(s) and ground 

them, as appropriate. Additionally, all of the following must be required: 

a. Underground Lines. Protect all underground lines with surface signs 

and a longitudinal warning tape buried 12 inches to 18 inches above the 

lines. Do not perform drilling, auguring, or material excavating operation 

within 6 feet of underground lines unless the lines have been deenergized. 

b. Job Briefing. The supervisor or designee must conduct a job briefing 

with affected workers. The supervisor or designee must hold additional 

job briefings if significant changes occur during the course of work. The 

briefing must cover the following: 

(1) Job Hazard Analysis (JHA). Identify all hazards associated with 

the job in a written JHA and discuss them. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-2 October 2009 

(2) Nonelectrical Hazards. Identify, in a written JHA, hazards not 

associated with the electrical work but expected to be encountered, 

and discuss them. 

(3) Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Provide and use the 

appropriate PPE needed to accomplish the job safely. Use flashprotection clothing in accordance with NFPA 70E if the job requires 

operating, racking, circuit breakers with the doors open, or, working 

within reaching distances of exposed energized parts. Employees 

working on energized lines and equipment rated at 440 volts or greater 

must use rubber gloves, hard hats, safety boots, and other approved 

protective equipment or hot-line tools that meet ASTM standards. 

12.1.4 Other Procedures. Perform procedures related to electrical work in 

accordance with the following: 

• FIST 1-1, Hazardous Energy Control Program 

• FIST 5-1, Personal Protective Grounding, and 

• Written Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) of each area office 

12.2 Restricted Areas 

12.2.1 General. Provide effective barriers or other means to ensure that 

people do not use areas with electrical circuits or equipment as passageways 

when energized lines or equipment are exposed. Effectively guard live parts 

of wiring or equipment to protect persons or objects from harmful contact. 

Use special tools insulated for the voltage when installing or removing fuses 

with one or both terminals energized. 

12.2.2 High-Voltage Equipment (over 600 volts nominal). Isolate exposed 

high-voltage equipment, such as transformer banks, open switches, and 

similar equipment with exposed energized parts to prevent unauthorized 

access. Isolation must consist of locked rooms, fences or screened enclosures, 

walls, partitions, or elevated locations. Keep entrances to isolated areas

locked when not under constant observation. Post DANGER—HIGH 

VOLTAGE warning signs at entrances to these areas. Properly ground 

conductive components, fences, guardrails, screens, partitions, walls, and 

equipment frames and enclosures. 

12.2.3. Temporary Fences. When extending a fence or removing it for work 

on high voltage equipment, erect a temporary fence of comparable 

construction and protection. Electrically bond the temporary fence to the 

existing fence. If the fence is more than 40 feet long, bond posts to the ground 

mat at no more than 40-foot intervals. Bond posts at each side of gates or 

openings to the ground mat/grid and install a bonding jumper across all gate 

hinges. Bond all corner posts to the ground mat. 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-3 

12.2.4 Perimeter Markings. Use approved perimeter markings to isolate 

restricted areas from designated work areas and entryways. Erect them before 

work begins and maintain them for the duration of work. Approved perimeter 

marking must be: 

a. Barrier Tape. Install red barrier tape printed with the words 

“DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE” around the perimeter of the work area 

and accessway approximately 42 inches above the floor or work surface. 

b. Synthetic Rope Barrier. Install a barrier of yellow or orange 

synthetic rope 36 to 45 inches from the floor with standard danger signs 

of non-conductive material attached at 10-foot intervals containing the 

words “DANGER–HIGH VOLTAGE.”

12.3 Working Near Exposed Energized Overhead Lines or Parts 

12.3.1 General. For troubleshooting and testing purposes only, qualified 

persons using proper test equipment and personal protective equipment must 

adhere to the boundaries shown in figure 12-1 and specified in table 12-1. For 

adjusting, tightening, calibrating or any other work, the circuits must be deenergized, or employees must use voltage-rated gloves and voltage-rated 

insulated tools. 

Figure 12.1—Boundaries. 

12.3.2 Low Voltage Testing. For low voltage troubleshooting and testing 

purposes only, i.e., under 480 volts, a qualified person may penetrate the 

prohibited approach boundary shown in table 12-1, column 5, with test 

instrument probes, leads, ct’s, etc. The qualified person must wear Class 00 

(500 volt-rated) gloves. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-4 October 2009 

12.3.3 Unqualified Person Restrictions. When a person without electrical 

training works on the ground or in an elevated position near overhead lines or 

any other exposed energized parts, supervisors and employees must ensure 

that the unqualified person and the longest conductive object they might 

contact or handle, can never come closer to any energized line or part than 

those distances listed in table 12-1, column 2, for energized lines or column 3 

for other exposed live parts. 

Table 12-1.—Approach boundaries to exposed energized conductors/parts for 

qualified employees (All dimensions are distances from energized conductor/part to 

employee) 

 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 

Limited approach boundaries

Nominal voltage 

phase to phase, or 

single phase 

Exposed 

moveable 

conductor 

Exposed fixed 

circuit part 

Restricted 

approach 

boundary 

includes 

inadvertent 

movement 

Prohibited 

approach 

boundary 

0 to 50 not specified not specified not specified not specified 

51 to 300 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in avoid contact avoid contact 

301 to 750 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in 1-ft 0-in 0-ft 1-in 

751 to 15 kV 10-ft 0-in 5-ft 0-in 2-ft 2-in 0-ft 7-in 

15.1 kV to 36 kV 10-ft 0-in 6-ft 0-in 2-ft 7-in 0-ft 10-in 

36.1 kV to 46 kV 10-ft 0-in 8-ft 0-in 2-ft 9-in 1-ft 5-in 

46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 10-ft 0-in 8-ft 0-in 3-ft 3-in 2-ft 1-in 

72.6 kV to 121 kV 10-ft 8-in 8-ft 0-in 3-ft 2-in 2-ft 8-in 

138 kV to 145 kV 11-ft 0-in 10-ft 0-in 3-ft 7-in 3-ft 1-in 

161 kV to 169 kV 11-ft 8-in 11-ft 8-in 4-ft 0-in 3-ft 6-in 

230 kV to 242 kV 13-ft 0-in 13-ft 0-in 5-ft 3-in 4-ft 9-in 

345 kV to 362 kV 15-ft 4-in 15-ft 4-in 8-ft 6-in 8-ft 0-in 

500 kV to 550 kV 19-ft 0-in 19-ft 0-in 11-ft 3-in 10-ft 9-in 

765 kV to 800 kV 23-ft 9-in 23-ft 9-in 14-ft 11-in 14-ft 5-in 

Notes: This table is taken from NFPA 70E table 2-1.3.4 and OSHA 29 CFR,1910.269 table R6. 

Limited Approach Boundaries. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified 

persons (at a distance from a live part). Unqualified persons must not cross this boundary unless 

accompanied by a qualified person. 

Restricted approach Boundary. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified 

persons (at a distance from a live part). The boundary’s proximity to a shock hazard requires the use 

of shock protection techniques and equipment when crossed. 

Prohibited Approach Boundary. A shock protection boundary to be crossed only by qualified 

persons (at a distance from a live part). When crossed by a body part or object, this boundary 

requires the same protection as if direct contact is made with a live part (i.e., requires voltage rated 

tools and voltage rated gloves and, in some cases, other voltage rated clothing). 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-5 

12.3.4 Equipment Transit Clearances. A signal or flag person must guide 

cranes, cherry pickers, high lifts, and other equipment in transit near exposed 

energized lines or parts at all times. Do not move any equipment or 

machinery under energized overhead high-voltage lines or near exposed 

energized parts, unless clearances listed in table 12-2 are maintained. Unload 

and lower any boom or mast to transport position. Ground the equipment 

while it is being transported. Two grounds must be leap-frogged as the 

vehicle is moved or the vehicles must be treated as energized. 

Table 12-2.—Equipment in transit clearances 

Up to 50 kV 4 feet 

50 kv up to and including 345 kV 10 feet 

Over 345 kV up to 750 kV 16 feet 

12.3.5 Sign Posting. Post all crossings where equipment will be moved 

under energized high-voltage line(s) with appropriate signs. Place the signs 

50 feet from and on both sides of the line(s). They must be large enough to be 

easily read from moving equipment. The sign must include the following 

information: 

• Warning of the high-voltage line. 

• Line voltage. 

• Maximum height of equipment that may pass under the line. 

Determine the maximum height of the equipment by subtracting the 

clearance distance shown in table 12-2 from the actual line to ground 

distance during maximum sag conditions. 

12.3.6 Equipment Operation Near Energized Lines. Prohibit equipment 

from coming any closer to overhead high-voltage lines or exposed energized 

parts than distances shown in table 12-3, unless both subparagraphs a. and b. 

below are satisfied, or subparagraph c. below is satisfied. 

a. Before beginning work, place a clearance, ground and de-energize the 

line or exposed energized parts, and implement hazardous energy control 

procedures to prevent re-energization. 

b. Equipment does not have the capability of coming within distances 

shown in table 12-3. 

c. In addition to the clearances in table 12-3, effectively ground all 

equipment with booms or extensions above cab level while it is operating 

in a substation, switchyard, or on a transformer deck, or any other location 

near high voltage energized lines/parts. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-6 October 2009 

Table 12-3.—Equipment clearances for 

operations near energized overhead 

lines 

Table of minimum clearances (ft) 

for nominal system voltages (kV) 

kV Ft 

50 (or less) 10 

69 11 

115 12 

230 16 

500 25 

Note: Table 12-3 shows only common Reclamation voltages and rounds them 

up to the nearest foot. For other voltages, use the 10-foot minimum and add 4 

inches for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts. For example, 60 kilovolts 

would be 10 feet plus 4 inches; rounding up to the nearest foot would require 

an 11-foot clearance. Always round up because the clearance is usually only 

an estimate. It is difficult, if not impossible, to accurately measure the actual 

distance unless you de-energize the line and/or equipment. 

12.3.7 Placard Posting in Equipment Cabs. Post a placard of minimum 

clearances (table 12-3) in the cabs of all cranes, cherry pickers, shovels, 

backhoes, and any other equipment with booms or extensions that could 

possibly contact high-voltage lines. Tables posted in machines must be of 

substantial material and suitable for the environment. 

12.4 Operating Equipment Near Radio and Microwave Transmission 

Towers 

12.4.1 General. Because of high frequency, low power output, and point-topoint transmissions, microwave transmissions do not present an induced 

charge hazard. However, many microwave towers are mounted on VHF radio 

transmission antennas. Therefore, the following safety precautions apply to 

all transmission towers. Vehicles will rarely need to be grounded at 

transmission towers. Tires contain carbon compounds and are conductive or 

semiconductive, and static charges will bleed off through tires and/or outriggers. However, voltage could build up if all tires were insulated from the 

earth by dry rip-rap or other insulation. 

12.4.2 Requirement. Shut down the transmitter or ground and test the 

equipment to determine if a hazard exists before working near any 

transmission tower where an electrical charge may be induced in the 

equipment or materials being handled. To conduct a test, connect an insulated 

wire to the vehicle and touch it to the tower base. If you see or hear the spark, 

you must ground the vehicle. 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-7 

12.4.3 Grounding Mobile Equipment Near Transmission Towers. If 

needed, ground the equipment to dissipate static electrical charge. On 

equipment with a rotating boom, attach a ground wire to the structure 

supporting the boom. Place and remove ground wires using hot-sticks or 

voltage-rated gloves. Attach the ground connection first (if possible, to the 

tower ground), then attach the other end to the equipment. These ground wires 

do not have to be sized to carry fault current. They need only to carry low 

level current to bleed off static voltage charges induced on the vehicle or lifted 

materials. Any convenient wire size that will mechanically withstand the 

service will be sufficient. A smaller conductor would carry the current, but an 

insulated #2 copper conductor is recommended for mechanical strength. 

12.4.4 Material Ground Wire. Also, attach a ground wire to conductive 

materials handled by hoisting equipment. Attach the ground connection first, 

then attach the other end on the materials. Alternatively, provide a ground 

jumper from the load to the required grounding conductor installed on the 

structure. 

12.5 Working on Electrical Equipment and Systems 

12.5.1 General. Electrical installations must comply with the applicable 

provisions of the current editions of the National Electrical Safety Code, 

National Electrical Code, OSHA Regulations, and the Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards. The Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual 

Laboratories, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory must approve 

or list electrical wire, conduit, apparatus, power tools and equipment, for the 

specific application. This approval/listing must appear on each piece of 

equipment or tool as part of the “marking or labeling” required below. 

12.5.2 Marking or Labeling. Do not use electrical equipment unless the 

manufacturer’s name, trademark, and other descriptive marking by which the 

manufacturer may be identified, is located on the equipment. Markings must 

also provide voltage, current, wattage, approvals/listings, and ratings as 

required by the edition of the National Electric Code in effect at the time of 

purchase. Markings must be sufficiently durability to withstand the 

environment. 

12.5.3 Working Space 

a. Figure 12-2 and table 12-4 provide access and working space distances 

around electrical equipment and enclosures, e.g., panelboards, motor 

controls, disconnects, etc., to permit ready and safe operation and 

maintenance. Keep working space clear at all times. 

b. Provide a working space of at least 30 inches horizontally where rear or 

side access is required to work on de-energized parts of enclosed 

equipment (see figure 12-3). 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-8 October 2009 

3.5 ft

Electrical

switchboard

480/277

Electrical

switchboard

480/277 3.5 ft

Do not service equipment

opposite each other at

the same time.

Figure 12-2.—Access and working space requirements around 

enclosures and equipment.

Table 12-4.—Working spaces around enclosures and equipment 

Working spaces 

Nominal voltage Minimum clear distance (ft) 

to ground Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 

0-150 3 3 3 

151-600 3 3.5 4 

601-2,500 3 4 5 

2,501-9,000 4 5 6 

9,001-25,000 5 6 6 

Condition 1 - Exposed live parts on one side and no live parts or grounded parts on 

the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively 

guarded by suitable wood or other insulating materials. Insulated wire or insulated 

busbars operating at not over 300 volts to ground shall not be considered live parts. 

Condition 2 - Exposed live parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. 

Consider concrete, brick, or tile walls grounded. 

Condition 3 - Exposed live parts on both sides of the work space (not guarded or 

enclosed, as provided in Condition 1) with the worker between. 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-9 

Figure 12-3.—Working space requirements for rear or side 

access. 

c. Doors and hinged panels. Doors and hinged panels must have at least at 

least a 90-degree opening. Keep working space clear at all times. Do not 

store parts, tools, and equipment in the clear space (see figure 12-4). 

30 in.

30 in.

30 in.

90

Panelboard Panelboard Panelboard

Figure 12-4.—Working space requirements for doors and 

hinged panels. 

12.5.4 Passageway Barriers. Provide effective barriers or other means 

(barrier tape) to ensure that areas containing electrical circuits or equipment 

are not used as passageways when energized lines or equipment are exposed 

for testing or maintenance. This includes open doors on motor control 

centers, and switchgear. 

Electrical

switchboard

480/277

Electrical

switchboard

480/277

3.5 ft 3.5 ft

Do not service equipment

opposite each other at

the same time.

Bolted

Panels

Bolted

Panels

Minimum

30 in.
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-10 October 2009 

12.6 Personal Protective Grounding 

12.6.1 General. Qualified persons must comply with applicable provisions 

of FIST Volume 5-1 “Personal Protective Grounding.” Include written 

grounding procedures in all clearances, special work permits, etc. The JHA 

must include the procedures, and employees must discuss them before 

beginning work. 

12.6.2 Over 600 Volts. Place grounds as close as possible to the work and 

within sight of the workers for all electrical circuits and equipment operated in 

excess of 600 volts. The clearance holder is personally responsible for proper 

placement and removal of protective grounds. 

12.6.3 Personal Protective Ground Cables. Personal protective grounds 

and clamps must be capable of conducting the calculated maximum fault 

current available for the time necessary to clear the fault. They must be sized 

in accordance with FIST 5-1. 

12.6.4 Prior to Applying Grounds. After implementing hazardous energy 

control, use a hot-stick “noise tester” or similar approved device of sufficient 

insulating capacity to verify that the circuit or equipment is de-energized 

before placing personal protective grounds. Test the voltage tester 

immediately before use on a known energized source of similar voltage before 

testing the equipment to be worked on. The circuit/equipment to be worked on 

must be considered energized while conducting the test. 

12.6.5 Placement and Removal of Personal Protective Grounds. After deenergization, install personal protective grounds so that all phases of lines and 

equipment are visibly and effectively bonded together in a multi-phase short 

and connected to ground at one point. Do not use single-phase personal 

protective grounds or grounding chains. Install personal protective grounds 

using a hot-stick or voltage-rated gloves on both sides of the work area, if 

possible. This precaution prevents a possible backfeed, especially when 

working on transformers and related equipment. When attaching grounds, 

attach the ground end first, and then attach the other end to the de-energized 

circuit. When removing personal protective grounds, first remove the 

grounding clamp from the de-energized circuit using a hot stick or voltagerated gloves, and then remove the other end from the ground connection. 

12.7 Temporary Wiring 

12.7.1 Installation. Temporary wiring must meet all the requirements of the 

National Electrical Code (NEC). Permit temporary wiring only during the 

period of construction, remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition. 

Remove temporary wiring immediately upon completion of construction or 

purposes for which the wiring was installed. Permit temporary wiring used 

for feeders and branch circuits in multi-conductor cord or cable assemblies or 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-11 

open conductors, and guard, bury, or isolate it by elevation to prevent 

accidental contact by personnel or equipment. Allow at least 10 feet of 

vertical clearance above walkways for circuits rated 600 volts or less. Support 

all exposed temporary wiring on insulators. Provide ground fault protection 

for personnel for all temporary wiring installations to comply with the 

National Electrical Code. 

12.7.2 Weatherproof. Conductors used in tunnels, shafts, trenches, and wet 

or damp locations must be of a type approved for the purpose as listed in 

Article 310 of the NEC. 

12.7.3 Bushings. Wiring installed in conduit must be equipped with 

bushings at ends of conduit. 

12.7.4 Receptacles. All receptacles must be of the grounding type and must 

be electrically connected to the equipment grounding conductor. Do not 

install receptacles on construction sites on branch circuits that supply 

temporary lighting. Do not connect receptacles to the same ungrounded 

conductor of multiwire circuits that supply temporary wiring. 

12.7.5 Lighting Strings. Temporary lighting strings must consist of 

nonconductive lamp sockets and connections permanently molded to the 

conductor insulation. Use lamp guards to protect bulbs attached to festoon 

lighting strings and extension cords. Promptly replace broken or defective 

bulbs. Protect all lights used for illumination from accidental contact or 

breakage. 

12.7.6 Extension Cords. Extension cords must be 3-wire grounded type, 

must be designated for hard service or extra hard service, and must be listed 

by the Underwriters Laboratories. Do not exceed the rated load. Use cords 

only in continuous lengths without splice. Do not use worn or frayed 

extension cords. To protect cable assemblies, flexible cords, and cables from 

damage, support them in place with approved staples, cable ties, straps, or 

similar type fittings installed to prevent damage. 

12.8 Disconnect and Overcurrent Protection 

12.8.1 Marking. Plainly mark, label, or arrange switches, fuses, and 

automatic circuit breakers to identify the circuits or equipment controlled by 

them. 

12.8.2 Switches. Switches must be of the enclosed safety type, with the 

enclosures grounded, and installed so as to minimize the possibility of 

accidental operation. 

12.8.3 Lockout Provision. Provide disconnects and breakers with a means 

of locking in the OFF position. Also, fuse cabinets and circuit breaker 

cabinets must be equipped with lockable doors. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-12 October 2009 

12.8.4 Wet and Outside Locations. Enclose switches, circuit breakers, fuse 

panels, and motor controllers in wet or outside locations in approved 

weatherproof cabinets or enclosures. Prevent moisture or water from entering 

or accumulating within the cabinets or enclosure. 

12.8.5 Shielding. Isolate or shield the disconnecting means to protect 

employees. 

12.8.6 Service Entrance Disconnect. Install the service entrance 

disconnecting means in a readily accessible location, as close as possible to 

the point where the service entrance conductors enter the premise. The 

service disconnecting means must disconnect all the ungrounded service 

entrance conductors supplying power to the service equipment. This 

disconnecting means must plainly indicate that it is either in the open or 

closed position. 

12.8.7 Overcurrent Protection. Fuses or circuit breakers must provide 

overcurrent protection for all ungrounded conductors. All overcurrent 

protection devices and conductors must be designed and installed according 

to the latest provisions of the NEC to ensure protection and proper 

installation. Do not place any overcurrent device in any permanently 

grounded conductor, except where the overcurrent device simultaneously 

opens all conductors of the circuit. 

12.9 Ground-Fault Protection 

12.9.1 Requirement. Protect all 125-volt, single-phase, 15 and 20 ampere 

receptacles outlets used in locations such as laboratories, shops, garages, wet 

locations, outdoor receptacles, bathrooms, kitchens, and for construction 

operations with a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). For temporary 

wiring, all 125 volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets 

that are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and that 

employees use must have ground-fault circuit interrupter protection for 

personnel. For temporary wiring, receptacles other than 125 volt, singlephase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacles must have ground-fault circuit 

protection or protection in accordance with the assured equipment grounding 

conductor program. The ground-fault interrupter must open the circuit on a 

ground current of 5 milliamperes plus or minus 1 and must be equipped with 

an integral push-button test circuit. Install the GFCI in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s instructions and test it before initial use and periodically 

thereafter. 

12.9.2 Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Where 

GFCI protection is not provided for personnel, the Assured Equipment 

Grounding Conductor Program must be implemented. This program must 

be used on all receptacle outlets, except 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, 

and 30-amp receptacle outlets, used during construction, remodeling, 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-13 

maintenance, repair or demolition of buildings, structures, equipment, or 

similar activities. Receptacle outlets must not be connected to any branch 

circuits that supply power to lighting outlets, per NEC 527.4(D). 

a. All cord sets and receptacles that are not part of the permanent wiring 

of the building or structure, as well as cord and plug connected equipment 

required to be grounded, must meet the following requirements: 

• Have a written description of the program 

• Have a qualified person to implement the program 

b. All equipment grounding conductors must be tested for continuity and 

be electrically continuous. 

c. Each receptacle and attachment plug must be tested for correct 

attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. 

d. Tests are required under the following conditions for an Assured 

Equipment Grounding Program: 

• Before first use onsite 

• When there is evidence of damage 

• Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs 

• At intervals not exceeding 3 months 

e. The required test for all equipment grounding conductors and each 

receptacle and attachment plug above must be recorded and available for 

inspection. 

12.10 Hazardous Locations 

12.10.1 General. A hazardous location is any location where a potential 

hazard, either a fire or an explosion, can exist because of the presence of 

flammable, combustible, or ignitable materials. These materials can consist of 

gases, vapors, liquids, dust, fibers, etc. Hazardous locations are classified 

according to the properties and quantities of the hazardous material that may 

be present. Hazardous locations are divided into three classes, two divisions, 

and seven classified groups as follows: Class I, II, and III; Division 1 and 2; 

and Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Wiring methods used in hazardous 

locations must comply with more stringent requirements than wiring methods 

used in other locations. 

12.10.2 Requirement. Electrical wiring and equipment installed in 

hazardous locations, as defined in the National Electrical Code, must conform 

to the respective standards. All components and equipment used in hazardous 

locations must be from among the equipment listed by a nationally recognized 

testing laboratory, such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual 

Engineering Corporation. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-14 October 2009 

12.10.3 Marking. Approved equipment must be marked to show the 

class, group, and operating temperature or temperature range referenced to 

a 40 degree C ambient. Install approved equipment in accordance with the 

requirements of the NEC. 

12.10.4 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Permit intrinsically safe apparatus and 

wiring in any hazardous (classified) location for which it is approved. 

12.10.5 Maintenance. Maintain wiring components and equipment as 

explosion-proof. There must be no loose or missing screws, gaskets, threaded 

connections, seals, or other impairments to tight conditions. 

12.11 Wet Locations 

12.11.1 Requirement. Only the following type electrical systems are 

permissible for use in wet areas where there is danger of electrical shock: 

a. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter. Electrical circuits for lighting and 

hand tools must not exceed 120 volts and must be protected by UL-listed 

ground-fault circuit interrupters installed in conformance with the 

manufacturer’s specifications, and tested before beginning work. 

b. Stationary Portable Equipment. Connect stationary portable 

electrically powered equipment, such as pumps, heaters, blowers, welders, 

transformers, etc., to a circuit protected by a ground-fault circuit 

interrupter or effectively ground the equipment with both an internal 

grounding system and a visible flexible copper ground wire. 

c. Substitute Equipment. Whenever practical, substitute air, battery, or 

hydraulically powered tools for electrically powered tools. 

12.11.2 Receptacles. Receptacles and cord connectors used in damp or wet 

locations must be designed for use in wet or damp locations and, unless 

approved for submersion, must not be allowed to lie in water. 

12.12 Battery Charging 

12.12.1 Requirement. Restrict battery charging operations to well-ventilated 

areas designated for that purpose. Post signs with the following wording (or 

equivalent) at all entrances when explosive gases are produced: “BATTERY 

ROOM - NO SMOKING OR OPEN FLAME WITHIN 25 FEET.” 

12.12.2 Ventilation. Ventilation must be adequate to ensure diffusion of the 

battery gases and prevent accumulation of an explosive mixture. 

12.12.3 Vented Batteries. Locate nonseal-type batteries in enclosures with 

outside vents or in well-ventilated rooms, arranged to prevent the escape of 

fumes, gases, or electrolyte spray or liquid into other areas. Keep safety vent 

caps in place during charging. 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-15 

12.12.4 Racks and Trays. Racks and trays must be of sufficient strength and 

treated with an electrolyte resistive coating. 

12.12.5 Housekeeping. Keep battery storage and charging areas free of 

combustible materials and scrap. Promptly clean up and dispose of acid or 

corrosive spills. 

12.12.6 Protective Equipment. Provide face shields, goggles, aprons, and 

rubber gloves for employees who handle acids or recharging batteries. 

12.12.7 First Aid. Provide facilities for quick emergency drenching of the 

eyes and body within 25 feet of a battery charging area. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-16 October 2009 

Attachment 12-1 

Training Requirements for 

Electrically Qualified Persons 

1. General. NFPA 70E, 2000 Edition, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 contains 

references for training requirements. A person must have all the training listed 

below to be a qualified person. 

a. Required training must be of classroom and on-the-job training. 

b. Qualified persons must be trained in and familiar with “Safety-Related 

Work Practices,” safety procedures, and other safety requirements pertaining 

to their work. Qualified persons must be trained in first aid and CPR and be 

familiar with applicable emergency procedures. They must be trained in any 

other safety practices, including those not specifically addressed in this 

section such as confined space entry, manhole and pole-top rescue, fall 

protection, personal protective equipment, etc. 

c. Qualified persons must be trained and knowledgeable in Job Hazard 

Analysis (JHA). This training and knowledge includes recognizing work 

hazards, doing the work safely, writing a JHA, and communicating hazards 

and safety work practices to fellow employees. 

d. Qualified persons must be trained and knowledgeable in the construction, 

operation, and maintenance of equipment and specific work methods. They 

must be trained to recognize and avoid hazards with respect to equipment or 

work methods and must be familiar with applicable codes and standards. They 

shall be familiar with the proper use of special precautionary techniques, 

personal protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and 

insulated tools and test equipment. 

2. Additional Training Required. Qualified persons permitted to work within 

limited approach boundaries (table 12-1) of exposed conductors and parts must, at 

a minimum, be additionally trained in all of the following: 

a. Skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed energized parts 

from other parts. 

b. Skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of 

exposed energized parts. These skills and techniques include those necessary 

to safely use high and low-voltage meters, test instruments, and personal 

protective equipment while performing measurements and testing. 

c. The approach distances specified in table 12-1 and corresponding voltages 

to which the qualified person will be exposed. (Post table 12-1 in the Electric 
Section 12—Electrical Safety 

Requirements 

October 2009 12-17 

Shop and hand it out to each team member before beginning work on a project 

that involves work near exposed energized lines or other equipment.) 

d. The decision-making process to determine the degree and extent of the 

hazard and the personal protective equipment necessary to perform the task 

safely. For example, clothing that would increase injury by fire is not 

permitted. Clothing made of acetate, nylon, polyester, and rayon is 

prohibited. Refer to OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 on apparel. 

e. Lockout/Tagout and clearance procedures of FIST 1-1. 

3. In-Training. A person who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the 

course of this training, has demonstrated the ability to perform specific duties 

safely at his or her level of training, and is under the direct supervision of a 

qualified person, is considered a qualified person for the performance of those 

specific duties only. For qualified persons, the employer must determine by 

regular supervision and inspections of the employee’s work and his/her on-the-job 

work practices, at least annually, that each qualified person is complying with the 

safety-related-work practices required. 

4. Training Documentation. The employer must generate and maintain written 

documentation that each employee has received the required training. The 

employer must verify that the training has been accomplished and is current. The 

documentation must contain the employee’s name, the training he/she has 

received, and dates of training. Employee demonstrate their competence by their 

proficiency in safety-on-the-job and work practices. Maintain training records in 

the employee’s training file for the duration of employment. Employment records 

that indicate an employee has received the required training are an acceptable 

means of meeting this requirement. 

5. An employee must receive additional training (or re-training) under any 

of the following conditions: 

• If supervision and/or annual inspections of the employees work and onthe-job, safety-related work practices indicate the employee is not 

knowledgeable or complying with the requirements of this section. 

• If new technology, new type equipment, or changes in procedures dictate 

the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those which 

the employee would normally use. 

• If the worker must use safety-related practices not normally used during 

normal job duties. 

• If the worker has not performed this specific task within 1 year or feels a 

need for additional training to perform the job safely. 

• If the worker’s other qualifications have expired, such as First Aid and 

CPR. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

12-18 October 2009 

Note: Employee who perform a task less than once a year must receive hazard 

retraining before the employee may perform the task again. Retraining may be 

done during the JHA, but must also include a jobsite visit to discuss hazards. 

Performing a task less than once a year is not considered a part of normal job 

duties. 
October 2009 13-1 

Section 13 

Walking and Working Surfaces 

This section sets forth safety standards and work practices for walking and 

working surfaces. It specifically addresses making work locations safe for access, 

using scaffolds, requirements of work platforms, and designing and constructing 

guardrails. 

13.1 Safe Access to Work 

Use ladders, stairways, or ramps that comply with the requirements of this section 

to provide safe access to all work locations (temporary or permanent). 

• Provide a stairway, ladder, ramp, or manhoist at all personnel access 

points where elevation changes 19 inches or more. 

• Keep at least one point of access between levels of buildings or structures, 

so employees can pass freely at all times. 

13.1.1 Ladders. Use ladders where stairs or ramps cannot be installed. 

Ladder construction must comply with the applicable ladder safety code. 

a. General Ladder Requirements 

1. Electrical Hazard. Do not use portable metal ladders or wood 

ladders with metal reinforcements for any electrical work or in 

substations, switchyards, powerplants, pumping plants, or in any area 

where employees may contact energized circuits. 

2. Maintenance. Routinely inspect and maintain all ladders. 

Promptly repair or remove broken or damaged ladders. Properly store 

ladders to prevent damage. 

3. Securing Ladders. Portable ladders, except stepladders must be 

secured. Fixed ladders must be fixed, and don’t require securing for 

use, portable ladders do not require intermediate support. 

4. Location. Protect ladders placed in access ways or other locations 

where they may be displaced with barricades or guards. Keep the area 

immediately adjacent to the top and bottom of a ladder free from 

debris, materials, equipment, or other obstructions. 

5. Restrictions. Use ladders as work platforms only for short 

duration tasks, and use only light tools or material (changing a light 

bulb, for example). 

6. Use. Face ladders and keep hands free when going up or down 

ladders. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-2 October 2009 

b. Portable Ladders 

1. Design, construct, use, and maintain portable ladders according to 

the more stringent standards published in this subsection and ANSI 

A14.1, "Portable Wood Ladders," ANSI A14.2, "Portable Metal 

Ladders," and ANSI A14.5, "Portable Reinforced Plastic Ladders." 

Use only type 1A, extra heavy-duty industrial ladders. 

2. Place portable ladders at a slope of 4:1 (vertical:horizontal). 

3. Portable stepladders must be no more than 20 feet tall. 

4. Employees working from ladders must remain within 20 feet of the 

floor. 

5. Secure portable ladders against accidental displacement at the top 

and bottom. Portable ladders must extend at least 42 inches above the 

upper landing. Do not use stepladders for access. 

6. Rest portable ladders on a firm foundation that can support the load 

without displacement. 

7. Do not use extension sections of ladders as independent ladders. 

8. Use job-made ladders only for their designed and constructed 

purpose and not as portable ladders. 

9. Allow only one person at a time on a portable ladder. 

10. Equip ladders with safety shoes, spurs, spikes, tread feet, or other 

slip-resistant devices at the base section of each rail. Use the 

appropriate device for the type of surface they are used on. 

c. Fixed Ladders 

1. Design, construct, use, and maintain fixed ladders according to the 

more stringent of standards in this subsection; ANSI A14.3, "Safety 

Requirements for Fixed Ladders," and ANSI A14.4, "Safety 

Requirements for Job-Made Ladders." 

2. The climb length of fixed ladders must be 24 feet or less; otherwise, 

equip the ladder with a cage, well, or ladder climbing device or offset 

landings at 20-foot intervals. Ladders equipped with cages or ladder 

climbing devices must have a climb length of 30 feet or less between 

ground, floors, or offset landings. Bottom of cages must start between 

7 and 8 feet from the base of each section of ladder. Install climbing 

devices so an employee can connect or disconnect while standing on 

ground, floors, or platform. Increase ladder widths to accommodate 

climbing devices. Do not use the reinforcing bar of fixed ladders as a 

rung or grab rail. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-3 

3. Provide a landing at the top of all fixed ladders and extend the side 

rails, stanchions, or other supports at least 42 inches above the landing. 

4. Provide at least 7 inches of toe space from the centerline of the rung 

or step to the wall or other obstructions. 

5. Provide two separate ladders or double-cleat ladders for access to 

and from work areas for 25 or more employees, or where 

simultaneous, two-way traffic is necessary. 

6. Use nonslip material on rungs in slippery areas. 

13.1.2 Stairways 

a. Requirement. Use stairways for access to areas 20 feet or more above 

the adjacent surface, except for scaffolds which are commonly accessed 

by ladder. If scaffold is to be used for extended time periods, or if 

employees routinely carry tools or materials, stairs must be provided.

b. Design 

1. Temporary Stairways. Design and construct temporary stairways 

with a live load safety factor of five, but never less than a moving 

concentrated load of 1,000 pounds. Install temporary stairways at 30- 

to 50-degree angles from horizontal. Use any uniform combination of 

rise/tread dimensions between 6-1/2- to 9-1/2-inch rise and 11- to 

8-inch tread run, to obtain a stairway within this permissible range. 

Any flight of stairs with an unbroken rise of more than 12 feet must 

have a standard landing that extends at least 30 inches in the direction 

of travel. Where doors or gates open directly onto the stairway, 

provide a platform. The swing of the door or gate must not reduce the 

width of the platform to less than 20 inches. Provide a vertical 

clearance of at least 7 feet above any stair tread, measured from the 

leading edge. 

2. Existing Permanent Stairways. On permanent stairways, riser 

must be no more than 7-1/2 inches high and treads no less than 10 

inches deep. Adjacent steps must not vary by more than 3/16 inch. 

No flight of stairs may vary more than 3/8 inch. 

3. New Permanent Stairways. New stairways must have risers no 

more than 7 inches high and treads no less than 11 inches deep. 

c. Construction. Construct temporary stairways and handrails of 

materials without hazardous projections or surface imperfections, rigidly 

support them, and securely fasten stair treads in place. 

d. Stair Railings and Handrails. Stairs with 4 or more risers, or rising 

more than 30 inches, must have standard railings and a standard handrail, 

as specified below: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-4 October 2009 

• Less than 44 inches wide and both sides enclosed: at least one 

handrail on right side descending. 

• Less than 44 inches wide and one side open: one stair railing on 

the open side. 

• Less than 44 inches wide and both sides open: a stair railing on 

each side. 

• More than 44 inches, but less than 88 inches, wide: one handrail 

on each enclosed side and a stair railing on each open side. 

• More than 88 inches wide: one handrail on each enclosed side, 

plus a standard stair railing located midway (width). 

e. Standard Stair Railing. Construct standard stair railings to the 

specifications set forth in "Standard Guardrails," except that no toeboard is 

required, and it must be at least 36 inches high (measured from top of the 

forward edge of the tread to the upper surface of the top rail). When the 

top edge of the stair rail system also serves as a handrail, the top edge 

must be 37 inches maximum height. 

f. Standard Handrail. Securely mount a standard handrail on the wall or 

partition, enclosing the stairs. It must be between 30 and 37 inches high. 

Material and strength requirements must equal the stair railing. Mount the 

handrail with a minimum 1-1/2-inch clearance from any obstruction. 

Handrails must provide an adequate handhold for employees grasping 

them to avoid falling. 

g. Projection Hazard. The ends of stair rail systems and handrails must 

not be a projection hazard. 

h. Metal Pan Stairs. Where permanent metal pan stairs are set for 

temporary use, install treads of wood filler pieces flush with the pan rims. 

i. Stairwells and Platforms. Protect platforms on all open sides with 

standard guardrails and toeboards.

j. Maintenance. Routinely maintain stairways. Keep stairs free from 

debris and materials. Eliminate slippery conditions as they occur.

13.1.3 Ramps. 

a. Requirement. Substitute temporary access ramps, for stairways, when 

the slope or incline does not exceed 15 degrees. With prior approval, you 

may use cleated ramps for access on slopes up to 20 degrees. 

b. Design. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-5 

1. Temporary Ramps. Design temporary ramps with a safety factor 

of five, with a minimum 100-pound-per-square-foot live load. The 

ramp must be at least 18 inches wide, yet not cause congestion of 

persons, materials, or equipment. Equip ramps with standard 

guardrails on open sides and with at least one handrail. Cleated ramps 

(chicken walks) must have 1- by 2-inch cleats. Space the cleats no 

more than 12 inches apart. The cleats must be as long as the width of 

the ramp. Secure them with nails, driven through the decking and 

clinched on the underside. Provide vehicle trestles, ramps, and bridges 

that permit foot traffic with a suitable walkway and guardrail outside 

of the roadway. Protect roadway ramps with timbers or curbs at least 

8 inches high, secured to each side of the roadway. 

2. Permanent Ramps. Permanent ramps must be at least 44 inches 

wide, and the slope must not exceed 1:12. The continuous slope must 

not have more than a 30-inch rise, unless there is a horizontal landing 

as long as the width of the ramp. When possible, ramps will be 

designed for handicap access. When the ramp is used for public 

access, wheelchair accessibility is required. 

3. Overhead Protection. Provide overhead protection whenever 

falling objects could pose a hazard to the public, employees, or 

property. The overhead protection must be strong enough to withstand 

all potential impacts. Install overhead protection between 7 and 9 feet 

above the ramp. 

13.2 Safe Use of Scaffolds 

Provide scaffolds, platforms, or temporary floors whenever employees perform 

work that they cannot perform safely from the ground or from solid construction. 

13.2.1 General Requirements. 

a. Competent Person. A competent person must supervise erecting, 

dismantling, or altering of scaffolding. Such action must also comply with 

the requirements of this section and ANSI A10.8, "Construction and 

Demolition Operations - Scaffolding - Safety Requirements." (The more 

stringent standards must prevail.) Do not use ladders or makeshift devices 

to increase scaffolding height. Keep scaffolding working surfaces level. 

b. Safety Factors. Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension must 

be able to support at least six times the maximum intended load. All other 

scaffolds and their components must be able to support at least four times 

the maximum intended load. 

c. Access. Access scaffolding by separate or integral ladders or by 

stairways. Do not use structural members to access scaffolding. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-6 October 2009 

d. Nets, Lifelines, Lanyard, and Belts. When employees work on 

suspended or movable scaffolding (or scaffolding without standard 

guardrails), use a fall protection system. 

e. Guardrails. Work platforms and scaffolds more than 6 feet above the 

ground or floor level must have standard guardrails, midrails, and 

toeboards on the open side and ends. (Exceptions are floats, needle beam, 

and ladder-supported scaffolds.) In addition, install standard guardrails on 

open sides and ends on scaffolds 4 to 6 feet high, erected above machinery 

or other hazards, or with a minimum horizontal dimension less than 

45 inches in either direction. 

f. Footing. The footing or anchorage for scaffolds must be sound, rigid, 

and able to carry the maximum intended load without settling or 

displacement. Do not use unstable objects (such as barrels, boxes, loose 

brick, or concrete blocks) to support scaffolds or planks. 

g. Poles, Legs, Uprights. Make sure poles, legs, and uprights are plumb. 

Brace them securely and rigidly to prevent swaying or displacement. 

h. Scaffold Lumber. All load-carrying wood members of scaffold 

framing, except planks, must be No. 1 Douglas fir, or equivalent. All 

dimensions are nominal sizes provided in the American Lumber 

Standards. However, rough sizes are an exception. When rough sizes are 

noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the specified size will satisfy 

minimum requirements. 

i. Loadings. Load scaffolds only up to their designed working load. 

Store only those supplies needed for immediate operations on scaffolds. 

j. Restrictions. While employees use or occupy scaffolds, do not alter or 

move them horizontally, unless specifically designed for such use. 

k. Design. A professional engineer (PE) must design scaffolding with 

structural members or working surfaces that differ from those specified 

here. The COR or office head must accept the design before erecting the 

scaffolding onsite. The design of wood scaffolding members and 

connections must adhere to the "National Design Specifications for Wood 

Construction," published by the National Forest Products Association. To 

account for the additional safety factors for scaffolding, multiply basic 

allowable stresses therein by a factor of 0.065, and use a duration load 

adjustment of 1.25. These section multiplication factors are cumulative. 

l. Overhead Protection. Provide overhead protection for employees who 

work on scaffolds and are exposed to falling objects. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-7 

m. Scaffold Enclosures. When employees must work under scaffolding, 

or the scaffold is above an accessway, enclose the scaffold on the open 

side and ends. Also, enclose the space between the decking and the form 

or wall. The protective enclosure must be No. 18 U.S. Standard gauge 

wire, or equivalent, with mesh of 0.5 inch or less. 

n. Welding, Cutting, Burning, and Riveting. Do not weld, cut, burn, 

rivet, or perform open flame work on staging suspended by natural fiber or 

synthetic rope. When using natural fiber or synthetic rope staging 

supports near corrosive materials, protect or treat them to prevent 

deterioration. 

o. Hoisting Equipment. Only mount material hoists on scaffolds or 

elevated work platforms if the scaffold or work platform is designed or 

strengthened to withstand the additional loading. A PE must certify such 

design or strengthening. 

p. Lean-to Scaffolds. Do not use lean-to scaffolds. 

q. Unsafe Conditions. Keep scaffolds, platforms, and access ways free 

of ice, snow, grease, mud, and any other material or equipment that creates 

a slipping or falling hazard. Do not permit tools, materials, equipment, or 

debris to accumulate on scaffolds, work platforms, or in access ways. To 

improve footing, apply an abrasive material to scaffolds, work platforms, 

or accessways that are usually wet or slippery. The competent person 

must perform a daily inspection. 

13.2.2 Scaffolding Platforms 

a. Requirement. Select materials for scaffold decking that can safely 

support the intended load. The load rating for scaffold decking is the 

person loading requirements or the uniformly distributed load 

requirement, whichever is greater. 

1. Person Loading Requirements. If scaffold design is based on 

person loading, use a 250-pound point loading at center span to 

represent one person, two 250-pound point loads 18 inches from the 

center on each side to represent two persons, and the sum of the above 

to represent three persons. 

2. Uniformly Distributed Load Requirement. When applicable, 

you may design each scaffold decking unit to carry a uniformly 

distributed load, as an alternate to the person loading requirement. 

Light duty: 25 pounds per square foot 

Medium duty: 50 pounds per square foot 

Heavy duty: 75 pounds per square foot 

Special duty: More than 75 pounds per square foot 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-8 October 2009 

b. Scaffold Planks. 

1. Sawn Wood Scaffold Planks. Design wood scaffold planks so the 

deflection, at the center of the span at the design load, does not exceed 

the span divided by 60. All solid sawn scaffold planks must be of a 

scaffold grade and certified by, or bear the grade stamp of, a grading 

agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee. 

Table 13-1 shows permissible spans that comply with the above 

requirements. 

Table 13-1.—Permissible spans for wood scaffold planks 

Rough sawn Douglas fir, 2 inches by 10 inches 

One person, or medium duty 10 feet 

Two persons, or heavy duty 8 feet 

Three persons 5 feet 

Note: Other combinations of planks and spans are permissible, as 

long as all planks are grade stamped or certified as scaffold plank 

grade and the stresses and deflections do not exceed those specified 

in ANSI A10.8. 

2. Manufactured Wood Scaffold Planks. Wood scaffold planks that 

are not solid sawn (laminated wood planks) must bear the seal of an 

independent, nationally recognized inspection agency to certify that 

they comply with the design criteria in ANSI A10.8. 

3. Fabricated Metal Scaffold Planks and Decks. Use fabricated 

metal scaffold planks and decks only if they are marked by the 

manufacturer to show the rated working load. 

c. Width. Scaffolds, ramps, runways, and platforms must be wide 

enough to prevent congestion of persons, materials, or equipment. They 

must be at least 18 inches wide. 

d. Lapped Planking. Planking, when lapped, must overlap at least 

12 inches. Scaffold from 6 to 12 inches, or be cleated at 6 to 12 inches, or 

else be cleated at both ends to prevent sliding off supports. 

e. Flush Planking. When installed flush, the butt joint must be at the 

centerline of a pole, and the plank ends supported by, and secured to, 

separate bearers. 

f. Corner Planking. When a scaffold changes direction, place and secure 

planks to prevent tipping. Use diagonally installed bearers to support the 

intended load and to prevent tipping. 

g. Changing Levels. When moving platforms or planking to another 

adjacent level, leave the old planking in place until you install the new 

bearers. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-9 

h. Working Surfaces. Fully plank or deck all working surfaces on 

scaffolds. Place planking units as close together as possible. The decking 

and guardrails must be no more than 9-1/2 inches apart. 

13.2.3 Suspension Scaffolds. 

a. General. Apply the following requirements when constructing and 

using all types of suspension scaffolds. 

1. Design. Design and construct all parts and components of 

suspension scaffold systems with a minimum safety factor of four, 

except the suspension ropes. 

2. Suspension. Support suspension scaffolds by wire, synthetic, or 

fiber ropes with a minimum safety factor of six. Secure suspension 

scaffolds to outrigger beams. Equip the fixed ends of the suspension 

ropes with a proper size thimble, secured by splicing or other 

equivalent means, and attached to the supports by shackles. Securely 

attach running ends of the suspension ropes to the hoisting drums. 

Keep at least four turns of the rope on the drum at all times. Attach 

the suspension ropes at the vertical centerline of the outrigger. The 

attachment must be directly over the hoisting drum. 

3. Outrigger Beams. Outrigger beams must be structural steel, 

equivalent in strength to at least a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound-perfoot, steel I-beam. Outrigger beams must be at least 15 feet long. 

Unless a PE designs outrigger beams for a specific use, they must not 

extend more than 6.5 feet beyond the fulcrum or bearing point. Set 

outrigger beams with their webs in the vertical position and anchor 

them to the structure with U-bolts and anchor plates, washers, and nuts 

(or equivalent). Rest the beams on wood-bearing blocks and install a 

stop bolt on each end of every beam. When counterweights stabilize 

the inboard ends of the outrigger beams, securely fasten the weight to 

the outrigger beam and provide a safety factor of 4 to 1 against 

overturning. Construct counterweights of solid material. Do not use 

sandbags or other containers of material for counterweights. 

4. Hoisting Devices. Equip all suspension scaffolds (except 

stationary or crane supported) with either manual or powered hoisting 

machines. The machines must be either worm geared or powered both 

up and down. Design suspension scaffolds to stop independently of 

manual braking; they must not move when power is not applied. 

5. Hoist Safety Controls. Powered scaffolds must have constant 

pressure, nonlocking controls. Install a device to shut off the power 

ahead of the operating control. Design the speed control device to 

prevent manual release. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-10 October 2009 

6. Scaffold Brackets. Scaffold brackets must be wrought iron or mild 

steel. Do not use reinforcing steel as part of the support system. 

7. Stability Control. Control suspension scaffolds with wire rope 

guides or equivalent means, such as taglines, to prevent sway. Install 

3/4-inch, manilla rope tiebacks, or equivalent, on suspension scaffolds 

as a secondary means of anchorage. 

8. Plank-Type Platforms. Construct plank-type platforms of not less 

than 2- by 10-inch scaffold planks, cleated together on the underside. 

Install cleats within 6 inches of each end and at intervals no greater 

than 4 feet along planks. The platform hangers must not be more than 

8 feet apart, and the planking must not extend more than 12 inches past 

the end hangers. Securely fasten the platform to the hangers. 

9. Beam-Type Platforms. Side stringers for beam-type platforms 

must be at least 2 by 6 inches and made of knot-free lumber, set on 

edge. Support the flooring on 2- by 6-inch cross beams, laid flat and 

set snugly into the top edge of stringers at intervals no greater than 

4 feet. Flooring must be 1- by 6-inch lumber, nailed to the supports, 

and spaced no more than 0.5 inch apart. Hangers must not be more 

than 12 feet apart. 

10. Metal Platforms. Use metal platforms only if they are tested and 

listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 

11. Safety Harnesses. When using suspension scaffolds, employees 

must wear approved fall protection harnesses. Attach the harnesses to 

a lifeline rigged independently of the scaffold system. An employee 

does not need to use the lifeline if the system has independent wire 

safety ropes installed at each end of the scaffold, with approved 

grabbing and locking devices. However, each employee must wear a 

safety harness with lanyard attached to the scaffold. 

12. Overhead Protection. When an overhead hazard exists, erect 

overhead protection of 3/4-inch exterior plywood (or equivalent 

strength material). Overhead protection must be no more than 9 feet 

above the decking. 

13. Guardrails. Equip suspension scaffolds with standard guardrails 

and toeboards on all sides and ends. 

14. Operation. Only qualified persons trained in operating, using, 

and inspecting the particular suspended scaffold may operate 

suspended scaffolds. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-11 

15. Testing and Maintenance. Test suspension scaffolds at twice 

the intended working load before use. Before each shift begins, 

inspect the scaffold, including anchorage, rigging, and hoisting 

machines. Maintain scaffolds and hoisting machines in safe, operable 

condition. 

b. Two-Point Suspension Scaffolds. 

1. Platforms. Platforms of two-point suspension scaffolds must be 

plank, beam, or metal type. Construct platforms according to the 

requirements in this section. The platforms must be between 20 and 

36 inches wide. Securely fasten platforms to the hangers with U-bolts 

or other equivalent means. 

2. Securing to building. At each elevated work station, secure the 

scaffold to the building or structure to prevent sway or movement 

away from the wall. Do not use window cleaner’s anchors for this 

purpose. 

13.2.4 Boatswain’s Chairs 

a. Restrictions. Do not suspend boatswain’s chairs from cranes, derricks, 

or any type of motorized hoist without prior approval. 

b. Seat Design. The chair seat must be at least 12 by 24 inches and 

1 inch thick. Reinforce the underside with cleats to prevent the seat from 

splitting. 

c. Seat Slings. The seat slings must be either fiber rope at least 5/8 inch 

in diameter, or wire rope at least 3/8 inch in diameter. Thread the two 

slings through the four seat holes so they cross each other on the bottom of 

the seat. Construct boatswain’s chairs used for cutting, welding, or other 

heat-producing operations with wire rope slings. 

d. Safety Belts. Protect employees using boatswain’s chairs with safety 

harness and lifelines. 

13.2.5 Metal Scaffolds and Towers 

a. General Requirements 

1. Listing. A nationally recognized testing laboratory must list all 

metal scaffolds and towers. Erect such scaffolds and towers according 

to the manufacturer’s specifications. Do not exceed the design load 

limits. 

2. Access. Provide metal scaffolds and towers with access ladders or 

stairways. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-12 October 2009 

3. Erection. Set sections of metal scaffolds plumb and securely 

connect them together. Install all braces before using the scaffold. 

Secure the entire scaffold together and brace it to the building or 

structure at intervals no more than 30 feet apart horizontally and 

26 feet vertically. 

b. Tube and Coupler Scaffolds 

1. Design. Design and construct tube and coupler scaffolds to the 

specifications set forth in this paragraph. PEs must review all design 

scaffolds. 

2. Minimum Dimensions. Construct tube and coupler scaffolds of 

steel tubing not less than the minimum diameters and maximum 

spacing according to 29 CFR 1910.28. 

Table 13-2.—Tube and coupler scaffold dimensions 

Component Light duty Medium 

duty 

Heavy 

duty 

Posts, runners, and bracing diameter (minimum) 2 inches 2 inches 2 inches 

Bearer diameter (minimum) 2 inches 2.5 inches 2.5 inches 

Post spacing (maximum length) 10 feet 8 feet 6.5 feet 

Post spacing (maximum width) 6 feet 6 feet 6 feet 

Note: Design other spacing dimensions or other structural components, when used, to support an equivalent 

load. Donot use dissimilar metal on the same scaffold frame. When tubing of metals other than steel are used, 

they must be designed to support an equivalent load. 

3. Bearers. Bearers must be at least 4 inches, but not more than 

12 inches longer than the post or runner spacing. Install bearers 

transversely between posts; secure the bearer coupler to the posts 

bearing on the runner coupler. 

4. Runners. Space runners no more than 6-1/2 feet apart on centers. 

Make the bottom runners as close to the base as possible. 

5. Transverse Bracing. Install transverse bracing, in an "X," across 

the width of the scaffold at the top and bottom of the end posts, and at 

every fourth runner vertically. Repeat this "X" bracing at every third 

set of posts measured horizontally from one end of the scaffold. 

6. Longitudinal Diagonal Bracing. Install longitudinal diagonal 

bracing along the inside and outside rows of posts, beginning near the 

bottom of the posts at one end and extending to the top of the posts at 

the other end. Install the diagonal bracing at a 45-degree angle. 

Couple longitudinal diagonal bracing to each runner it crosses. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-13 

c. Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds 

1. Design. Use tubular welded frame scaffold only if it is designed to 

safely support four times the maximum rated load. Place the frames 

directly over one another, using couplings or stacking pins to vertically 

align the posts. 

2. Height Limitation. A licensed PE must prepare drawings and 

specifications for metal frame scaffolds that are more than 125 feet 

high. 

3. Uplift. Lock frame members together vertically with pins or other 

equivalent means, whenever there is possibility that an uplift may 

occur. 

4. Cross Bracing. Properly brace metal tubular frame scaffold with 

cross bracing or diagonal braces, or both, to secure vertical members. 

The length of the cross braces must automatically square and align 

vertical members. Make all brace connections secure. 

d. Mobile Scaffolds 

1. Maximum Height. Free-standing mobile scaffolds must be no 

higher than four times the minimum base dimension. 

2. Casters. Equip wheels and casters with a positive locking device 

to prevent the scaffold from accidentally moving. 

3. Moving. When moving mobile scaffolds, apply the force to move 

them as close to the base of the scaffold as possible. Stabilize the 

scaffold during movement. Use scaffolds only on firm, level, and 

broom-clean surfaces. 

• 4. Riding. Employees may ride manually propelled mobile 

scaffolds only under the following conditions: 

• The floor or surface is within 1.5 degrees of level and is free of 

pits, holes, or obstructions. 

• The minimum dimension of the scaffold base, when ready to 

move, is at least one-half the height. 

• If used, outriggers must be installed on both sides of staging. 

• Equip wheels or coasters with rubber or similarly resilient tires. 

• Remove tools and materials from the platform or secure them 

prior to moving the scaffold. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-14 October 2009 

13.2.6 Form Scaffolds 

a. Figure-Four Form Scaffolds 

1. General. Use figure-four form scaffolds for light duty. Do not use 

them to support loads more than 25 pounds per square foot, unless 

specifically designed for greater loading. 

2. Design and Construction. Design and construct figure-four form 

scaffolds, incorporating the dimensions shown in table 13-3: 

Table 13-3.—Figure-four scaffold dimensions 

Component Dimensions 

Upright and guardrail 

Upright or guardrail and ledger 

spacing 

Guardrail height 

Bearers (two) 

Braces (two) 

Intermediate guardrail 

Maximum ledger length 

Planking 

Toeboards 

2 x 4 inches minimum 

8 feet 0 inch maximum 

Approximately 42 inches 

1 x 6 inches minimum1

1 x 6 inches minimum 

1 x 6 inches minimum 

3 feet 6 inches beyond form support 

member 

2 x 10 inches minimum 

4 inches minimum height 1

 Lumber sizes for components other than planking are nominal sizes.

3. Attachment to a Form. The form scaffold must be an integral part 

of the form and nailed or bolted to the form studding. 

b. Metal Bracket Form Scaffolds 

1. Design. Metal bracket form scaffolds must be designed and 

constructed with a minimum safety factor of four, computed on the 

basis of maximum rated load. The metal brackets may be of any 

metal that will support the maximum rated load. Equip them with 

standard guardrails and toeboards. 

2. Attachment to Form. Space metal brackets no more than 8 feet 

apart on centers. The brackets may be an integral part of the form. If 

so, bolt or weld them to the form, or attach them using "clip-on" or 

"hook-over" brackets, provided that you bolt the form walers to the 

form or secure them with snap ties or shea-bolts extending through the 

form and anchor securely. 

3. Folding Brackets. Bolt or secure folding brackets in the extended 

position with locking pins. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-15 

13.2.7 Ladder-Jack Scaffolds 

a. Requirement. Use only type 1A ladders with ladder-jack scaffolds. 

The combined weight of workers, the planks, equipment, and materials 

must not exceed the rated load of the ladders. 

b. Height. The working platform of ladder-supported scaffolds must be 

no more than 20 feet high. 

c. Securing. To prevent ladders from moving, secure them at the top and 

bottom with brackets. 

d. Scaffold Planking. Only one person may occupy a ladder-jack 

scaffold erected with wood scaffold planks. When using fabricated 

planks, allow no more than two people on the plank. 

e. Ladder Jacks. Design ladder jacks so that they bear on the side rails, 

in addition to the ladder rungs, or they must bear on a minimum length of 

10 inches on each rung. 

f. Fall Protection. Protect employees using ladder-supported scaffolds 

that are 6 feet or more above the ground or floor level with safety 

harnesses and lifelines. 

13.2.8 Special Work Platforms. A PE must design special work platforms, 

such as draft tube scaffolds, and penstock jumbos. Recertify them every 

5 years. A competent person must inspect them before each use. 

13.2.9 Crane Supported Personnel Platforms (Manskips) 

a. General Requirements. Use crane-supported personnel platforms to 

reach the worksite only when conventional means of erection, use, and 

dismantling (for example, personnel hoists, ladders, stairways, aerial lifts, 

elevating work platforms, or scaffolding) are impossible or hazardous. 

Use of crane-supported personnel platforms requires specific 

authorization, must comply with the requirements of this subsection, and 

requires supporting justification. The written request must be specific to 

the operation and must: (1) detail the proposed operation with supporting 

data that show why employees cannot safely reach the worksite using 

other standard procedures and (2) confirm, with sufficient manufacturing 

and design engineering data, that the proposed system and equipment fully 

comply with the requirements contained herein. Approvals will be for the 

specific operation described. Do not use the platform system for any other 

operation, unless an additional request has been submitted and approved. 

Place approved systems in operation only after you have developed a JHA. 

The JHA must contain provisions for initially and periodically instructing 

the crane operator and all affected employees. Personnel must not work 

from crane-supported scaffolding except when under constant supervision 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-16 October 2009 

of a general foreman or superintendent, or designated lift supervisor, and 

the crane and operation meet the requirements of this subsection and the 

section on cranes. 

b. Specific Requirements 

1. Hoist-Line Suspended Personnel Platforms 

(a) Suspend platform only from the main boom nose. 

(b) Do not handle personnel above ground when wind velocity 

exceeds 10 miles per hour, when any dangerous weather condition 

exists, or when other danger is impending. 

(c) Keep cranes level during operation with outriggers fully 

extended and jack pads set on firm, level terrain or on substantial 

shoring. 

(d) Select sites so that, when locating cranes for platform 

operation, no part may come within the minimum distance from 

energized lines. Do not use barriers, manufacturer’s locks, or 

control level restraints to meet these requirements. 

(e) Do not handle materials lifts when personnel are on the 

platform. Detach the platform before rigging the crane for material 

handling. 

(f) Do not belt off or otherwise attach a platform to an adjacent 

pole, structure, or equipment. 

(g) Lifting and lowering speeds must not exceed 100 feet per 

minute. 

(h) Engage load and boom hoist drum brakes, swing brakes, and 

locking devices (such as pawls or dogs) when the occupied 

personnel platform is in the stationary position. 

(i) When employees occupy platforms, they must wear body 

harnesses with lanyards appropriately attached to the load block, 

headache ball, or to a structural member of the platform. 

Harnesses, lanyards, and structural support members used as 

anchorages must meet requirements contained in the section that 

discusses personal protective equipment and fall protection. 

(j) Do not move a mobile-crane when employees are aloft. 

(k) Employees must keep all body parts inside the platform during 

raising, lowering, and positioning. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-17 

2. Cranes 

(a) Install and test the crane periodically, using the section on 

hoisting equipment. 

(b) Use only cranes equipped with planetary or worm gears, torque 

converters, automatic braking systems, or other equivalent systems 

that prevent placing the boom hoist and loadlines in a freewheeling 

or neutral position controlled by manual brake and/or dogs only. 

Use only the main hoist for personnel handling. 

(c) The crane must be able to sustain a static load (as shown on the 

crane’s capacity chart) of two times the rated platform capacity for 

all radii and configurations through which the platform will be 

hoisted. 

(d) The minimum load hoist line wire rope safety factor must be 7 

or 10 when using rotation-resistant rope. 

(e) Install an anti-two-blocking device or two-block damage 

prevention feature and ensure that it is operating. The anti-two 

blocking device must have automatic capabilities for controlling 

functions that may cause two-blocking conditions. 

(f) Mark telescoping booms or equip them with a device that 

clearly shows the boom’s extended length to the operator at all 

times. 

(g) All critical components of hydraulic or pneumatic systems 

must have a minimum bursting strength of at least four times the 

system’s designed operating pressure. (Critical components are 

those in which a failure could result in free rotation or lowering of 

the boom or platform.) 

(h) Equip all critical hydraulic cylinders with pilot-operated check 

valve, or other appropriate devices, to prevent freefall or 

uncontrolled movement of boom or platform in the event of a 

hydraulic line failure. Electrical systems used for positioning 

platforms must provide equal protection in the event of power 

failure. 

(i) Make sure the crane is level within 1 percent and located on 

firm footing. Extend and engage the outriggers. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-18 October 2009 

3. Platforms 

(a) The crane manufacturer or a PE must design the personnel 

platform. 

(b) Suspension systems must be designed to minimize tipping of 

the platform due to movement of employees on the platform. 

(c) The entire platform must be designed with a minimum safety 

factor of five. 

(d) Provide 6-foot minimum headroom for employees on the 

platform. 

(e) Provide each personnel platform with perimeter protection 

from the floor to 42 inches 3 inches above the floor. Perimeter 

protection must be either solid construction or expanded metal 

with openings no greater than one-half of an inch. 

(f) Provide a grab rail inside the personnel platform. 

(g) If you provide an access gate, make sure it swings inward and 

equip it with a latch (restraining device) to prevent accidental 

opening. 

(h) Provide overhead protection on the personnel platform when 

employees are exposed to falling objects. 

(i) Grind smooth all exposed rough edges that employees on the 

platform could contact. 

(j) A certified welder, qualified for the weld grades, types, and 

material specified in the design, must perform all welding. 

(k) Conspicuously post a plate or other permanent marking on the 

personnel platform showing the weight and the rated load capacity 

of the personnel platform. 

(l) Personnel platforms must be easily identifiable by color or 

marking. Use personnel platforms only to hoist personnel and 

approved tools and equipment. 

(m)Use a wire rope bridle sling to connect the personnel platform 

to the loadline. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-19 

(n) You must close and lock hooks, headache ball assemblies, 

lower load blocks, or other attachment assemblies, thus eliminating 

the hook throat opening. Alternatively, use a shackle with a screw 

pin, nut, and retaining pin. 

(o) Wire rope, shackles, rings, and other rigging hardware must 

have a minimum safety factor of seven. 

4. Additional Inspections and Tests 

(a) At the beginning of each shift, the competent person must 

inspect cranes used to hoist personnel platforms. In addition, 

inspect the crane again after using it for any material handling 

operations, before using it to hoist employees. 

(b) Before hoisting employees for the first time at each new setup 

location, make a full-cycle operational test lift at 150 percent of the 

intended load of the personnel platform. 

(c) Note: Setup location means the location where the crane or 

derrick is brought and set up, including assembly and leveling. 

(d) Immediately after lift testing, visually inspect the crane, 

personnel platform, and base support to determine if the testing has 

adversely affected any component or structure. 

(e) Before further use, correct any defects found during such 

inspections that may create a safety hazard. 

(f) At the beginning of each shift, and after using the crane to hoist 

materials, make a trial lift with the personnel platform unoccupied 

to make sure all systems, controls, and safety devices are 

functioning properly. 

5. Work Practices 

(a) The crane operator must remain at the controls at all times 

when the personnel platform is raised. 

(b) Employees being hoisted must remain in direct communication 

with the crane operator at all times. 

(c) Hold a prelift meeting before each personnel hoisting 

operation. The crane operator, employees involved, and the 

responsible general foreman, superintendent, or designated lift 

supervisor must attend the prelift meeting. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-20 October 2009 

13.2.10 System Scaffolds. System scaffold means a scaffold consisting of 

posts with fixed connection points that accept runners, bearers, and diagonals 

that can be connected at predetermined levels. 

a. Scaffold Components. Do not intermix or modify the load-carrying 

members of system scaffolding manufactured by different manufacturers 

unless a competent person verifies that the resulting scaffold is structurally 

sound. 

b. Erection. Erect the system scaffolding according to manufacturer’s 

guidelines. The manufacturer’s guidelines for erecting and using system 

scaffold must be on the jobsite while the scaffold is erected, used, and 

dismantled. A PE must design scaffolds erected or used in a manner not 

covered in the manufacturer’s guidelines. 

c. Erection. Erect posts plumb, with runners and bearers level. Install 

vertical, horizontal, and diagonal bracing as recommended by the scaffold 

manufacturer. Secure all connections on a scaffold level before 

assembling the next level. 

13.3 Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms 

Design and use elevating and rotating work platforms according to the standards 

set forth in applicable ANSI standards and these standards. 

The design, construction, and operation of platforms and cranes must comply with 

the current edition of ANSI A92.2, "Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating 

Aerial Devices," or the manufacturer or PE for personnel platform work must 

design and certify them. Mount personnel platforms on a crane boom only when 

they conform with the more stringent of these or manufacturer’s requirements. 

Control all crane operations from the platform with an overriding crane control 

feature, except operations associated with travel. The crane and platform must 

meet design safety factors, and employees must operate them according to 

appropriate restrictions and requirements defined in this subsection. 

13.4 Design and Construction of Guardrails 

13.4.1 Standard Guardrails – Construction 

a. Design. A standard guardrail must consist of a top rail, intermediate 

rail, toeboard, and posts. The guardrail must be 42 inches high. 

b. Dimension. Wooden posts and toprails must be at least 2- by 4-inch 

construction grade lumber, or equivalent, with posts not more than 8 feet 

apart on centers. Intermediate rails must be at least 1 inch by 6 inches. 

Toeboards must be at least 4 inches high and installed within 1/2 inch of 

the floor. 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-21 

c. Pipe Guardrails. Posts, toprails, and intermediate rails must be at 

least 1.5-inch inside diameter steel pipe with posts not more than 8 feet 

apart on centers. 

d. Metal Guardrails. Posts, toprails, and intermediate rails must be 2- 

by 2- by 3/8-inch angle iron, or equivalent, with posts not more than 8 feet 

apart on centers. 

e. Guardrail Strength. Regardless of material used, the guardrail must 

be able to withstand a loading of 200 pounds, applied in any direction at 

any point on the toprail, with minimum deflection. The design of railings 

that must withstand greater stress, because of the nature of use, must have 

a minimum safety factor of four. 

f. Rope Guardrails. Do not use wire, synthetic, or natural fiber ropes as 

guardrails on scaffolds. Wire rope may be used for protective railings on 

permanent structures during construction. When used, wire rope must 

have sufficient tension so the maximum midspan deflection is less than 3 

inches when applying a 200-pound force. Toprails and midrails must be at 

least 1/4-inch in diameter. When using wire rope for the top rail, flag it 

with high visibility material at intervals of 6 feet or less. 

13.4.2 Standard Guardrails – Permanent 

a. Design. Standard guardrails must have a top rail at least 42 inches 

from the adjacent surface. Fill the opening between the toprail and the 

adjacent surface with solid material, grills, or ornamental work, designed 

so that a 4-inch ball cannot pass through any opening. However, if an 

exception is made to use a midrail in industrial areas, the openings 

between the midrail and the toprail, or the midrail and the adjacent 

surface, must not exceed 21 inches. 

b. Materials. Construct the toprail, grill material, and/or midrail of wood 

or metal, strong enough to withstand a 200-pound force applied in any 

direction with minimum deflection. 

13.5 Safeguarding Floor and Roof Openings 

13.5.1 Requirement. Cover the floor and roof openings, including skylights 

into which persons can fall, with material and bracing that is strong enough to 

support any imposed load, or protect it with a securely anchored enclosure 

meeting the requirements of this subsection. 

13.5.2 Protective Enclosure. Enclose all uncovered floor or roof openings 

on open sides with a standard guardrail and toeboard, or provide a cover for 

them that can sustain the expected load. At a minimum, the cover must be 

able to sustain a load of 250 pounds. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-22 October 2009 

13.5.3 Stairways and Ladderway Openings. Provide all stairway and 

ladderway floor openings with a standard guardrail and toeboard on exposed 

sides (except the entrance). Offset entrances to stairways or ladderways, or 

provide a gate to prevent persons from walking directly into the opening. 

13.5.4 Hatchways and Chute Openings. Guard hatchways and chute floor 

openings with one of the following: 

a. Hinged covers that are strong enough to carry anticipated loads and a 

standard guardrail with one exposed or open side. When the hatchway or 

chute opening is not in use, keep the cover closed or guard the exposed 

side with a removable standard guardrail. 

b. A removable standard guardrail or self-closing gate installed on just 

one side, and fixed standard guardrails and toeboards on all other exposed 

sides. When not using the opening, keep the removable guardrails in 

place. Guard chute openings into which debris is manually dumped. 

Provide a guardrail on the side of the opening where employees stand 

when they dump debris. 

c. Removable standard guardrails, secured to the floor on all open or 

exposed sides, installed to permit removal of only a section or side(s) 

sufficiently large to perform the work. When the hatchway is not in use, 

immediately replace the guardrail and secure it. 

13.5.5 Doors and Gates. Provide a platform where doors or gates open 

directly on a stairway. Make sure the swing of the door or gate does not 

reduce the effective length of the platform to less than 20 inches. 

13.6 Safeguarding Wall Openings 

13.6.1 Requirement. If there is a drop of more than 4 feet from a wall 

opening, and the bottom of the opening is less than 3 feet above the working 

surface, provide a standard guardrail or guardrail components to afford 

protection to a height of 42 inches above the working surface. Provide a 

standard toeboard where the bottom of the wall opening is less than 4 inches 

above the working surface. 

13.6.2 Extension Platforms. Provide a standard guardrail and toeboard for 

exposed sides of extension platforms, outside of wall openings, that provide 

access for materials, equipment, or personnel. 

13.7 Safeguarding Open Floors and Platforms 

13.7.1 Requirement. Guard the perimeter of all floors, platforms, etc., 6 feet 

or more above adjacent floor or ground level by installing guardrails or 

equivalent guarding, unless or until permanently enclosed to a height of 3 feet 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-23 

or more above the floor or working surface. Provide standard toeboards 

where falling objects pose a hazard to persons or property. 

13.7.2 Hazardous Locations. In locations where a hazardous condition 

exists (such as projecting reinforcing steel, moving equipment, or hazardous 

materials), provide standard guardrails, regardless of height. 

13.7.3 Protection From Falling Objects. When employees must work 

under an open-sided wall opening or platform where a falling objects hazard 

exists, install effective protection, such as enclosed guardrails or nets, as 

described in this section and the section on fall protection. 

13.8 Requirements for Roofing Protection 

13.8.1 Requirement. Whenever employees work on roofs during 

construction, demolition, or repair and maintenance, and they are subject to 

falls exceeding 6 feet from the adjoining surface, provide adequate fall 

protection devices. Employees are subject to falls when working within 10 

feet of the roof edge or when working in any place on a roof with a pitch 

steeper than 1:3. 

13.8.2 Fall Protection. Adequate fall protection includes the following: 

a. Restraining lines, harnesses, lanyards, and safety nets meeting the 

requirements in the section on fall protection. 

b. Standard guardrails meeting the requirements of this section. 

c. Catch platform. 

d. Warning line system supplemented by a safety monitoring system is 

only adequate on roofs with pitch flatter than 1:3. 

13.8.3 Warning Line System. Erect warning lines around all open sides of 

the work area. When mechanical equipment is not in use, erect the warning 

lines at least 6 feet from the roof edge or opening. When mechanical 

equipment is in use, erect the warning line at least 6 feet from the roof edge or 

opening that is parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, 

and at least 10 feet from the roof edge or opening that is perpendicular to the 

direction of mechanical equipment operation. Do not work outside warning 

lines without fall protection. 

a. The warning lines must be rope, wire, or chain, with a minimum 

breaking strength of 500 pounds. Attach warning lines to supporting 

stanchions. Mark the warning line with high-visibility material at 

intervals no more than 6 feet. Rig the warning line so that it is at least 

34 inches from the roof surface at its lowest point and no more than 

39 inches at its highest point. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

13-24 October 2009 

b. After erection, the warning lines and stanchions must be able to support 

a minimum force of 16 pounds applied horizontally 30 inches above the 

floor. 

c. Safety monitor. When using a warning line system, supplement it with 

a safety monitoring system. Assign a competent person to be the safety 

monitor. The safety monitor must ensure the safety of all employees 

working on the roof and warn any employee who appears unaware of a 

hazard or is acting unsafely. The safety monitor must be on the same roof 

as the employees, within visual sight of the employees, and close enough 

to verbally communicate with them. The safety monitor must not perform 

any other work. 

13.8.4 Overhead Protection. Require overhead protection for all employees 

working under the roof edge. You may use temporary decking, suspended 

platforms, nets, or other equivalent devices to provide such overhead 

protection. 

13.8.5 Roof Edge Materials Handling Areas and Materials Storage. 

When using guardrails at hoisting areas, bitumen pipe outlet areas, or roof 

edge storage areas, erect at least 4 feet of guardrail on each side of the area. 

a. Place a chain or gate across the opening between the guardrail sections 

when not handling materials. 

b. Protect employees working in the vicinity of the open guardrail with a 

safety belt or harness and lanyard system. Rig the safety belt system so 

that employees cannot move beyond the edge of the roof. 

c. If roofs are more than 16 feet high, install a hoisting device, stairway, 

or progressive platform to supply material and equipment. Provide level 

landing platforms with guardrails and toeboards at the roof edge. 

13.8.6 Crawling Boards (Chicken Ladders). Use crawling boards to help 

employees climb up and down steep roofs. Crawling boards must be at least 

10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, with 1- by 1.5-inch cleats spaced not more 

than 24 inches apart. The lengthened cleats must equal the width of the crawl 

board. Secure the cleats with nails driven through the crawl board and 

clinched on the underside. The crawling board must extend from the ridge 

pole to the eaves. String a securely fastened grabline beside each crawl board. 

Grablines must be of 3/4-inch manila rope, or equivalent. 

13.8.7 Roofing Brackets. Secure roofing brackets in place by nailing, in 

addition to using metal projections. If it is not practical to nail the brackets, 

use rope supports that are 3/4-inch manila rope, or equivalent. 

13.8.8 Training. Implement a training program for all employees working 

on a roof. The training program must enable employees to recognize and deal 
Section 13—Walking and Working Surfaces 

October 2009 13-25 

with the falling hazards associated with working near a roof perimeter or roof 

opening. The training must cover the following areas: 

a. The nature of the fall hazards. 

b. The function, use, and operation of the fall protection systems, warning 

line system, and safety monitoring systems in use. 

c. Each employee’s role in the safety monitoring system when this system 

is in use. 

d. The correct procedures for handling and storing equipment and 

materials. 
October 2009 14-1 

Section 14 

Confined Spaces 

14.1 Purpose and Scope 

This section establishes requirements for confined and permit required spaces. It 

specifically discusses the general and program requirements for permit required 

confined spaces; training requirements; and the duties of entrants, attendants, and 

the entry supervisor. 

Underground construction activities must also comply with the requirements of 

tunnel and shaft construction. Tunnels are classified as confined spaces and 

usually permit-required confined spaces. Entry into tunnels must be conducted in 

accordance with the requirements of the confined space program, and address the 

specific hazards associated with distance, communication, physical demands, and 

emergency rescue, in addition to all other requirements. 

The determination of whether a space is a permit-required confined space is 

contingent upon two factors. The first factor is solely based on physical 

characteristics of the space itself. A "confined space" must be large enough and 

so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work, have 

limited or restricted means for entry or exit, and not be designed for continuous 

employee occupancy. If the space is so configured, then the second factor is 

whether the space contains or the activities introduce any hazard capable of 

causing death or serious physical harm. A space would be classified as a "permitrequired" confined space if it either contained, or has a potential to contain, a 

hazardous atmosphere, a material which has the potential to engulf an entrant, an 

internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated, or 

contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. 

14.2 Applicable Definitions 

The following definitions apply to this discussion of confined spaces. 

Confined Space A space large enough for an employee to enter, 

but with limited means of entry and egress, and 

which is not designed for continuous human 

occupancy. 

Permit Required Confined A confined space in which one or more of the 

following: 

Space potential hazards or existing conditions: (a) the 

space contains, or may contain, an atmospheric 

hazard; (b) the space contains a potential 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

14-2 October 2009 

engulfment hazard (i.e., water or other flowable 

material which may engulf an entrant); (c) the 

space has a configuration which may trap or 

asphyxiate an entrant; (d) the space has any 

other serious safety or health hazard. A serious 

safety or health hazard for purposes of this 

standard means a hazard which may render an 

entrant incapable of self-rescue. 

Entrant A person trained and authorized to enter 

confined spaces under conditions documented in 

the local confined space permit. 

Attendant A person trained and authorized to perform 

attending duties as prescribed in the confined 

space program. 

Confined Space Supervisor A person trained and authorized to conduct, 

approve, and oversee entries into confined 

spaces. 

Confined Space Program A site-specific program that establishes the 

procedures for permit-required confined spaces, 

identifies the persons authorized to perform the 

various duties, and includes the emergency 

procedures, equipment, and communication. 

Prohibited Conditions A condition within a confined space that 

indicates that a control measure specified in the 

permit has become ineffective or that a hazard 

exists within the space that was not anticipated 

and for which no control measure is in place. 

Other definitions applicable to confined spaces can be found in OSHA 1910.146 

(b) or on the Internet at the following website address: http://www.osha.gov/ 
Section 14—Confined Spaces 

October 2009 14-3 

14.3 Requirements for Confined Spaces 

14.3.1 Maintain an inventory of permit-required confined spaces and the 

active and closed permits at each facility. The inventory must identify the 

space and its associated hazards that must be controlled before entry. 

14.3.2 Do not enter permit required confined spaces until a program for 

managing such entries is in place and all of the requirements of that program 

have been met. 

14.3.3 Place a danger sign at each entrance to each permit required confined 

space. The danger sign must identify the space as a permit required confined 

space and have additional instructions such as "authorized entrants only", or 

"entry prohibited." 

14.3.4 Every employee whose assigned duties require entry into a permit 

required confined space must be trained in the requirements of this standard, 

the hazards of confined spaces, the measures used to control or eliminate 

those hazards, and the specific duties assigned. 

Each document developed for confined space entries, including the program, 

the inventory, the closed entry permits, analysis for reclassification, written 

hazard analysis and determination for alternative entry procedures, rescue 

procedures, and training verification for participating 

14.3.5 Personnel must be maintained in the facility files and be made 

available for review. 

14.4 Program Requirements for Confined Spaces 

14.4.1 The confined space program must establish the procedures for issuing 

and canceling permits, testing and preparing the space prior to entry, the 

communications required between entrants and attendants, the acceptable 

entry conditions, the rescue procedures, and the program documentation and 

review required. As a minimum, it shall provide for the following: 

a. Program Coordinator. Identifying a program coordinator who is 

knowledgeable and responsible for implementing the confined space entry 

program at the site. This coordinator will be delegated sufficient authority 

to implement the program. 

b. Confined Spaces. Before removing any cover to a confined space, 

determine that it is safe to do so. Immediately upon removing the cover, 

erect a barrier to prevent unauthorized entry into the space. If the opening 

into the space is a floor opening, the barrier must meet the requirements 

for a standard guardrail. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

14-4 October 2009 

c. Permit. Before entry, complete a permit that contains the following 

information: 

• The identification of the space to be entered. 

• The purpose of the entry. 

• The time of entry and the expected duration. 

• The names of the entrants, attendants, and the entry supervisor. 

• Results of any atmospheric testing for oxygen content, lower 

explosive limit, and toxic air contaminants, including the name of 

the qualified person conducting the testing. 

• The control measures in place to control the hazards that caused 

the space to be classified as a permit-required confined space. 

• A description of the hazards that may be introduced by the work to 

be performed in the space, and the measures in place to control 

those hazards. 

• A description of the communications equipment and methods to be 

used to maintain communications between the entrants and the 

attendant(s). 

• A list of the equipment to be used to conduct a safe entry and work 

in the space, including personal protective equipment that must be 

worn. 

• A list of the prohibited conditions that would require an immediate 

evacuation of the space. 

• A written rescue plan that identifies the rescue service and the 

means for contacting the rescue services. Coordination with local 

contracted agencies or in-house personnel must be established and 

verified prior to entry. 

• The signature of the confined space entry supervisor, certifying 

that the space is safe to enter, and authorizing entry. 

d. Additional Documents. Documents required by other standards such 

as switching procedures, clearances, hazardous energy control document, 

or hot work permits related to the work in the confined space must be 

attached to the confined space permit and be retained in the confined space 

files. 

e. Air Testing Requirements. If atmospheric hazards or potential 

atmospheric hazards are identified for a particular confined space, the air 

inside the space shall be tested for oxygen content, flammable atmosphere, 

or toxic contaminants by a qualified person using a properly calibrated 

direct reading instrument prior to entry, and periodically, preferably 

continuously, during an entry, and while performing work in the permit 
Section 14—Confined Spaces 

October 2009 14-5 

required confined space. If testing is done using separate instruments, the 

order of testing shall be oxygen first, then flammability, then toxic 

contaminants. Employees or representatives of employees must be 

afforded an opportunity to observe any testing and results. Continuous air 

monitoring is highly advised, where practicable. 

f. Control or Elimination of Hazards. Each hazard that caused the 

confined space to be classified as a permit-required confined space or will 

be introduced into the space as a result of the work to be performed must 

be controlled to the extent possible, or eliminated before entering the 

space. 

g. Re-evaluation of Confined Space. The program must provide for a 

re-evaluation of all confined spaces whenever condition in those spaces 

change. 

h. Communication Between Entrant(s) and Attendant(s). 

Communication between entrants and attendants are required for the 

duration of the permit required confined space work. Loss of 

communication is a prohibited condition requiring evacuation of the space 

and termination of the entry until communication can be restored. 

Communication may be by voice, land-line, radio, signaling system, or 

other reliable method. 

i. Permit. In the permit, list all equipment necessary for safe entry into 

confined spaces, including monitoring equipment, ventilation equipment, 

rescue equipment, lighting equipment, personal protective equipment, and 

other equipment such as ladders and railings. 

j. Provisions for Rescue. For every permitted entry into a confined 

space, the permit must include a plan for rescuing the entrants. The 

adequacy of the rescue plan must be verified before entry into the space. 

The selected rescue service’s response time and rescue capability should 

be evaluated. Any one of the following three rescue procedures, generally 

in order of preference, are adequate: 

1. Rescue Without Entry. Make provision for rescuing entrants 

without entry by rescue team members, whenever possible. To 

facilitate such rescue without entry, entrants must wear a full body 

harness attached to a lifeline. The other end of the lifeline must be 

attached to a hoisting device to permit the attendant to begin rescue 

immediately if a prohibited condition arises in the space. If the full 

body harness presents a greater hazard, other rescue provisions must 

be used in lieu of the full body harness. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

14-6 October 2009 

2. Employee Rescue. A designated group of employees trained and 

equipped to enter the confined space to rescue an incapacitated entrant. 

The designated rescue team must have practiced rescue from the space 

entered (or a similar space) within the last year. Before entry, the 

confined space entry supervisor must verify that an adequate number 

of rescue team members are available to make a timely response to an 

emergency, and must verify that the rescue team members have 

current training. The procedure for summoning the response must be 

established, and the attendant must have the means to issue the 

summons. 

3. Outside Rescue Service. A commercial ambulance service or 

local fire department may be able to perform a rescue from a confined 

space, provided that there is an agreement and members have 

appropriate training and equipment. Reliance on a general emergency 

phone number available to the general public is not adequate without 

the written agreement. It is the responsibility of the entry supervisor to 

verify that the selected rescue service is qualified to perform a rescue, 

has current training, and is available at the time of the entry. The 

adequacy of the response time must be considered in selecting an 

outside rescue service. If the rescue service cannot make a timely 

response to a summons, they may be required to standby in the area of 

the access to the confined space. The attendant must have the means 

and be trained in the procedure for summoning the outside rescue 

squad. The outside rescue service must notify the attendant if some 

other emergency compromises their response capability. The 

attendant must then terminate the entry. 

k. Alternative Entry Procedure. The program may provide for entry 

into permit-required confined spaces under carefully controlled conditions. 

If such alternative procedures are provided for in the program, the 

following conditions must be met: 

1. No hazards, such as potential engulfment or serious safety hazards, 

other than actual or potential atmospheric hazards exist in the space. 

2. The atmospheric hazards can be (are) controlled by continuous 

mechanical ventilation. Employees are not allowed to enter the space 

until forced air ventilation has eliminated the hazardous atmosphere. 

3. Air testing is conducted before and after application of the 

ventilation and periodically, preferably continuously, for the duration 

of the entry. Employees or representatives of employees are provided 

an opportunity to observe the air testing and results. 
Section 14—Confined Spaces 

October 2009 14-7 

4. The entrants are trained and qualified confined space entrants. 

5. An alternative entry certificate is created and signed by a qualified 

confined space supervisor certifying that the above conditions have 

been met, and identifying the space, the purpose of the entry, the time 

of entry, and the entrants. Post the certificate at the point of entry into 

the space for the duration of the entry and file it in the confined space 

program files after termination of the entry. 

l. Temporary Declassification of a Space. When no actual or potential 

atmospheric hazards are present, and the other hazards that caused the 

space to be considered a permit required confined space can be eliminated 

without entry into the space, a confined space can be temporarily 

identified as a non-permit confined space. Any such declassification must 

be approved by the qualified confined space supervisor on a certificate of 

declassification which identifies the space, the actions taken to eliminate 

the hazards, and the time for which the declassification is valid. The 

certificate will be posted at the point of entry for the period of validity, 

which will not exceed one shift, and filed in the confined space program 

files at expiration. 

m. Contractors and Outside Entities. If confined spaces are to be 

entered by contractors or other outside entities who do not normally work 

in that facility, either alone, or in conjunction with the facility staff, the 

program must describe the coordination and controls which will be applied 

to such outside entity to assure a safe entry into a confined space. 

n. Program Review. The program must be reviewed by the confined 

space program coordinator at least annually, and more frequently if 

necessary. Any prohibited condition or near-miss incident arising in a 

confined space will be investigated immediately. 

14.5 Training Requirements 

Each person who will be assigned duties in a confined space program shall be 

trained to perform those duties safely and competently. The training instructor 

must sign the certificate and include on it the date of training, the individuals 

trained, and the qualifications of persons trained. 

14.5.1 Retraining. Retraining prior to assignment of additional confined 

space duties is required under any of the follow conditions: 

a. The individual fails to perform the duties assigned in accordance with 

the program. 

b. The individual has not performed any confined space work for a period 

of 1 year. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

14-8 October 2009 

c. Changes are made in the program. 

d. Individual or supervisory request. 

e. The individual has been involved in an accident or near-miss accident. 

14.6 Duties of Entrants 

14.6.1 Entrants must know the hazards that may be encountered during the 

entry and be able to recognize when those hazards are present. 

14.6.2 Entrants must properly use the equipment provided for entry into the 

confined space. 

14.6.3 Entrants must maintain communication with the attendant. 

14.6.4 Entrants must tell the attendant whenever: (a) the entrant recognizes 

any warning sign, or symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation, or (b) a 

prohibited condition is detected. 

14.6.5 Entrants must immediately exit the permit space whenever (a) an order 

to evacuate is given, (b) a warning sign or symptom of exposure is 

recognized, (c) a prohibited condition is detected, or (d) an evacuation alarm 

is sounded. 

14.7 Duties of Attendants 

14.7.1 Attendants must know the hazards that may be encountered in the 

confined space they are attending. 

14.7.2 Attendants must be able to recognize the behavioral effects that 

exposure to a hazardous condition may have on entrants. 

14.7.3 Attendants must know at all times the number and identity of the 

entrants inside the attended space. 

14.7.4 The attendant must remain outside the attended space unless relieved 

by another authorized attendant. Attendants may not enter the space unless 

relieved by another attendant who is trained, equipped, and authorized to 

perform attendant duties at that location. 

14.7.5 Attendants must maintain communications with entrants to monitor 

their condition and to order an evacuation when necessary. 

14.7.6 Attendants must order an evacuation of the permit space if: (a) the 

attendant detects a prohibited condition or is notified of a prohibited condition 

by an entrant (b) the attendant detects entrant behaviors indicating potential 
Section 14—Confined Spaces 

October 2009 14-9 

exposure to a hazardous situation, (c) the attendant detects a condition outside 

the space which may endanger the entrants, or (d) the attendant is unable to 

safely perform all of the duties. 

14.7.7 The attendant must summon the rescue service as soon as it appears 

that the authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from hazards within 

the space. 

14.7.8 The attendant must prevent unauthorized persons from entering the 

confined space and notify the entry supervisor and the entrants if an 

unauthorized person enters the space. 

14.7.9 The attendant may perform nonentry rescue if specified on the Entry 

Permit. 

14.7.10 The attendant may not be assigned any other duties that will interfere 

with his/her primary duty to monitor and protect the entrants. 

14.8 Duties of the Entry Supervisor 

14.8.1 The entry supervisor must know the hazards that may be encountered 

during the entry and be able to recognize the behavioral effects that exposure 

to a hazardous condition may have on entrants. 

14.8.2 The entry supervisor must verify that appropriate steps have been 

taken to make the space safe for entry and record this before allowing entry. 

14.8.3 The entry supervisor must hold a meeting with entrants and attendants 

before entry. At the meeting, the entry supervisor must review the hazards 

associated with the space to be entered, the control measures in place to 

mitigate the hazards, the results of air monitoring within the space, and 

prohibited conditions that would require an evacuation of the space. He/she 

must also verify that the entrants and attendants are trained and understand 

their duties associated with the entry and work in the confined space. 

14.8.4 The entry supervisor must terminate the entry and cancel the permit 

when (1) the work is completed, (2) a prohibited condition arises in the space, 

or (3) an evacuation of the space is ordered. If the permit is terminated, the 

space must be re-evaluated before issuing a new permit to complete the work. 

14.8.5 The entry supervisor must remove unauthorized individuals who 

attempt to enter the permitted space. 

14.8.6 The entry supervisor must verify the capability and availability of 

rescue services and the means for summoning them prior to authorizing entry 

into a confined space. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

14-10 October 2009 

14.8.7 When responsibility for a permit space entry is transferred to a new 

entry supervisor, the entry supervisor accepting the responsibility for the 

space must verify that the operations within the space are consistent with the 

permit. 
October 2009 15-1 

Section 15 

Control of Hazardous Energy(Lockout/Tagout) 

15.1 Scope and Purpose of Lockout/Tagout Program 

The unexpected energization, release of stored energy, or startup of machines or 

equipment can injure employees. This section covers servicing and maintenance 

of these machines or equipment. It establishes minimum performance 

requirements to control such hazardous energy at all Reclamation-operated 

facilities. Contractor work at Reclamation-owned and/or -operated facilities must 

comply with any existing hazardous energy control procedures of the facility. The 

section on Electrical Safety contains additional requirements for electrical 

clearance procedures to control hazardous energy sources. 

15.1.1 Application. This standard applies to the control of energy when 

installing, removing, servicing, or maintaining machines and equipment. This 

standard applies to any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, 

chemical, thermal, or other energy, but does not apply to the following: 

a. Work on cord and plug connected electric equipment in which 

unplugging the equipment from the energy source controls the exposure to 

the hazards of unexpected energization or startup of the equipment and the 

plug is under the exclusive control of the employee servicing or 

maintaining the equipment. 

b. Hot tap operations involving transmission and distribution of substances 

such as gas, steam, water, or petroleum products when they are performed 

on pressurized pipelines, provided that the employer demonstrates that 

(1) continuity of service is essential; (2) shutdown of the system is 

impractical; and (3) documented procedures are followed and special 

equipment is used that will effectively protect employees. 

15.1.2 Purpose. This section requires the establishment of a hazardous 

energy control program and the use of procedures to affix appropriate lockout 

devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise disable 

machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, startup, or release 

of stored energy to prevent injury. When required by other sections, use 

lockout or tagout devices and supplement them with the procedural and 

training requirements of this section. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-2 October 2009 

15.1.3 Definitions 

 

Affected person An employee whose job requires them to 

operate or use a system on which servicing 

or maintenance is being performed under 

lockout or tagout, or whose job requires 

them to work in an area where such 

servicing or maintenance is being 

performed. 

Authorized employee A qualified person who locks out or tags out 

machines or equipment in order to perform 

servicing or maintenance on that machine or 

equipment. An affected employee becomes 

an authorized employee when that 

employee’s duties include performing 

servicing or maintenance covered under this 

section. 

Capable of being locked out An energy isolating device has a built-in 

lock, a hasp, or other means for affixing a 

lock. Other energy isolating devices are 

capable of being locked out if lockout can be 

achieved without dismantling, rebuilding, or 

replacing the energy isolating device or 

permanently altering its energy control 

capability (i.e., vendor devices that will 

make energy isolating device lockable). 

Energized Connection to an energy source or 

containing residual or stored energy. 

Energy isolating device A mechanical device that physically 

prevents the transmission or release of 

energy, including, but not limited to the 

following: manually operated circuit 

breakers, disconnect switches, slide gates, 

line valves, blocks, or similar devices 

capable of blocking or isolating energy. The 

term does not include push buttons, selector 

switches, and other control circuit type 

devices. 
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) 

October 2009 15-3 

Energy source Any source of electrical, mechanical, 

hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal, 

nuclear, stored, or other energy. 

Hot tap Work involving welding on a piece of 

equipment (pipelines, vessels, or tanks) 

under pressure, to install connections or 

appurtenances. It is commonly used to 

replace or add sections of pipeline without 

interrupting service for air, gas, water, 

steam, and petrochemical distribution 

systems. 

Job supervisor Any person authorized to request, receive, 

and release clearances or Hot Line Orders 

and who is responsible for meeting the 

requirements of the Hazardous Energy 

Control Program. 

Lockout Placing a lockout device on an energy 

isolating device, in accordance with an 

established procedure, ensuring that the 

energy isolating device and the equipment 

being controlled cannot be operated until the 

lockout device is removed. 

Lockout device A device that uses a positive means such as 

a physical lock, to hold an energy isolating 

device in the safe position and to prevent the 

energizing of a machine or equipment. 

Lockout devices include blank flanges and 

bolted slip blinds. 

Responsible official The manager responsible for administering 

the Hazardous Energy Control Program. 

Servicing or maintenance Workplace activities such as constructing, 

installing, setting up, adjusting, inspecting, 

modifying, and maintaining or servicing 

machines or equipment. These activities 

include lubricating, cleaning, or unjamming 

machines or equipment and making 

adjustments or tool changes where the 

employee may be exposed to the unexpected 

energization or startup of equipment, or 

release of hazardous energy. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-4 October 2009 

Setting up Work to prepare a machine or equipment for 

normal production operation. 

Tagout Attaching a tag on an energy isolating 

device, in accordance with an established 

procedure, to indicate that employees must 

not operate the energy isolating device or 

the equipment until the tagout device is 

removed. 

Tagout device A prominent visible warning device, such as 

a tag with a means of attachment, which can 

be securely fastened to an energy isolating 

device in accordance with established 

procedures, to indicate that employees must 

not operate the energy isolating device until 

the tagout device is removed. 

15.2 Requirements of the Hazardous Energy Program 

15.2.1 Program. Each Reclamation facility and each contractor must have a 

written Hazardous Energy Control Program that includes written procedures, 

personnel training, and periodic inspections to ensure that before any 

employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment 

in which the unexpected energizing, startup, or release of stored energy could 

occur and cause injury or death, the machine or equipment is isolated from all 

hazardous energy sources. 

15.2.2 Energy Control Procedure 

a. The procedures must clearly and specifically outline the scope, 

purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to control hazardous energy 

and the means to ensure compliance including, but not limited to, the 

following: 

1. A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure. 

2. Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking 

and securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy. 

3. Specific procedural steps for placing, removing, and 

transferring lockout devices or tagout devices and the 

responsibility for them. 

4. Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to 

determine and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout 

devices, and other energy control measures. 
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) 

October 2009 15-5 

b. You do not need to document the procedures for a particular machine 

or equipment when all of the following elements exist: 

1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or 

residual energy or reaccumulation of stored energy after 

shutdown that could endanger employees. 

2. The machine or equipment has a readily identified and isolated, 

single energy source that will completely deenergize and deactivate 

the machine or equipment. 

3. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source 

and locked out during installation, removal, servicing or 

maintenance. 

4. A single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition. 

5. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the 

authorized employee performing the servicing or maintenance. 

6. The servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other 

employees. 

7. No accidents involving the unexpected activation or 

reenergization of the machine or equipment during servicing or 

maintenance have occurred. 

15.2.3 Lockout/Tagout 

a. If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, the 

Hazardous Energy Control Program must use lockout procedures, unless 

the employer can justify an operational need to use a tagout system instead 

of locking out. The employer must demonstrate that using a tagout system 

will fully protect employees. 

b. If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the 

Hazardous Energy Control Program must use a tagout system. 

c. Whenever replacing, making major repairs to, renovating, or modifying 

a machine or equipment, and whenever installing new machines or 

equipment, the design of energy isolating devices for the machine or 

equipment must be designed to accept a lockout device. 

15.2.4 Full Personnel Protection 

a. When using a tagout device on an energy isolating device that is 

capable of being locked out, attach the tagout device at the same place you 

would have attached the lockout device. The employer must demonstrate 

that the tagout program will provide the same level of safety as a lockout 

program. Tagout alone is not considered as protective as lockout; 

therefore, additional measures must be taken. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-6 October 2009 

b. In demonstrating that the tagout program provides an equivalent level 

of safety as a lockout program, the employer must demonstrate full 

compliance with all tagout-related provisions of this section, together with 

such additional elements needed to provide the same level of safety as a 

lockout device. Full personnel protection must include implementing 

additional safety measures, such as removing an isolating circuit element, 

blocking a controlling switch, opening an extra disconnecting device, or 

removing a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent 

energization. 

15.2.5 Protective Materials and Hardware 

a. Use locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-locking 

fasteners, or other hardware will be provided to isolate, secure, or block 

machines or equipment from energy sources. 

b. Lockout devices and tagout devices must be singularly identified, must 

be the only device(s) used to control energy, must not be used for other 

purposes, and must meet the following requirements: 

1. Durable. 

(a) Lockout and tagout devices must be capable of withstanding 

their environment for the maximum expected exposure. 

(b) The construction and printing of tagout devices must prevent 

the tag from deteriorating or the message on the tag from 

becoming illegible when exposed to weather conditions or wet and 

damp locations. 

(c) Tags must not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments 

such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and 

stored. 

2. Standardized. 

(a) Lockout devices within the facility must be of the same color, 

shape, and size. 

3. Substantial. 

(a) Lockout Devices. Lockout devices must be substantial enough 

to prevent removal without using excessive force or unusual 

techniques, such as bolt cutters or other metal cutting tools. 
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) 

October 2009 15-7 

(b) Tagout Devices. Tagout devices, including their means of 

attachment, must be substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or 

accidental removal. The means to attach tagout devices must be 

nonreusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and 

nonreleasable with a minimum unlocking strength of at least 

50 pounds and at least equivalent in general design and basic 

characteristics, to a one-piece, all environment-tolerant, nylon 

cable tie. 

4. Identifiable. 

(a) Lockout devices and tagout devices must indicate who applied 

the device(s). 

c. Tagout devices must warn against hazardous conditions if the machine 

or equipment is energized and must include a legend such as: DO NOT 

START, DO NOT OPEN, DO NOT CLOSE, DO NOT ENERGIZE, DO 

NOT OPERATE. 

15.2.6 Energy Isolation. Only authorized personnel may perform lockout or 

tagout. 

15.2.7 Notification of Personnel. The job supervisor or authorized person 

must notify affected employees after lockout or tagout devices have been 

placed or removed and before machines or equipment are started. 

15.2.8 Periodic Inspection. At least annually, conduct inspections to ensure 

adherence to all requirements of the hazardous energy control program. As a 

part of the inspection, inspect each energy control procedure used at the 

facility. The responsible official must certify that the inspections have been 

performed. The certification must specify the system on which the energy 

control procedures were used when inspected, the date of the inspections, and 

the names of employees and included in the inspections. 

a. A qualified individual who does not use the specific hazardous energy 

control procedure must inspect it annually. 

b. Annual inspections of hazardous energy control programs and 

procedures must include a review between the inspector and employees 

involved in use of the procedures to assess individual, personal knowledge 

of, and responsibilities under the program. 

c. Document any deficiencies and take appropriate measures to correct the 

deficiencies and to ensure future compliance. 

d. Conduct additional inspections when an incident occurs. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-8 October 2009 

15.2.9 Training and Communication 

a. Provide annual training to ensure that employees understand the 

purpose and procedures of the energy control program and that they 

acquire the knowledge and skills to safely apply, use, and remove the 

energy controls. All employees involved with hazardous energy control 

procedures must have initial training and must demonstrate adequate 

working knowledge of hazardous energy control policies and local 

programs and procedures before they are placed on the list of authorized 

personnel. The training must include the following: 

1. Each authorized employee must receive training in recognizing 

applicable hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of 

the energy available in the workplace, and the methods and means 

necessary for energy isolation and control. 

2. Each affected employee must be instructed in the purpose and 

use of energy control procedures. 

3. All other persons whose work is, or may be, in an area where 

energy control procedures may be used, must be instructed about 

the procedure, and about the prohibition relating to attempts to 

restart or reenergize machines or equipment that are locked out or 

tagged out. 

b. When tagout systems are used, also train employees in the following 

limitations of tags: 

1. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating 

devices and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices 

that is provided by a lock. 

2. A tag attached to an energy isolating device must not be 

removed without authorization of the employee responsible for it, 

and it must never be bypassed, ignored, or otherwise defeated. 

3. Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized 

employees, affected employees, and all other employees whose 

work operations are in, or may be in, the area. 

4. Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials 

that will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in 

the workplace. 

5. Tags may evoke a false sense of security; understanding 

hazards, verification, and absolute vigilance must be understood 

as part of the overall energy control program. 
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) 

October 2009 15-9 

6. Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so 

that they cannot be inadvertently or accidentally detached during 

use. 

c. Provide retraining: 

1. For all authorized and affected employees whenever job 

assignments change, systems or processes that present a new 

energy control hazard change, or when energy control procedures 

change. 

2. Whenever any inspection reveals, or there is reason to suspect, 

deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or 

use of the energy control procedures. 

3. At least annually. 

d. The responsible official must certify and document all training and 

retraining. Certification must contain such information as the name of the 

employee, the time, date, and location of training, and the name of the 

trainer. 

15.3 Application of Energy Control 

The established procedures or applying energy control (the lockout or tagout 

procedures) must cover the following elements and actions and must be done in 

the following sequence: 

15.3.1 Preparation for Shutdown. Before an authorized person or affected 

employee turns off a system (machine or equipment), the authorized person 

must have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the energy, the hazards of 

the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the energy. 

15.3.2 System (Machine or Equipment) Shutdown. Turn off or shut down 

the machine or equipment, using the procedures established for the machine or 

equipment. Use an orderly shutdown to avoid any additional or increased 

hazard(s) to employees resulting from equipment stoppage. 

15.3.3 System (Machine or Equipment) Isolation. Physically locate and 

operate each energy isolating device needed to control the energy to the 

machine or equipment to isolate it from the energy source(s). 

15.3.4 Lockout or Tagout Device Application 

a. Allow only authorized persons to affix lockout or tagout devices to 

each energy isolating device. 

b. Affix lockout devices, where used, to hold the energy isolating devices 

in a "safe" or "off" position. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-10 October 2009 

c. Affix tagout devices, where used, to clearly indicate that operating or 

moving energy isolating devices from the "safe" or "off" position is 

prohibited. 

1. Systems with energy isolating devices that are capable of being 

locked out must use locking devices. If you cannot affix locking 

devices, affix tagout devices at the same point of attachment as a 

locking device. 

2. If you cannot affix a tag directly to the energy isolating device, 

locate the tag as close as safely possible to the device, in a position 

that will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate 

the device. 

15.3.5 Stored Energy. Energy storage devices or equipment capable of 

storing energy may include, but are not limited to, capacitors; power 

electronic equipment; pneumatic, such as plant service compressed air and 

governor pressurized oil systems; and mechanical, such as raised gates and 

charged springs. 

a. After affixing lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, 

relieve, disconnect, restrain, or otherwise make safe all potentially 

hazardous stored or residual energy. 

b. If stored energy can reaccumulate to a hazardous level, continue to 

verify isolation until the employee completes servicing or maintenance, or 

until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists. 

15.3.6 Verification of Isolation. Before starting work on locked out or 

tagged out machines or equipment, the authorized person must verify 

completion of machine or equipment isolation and deenergization. 

15.4 Release From Lockout or Tagout 

Before removing lockout or tagout devices and restoring energy to the machine or 

equipment. Authorized employees must follow procedures and take actions to 

ensure the following: 

15.4.1 The Machine or Equipment. Inspect the work area to ensure that 

nonessential items have been removed and to ensure that machine or 

equipment components are operationally intact. 

15.4.2 Personnel 

a. Check the work area to ensure that all employees have been safely 

positioned or removed. 

b. Before removing lockout or tagout devices and before energizing 

machines or equipment, notify affected employees. 
Section 15—Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout) 

October 2009 15-11 

c. After removing lockout or tagout devices and before energizing 

machines or equipment, notify affected employees. 

15.4.3 Lockout or Tagout Device Removal. The employee who affixed 

each lockout or tagout device must remove it from each energy isolating 

device. The responsible official may grant an exception when that employee 

is not available to remove it. Then, the responsible official may remove the 

device, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have 

been developed, documented, and incorporated into the employer's energy 

control program. The responsible official must demonstrate that the specific 

procedure includes at least the following elements: 

a. Verification by the responsible official that the authorized employee 

who applied the device is not at the facility. 

b. Making all reasonable efforts to inform the authorized employee that 

his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed. 

c. Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before 

he/she resumes work at the facility. 

15.5 Requirements of Operating Equipment Under Clearance 

15.5.1 Testing or Positioning of Machines, Equipment or Components. If 

you must temporarily remove lockout or tagout devices from the energy 

isolating device and energize the machine or equipment to test or position the 

machine, equipment, or component, follow the following sequence of actions: 

a. Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials, referring to the 

subsection on release from lockout or tagout. 

b. Remove personnel from the machine or equipment area, using the 

subsection on personnel. Be thoroughly familiar with the requirements of 

this section "Control of Hazardous Energy." 

c. Remove the lockout or tagout devices referring to the subsection on 

lockout or tagout device removal. 

d. Energize and proceed with testing or positioning. 

e. Deenergize all systems and reapply energy control measures using 

procedures in this section to continue the servicing or maintenance. 

15.5.2 Group Lockout or Tagout 

a. When a crew, craft, department, or other group of employees performs 

servicing or maintenance, they must use a procedure that provides the 

same level of protection as a personal lockout or tagout device. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

15-12 October 2009 

b. Use group lockout or tagout devices in accordance with the procedures 

required by this section and FIST Volume 1-1 including, but not 

necessarily limited to, the following specific requirements: 

1. The primary authorized employee has the primary 

responsibility for the employees working under the protection of a 

group lockout or tagout device, and for the device itself. The 

primary authorized employee must determine the exposure status 

of individual group members with regard to the lockout or tagout 

of the system. 

2. When using group lockout, each authorized employee must 

affix a personal lockout device to a group lockbox, or comparable 

mechanism before beginning work and must remove these devices 

when finished with their portion of the work. 

3. When more than one crew, craft, or department, is involved, 

the written procedure must prescribe the assignment of overall 

job-associated lockout or tagout control responsibility. 

15.5.3 Shift or Crew Changes. Use specific procedures during shift or crew 

changes to ensure the continuity of group lockout or tagout protection. The 

program must describe a procedure to allow for information exchange to 

ensure the continuity of protection between off going and oncoming 

personnel. The primary authorized employee accepting the transfer must 

physically verify the lockout points. 

15.6 Requirements for Outside Personnel (Contractors, etc.) 

a. Whenever a contractor or non-agency organization is involved in 

construction, maintenance, or testing on or near equipment in a 

Reclamation facility or transmission line, a special work permit is required 

to authorize the contractor to proceed with the work. 

b. Properly qualified and authorized Reclamation representatives must 

request the clearances or hot line orders, perform the required switching, 

receive the clearances or hot line orders, and issue the special work permit. 

c. Contractor personnel performing work at Reclamation-operated or 

maintained facilities must comply with all existing Hazardous Energy 

Control procedures of the facility and Reclamation’s Hazardous Energy 

Control Program. 
October 2009 16-1 

Section 16 

Fall Protection and Rope Supported Work 

16.1 Fall Protection 

Protect employees who work on slopes steeper than 11⁄2:1, H:V slippery footing, 

or who could fall from heights of 6 feet or more (if not protected by fixed 

scaffolding, guardrails, or safety nets) by a personal fall protection system. The 

fall protection system must meet the requirements of this section. However, these 

requirements do not apply to rope supported work (high angle work) such as high 

scaling, geologic mapping, structural inspections, or other operations that require 

specialized rope equipment or techniques. Refer to the section on "RopeSupported Work." 

16.1.1 Hardware. Connectors must be drop forged, pressed, or formed steel 

or equivalent materials. Connectors must have a corrosion-resistant finish, 

and edges must be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the 

system. D-rings and snap-hooks must be able to sustain a minimum tensile 

load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kilonewton [kn]). D-rings and snap-hooks must be 

proof-tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without 

cracking, breaking, or being permanently deformed. 

a. Snap-Hooks. Snap-hooks must be of a locking type designed to 

prevent disengagement of the snap-hook by contact of the snap-hook 

keeper with the connected member. 

b. Use. Connect snap-hooks to items 1-5 below only when designed for 

that use: 

1. Directly to webbing, rope, wire rope, or chain. 

2. To each other. 

3. To a D-ring to that has another snap-hook or other connector is 

attached. 

4. To a horizontal lifeline. 

5. To any object with an incompatible shape or dimension that could 

disengage the snap-hook (e.g., the connected object depressing the 

snap-hook keeper and releasing itself). 

16.1.2 Lanyards and Lifelines. Lanyards and vertical lifelines that tie off 

one employee must have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds 

(22.2 kN). Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards that automatically limit free 

fall distance to 2 feet (.61 meter [m]) or less must have components that can 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

16-2 October 2009 

sustain a minimum static load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kn) applied to the device, 

with the lifeline or lanyard fully extended. Self-retracting lifelines and 

lanyards that do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (.61 m) or less, ripstitch 

lanyards, and tearing and deforming lanyards must be able to sustain a 

minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN), applied to the device with 

the lifeline or lanyard fully extended. A qualified person must design, install, 

and supervise the use of horizontal lifelines, as part of a complete personal fall 

arrest system that maintains a safety factor of at least two. Restraint lines 

must be able to sustain a tensile load of at least 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN). 

Lifelines and carriers must not be made of natural fiber rope. 

16.1.3 Anchorages. Anchorages must be able to support at least 

5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or must be designed, installed, 

and used under the supervision of a qualified person as part of a complete fall 

protection system that maintains a safety factor of at least two. 

a. Rebar. Anchorages may not be made from drill steel or 

reinforcing bar. 

b. Mobile Anchorages. Anchorages must not be made to mobile 

equipment or other items that can move while the anchorage is in use. 

16.1.4 Procedures. Use personal fall protection systems and their 

components only for employee fall protection. Inspect lifelines, lanyards, 

belts, hardware, and anchorages before use each day and discard questionable 

devices. Use and care for fiber lifelines and lanyards according to 

recommendations contained in the Rigging Manual and in these standards, 

whichever is more protective. 

a. Lifelines. Provide each employee with a separate lifeline when using 

vertical lifelines. 

b. Rescue. Make provisions to promptly rescue employees who fall or 

provide the means for self-rescue. 

c. Protection. Protect lifelines from cut, abraded, or damaged in any 

way. 

d. Maintenance, Inspection, Testing. All personal fall protection 

systems must follow the manufacturers' recommendations for 

maintenance, inspection, and testing. 

e. Training. Before using personal fall protection systems, and after 

changing any component or system, train employees in the application 

limits of the equipment, proper hookup, anchoring, and tie-off techniques, 

methods of use, and proper methods of equipment inspection and storage. 
Section 16—Fall Protection and 

Rope Supported Work 

October 2009 16-3 

16.1.5 Personal Fall Arrest System. A system used to arrest an employee in 

a fall from a working level consists of an anchorage, connectors, and a body 

harness. The system may also include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, 

or suitable combination of these. 

a. Performance Criteria. Personal fall arrest systems must, when 

stopping a fall: 

1. Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds 

(8 kN), when used with a body harness. 

2. Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit the maximum 

deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m). 

3. Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact 

energy of an employee freefalling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the 

free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less. 

b. Performance Test. When used by employees with a combined person 

and tool weight of less than 310 pounds (140 kg), personal fall arrest 

systems meeting the criteria and protocol contained in 29 CFR 1926 

Subpart M, must comply with these requirements. 

c. Use. Rig personal fall arrest systems to prevent an employee from 

falling more than 6 feet or contacting any lower level. Employees must 

wear a personal fall arrest system with the attachment point of the body 

harness in the center of the back near shoulder level or above the head. 

When connected to a horizontal lifeline that could become vertical, 

connectors must be able to lock in either direction on the lifeline. 

d. Maintenance. Maintenance is a critical element in personal fall arrest 

systems. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations. At least one 

employee, certified and trained by the manufacturer as qualified to inspect 

and maintain personal fall arrest systems, must be available when such 

systems are in use. 

e. Impact Loading. When a personal fall arrest system has been 

subjected to shock loading, immediately remove it from service until a 

qualified person inspects it and determines it suitable for reuse. 

16.1.6 Positioning Device System. Positioning device systems include 

equipment or hardware that, when used with its body belt or body harness, 

supports an employee on an elevated vertical surface (such as a wall or a rebar 

mat), allowing both hands freedom of movement. Such systems also refer to 

devices attached between the employee and an anchorage to prevent an 

accidental fall from an elevated surface. 

a. Performance Criteria. Positioning device systems must withstand, 

without failure, a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop of a 250 pound (113-kg) weight. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

16-4 October 2009 

b. Performance Test. Positioning device systems comply with these 

requirements if they meet the test contained in 29 CFR 1926 subpart M, 

appendix D. Restraint line systems must be designed to meet the same test 

requirements as other positioning device systems. 

16.1.7 Personal Fall Protection System for Ladder Climbing. Employees 

wear, or are attached to, personal fall protection systems to prevent injuries 

and falls. 

a. Design Criteria for System Components. The system must permit 

the employee to ascend or descend with both hands free for climbing, 

without having to hold, push, or pull any part of the system. The 

connection between the carrier or lifeline and the point of attachment to 

the body belt or harness must be no more than 9 inches (23 cm) long. The 

system must activate within 2 feet (0.61 m) after a fall occurs to limit the 

descending velocity of an employee to 7 feet per second (2.1 meters per 

second) or less. 

b. Performance Criteria. Ladder safety devices and their support 

systems must withstand, without failure, an 18-inch (0.41-m) drop of a 

500-pound (226-kg) weight. All other personal fall protection systems for 

climbing activities must withstand, without failure, a 4-foot (1.2-m) drop 

of a 250-pound (113-kg) weight. 

c. Installation. Attach mountings for rigid carriers at each end of the 

carrier. Attach intermediate mounting, as necessary, spaced along the 

entire length of the carrier to provide the strength necessary to stop 

employee falls. Attach mounting for flexible carriers at each end of the 

carrier. When the system is exposed to wind, install cable guides used 

with a flexible carrier with a minimum spacing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and a 

maximum spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the entire length of the 

carrier, to prevent wind damage to the system. The design and installation 

of mountings and cable guides must not reduce the design strength of the 

ladder. 

16.1.8 Requirements for Linemen's Belts and Lifelines 

a. Belt and Lifeline Requirements. Use linemen's body belts and safety 

straps when working above ground levels on wood poles, steel towers, 

communication towers, and other transmission line, substation, and 

switchyard structures. 

b. Body Belts, Safety Straps, and Lanyards. Linemen's body belts, 

safety straps, and lanyards must meet the current design specifications in 

29 CFR 1926.959. The manufacturer must certify compliance. 
Section 16—Fall Protection and 

Rope Supported Work 

October 2009 16-5 

c. Nonconductive Rope Lifelines. Nonconductive rope lifelines must 

have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds and be able to 

withstand an alternating current dielectric test of at least 25,000 volts per 

foot "dry" for 3 minutes without visible deterioration. 

16.2 Rope Supported Safety Requirements 

The requirements in this section apply when an employee performs ropesupported work on high angle slopes, where the rope is the primary means of 

support, and where the employee must manipulate the rope and its attachments, 

while using technical climbing techniques to obtain access to the work area. This 

includes such work as high scaling, geologic mapping, rock bolting, structural 

inspections, construction, operations, and maintenance activities. Permit ropesupported work only when other means of access are not feasible or methods 

other than rope-supported work expose employees to greater danger. 

16.2.1 Belays. Use a safety (belay) rope for work covered by this section. 

The belay line must be separate and independent from the support (load) line. 

Another employee may control the belay or the belay may be self-controlled. 

Use a belay line, if feasible, for jobs where the work surface provides the 

primary support once the work site is reached. The standard belay line (safety 

line) must be a dynamic rope that meets the minimum strength requirements 

of this section. When not using a standard belay, use a deceleration device to 

limit fall forces to less than 1,800 pounds. The maximum free fall distance 

must not exceed 6 feet. 

16.2.2 Equipment. The employee who performs the inspection must know 

how the entire system will function under various slope conditions. 

Equipment strengths must be certified, listed as meeting, or shown by testing 

to meet the requirements of ANSI A10.14, ANSI Z359.1, the European Union 

(designated by the "CE" marking), Union Internationale des Associations 

d'Alpinisme (UIAA), or other recognized certification organization. Knots, 

friction devices, ascenders, and other hardware will decrease the overall 

strength of the rope support system. Before use, evaluate the complete 

support system, with all of its parts, for adequacy. 

16.2.3 Anchorage. Use at least two independent anchorages. Each 

anchorage must be able to support at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load. 

Locate anchorages far enough apart so that failure of one anchor will not 

cause failure of another anchor. If possible, locate anchors in line with the 

direction of rope pull; otherwise, take steps to limit the rope extension if one 

anchor fails. All climber-installed anchorages, except directional anchors, 

must meet the minimum strength requirements of this section. Directional 

anchors are anchors used to laterally position a climber who is supported by 

two anchors meeting the requirements of this section. Directional anchors do 

not take the place of the main support anchors. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

16-6 October 2009 

16.2.4 Rope. Support or safety ropes must be manmade fiber ropes, 

specifically designed for climbing or rescue applications and must be capable 

of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without failure. Ropes must 

be of kernmantle construction with a minimum diameter of 7/16 inch (11 mm) 

and a maximum diameter of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm). 

16.2.5 Hardware. All connecting hardware used in the support system must 

be capable of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without failure. 

Use only locking carabineers in the support system. You may substitute 

locking shackles for locking carabineers in anchor connections. 

16.2.6 Body Harnesses. Use only full body harnesses, which distribute fall 

arrest forces over at least the upper thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders. 

Harness connections must be designed for work positioning and fall arrests 

and be capable of supporting 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) static load without 

failure. Separate waist and chest harnesses are permitted if designed to be 

buckled together. 

16.2.7 Equipment Inspection. Inspect all equipment used for ropesupported work before and after each use, using the manufacturer’s 

recommended procedures. Maintain a rope log for each rope. 

16.2.8 Equipment Retirement. If any equipment used for rope-supported 

work is subjected to severe impact or shock loading, immediately remove it 

from service. Do not use it for employee protection until it has been inspected 

and determined suitable for reuse. The employee who inspects the equipment 

must be knowledgeable about equipment specifications. Remove from 

service any equipment that exceeds manufacturer’s recommended wear or 

shows other defects. Automatically retire ropes, webbing, accessory cord, and 

harnesses from service after 5 years, regardless of condition or use history. 

16.2.9 Training. Train employees in the techniques and equipment used for 

rope-supported work before assigning them to a job where its use is required. 

The training must cover climbing safety and hazards; the use, limitations, 

inspection and maintenance of equipment; and basic climbing and self rescue 

techniques. Only the following individuals may conduct training courses for 

Reclamation employees: (1) a Reclamation climbing certifier, (2) a 

Reclamation employee designated by a Reclamation climbing certifier as 

competent to train personnel in using rope-supported work equipment and 

procedures, or (3) a training contractor certified by a Reclamation climbing 

certifier as competent to train personnel in using rope-supported work 

equipment and procedures. Contractors must provide training to their 

employees to make sure they meet the minimum skills requirements of this 

section. 
Section 16—Fall Protection and 

Rope Supported Work 

October 2009 16-7 

Reclamation employees’ minimum standards must meet the following for 

basic training and experience: 

a. Climber. A climber must have at least 32 hours of basic climbing 

training. Basic training must include: 

• Climbing safety and fall hazards 

• Applications of equipment 

• Estimating free fall distance 

• Anchorage techniques 

• Equipment maintenance and inspection 

• Rescue 

• Practice in applying techniques outlined in the Reclamation ropesupported work guidelines. 

A climber must complete 32 hours of developmental training each year. 

However, this requirement can be reduced to 16 hours annually if the climber 

has at least 40 hours of on-rope work experience during the year. 

b. Team Leader. The team leader must be a certified climber, have the 

ability to write a job hazard analysis, be able to analyze and lay out ropesupported jobs safely and efficiently, have experience in the type of work 

to be performed, and be able to verify the climbing team's experience and 

physical qualifications. A team leader is responsible for and will 

supervise, either directly or indirectly through an acting team leader, all 

climbing operations conducted by his/her team. A team leader must 

complete 32 hours of developmental training each year. This requirement 

can be reduced to 16 hours annually if the team leader has at least 

40 hours of on-rope work experience during the year. 

c. Climbing Certifier. A climbing certifier must be a certified climber 

and designated team leader or capable of fulfilling that role. The climbing 

certifier will be responsible for certifying Reclamation employees as 

climbers and team leaders, and will act as a resource person for climbing 

teams. Each year, the climbing certifier must complete the annual training 

required for a climber plus complete 16 hours of advanced developmental 

training and maintain an approved independent certification. 

d. Climb Training. Basic climbing training must include an opportunity 

to practice the skills learned in progressively more difficult situations. 

Beginning climbers will continue on-the-job training under the team 

leader’s close supervision following completion of basic training. Before 

starting any job, provide refresher practice or developmental training, as 

needed. Document all training. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

16-8 October 2009 

16.2.10 Certification. After completing basic climbing training and before 

being certified for rope-supported work, Reclamation employees must pass a 

certification test. The certification test must include a written exam and 

opportunity to demonstrate basic technical skills. A Reclamation climbing 

certifier must conduct the certification test. Certification will be valid for 1 

year, and the team leader will renew certification upon successful completion 

of the minimum annual developmental training. Certification will remain 

valid only if a climber completes the annual minimum developmental training 

requirement. 

a. At least every 3 years, the team leader and a climbing certifier, who has 

not climbed with the climber being evaluated or the team leader in the 

preceding year will evaluate the experience and overall skill level of each 

certified climber. If the climber’s skill is found to be inadequate, the 

climber must retake the basic certification training course or complete a 

focused training course designated by the team leader, or, at the discretion 

of the team leader, will not be re-certified. 

b. Each climber must maintain a personal log of climbing and training 

activities to aid in recertification and training review. 

16.2.11 Physicals. Certified climbers must successfully complete a medical 

examination annually and be cleared to perform rope-supported work. The 

team leader will remove any climber from the climbing team for failing to 

meet the medical qualification criteria. 

16.2.12 Climbing Team. A climbing team consisting of at least three 

certified climbers will perform rope-supported work. 

16.2.13 Team Leader. Appoint a team leader for each activity requiring 

rope-supported work. The team leader must be a qualified individual and will 

have overall responsibility for the coordination and conduct of the ropesupported work activity. 

16.2.14 Top Person. A lookout (top person) must be on duty at the anchor 

points of the support (load) lines and belay (safety) lines at all times when 

employees are working on ropes. The top person's duty will be to ensure that 

anchorages remain secure and undisturbed and that no activities take place 

that could endanger employees working on the ropes. The top person must 

also help respond to emergency situations. 

16.2.15 Communications. Maintain reliable voice communications between 

an employee on the rope and the top slope or belay personnel. If distance or 

background noise interferes with voice communications, use a two-way radio. 
Section 16—Fall Protection and 

Rope Supported Work 

October 2009 16-9 

16.2.16 Rescue. Before starting rope-supported work, make arrangements 

for rescue. Provisions for rescue must include self-rescue, rescue using onsite personnel, and rescue requiring off-site personnel. 

16.2.17 Job Planning. Before starting a job requiring rope-supported work, 

submit a Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to the Contracting Officer's 

Representative (COR) or the appropriate office head. A person qualified in 

rope-supported work (high angle work) must review the JHA before 

submitting it to the appropriate office heads. The JHA must address, at a 

minimum, the following items: 

a. Emergency procedures, including medical assistance. 

b. Personal protective equipment required, including gloves, safety 

glasses, hard hat with chin strap, foul weather gear, etc. Use climber 

safety helmets certified by UIAA/CE for rope-supported work if they offer 

equal or greater protection than ANSI Z89.1 type II hard hats. 

c. Describe the equipment to be used for rope-supported work. For 

example, type and sizes of rope to be used, hardware, types of anchorages, 

and auxiliary equipment. 

d. Methods for ensuring safe entrance and exit from slope. 

e. Instruction and/or refresher training sessions (as required) to ensure 

competency and knowledge of requirements for all employees performing 

rope-supported work. 

f. Procedures for protecting employees and public from falling material. 

g. Provisions for rescue, including both rescue by onsite personnel and 

arrangements for rescue services by offsite personnel. 

h. Other hazards, including confined spaces, hazardous energy, 

biohazards, chemical hazards, etc. 
October 2009 17-1 

Section 17 

Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels, 

Compressors, and Welding

This section sets forth the requirements for using hand tools, pressure vessels, 

compressors, and for welding. It specifically addresses hand and power tools; 

pneumatic tools; airless spray guns; grinding tools; woodworking tools; power 

saws; hydraulic-powered tools; powder-actuated tools; hand-powered winches 

and hoists; lever and ratchet, screw, and hydraulic jacks; boilers and unfired 

pressure vessels; compressors; compressed gas cylinders; gas welding and 

cutting; arc welding and cutting; and inert gas metal-arc welding. 

17.1 General Requirements for Hand and Power Tools 

17.1.1 Maintenance. Maintain hand tools, power tools, and jacks in safe 

operating condition. Immediately remove damaged and defective tools from 

service and repair or replace them. 

17.1.2 Proper Use. Use tools only for their designed purpose. Do not use 

electrical cords, air hoses, and hydraulic hoses to raise or lower tools. 

17.1.3 Storage. Do not leave tools on scaffolds or elevated work spaces. 

Provide containers on the jobsite for hand tools. 

17.1.4 Guarding. If a tool accommodates guards, operate the tool with the 

guards in place. Safeguard moving part hazards as set forth in the current 

edition of the American National Standards Institute/American Society of 

Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) B15.1, "Safety Standard for Mechanical 

Power Transmission Apparatus." 

17.1.5 Point of Operation Guarding. Point of operation is the area on a 

machine where work is actually performed. Provide guards at the point of 

operation on machines that expose the operator to injury. The guards must 

meet all applicable specific standards. If no standards exist, the guards must 

prevent the operator from having any body part in the danger zone during the 

operating cycle. 

17.1.6 Grounding. Double insulate or effectively ground electric tools. 

17.1.7 Switches. On-off switches controlling the operation of hand-held 

power tools must conform to the following requirements: 

a. Equip hand-held power platen sanders, grinders with 2-inch or less 

diameter wheels, routers, planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, 

scroll saws, jigsaws with blade shanks 0.25 inch wide or less, concrete 

vibrators, and power tampers with only positive on-off switch. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-2 October 2009 

b. Equip hand-held power drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, 

vertical, and angle grinders with wheels more than 2 inches in diameter, 

disk sanders, belt sanders, reciprocating saws, and similar tools with a 

momentary contact "on-off" control. These may have a lock-on control if 

the operator can shut off the power with a single motion of the same finger 

or fingers that turn it on and if the switch is adequately guarded to prevent 

accidental operation. 

c. Equip jackhammers and similar pneumatic-powered hand tools and 

other hand-held power tools, including chain saws, circular saws, and 

percussion tools, with a constant pressure switch that shuts off power 

when pressure is released. 

17.1.8 Personal Protective Equipment. Provide hand tool and power tool 

operators with personal protective equipment and ensure its use as set forth in 

the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." Original equipment guards 

or manufactured guards must be used on all grinders, drills, lathes, sanders, 

and other equipment to prevent injury to the operator. 

17.1.9 Anchoring Fixed Machinery. Securely anchor machines designated 

for fixed locations to prevent movement. 

17.1.10 Hazardous Conditions. Use only nonsparking or intrinsically safe 

tools where sources of ignition may cause an explosion or fire. Do not use 

gasoline-powered tools underground, in buildings, or in partially enclosed 

locations where toxic exhaust gases can accumulate. Place gasoline powered 

portable compressors, generators, and pressure washers outdoors and away 

from air intakes to prevent drawing engine exhaust indoors. 

17.2 Requirements for Pneumatic Tools 

17.2.1 Impact Tools. Operate pneumatic impact tools with safety clips or 

retainers installed to prevent accidental discharge from the chuck. 

17.2.2 Air Hoses. For air lines more than one-half inch inside diameter, 

provide whip-check devices attached to the hose at each connection or splice. 

As a substitute, provide a safety device at the source of supply or branch line 

that will automatically reduce pressure in case of a line failure if the device 

effectively prevents whipping. 

17.2.3 Operating Pressures. Do not exceed the manufacturer's safe 

operating pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, and fittings. Remove defective 

hoses, valves, and fittings from service. 

17.2.4 Compressed Air Used for Cleaning. Never direct compressed air at 

any part of the body. Use compressed air for cleaning purposes only if the 

pressure is less than 30 pounds per square inch, and then only with effective 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-3 

chip guarding and personal protective equipment. The 30-pound-per-squareinch requirement does not apply to sandblasting, green cutting, removing mill 

scale, cleaning concrete forms, and similar cleaning operations. 

17.2.5 Care of Air Hoses. Protect pneumatic hoses from physical damage 

while they are in use and in storage. 

17.2.6 Nailers and Staplers. Pneumatic nailers, staplers, and similar 

equipment with an automatic fastener feed that operates at more than 

100 pounds per square inch must have a single-action trigger and a safety 

device on the muzzle to prevent the ejection of the fasteners unless the muzzle 

is in contact with the work surface. 

17.3 Requirements for Airless Spray Guns 

17.3.1 Airless Spray Guns. Equip airless spray guns that atomize fluids at 

pressures of 1,000 pounds per square inch or greater with one of the following 

safety systems to prevent accidental fluid injection into the operator. 

a. Automatic or Visible Manual Safety Device. The safety device must 

prevent pulling of the trigger to release the paint or fluid until the operator 

manually releases the safety device. 

b. Diffuser Nut and Nozzle Guard. The diffuser nut must prevent highpressure high-velocity release when the nozzle tip is removed. The nozzle 

tip guard must prevent the tip from contacting the operator. 

c. Other Equivalent Protection. Any system that provides an equivalent 

level of protection as above is acceptable. 

17.4 Requirements for Using Grinding Tools 

17.4.1 General. Installing, guarding, using, and caring for grinding tools 

must comply with the standards set forth in the current standard ANSI B7.1, 

"The Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels" and manufacturer's 

instructions. Use grinding tools only if the safety guards and protective 

flanges are installed and properly adjusted. 

17.4.2 Power Supply. Supply all grinding machines with sufficient power to 

maintain the spindle speed at safe levels under all conditions of normal 

operation. 

17.4.3 Guarding. Safety guards must cover the spindle end, nut, and flange 

projections. Mount guards to maintain proper alignment with the wheel. 

Where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the worker, the 

safety guards may expose the spindle end, nut, and outer flange. Where the 

work entirely covers the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be 

omitted. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable 

saws. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-4 October 2009 

17.4.4 Abrasive Wheels. Do not operate abrasive wheels faster than their 

rated safe speed. Inspect wheels according to manufacturer's instructions 

before mounting and, periodically, to ensure the abrasive wheel is not cracked 

or otherwise defective. Remove cracked or defective abrasive wheels from 

service immediately and destroy them. 

17.4.5 Grinding Wheels. Grinding wheels must fit freely on the spindle. Do 

not force them on. Tighten the spindle nut only enough to hold the wheel in 

place. 

17.4.6 Bench and Pedestal Grinders. Provide bench-mounted and pedestal 

grinders with safety guards that are strong enough to withstand the effect of a 

bursting wheel. The guard must not expose more than 90 degrees of the 

grinding wheel periphery and sides. However, if the work must contact the 

wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle, the angular exposure must 

not exceed 125 degrees. The guard must have a readily adjustable toolrest 

that is maintained within one-eighth inch of the wheel and an adjustable 

tongue maintained within one-fourth inch of the periphery of the wheel to 

prevent injury to the operator by containing the wheel failure inside the 

housing. 

17.4.7 Cup-Shaped Wheels. Protect cup-shaped wheels used for external 

grinding by either a revolving cup guard or a band guard. 

17.4.8 Special Conditions 

a. Safety Flanges. Use a wheel equipped with safety flanges when work 

location prevents the use of guarding. Use only safety flanges with wheels 

designed to fit the flanges. Use only safety flanges of a type and design 

and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of the wheel will be 

retained in case of accidental breakage. 

b. Small Diameter Wheels. Wheels 2 inches or less in diameter that are 

securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel do not require guards. 

c. Internal Grinding. Guarding is not required if a grinding wheel is 

entirely within the work being ground while in use. 

17.4.9 Side Grinding. Do not permit side grinding unless the abrasive wheel 

is specifically designed for this purpose. 

17.5 Requirements for Woodworking Tools 

17.5.1 Requirement. Installing, guarding, using, and caring for poweroperated woodworking tools must comply with the standards set forth in 

29 CFR Part 1910.213, "Woodworking Machinery Requirements." 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-5 

17.5.2 Switches. Locate switches so the operator is able to shut off the power 

without leaving the operating position. Provide fixed power-driven tools with 

a disconnect switch that can be locked in the off position. 

17.5.3 Automatic Feed. Whenever the nature of the work permits, install 

automatic feeding devices on fixed, power-driven woodworking tools. Feeder 

attachments must have the feed rolls and other moving parts guarded to 

protect the operator. 

17.5.4 Electrical Equipment. When automatic restarting would create a 

hazard, control electrically driven equipment with a device to prevent 

automatic restarting following a power failure. 

17.5.5 Push Sticks. Use a push stick, block, or similar safe means for all 

operations close to high-speed cutting edges. 

17.5.6 Combs. Provide combs (featherboards) or suitable jigs when standard 

guards cannot be used. 

17.5.7 Planers and Joiners. Equip planers and joiners with cylindrical 

cutting heads and fully guard them. 

17.5.8 Cleanup. Keep work areas clean. Provide a brush or vacuum system 

near each machine to remove sawdust, chips, and shavings. 

17.5.9 Portable Belt Sanding Machines. Provide belt sanding machines 

with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a roller. These 

guards must prevent the operator’s hands or fingers from coming in contact 

with the nip points. Guard the unused run of the sanding belt against 

accidental contact. 

17.6 Requirements for Power Saws 

17.6.1 Circular Saws. Equip bench saws with spreaders, anti-kickback 

devices, and guards that automatically enclose the exposed cutting edges. 

Equip portable hand-held circular saws with guards above and below the 

baseplate or shoe. The upper guard must cover the saw to the depth of the 

teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit tilting the base for bevel 

cuts. The lower guard must cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for 

the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction and contact with the 

work. As the blade is withdrawn, the lower guard must automatically and 

instantly return to the covering position. 

17.6.2 Operating Speeds. Permanently mark the operating speed on all 

circular saws that are more than 20 inches in diameter or that operate at speeds 

of more than 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Use only blades designed for 

use at the marked operating speed. When the saw is retensioned for a 

different speed, change the marking to indicate the new speed. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-6 October 2009 

17.6.3 Radial Arm Saws. Equip radial arm saws and swing cutoff saws 

with: (1) limit stops that prevent the leading edge of the blade from traveling 

beyond the edge of the table, (2) hoods or guards that protect the operator 

from flying material, direct the sawdust toward the back of the blade, and 

enclose all parts of the blade not in contact with the material being cut, and 

(3) automatic brakes or automatic return devices. Install nonkickback fingers 

or dogs and a spreader when ripping. 

17.6.4 Bandsaws. Fully enclose bandsaw blades except at the point of 

operation. Adjust the adjustable guide within one-half inch of the work. 

17.6.5 Unattended. Never leave running power saws unattended. 

17.6.6 Sawdust Collectors. Equip bench-type circular saws and radial saws 

used for production work with sawdust collectors. 

17.6.7 Cleanup. Clean up scrap and sawdust. Clean up the shop area as 

needed to maintain safe working conditions and at the end of each shift. 

17.6.8 Defective Blades. Remove cracked, bent, or otherwise defective 

blades from service and destroy them. 

17.7 Requirements for Hydraulic-Powered Tools 

17.7.1 Safe Operating Pressures. Adhere to the manufacturer's safe 

operating pressure for hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and fittings. 

17.7.2 Hydraulic Fluid. Ensure fluid in hydraulic-powered tools is fire 

resistant and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 

17.7.3 Stationary Hydraulic-Powered Presses. Presses must have guards 

that adequately contain flying particles forcibly expelled from the compressed 

material. 

17.8 Requirements for Powder-Actuated Tools 

Design, maintain, and use powder-actuated tools in accordance with the standards 

set forth in the current edition of ANSI A10.3, "Safety Requirements for PowderActuated Fastening Systems"; the tool manufacturer’s instructions; and the 

requirements of this subsection. These standards cover three types of tools: high 

velocity, low-velocity piston, and hammer-operated piston—low-velocity. 

17.8.1 Operator Qualification. Allow only employees trained and certified 

in the safe use of powder-actuated tools to operate and service them. 

Operators must possess an operator's card issued by a firm or person 

authorized to issue such cards. 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-7 

17.8.2 Unauthorized Use. Take safeguards to prevent unauthorized persons 

from possessing or using these tools and their charges. 

17.8.3 Flammable Atmospheres. Do not use powder-actuated tools in 

explosive or flammable atmospheres. 

17.8.4 Studs and Fasteners. Use only the powder charges, studs, or 

fasteners specified by the manufacturer for the specified tool. 

17.8.5 Safety Features 

a. All Tools. All powder-actuated tools must have the following safety 

features: 

1. The firing mechanism design must prevent the tool from firing 

during loading or preparation to fire or if it is dropped while loaded. 

2. Firing of the tool must depend on at least two separate and distinct 

operations of the operator. The final firing movement must be 

separate from the movement to bring the tool into the firing position. 

3. The tool design must allow all breeching parts to be reasonably 

visible to allow a check for any foreign matter that may be present. 

4. The tool design must allow the operator to select a power level 

adequate to perform the desired work without excessive force. 

b. High-Velocity Tools. High-velocity tools must have the following 

features in addition to the common features listed above. 

1. The muzzle end of the tool must have a protective shield or guard at 

least 

3-1⁄2 inches in diameter, mounted perpendicular to and concentric with 

the barrel, and designed to confine any flying fragments or particles 

that might otherwise create a hazard at the time of firing. 

2. The tool design must not allow firing unless the guarding or 

shielding device is in place. 

3. The tool design must not allow operation unless the operator is 

holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds 

greater than the total weight of the tool. 

4. The tool design must not allow operation when equipped with the 

standard guard indexed to the center position if any bearing surface of 

the guard is tilted more than 8 degrees from contact with the work 

surface. 

c. Low-Velocity Piston. Low-velocity-piston tools must have the 

following features in addition to the common features listed in the 

subparagraph on safety features. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-8 October 2009 

1. The muzzle end of the tool design must allow mounting, 

perpendicular to the barrel, suitable protective shields, guards, jigs, or 

fixtures, designed and built by the manufacturer. Supply a standard 

spall shield with each tool. Choose and use the proper shields, guards, 

jigs or fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

2. The tool design must not allow operation unless the operator is 

holding the tool against the work surface with a force at least 5 pounds 

greater than the total weight of the tool. 

d. Hammer-Operated Piston Tools - Low Velocity. In addition to the 

common safety features, hammer operated tools must have suitable 

protective shields, guards, jigs, or fixtures, designed and built by the tool 

manufacturer, that can be mounted perpendicular to the barrel. Supply a 

standard spall shield with each tool. Choose and use the proper shields, 

guards, jigs, or fixtures according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 

17.8.6 Materials. Drive fasteners into soft or easily penetrated material only 

if the material is backed to prevent complete penetration. Do not use tools on 

very hard or brittle materials such as cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened 

steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile. Never drive a fastener 

into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening. 

17.8.7 Safe Use. Load tools just before firing. Always attend loaded tools. 

Never point a tool at anyone. Keep all body parts clear of the muzzle. 

17.8.8 Inspection and Testing. Inspect and test tools each day before 

loading to ensure that the safety devices are in proper working order. Conduct 

the inspection in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended inspection 

procedures. 

17.8.9 High-Velocity Tools. Use high-velocity tools only for those 

applications in which low-velocity tools will not meet the job requirements. 

17.9 Requirements for Hand-Powered Winches and Hoists 

17.9.1. Use hand-powered winches and hoists within the manufacturer's rated 

capacity, and legibly mark the capacity on the winch or hoist. Hand-powered 

hoists must have worm gear drives or with positive self-locking dogs. 

Handwheels must not have projecting spokes or knobs. 

17.9.2 Legibly mark the manufacturer's rated capacity on all come-alongs. 

Do not exceed the rated capacity. Remove come-alongs from service when 

they have worn or kinked cables or links, deformed hooks, or defective 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-9 

ratcheting devices. Take care not to overstress structures or structure 

supporting systems when using come-alongs for leveling, plumbing, or 

positioning structures. 

17.10 Requirements for Lever and Ratchet, Screw, and Hydraulic 

Jacks 

17.10.1 Capacity. Legibly mark the manufacturer's rated capacity on all 

jacks. Do not exceed the rated capacity. 

17.10.2 Overtravel. Jacks of any type must have a positive stop to prevent 

overtravel. 

17.10.3 Footing and Blocking. Set jacks on a stable and firm footing, and 

crib or block where necessary to prevent settlement or dislodgement. If 

slippage is possible, place a wood block between the jack and the load. 

17.10.4 Operation. After a load has been raised, crib, block, or otherwise 

secure it at once. 

17.10.5 Maintenance. Properly lubricate all jacks at regular intervals. 

Supply adequate antifreeze liquid to hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing 

temperatures. Examine for possible defects and repair or replace defective 

parts as necessary. 

17.10.6 Inspection. Thoroughly inspect jacks periodically, depending on 

how they are used. Inspect jacks according to the manufacturer’s instructions, 

but no less frequently than the following: 

a. For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6 months. 

b. For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and when 

returned. 

c. Before returning to service after a jack is subjected to abnormal loads. 

17.11 Requirements for Hand Tools 

Hand tools must be inspected periodically, maintained in a safe condition, and 

replaced and removed from service when worn, defective, broken, or cracked. 

17.11.1 Wrenches. Do not use wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, and 

socket wrenches, when jaws are sprung to the point that slipping occurs. 

17.11.2 Wood Handles. Keep the wooden handles of tools free of splinters 

or cracks, and keep tool handles tight. 

17.11.3 Impact Tools. Keep impact tools, including drift pins, wedges, and 

chisels, in a dressed condition or equipped with nonmushrooming heads. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-10 October 2009 

17.12 General Requirements for Boilers and Unfired Pressure 

Vessels 

17.12.1 Applicable Codes and Regulations. Design, construct, install, test, 

and maintain boilers and unfired pressure vessels according to all of the 

following: 

The current ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code" 

The current National Board Inspection Code, ANSI/NB 23 

The current codes or regulations of the State 

17.12.2 Inspection and Testing. Inspect and test boilers and unfired 

pressure vessels before placing them in service and after any alteration or 

major repair. Perform subsequent inspections within 24 months for the first 

inspection, followed by inspections no more than 60 months apart (providing 

deterioration is shown to be low and at a predictable rate). When any part of a 

vessel rapidly deteriorates, the interval between inspection and testing must be 

according to the National Board Inspection Code or every 24 months, 

whichever is less. Make hydrostatic or State acceptable tests when the 

qualified person performing the inspection recommends them. 

17.12.3 Inspector Qualifications. To perform inspections, use qualified 

personnel who meet Federal or State certification requirements or personnel 

who satisfy the "Owner-User Inspector" education and experience of the 

National Board Inspection Code, issued by the National Board of Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Inspectors. 

17.12.4 Posting Reports. Post a copy of the inspector's approval or 

certification reports near or on the boiler or unfired pressure vessel. 

17.13 Requirements for Unfired Pressure Vessels 

17.13.1 Installation. Install pressure vessels so that all drains, handholes, 

and manholes are easily accessible. Do not bury them underground or locate 

them in inaccessible places. Locate pressure vessels used to store compressed 

air in a cool place to facilitate condensation of moisture and oil vapors. 

17.13.2 Drain Valves. Install a readily accessible drain valve on the lowest 

point of every air receiver to remove accumulations of oil and water. Operate 

the valve as recommended by the manufacturer or as determined by 

experience to remove accumulations of oil and water. 

17.13.3 Piping. Install piping with traps or other effective means of 

removing liquid from the lines. Properly design and install air discharge 

piping to eliminate possible oil pockets. 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-11 

17.13.4 Stop Valves. Install a stop valve between the receiver and each piece 

of stationary utilization equipment and also at each outlet to which an airhose 

may be attached. 

17.13.5 Hose Connections. Hose connections must withstand the pressure 

and service to which they are subjected. 

17.13.6 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each pressure vessel with a readily 

visible indicating pressure gauge and with one or more spring-loaded safety 

relief valves. The total relieving capacity of such safety relief valves must 

prevent pressure in the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable 

working pressure of the receiver by more than 10 percent. 

17.14 Requirements for Compressors 

17.14.1 Air Intake. The design and location of compressor intakes must 

prevent any flammable or toxic gas, vapor, or dust from being drawn into the 

compressor. Never install a valve in the air intake pipe to an air compressor 

with an atmospheric intake. 

17.14.2 Governors. Install a speed governor, independent of the unloaders, 

on all compressors except those driven by electric synchronous motors. Equip 

engine- or turbine-driven compressors with an auxiliary control to the 

governor to prevent racing when the unloader operates. 

17.14.3 Limit and Bypass. Every air compressor must automatically stop 

compressing before the discharge pressure exceeds the maximum allowable 

working pressure of the weakest portion of the system. The design and 

installation of electrical contacts must prevent locking or fusing in a position 

that would permit the compressor to continue compressing when the allowable 

pressure is exceeded. As a substitute, install an air bypass and alarm for the 

automatic stop system. 

17.14.4 Safety Relief Valves. Equip each stage of a multistage compressor 

with a safety relief valve. 

17.14.5 Discharge Piping. The diameter of air discharge piping between the 

compressor and the receiver must be at least as large as the discharge opening 

on the compressor. If you install a stop valve between the compressor and the 

receiver, install spring-loaded safety valves between the stop valve and the 

compressor. The total capacity of the safety valves must be sufficient to limit 

pressures in the air discharge piping to less than 10 percent or 3 pounds per 

square inch, whichever is greater, above the working pressure of the piping. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-12 October 2009 

17.15 Requirements for Gas Cylinders 

Construct, inspect, and test compressed gas cylinders in accordance with 

Department of Transportation requirements. 

17.15.1 Cylinder Storage. Onsite storage of gas cylinders must conform to 

the following requirements: 

a. Separation. Store cylinders containing the same gas in segregated 

groups. Do not intermingle with other gas cylinders. Store empty gas 

cylinders in the same manner. Protect cylinders from damage or tipping 

by chains or other security means. 

b. Confined Spaces. Store cylinders in well-ventilated spaces. Do not 

store or take cylinders containing oxygen, acetylene, or fuel gases into 

confined spaces. 

c. Flammable or Combustible Material. Separate cylinders in storage 

from flammable or combustible material by at least 20 feet or by a fireresistive partition of at least 1-hour fire-resistive rating and at least 5 feet 

high. 

d. Oxidizing Gases. Separate cylinders containing oxygen or oxidizing 

gases from fuel gas cylinders by at least 20 feet or by a fire-resistive 

partition of at least 1-hour fire-resistive rating and at least 5 feet high. 

e. Smoking Restrictions. Do not permit smoking or open flame where 

cylinders are stored. Post the area with "DANGER—NO SMOKING OR 

OPEN FLAME" signs. 

f. Toxic Gas. Post areas containing toxic gas in storage with signs 

warning of the danger. 

17.15.2 Upright Position. Secure compressed gas cylinders in an upright 

position at all times except when hoisting them or using them in special 

services or arrangements approved in writing by the manufacturer or gas 

supplier. 

17.15.3 Cylinder Valves. Close cylinder valves when cylinders are in 

storage, in transit, or not in use. 

17.15.4 Valve Caps. Ensure cylinder valve caps are securely in place when 

they are in storage, in transit, and at all times when the regulator is 

disconnected from the cylinder. Cylinders may be moved secured on 

specialty trucks within a jobsite without removing the regulators when you 

adequately protect the regulators and cylinder valves. 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-13 

17.15.5 Transporting. Transport compressed gas cylinders by crane, hoist, 

or derrick in cradles, nets, or skips. Never transport them by slings, chains, or 

magnets. 

17.15.6 Valve Wrenches. The valve wrench or wheel must be in the 

operating position when the cylinder is in use. 

17.15.7 Restricted Use. Use cylinders only for the designated purpose of 

containing a specific compressed gas for which they were designed. Only 

authorized entities may refill them. 

17.15.8 Handling. Handle cylinders in a manner that will not weaken or 

damage the cylinder or valve. Do not expose cylinders to extremes of 

temperature, physical damage, or electrical current. 

17.15.9 Oxygen. Keep oxygen cylinders and fittings free of oil or grease and 

do not handle them with oily hands or gloves. Do not direct oxygen at oily 

surfaces, greasy cloths, or into a container, storage tank, or vessel. Do not use 

oxygen or other compressed gases as a substitute for compressed air. 

17.15.10 Defective Cylinders. Move leaking cylinders to an isolated 

location out of doors, away from personnel and sources of ignition. Then, 

open the valve, allowing the gas to escape slowly. Tag the cylinder 

"DEFECTIVE" and return it to the supplier. Only qualified personnel, 

protected by appropriate personal protective equipment, may handle leaking 

cylinders containing toxic gas. 

17.16 Standards for Welding and Cutting 

All welding and cutting apparatus, equipment, and operations must be according 

to the standards and recommendations set forth in the current edition of 

ANSI Z49.1, "Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes,” and the 

requirements of this section. Provisions of the current NFPA Standard 51B, "Fire 

Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work,” also apply. 

17.16.1 Responsibility. The facility management is responsible for ensuring 

the safety of hot work operations and establishing the following controls: 

a. Based on fire potentials of plant facilities, establish areas for cutting 

and welding, and establish procedures for cutting and welding, in other 

areas. 

b. Designate an individual who is responsible for authorizing cutting and 

welding operations in areas not specifically designed for such processes. 

This person must not be the hot work operator. 

c. Ensure that cutters or welders and their supervisors are suitably trained 

in the safe operation of their equipment and the safe use of the process. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-14 October 2009 

These individuals must be aware of the inherent risks and understand the 

emergency procedures in the event of a fire. 

d. Ensure use of only approved apparatus, such as torches, manifolds, 

regulators or pressure reducing valves, and acetylene generators. 

e. Advise all contractors of flammable materials or hazardous conditions 

they may be unaware of. 

17.16.2 Hot Work Permit. Before hot work operations begin in a 

nondesignated location, obtain a written hot work permit from the authorizing 

individual. Before issuing the hot work permit, the authorizing individual 

must ensure that the equipment is in satisfactory condition and in good repair 

and that all fire protection measures are followed. 

17.16.3 Daily Inspection. Inspect welding apparatus and equipment daily 

before use. Remove defective apparatus and equipment from service, replace 

it, or repair it and reinspect it before using it again. 

17.16.4 Fire Extinguishers. Fire extinguishers rated 2-A:40-B:C units or 

larger must be immediately available wherever welding, gouging, or cutting is 

being carried out. 

17.16.5 Fire Protection. Take the following precautions, as applicable, 

when welding or cutting: 

a. Flammable Material. Confine welding, whenever possible, to areas 

free of combustible materials. When this is not possible, remove all 

combustible material within 35 feet horizontally from the work site or 

protect it from fire, sparks, and slag. 

b. Fireguards. The fireguards must be on duty when hot work is 

performed in a location where other than a minor fire might develop, or 

where the following conditions exist: 

1. Combustible materials are closer than 35 feet to the point of 

operation. 

2. Combustible materials are more than 35 feet away, but are easily 

ignited by sparks. 

3. Wall or floor openings within a 35-foot radius expose combustible 

materials in adjacent areas, including concealed spaces in wells and 

floor. 

4. Combustible materials are adjacent to the opposite side of 

partitions, walls, ceilings, or roofs and are likely to be ignited. 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-15 

The fireguards must be on duty during the operations and for a sufficient 

period of time following the completion of the work to ensure that no 

possibility of fire exists. Provide fireguards with necessary fire protection 

equipment and instruct them in its use. They must watch for fires in all 

exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the 

capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm. 

c. Tests. Test for flammability before welding, cutting, or heating any 

material covered by a preservative coating with unknown flammability. 

Do not weld or cut in any area that could contain flammable vapors or 

gases until the atmosphere has been tested and found safe. 

d. Shafts. Install noncombustible barriers below welding or burning 

operations in or over a shaft or raise. 

e. Flammable and Combustible Liquids. Do not weld, cut, or burn in 

areas containing flammable or combustible liquid, vapor, or dust. 

f. Walls. When welding or cutting on walls, floors, or ceilings where 

direct penetration of sparks or heat transfer may cause a fire in an adjacent 

area, take the same precautions on both sides of the wall, floor, or ceiling. 

Precautions include keeping the floor wet, covered with damp sand, or 

protected with a fire-retardant shield or guard. 

17.16.6 Warning Sign. After completing welding operations, the welder 

must mark the hot metal or provide some other means of warning other 

workers. 

17.16.7 Goggles, Protective Clothing, and Screens. Welders and helpers 

must wear protective clothing and eye protection as specified in the "Personal 

Protective Equipment" section, subsections on "Eye and Face Protection" and 

"Protective Clothing." Protect other people near welding and cutting from 

exposure to welding rays, flashes, sparks, molten metal, and slag. Use 

welding screens in repair shops and other areas where welding is regularly 

performed. 

17.16.8 Preservative Coatings. When preservative coatings are highly 

flammable, remove them from the area to be heated to prevent ignition. Take 

the following precautions when the coatings are determined to be toxic: 

a. Enclosed Spaces. Strip the coating of all coated surfaces for a distance 

of at least 4 inches on each side of the cut or weld. 

b. Open Air. Protect employees in open air with either an air line 

respirator, an appropriate respirator meeting the requirements of the 

"Respiratory Protection" subsection or adequate local ventilation. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-16 October 2009 

17.16.9 Confined Spaces. Ventilation and protection of employees welding, 

cutting, or heating in confined spaces must conform to requirements contained 

or referenced in the "Confined Spaces" section, including the use of an outside 

attendant and a preplanned written rescue procedure. 

a. Ventilation. Ventilation is a prerequisite to work in confined spaces. 

Adequately ventilate all welding and cutting operations conducted in 

confined spaces to prevent: (1) the accumulation of toxic materials or 

(2) oxygen deficiency. This requirement applies not only to the welder 

but also to helpers and other nearby personnel. All replacement air must 

be clean and respirable. 

b. Airline Respirators. When you cannot provide such ventilation, use 

airline respirators approved for this purpose by the National Institute for 

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84. 

c. Self-Contained Units. In areas immediately dangerous to life and 

health (IDLH) or where hazards are unknown, use a full-facepiece, 

pressure-demand, self-contained breathing apparatus or a combination 

full-facepiece, pressure-demand supplied-air respirator with an auxiliary, 

self-contained air supply approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84. 

d. Securing Cylinders and Machinery. When welding or cutting in any 

confined spaces, leave the gas cylinders and welding machines outside the 

space. Before operations begin, securely block heavy portable equipment 

mounted on wheels to prevent accidental movement. 

e. Gas Cylinder Shutoff. To prevent gas from escaping through leaks of 

improperly closed valves during gas welding or cutting whenever the torch 

is not used for a substantial period of time, such as during the lunch hour 

or overnight, close the torch valves and positively shut off the gas supply 

to the torch at some point outside the confined area. Where practicable, 

also remove the torch and hose from the confined space. 

f. Accidental Contact. When suspending arc welding for any substantial 

period of time, such as during lunch or overnight, remove all electrodes 

from the holders and carefully locate the holders to prevent accidental 

contact and disconnect the machine from the power source. 

17.16.10 Toxic Materials. Protect employees who are welding, cutting, heating, 

or brazing, or using fluxes, coatings, and filler products containing any of the 

following materials in accordance with the requirements in subsections on Job 

Hazard Analysis, Exposure Limits, Respiratory Protection, and ANSI Z49.1 

Section 5, "Ventilation." 
Section 17—Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure 

Vessels, Compressors, and Welding 

October 2009 17-17 

• Cadmium 

• Fluorides 

• Mercury 

• Chlorinated hydrocarbons 

• Stainless steel 

• Zinc or galvanized materials 

• Beryllium 

• Lead 

Other materials or compounds determined to be toxic by the manufacturer or a 

nationally recognized source referenced in 29 CFR Part 1910.1000 

17.16.11 Flammable Liquid Containers. When it is necessary to cut or 

weld closed containers or hollow structures that have contained flammable 

materials, follow the recommendations in the pamphlet, F4.1, "Recommended 

Safe Practices for Preparation of Welding and Cutting of Containers and 

Piping," published by the American Welding Society. 

17.17 Requirements for Gas Welding and Cutting 

17.17.1 Equipment. Gas welding and cutting equipment must be as listed by 

a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 

17.17.2 Gas Cylinders. Transport, handle, store, use, and maintain gas 

cylinders required in this section and with DOT requirements. Only 

DOT stamped or labeled gas cylinder are permitted. 

17.17.3 Regulators. Use pressure-reducing regulators only for the gas for 

which they were designed. Except for cracking the valve slightly to remove 

dust or dirt, do not release gas from a cylinder under pressure without 

attaching the pressure-reducing regulator to the cylinder valve. Do not adjust 

acetylene regulators to permit a discharge greater than 15 pounds per square 

inch (gauge). 

17.17.4 Torches. Close torch valves and shut off the gas supply when 

suspending work. Check torch valves for leaks at the beginning of each shift. 

Light torches with friction lighters or other approved devices and not with 

matches or hot work. 

17.17.5 Check Valves and Flash-Back Protection. Equip all oxygen, 

acetylene, or other fuel gas-oxygen combinations used in cutting or welding 

with an approved device to prevent oxygen from flowing into the fuel-gas 

system or fuel from flowing into the oxygen system. Use an approved device 

to provide flash-back protection to prevent flame from passing into the fuelgas system. Install these protective devices according to the manufacturer’s 

instructions. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

17-18 October 2009 

17.17.6 Welding Hose. Use only properly marked and identified hose in 

good condition and specifically manufactured for oxyacetylene service for gas 

welding and cutting. Remove from service a hose that has been subjected to 

flashback or that demonstrates severe wear or damage. Ventilate containers 

used to store fuel gas hose. 

17.18 Requirements for Arc Welding and Cutting 

17.18.1 Applicable Standards. Electric arc welding apparatus must comply 

with the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association EW1 "Electric Arc 

Welding Power Sources." Install, operate, and maintain this apparatus in 

accordance with ANSI Z49.1, "Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied 

Processes." 

17.18.2 Power Circuits. Install and maintain power circuits for electric arc 

welding equipment in accordance with applicable provisions of the current 

National Electrical Code (NEC). 

17.18.3 Grounding. Effectively ground frames of all electric welding 

machines operated from power circuits according to current NEC standards. 

The current carrying capacity of grounding conductors and clamps must equal 

or exceed the maximum output of the welder they serve. Do not use pipelines 

containing flammable gases or liquids, electrical conduits, chains, wire rope, 

cranes, hoists, or similar devices for grounding. 

17.18.4 Cables. Do not allow splices or repaired insulation within 10 feet of 

the electrode holder. Position cables so as not to obstruct walkways, 

scaffolds, stairs, or ladders. 

17.18.5 Gasoline-Driven Arc Welders. Do not use gasoline-driven arc 

welders in confined spaces or underground in tunnels, shafts, or conduits. 

17.19 Requirements for Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding 

17.19.1 Chlorinated Solvents. Do not apply chlorinated solvents within 

200 feet of the exposed arc. Thoroughly dry surfaces prepared with 

chlorinated solvents before permitting welding on such surfaces. 

17.19.2 Arc Protection. Employees exposed to the arc must wear goggles 

with filter lenses. When two or more welders are exposed to each other's arc, 

they must wear filter lens goggles of suitable design under their welding 

helmets. Welders must use hand shields designed to dissipate radiant energy 

when the welder either lifts the helmet or removes the shield. 

17.19.3 Radiation. Welders and people exposed to radiation must wear 

protective clothing completely covering the skin to prevent the harmful effects 

of ultraviolet rays. 
October 2009 18-1 

Section 18 

Slings, Chains, and Accessories 

This section sets forth the requirements for using slings, chains, and accessories. 

It specifically addresses using alloy steel chains; wire rope slings; synthetic fiber 

rope; synthetic webbing slings; synthetic roundslings; and shackles, hooks, and 

other rigging hardware. 

18.1 General Requirements for Using Slings, Chains, and 

Accessories 

18.1.1 Standard Criteria. The Rigging Manual, latest edition, published by 

the Construction Safety Association of Ontario, 21 Voyager Court South, 

Etobicoke, Ontario, Canada M9W 5M7 is the designated Reclamation 

Rigging Manual. Reclamation will use this manual as a guide to determine if 

rigging practices are safe and conform to industry-wide practices. Although 

used by Reclamation and contractors, both as a rigging manual and a training 

text, contractually, it is advisory in nature (except where specifically 

referenced) and intended only to complement the safety requirements set forth 

in this section. 

18.1.2 Safe Usage. Use of ropes, slings, and chains must conform to 

equipment manufacturer’s recommendations, this subsection, applicable 

current American National Standards Institute/American Society of 

Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME) standards, and Occupational Safety and 

Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. 

18.1.3 Safe Working Loads. Determine the safe working load of slings, 

chains, accessories, and rigging equipment before use. The safe working 

loads of slings must not exceed the rated capacities. For types of slings not 

included in these tables, follow the manufacturer's recommended safe working 

load for the specific angle of loading, provided that you maintain a safety 

factor of five. 

18.1.4 Job-Fabricated Rigging Hardware. A professional engineer must 

design and certify use of any job-fabricated rigging hardware and test it at 

twice the rated safe working load or in accordance with applicable standards. 

18.1.5 Use, Repair and Maintenance. The use, repair, and maintenance of 

ropes, chains, slings, and rigging accessories must conform to the 

manufacturer's written instructions. Test repaired slings and accessories at 

twice their rated load before use. 

18.1.6 Inspection. Make frequent and periodic inspections. Immediately 

remove defective equipment from service. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

18-2 October 2009 

a. Frequent Inspections. The user must inspect rigging equipment 

before each shift. 

b. Thorough Periodic Inspections. A designated person must 

thoroughly inspect rigging equipment and maintain a written record. The 

field location must determine the frequency of the periodic inspection on 

the basis of use, severity of service conditions, nature of the lifts, and 

experience on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances. 

Conduct inspections periodically and at least once every 12 months. 

c. Special or Infrequent Service. For slings that are used infrequently, 

inspect before each use. At the time of use, document the inspection. 

18.1.7 Removal From Service. Routinely inspect chain, wire rope, fiber, 

synthetic webbing, and sling hooks. Remove from service if any are 

deformed, damaged, or otherwise do not meet inspection criteria and are not 

safe for use. Cut up and discard slings removed from service due to defects or 

plainly mark them as being unfit for load-bearing service. Do not repair 

cracked, broken, or bent end attachments. Replace them. 

18.1.8 Protection. Appropriately protect slings from sharp, rough, or square 

corners to prevent damage to the strands, wires, or links. Properly store 

slings when not in use to protect them from damage. 

18.2 Requirements for Using Alloy Steel Chains 

18.2.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load applied to chains must 

not exceed the strength (certified by the manufacturer) divided by the required 

safety factor (usually four, unless specified otherwise). If the working load 

exceeds the capacities as shown in table E-2, make the manufacturer’s data 

available at the site for employee review. When heated in excess of 600 °F, or 

used in temperatures below -40 °F, adjust the chain’s safe working capacity to 

conform to the manufacturer’s instructions. 

18.2.2 Grade. Use only heat-treated alloy steel chains in hoisting operations, 

meeting at least grade 80. Each link of heat-treated alloy steel chains must be 

marked with an "A," "T," or "8." The marking designates heat- treated alloy 

steel meeting at least grade 80. 

18.2.3 Identification. Durable identification tags must be permanently 

affixed to welded alloy steel chain slings. The tags must state the size, grade, 

rated load, and sling manufacturer. Tags for multi-leg slings must also 

identify the angle the load rating is based on, the reach, and the number of 

legs. 
Section 18—Slings, Chains, 

and Accessories 

October 2009 18-3 

18.2.4 Accessories. The rated capacity of hooks, rings, links, or other 

attachments used with alloy steel chains must at least equal that of the chains. 

Do not use job-made hooks, links, or makeshift fasteners made from bolts or 

rods. 

18.2.5 Impact Loading. Do not subject chains to impact loading. 

18.2.6 Excessive Wear. Whenever wear at any point in any chain link or the 

depth of gouge or rounded out portion exceed the measurements in the 

appendix, table E-1, reduce the assembly’s capacity or remove it from service. 

An identification tag must reflect the newly established reduced capacity. Use 

a device capable of measuring to one one-thousandth of an inch to measure 

chain wear. Remove any sharp nicks by grinding. 

18.2.7 Removal From Service. Remove from service any assemblies with 

deformed master or coupling links or cracked hooks or attachments. 

Permanently remove from service alloy steel chains heated above 1,000 oF, 

and reduce their capacities if exposed to temperatures at or above 600 oF. 

18.2.8 Proof Testing. When repaired, a chain sling must be permanently 

marked to identify the repairing agency. Before use, proof test each new, 

repaired, or reconditioned alloy steel chain sling and all welded parts in the 

sling assembly to twice the rated capacity. Make a copy of the proof test 

certificate, with date and weight, available for examination. 

18.3 Requirements for Using Wire Rope Slings 

18.3.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load of wire rope slings must 

not exceed rated capacities, as shown in tables E-3 through E-14. For types of 

slings not included in the appendix on wire rope slings, follow the 

manufacturer's recommended safe working load for the specific angle of 

loading, provided that you maintain a safety factor of 5. 

18.3.2 Grade. Wire rope slings covered by this section are based on nominal 

wire rope strength as shown in Federal Specification RR-W-410, Wire Rope 

and Strand, and Military Specification MIL-W-83420, Wire Rope, Flexible, 

for Aircraft Control, (except for fatigue requirements). When using grades, 

types, sizes, and constructions other than those specified in the appendix, 

consult the sling manufacturer for specific data. 

18.3.3 Identification. Develop and use a system to identify individual slings 

that include at least the manufacturer and safe working load. If the wire rope 

sling no longer has an original identification tag, first determine the 

construction of the sling, then use the applicable capacity chart to find the safe 

working load. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

18-4 October 2009 

18.3.4 Proof Test. Proof-test all job-made or repaired slings. Proof-test all 

swaged socket and poured socket assemblies to the wire rope or fitting 

manufacturer’s recommendations but, in no case, to more than 50 percent of 

the component wire ropes’ nominal strength. The proof test for a single-leg, 

hand-tucked sling must be 1.25 times the rated load. The proof test for 

mechanical splice single-leg slings and endless slings must be 2 times the 

vertical load. Apply the proof load for multiple leg bridle slings to the 

individual legs at 1.25 times the rated vertical load for hand tucked splice, or 

2, for mechanical splice. Load any master link connected to multiple-leg 

slings to 2 times the force of the combined legs. Make a copy of the proof test 

certificate, with date and weight, and make the records available for 

examination. 

18.3.5 Environmental Effects. Do not expose fiber core wire rope slings to 

temperatures above 180 °F. Consult sling manufacturers before using slings 

in chemically active environments or in temperatures above 400 °F or below -

60 °F. 

18.3.6 End Fittings and Connections. See the corresponding appendix for 

instructions on selecting and using end connectors. Do not form eyes in wire 

rope slings or chokers with wire clips or a fold back eye with pressed metal 

sleeve. 

18.3.7 Protruding Ends. Cover or blunt protruding ends of strands in splices 

on slings and bridles. 

18.3.8 Sling Inspection and Replacement. Inspect slings periodically and 

remove them from service if one or more of the following conditions are 

present: 

a. Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or three broken 

wires in one strand in one rope lay. 

b. Wear or scraping on one-third the original diameter of outside 

individual wires. 

c. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in 

distortion of the rope structure. 

d. Evidence of heat damage. 

e. Cracked, deformed, or worn end attachments. 

f. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. 

Permanently remove from service fiber core rope slings if exposed to 

temperatures above 180 oF. Nonfiber core rope temperatures must not exceed 

400 oF or minus 60 oF without manufacturer’s recommendation. 
Section 18—Slings, Chains, 

and Accessories 

October 2009 18-5 

18.4 Requirements for Using Synthetic Fiber Rope 

18.4.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working loads for synthetic fiber rope 

and slings must not exceed rated capacities, as shown in tables E-15 through 

E-17. 

18.4.2 Identification. Each sling must be marked to show the manufacturer, 

code or stock number, rated load for the various types of hitches used, type of 

material, and date of manufacture. 

18.4.3 Splices. In addition to the manufacturer's recommendations, use the 

following minimum requirements for splicing fiber rope: 

a. Synthetic Fiber. Eye splices must have at least four full tucks, and 

short splices must have at least eight full tucks, with four on each side of 

the centerline of the splice. 

b. Strand End Tails. Fiber ropes less than 1 inch in diameter must have 

tails that project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck. 

Ropes 1 inch in diameter and larger must have tails that project at least 

6 inches beyond the last full tuck. You may taper and splice the required 

length of strand and tails into the body of the rope using at least two 

additional tucks. 

c. Eye of Splice. The eye must be large enough to provide no more than 

a 60-degree angle at the splice when placing the eye over the load or 

support. 

d. Knots. Do not use knots in rigging applications. 

18.4.4. Environmental Effects. Load capacities, as shown in tables E-15 

through E-17, apply in the temperature range of -20 °F to 150 °F for 

polypropylene slings and from -20 °F to 180 °F for nylon and polyester slings. 

For service in temperatures outside this range, or in chemical environments, 

consult the fiber rope manufacturer. 

18.4.5 Electrical Hazard. Use only nonconductive, synthetic fiber rope near 

energized conductors or equipment, including handlines for work on electrical 

facilities. 

18.4.6 Care of Fiber Ropes. Properly care for fiber ropes to keep them in 

safe condition. Do not use fiber ropes subjected to acids, alkalies, freezing, or 

excessive heat to carry loads. Use padding to protect fiber rope from 

abrasion when it is drawn over square corners or sharp or rough surfaces. 

18.4.7 Inspection and Replacement. Inspect slings and remove them from 

service if one or more of the following conditions are present: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

18-6 October 2009 

a. Slings shortened with knots, bolts, or other unapproved methods. 

b. Damaged slings. 

c. Rope less than 1/2 inch in diameter. 

d. Slings subjected to a sustained load equal to the rated capacity for more 

than 3 days. 

e. Slings made from old rope. 

f. Slings subjected to chemical environments, unless permitted by the 

rope manufacturer. 

18.5 Requirements for Using Synthetic Webbing Slings 

18.5.1 Safe Working Load. Do not use a webbing sling at a load greater 

than established safe working loads, as shown in tables E-18 through E-20. 

Follow the manufacturer's recommended safe working load for the specific 

angle of loading, provided that you maintain a minimum safety factor of five. 

18.5.2 Identification. Synthetic webbing slings must be marked or coded 

with the manufacturer's name, code or stock number, type of material, and the 

rated capacity for the type of hitches used. 

18.5.3 Care and Maintenance 

a. Webbing. Synthetic webbing must be of uniform thickness and width; 

do not split selvage edges from the webbing's width. 

b. Fittings. The minimum breaking strength of fittings must equal that of 

the sling and must be free of all sharp edges that could damage the 

webbing. 

c. Attachments. Use only stitching to attach fittings and form eyes. The 

thread must be in an even pattern and contain a sufficient number of 

stitches to develop the full breaking strength of the sling. 

d. Storage and Use. Do not use or store nylon web, polyester, and 

polypropylene web slings and web slings with aluminum fittings where 

caustic fumes, vapors, sprays, mists, or liquids are present. Store slings 

out of direct sunlight to avoid deterioration from ultraviolet light and away 

from sources of ozone generation. 

e. Temperature. Do not use synthetic web slings of polyester and nylon 

in temperatures above 180 °F or below -40 °F. Do not use polypropylene 

web slings in temperatures above 200 °F. 
Section 18—Slings, Chains, 

and Accessories 

October 2009 18-7 

18.5.4 Removal From Service. Immediately remove synthetic webbing 

slings from service if one or more of the following visible defects is present: 

a. Acid or caustic burns. 

b. Melting or charring of any part of the surface. 

c. Snags, punctures, tears, or cuts. 

d. Broken or worn stitches. 

e. Wear or elongation exceeding the amount recommended by the 

manufacturer. 

f. Distortion of fittings. 

g. End of service life. 

18.5.5 Repairs. Do not use repaired synthetic web slings unless a sling 

manufacturer or an equivalent entity repairs them. Proof-test each repaired 

sling to twice the rated load before returning it to service. Maintain 

documentation of the proof test. 

18.6 Requirements for Synthetic Roundslings 

18.6.1 Safe Working Load. The safe working load for single-leg polyester 

roundslings must conform to the values shown in the appendix, table E-21. 

The minimum safety factor for roundslings is five. Load capacities are in the 

temperature range of -40 °F to 194 °F. When using them in temperatures 

outside this range, in chemical environments, or when constructed with yarns 

of nonpolyester materials, consult the sling manufacturer. 

18.6.2 Identification. Each roundsling must be tagged to show the 

manufacturer's identification, code or stock number, type of material in the 

core and cover (if different), and the rated capacity for the type of hitches 

used. 

18.6.3 Removal From Service. Immediately remove roundslings from 

service if any of the following conditions are present: 

a. Acid or caustic burns. 

b. Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface. 

c. Snags, punctures, tears, or cuts. 

d. Broken or worn stitches. 

e. Distortion of fittings. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

18-8 October 2009 

f. Appearance of wear indicators. 

g. End of service life. 

18.6.4 Repairs. Do not make temporary repairs to either roundslings or 

fittings. Do not repair load-bearing yarns or fittings. Allow only a roundsling 

manufacturer or qualified person to repair protective covers. When repaired, 

the roundsling must be marked and proof-tested to twice the rated vertical 

load before returned to service. 

18.7 Requirements for Shackles, Hooks, and Other Rigging 

Hardware 

18.7.1 Shackles 

a. Safe Working Load. Use the appendix, table E-22, to determine the 

safe working loads of shackles. Higher safe working loads recommended 

by the manufacturer are acceptable for specific identifiable products if you 

maintain a minimum safety factor of five. 

b. Hoisting. Shackles used for hoisting must be of forged alloy steel and 

must be of the screw pin or bolt type. 

c. Wear or damage. Remove shackles from service if they are bent, 

distorted, or worn in the crown or pin by more than 10 percent of their 

original diameter. 

18.7.2 Hooks 

a. Requirement. Manufacturing, testing, inspecting, and use of hooks 

must conform to the more stringent requirements contained in 

ANSI B30.10, Hooks, manufacturer specifications and recommendations, 

or these standards. 

b. Safe Working Load. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation to 

determine the safe working load for the specific size and type of hook 

used. If a manufacturer's recommendation is not available, test hooks at 

twice the intended safe working load before use. Maintain a record of the 

dates and results of the tests. 

c. Inspection. Inspect hooks frequently and remove them from service if 

they are cracked, severely corroded, have been opened more than 

15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point, 

or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. 

18.7.3 Rings, Links, and Swivels. Hardware items, including rings, links, 

and swivels, must be forged alloy steel of weldless construction. Follow 

manufacturer’s safe working loads. 
Section 18—Slings, Chains, 

and Accessories 

October 2009 18-9 

18.7.4 Eyebolts. Eyebolts used for hoisting must be of forged alloy steel and 

equipped with shoulders or collars. 

a. Tapped Hole. The minimum depth of the tapped hole for screwed 

eyebolts must be one and one-half times the bolt diameter. 

b. Application of Load. Apply loads in the plane of the eye of the 

eyebolt. Do not reeve slings through eyebolts or attach hooks directly to 

the eyebolt. Use a shackle to distribute the load. 
October 2009 19-1 

Section 19 

Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

This section discusses hoisting equipment, piledrivers, and conveyors. It 

specifically addresses the following: 

• General requirements 

• Inspections and testing 

• Recordkeeping 

• Qualifications of hoisting equipment operator 

• Operating requirements 

• Critical lifts 

• Wire rope 

• Overhead, gantry, monorail, and underslung cranes 

• Portal, tower, and pillar cranes 

• Derricks 

• Floating cranes and derricks 

• Material hoists 

• Overhead hoists 

• Elevators and personnel hoists 

• Conveyors and related equipment 

• Cable highlines 

• Base-mounted drum hoists 

• Specialized hoisting systems 

• Piledrivers 

19.1 General Requirements for Hoisting Equipment 

Maintain and operate equipment covered by this section in a safe manner. Use 

the more stringent of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

(OSHA), American Society of Mechanical Engineers/American National 

Standards Institute (ASME/ANSI), or Bureau of Reclamation standards, or use 

the manufacturer's guidance to install, set up, operate, and maintain all covered 

equipment. 

19.1.1 Equipment Design. Design and install cranes and other hoisting 

equipment covered by this standard in accordance with the applicable standards 

listed in table 19-1. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-2 October 2009 

Table 19-1.—Crane and hoisting equipment design and construction standards 

ASME/ANSI B30.2 Overhead and gantry cranes (top running bridge, single or 

multiple girder, top running trolley hoist) 

ASME/ANSI B30.3 Construction tower cranes 

ASME/ANSI B30.4 Portal, tower, and pillar cranes 

ASME/ANSI B30.5 Mobile and locomotive cranes 

ASME/ANSI B30.6 Derricks 

ASME/ANSI B30.7 Base mounted drum hoists 

ASME/ANSI B30.8 Floating cranes and floating derricks 

ASME/ANSI B30.11 Monorails and underhung cranes 

ASME/ANSI B30.12 Handling loads suspended from rotorcraft 

ASME/ANSI B30.14 Side boom tractors 

ASME/ANSI B30.16 Overhead hoists (underhung) 

ASME/ANSI B30.22 Articulating boom cranes 

19.1.2 Modification and Reconfiguration. Do not make modifications, 

additions, or repairs that affect the structural competence, capacity, or safe 

operation of the equipment or system without the manufacturer's written 

approval or the approval of a professional engineer (PE). 

19.1.3 Documentation. The following documents must be immediately 

available to the operator at all times: 

a. The manufacturer’s operating manual or equivalent for the specific 

make and model of crane. 

b. Operating manuals for any attachments or accessories with which the 

crane is equipped. 

c. The load rating chart for construction cranes; portal, tower, and pillar 

cranes; mobile and locomotive cranes; floating cranes; floating derricks; 

and articulating boom cranes. This chart must be completely legible. It 

must also include the crane make and model and contain a complete range 

of the manufacturer’s approved crane load ratings for all configurations 

for which the crane is designed. 

19.2 Requirements for Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections, 

and Testing 

Inspect cranes and hoisting devices used in Reclamation activities. The 

equipment is subject to operational and load-performance tests as required by this 

section, other applicable standards, and manufacturer’s recommendations. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-3 

19.2.1 Inspections. A designated person must conduct all inspections and 

must cover, at a minimum, the items identified in attachment 19-1. For the 

purposes of this section, a designated person is a person selected or assigned 

by the employer as competent to perform specific duties. For inspection of 

non-Reclamation owned equipment, notify a Reclamation representative at 

least 24 hours before the inspection to observe the inspection. 

a. Types of Inspections. Inspect cranes in accordance with table 19-2 

and this section. 

Table 19-2.—Crane and hoist equipment inspection criteria 

When to inspect Type of inspection Notes 

Before initial use - new cranes Initial inspection Performed by manufacturer. 

Before initial use - altered 

cranes

Initial inspection "Altered " is defined as any change to the 

original manufacturer’s design 

configuration, that is, replacement of weight 

handling equipment, parts, or components 

with other parts or components. 

A qualified person must conduct this 

inspection. 

Before initial use on a 

Reclamation project

Periodic inspection "Initial use" refers to the first time 

Reclamation takes possession of and 

assembles a crane or whenever a nonReclamation-owned crane is brought onto a 

jobsite and set up for use.

Before every operation (shift) Start-up inspection

Annually or as required by 

manufacturer (if more 

frequent) for equipment in 

regular use 

Periodic inspection If the hoisting equipment has not been in 

service, inspect prior to operation. 

However, do not use the equipment if you 

have not inspected it in more than 

12 months.

Before using a crane which is 

not in use on a regular basis 

and which has been idle for 

more than 1 month but less 

than 6 months

Frequent inspection Also inspect running ropes. Annual 

(periodic) inspection also applies. 

Before using a crane that is 

not used on a regular basis 

and that has been idle for 

more than 6 months

Periodic and frequent 

inspection 

Also inspect running ropes. 

Standby cranes, at least semiannuallyFrequent inspection Standby cranes are those not used 

regularly 

but are available, on a standby basis, for 

emergencies (e.g., emergency operation 

and maintenance work); requirements for 

frequent inspections of standby cranes are 

in addition to the requirement for a annual 

(periodic) inspections.
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-4 October 2009 

b. A copy of the completed inspection report must be readily available at 

the operating site. 

19.2.2 Performance Tests. Performance tests include operational tests or 

load tests. Conduct performance tests in accordance with the manufacturer's 

recommendations; at the minimum, performance testing must meet the 

requirements listed in attachment 19-2. Conduct performance tests as 

required by these standards and the ANSI B30 standard appropriate for the 

equipment being tested. 

a. Operational Tests. A designated person must conduct operational 

tests without load, as follows: 

• Before initial use of cranes in which a load bearing (excluding the 

rope) or load controlling part or component, brake, travel 

component, or clutch has been altered, replaced, or repaired. In 

this case, a selective operational performance test—testing only 

those components that have been or may have been affected by the 

alteration, replacement, repair, or reassembly—may be performed. 

• Each time it is reconfigured or reassembled after disassembly. 

• Annually, unless the hoisting equipment has not been in service, in 

which case you may defer the test until before its operation. 

However, do not use equipment if the last operational test was 

conducted more than 12 months ago. 

19.2.3 Load Tests. Conduct load tests, under the direction of a qualified 

person, as follows: 

• Before initial use of cranes in which a load bearing or load controlling 

part or component, brake, travel component, or clutch has been altered, 

replaced, or repaired. 

• Each time it is reconfigured or reassembled after disassembly. 

• Before any lift where the load is expected to be at least 75 percent of 

the rated capacity of the crane or hoisting equipment. Load tests 

results will remain valid for 5 years, and load tests for subsequent lifts 

are not required during this period. 

Test loads must be at least 100 percent, but not more than 110 percent, of the 

manufacturer's load rating capacity chart at the configuration of the test, 

except for manufacturer testing of new cranes and as excepted in the 

subsection for maximum lifts. 

For the purposes of this section, a qualified person is a person who, by 

possession of a recognized degree or certificate of professional standing, or 

who, by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has demonstrated the 

ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-5 

a. Boom Stop Testing. Test hoisting equipment with boom stops during 

the operating test process. 

19.3 Availability and Retention of Records 

Keep written records of inspections and performance tests, identifying the type 

and nature of the inspection and testing, readily accessible to operating personnel 

and make them available upon request to employees or compliance officials. 

19.4 Qualifications for Operating Hoisting Equipment 

19.4.1 Operators. Only qualified and designated personnel may operate 

hoisting equipment. Only operators qualified to operate a particular type of 

crane or hoisting device may operate that equipment. 

19.4.2 Proficiency. Operators of cranes and hoisting equipment must be 

qualified through formal training, testing, and demonstrated proficiency in 

operating the equipment to a designated person. After initial qualification, 

operators must complete a total of 24 hours of periodic refresher training over 

any 3-year period, covering safe operation of the types of cranes and hoisting 

devices they operate. Operators of non-Reclamation-owned equipment must 

provide evidence of operator qualification before beginning work on 

Reclamation activities. 

19.4.3 Physical Qualifications. Operators must be physically qualified to 

operate hoisting equipment. 

a. Physician's Certification. Operators must have a physician's 

certification that the operator meets physical qualifications to operate 

hoisting equipment involving mobile cranes, cableways, cab operated 

bridge cranes, derricks, mobile excavators, loaders, and similar heavy 

equipment when used for hoisting materials. Consider the following 

physical qualifications: 

• Vision of at least 20/30 Snellen in one eye and 20/50 in the other, 

with or without corrective lenses 

• Normal depth perception and field of vision 

• Ability to distinguish colors, regardless of position 

• Adequate hearing, with or without hearing aid, for the specific 

operation 

• Sufficient strength, endurance, agility, coordination, manual 

dexterity, and speed of reaction to meet the demands of equipment 

operation 

• No tendencies to dizziness or similar undesirable characteristics 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-6 October 2009 

b. Examination Validity. The physician's certificate of examination 

must be no more than 12 months old at the time of any hoisting operation. 

c. Disqualification Factors. Evidence of physical defects; emotional 

instability that could render a hazard to the operator, others, or safe 

operation of the crane; or evidence that the operator is subject to seizures 

or loss of physical control constitutes sufficient reason for disqualification. 

In cases where the operator may be disqualified, specialized medical tests 

may be required to determine these conditions and their effects. 

19.5 Operating Requirements for Hoisting Equipment 

19.5.1 Duty Periods. Operators must not work or be at the jobsite more than 

12 hours in any 24-hour period. 

19.5.2 Authority. Operators must be responsible for those operations under 

their direct control. Whenever there is any doubt as to safety, the operator 

must have the authority to stop or to refuse to handle loads until safety has 

been ensured. Other onsite personnel must alert the operator if they believe 

unsafe operating conditions exist. 

19.5.3 Other Duties. When hoisting equipment is in operation, operators 

must not perform any other work or leave the operator's position while a load 

is suspended. 

19.5.4 Environmental Conditions 

a. Crane and hoisting operations must be shut down when wind speeds 

exceed 25 miles per hour, or in accordance with specific manufacturer’s 

instruction, whichever is less. 

b. If dust, darkness, fog, snow, rain, or other environmental conditions 

impair the operator's visibility, shut down the crane operation until steps 

are taken to compensate for the lack of visibility. 

c. Shut down crane and hoisting operations when lightning is present and 

equipment is vulnerable to lightning strikes. See the section on "Work 

Planning," for specific practices. 

19.5.5 Maximum Lifts 

a. Do not lift loads greater than the rated load of the crane, except for 

performance load testing purposes or as otherwise permitted in this 

subsection. 

b. Overhead and gantry cranes, operating in accordance with 

ASME/ANSI B30.2, may exceed their rated capacities for performance 

load testing purposes (up to 125 percent), or planned engineered lifts. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-7 

19.5.6 Riding Loads. No person may ride loads, blocks, buckets, hooks, 

scaffolding, boatswain's chairs, cages, or other devices attached to hoist lines, 

booms, or attachments of any crane, derrick, or materials hoist. Designated 

maintenance personnel may ride the carriage service platform of a cableway 

to perform inspection testing or maintenance. Under limited circumstances 

where employees cannot perform work through other means, you may use 

crane-supported personnel platforms (manskips) after obtaining written 

authorization, supported by written risk assessment, from the office head. 

19.5.7 Barricades. Barricade the rear-swing radius area of rotating 

superstructures of cranes to physically prevent people or equipment from 

entering the danger zone. 

19.5.8 Radio Communications. During critical lifts or lifts involving use of 

crane-supported work platforms, maintain and use direct radio 

communications among the operator, personnel on the work platform (when 

applicable), and an individual observing the load. 

19.5.9 Crane and Hoist Signals 

a. Signal Systems. Use a uniform standard signal system in operating 

cranes, derricks, and hoists. Hand signals, as illustrated in "Hand Signals 

for Cranes and Hoisting Equipment," must be used. Where hand signals 

are insufficient, or when the distance between the operator and the signal 

person is over 200 feet, the operator and signal person must use voice or 

other direct means of communication. The operator and signal person 

must maintain communication. 

b. Posting. Post signals at the operator's position and, as practical, at 

signal control points and at other locations as necessary to inform those 

using the signals. 

c. Signal Visibility. Protect signal systems from unauthorized use, 

damage, or interference. Predesignate a signal person and identify that 

person by special color of hard hat, armband, or other distinguishing 

marking. The predesignated person will give crane and hoist signals. 

19.5.10 High-Voltage Lines. See the section on "Electrical Safety" for 

specific requirements pertaining to operation of cranes and other equipment 

near high-voltage lines. 

19.5.11 Taglines. Use taglines to control loads when their use is practical 

and will not create additional hazards to personnel, equipment, and structures. 

19.5.12 Crane-Supported Personnel Platforms. Conduct activities 

involving crane- supported personnel platforms using the requirements of 

subsection on crane-supported personnel platforms, located in the "Walking 

and Working Surfaces" section. These activities are critical lifts. Conduct 

them as required in the following subsection on critical lifts. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-8 October 2009 

19.6 Requirements for Critical Lifts 

A critical lift is a non-routine lift requiring detailed planning and additional or 

unusual safety precautions. Critical lifts include: (1) lifts made when the load 

weight is 75 percent or more of the rated capacity of the crane or hoisting device; 

(2) lifts made with more than one crane; (3) hoisting personnel with a crane; or 

(4) any lift that the crane or hoist operator believes critical. 

19.6.1 Lift Supervisor. Designate a person, other than the crane operator, to 

supervise the planning and execution of all critical lifts. 

19.6.2 Critical Lift Plans. Prepare a written critical lift plan before making 

any critical lift. The lift supervisor must prepare the plan in coordination with 

the crane/hoisting equipment operator and rigger. All personnel involved in 

the lift should review and sign the critical lift plan. The plan must include the 

following information: 

• Exact size and weight of the load, including all crane and rigging 

components that add to the weight. Include the manufacturer’s 

maximum load limits for the complete range of the lift. 

• Exact information about the sequence of events and procedures, 

including equipment positioning, height of the lift, load radius, and 

boom length and angles, where applicable. 

• Rigging plans with lift points, procedures, and hardware requirements. 

• Conditions and procedures under which the lifting operation is to be 

stopped. 

• Coordination and communications procedures. 

• Names of lift supervisor, hoisting equipment operator, rigger, and 

other personnel with key roles in the operation. 

• For tandem lifts, general information on the hoisting equipment, 

including make, model, operating speeds, and other information to 

ensure the equipment is compatible. 

• Ground conditions and other information needed to ensure that a level, 

stable foundation with sufficient bearing capacity for the lift supports 

the hoisting equipment. This includes outrigger, crawler track, and 

support mat design calculations. 

19.7 Requirements for Working with Wire Rope 

19.7.1 Safe Working Load. See the "Wire Rope" appendix for the 

approximate safe working load for various specified sizes and classifications 

of improved steel wire rope. Do not exceed these values unless 

manufacturers’ data are available and the data permit greater loads. 

19.7.2 End Fasteners. Use only commercial wire rope fittings. Install wire 

rope clips as specified in the "Wire Rope" appendix. Make job-fabricated eye 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-9 

splices in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and test them before 

use. Give eye splices three or more full tucks. When using a wedge socket 

fastener, secure it with either an extended wedge through which a wire rope 

clip is secured, a short piece of wire rope secured to the dead end with a wire 

rope clip, or a dual-saddle (piggyback) clip that fastens tightly to the dead end 

but slides freely on the live side. Never use a single clip to secure the live side 

and the dead end. 

19.7.3 Hoisting Rope. Except for end fasteners, wire rope used to hoist or 

lower loads must be continuous, without knots or splices. 

19.7.4 Spooling of Rope. Overwind or underwind wire rope correctly from 

right to left or left to right, in accordance with the lay, to avoid twisting, 

spreading, or overlapping on winch drums in accordance with the wire rope 

manufacturer's instructions. 

19.7.5 Sheave Diameter. The ratio between the rope diameter and the drum 

or sheave diameter must not be less than specified by the rope manufacturer. 

When not specified, the ratio must be in accordance with the appropriate 

ANSI standard. Drums, sheaves, and pulleys must be smooth and free of 

defects that could damage the rope. 

19.7.6 Sheave Groove Tolerance. Use the sheave groove tolerances as 

recommended by the sheave manufacturer. 

19.7.7 Lubrication. Lubricate wire rope with manufacturer-approved 

lubricants and follow the manufacturer's approved methods at the intervals 

required by the type of service. 

19.7.8 Removal and Replacement. Remove wire rope with one or more of 

the following defects from hoisting or load-carrying service immediately: 

a. Corrosion. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. 

b. Broken Wire. 

1. One or more valley breaks. (A valley break is a wire break in the 

valley between two adjacent strands.) 

2. Six randomly spaced broken wires in one lay or three broken wires 

in one strand in one lay. 

c. Abrasion. Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, or other damage resulting 

in the loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside 

wires. 

d. Kinking. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or other damage resulting in 

distortion of the rope structure. 

e. Heat Damage. Evidence of heat damage. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-10 October 2009 

f. Reduction in Diameter. Reductions from nominal diameter of more 

than 3/64 inch for rope diameters up to and including 3/4 inch, of more 

than 1/16 inch for diameters 7/8 to 1-1/8 inches, or of more than 3/32 inch 

for rope diameters of 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inches. 

19.7.9 Socket Breaks. Resocket or remove from service the wire rope when 

any broken or corroded wires are next to a socket or end fitting. Resocket the 

wire rope or remove it from service. 

19.7.10 Hazardous Location. Guard running lines of stationary hoisting 

equipment located within 8 feet of the ground or working level or enclose or 

barricade the hazardous area. 

19.8 Requirements for Mobile and Locomotive Cranes 

In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, mobile and locomotive 

cranes must conform to the standards in the current edition of ANSI/ASME 

B30.5, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes; side boom wheel or crawler tractors must 

conform to the ANSI/ASME B30.14, Side Boom Tractors. 

19.8.1 Performance Inspection and Testing. Conduct and record 

performance inspections and testing in accordance with the requirements of 

this section and attachment 19-2. 

19.8.2 Boom Angle Indicator. Equip mobile cranes with a boom angle or 

radius indicator located within the operator's view. 

19.8.3 Boom Stops. Provide cranes or other hoisting devices with cablesupported booms with stops to resist the boom falling over backwards. 

Design boom stops to provide increasing resistance from the initial point of 

contact to a stopping point no more than 87 degrees above horizontal. 

19.8.4 Boom Hoist Disengagement Device. Provide mobile crane booms 

with a functional boom hoist disengagement device that will automatically 

stop the boom hoist mechanism when the boom reaches its highest rated 

angle. 

19.8.5 Anti-Two-Blocking Device. Equip all mobile cranes with a twoblock damage prevention feature or an anti-two-blocking device. Two-block 

damage prevention features must prevent damage to the crane or hoist line in 

case of a two-block condition. Anti-two-blocking devices must have 

automatic capabilities to disengage all crane functions whose movement can 

cause two-blocking. For lattice-boom cranes manufactured before 1992, twoblock warning features may be used to alert the operator to an impending twoblocking condition. However, do not use cranes so-equipped in critical lifts or 

personnel hoisting operations. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-11 

19.8.6 Level Indicator. Provide a means for the operator to visually 

determine the levelness of the crane. 

19.8.7 Jib Stops. In addition to boom stops, jibs must have a positive stop to 

prevent overtopping. 

19.8.8 Cab Windows. Windows in crane cabs must be safety glass or 

equivalent. Cab windows must not introduce any distortion that interferes 

with the crane's safe operation. 

19.8.9 Audible Warning Device. Mobile cranes must have an audible 

warning signal device distinguishable and audible above the usual 

construction noise. 

19.8.10 Securing Booms. When they are not in use, lower crane booms to 

the ground or otherwise secure them to prevent displacement by wind or other 

outside forces. 

19.8.11 Fire Extinguisher. Provide the cab with a 2-A:40-B:C fire 

extinguisher. 

19.9 Requirements for Overhead, Gantry, Monorail, and Underslung 

Cranes 

In addition to requirements set forth in these standards, overhead and gantry 

cranes must conform to requirements contained in the current edition of ANSI 

B30.2. Monorails and underhung cranes must conform to the requirements 

contained in the current edition of ANSI B30.11. 

19.9.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design crane installations and 

equipment. 

19.9.2 Performance Inspections and Tests. Conduct and record 

performance inspections and testing in accordance with requirements of the 

"Cranes and Hoisting Devices, Inspections, and Testing" section, and 

attachment 19-2. 

19.9.3 Crane Access. Provide safe access to the cab or bridge walkway with 

a fixed ladder, stairs, or platform, with no step or gaps exceeding 12 inches. 

Fixed ladders and stairways must comply with the requirements set forth in 

the section on "Walking and Working Surfaces." 

19.9.4 Platforms and Walkways. Install maintenance platforms and 

walkways protected by standard guardrails and toeboards, and means of safe 

access onto the trolley and bridge. Where it is impractical to install platforms 

and walkways, install safety lines with runners to attach safety belt lanyards to 

afford safe inspection and maintenance. Refer to the section on "Walking and 

Working Surfaces." 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-12 October 2009 

19.9.5 Markings. Mark the rated load of the crane on both sides of the crane. 

Mark the rated load of each hoist on the crane on the hoist, trolley unit, or load 

block. All markings must be readable from the ground or floor. 

19.9.6 Hoist Identification Markings. For cranes with multiple hoists, 

distinctively mark each hoist so that it is visible from the ground or floor. 

Clearly mark operator controls to correspond to the hoist markings to indicate 

the controls that operate each hoist. 

19.9.7 Warnings. Cranes must have appropriate warning labels, as required 

by ANSI B30.2. 

19.9.8 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating in 

the cab or near the operator's position. 

19.9.9 Outdoor Equipment. Secure outdoor cranes from unauthorized 

access when not in use. 

19.10 Requirements for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes 

In addition to the requirements set forth in this section, portal, tower, and pillar 

cranes must conform to the applicable standards in the current edition of ANSI 

B30.4, "Portal, Tower and Pillar Cranes," and ANSI B30.3, "Construction Tower 

Cranes." 

19.10.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design the crane equipment 

and oversee its installation. 

19.10.2 Performance Inspections and Tests. Conduct and record 

performance inspections and testing in accordance with requirements of this 

section and attachment 19-2. 

19.10.3 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating 

in the cab or near the operator's position. 

19.10.4 Crane Erection and Dismantling. Erect and dismantle cranes in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable 

ANSI/ASME standards. Following are the minimum requirements: 

a. Erect cranes under the supervision of a qualified person. 

b. Make the manufacturer’s or a qualified person’s written instructions 

and the weights of each component to be erected at the site. 

c. Develop and implement a job hazard analysis (JHA) during the 

planning and erection process. The JHA must include consideration of 

temporary guying and bracing requirements during the erection. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-13 

19.10.5 Environmental Conditions. Place the crane into its most favorable 

protected position to protect personnel and property when environmental 

conditions require lifting operations to cease. 

19.10.6 Unattended Tower Cranes. Place unattended tower cranes in a 

weathervane configuration. 

19.10.7 Limiting Devices. Where applicable, install the following limiting 

devices: 

a. Trolley limit switches to prevent further trolley motion beyond 

predetermined points on tower crane booms. 

b. Anti-two-block switches that cause the hoist drum to automatically 

stop, preventing contact between the load hook and the head block. 

c. Load-limiting switches to avoid exceeding crane capacities. 

d. Limit switches and stops or buffers at each end of the tracks of trackmounted cranes. 

19.10.8 Boom Angle Indicator. Install boom angle indicators on machines 

having booms capable of moving in the vertical plane. 

19.11 Requirements for Derricks 

Derricks, in addition to the requirements set forth in this subsection, must 

conform to the requirements contained in the current edition of ANSI B30.6, 

"Safety Standards for Derricks." 

19.11.1 Design. A PE must design derrick installations and equipment. 

19.11.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record 

inspections and performance tests in accordance with requirements of this 

section and attachment 19-2. 

19.11.3 Foundation. Set derricks on foundations designed and constructed 

to support the weight of the crane plus the maximum rated load. 

19.11.4 Boom Angle Indicator. Provide a boom angle or radius indicator 

and place it within the operator's view. 

19.11.5 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating 

at the operator's station. 

19.12 Requirements for Floating Cranes and Derricks 

In addition to the requirements set forth in these standards, floating cranes and 

derricks must conform to the requirements contained in the current edition of 

ANSI B30.8, "Safety Code for Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks." 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-14 October 2009 

19.12.1 Design. The manufacturer or a qualified person must design and 

certify all floating cranes and derricks. 

19.12.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record 

inspections and performance testing using this section and attachment 19-2. 

19.12.3 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C at the 

operator's station. 

19.12.4 Personal Flotation Devices. All personnel must wear U.S. Coast 

Guard-approved personal flotation devices while onboard, except while in 

enclosed cabins. Additionally, provide and make readily accessible at least 

two U.S. Coast Guard-approved Type IV life rings (30 inch diameter) with at 

least 90 feet of line. For night operations, equip at least one ring with a wateractivated flashing light. 

19.12.5 Rescue Skiff. Make available a rescue skiff meeting the 

requirements in the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." 

19.12.6 Load Rating Chart. When reducing load ratings to compensate for 

"barge list," provide a new rating chart. The manufacturer must rate bargemounted cranes designed and constructed as a unit. All other barge-mounted 

cranes must be large enough to limit the "list" under maximum load to 

5 degrees. 

19.12.7 Wave Action. Suspend crane operation when significant wave 

action affects the stability of the barge. 

19.12.8 Mobile Cranes. Block and secure mobile cranes mounted on barges 

or pontoons to prevent shifting. 

19.13 Requirements for Material Hoists 

Construct, install, test, operate, and maintain material hoists as set forth in the 

latest edition of ANSI A10.5, "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists," and the 

requirements of this section. The manufacturer or a PE must design material hoist 

installations. 

19.13.1 Assembly. A qualified individual must directly supervise erecting 

and dismantling of hoist towers and material hoists. 

19.13.2 Inspection. A qualified person must inspect the hoist, including all 

its components, after initial installation and before it is placed into service. A 

designated individual must inspect it monthly thereafter in accordance with 

ANSI A10.5. 

19.13.3 Car-Arresting Devices. Test car-arresting devices before initial use 

and every 4 months thereafter. Conduct tests in accordance with ANSI A10.5. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-15 

19.13.4 Posting. Post operating rules, including signals, line speeds, and 

loading, at the operator's station and on the cage frame or crosshead. A copy 

of the hoist operating manual must be available at all times of operation. 

19.13.5 Riding. Do not permit anyone to ride a material hoist except for 

inspection and maintenance. Conspicuously post with "NO RIDERS 

ALLOWED." 

19.13.6 Hoistway Entrances. Protect entrances to the hoistway with 

substantial gates or bars installed the full width of the landing entrance. Paint 

entrance bars and gates with diagonal contrasting colors, such as black and 

yellow stripes. Bars must not be less than 2- by 4-inch wood, or equivalent, 

and not less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches above the floor. Bars must 

be at least 2 feet from the hoist and equipped with a latching device. Where 

gates are used, they must be at least 66 inches high, with a maximum 

underclearance of 2 inches, and must be no more than 4 inches from the hoist 

sill. Gate grilles or lattice must have openings no larger than 2 inches. 

19.13.7 Overhead Protection. Protect the top of the cage or platform with 

2-inch planking, 0.75-inch plywood, or material of equivalent strength. 

19.13.8 Tower Enclosures. You may or may not enclose hoist towers on all 

sides. However, the following requirements must apply: 

a. Enclosed. An enclosed hoistway or tower must be enclosed on all 

sides for its entire height, with 0.5-inch wire mesh screen, No. 18 U.S. 

gauge or equivalent, except at access points. 

b. Open Sides. For an unenclosed hoist tower, totally enclose the hoist 

cage or platform on all sides between the floor and the protective top with 

0.5-inch wire mesh screen, No. 14 U.S. gauge or equivalent. The hoist 

cage or platform enclosure must include the required gates for loading and 

unloading. Install an enclosure at least 6 feet high on the unused sides of 

the hoist tower at ground level. 

19.13.9 Operator's Station. Protect the operator's station with overhead 

planking not less than 2 inches thick or with material of equivalent strength. 

19.13.10 Towers and Shaftways. A PE must design towers and shaftways 

with a safety device capable of stopping and holding the platform with 

maximum load in the event of a cable failure. 

19.13.11 Tower Support. Towers must rest on solid foundations. Ensure 

the towers are plumb and well guyed or otherwise anchored in four directions 

at the top and at least every 30 feet in height. 

19.13.12 Hinged Roof. The car or platform roof may be hinged to 

accommodate long material. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-16 October 2009 

19.13.13 Electric Hoists. Electric hoists must be provided with an automatic 

motor brake to automatically stop and hold the load in case of a power failure. 

19.13.14 Operating Restrictions. One hoisting machine, or one operator, 

must operate only one cage, bucket, or hoist platform at a time. 

19.13.15 Hoisting Machines. Design and install hoisting machines to raise 

and lower the maximum rated load plus the weight of equipment and ropes. 

Hoisting machines must incorporate the following features: 

a. Brakes. The brakes must be capable of stopping and holding 

125 percent of the rated hoisting capacity under all operating conditions. 

b. Mechanical Brakes. Install mechanical brakes to stop movement of 

the hoist drum and equip the mechanical brakes with a positive acting 

device that will hold the brake in the engaged position. 

c. Ratchet and Pawl. Equip friction-clutch-driven winding drum 

hoisting machines with an effective pawl and ratchet capable of holding 

the rated load capacity when suspended. 

d. Controls. All controls must, when released, automatically return to 

neutral and set the brake. Plainly mark each control to indicate its 

function; it must be within easy reach of the operator. 

19.13.16 Position Indicator. Use a positive system to indicate when the 

hoist car or platform has reached specific locations, including the top and 

bottom landings. 

19.13.17 Signal System 

a. Hand Signals. You may use hand signals on a single drum hoist when 

the hoist tower is no more than 50 feet high and the signals are clearly 

visible to the operator at all times. 

b. Electrical Communication. Use a closed-circuit electrical 

communication system on all other material hoist installations. The 

system must be two-way, with a speaker located at the hoist operator's 

station and at each landing. The hoist operator must be able to 

communicate by voice to and from each station. 

19.13.18 Fire Extinguisher. Mount a fire extinguisher of 2-A:40-B:C rating 

at the operator's station. 

19.13.19 Inspections and Performance Testing. Performance test material 

hoists under the direction of the design engineer or his or her designee. 

Conduct the test in accordance with ANSI A10.5 requirements and this 

section. Include the car-arresting device in the test. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-17 

19.14 Requirements for Overhead Hoists 

Install, operate, and maintain overhead hoists in compliance with the more 

stringent provision of this section and ANSI B30.16, "Overhead Hoists 

(Underhung)." 

19.14.1 Design. The manufacturer or a PE must design hoists and hoist 

suspensions and anchorages. 

19.14.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record 

inspections and performance tests in accordance with requirements in the 

section on "Cranes, Hoisting Devices, Inspections, and Testing," and 

attachment 19-2 of these standards. 

19.14.3 Safe Working Load. Indicate the safe working load, as determined 

by the manufacturer, on the hoist. Do not exceed the safe working load. 

19.14.4 Support. Design the supporting structure to withstand the loads and 

forces imposed by the weight of the hoist and its rated load. The support must 

provide unobstructed movement of the hoist and load. It must also permit the 

operator to stand clear of the load in all hoisting positions. 

19.14.5 Limit Switch. Equip power-operated overhead hoists with a limit 

switch to prevent the load hook from exceeding the upper travel limit. 

19.14.6 Hoist Controls. Controls on powered hoists must return to a neutral 

position when released, and load hook movement must stop. 

19.14.7 Brakes. Except for hand-powered hoists, all overhead hoists must 

have brakes that apply automatically when the controls are in neutral. 

19.14.8 Air-Operated Hoists. Connect air hoists to an air supply of 

sufficient capacity and working pressure to safely operate the hoist with 

maximum load. 

19.14.9 Hand-Powered Hoists. Hand-powered hoists must be worm-geardriven or equipped with a pawl or ratchet system that provides continuous 

effective control and braking reliability. 

19.15 Requirements for Elevators and Personnel Hoists 

Design, construct, test, inspect, and maintain permanent elevators in accordance 

with the current editions of ANSI A17.1, " Elevators and Escalators," and ANSI 

A17.2, "Inspectors' Manual for Elevators and Escalators." You must design, 

install, and test elevators under the direction of the manufacturer or a PE. 

Following installation, inspect, test, and certify elevators in accordance with 

referenced standards. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-18 October 2009 

19.16 Requirements for Personnel Hoists 

Construct, install, test, operate, and maintain personnel hoists as set forth in the 

current edition of ANSI A10.4, "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists," and 

the requirements of this subsection. 

19.16.1 Design and Installation. Observe manufacturer’s drawings, 

specifications, and limitations when installing and operating personnel hoists. 

A qualified person must design all personnel hoists, and a PE must certify 

them. 

19.16.2 Inspections and Performance Tests. A qualified person must 

performance test and inspect personnel hoists at initial installation, and a 

designated person must inspect them annually thereafter. Conduct the tests in 

accordance with ANSI A10.4, "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists." 

Maintain a comprehensive report detailing test and inspection procedures and 

results. 

19.16.3 Posting. Post rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, 

and special hazard warnings on cages, platforms, and at the operator's station. 

19.16.4 Hoistway Enclosure. Hoist towers that are installed outside 

buildings or structures must be enclosed for the full height of the side or sides 

used to enter or exit to the building or structure. Enclose the other sides to a 

height of at least 10 feet above the lowest landing. Enclose the sides of the 

tower adjacent to floors or scaffold platforms to a height of 10 feet above the 

level of such floors or scaffolds. Enclose towers inside buildings or structures 

on all four sides throughout the full height. 

19.16.5 Tower Anchorage. Anchor towers to the structure at no less than 

25-foot intervals. In addition to tie-ins, install a series of guys. Where tie-ins 

are not practical, anchor the tower by wire rope guys, at least 0.5 inch in 

diameter, securely fastened to anchorages to ensure stability. 

19.16.6 Cage Enclosure. Fully enclose cages on all sides and the top, except 

sides used for entrance, which must have car gates or doors. 

19.16.7 Entrance Doors. Provide a door or gate that covers the full height 

and width of the cage entrance opening, at each entrance to the cage. 

19.16.8 Door Interlocks. Provide doors or gates with interlocks that prevent 

movement of the cage unless the door or gate is fully closed. 

19.16.9 Overhead Protection. Overhead protection of 2-inch planking, 

0.75-inch plywood, or other material of equivalent strength must cover the top 

of the cage. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-19 

19.16.10 Overspeed Safety Device. Equip the cage with an overspeed safety 

device that must stop and hold the cage, plus the maximum rated load, when 

the cage exceeds governor tripping speed or the hoist rope fails. 

19.16.11 Brakes. Equip the hoist with two independent braking systems. 

One must be a system that automatically applies when the controls are in 

neutral or when there is a power failure. In addition, attach a manually 

operated braking system to the hoist drum that is capable of stopping and 

holding 125 percent of the rated load in any position. 

19.16.12 Power-Up and Power-Down. Design the hoist power unit to 

provide power-up and power-down at all times. Refer to requirements in the 

subsection on "Overhead Hoists." 

19.16.13 Controls. On manually controlled hoists, the controls must return 

to the stop position when pressure is removed from the control lever. 

19.16.14 Maximum Speed. The speed of the cage must not exceed 200 feet 

per minute. 

19.16.15 Travel Limit Stops. Equip hoists with upper and lower travel limit 

switches. 

19.16.16 Hoist Ropes. Hoist wire ropes must meet the following minimum 

requirements: 

a. Minimum Number. Drum hoists must have at least two hoisting 

ropes, and traction hoists must have at least three hoisting ropes. 

b. Safety Factor. Hoisting ropes must have a minimum safety factor as 

identified in table 19-3, but in no event may the ropes be less than 0.5 inch 

in diameter. 

Table 19-3.—Safety factors for hoisting 

ropes used in personnel hoists 

Rope speed 

ft/min 

Minimum safety 

factor 

0-100 8.00 

101-125 8.10 

126-150 8.25 

151-175 8.40 

176-200 8.60 

201-225 8.75 

226-250 8.90 

251-300 9.20 

301-350 9.50 

351-400 9.75 

401-500 10.25 

501-600 10.70 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-20 October 2009 

19.16.17 Emergency Stop Switch. Install an emergency stop switch in the 

cage and mark it "STOP." 

19.16.18 Maintenance Access. Provide safe accessways for inspection and 

maintenance of hoist towers and equipment. 

19.16.19 Bridge Tower Construction. A PE must design personnel hoists 

used in bridge tower construction, and a PE must supervise their erection. 

Inspect these hoists at least weekly and whenever exposed to winds exceeding 

35 miles per hour. 

19.16.20 Wire Rope. Inspect hoisting rope daily and remove it from service 

when any of the conditions described in the subsection, "Requirements for 

Working with Wire Rope," exist. 

19.16.21 Signals. Where a hoist operator controls personnel hoists, users 

must signal the operator either through direct radio communications with that 

operator or through a visual and audible electrically operated signal system 

between the operator and each cage access point. 

19.17 Requirements for Conveyors and Related Equipment 

Design, install, operate, and maintain conveyors and related equipment according 

to the standards in the current edition of ANSI B20.1, "Safety Standards for 

Conveyors and Related Equipment," and the requirements of this subsection. 

19.17.1 Safe Access. Provide accessways to enable employees to safely 

lubricate, repair, and maintain the conveyors. Provide stairways, ladders, 

catwalks, or work platforms to all areas requiring lubrication and 

maintenance. Such areas must include elevated head pulleys, tail pulleys, and 

drive stations on belt conveyors. Unless rollers on a belt conveyor are selflubricating or remotely lubricated, erect a walkway protected by a standard 

guardrail and by toeboards for access to all elevated sections of the conveyor 

system. 

19.17.2 Startup Signal. Equip conveyor systems with a time-delay audible 

warning system, which must automatically sound an alarm before startup. 

19.17.3 Anti-Runaway Device. On conveyors where reversing or runaway 

is possible, install anti-runaway or "backup" stops. 

19.17.4 Start and Stop Switches. Provide start and stop switches, capable of 

starting and stopping drive motors, at the operator's station. Install stop 

switches at each motor or engine location. 

19.17.5 Emergency Stopping. If you install conveyors within 8 feet of the 

ground or you allow access along the conveyor or adjacent to unguarded 

moving parts of a conveyor, presenting a hazard to employees, you must 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-21 

install an emergency stop system. The system must consist of a line running 

along the entire length of the exposed section of conveyor and its moving 

parts. Attach a power disconnect switch that, when pulled, will stop the 

conveyor. Design the system to prevent the conveyor from restarting until 

you have manually reset the switch or disconnect. 

19.17.6 Spillage. Design and install conveyors with sideboards or some 

other provision to eliminate spilling or dislodging materials. 

19.17.7 Elevated Crossings. Where conveyors pass next to or over work 

areas, accessways, roadways, railways, etc., install suitable and effective 

protection. The overhead protection must be capable of catching and retaining 

any material that may fall from the conveyor. Each day, remove all spilled 

material on retaining platforms or decking to prevent overtopping of 

sideboards. 

19.17.8 Crossovers and Underpasses. Adequately protect crossovers or 

underpasses for passage over or under conveyors. 

19.17.9 Hazardous Locations. Whenever conveyors are in tunnels, shafts, 

pits, or similar confined areas, provide ample room to permit safe access. 

Where this is not possible, completely enclose the conveyor. Unless enclosed, 

install emergency stop systems. Provide adequate lighting for such areas. 

19.17.10 Stockpiled Materials. Keep conveyor tunnels under stockpiled 

bulk materials, such as sand and gravel, open at both ends. 

19.17.11 Hoppers, Chutes, and Bins. Guard or protect openings to hoppers, 

bins, chutes, or other hazard areas to prevent employees from stepping or 

falling into them. 

19.17.12 Riding Prohibited. Prohibit riding material conveyors; post 

"DANGER-NO RIDING" signs along the conveyor. 

19.17.13 Equipment Lockout. Lock out conveyors, feed screens, and other 

moving parts in accordance with the section on "Control of Hazardous Energy 

(Lockout/Tagout)" and hazardous energy control procedures, FIST Volume 1-

1, during repair or maintenance work, except for lubrication normally 

provided with conveyor operating. Lubrication points must be easily 

accessible and safe for lubrication. Ensure that personnel performing these 

tasks are able to safely complete the work. 

19.18 Requirements for Cableways and Highlines 

In addition to the requirements of this subsection, cableways and highlines must 

comply with the installation, testing, operation, and maintenance requirements in 

this section and the standards in the current edition of ANSI/ASME B30.19, 

"Cableways." 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-22 October 2009 

19.18.1 Design and Installation. A PE must design cableways and 

highlines. You must install and operate cableways and highlines according to 

the PE's design drawings, specifications, and operating, maintenance, and 

inspection instructions. 

19.18.2 Inspection and Performance Tests. Conduct inspections and 

performance tests in accordance with the requirements of this subsection and 

ANSI B30.19. 

19.18.3 Inspection and Maintenance. Inspect all cableway components 

daily and provide daily routine maintenance and lubrication. 

19.18.4 Cableway Log. Maintain a log for each cableway or highline on 

which you record inspections, lubrication, maintenance, and repair activities. 

The log must also include operating time and downtime, and the employee 

responsible for performing the maintenance or repair work must sign it. Make 

the log available for review. 

19.18.5 Signal System. Continuously maintain at least two systems of 

communication between the operator and the signalperson. One or both of the 

systems must provide voice communication by telephone or radio. You may 

substitute lights or bells for one of the systems. When the dual system is not 

functioning properly, the operator may deliver the load suspended from the 

cableway, but the operator may rig no further load until both communication 

systems are functioning. 

19.18.6 Control Consoles. During operation of the cableway, permit only 

the operator(s) in the control console room. The console room windows must 

be safety glass that introduces no distortion that interferes with the safe 

operation of the cableway. 

19.18.7 Operating Controls. All controls must automatically return to 

neutral and set the brakes when released. Plainly mark each control to 

indicate its function and ensure that it is within easy reach of the operator. 

19.18.8 Cableway Platforms and Carriages. Provide cableway inspection 

platforms, moving and stationary, with standard guardrails and toeboards. 

Enclose open areas on carriages and moving platforms with wire mesh to 

reduce the hazard from falling objects. 

19.18.9 Concrete Buckets. Design concrete buckets with a safety device to 

prevent accidental opening of the bucket while in transit to the discharge site. 

Construct buckets to prevent aggregate from lodging on any part of the 

bucket. Refer to the section on "Concrete, Masonry, Construction, and 

Formwork." 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-23 

19.18.10 Riding Cableways. Prohibit riding the cableway, except designated 

maintenance personnel may ride the carriage service platform of a cableway 

to perform inspections or maintenance. Prepare and review a JHA before 

performing inspections or maintenance. 

19.18.11 Track-Mounted Towers. Equip track-mounted cableway towers or 

structures with both limit switches and rail stops or buffers at each end of the 

tracks. Equip the wheel with track or rail sweeps extending below the top of 

the rail and effective in all directions of travel. When two or more towers 

operate on the same track, install an automatic control system to prevent the 

towers from colliding. 

19.19 Requirements for Base-Mounted Drum Hoists 

Base-mounted drum hoists must conform to the requirements of ANSI B30.7, 

"Base-Mounted Drum Hoists." Air-powered hoists must conform to the 

requirements of ANSI/ASME HST-6M, "Performance Standard for Air Wire 

Rope Hoists," or more stringent requirements of this section. Hoisting machines 

used in personnel related systems must also meet the requirements in the 

subsection on "Overhead Hoist." 

19.19.1 Design. The hoist manufacturer or a PE must design hoisting 

systems covered by this subsection. 

19.19.2 Restrictions. Base-mounted drum hoist systems involving personnel 

use or exposure (e.g., movable work platforms, raising or lowering drilling 

machines, and personnel hoists) must conform to the provisions of this 

section. 

19.19.3 Inspections and Performance Tests. Conduct and record 

inspections and performance tests using the requirements of this section and 

the appendix. 

19.20 Requirements for Specialized Hoisting Systems 

19.20.1 Manlifts. Manlift design, installation, testing, and operations must 

conform to requirements of ANSI A90.1, "Safety Standards for Manlifts." 

19.20.2 Draglines. Do not use draglines as hoisting devices without the 

manufacturer’s approval. 

19.20.3 A-Frame Trucks. The design and operation of A-frame trucks must 

conform to this section and "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment." 

Do not use them to hoist personnel. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-24 October 2009 

19.20.4 Mobile Hydraulic Excavators and Hoes, Crawlers, Wheel 

Loaders, and Similar Machines. 

a. Requirement. Do not use mobile hydraulic excavators and hoes, 

crawlers, wheel loaders, and similar machines to hoist personnel. Use 

them to hoist materials only when they conform to the requirements of this 

paragraph and appropriate SAE-recommended practices. 

b. Restrictions. Use only machines certified for hoisting by the 

manufacturer and equipped with manufacturer-installed closed lifting eyes 

or lugs for hoisting. The maximum load in any machine position must not 

exceed the rated capacity in the least stable position. 

c. Testing. Load-test the machine at 110 percent of the maximum load. 

Hoist test loads clear of the ground at the maximum load radius and move 

them through the maximum angle of articulation or arc radius in both 

directions from the longitudinal centerline of the machine. 

19.20.5 Facility Maintenance Hoisting Systems. Design, construct, install, 

and use hoisting systems to inspect and maintain facilities, such as penstocks, 

spillways, airshafts, and for external building maintenance such as window 

washing, in accordance with ANSI A10.22, "Safety Requirements for Ropeguided and Nonguided Workmen's Hoists" or ANSI A120.1, "Safety 

Requirements for Powered Platform for Exterior Building Maintenance." The 

manufacturer or a PE must certify such hoisting systems for the intended use. 

19.21 Requirements for Piledrivers 

19.21.1 Boilers and Pressure Vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels used in 

piledriving operations must conform to the requirements and standards set 

forth in applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 

19.21.2 Hoisting Equipment. Cranes used to drive or extract piling must 

conform to the requirements and standards set forth in applicable parts of this 

section. 

19.21.3 Floating Piledrivers. Hulls for floating piledrivers must be at least 

as wide as 45 percent of the height of the lead above water. Protect the 

operating deck to prevent suspended piling from swinging or drifting in over 

the deck. 

19.21.4 Hoist Drums. Do not equip piledriver hoist drums with dogs that 

automatically disengage by relieving the load or by rotating the drum. 

19.21.5 Hose Connections. Secure hose connections to piledriver hammers, 

ejectors, or jet pipes with at least a 0.25-inch chain with a minimum working 

load of 3,250 pounds or with equivalent devices. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-25 

19.21.6 Driving Leads. Provide pile driving leads with fixed ladders and 

attachment points for safety harness lanyards. 

19.21.7 Landings and Headblocks. Install fixed ladders or stairways for 

access to landings and headblocks. Provide piledriver leads with stopblocks 

to prevent the hammer from being raised into the headblock. 

19.21.8 Blocking Device. When employees must work under the hammer, 

place a blocking device in the leads that can support the hammer. 

19.21.9 Guying. Use adequate guylines, outriggers, thrustboards, 

counterbalances, or rail clamps to stabilize piledrivers during operation. 

19.21.10 Moving Piledrivers. When moving the piledriver, lower the 

hammer to the bottom of the leads. 

19.21.11 Hoisting Piling. Hoist piling using a closed shackle or similar 

positive means of attachment to the loadline and keep employees in the clear. 

Use taglines to control unguided piles and "flying hammers." 

19.21.12 Pulling Pile. Use extractors to pull piling that you cannot pull 

without exceeding the safe load rating of the pulling rig. When pulling piling, 

do not elevate the crane boom more than 60 degrees from the horizontal. 

19.21.13 Overhead Protection. Position overhead protection, equivalent to 

2-inch planking, so as not to interfere with the operator's view. 

19.21.14 Headblock Guards. Install guards to prevent the line from 

jumping out of the headblock. 

19.21.15 Jacked Piles. When driving jacked piles, excavation for access pits 

must conform to the requirements in the "Excavation Operations" section. 

Provide access ladders and erect bulkhead curbs to prevent material from 

falling into the excavation. 

19.21.16 Cutting Piling. Do not trim piles within a distance from the pile 

driver of twice the length of the longest pile. 

19.22 Helicopter Operations 

19.22.1 Requirement. Operators and aircraft must be licensed and must 

comply with the applicable requirements of the Federal Aviation 

Administration (FAA), the Department of the Interior Office of Aircraft 

Services, ANSI B30.12, "Handling Loads Suspended from Rotorcraft," and 

this subsection. 

19.22.2 Briefing. Before each day's operation, conduct a briefing for pilots 

and ground personnel and discuss in detail the plan of operation. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-26 October 2009 

19.22.3 Loads. Secure suspended loads with pressed sleeves, swedged eyes, 

or equivalent means to prevent hand splices from spinning open or cable from 

loosening. Tag lines must be short enough so they cannot be drawn into the 

rotors. 

19.22.4 Cargo Hooks. Use self-locking cargo hooks equipped with a quick 

release device that can be activated from the pilot’s location. Electrically 

operated cargo hooks must have the electrical activating device designed and 

installed to prevent accidental operation. Also equip these hooks with an 

emergency control to release the load. Test the hooks before each day's 

operation to ensure that they function properly. 

19.22.5 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees receiving the load 

must wear safety goggles and hard hats fitted with chinstraps. Employees 

must not wear loose-fitting clothing that may become snagged on the hoist 

line. 

19.22.6 Downwash. Remove or secure material and loose gear within 100 

feet of the lift or delivery site. 

19.22.7 Operator Responsibility. The helicopter pilot is responsible for the 

size, weight, and manner in which loads are connected to the helicopter. Do 

not make the lift if the pilot considers it unsafe. 

19.22.8 Hooking and Unhooking. Employees must not perform work under 

the hovering helicopter, except as necessary to hook and unhook loads. 

Provide a safe means of access and egress for employees to approach the hook 

to engage or disengage cargo slings. 

19.22.9 Static Charge. Unless ground personnel use a grounding device to 

dissipate the static charge, they must wear rubber gloves. 

19.22.10 Weight Limitations. The weight of the load and rigging must not 

exceed the aircraft manufacturer's rating, considering altitude and ambient 

temperatures existing at the time. 

19.22.11 Ground Lines. Do not attach hoist wires or other gear, except for 

pulling lines or conductors that "payout" from a container or roll off a reel, to 

any fixed ground structure or allow wires or other gear to foul on any fixed 

structure. Use only pulling lines or conductor stringing systems designed with 

stress release hardware, so located that it protects the aircraft against overload 

and line entanglement with rotors. 

19.22.12 Visibility. When dust or other conditions reduce visibility, ground 

personnel must exercise special caution to keep clear of the rotor blades. The 

employer must reduce the possibility of dust to the extent practical. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-27 

19.22.13 Approaching Helicopters. Permit only authorized personnel to 

approach within 50 feet of a helicopter with turning rotor blades. People 

approaching or leaving a helicopter with the blades turning must keep within 

full view of the pilot and assume a crouched position. Persons must stay out 

of the area from the cockpit or cabin rearward unless the pilot authorizes them 

to enter that area. 

19.22.14 Radio Communication. Provide reliable radio communication 

between the pilot and a designated member of the ground crew during all 

loading, unloading, and rigging operations. 

19.22.15 Hand Signals. When personnel use hand signals, they must use 

standard "Helicopter Hand Signals." The signal person on the ground must be 

distinguishable from other ground personnel. 

19.22.16 Inspection and Maintenance. Assign only FAA-certified 

personnel, experienced on the type of aircraft being maintained, to inspect or 

repair helicopters. Provide maintenance personnel with lighting systems that 

meet minimum requirements set forth in ANSI/IES RP7, "Practice for 

Industrial Lighting." During inclement weather, carry out repair work in 

enclosures adequate to protect personnel against the elements. An appropriate 

pilot must flight-test all repairs pertaining to safety of flight before returning 

the aircraft to service. 
October 2009 19-29 

Attachment 19-1 

Inspection Elements for Hoisting Equipment 

Elements for Startup Inspections 

1. Inspect all control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering with proper 

operation. 

2. Inspect all control mechanisms for excessive wear of components and 

contamination by lubricants or other foreign matter. 

3. Inspect all operator aids, motion, and load limiting devices, and other safety 

devices for malfunction and inaccurate settings. 

4. Inspect all chords and lacing. 

5. Inspect all hydraulic and pneumatic systems - with particular emphasis on 

those that flex in the normal operation of the crane. 

6. Inspect hooks and latches for deformation, chemical damage, cracks, and wear. 

7. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto the drum(s) and sheave(s) and inspect 

rope reeving for compliance with the crane manufacturer's specifications. 

8. Inspect electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of excessive 

deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation. 

9. Inspect the hydraulic system for proper oil level. 

10. Inspect tires for recommended inflation pressure (mobile cranes). 

11. Inspect wedges and supports for looseness or dislocation (climbing tower 

cranes). 

12. Inspect braces and guys supporting crane masts; inspect anchor bolt base 

connections for looseness or loss of preload (tower cranes and derricks). 

13. Inspect derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

14. Inspect barge or pontoon ballast compartments for proper ballast; inspect 

deckloads for proper securing; inspect chain lockers, storage, fuel compartments, 

and battening of hatches; inspect firefighting and lifesaving equipment to ensure it 

is in its proper place and is functional; and sound hull void compartments for 

leakage (floating cranes and derricks). 

Elements for Periodic Inspections 

1. Inspect foundation and supports to determine their continued ability to sustain 

imposed loads. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-30 October 2009 

2. Inspect braces supporting crane masts (towers) to determine that they are in a 

safe condition; inspect anchor bolt base connections for tightness or retention of 

preload; and inspect wedges and supports of climbing cranes for tightness and 

proper positioning. 

3. Inspect guys for proper tension. 

4. For derricks, inspect all chords and lacing, tension in guys, plumb of the mast, 

and derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. 

5. Inspect crane structure and boom and jib members and their connections for 

deformation, cracks, or corrosion. 

6. Inspect bolts, rivets, nuts, and pins for tightness. 

7. Inspect for proper tension (torque) of high strength (traction) bolts used in 

connections and at the slewing bearing. 

8. Inspect power plants for performance and compliance with safety 

requirements. 

9. Inspect electrical apparatus for proper functioning and signs of excessive 

deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation. 

10. Inspect hydraulic and pneumatic tanks, pumps, motors, valves, hoses, fittings, 

and tubing for proper functioning and the absence of damage, leaks, and excessive 

wear; inspect hydraulic and pneumatic systems for proper fluid/air levels. 

11. Inspect all control mechanisms for adjustment for proper operation, and to 

determine that there is no excessive wear of components and no contamination by 

lubricants or other foreign matter. 

12. Inspect drive components such as pins, bearings, wheels, shafts, gears, 

sheaves, drums, rollers, locking and clamping devices, sprockets, drive chains or 

belts, bumpers, and stops for the absence of wear, cracks, corrosion, or distortion. 

13. Inspect all crane function operating mechanisms for proper operation, proper 

adjustment, and unusual sounds. 

14. Inspect travel, steering, holding, braking, and locking mechanisms for proper 

functioning and excessive wear or damage. 

15. Inspect tires for damage or excessive wear. 

16. Inspect brake and clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets for 

excessive wear. 

17. Visually inspect all running ropes, counterweight ropes, and load trolley 

ropes, if provided. Pay particular attention to boom hoist ropes and sections of 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-31 

rope subject to rapid deterioration, such as at flange points, crossover points, and 

repetitive pickup points on drums. Concentrate visual inspections on discovering 

gross damage, such as the following, which may be an immediate hazard: 

• Distortion of rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, 

main strand displacement, or core protrusion 

• General corrosion 

• Number, distribution, and type of visible broken wires 

• Broken or cut strands 

• Core failure in rotation resistant ropes (take care when inspecting rotationresistant ropes because they are susceptible to damage from misuse and 

deterioration when used on equipment with limited design parameters) 

• Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter because of loss of 

core support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires 

• Severely corroded or broken wires at end connections and severely 

corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. 

Take care when inspecting rope sections such as the following, which are subject 

to rapid deterioration: sections in contact with saddles, equalizer sheaves, or other 

sheaves where rope travel is limited; sections at or near terminal ends where 

corroded or broken wires may protrude; sections subject to reverse bends; and 

sections normally hidden during routine visual inspections, such as parts passing 

over outer sheaves. 

18. Inspect sheaves for cracks in the flanges and spokes. 

19. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto drums and sheaves and proper reeving. 

20. Inspect hooks and latches for deterioration, chemical damage, cracks, and 

wear. 

21. Inspect crane operator aids (safety devices) and indicating devices for proper 

operation. 

22. Inspect motion-limiting devices for proper operation with the crane unloaded 

(inch each motion into its limiting device at slow speed with care exercised) and 

inspect load-limiting devices for proper operation and accuracy of settings. 

23. Inspect load, boom angle, load or load moment indicating wind, and other 

indicators for proper operation and accuracies within the tolerances recommended 

by the manufacturer. 

24. Inspect safety and function labels for legibility and replacement, if necessary. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-32 October 2009 

25. For a floating plant: inspect ballast compartments for proper ballast; 

deckloads for proper securing; chain lockers, storage, fuel compartments for 

safety; battening of hatches; tie-downs for barge-mounted land cranes for wear, 

corrosion, and tightness; cleats, bitts, chocks, fenders, capstans, ladders, 

stanchions for corrosion, wear, deterioration, and deformation; sound hull void 

compartments for leakage; and take four corner draft readings. 

Elements for Frequent Inspections 

1. Inspect braces supporting crane masts (towers) for safe condition, anchor bolt 

base connections for tightness or retention of preload, and wedges and supports of 

climbing cranes for tightness and proper positioning. 

2. Inspect guys for proper tension. 

3. For derricks, inspect all chords and lacing, tension in guys, plumb of the mast, 

and derrick mast fittings and connections for compliance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. 

4. Inspect electrical apparatus for proper functioning and signs of excessive 

deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation. 

5. Inspect hydraulic and pneumatic tanks, pumps, motors, valves, hoses, fittings, 

and tubing for proper functioning and damage, leaks, and excessive wear; and 

inspect hydraulic and pneumatic systems for proper fluid/air levels. 

6. Inspect all control mechanisms for adjustment for proper operation, for 

excessive wear of components, and for contamination by lubricants or other 

foreign matter. 

7. Inspect all crane function operating mechanisms for proper operation, proper 

adjustment, and unusual sounds. 

8. Visually inspect all wire running ropes, counterweight ropes, and load trolley 

ropes, if provided. Pay particular attention to boom hoist ropes and sections of 

rope subject to rapid deterioration, such as at flange points, crossover points, and 

repetitive pickup points on drums. Concentrate visual inspections on discovering 

gross damage, such as the following, which may be an immediate hazard: 

a. Distortion of rope such as kinking, crushing, unstranding, birdcaging, main 

strand displacement, or core protrusion; 

b. General corrosion; 

c. Number, distribution, and type of visible broken wires; 

d. Broken or cut strands; 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-33 

e. Core failure in rotation resistant ropes (take care when inspecting rotationresistant ropes because of their susceptibility to damage from misuse and 

deterioration when used on equipment with limited design parameters); 

f. Reduction of rope diameter below nominal diameter because of loss of core 

support, internal or external corrosion, or wear of outside wires; and 

g. Severely corroded or broken wires at end connections and severely 

corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied end connections. 

9. Inspect rope for proper spooling onto drums and sheaves and proper reeving. 

10. Inspect hooks and latches for deterioration, chemical damage, cracks, and 

wear. 

11. Inspect crane operator aids (safety devices) and indicating devices for proper 

operation. 

12. Inspect motion-limiting devices for proper operation with the crane unloaded 

(inch each motion into its limiting device at slow speed with care exercised) and 

load limiting devices for proper operation and accuracy of settings. 

13. Inspect load, boom angle, load or load moment indicating, wind, and other 

indicators for proper operation and accuracies within the tolerances recommended 

by the manufacturer. 

14. Inspect safety and function labels for legibility and replacement. 

15. For a floating plant, inspect ballast compartments for proper ballast; 

deckloads for proper securing; safety of chain lockers, storage, fuel 

compartments; and battening of hatches. Sound hull void compartments for 

leakage. 
October 2009 19-35 

Attachment 19-2 

Crane Performance and Load Testing Requirements 

Tables with Associated Testing Elements 

Requirements for Crane Performance Tests 

Table 1.—Crane performance testing requirements - no-load tests 

Type of crane X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 

Portal, tower, and pedestal ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 

Floating cranes and derricks ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Derricks ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ (2) ■ ■ 

Construction ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 

Mobile (3) ■ (1) ■ (4) ■ ■

Overhead, gantry, monorail, 

and underhung 

■ (1) ■ ■ 

Base-mounted and overhead 

hoists 

■ (1) ■ ■ 

Notes: (1) conduct for main, auxiliary, and whip hoists, as applicable; (2) conduct rotation tests through 

normal design operating arc; (3) perform complete tests on each hook; extend outriggers or stabilizers as specified 

by the manufacturer; level crane as specified by the manufacturer’s load chart; rotate the boom 90° from the 

longitudinal axis of the crane carrier and position the boom at the minimum working radius; (4) conduct fixed 

boom or telescopic boom, as appropriate. 

Table 2.—Crane load testing requirements

Type of crane L1 L2(2) L3(2) L4(2) L5 L6(2) L7 L8 L9(2) L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21

Mobile and 

locomotive(1,5

) 

■z ■ ■ ■z ■ ■ (6) # # 

Overhead, 

gantry, 

monorail, and 

underhung 

■ ■ ■ ■b ■b ■b ■ ■ ■ 

Portal, tower, 

and pedestal 

(1) 

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 

Derricks(1) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (3) ■ ■ ■ 

Floating 

cranes and 

derricks (1) 

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 

Construction ■ ■

(4) 

■

(4) 

■ ■

(4) 

■

(4) 

 ■

(4) 

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 

Base-mounted 

and overhead 

hoists 

■ ■ ■ ■b ■b ■b ■

Notes: (1) for variable-rated cranes, perform the applicable variable-rated crane tests in addition to the any 

other required tests; (2) conduct for main, auxiliary, jib, and whip hoists; (3) conduct rotation tests through normal 

design operating arc; (4) conduct hoist tests in combinations so that you test all structural, mechanical, and electrical 

components in all possible configurations; (5) perform complete tests on each hook; extend outriggers or stabilizers 

as specified by the manufacturer; level crane as specified by the manufacturer's load chart; rotate the boom 90° from 

the longitudinal axis of the crane carrier and position the boom at the minimum working radius; (6) rotate the 

maximum degrees allowed by manufacturer; perform test with boom fully retracted and fully extended. 

Tests marked with "b" or "z" indicate an additional test element unique to the type of crane. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-36 October 2009 

1. Performance testing includes both operational performance testing and load a. 

2. Comply with the following sequence and limitations when conducting 

performance tests: 

a. Test rigging first. 

b. Conduct the operational performance test before the load performance test. 

c. Test the main hoist before testing the auxiliary or whip hoists. 

d. Raise test loads only to a height sufficient to perform the test. 

3. Operational performance testing. Operational performance testing must 

include the tests specified in table 1 to this appendix, as defined below. 

X1 = Load hoist operation and limit switch test. (1) Raise the load hook 

through all controller points, stopping below the upper limit switch 

(where applicable), (2) slowly raise the load hook into the upper 

limit switch to establish that the limit switch is operating properly, 

(3) slowly raise the hook through the upper limit switch by using 

limit switch bypass (where applicable), (4) lower the load hook 

below the upper limit switch using all the lowering control points, 

(5) slowly lower the load hook into the lower limit switch to 

establish that the limit switch is operating properly. 

X2 = Boom hoist operation and limit switch test, fixed boom. (1) Raise 

the boom through all controller points, stopping below upper limit 

switch; (2) slowly raise the boom into the upper limit switch; (3) 

lower the boom below upper limit switch and raise the boom through 

the limit switch by using the limit switch bypass (where applicable); 

(4) lower the boom through all controller points, stopping above the 

lower limit switch (where applicable); (5) slowly lower the boom 

into the lower limit switch (where applicable); (6) raise the boom 

above the lower limit switch and lower the boom through the limit 

switch by using the limit switch bypass (where applicable). 

X2t = Boom hoist operation and limit switch test, telescopic boom. In 

addition to test X2, conduct the following: (1) extend and retract 

telescoping boom sections the full distance of travel; (2) check the 

radius indicator by measuring the radius at the minimum and 

maximum boom angle. 

 X3 = Luffing drum pawl test. (1) Check luffing drum pawl for proper 

engagement in ratchet gear and with limit switch; (2) ensure the 

luffing drum pawl is disengaged; (3) check the luffing drum pawl 

limit switch (if installed) for proper operation by operating the boom 

hoist and manually (at the pawl) activating the limit switch; 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-37 

(4) check that the boom hoist motor shuts off, the brake engages, and 

the indicator lights operate correctly (where applicable). 

Caution: Do not engage pawl in the ratchet gear.

X4 = Rotation lock test (wind lock, spud lock). (1) Engage the rotation 

lock and inspect to ensure full engagement; (2) check that rotation 

lock limit switches (clockwise and counterclockwise) prevent 

engaging rotation drive (where applicable); (3) operate the rotation 

lock bypass (clockwise and counterclockwise) to ensure proper 

operation (where applicable). 

Caution: Use only enough power to check the operation of the 

bypass; ensure the rotation lock is disengaged before continuing the 

test. 

Note: You may manually operate applicable switches to check for 

correct operation instead of engaging rotation lock 

X5 = Rotation test. Rotate clockwise and counterclockwise with boom at 

minimum radius. 

X6 = Travel test. Conduct operation travel test as prescribed in L14, 

except without load. 

X7 = Deadman control test. Test all deadman controls (where installed): 

(1) start each motion, (2) release deadman control—motion should 

stop. 

X8 = Trolley test. (1) Trolley the allowable length of the trolley runway 

using all control points; (2) operate the trolley into the limit switches 

at slow speed; (3) bring the trolley back, and, by using the limit 

switch bypass, move the trolley into the outboard rail stops; (4) 

repeat the above procedure for inboard limit switches and rail stops. 

X9 = Bridge test. (1) Operate the bridge travel controller through all 

points in both directions; (2) operate the full distance of the runway 

and slowly contact the runway rail stops with the crane bridge 

bumpers. 

X10 = Other motions test. Test other motions, including swing, by 

operating through one cycle (one full revolution of the major 

components). 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-38 October 2009 

X11 = Boom stop test. See attachment 19-3. 

4. Load performance testing. Load performance testing must include the tests 

specified in table 1, as defined below. 

L1 = Stability test. During tests L2m, L3m, L5, and L11, observe roller 

clearance and roller lift-off from the roller path. 

L1v = Stability test, variable-rated crane. Conduct tests L2m, L3m, and 

L11 with the test load on the main hoist at the maximum radius of 

the crane; observe roller clearance and roller lift off from the roller 

path. 

L2m = Load and boom hoist static test, main hoist. (1) Raise the test load 

to clear ground and hold for 10 minutes with the boom at the 

maximum radius; (2) rotate the load to check the bearing operation; 

(3) do not engage the boom or load hoist pawl; (4) observe if 

lowering occurs; lowering indicates a malfunction of the boom or 

hoisting components or holding brakes. 

L2a = Load hoist static test, auxiliary hoist. (1) Raise the test load to clear 

the ground and hold for 10 minutes without hoist pawl engaged; (2) 

rotate load to check bearing operation - observe if lowering occurs; 

lowering indicates a malfunction of the hoisting components or 

holding brakes. 

L2w = Load hoist static test, whip hoist. (1) Raise the test load to clear the 

ground and hold for 10 minutes; (2) rotate load to check operation 

of bearing; observe if lowering occurs; lowering indicates a 

malfunction of the hoisting components or holding brakes. 

L2z = load hoist static test, main hoist, mobile crane. (1) Raise the test 

load to clear the ground with the boom at the minimum radius and 

hold for 10 minutes without the boom and load hoist pawls 

engaged; (2) rotate load and hook to check bearing operation; (3) 

observe if any lowering occurs; lowering indicates a malfunction of 

the boom or hoisting components, brakes, or outriggers. 

Note: For hydraulic cranes, perform the test with the boom fully 

retracted and fully extended.

L3m = Load hoist dynamic test, main hoist. (1) Raise and lower the test 

load on each hoist controller point and visually observe smooth 

control between points; (2) lower the test load to unload the hoist 

components, wait 5 minutes and then continue testing. 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-39 

L3a = Load hoist dynamic test, auxiliary hoist. Raise and lower the test 

load on each controller point and visually observe smooth control 

between points. 

L3v = Load hoist dynamic test, main hoist, variable-rated crane. Conduct 

test L3m at the maximum radius of the crane. 

L3w = Load hoist dynamic test, whip hoist. Raise and lower the test load 

on each controller point and visually observe smooth control 

between points. 

L4 = Wire rope test. During either the static or dynamic test, where 

possible, test the entire working length of the wire rope. 

L5 = Boom hoist operating test. Visually watch for smooth rotation 

between boom controller points: (1) starting from the maximum 

radius, raise the boom to minimum radius using all boom controller 

points; (2) lower the boom through all controller points. 

L5z = Boom hoist operating test, mobile crane. Operate the boom from 

the minimum radius to the maximum radius for the load applied; 

for hydraulic cranes, perform the test with the boom fully retracted 

and fully extended; perform the test at both the maximum test load 

for crane and for the maximum test load at maximum radius of the 

crane. 

L6 = Hoist foot brake test (hydraulic or mechanical brake). Lower the 

test load, using the first control point, then apply the foot brake—

this should stop the lowering motion of the test load. 

Caution: This is not applicable to load-sensitive reactor type hoist 

controls.

L6b = Hoist load brake. (1) Raise the test load approximately 1.5 meters 

(5 feet); (2) with the hoist controller in the neutral position, release 

(by hand) the holding brake—the load brake should hold the test 

load; (3) again, with holding brake in the released position, start the 

test load down (first point) and return the controller to the off 

position as the test load lowers—the load brake should prevent the 

test load from accelerating. 

Note: It is not necessary for the load brake to halt the downward 

motion of the test load.
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-40 October 2009 

L7 = Boom foot brake test (hydraulic or mechanical brake). (1) Start 

with the boom near the maximum radius and with the test load 

approximately 0.6 meters (2 feet) from the ground surface; (2) 

lower the test load using the first control point of the boom hoist; 

(3) apply the foot brake—this should stop the lowering motion of 

the boom and load. 

Caution: This is not applicable to load-sensitive reactor type hoist 

controls. 

L8 = Automatic boom brake (where applicable). This brake prevents a 

"free" boom in case the clutch fails, the boom hoist control fails, or 

the foot brake fails: (1) Raise the boom to minimum radius and, 

with the test load approximately 100 millimeters (4 inches) above 

the ground, set the boom foot brake firmly; (2) release the 

mechanical boom dog; (3) release the boom clutch by operating the 

boom hoist control; (4) slowly release the foot brake to the free 

position; (5) hold the test load with automatic brake for 5 minutes, 

then lower the test load by applying the boom hoist clutch and 

lowering with the controller operation. 

L8v = Automatic boom brake, variable-rated crane (where applicable). 

Conduct test L8 at the maximum radius of the crane. 

L9 = Load hoist loss of power (panic test). This test is designed to test 

the reaction of a hoisting unit in the event of a power failure during 

a lift. (1) Hoist the test load approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above 

the ground at maximum allowable radius; (2) slowly lower the test 

load and, with the controller in the slow lowering position, 

disconnect the main power source by pushing the main power stop 

button(s); (3) return the controller to the neutral position—the test 

load should stop lowering when the controller is in the neutral 

position. 

Caution: Do not perform this test on cranes that do not have 

powered-down boom and load hoists. 

L9b = Load hoist loss of power (panic test). This is a test to check the 

reaction of a hoisting unit in the event of a power failure during a 

lift. (1) Hoist the test load to a convenient distance above the 

surface; (2) slowly lower the test load and, with the controller in the 

slow lowering position, disconnect the main power source and 

return the controller to the neutral position—the test load should 

stop lowering when the controller is in the neutral position. 

Note: Vent air-operated hoists during this test.
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-41 

L10 = Boom hoist loss of power (panic test). This is a test to check the 

reaction of the boom hoist in the event of a power failure during a 

lift. (1) Hoist the test load approximately 3 meters (10 feet) above 

the ground with the boom near maximum radius; (2) slowly lower 

the boom, disconnect the main power source by pushing the main 

power stop button(s), then return the controller to the neutral 

position— the boom should stop lowering when the controller is in 

the neutral position. 

Caution: Do not perform this test on cranes that do not have 

powered down boom and load hoists.

 L11 = Rotation test. Start with the boom at the maximum radius and 

rotate left and right 360 degrees. 

Note: If test area does not permit, two complete revolutions of the 

swing pinion is adequate.

Caution: Exercise care when rotating loads over the water. 

Ensure that during the initial load-test, the floating crane has 

adequate draft readings per design data. 

L12 = Rotate brake test. Rotate left and right at slow speed and apply 

brakes, individually, periodically during rotation. Each brake 

should stop the rotating motion in a smooth, positive manner. 

L13 = Travel motion test. Conduct this test with the boom at the 

maximum allowable radius, positioned at 90 degrees, with the crane 

rails and boom dog engaged. 

Caution: Operate the crane at very slow travel speeds; ensure the 

track and supporting foundation are sound and free of any 

obstructions over the test travel areas (not applicable to floating 

cranes). 

L14 = Travel operation test. (1) With the test load raised to clear the 

ground, the boom centered between the crane rails, and the boom 

dog engaged, travel in one direction a minimum of 15 meters 

(50 feet); (2) operate the controller through all controller points—

the crane should accelerate and decelerate smoothly, and all 

motions should be smooth and positive; (3) repeat in the opposite 

direction. 

L15 = Trolley motion test. (1) Raise the test load to clear the ground and 

move the trolley to the maximum allowable radius. Do not move 

the trolley beyond the trolley limit switch; (2) hold the test load for 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

19-42 October 2009 

10 minutes; (3) lower the test load to the ground until the hoist lines 

are slack; (4) wait 5 minutes, raise the test load and trolley the 

allowable length of the trolley runway. 

L15b = Trolley motion test. Using extreme caution, operate the trolley with 

the test load (if space is available) for the full distance of the bridge 

rails; observe proper brake operation. 

L16 = Bridge motion test. Using extreme caution, operate the bridge with 

the test load (if space is available) for the full distance of the 

runway and watch for any binding of bridge trucks and for proper 

brake operation. 

L17 = Hydraulic crane slippage. (1) Lift the test load at maximum radius 

and allow time for fluid and component temperatures to stabilize; 

(2) hold the load for 10 minutes without the operator using the 

controls—there must be no significant lowering of the load, boom, 

or outrigger beams resulting from components or systems 

malfunction or failure during the test. 

L18 = Free-rated load test. This is a test to check the stability of the crane 

and the operation of the crane carrier, wheels, tires, and brakes 

under load. Note: Retract outriggers before beginning free-rated 

load test. (1) Hoist the maximum free rated test load at its 

maximum radius over the rear of the crane?; (2) rotate through the 

"over the rear" working arc and travel a minimum of 15 meters (50 

feet) with the test load over the rear of the crane with the boom 

parallel to the longitudinal axis of the crane carrier; (3) hoist 

maximum free rated test load at its maximum radius over the side; 

(4) rotate through the full working range and travel a minimum of 

15 meters (50 feet) with test load over the left side of the crane 

carrier with the boom 90o

 to the axis of travel; (5) rotate through the 

full working range and travel a minimum of 15 meters (50 feet) 

with the test load over the right side of the crane carrier with the 

boom 90 degrees to the axis of travel. 

L19 = Primary and secondary holding brakes. For cranes with primary 

and secondary holding brakes (configuration of crane in which a 

primary brake actuates when the controller returns to the neutral 

position and the secondary brake actuates a few seconds later) or 

eddy current hoist dynamic load brakes. (1) During either the static 

or dynamic test, raise the test load and observe the proper timing 

sequence in the application of the primary and secondary brake 

when controller is returned to neutral (visually observe both hoist 

holding brakes to ensure correct position); (2) raise test load 
Section 19—Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors 

October 2009 19-43 

approximately 0.3 meter (1 feet), hold for 10 minutes, and 

inactivate the secondary holding brake while testing the primary 

holding brake - observe for noticeable lowering of test load that 

may occur which must indicate malfunction of hoisting components 

or brakes; (3) re-engage secondary holding brake and release the 

primary holding brake and hold for 10 minutes - observe for 

noticeable lowering of test load that may occur which must indicate 

malfunction of hoisting components or brakes; (4) re-engage the 

primary holding brake - recheck proper operation of time delay and 

ensure smooth positive stopping. 

L20 = Hoist dynamic load brake (eddy current). Check lowering speed 

against specifications to ensure correct brake operation. (NOTE: 

Eddy current brakes must not stop motion.) 

L21 = Swing test (where applicable). Swing the test load (where space is 

available) through the working range at maximum radius, stopping 

the load at several points: there should be no excessive drift of jib 

or trolley at any of these points (the significance of drift must be 

evaluated). 
October 2009 19-45 

Attachment 19-3 

Boom Stop Testing Requirements 

Boom stop tests must follow these steps. 

Step 1: Make sure an appropriate operator’s manual is available. 

Step 2: Make sure the crane is level, and the outriggers (if so equipped) are in 

place. 

Step 3: Check the boom and boom stops for misalignment, bent parts, and other 

physical damage. 

Step 4: Check the boom stop pins (at connections) for lubrication, wear, and 

damage. 

Step 5: Check the boom angle indicator with an inclinometer for accuracy. 

Step 6: Check the boom hoist disengaging device for proper adjustment and 

alignment in accordance in accordance with the operator's manual. 

Step 7: Make sure that the boom stops and boom hoist disengaging devise are set 

up to operate properly. Physically boom up the boom just to the points listed 

(described in subparagraphs a. and b. below), as long as the boom does not go 

beyond the point of operation of the boom hoist disengaging device. This test is 

not intended to override the boom hoist disengaging device. 

a. For cantilever or scissors types, this is the point just before the boom and 

boom stops touch. 

b. For telescoping types, this is the point just before compression. 

 
October 2009 20-1 

Section 20 

Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment 

This section sets forth the requirements and standards for Reclamation’s safety 

and occupational health programs. It covers the following specific areas: 

• Operational Requirements 

• Inspections 

• Maintenance 

• Testing 

• Crawler Equipment 

• Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines 

• Agricultural and Industrial Equipment 

• Industrial Trucks 

• A-Frame Trucks 

• Aerial Lifts 

• Other Mechanized Construction Equipment Standards 

• Roads 

Mobile mechanized equipment requirements contained and referenced in this 

section are applicable to all equipment propelled or drawn by mechanical power 

except rail rolling stock, passenger cars, trucks under 10,000 pounds, trailers 

under 3,000 pounds gross weight that meet Department of Transportation (DOT) 

design standards, snowmobiles, motorcycles, and all-terrain recreation machines. 

20.1 Operational Requirements 

20.1.1 Operators. Allow only authorized personnel to operate mobile 

equipment. Assign operators only to equipment they are qualified and 

licensed to operate. Provide operators with the instructions and training that 

their jobs require and ensure that operators: 

• Meet the physical requirements of their job 

• Meet the DOT licensing requirements for on-highway operations 

• Do not operate mobile equipment for over 12 hours in any 24-hour 

period 

• Comply with applicable operating instructions, limitations, 

regulations, and written safety programs and plans 

Do not allow the operation to begin or continue if the operator is not physically, 

mentally, and emotionally capable of operating the vehicle or equipment safely. 

20.1.2 Unusual Equipment Configurations. Refer to the section, "Hoisting 

Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-2 October 2009 

a. Examples. Examples of unusual equipment configurations: 

• Special use or conditional operations of dozers or other 

earthmoving equipment 

• Anchoring mobile earthmoving or drilling equipment on steep 

slopes 

• Hoisting with hydraulic excavating machines or multiple crane lifts 

• Using a crane in conjunction with other equipment to lift loads 

b. Requirements. Do not use equipment in unusual configurations until 

the following information and procedural documents have been obtained 

or developed: 

• Equipment manufacturer or registered professional engineer's (PE) 

written approval 

• Appropriate confirmation that hoisting systems used to raise, 

lower, suspend, or stabilize equipment on slopes meet applicable 

design, testing, and certification requirements 

• A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) 

c. Exceptions 

• Hydraulic excavating machine hoisting operations conforming 

with applicable provisions in the section, "Hoisting Equipment, 

Piledrivers, and Conveyors." 

• Operation of equipment on 30 percent or less grades when the 

operational assist system, dozer blades, loader buckets, dippers, 

winches, etc., are not required to stabilize the working machine in 

any operational configuration 

20.1.3 Parking, Stopping, Standing. Do not stop, park, or leave standing 

any equipment on any road, ramp, accessway, or other location in such a 

manner as to endanger personnel or property. Do not leave equipment 

unattended unless the motor has been shut off, brakes securely set, 

transmission gears engaged, and all hydraulic components lowered to a 

supporting surface or otherwise protected against accidental movement. 

Chock or turn the wheels toward the curb on any equipment parked on a 

grade. 

Transmix concrete trucks, lubrication trucks, fuel trucks, and similar 

equipment using primary engine-powered auxiliary equipment, also know as 

power take off (PTO), and/or exterior controls are not considered unattended 

when: 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-3 

• The operator is outside the cab but within arms length of the unit or is 

in contact with auxiliary equipment or controls. 

• The primary unit’s brakes and gearing arrangements are designed for 

safe use of auxiliary attachments and/or exterior controls are in the 

proper position. 

• The primary unit is equipped with an automatic lockout device that 

prohibits operating exterior controls until the brake and gear 

arrangements are in the proper position. 

Diesel-powered earthmoving equipment being refueled or cooled down in a 

secured area or under visual observation of the operator or a mechanic, with 

brakes set and wheels chocked and hydraulic components lowered to a supporting 

surface, is not considered unattended. 

20.1.4 Speeds. Do not operate equipment at speeds greater than those that 

are reasonable and safe considering weather conditions, traffic, road 

conditions, type and condition of equipment, and manufacturer’s 

recommendations. The operator must have the equipment under control at all 

times and be able to stop within the clear-sight distance. 

20.1.5 Gears Engaged. Do not operate any vehicle on a downgrade with 

gears in neutral or clutch disengaged. 

20.1.6 Towing. Do not permit employees between a towed vehicle and the 

towing vehicle, except when hooking or unhooking it. 

20.1.7 Unattended at Night. Make sure equipment left unattended after 

hours on or near roadways or in areas where work is in progress has lights, 

reflectors, or lighted or reflective barricades to identify the location of the 

equipment. 

20.1.8 Unauthorized Riding. Do not allow personnel to ride in or on 

mobile equipment unless they are sitting in a seat designed and installed for 

that purpose. 

20.1.9 Securing Loads. Properly distribute, chock, tie down, or otherwise 

secure the load on every piece of mobile equipment according to DOT 

regulations (table 20-1). Secure tools and material transported in the same 

compartment as personnel to prevent movement of the tools and material. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-4 October 2009 

Table 20-1.—Applicable standards and regulations 

Regulation standard Title 

Reference in 

section 

49 CFR 390-399 Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 20.5 

49 CFR 393.93 Seats, Seatbelt Assemblies and Seatbelt Assembly 

Anchorages – Federal Motor Carrier Safety 

Regulations 

20.6.9 

49 CFR 399.207 Truck and Truck Tractor Access Requirements – 

Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 

20.6.8 

App. F, (7) 

App. H, (5) 

49 CFR 393.100 General Rules for Protection Against Shifting or 

Falling Cargo - Federal Motor Carrier Safety 

Regulations 

20.1.9 

49 CFR 393.40 Required Brake Systems – Federal Motor Carrier 

Safety Regulations 

20.6.3 

App. F (32) 

29 CFR 1910.178 Powered Industrial Trucks 20.10 

20.10.8 

ANSI/ASME B30.5 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes App. F(1) 

ANSI/ASME B56.1 Safety Standard for Low Lift and High Lift Trucks 20.10 

ANSI/ASME B56.6 Safety Standard for Trough Terrain Forklift Trucks 20.10 

ANSI/SIA A92.2 Vehicle Mounted and Elevating Rotating Aerial 

Devices 

20.12 

ANSI/SIA A92.3 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms 20.12 

ANSI/SIA A92.5 Boom Supported Elevated Work Platforms 20.12 

ANSI/SIA A92.6 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms 20.12 

ANSI B15.1 Safety Standard for Mechanical Power 

Transmission Apparatus 

20.13.1 

ANSI A92.2 Section 5 Predelivery Testing and Inspection of New Aerial 

Devices 

20.12 

SAE J682 Fenders and Mudflaps App. G, 8 

J/ISO 3450 Braking Performance - Rubber-tired Construction 

Machines (Formerly SAE J1152) 

20.5.2 

20.7.2 

App. H (17) 

App. F (32) 

SAE J1040 Performance Criteria for Rollover Protection 

Structures (ROPS) 

20.6.1 

App. H (12) 

SAE/JISO 3449 Earth Moving Machinery - Protective Structures - 

Laboratory Tests and Performance Requirements 

20.6.2 

App. H (13) 

SAE J1084 Operator Protective Structure Performance Criteria 

for Certain Forestry Equipment 

20.6.3 

App. H (14) 

SAE J1116 Categories of Off-Road Self Propelled Work 

Machines 

20.6.9 

SAE J386 Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work 

Machines 

20.6.9 

App. H (10) 

SAE J185 Access Systems for Off-Road Machines 20.6.8 

App. F (7) 

App. H (7) 

 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-5 

Table 20-1.—Applicable standards and regulations 

Regulation standard Title 

Reference in 

section 

SAE J1029 Lighting and Marking of Construction Earth Moving 

Machinery 

App. H (5) 

SAE J321 Tire Guards for Protection of Operators of Earth 

Moving Haulage Machines 

App. H (9) 

SAE J1194 Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Wheeled 

Agricultural Tractors 

App. H (10)(12) 

(13) 

SAE J1042 Operator Protection for General Purpose Industrial 

Equipment 

App. H( 10)(12) 

(13) 

SAE J167 Overhead Protection for Agricultural Tractors App. H (13) 

SAE J220 Crane Boomstop App. F (16) 

SAE J101 Hydraulic Wheel Cylinders for Automotive Drum 

Brakes 

App. H (12) 

SAE J115 Safety Signs App. H (15) 

SAE J1511 Steering for Off-Road Rubber-Tired Machines App. H (15) 

SAE HS-5600 Lighting and Marking of Agricultural Equipment on 

Highways 

App. H(5) 

20.1.10 Seats and Seatbelts. Do not allow operators or passengers to ride on 

or in equipment unless they are seated with installed seatbelts fastened, except 

for stand-up operation. 

20.1.11 Emergency Equipment. Equip all trucks and combination vehicles 

operated on public roads including all buses, and vehicles carrying 

flammables, explosives, or hazardous materials with emergency equipment. 

Equip all mobile machines with appropriate fire extinguishers. 

• Flags and reflectors. Use a red flag measuring at least 12 inches 

square with three reflective markers when parked along public 

roadways. 

• Wheel chocks. Use two-wheel chocks for each vehicle or trailer use 

where there is a possibility that the vehicle will move or shift because 

of roadway conditions or loading or unloading of the vehicle or trailer. 

• Fire extinguishers. Install one 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical extinguisher. 

When transporting flammable or explosive cargo, install at least two 

2-A:40-B:C dry chemical fire extinguishers. 

20.2 Inspection Requirements 

20.2.1 Initial. Qualified personnel must inspect mobile equipment before 

conducting required onsite brake performance tests to ensure that the 

equipment is in safe condition and that it meets the original design 

specifications and the standards of this section. Conduct the inspection at the 

site. Ensure that the inspection is recorded on the applicable form and 

verified by a Reclamation representative. Repair unsafe equipment and 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-6 October 2009 

reinspect it before it is returned to service and/or before the brakes are tested. 

The employer must inspect equipment exempted from brake tests before it is 

used onsite. Repair and reinspect the equipment if it is unsafe. Make a record 

of the inspection available for review. 

20.2.2 Periodic. Inspect equipment in service at the beginning of each shift. 

Do not place the inspected unit into service unless applicable equipment and 

accessories are in safe operating condition, including: 

• Service brake 

• Secondary brake 

• Parking brake 

• Windows 

• Tires 

• Warning devices 

• Steering mechanism 

• Operating controls 

• Wipers 

• Defrosters 

• Coupling devices 

• Fire extinguisher 

Keep daily inspection logs with the vehicle. 

20.3 Maintenance Requirements 

20.3.1 Removal from Service. Remove equipment from service whenever 

an unsafe condition is detected. Do not place it back in service until it has 

been repaired. 

20.3.2 Repair Shutdown. Shut down and secure equipment while repairs or 

adjustments are being made unless operation is essential to making the 

adjustments or repairs. 

20.3.3 Refueling. Refueling is subject to the requirements in the section, 

"Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and Disposal." 

20.3.4 Tire Repair. Provide a safety tire cage and use it when inflating, 

mounting, or dismounting tires installed on "split rims" or rims equipped with 

locking rings or similar devices. Do not weld on rims unless the tire has been 

removed. Reference the OSHA specified "Multi-Piece Rim Wheel Matching 

Chart" or equivalent poster. 

20.3.5 Blocking. Block or crib equipment or parts suspended or held aloft by 

cables, hydraulic cylinders, slings, ropes, hoists, or jacks, or lower it to a 

supporting surface before permitting employees to work in, under, or between 

pieces of equipment or parts. 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-7 

20.3.6 Brake Repair. Use a vacuum with a high efficiency particulate air 

(HEPA) filter to clean asbestos-lined brake assemblies. Do not use 

compressed air for this purpose. 

20.4 Testing Requirements 

Conduct operational tests, required by the manufacturer's maintenance and 

operational manuals accompanying the machine or equipment, at recommended 

intervals. Appropriately log test results and make them available. Onsite brake 

tests for specific equipment are included in operation tests. Loading tests are 

required for operational testing of cranes. 

20.5 Requirements for On-Highway Equipment 

Trucks over 10,000 lb (GVW), including but not limited to tractor/trailer 

combinations, transmix trucks, dump trucks and buses, and self-propelled and 

rubber-tired truck cranes and excavators shall meet the applicable requirements of 

this section and subsection, appendix G, and applicable DOT requirements 

contained in Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 49 CFR 390-399 (see table 

20-1). 

20.5.1 Dump Trucks and End-Dump Trailers. Equip dump trucks and 

end-dump trailers of all types with the following safety devices: 

a. Trip Handles. Equip trip handles or dump body operating levers that 

control hoisting or dumping with a latch or similar device that will prevent 

accidentally starting or tripping the mechanism. Locate the trip handle so 

the operator remains clear of the load or dumping device. 

b. Holding Device. Permanently attach a manually operated strut to the 

truck body for use in preventing accidentally lowering the dump body or 

bed during inspection or maintenance operations. Use the holding device 

when personnel are around or under the dump body and the bed is in the 

raised position. 

c. Cab Protection. Protect the operators of trucks loaded or unloaded by 

means of a crane, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment with a cab 

shield barrier and/or a protective canopy adequate to stop or deflect falling 

or shifting material. When such protection is not installed, the operator 

must leave the cab during loading and unloading operations. 

d. Tip-Over Safety Device. Under the following circumstances, equip 

long-bed end-dump trailers used in off-road hauling with a roll-over 

warning device: 

• The material being dumped is subject to being stuck or caught in 

the trailer rather than exiting the bed freely. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-8 October 2009 

• The dump site cannot be maintained in a nominally level condition 

(lateral slope less than 3 percent). 

Equip the device with a continuous monitoring display at the operator 

station to give the operator a visible and audible warning of an unsafe 

condition. 

20.5.2 Braking Systems. Equip all on-highway equipment with braking 

systems as described herein and in appendix G. 

a. Equip a bus, truck, tractor-trailer, combination of vehicles, or similar 

type equipment with the following braking systems that conform to these 

requirements and the requirements in appendix G: 

1. A service brake system 

2. A parking brake system 

3. A secondary braking system 

b. Equip mobile cranes and excavators, mounted on rubber-tired chassis 

or frames, and manufactured after July 1967 with a service braking 

system, secondary stopping (brake) system, and a parking brake system. 

(See provisions of appendices F or G for detailed requirements.) 

20.5.3 Brake Performance Test. After satisfactorily completing initial 

inspection requirements of this section and appendix F or G (whichever 

appendix is applicable), but prior to initial onsite use, equipment must 

satisfactorily complete an onsite brake performance test. Subsequent tests 

must be conducted annually, or following repair or maintenance of braking 

systems. Equipment owned/leased and operated by suppliers and engaged in 

limited operation on the project are exempted from brake performance test 

and inspection requirements. Onsite brake performance tests will be verified 

by a Reclamation representative on each piece of equipment in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s prescribed method for brake performance testing if: 

a. The procedure is in writing. 

b. The method verifies the operation of the service, secondary, and 

parking brake systems. 

c. The manufacturer's opinion is adequate to verify that the braking 

systems would meet the applicable SAE standard requirements. 

In lieu of an acceptable manufacturer-approved brake performance test 

procedure, onsite brake performance tests will be verified by a Reclamation 

representative on each piece of equipment in accordance with appropriate 

method and procedures (see appendices F and G). Test results will be 

recorded on the appropriate form and maintained in the equipment file. 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-9 

Equipment failing the test shall not be placed into service until repaired and 

retested. 

20.6 Crawler Equipment Requirements 

Crawler equipment and operations must meet the requirements of this section, 

appendix F and applicable references in table 20-1. 

20.6.1 Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS). Install ROPS on all crawler 

tractors and loaders except side-boom crawler tractors when these are 

equipped with seatbelts and the boom and counterweights are installed. 

20.6.2 Falling Objects Protective Structures (FOPS). Equip crawler 

tractors and loaders with protective structures when they are used in 

operations that expose the operator to falling objects. 

20.6.3 Operator Enclosure. Equip crawler tractors, loaders, or forestry 

machines with enclosures when used in tree-clearing operations or other 

operations where objects may intrude into the operator's area. 

20.6.4 Certification of Protective Structures (ROPS)(FOPS). Make 

certain that protective structures, ROPS and FOPS, meet required design 

criteria available for review before the equipment is used. Acceptable 

methods of certification are: 

• Manufacturer’s or PE's written confirmation that the structures meet 

required design criteria 

• Permanent labels attached to the structure 

20.6.5 Modification or Repair of Protective Structures—ROPS and 

FOPS. Modification or repair of protective structures of ROPS and FOPS 

without manufacturer or PE's written approval voids certifications. Remove 

decertified protective structure(s) from service until the modified, repaired, or 

damaged protective structure is recertified or replaced. 

20.6.6 Braking Systems. The service and parking brake systems on crawler 

equipment must be adequate to stop and hold the machine on all surfaces. 

20.6.7 Accessories. Equip all crawler equipment with the following 

accessories: 

a. Lights. Equip machines operated at night or when vision is obscured 

with two symmetrically mounted lights or flood lamps that illuminate the 

forward working area and with one light or flood lamp of equal intensity 

for illuminating the rear working area. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-10 October 2009 

Also provide one bucket lamp on all shovels and excavators. Also equip 

slow-moving vehicles such as dozers with a rotating amber light or 

equivalent that is visible in all directions. 

b. Warning Devices. Install an automatic functional backup alarm where 

there is obstructed vision to the rear. 

20.6.8 Access Systems. To personnel entering, leaving, or working in or on 

operator cabs or stations or inspection or on service platforms provide steps, 

stairways, ladders, walkways, platforms, handholds, guardrails, and entrance 

openings. Keep the vertical height of the first steps no higher than 28 inches 

from the ground. Such systems provide the person with three points of 

support at all times. 

20.6.9 Seatbelts. Install and use seatbelts on all equipment protected by 

rollover protective structures or as required elsewhere. Where seatbelts are 

installed, use is mandatory. 

20.6.10 Equipment Cabs. Equip cabs with shatter-resistant glazing in all 

windows, heaters, defrosters, windshield wipers, and door restraints. Provide 

bidirectional machines with rearview mirrors. Equip machines with 

windshields but not cabs with windshield wipers as appropriate. 

20.6.11 Barricades. Barricade the swing radius area of rotating 

superstructures of track hoes or similar equipment in a manner that physically 

prevents persons or equipment from being struck by the superstructure. 

20.7 Requirements for Off-Highway Wheel Construction Machines 

Off-highway wheeled construction machines, including but not limited to loaders 

and tractors, scrapers, dumpers, graders, rollers and compactors of mass greater 

than 3 tons, water wagons, and similar-type equipment, must conform with this 

subsection; applicable provisions of this section, other relevant subsections, and 

the appendix entitled, "Record of Performance— Inspection and Brake Test." 

Mobile, self-propelled cranes are also subject to this subsection. 

20.7.1 Braking Systems. Equip all equipment regardless of age with a safe 

and operable service braking system, an emergency stopping (brake) system, 

and a parking brake system. The braking systems must conform with the 

criteria contained in appendix H. Units manufactured before 1980 may 

conform to the SAE Standard under which they were manufactured, if: (1) the 

standard requires a service brake system, an emergency brake system, and a 

parking brake system, and (2) failure of any one system or component will not 

reduce the effectiveness of the machine's stopping capability below the 

emergency stopping performance criteria shown in appendix H. In no 

circumstances shall dropping the scraper bowl, loader bucket, grader/tractor 

blade, or equipment loads be considered an emergency braking system. (See 

appendix H, item 17, for exemptions on compactors and rollers intended for 

use on grades of 3 percent or less.) 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-11 

20.7.2 Brake Performance Test. The employer shall, after satisfactorily 

completing the initial inspection requirements of appendix H, conduct onsite 

brake performance tests on all equipment before it is returned to use, annually 

thereafter, and as whenever needed. 

a. A Reclamation representative will verify onsite brake performance tests 

on each piece of equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's 

prescribed method for brake performance. The certification will: 

• Be in writing 

• Provide a method to verify the operation of the service, emergency, 

and parking brake systems 

• Be, in the manufacturer's opinion, adequate to verify that the 

braking systems would meet the applicable SAE standards 

b. No testing is required for roller compactors on slopes less than 3 

percent. 

c. In lieu of an acceptable manufacturer's approved brake performance 

test procedure, conduct onsite brake performance tests according to the 

following procedures: 

• Individually test each required braking system (service, 

emergency, parking) according to criteria set forth in the 

Reclamation form entitled, "Brake Performance Test Record," 

shown in appendix H. 

• Record each test result on the form, then date and sign. 

• Do not return equipment failing the test to service until corrective 

measures have been taken and a retest confirms the equipment is 

safe to operate. 

20.8 Requirements for Agricultural and Industrial Equipment 

Agricultural wheeled tractors and industrial equipment, including but not limited 

to tractors, loaders, backhoe loaders, trenchers, and similar type equipment will be 

designed, operated, and maintained in a safe condition. All equipment must have 

service and parking braking systems that can stop and hold the equipment on any 

surface. 

20.9 Requirements for Personnel Transport Vehicles and Buses 

All vehicles transporting personnel shall be operated and maintained in a safe 

condition. 

20.9.1 Type of Equipment. Use only fully enclosed vehicles with seats and 

seatbelts for operators and passengers to transport personnel. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-12 October 2009 

20.9.2 Operator Qualifications. Operators of buses must be 21 years old 

and have in their possession a valid State operator's permit or license for the 

type of vehicle being operated. Operators must have passed a physical 

examination within the past year showing they are physically qualified to 

safely operate the vehicle. 

20.9.3 Starting. Do not allow vehicles transporting personnel to move until 

the operator has checked that all persons are seated, seatbelts are fastened, and 

doors are closed. 

20.9.4 Tools and Materials. Place tools and materials in containers or 

secure when they are transported in vehicles carrying personnel. 

20.10 Requirements for Industrial Trucks 

All industrial trucks must meet the requirements for design, construction, 

stability, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation as required for safe use. 

High-lift rider trucks shall be equipped with overhead guards (ANSI B56.1). 

20.10.1 Inspection. Perform and document industrial truck inspections 

according to the manufacturer’s operating manual before the trucks are 

operated. 

20.10.2 Lift Trucks and Stackers. Post capacity plates on lift trucks and 

stackers within the operator’s view. When removable counterweights are 

used, the operator must not exceed the corresponding rated capacities. Do not 

make modifications or additions affecting the capacity or safe operation of the 

equipment without the manufacturer’s written approval or without making 

corresponding revisions to the capacity plates. 

20.10.3 Steering Knobs. Do not attach steering or spinner knobs to the 

steering wheel unless the steering mechanism is of a type that prevents road 

reactions from causing the steering wheel to spin. Mount the knob within the 

periphery of the wheel. 

20.10.4 Lifting Personnel. Do not use powered industrial trucks for hoisting 

personnel. 

20.10.5 Rail Car and Semi-Trailer Lifting. Take positive steps to prevent 

the movement of the car or trailer before using an industrial truck to load or 

unload a rail car or "over the road" trailer. Positively fasten ramps or dock 

plates in place to prevent accidental movement. 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-13 

20.10.6 Multiple Lifting. Do not lift a load using more than one industrial 

truck, unless a task specific job hazard analysis has been prepared and 

approved by the office head. The load lifted by each truck must not exceed 

80 percent of its rated capacity when used in conjunction with other trucks. 

20.10.7 Battery Charging. Recharge battery operated industrial trucks in 

designated areas that have been evaluated to ensure that ventilation is 

adequate to prevent the accumulation of flammable and explosive gasses; and, 

ensure there are no flammables or combustibles in the area. 

20.10.8 Operator Training. Train and evaluate employees before 

assigning them to operate powered industrial trucks. Train operators as 

specified in 29 CFR 1910.178(l)(3). Include the name of the operator, the 

date of the training, the date of the evaluation, and the identity of the person(s) 

performing the training or evaluation in the certification that the training and 

evaluation has been completed. A training program must consist of the 

following three parts: 

• Formal instruction that includes lectures, discussions, interactive 

computer learning, videos, or written material. 

• Practical, hands-on training that includes demonstrations performed by 

the trainer and practical exercises performed by the trainee. Conduct 

the training on the particular equipment the trainee will be operating 

on the job. 

• Evaluate the operator’s ability to handle the truck safely in the 

workplace. 

20.10.9 Frequency of Evaluation. Evaluate each operator’s performance 

periodically, but at least once every 3 years. 

20.10.10 Refresher Training. Training should include the following: 

• Surface conditions 

• Load stability 

• Lifting different types of loads 

• Putting down a load 

• Traveling tips 

• Hazardous locations 

• Activities and environments employee will be working in 

If one of the following occurs, provide refresher training: 

• The operator was involved in an accident or near miss incident. 

• The operator was observed operating the vehicle in an unsafe manner. 

• The operator was evaluated as needing more training. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-14 October 2009 

• Changes in the workplace could affect safe operation (such as a 

different type of paving, reconfigured storage racks, new layouts with 

narrower aisles or restricted visibility, or the operator is assigned to a 

different type of truck). 

20.11 Requirements for A-Frame Trucks 

20.11.1 Design. A-frame trucks and similar job-fabricated mobile hoisting 

equipment must conform to this subsection and applicable provisions in the 

section, "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." Make sure design 

is by a PE , and provide a written certification attesting that the equipment 

meets load and capability requirements. 

20.11.2 Safety Factor. Incorporate a minimum safety factor of 5 in the 

design of chains, standing parts or guy cables, boom supports, and other loadcarrying boom (A-frame) parts. Live or running cable reevings including 

boom hoist cables, shackles, hooks, and accessories must have a minimum 

safety factor of 3.5. 

20.11.3 Performance Inspection and Testing and Capacity Charts. Load 

test, at 110 percent of rated capacity, A-frame trucks and associated 

equipment, before use, annually thereafter, and after modification or repair. 

Install capacity charts on the equipment in full view of the operator. 

20.12 Requirements for Aerial Lifts 

Vehicle mounted and elevating rotating aerial devices must conform with the 

current edition of applicable ANSI/SAE standards. (See table 20-1.) 

• Modification. Aerial lifts may be modified for uses other than those 

intended by the manufacturer, provided the modification has been certified 

in writing by the manufacturer or by other qualified equivalent entities 

such as a testing laboratory to be in conformity with the applicable 

provisions of the governing ANSI standard and the requirements of this 

section. 

• Ladder trucks and tower trucks. Secure aerial ladders in the lower 

traveling position by a locking device on top of the truck cab and by a 

manually operated device at the base of the ladder before permitting the 

truck to travel. 

• Routine testing. Elevate the boom and check the aerial lift before each 

shift to ensure that all controls and safety devices are functioning properly. 

• Operators. Instruct and train operators in the operation of the type of 

equipment to which they are assigned. Allow only persons specifically 

authorized to operate aerial lifts to operate this type of equipment. 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-15 

• Safety harness. Employees working from an aerial lift must wear a safety 

harness and a lanyard attached to the basket, platform, or boom. They 

must stand on the floor of the basket or platform and must not sit or climb 

up on the guardrail or enclosure. Do not allow planks, ladders, or other 

devices to be used as work platforms. 

• Load limits. Post load limits specified by the manufacturer on the 

equipment and do not allow the limits to be exceeded. The date of the 

most recent load test must be posted or stenciled on the equipment. 

• Stabilization. Stabilize aerial lifts against movement or overturning in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

• Moving. Do not move aerial lift trucks, except for equipment specifically 

designed for that purpose, when the boom is elevated with people in the 

basket or on the work platform. 

• Controls. Provide both platform (upper) and lower controls for 

articulating booms and extensible boom platforms. Mount on the basket 

or platform within easy reach of the operator. Design lower controls to 

override the upper controls. Plainly marked controls as to their function. 

A person familiar with the machine lower controls must be on the ground 

in the vicinity of the aerial lift at all times when employees are elevated. 

Do not operate lower controls without permission from the employee in 

the lift, except in an emergency. 

• Insulated booms 

• Testing and certification. Test and certify any aerial device or component 

thereof that is represented by the manufacturer or installer as being 

insulated, as set forth in ANSI A92.2, Section 5, "Predelivery Testing and 

Inspection of New Aerial Devices." 

• Operation. Test, operate, and maintain the insulated aerial lifts, when used 

to work on or near high-voltage lines or equipment, in strict compliance 

with the manual or manuals provided by the manufacturer. The manual(s) 

must contain: 

• Descriptions, specifications, and capacities of the aerial device 

• Instructions for installing or mounting the device 

• Operating pressure of any hydraulic or pneumatic system that is part of the 

aerial device 

• Specific instructions regarding field testing, operation, and maintenance 

• Replacement part information 

• Manufacturer's Certification Test 

• Alteration. Do not insulate portions of the lift, basket, and boom in any 

manner that might reduce its insulating value 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-16 October 2009 

20.13 Requirements for Other Mechanized Construction Equipment 

Standards 

In addition to specific requirements set forth elsewhere in this manual, the 

requirements set forth in this subsection apply to all stationary mechanized 

equipment and drives. 

20.13.1 Guarding. Guard or isolate belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, 

spindles, drums, flywheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating, 

articulating or moving parts of equipment to protect people and property. 

Guarding must comply with the standards set forth in the current edition of 

ANSI B15.1, "Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission 

Apparatus." 

20.13.2 Working Platforms. Provide equipment with adequately designed 

working platforms, guardrails, and accessories so that operating and 

maintenance personnel will have a safe footing. 

20.13.3 Fuel Tanks. Locate fuel tanks shall be located so that spills or 

overflows can not contact the engine, exhaust, or electrical parts. 

20.13.4 Removal of Guards. Do not remove or render ineffective guards 

and safety devices except for necessary repairs or maintenance and then only 

after isolating the power. Replace the guards and safety devices and make 

them operable before restarting the equipment. 

20.13.5 Hot Surfaces. Either isolate, guard, or insulate hot surfaces of 

equipment, including exhaust pipes and steam pipes to prevent contact by 

personnel. 

20.13.6 Exhaust Fumes. Confine or control exhaust or discharges from 

equipment so that they do not endanger personnel or obstruct the operator's 

view. 

20.13.7 Rock Crushers. Screen rock crushers and similar equipment to 

prevent flying chips or rocks from injuring personnel in their vicinity. 

20.13.8 Vibrating and Rocker Screens. Equip vibrating or rocker screens 

with sides and baffles to prevent rock from falling from the screen. Where 

materials are being processed dry, install exhaust systems to remove the dust. 

20.13.9 Lockout/Tagout. Install power-driven equipment with provisions 

for locking out the controls or switches while under repair. Establish an 

effective lockout and tagout program in accordance with the section, "Control 

of Hazardous Energy," prescribing specific responsibilities and procedures to 

be followed by the person(s) performing the repair work. Lock out and tag 

this type of equipment during repair. 
Section 20—Mobile and Stationary 

Mechanized Equipment 

October 2009 20-17 

20.13.10 Certification. Certify the design of all major facilities and 

equipment built or provided by Reclamation or the contractor for 

Reclamation’s use, such as conveyors, materials handling systems, hoists, 

personnel hoists, manskips, and concrete forming support systems for major 

structures as structurally suitable for the use intended. The manufacturer or a 

PE must submit a written certification before the erection or use of such 

facilities and equipment on the job site. (Refer to relevant sections of this 

manual and specifications for information on additional requirements.) 

20.14 Requirements for Roads 

Design all roads, including haul roads, on the project site in accordance with the 

requirements contained in this section. Do not move any mobile equipment on 

any road, accessway, or grade unless the roadway widths, grades, and curves are 

constructed to safely accommodate the movement of the vehicle or equipment at 

the speeds that are appropriate. 

20.14.1 Haul Road Submittals. Submit the design of haul roads for 

acceptance by the office head before beginning road construction. 

20.14.2 Grades. The maximum allowable grade is 12 percent. Loading and 

dumping ramps may be exempted if all of the following conditions exist: 

• The ramp grade does not exceed the lesser of: 25 percent 

• Manufacturer's recommended maximum grade for the equipment 

• The maximum grade on which the machine, when loaded to the 

manufacturer's specified gross weight, can be safely stopped and held 

• Acceptable machine gear range and ground speed for safely 

descending and stopping on the ramp have been determined by field 

testing or provided by the manufacturer. 

• A JHA has been developed, and the office head has approved the 

action. 

20.14.3 Loading and Dumping Ramps. Loading and dumping ramps are 

defined for the purpose of this subsection as follows: 

• Sections of haul roads immediately adjacent to loading and dumping 

areas and the loading site. 

• Ramp sections that are less than 200 feet long, with a lower end that 

(1) either stops on level ground no closer than 200 feet from foot 

traffic or congested equipment areas, or (2) is not directly aligned to 

terminate into these areas. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

20-18 October 2009 

20.14.4 Curves. Design all curves to have open sight lines and as great a 

radius as practical. 

20.14.5 Embankment Protection. Construct or install berms, curbs, or 

barricades to prevent vehicles or equipment from overrunning the edge or the 

end of the embankment when a difference in road or working level exists. 

Construct berms or curbs to one-half the diameter of the tires of the largest 

piece of equipment using the roadway. 

20.14.6 Drainage. Design roadways to be constructed with a slight crown 

and with ditches provided to facilitate drainage. 

20.14.7 Posting Speed Limits. Post all roads, including haul roads, with 

curve signs and maximum speed limits. Limit vehicle speeds on curves to 

those which permit the vehicle to be stopped within one-half the minimum 

sight distance. Post all curves with acceptable speed limits. 

20.14.8 Single-Lane Haul Roads. Provide adequate turnouts on single-lane 

haul roads with two-way traffic. When turnouts are not practical, provide a 

traffic control system to prevent accidents. Advise all personnel of the traffic 

control system and operating restrictions. 

20.14.9 Two-Way Haul Roads. Whenever possible, use a right-hand traffic 

pattern on two-way haul roads. Install signs and traffic control devices to 

safely control travel when a right-hand traffic pattern is not feasible. 

20.14.10 Traffic Control Devices. The employer must install traffic control 

devices including signal lights, signs, and barricades, or provide trained traffic 

flagpersons to ensure the safe movement of traffic. Refer to applicable 

portions in the section, "Signs, Signals, and Barricades." 

20.14.11 Road Maintenance. Routinely maintain all roadways, including 

haul roads, in safe condition and eliminate or control dust, ice, and similar 

hazards. Whenever dust conditions exist, provide adequate dust control 

equipment on the jobsite and ensure that it is used to control the dust hazard. 
October 2009 21-1 

Section 21 

Hazardous Waste Site Operations 

21.1 Scope 

The requirements of this section apply to personnel and operations involved in 

investigation and remediation efforts associated with improperly disposed of 

hazardous, toxic, and/or radioactive wastes on Reclamation properties. 

Operations required by local, State, or Federal agencies will be conducted 

according to these standards. Voluntary (nonemergency) cleanup operations 

associated with classified hazardous wastes which may have environmental 

impact or public exposure fall within the scope of this standard. This section does 

not apply to activities involving the generation and collection of hazardous wastes 

which are being temporarily stored prior to proper disposal. 

21.2 Hazardous Waste Operations Safety and Health Program 

A written program will be immediately available, indicating the specific chain of 

command, roles, responsibilities, and authorities that govern hazardous waste 

operations falling within the scope of this standard. The program will reflect the 

necessary interface between general program and site-specific activities. A 

written program will exist at each organizational level where management wishes 

to exert consistent implementation of administrative procedures for specific 

hazardous waste site operations. 

21.2.1 The program will designate, in writing, a program manager who will 

have the responsibility and authority to direct all hazardous waste operations 

within the scope of this section. 

21.2.2 Each project that falls under the general category of "hazardous waste 

operation" will have a comprehensive work plan, as well as a site-specific 

safety and health plan, in place prior to commencing operations. 

21.2.3 The written program, work plan, and site-specific safety and health 

plan will specify the means to implement the requirements of these standards. 

21.3 Work Plan 

Each facility, site, or project will have a written work plan that reflects the current 

status of site characterization/analysis and the proposed objectives and tasks. 

21.3.1 The plan will identify the personnel requirements and methods to 

accomplish the identified tasks and objectives. 

21.3.2 For uncontrolled hazardous waste sites, characteristics such as 

location, size, boundaries, topography, accessibility, contaminant 

concentrations, and contaminant dispersion pathways must be included. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-2 October 2009 

21.3.3 The plan must specify the means for providing required information to 

employees, contractors, and others who enter the site. 

21.3.4 The plan must include the requirements for training, medical 

evaluations, and record- keeping not specified in site-specific documents. 

21.4 Site-Specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP) 

A HASP will be available to all employees at the worksite, which is inclusive of 

all organizations/firms/activities at the site. 

21.4.1 The plan must include a risk assessment for each identified hazard and 

associated task in the work plan and specify the requirements and procedures 

necessary to protect personnel according to all applicable standards. 

21.4.2 The plan must indicate specific expectations for meeting the standards, 

including programs for inspection, training, medical evaluation, 

contaminant/exposure monitoring, site control, decontamination, personal 

protective equipment (PPE), emergency response, confined space entry, and 

spill containment requirements associated with site operations. 

21.5 Hazard Evaluation and Control 

21.5.1 Evaluation of the site and operations will be conducted to identify the 

specific hazards and determine procedures appropriate for controlling 

exposure to those hazards. 

21.5.2 Controls must be implemented prior to initiating site activities. 

21.6 Hazard Communication 

21.6.1 Personnel must be informed of all identified risks and entry/work 

requirements before their entry into a contaminated or restricted area and/or 

before starting a hazardous activity covered by the requirements of this 

section. 

21.6.2 Briefings will be conducted at intervals necessary to ensure personnel 

are knowledgeable of the most current information and requirements of the 

site-specific HASP. 

21.7 Training 

All personnel must receive the proper training required for their assigned duties, 

the provisions of the program, project work plan, and HASP requirements 

associated with specific personnel assignments and this section. 
Section 21—Hazardous Waste 

Site Operations 

October 2009 21-3 

21.7.1 Personnel are prohibited from participating in, or providing onsite 

supervision of, site activities unless: 

a. They have been certified as having successfully completed the training 

requirements for their assigned duties and responsibilities, and 

b. Records of required training and certification have been established and 

are immediately available at the activity site. 

21.7.2 Trainers. The training must be conducted by a trainer meeting the 

qualifications of OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1910.120 (e)(5). Generally, 

trainer qualification is based upon the satisfactory completion of a training 

program for teaching the subject matter, or appropriate academic credentials 

and experience, combined with demonstrated competency in instructional 

skills and knowledge of the subject matter. 

21.7.3 The minimum training requirements are based upon OSHA 

requirements contained in 29 CFR 1910.120 (e). The courses established to 

meet these requirements must address both time and content standards. 

Course content and certification must be conducted according to the 

guidelines in Appendix E of 29 CFR 1910.120. 

a. An offsite hazardous waste orientation course with sessions totaling 

40 hours, plus 24 hours of supervised onsite training, will be required of 

all persons who: 

• Enter a site unescorted by trained site personnel 

• Enter restricted areas of a site 

• May be exposed to hazardous substances 

• May be exposed to other health hazards of a physical or biological 

nature 

• May be exposed to safety hazards of any kind 

• Are operators of equipment used in site assessment or remediation 

operations 

• Are required or expected to wear respiratory protection or PPE 

when needed 

• Disturb any materials within site boundaries 

• Directly supervise site employees 

Each year thereafter, 8 hours of supplemental training will be provided which 

augments the basic knowledge provided by the core course. 

b. All onsite managers and supervisors directly responsible for, 

or who supervise, personnel engaged in hazardous waste 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-4 October 2009 

operations must receive an additional 8 hours of training specific 

to the management responsibilities associated with the program elements 

and site requirements. 

c. All employees and their managers and supervisors working onsite who 

are restricted to duties that are fully characterized as nonhazardous and 

who are not expected to wear PPE or respond to emergencies under any 

circumstance must receive: 

• A minimum of 24 hours of off-site training from a certifying 

instructor, and 

• An additional 8 hours of supervised onsite guidance by an 

experienced person before assuming their full duties associated 

with the operations 

• Any personnel trained at this level who are reassigned to hazardous 

duties will be provided an additional 16 hours of training by a 

certifying instructor as required for the duties and hazard control 

measures utilized, as well as an additional 16 hours of supervised 

onsite guidance. 

21.8 Medical Evaluations 

Medical evaluations necessary to meet the requirements of these standards (such 

as respirator clearances or medical qualifications for specific hazardous jobs) 

must be provided before employees engage in activities requiring such services. 

Medical surveillance must be provided for employees exposed to or affected by 

site contaminants. 

21.8.1 All medical services required by this standard must be rendered under 

the direction of a board-certified occupational health physician. 

21.8.2 The evaluations must be provided in a timely manner. Timeframes for 

medical screening tests that may become necessary during operations will be 

specified in the medical surveillance plan before initiating onsite operations. 

21.8.3 All employees whose exposure to contaminants exceeds permissible 

exposure limits for 30 days or more per year will be placed in a medical 

surveillance program. Medical requirements for the respiratory protection 

program are separate, but may be included as part of the medical surveillance 

on the employee. 

21.8.4 All employees who wear a respirator must be medically evaluated 

according to the respiratory protection requirements of these standards and 

29 CFR 1910.134. 
Section 21—Hazardous Waste 

Site Operations 

October 2009 21-5 

21.8.5 All employees who wear respiratory protection for 30 days or more 

per year must be placed in a medical surveillance program. 

21.8.6 All employees who develop signs or symptoms of illness or exposure 

to hazardous substances, who become ill, or who are injured due to 

overexposure to contaminants must be placed in a medical surveillance 

program. 

21.9 Inspections 

Inspections will be conducted to assess the proper implementation of hazard 

control. Identified deficiencies and corrective actions must be documented and 

appropriate changes made to the plan(s) when necessary. 

21.10 Contaminant/Exposure Monitoring 

Air monitoring will be performed in a manner according to the provisions 

contained within these standards and as required within the program, work plan, 

or HASP. Minimum monitoring requirements are: 

21.10.1 Upon initial site entry, representative air monitoring will be 

conducted to identify any Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) 

condition or potential exposure above permissible exposure limits 

21.10.2. Periodic monitoring will be conducted when: 

• Work begins on a different portion of the site 

• Contaminants other than those previously identified are being handled 

• A different type of activity is initiated 

• An employees are handling leaking drums or containers, or working in 

areas with obvious liquid contamination 

• There are indications that potentially hazardous conditions exist 

21.10.3 Personal monitoring must be performed for personnel who are at 

high-risk, such as, but not limited to, those handling leaking drums, opening 

drums containing unknown or hazardous substances, conducting activities in 

areas with obvious liquid contamination, or during any activity where 

contaminated substances may be disturbed. 

a. After commencing activities, personal exposure monitoring will be 

performed for employees likely to have the highest exposures to hazardous 

substances and health hazards or when the airborne concentration of 

hazardous substances is likely to be above permissible exposure limits. 

b. A monitoring result that exceeds permissible exposure limits will be 

considered a representative exposure of all personnel performing similar 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-6 October 2009 

duties on the site. The exposure will be accordingly documented until 

personal monitoring has been accomplished for each person performing 

similar duties. 

21.10.4. Representative sampling will be accepted to document exposures of 

individuals engaged in similar activities. 

21.11 Site Control 

The site control program, as a part of the site-specific HASP, must include a site 

map that characterizes site work zones and identifies any established engineered 

site safety and health controls, specific work requirements, standard operating 

procedures, decontamination requirements, safe work practices, site 

communications including emergency plan, and provisions for medical 

emergency services. It will identify names of personnel responsible for site safety 

and health. 

21.12 Control of Worker Exposure to Hazardous Substances 

Engineering controls will be the primary means of control for occupational 

exposure to hazardous substances. Administrative controls, such as scheduling 

employee rotation as a method of controlling hazardous exposures associated with 

hazardous waste activities and operations, must not be used. 

21.13 Personal Protective Equipment 

PPE must be provided and used according to the provisions contained in these 

standards and as stipulated in the program, work plan, or HASP. PPE will be 

based on the performance characteristics of the equipment, relative to: 

• The requirements and limitations of the site 

• The task-specific conditions and duration 

• The hazards and potential hazards identified at the site 

21.13.1 Personal Protective Equipment. The PPE program, as part of the 

HASP, must address: 

• PPE selection based on site-specific hazards 

• The use and limitations of PPE 

• Activity duration 

• Maintenance and storage of PPE 

• Decontamination and disposal of PPE 

• PPE training and fitting 

• Equipment donning and doffing procedures 
Section 21—Hazardous Waste 

Site Operations 

October 2009 21-7 

• Procedures for inspecting equipment before, during, and after use 

• Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program 

• Medical considerations, including work limitations due to temperature 

extremes or physical stress 

21.13.2 When airline respirators are utilized in hazardous waste operations, 

an auxiliary self-contained escape air supply system will be incorporated. 

21.13.3 When totally encapsulating suits are used, they must be capable of 

maintaining positive air pressure. 

21.14 Communications 

All high-risk activities such as, but not limited to, remote or unobservable 

operations, waste drum opening/sampling, or confined space entry must be 

conducted in a way that ensures constant communication between the worker and 

site management team. 

21.15 Decontamination 

Decontamination must be conducted in a way that prevents the spread of 

hazardous contaminants and waste beyond the boundaries of the site of 

operations. Decontamination will apply to equipment and personnel. 

21.15.1 Procedures for all phases of decontamination will be developed, 

communicated to all personnel, and implemented before any employee or 

equipment may enter areas on a site where potential exposure to hazardous 

substances exists. Decontamination procedures, as a part of the site-specific 

HASP, will specify: 

• Decontamination methods and procedures for testing and evaluating 

their effectiveness 

• The number and layout of decontamination stations and 

decontamination equipment needed 

• Procedures to prevent contamination of clean areas and to minimize 

employee contact with hazardous substances or with contaminated 

equipment that has contacted hazardous substances 

• Procedures to take if the nonimpermeable clothing of personnel 

becomes wetted with hazardous substances 

• Methods for disposing of contaminated clothing and equipment 

• Methods for disposing of decontamination water and waste 

21.15.2 All personnel leaving a contaminated area must be decontaminated; 

all contaminated clothing and equipment leaving a contaminated area must be 

appropriately disposed of or decontaminated. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-8 October 2009 

21.15.3 Decontamination procedures must be monitored by the site safety and 

health officer to determine their effectiveness. If such procedures are found to 

be ineffective, site work will immediately cease and remain shut down until 

the situation has been corrected. 

21.15.4 Decontamination must be conducted in geographic areas that 

minimize the exposure of uncontaminated personnel and equipment to 

contaminated employees or equipment. 

21.15.5 All equipment and material used for decontamination must be 

decontaminated or disposed of properly. 

21.15.6 Decontamination of Personal Protective Equipment 

a. PPE will be decontaminated, cleaned, laundered, maintained, stored, 

and replaced as appropriate to maintain their effectiveness. 

b. Unauthorized employees will not remove PPE from change rooms. 

c. Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate 

protective clothing or equipment will be informed of the potential harmful 

effects of exposures to hazardous substances. 

d. Where the decontamination procedure indicates the need for regular 

showers and change rooms outside the contaminated area, or if cleanup or 

removal operations will require 6 months or more to complete, showers 

and change rooms must be provided. If temperature effects prevent the 

use of water, other effective means for cleansing must be provided and 

used. 

21.16 Emergency Planning 

Planning for site emergencies must be conducted before commencement of 

hazardous waste activities. 

21.16.1 Site emergency cleaning must address all anticipated emergency 

situations. 

21.16.2 The emergency response plan must be included in the HASP and 

address: 

• Personnel roles, responsibilities, and lines of communication 

• Emergency recognition and prevention 

• Safe distances and staging areas (safety zones) 

• Site security and control 

• Evacuation routes and procedures 

• Emergency medical treatment 

• Emergency alerting and response procedures 
Section 21—Hazardous Waste 

Site Operations 

October 2009 21-9 

• Critique of response and followup 

• Procedures for reporting incidents to Federal, State and local 

governments 

• Decontamination 

21.16.3 The emergency response plan will be a separate section of the HASP. 

21.16.4 The emergency response plan will be exercised regularly as part of 

the overall training program. 

21.16.5 The emergency response plan will be reviewed periodically and, as 

necessary, amended to keep it current with new or changing site conditions or 

operations. 

21.16.6 A personnel alarm system must be installed to notify personnel of an 

emergency condition, to stop work activities if necessary, to lower 

background noise in order to speed communications, and/or to begin 

emergency procedures. 

21.16.7 The emergency planning must be compatible and integrated with the 

disaster, fire, and/or emergency response plans of local, State and Federal 

agencies. 

21.17 Underground Storage Tank Removal 

Hazard analysis for the removal or disposal of an underground storage tank (UST) 

system must address: 

• Hazards of UST system contents and procedures for hazard control, 

including explosion prevention 

• Monitoring requirements and procedures 

• UST system draining, purging, and cleaning procedures 

• Excavation safety requirements and procedures for blocking free-standing 

tanks 

• Procedures and safety precautions for disassembly, removal, and disposal 

of system 

• Spill contingency planning 

• Proper handling of contaminated groundwater and soil 

21.18 Handling Drums and Containers 

21.18.1 Identification and Inspection 

a. Prior to handling or opening a drum or other container, effort will be 

made to identify their contents. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-10 October 2009 

b. Drums and containers will be inspected and their integrity must be 

ensured before moving them. 

c. Drums or containers that cannot be inspected before being moved 

because of storage conditions (e.g., buried beneath the earth, stacked 

behind other drums, stacked several tiers high, in a pile, etc.) must be 

moved to an accessible location and inspected prior to further handling. 

d. Unlabeled drums or containers will be assumed to contain hazardous 

substances and handled accordingly until the contents are positively 

identified and labeled 

21.18.2 Handling Requirements 

a. Before moving drums or containers, all employees exposed to the 

transfer operation must be warned of the potential hazards associated with 

the contents of the drums or containers and their handling and instructed to 

minimize handling as much as possible. 

b. Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program must be 

implemented to contain and isolate the entire volume of the hazardous 

substance being transferred. U.S. Department of Transportation specified 

salvage drums or containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent 

must be kept available and used in areas where spills, leaks or ruptures 

may occur. 

c. If drums and containers cannot be moved without rupture, leakage, or 

spillage must be emptied into a sound container, using a device classified 

for the material being transferred. 

d. Subsurface exploration will be used to estimate the location and depth 

of buried drums or containers. Soil or covering material must be removed 

with utmost caution to prevent drum or container rupture. 

21.18.3 Opening Drums or Containers 

a. Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the source of 

air supply must be protected from contamination and the entire system 

protected from physical damage. 

b. Personnel not involved in opening drums or containers must be kept at 

a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened. 

c. When personnel must work near or adjacent to drums or containers 

being opened, place a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work 

operation between the adjacent person and the drums or containers being 

opened to protect the employees in case of an accidental explosion. 
Section 21—Hazardous Waste 

Site Operations 

October 2009 21-11 

d. Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring 

equipment, and fire suppression equipment must be located behind the 

explosion-resistant barrier. 

e. When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres being 

present, material handling equipment and hand tools will be of a type to 

prevent sources of ignition (e.g., nonsparking tools). 

f. Drums and containers will be opened in a manner that allows excess 

interior pressure to be safely relieved from a remote location. Place 

appropriate shielding between the employee and the drums or containers, 

to reduce the risk of personnel injury. 

g. Personnel shall not stand upon, or work from, drums or containers. 

21.18.4 Transfer. Material handling equipment used to transfer drums and 

containers must be selected, positioned, and operated to minimize sources of 

ignition related to the equipment from ignitable vapors released from drums or 

containers. 

21.18.5 Precautions. The following precautions must be taken when drums 

or containers containing, or suspected of containing, shock-sensitive waste are 

handled. 

a. All non-essential personnel must be kept a safe distance from the area 

of transfer. 

b. Material handling equipment must be provided with explosive 

containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators 

from exploding containers. 

c. An employee alarm system, capable of being perceived above 

surrounding light and noise conditions, will be used to signal the 

commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities. 

d. Continuous communications will be maintained between the personnel 

in charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and 

health officer and the command center until the handling operation is 

completed. Communication equipment or methods which could cause 

shock sensitive materials to explode will not be used. 

e. Drums and containers under pressure (as evidenced by bulging or 

swelling) will not be moved until the cause of excess pressure is 

determined and appropriate containment procedures have been 

implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum. 

f. Drums and containers that contain packaged laboratory wastes will be 

assumed to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials until they have 

been characterized. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

21-12 October 2009 

21.18.6 Laboratory Waste Packs. When handling laboratory waste packs, 

the following precautions will be taken. 

a. Laboratory wastes will be considered shock-sensitive or explosive until 

they have been characterized. 

b. Lab packs will be opened only when necessary and then only by an 

individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and segregation 

of the containers within the pack, according to the hazards of the wastes. 

c. If crystalline material is noted on any container, handle the contents as 

a shock- sensitive waste until the contents are identified. 

21.18.7 Sampling. Sampling of drum and container contents must be done in 

accordance with a sampling procedure which is included in the HASP. 

21.18.8 Shipping and Transport 

a. Drums and containers must be identified as classified prior to 

packaging for shipment. 

b. Drum or container staging areas must be kept to the minimum number 

necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare them for 

transport. 

c. Bulking of hazardous wastes is permitted only after a thorough 

characterization of the material has been completed. 

21.18.9 Tank and Vault Procedures 

a. Tanks and vaults containing hazardous substances will be handled in a 

manner similar to that for drum and containers, taking into consideration 

the size of the tank or vault. 

b. Avoid entering tanks or vaults if possible. When entry is required, 

follow appropriate tank or vault entry procedures, as described in the 

HASP. 
October 2009 22-1

Section 22 

Excavation Operations 

The requirements contained in this section apply to all types of excavation 

operations, except tunnels and shafts, covered in the section, "Tunnel and Shaft 

Construction." This section sets forth Reclamation’s requirements for excavation 

operations. It covers the following specific areas: 

• General Requirements 

• Structural Footings 

• Excavation Protective Systems 

• Cofferdams 

22.1 General Requirements for Excavation Operations 

22.1.1 Preliminary Inspection. Before excavation, thoroughly inspect the 

site to determine conditions requiring special safety measures. Locate 

underground installations, such as sewer, telephone, gas, water, and electric 

lines. Make necessary arrangements with the utility company or owner to 

protect, remove, or relocate the underground installations. In such 

circumstances, excavate in a manner that does not endanger the underground 

installation or the employees engaged in the work. Protect utilities left in 

place by barricading, shoring, or suspending, or by other measures, as 

necessary. 

22.1.2 Protect the Public. Provide necessary barricades, walkways, lighting, 

public awareness programs, and posting for the protection of the public before 

the start of excavation operations. Do not start excavation operations on or 

near State, county, or city streets or accessways or other locations where there 

is extensive interface with the public or motorized equipment until after you 

have the following: 

a. Written permission to proceed, together with protective measures 

required from the authority having jurisdiction (authority). 

b. An extensive and detailed Job Hazard Analysis (JHA), using the 

authority’s instructions and these standards. 

c. A completed JHA, accepted by the designated authority. 

d. Proof that the JHA has been discussed with affected employees and the 

applicable protective measures are in place and functioning. 

e. Implementation of a public awareness program, when required by the 

contracting officer’s representative or the office head. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

22-2 October 2009 

22.1.3 Ingress and Egress. Provide safe access for employees, including 

installing walkways, ramps, stairs, and ladders. 

• A competent person, qualified in structural design, must design the 

structural ramps used for ingress or egress of equipment. Make sure 

the structural ramps are constructed according to the design. 

• To prevent displacement, connect the structural members of ramps and 

runways that are constructed of two or more structural members. 

• Make sure structural members used for ramps and runways are of 

uniform thickness. 

• Attach cleats (or other appropriate items used to connect runway 

structural members) to the bottom of the runway or in some other 

location or fashion that will not contribute to tripping. 

• Provide structural ramps used in lieu of steps with cleats or other 

surface treatments on the top surface to prevent slipping. 

Where employees must enter trenches more than 4 feet (1.22 meters) deep, 

provide stairs, ladders, or ramps at intervals of no more than 25 feet (7.62 

meters) of lateral travel. When access to excavations is more than 20 feet 

(6.10 meters) vertically, provide ramps, stairs, or personnel hoists. 

22.1.4 Lighting. Provide either natural or artificial lighting at excavation 

sites, borrow pits, and waste areas in accordance with illumination 

requirements. 

22.1.5 Personal Protective Equipment. Provide personal protective 

equipment in accordance with the specific requirements in the section, 

"Personal Protective Equipment" and make sure that employees use the 

equipment when it is needed. Protect employees exposed to occupational 

health hazards. Drillers and helpers must wear approved safety goggles or 

safety glasses with side shields, hearing protection, and safety shoes, as 

required. 

22.1.6 Removal of Surface Encumbrances. Before excavation, remove 

trees, brush, boulders, and other surface encumbrances that may present a 

hazard to employees. 

22.1.7 Inspections. Each day, make sure that a competent person does the 

following: 

a. Inspects excavations, the adjacent areas, and protective systems for 

warning signs of a situation that could result in possible cave-ins, 

indications of failure of protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or 

other hazardous conditions. The competent person must conduct an 

inspection before the start of work and as needed throughout the shift. 

Make inspections following every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing 

event.
Section 22—Excavation Operations 

October 2009 22-3

b. If the competent person finds: (1) evidence of a situation that could 

result in a cave-in; (2) indications of failure of protective systems; 

(3) hazardous atmospheres; or (4) other hazardous conditions, remove 

exposed employees from the hazardous area until the necessary 

precautions are made to ensure their safety. 

22.1.8 Structure Foundations and Footings. Except in hard rock, do not 

permit excavations below the level of the base of any foundation, footing, or 

retaining wall, unless the wall is underpinned and all necessary precautions 

are taken to ensure the stability of the adjacent walls. Install shoring, bracing, 

or underpinning designed by a qualified person if the excavation endangers 

the stability of adjacent buildings or structures. Have a qualified person 

inspect such supporting systems at least daily to ensure that the protection is 

adequate and effectively maintained. 

22.1.9 Vertical Cuts and Slopes. Protect employees working below or on 

slopes or cuts exposed to falling, rolling, or sliding rocks, earth, or to other 

materials in the following manner: 

a. Scaling. Effective scaling must be performed before exposure and at 

intervals necessary to eliminate the danger. 

b. Rock Bolting. Install rock bolting, wire mesh, or equivalent support 

when material continues to ravel and fall, even after thorough scaling. 

c. Barricades. Installing protective timber or wire mesh barricades at the 

top of the cut and at necessary intervals down the slope. 

d. Benching. Use benching, wherever practical, sufficient to retain 

falling material instead of barricades. 

e. Placing Personnel. Do not permit personnel to work above one 

another where danger of falling rock or earth exists. Protect personnel 

performing work on vertical cuts or slopes, where balance depends on a 

supporting system. Use appropriate fall protection. 

22.1.10 Supporting Materials. Make sure materials used for sheeting, 

piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, and underpinning are in good serviceable 

condition and timbers are sound and free of large or loose knots. 

22.1.11 Backfilled Excavation. Take special precautions in sloping or 

shoring the sides of excavations adjacent to a previously backfilled excavation 

or fill area. Do not use compacted backfill as backforms on slopes steeper 

than 34 degrees measured from the horizontal (1-1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical), 

unless specified by a design approved by a professional engineer (PE) and 

properly documented in writing. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

22-4 October 2009 

22.1.12 Groundwater. Control groundwater. Use a PE to plan and direct 

freezing, pumping, drainage, and other major control measures. Give full 

consideration to the existing moisture balances in surrounding soils and the 

effects on foundations and structures if the moisture balances are disturbed. 

Provide an emergency power source when continuous operation of 

groundwater control equipment is necessary. 

22.1.13 Surface Water. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. 

Use diversion ditches, dikes, dewatering sumps, or other effective means to 

control surface water. 

22.1.14 Crossovers. Provide walkways or bridges protected by standard 

guardrails where employees are required or permitted to cross over 

excavations. 

22.1.15 Undercuts. When necessary to undercut a slope or vertical cut, 

adequately support the residual material. Submit the undercutting method and 

support system to the contracting officer’s representative and be sure that it is 

accepted. If Reclamation employees conduct the work, submit the 

undercutting method and support system to the office head for acceptance 

before starting undercutting operations. 

22.1.16 Excavated Materials. Place excavated materials and retain at least 2 

feet (0.61 meter) from the edge of the excavation or at a greater distance when 

required to prevent hazardous loading on the face of the excavation. 

22.1.17 Protective Devices. Maintain guardrails and fences, barricades and 

warning lights, or other illumination systems from sunset to sunrise on 

excavations adjacent to walkways, driveways, and other pedestrian or vehicle 

thoroughfares. Effectively barricade or cover and post wells, subsurface 

exploration holes, pits, shafts, and all similar hazardous excavations. Backfill 

as soon as possible all temporary excavations at these locations. 

22.1.18 Stoplogs. When mobile equipment is permitted adjacent to 

excavations with steep slopes or cuts, install substantial stoplogs or barricades. 

22.1.19 Exposure to Vehicular Traffic. Provide employees exposed to 

public vehicular traffic with warning vests or other suitable garments marked 

with, or made of, reflectorized or high-visibility material. 

22.1.20 Equipment Operation. Provide equipment operating on loading or 

waste areas with an automatic backup alarm. Additionally, use a competent 

signalman to direct traffic when employees are on foot or otherwise 

endangered by equipment in dumping or waste areas. Do not give the 

signalman any other assignment that could interfere with signaling duties. If 

the equipment or truck cab is not shielded, the operator must stand clear of the 
Section 22—Excavation Operations 

October 2009 22-5

vehicle during loading. Do not allow excavating or hoisting equipment to 

raise, lower, or swing loads over workmen unless you provide effective 

overhead protection. 

22.1.21 Hazardous Atmospheres. In locations where oxygen deficiency or 

gaseous conditions are known or suspected, test the air in the excavation 

before the start of each shift or more often if directed by the designated 

authority. Maintain a log of all test results at the site. If the oxygen level is 

less than 19.5 percent, the concentration of flammable gas exceeds 10 percent 

of the lower flammable limit, or toxic materials exist at levels exceeding the 

Threshold Limit Value (TLV), take steps such as increasing the ventilation to 

control the hazards. 

22.2 Requirements for Excavation Protective Systems 

22.2.1 Sloping and Benching. Slope or bundle all excavations 5 feet 

(1.52 meters) or more deep in accordance with one of the systems outlined 

below. 

 a. For excavations less than 20 feet (6.10 meters) deep, the maximum 

slope is 34 degrees, measured from the horizontal (1-1/2 horizontal to 

1 vertical), unless one of the other options listed in this subsection are 

used. 

b. Determine the maximum allowable slope and benching systems 

according to the conditions and the requirements set forth in OSHA 1926, 

subpart P. 

c. Select the design according to written tabulated data, such as charts and 

tables. Maintain at least one copy of the tabulated data at the jobsite 

during excavation. Include the following tabulated data: 

• Identification of the parameters that affect the selection of a 

sloping or benching system drawn from the data 

• Identification of the limits of use of the data, including the 

magnitude and configuration of slopes determined to be safe 

• Explanatory information as may be necessary to help the user 

correctly select a protective system from the data 

• The PE who approved the data 

d. Use a PE to design the sloping or benching system. Maintain at least 

one copy of the design at the jobsite during excavation. Designs must be 

in writing and must include: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

22-6 October 2009 

• The magnitudes and configurations of the slopes that were 

determined to be safe for the particular excavation 

• The identity of the PE who approved the design 

22.2.2 Support Systems. Use a PE to design sheeting, sheet piling, bracing, 

shoring, trench boxes, and other methods of excavation and trench protection. 

Use qualified personnel to install excavation and trench protection. Designs 

must be in writing and must include the following: 

• A plan indicating the sizes, types, and configurations of the materials 

to be used in the protective system 

• The identity of the PE approving the design 

Maintain at least one copy of the design at the jobsite. 

22.2.3 Shoring Design Requirements. Design criteria support systems or 

shoring must meet or exceed the minimum requirements set forth in this 

subsection and in OSHA 1926, subpart P. Do not subject braces and diagonal 

shores in a timber shoring system to compressive stresses in excess of the 

values given in the following formula: 

S = 1300 – D

20L

maximum ratio 

D

L = 50 

where: 

L = length, unsupported, in inches 

D = least dimension of timber, in inches 

S = allowable stress of cross section, in pounds per square inch 

22.2.4 Shoring, Sloping, Benching, Trench Box Illustrations. Figures in 

OSHA 1926, subpart P, tentatively illustrate the basic shoring, sloping, 

benching, trench box, and shield requirements contained in this subsection. 

22.2.5 Trench Boxes and Shields. The designated authority may authorize 

portable trench boxes, sliding trench boxes, or shields instead of required 

sloping, benching, or supporting methods when: 

a. A PE designs the boxes or shields, which provides protection 

equivalent to shoring and sheeting for the same condition and conform to 

requirements of OSHA 1926, subpart P. 

b. The boxes or shields are constructed and maintained to design 

standards. 
Section 22—Excavation Operations 

October 2009 22-7

c. A job hazard analysis covering operation and maintenance of the boxes 

or shields has been developed, and affected employees have been trained 

and instructed on the effective use of the protective equipment. 

d. Backhoes, excavators, and cranes used to move trench boxes and 

shields meet the applicable requirements in the section on "Hoisting 

Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." 

22.2.6 Benching. Benching excavation procedures may be used to 

accommodate operations such as pipelaying (see 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P, 

Appendix B). 

22.2.7 Placing Shoring, Trench Boxes, or Shields. Carry shoring, trench 

boxes, or shields along with the excavation, and do not omit them where the 

depth of trench or soil conditions require shoring or bracing. Where a 

backhoe or ditching machine is used, place the shoring box or shield as close 

as possible to the lower end of the boom. Excavations may extend 2 feet 

(0.61 meter) below the bottom of shoring, trench boxes, or trench shields, 

provided the protective systems are designed to resist the forces calculated for 

the full depth of the trench and there are no indications, while the trench is 

open, of a possible loss of soil from behind or below the bottom of the support 

system. 

22.2.8 Removal of Support. Backfilling and removing trench support 

systems must progress together from the bottom of the trench. Release jacks 

and braces slowly. In unstable soil, use ropes or other safe means to remove 

the braces from the surface after the employees have left the trench. 

22.2.9 Cross Braces and Jacks. Place cross braces and trench jacks in true 

horizontal position and secure them to prevent sliding, falling, or kickouts. 

22.3 Requirements for Structure Footings 

22.3.1 Casing Requirements. Provide a steel casing or support system of 

sufficient strength to support the earth walls and prevent cave-ins in small 

diameter footings, including bell-bottom footings over 4 feet (1.22 meters) 

deep, that employees must enter. Provide the casing or support system the full 

depth, except for the bell portion of bell footings. 

22.3.2 Access Requirements. Provide fixed or portable ladders for access. 

Every employee entering the footing must wear a lifeline securely attached to 

a shoulder harness. Man the lifeline from above and separate it from any line 

used to raise or lower materials. 

22.4 Requirements for Cofferdams 

22.4.1 Controlled Flooding. Provide for controlled flooding of the work 

area in any design if overtopping of a cofferdam is possible. Devise an 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

22-8 October 2009 

evacuation plan, including installation of warning signals and emergency 

exits, to safely evacuate employees and equipment from the work area. 

22.4.2 Walkways and Guardrails. Where employees are permitted on 

cofferdams, install safe walkways protected by guardrails. 

22.4.3 Exit. Provide a rapid means for employees who work on cofferdams 

to exit with their equipment. 
October 2009 23-1 

Section 23 

Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

This section sets forth requirements for tunnel and shaft construction. It covers 

the following specific areas: 

• General Requirements 

• Emergency Provisions 

• Ventilation 

• Air Quality 

• Dust Control 

• Internal Combustion Engines 

• Noise Control 

• Fire Prevention and Control 

• Excavation Operations 

• Ground Support 

• Transportation and Haulage 

• Shafts 

• Tunneling in Soil 

• Compressed Air Work 

23.1 General Requirements for Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

In addition to complying with the safety requirements set forth in this section and 

other parts of these standards, comply with applicable provisions of the contract 

when excavating and constructing tunnels and shafts. Begin underground-related 

work only after an acceptable safety program or a detailed supplementary 

submittal specific to underground operations has covered all aspects of the 

operation. 

23.1.1 Employee Identification. Entrances to all underground facilities must 

have a check-in and checkout system that provides the contractor with an 

accurate record of each person underground. The system must be able to 

identify each individual and general location. General locations include 

heading, train crew, track crew, maintenance area, storage area, survey 

stations, etc. Additionally, when underground, all employees must carry or 

wear a positive means of identification, such as a metal disk or tag. 

23.1.2 Illumination. Underground lighting and illumination intensities must 

adhere to the current ANSI/IES RP-7, "Recommended Practice for Industrial 

Lighting" and UL 924, "Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment." Use 

nonmetallic light fixtures and support lighting conductors on insulators 

located on the side of the tunnel or shaft opposite the firing line. Use 

acceptable portable lighting equipment within 50 feet of any underground 

heading during explosives handling. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-2 October 2009 

23.1.3 Electrical Equipment. A professional engineer (PE), knowledgeable 

in underground wiring practices, must design and certify the underground 

electrical distribution system to meet good practice and applicable standards. 

Install and maintain all electrical equipment, including the section on 

"Electrical Safety," to meet applicable requirements. Permit only dry-type 

transformers underground and ensure they are protected from possible 

damage. Separate or insulate power lines from air and waterlines, metal 

ducts, telephone lines, and blasting lines. 

23.1.4 Bonding and Grounding. Ground and bond air and water piping, 

metal vent pipe, rails, and similar conductive devices at the portal or shaft 

head and at no more than 1,000-foot intervals. 

23.1.5 Communications. Install a telephone system or an equivalent 

powered communication system between the tunnel heading and the portal, 

the shaft bottom and shaft head, and the first-aid station. Keep the powered 

communication systems independent of the tunnel or shaft power supply, and 

install the powered communication systems so that failure or disruption of any 

one station will not disrupt the operation of any other station. Test 

communication systems at the beginning of each shift and more frequently, 

when necessary, to ensure reliability. An employee must not work alone 

unless that employee is either within voice communication distance of another 

employee or has an appropriate powered communication system to obtain 

instructions and emergency assistance. 

23.1.6 Blasting. Blasting and explosive-handling operations must conform to 

the requirements in the "Blasting" section. 

23.1.7 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees entering underground 

workings must wear, as a minimum, hardhats, appropriate eye protection, and 

foot protection. Employees entering wet areas must wear rubber footwear; 

underground type rain gear; and eye, face, and head protection as described in 

the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." When applicable, provide 

employees with other personal protective equipment, and ensure they wear 

them. 

23.2 Emergency Provisions 

23.2.1 Evacuation Plan. Develop and post emergency evacuation plans, 

including provisions for rescue equipment, at the portal or shaft head. Instruct 

employees in the emergency procedures. 

23.2.2 Self-Rescuers. Provide employees and others with self-rescuers, 

approved by National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 

and/or Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), or make them 

available at headings, shaft bottoms, and all other underground work areas. 

Provide at least one readily available self-rescuer for each employee and 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-3 

visitor. Ensure that employees and others have satisfactorily completed 

certified training before going underground. Visitors instructed in operating 

the self-rescuer and accompanied by a trained employee are exempt from this 

training requirement. Maintain self-rescuers in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s requirements. 

23.2.3 Emergency Hoists. Provide an emergency personnel hoist for shafts 

more than 50 feet deep. Design the hoist so that, as a minimum, the load hoist 

drum is powered in both directions and a brake automatically applies upon 

power release or failure. Provide the emergency hoist in addition to the 

primary hoist. 

23.2.4 Rescue Crews. As part of the emergency plan required in the section 

on "Emergency Planning," develop an emergency plan covering the possible 

emergencies requiring the use of a rescue crew. The plan must include the 

equipment, training, and organization of the rescue crews. 

a. Provide at least two rescue crews of at least five men each for tunnel 

and shaft operations employing 25 or more employees at one time 

underground. One crew must be on the jobsite or within 1⁄2 hour travel 

time away from the portal. The other crew must be within 2 hours travel 

time. 

b. Organize and train at least one crew of at least five employees as a 

rescue crew, or, for smaller jobs, arrange in advance with a locally 

available rescue service. Locate the rescue crew or rescue service on the 

jobsite or within 1⁄2 hour travel time from the portal. 

c. Thoroughly instruct new crew members upon assignment to the rescue 

crew and conduct refresher training for the full crew at least every 

6 months. 

d. Instruct and train rescue team members to perform rescue operations; 

use and care for oxygen breathing apparatus; and use firefighting 

equipment. Provide oxygen-breathing apparatus unless, in the 

development of the emergency plan, analysis specifically indicates that the 

use of self-contained breathing apparatus is sufficient. Keep breathing 

apparatus in good repair and ready for use at all times. Maintain a 

sufficient supply of spare breathing apparatus, replacement parts, and 

regenerating material or air cylinders. 

23.2.5 Emergency Lighting. Provide each employee and visitor entering 

underground workings with an MSHA-approved portable hand or cap lamp 

and make sure the employee or visitor carries it. Providing hand or cap lamps 

does not take the place of meeting lighting requirements. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-4 October 2009 

23.2.6 Designated Person. At least one designated person must be on duty 

above ground when personnel are underground. The designated person must 

be familiar with operating features of the lighting and ventilation system and 

the procedures for obtaining emergency service. The designee must remain 

within contact range of the communication system annunciator. 

23.3 Requirements for Ventilation 

Mechanically ventilate all areas of tunnels, shafts, and other underground 

workings with clean, breathable, nonrecirculated, outside air. Place the 

ventilation system in operation before employees enter any underground workings 

and keep the system in operation until all personnel have left the area serviced by 

the system. 

23.3.1 Ventilation System Design Requirements. Submit the system(s) 

design criteria, specifications, and appropriate drawings before acquiring or 

installing the system. Incorporate the following specific design features in all 

ventilation systems: 

a. Mechanically induce all airflows. Do not provide required air 

quantities by natural ventilation methods. 

b. Construct primary ducts and fans of noncombustible metallic materials. 

You may use short, noncritical sections of expandable-type ducting in 

secondary systems. 

c. Use class 1, division 1 electric motors, fans, drives, and auxiliary 

equipment, including wiring, starters, and controls. Design, install, and 

maintain the system in explosion-proof condition and make sure it is 

capable of operating in an explosive atmosphere. 

d. Ensure the noise levels of ventilation fans does not exceed 90 decibels 

when measured at the closest point of employee exposure. 

e. Ensure system airflows, secondary systems excepted, are reversible 

from a surface location. Incorporate a control system in the reversing 

feature so it is not necessary to rewire fans or electrical circuits to 

accomplish the reversing sequence. 

f. Design the primary ventilation systems to operate in the exhausting 

mode. 

g. Maintain primary duct system inlets within 3 duct diameters of the 

tunnel face or shaft bottom when operating in exhaust and within 10 duct 

diameters of the tunnel face or shaft bottom when operating on blow. In 

conventional drill and blast tunnels, you may need to install a 

supplemental ventilation system to maintain minimum ventilation rate to 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-5 

the tunnel face or shaft bottom during all portions of the excavation cycle. 

"Blow Joes" or similar-type recirculating devices do not meet this 

requirement. 

h. Heat or cool the ventilation air as necessary to ensure air temperatures 

at work sites are between 40 oF and 100 oF. 

i. Design ventilation system capacities (cubic feet per minute) to be the 

greater of: 

1. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required for all 

MSHA-approved diesel engines operating underground. 

2. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required for all non 

MSHA-approved equipment. Non MSHA-approved diesel equipment 

must meet appropriate requirements in this section. 

3. The total rate (cubic feet per minute) required to control airborne 

contaminants or toxic and flammable gas or vapor within prescribed 

limits or values specified or referenced in this section and in the 

"Occupational Health" section. 

4. The rate (cubic feet per minute) required to maintain a minimum air 

velocity of 100 feet per minute (feet per minute) over the gross bore 

area of all sections of the underground workings. 

23.3.2 Air Volume Measurements. Develop and implement a procedure to 

maintain design airflows in all sections of underground workings. The 

procedure, as a minimum, must require the following: 

a. Determining airflows immediately after any system installation or 

modification that could significantly affect airflows (e.g., adding new fans, 

repairing fans, or changing duct arrangements). 

b. Continuously monitoring airflows in primary ventilation systems with 

direct readout instruments containing low-air volume alarms. 

c. Determining airflows in congested tunnel areas (e.g., headings and near 

rapid excavation machines) by pitot tube traversing of the duct system 

supplying or exhausting air from the area. (Refer to American Conference 

of Governmental Industrial Hygienists publication, "Industrial 

Ventilation," for acceptable equipment and methods for air volume 

determinations.) 

d. Maintaining all data obtained by measurement, including the date, 

place, time, instrumentation, calculations, results, and the names of test 

personnel, on the surface and make it available for review. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-6 October 2009 

23.4 Requirements for Air Quality 

Underground air quality must meet the following specifications: 

(a) Oxygen concentrations must be between 19.5 percent and 22.0 percent. 

(b) Carbon monoxide concentrations must not exceed 25 parts per million 

(0.0025 percent). 

(c) Carbon dioxide concentration must not exceed 5,000 parts per million 

(0.5 percent). 

(d) Nitrogen dioxide concentration must not exceed 3 parts per million 

(0.0003 percent). 

(e) Hydrogen sulfide must not exceed 10 parts per million (0.001 percent). 

1. Conduct tests for hydrogen sulfide in the affected areas every 4 hours 

whenever hydrogen sulfide levels exceed 5 parts per million 

(0.0005 percent). 

2. Use a continuous sampling hydrogen sulfide indicator with alarm to 

monitor the affected work area if hydrogen sulfide levels exceed 10 parts 

per million (0.001 percent). 

3. Take steps to increase ventilation to reduce the concentration if the 

concentration of hydrogen sulfide exceeds 10 parts per million 

(0.001 percent) time-weighted average for an 8-hour period. 

(f) Do not allow methane gas to exceed 20 percent of the lower explosive 

limit: 

1. Whenever 5 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane 

or other flammable gases is detected, take steps to increase the ventilation 

rate or other steps to lower the methane concentration. 

2. Whenever 10 percent of the lower explosive limit for methane or other 

flammable gases is detected, evacuate all employees except those 

necessary to eliminate the hazard, and disconnect electrical power except 

for explosion-proof pumps and ventilation equipment. 

(g) Do not allow other flammable gases or vapors to exceed 10 percent of the 

lower explosive limit. 

(h) Do not allow other airborne contaminants, including dust, to exceed the 

limits prescribed in the section on "Occupational Health." 

23.4.1 Quantitative Sampling of Underground Environments. A 

competent person must conduct the quantitative sampling of underground 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-7 

environments. A competent person is one who through education, experience, 

and training can, using acceptable scientific instruments and methods, 

determine the quality of air in underground environments. Conduct 

quantitative sampling as follows: 

a. While excavating the tunnel at least once each 4 hours and before 

reentry into the face area after each blast, test the environment in the face 

area: first for oxygen concentration and then for flammable gas or vapors, 

carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and nitrogen dioxide. 

b. At least once during each work shift change, test all working 

environments for oxygen concentration, flammable gas or vapors, carbon 

monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and other applicable gases 

or vapors. 

c. Sample all working environments near dust-producing operations for 

applicable airborne particulates within 10 days after underground 

operations begin, and at 90-day intervals thereafter, or within 10 days 

following major changes in tunnel excavation methods or major 

modifications to ventilation systems. Within 10 days following the 

sampling date, furnish a full report of the sampling method and analysis 

and an evaluation of the environmental conditions to the affected 

employees. 

d. Log and file environmental sampling data, including procedures, 

equipment, personnel, dates, and results at a surface location and make it 

available for review. 

23.4.2 Specialized Instrumentation. In addition to quantitative sampling 

requirements, install specialized direct reading instruments to determine the 

concentration of flammable gases and vapors as follows: 

a. Equip all rapid excavation machines with a multisensor continuous 

flammable gas and vapor detector designed to shut down excavation 

operations when gas or vapor concentrations reach 10 percent of the lower 

explosive limit. Locate one sensor at the dust shield near the conveyor 

belt opening. Locate another sensor at the operator’s station and a third 

sensor in the primary duct of the exhaust mode ventilation system. 

b. In conventional (drill and blast) operations, install an automatic 

multisensor continuous gas detector near the tunnel heading or shaft 

bottom. Equip the unit with visual and audio alarm components capable 

of alerting employees working at the heading or bottom that flammable 

gas or vapor concentrations have exceeded 10 percent of the lower 

explosive limit. Locate one sensor in the primary duct of an exhausting 

ventilation system and at least one more sensor in the general tunnel area 

within 30 feet of the face. Locate all sensors installed in the tunnel proper 

as near the crown as practical. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-8 October 2009 

c. Machine excavation operations, other than those described in paragraph 

a. above, require a similar detection system, a system with one sensor 

effectively placed to detect flammable gas and vapor concentrations near 

the cutter head. 

23.4.3 Suspensions of Operations. Suspend all underground operations and 

remove all employees from underground workings whenever flammable gas 

or toxic gas or vapor concentrations exceed the acceptable levels set forth in 

this section on "Air Quality." Prohibit reentry, except for rescue operations, 

until authorized in writing by the contracting officer or representative, or 

office head. Do not provide written authorization until the following occurs: 

a. The employer has engaged the services of a PE experienced in gaseous 

tunneling or mining operations. 

b. The PE has, after onsite investigation and testing, developed a written 

detailed procedure for safely reentering the underground workings and 

resuming operations. 

c. The procedure complies with all requirements of these standards and 

the regulations of Federal and State entities having jurisdiction. 

23.5 Requirements for Dust Control 

Carry out all drilling and excavation operations in a manner that meets the 

requirements of this subsection and control airborne dust concentrations within 

limits prescribed in the section on "Occupational Health." Quantitative testing is 

required for underground environments and operations to ensure effectiveness of 

dust control methods. 

23.5.1 Drilling. Equip rotary and percussion drills with water or chemical 

dust-control systems or other control systems. 

23.5.2 Machine Excavation. Equip tunnel boring machines or other 

excavating machines with an effective dust-control system(s) before 

installation. Make sure the system can control the dust concentrations within 

the specified safe hygienic limits. Routinely maintain and test the system to 

ensure its effectiveness. 

23.5.3 Muck Piles. Keep muck piles wet to reduce dust concentrations. 

23.6 Requirements for Combustion Engines 

Do not use internal combustion engines, other than approved diesel-powered 

equipment, underground. Provide written approvals or certifications before 

taking the equipment underground. Do not consider equipment approved until it 

meets one of the following provisions: 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-9 

(a) The diesel-powered equipment has been approved or certified under the 

provisions of MSHA regulations 30 CFR Part 32 or Part 36 (formerly 

schedules 24 and 31). When applicable, obtain a permit from the State entity 

having jurisdiction. 

(b) The employer certifies the diesel-powered equipment is equivalent to 

MSHA-approved equipment and meets the following requirements: 

1. The engine’s fuel injection system allows adjustments to the 

mechanism controlling maximum fuel injection only by breaking a seal or 

by altering the design. 

2. At maximum fuel air adjustment under normal operating conditions 

and within the rated output range of the engine, make sure the undiluted 

exhaust gas does not contain more than 2,500 parts per million carbon 

monoxide and no more than 2,000 parts per million oxides of nitrogen. 

3. Dilute the exhaust gas with air before discharging it into the 

surrounding tunnel atmosphere. Ensure that the discharged mixture of 

exhaust gas and air doesn’t contain more than 100 parts per million carbon 

monoxide, 25 parts per million oxides of nitrogen, 10 parts per million 

aldehydes, and 2 milligrams per cubic meter of exhaust gas particulate 

emissions. 

4. Cool engine exhaust to less than 160 oF before releasing it into the 

surrounding tunnel atmosphere. 

23.6.1 Ventilation Requirements. Ensure that ventilation (cubic feet per 

minute) incident to the use of diesel-powered equipment underground meets 

the requirements of this section, including the following: 

a. The cumulative MSHA-approved ventilation rate for all diesel-powered 

equipment must be used for underground ventilation. 

b. For non-MSHA-approved equipment, a ventilation rate (cubic feet per 

minute) adequate to dilute all gaseous exhaust contaminants to below the 

prescribed limits or values specified or referenced in the "Occupational 

Health" section and to reduce the particulate emissions to below 

1 milligram per cubic meter. In no case must the required ventilation rate 

be less than 150 cubic feet per minute multiplied by the manufacturer’s 

rated horsepower of all engines when operating at maximum fuel/air ratio. 

23.6.2 Maintenance and Testing. Inspect and maintain diesel equipment in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Design, operate, and 

maintain diesel equipment in conformance with MSHA 30 CFR Parts 36, 

75.1909, and 1914. Maintain records of inspections and maintenance. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-10 October 2009 

23.7 Requirements for Noise Control 

Assess and control noise associated with underground operations, using the 

section on "Occupational Health." 

23.8 Requirements for Fire Prevention and Control 

In addition to the requirements set forth in the section, "Fire Prevention and 

Protection," the following requirements apply to all underground operations. 

23.8.1 Heating. Do not use liquified petroleum gas (LPG) and natural gas 

heaters underground. 

23.8.2 Gasoline, Diesel, and LPG. Do not permit gasoline or liquefied 

petroleum gases underground. Do not permit more than 1 day’s supply of 

diesel oil underground. Do not pipe diesel fuel or combustible liquids from 

the surface to below ground. 

23.8.3 Welding and Cutting. Comply with the section, "Hand Tools, Power 

Tools, Pressure Vessels, Compressors, and Welding," as well as this 

paragraph when welding and cutting underground. You may use acetylene 

and methyl acetylene propadiene stabilized gas underground for welding, 

cutting, and hot work. Do not permit underground more than the amount of 

fuel gas and oxygen necessary for work under progress for that shift. Before 

and continuously during welding or cutting, a competent person must 

determine that the atmosphere does not exceed the flammable gas, vapor, or 

oxygen limits. 

23.8.4 Lubricants. Keep oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground in 

tightly sealed containers in fire-resistant areas at least 300 feet (91.44 meters) 

from explosive magazines and 100 feet (30.48 meters) from shaft stations, 

inclined passageways, and major electrical installations. Install in the storage 

area only electrical lighting systems that are approved for class I, division 

2 locations. 

23.8.5 Hydraulic Fluids. Use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluids approved 

by a recognized authority, such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Factory 

Mutual, in hydraulically actuated machinery and equipment, unless the 

equipment is protected by a fire protection system. 

23.8.6 Belt Conveyors. Provide fire extinguishers of at least 2-A:40-B:C 

units at the head and tail pulleys and at 300-foot intervals along the belt line. 

Install a device on the conveyor drive system that automatically disconnects 

power to the drive unit if the conveyor stalls. 

23.8.7 Portal Structures. Erect fire-resistive structures within 100 feet of a 

tunnel portal or shaft entrance. Place flammable material storage areas at least 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-11 

200 feet away from the portal or shaft entrance. Do not permit combustible or 

flammable material within 100 feet of the portal or shaft entrance, main fan 

installation, or in a location where, in case of a spill or leak, the material will 

flow into the portal area. 

23.8.8 Fire-Suppression Systems for Diesel-Powered Equipment. Equip 

all diesel-powered equipment operated underground with all of the following: 

a. A minimum of one 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical fire extinguisher that is 

accessible from ground level. 

b. Factory Mutual or other nationally recognized independent testing 

laboratory must specifically approve a dry chemical, pre-engineered, 

fixed-nozzle-type fire-suppression system for the respective service and 

the potential hazard. The design, installation, operation, and maintenance 

of the system must be in accordance with the testing laboratory’s 

recommendation. The system, where applicable, must conform to 

National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 17, "Dry Chemical 

Extinguishing System," and the requirements of the authority having 

jurisdiction. Manual system actuators must be accessible from ground 

level and within reach of the operator when seated in the operating 

position. 

23.9 Requirements for Excavation Operations 

Before the start of excavation operations, train employees in the safety 

requirements for the method of excavation to be used: include the equipment to 

be used, the ground support systems, and the material handling systems in the 

training program. 

23.9.1 Drilling Operations. 

a. Examination and Scaling. Before starting the drill cycle, examine the 

face and lifters for misfires. If found, remove them before drilling. Don’t 

drill lifters through loose rock or water. Inspect the heading, including the 

face, for loose rock, and scale it before mucking and drilling. Protect 

employees engaged in these activities from dislodgements by location, 

ground support, or other equivalent means. 

b. Equipment Inspection. Inspect drilling equipment each shift and 

correct defects affecting safety before using the equipment. 

c. Drill Jumbos. On jumbo decks, more than 6 feet high, install 

removable guardrails with pipe uprights and chain handrails or equivalent 

protection on the open sides and back. Also provide safe access to the 

deck and cover the decks with solid, nonslip decking. When moving 

jumbos, do not permit riders on the deck unless they are assisting the 

operator. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-12 October 2009 

1. Chock jumbos to prevent movement while employees are working 

on them. 

2. Maintain walking working surfaces of jumbos to prevent slipping, 

tripping, and falling. 

d. Moving Drills. Secure drill steel, tools, mast, and other equipment in a 

safe position when moving a drill to another area. Provide receptacles or 

racks for drill steel stored on drill jumbos. 

e. Drill Masts. Do not permit employees on the drill mast when the drill 

bit is in operation. 

f. Column Drills. Firmly anchor drills supported on columns before 

operation and retighten the drill frequently during operation. 

g. Startup Warning. Before the drill cycle begins, warn the employees 

working below the jumbo deck. 

h. Lifting Material and Equipment. Provide a mechanical means to 

raise heavy materials and equipment to the top decks of jumbos more than 

4 feet high. 

i. Airhose. Secure all airhose with an inside diameter greater than 

0.5-inch at each connection and at the drill with clips and wire rope, chain 

lashings, or an equivalent safety device. 

23.9.2 Mechanical Excavation. 

a. Mechanical Hazards. Sound an audible warning before excavating or 

conveying machinery. Equip excavating machines with dead-man 

controls. Provide adequate guarding where workers are exposed to 

moving parts or to hydraulic lines operating at temperatures greater than 

160 oF. 

b. Lockout. In addition to requirements found in the section, "Hazardous 

Energy Control Program," provide a means to lock out all power sources 

from the mechanical excavating equipment. Where employees may need 

to work between the face and the cutter head tunnel-boring machines, 

provide the employees with a positive mechanical block to prevent 

movement of the cutter head and a provision to lock out the power. 

c. Examination. Thoroughly examine the heading before starting 

excavation equipment. 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-13 

23.10 Requirements for Ground Support 

23.10.1 Tunnel Portals. Keep rock faces above and adjacent to portal areas 

thoroughly scaled, and remove all loose or overhanging rock. Provide chain 

link fabric on rock faces that are subject to spalling or raveling. Provide a 

fire-resistive protective canopy at all tunnel portals. The protective canopy 

must project at least 15 feet from the portal face and must withstand falling 

earth or rock. 

23.10.2 Inspection and Scaling. At least once a shift, a competent person 

must inspect tunnels and shafts where employees are working. Scale and 

support them as required. Provide scaling bars and maintain them in good 

condition. A competent person must inspect the entire tunnel, including roof 

and walls at least weekly. Maintain weekly inspection records on the surface. 

23.10.3 Loose Ground. Remove or support loose rock and earth. 

Employees scaling or installing supports must work from supported areas or 

protect them with spiling, crown bars, shielding, or other equivalent protective 

systems. 

23.10.4 Rock Bolting. A PE must design rock bolt support systems. Make 

torque meters and torque wrenches available where rock bolts are in use. 

Make sure a competent person establishes torque testing and retightening 

intervals, on the basis of rock conditions and existing vibration sources. 

23.10.5 Damaged Tunnel Supports. Immediately repair or replace damaged 

or dislodged tunnel supports of any description. Whenever possible, install 

new supports before removing the damaged supports. 

23.10.6 Anchorage. Design and install all sets, including horseshoe-shaped 

or arched rib steel sets, with the bottoms sufficiently anchored to prevent 

movement. Install lateral bracing between sets to stabilize the support. 

23.10.7 Wood Supporting Structures. Do not use timber supports or wood 

lagging. 

23.11 Requirements for Transportation and Haulage 

The employer must develop a complete set of operating rules for all types of 

haulage equipment. Provide a copy of these rules and discuss them with all 

employees before they go underground. Do not implement operational changes 

affecting the rules until you change the rules. 

23.11.1 Inspection. Maintain all haulage equipment in safe operating 

condition. A qualified person must inspect it at the beginning of each shift. 

Correct equipment defects affecting safe operation before using the 

equipment. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-14 October 2009 

23.11.2 Rail Haulage Systems 

a. Locomotives. In addition to ensuring that locomotives meet the 

requirements of this section, equip them with: (1) a braking system, 

capable of stopping and holding a loaded train on any section of track; 

(2) headlights, a backup light, an audible warning device, a continuous 

revolving flashing amber light that is visible in all directions; (3) seats for 

the operator and all passengers; (4) adequate platforms and handholds for 

the train crew; (5) rerailers and jacks; (6) dead-man controls; and 

(7) falling object protection in accordance with the latest revision of 

29 CFR 1926, Subpart S, "Tunnels and Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, and 

Compressed Air." 

b. Man-Haul Units. (1) Totally enclose man-haul units, except for 

doors, small windows, and ventilation openings; (2) equip man-haul units 

with seats for all passengers, adequate access devices, and safety chains in 

addition to safety coupling devices; (3) use man-haul units only to 

transport personnel, their personal equipment, and small secured tools. 

Man-haul trips must consist of an engine and man-haul car(s) only. Pull 

man-haul cars when occupied. Personnel who are incidentally transported 

between shift changes may sit on locomotive seats or in specially 

equipped, empty muck cars that have adequate headroom. Engines must 

pull muck cars carrying personnel, and muck cars must be equipped with 

safety chains. 

c. Haulage Cars. Equip mine dump cars with automatic safety 

couplings. Equip cradle or bottom dump cars with a positive-locking 

device to prevent accidental dumping. Provide and use tiedown chains or 

bumper blocks to prevent overturning of cars dumped by hand. 

d. Tracks. Install and maintain rails in a manner that prevents shifting or 

excessive settlement. Anchor rails to prevent unsafe separation, and gauge 

them during laying operations and regularly while in use. Provide berms, 

bumpers, blocks, safety hooks, or equivalent means to prevent overtravel 

or overturning at dumping areas. 

e. Operations. Load and secure materials to be hauled to prevent sliding 

or dislodgement. Carry only small hand tools, lunch pails, or similar light 

items on top of locomotives, provided that the top of the locomotive is 

designed or modified to retain them while traveling. Chock, block, or set 

the brakes on parked equipment to prevent inadvertent movement. 

23.11.3 Nonrail-Type Haulage Systems. Nonrail-type haulage systems 

must comply with the following applicable requirements: 

a. Rubber-tired or crawler equipment and operations must comply with 

applicable requirements of this section and the section, "Mobile and 

Stationary Mechanized Equipment." 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-15 

b. Conveyor systems equipment and operation must conform with 

applicable requirements of this section and the section, "Hoisting 

Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors." 

23.12 Requirements for Shafts 

In addition to other applicable provisions of this section, the following 

requirements apply to the excavation of vertical and inclined shafts. Support 

shafts more than 5 feet deep if employees must enter. A competent person must 

determine the method of support. 

23.12.1 Access. Provide all shafts with a protected manway designed to 

permit safe entrance to and exit from the shaft bottom. Hoisting systems 

designed, installed, operated, and maintained as set forth in this section may 

transport personnel. 

23.12.2 Guards. Protect the shaft opening with totally enclosed perimeter 

guarding that is as high as a standard guardrail. Slope the ground adjacent to 

the top of the shaft collar away from the shaft to prevent liquids from entering 

and construct an effective barrier to prevent mobile equipment from 

accidentally entering the shaft. 

23.12.3 Hoisting Systems. Do not use cranes, derricks, or similar equipment 

as the primary hoisting system to raise or lower personnel. Only use cranes, 

derricks, or similar equipment meeting the requirements of this section for an 

emergency hoisting system. Do not use cranes to raise or lower muck or 

concrete buckets or similar devices to remove excavated material or to place 

concrete, except in shafts less than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep. You may use 

cranes to raise and lower construction materials or equipment that cannot be 

safely handled by the hoisting system. Cranes must conform with applicable 

provisions of the "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors" section 

and all of the following requirements: 

• Equip primary and secondary hoisting lines with planetary or worm 

gears, torque convertors, automatic braking systems, or other 

equivalent systems that prevent the loadlines from being placed in a 

free wheeling or neutral position controlled only by a manual brake or 

dogs (hooked or U-shaped device used for gripping or holding heavy 

devices). 

• Equip hoisting lines with: (1) an anti-two-blocking device or a twoblock damage prevention feature; and (2) a limit switch to prevent 

overtravel at the bottom of the shaft. Keep at least two full wraps of 

wire rope on the drum at all times. 

• A competent person must inspect the crane at the beginning of each 

shift and each time it is set up at the work site. Give the crane a full 

cycle operational test lift before initial use at the shaft site and each 

time it is reset at the site. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-16 October 2009 

a. General Requirements of the Primary Hoisting System. Install a 

stationary hoisting system meeting the requirements of this subsection and 

applicable provisions of the "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and 

Conveyors" section, and ANSI A10.22, "Safety Requirements for RopeGuided and Non-Guided Workmens’ Hoists," at all shaft sinking 

operations 75 feet (22.86 meters) or more deep. A PE must design all 

stationary hoisting systems. Follow the more stringent standard if there 

are conflicts between these and referenced standards. 

b. Specific Requirements of the Primary Hoisting System. The 

stationary hoisting system must meet applicable ANSI standards, the 

requirements of the State having jurisdiction, and the following specific 

requirements: 

1. Personnel Hoisting. You may use the primary hoisting system to 

hoist personnel in attached cages or manskips that meet the 

requirements of referenced ANSI standards or in buckets suspended 

beneath crossheads operating on rail or rope guides, provided: (1) the 

sides of the bucket are steel and at least 4 feet high, and at least 

1/16 inch thick; (2) you use emergency chains, slings, or double clevis 

pins between the lower end of the hoisting rope and the bucket to 

prevent the bucket from falling in the event of ring bolt or clevis pin 

failure; (3) you provide a bonnet that covers the top to protect it from 

falling rock or other objects; (4) the bonnet is the equivalent of two 

steel plates 3/16 inch thick, sloping toward each side and arranged to 

permit safe egress from the bucket; (5) the speed of the personnel 

platform does not exceed 200 feet per minute; and (6) governor 

controls set for 200 feet per minute are installed in the control system 

and used during personnel hoisting. 

2. Hoist Motors. Design the hoist motor so that the load powers up 

and down through the gears. There must be no friction gearing or 

clutch mechanism by which the motor or other power source can be 

disconnected from the hoist drum. When the control is brought to the 

"stop" position, or should the motor stop, the load must stop and 

remain in the stopped position. 

3. Hoist Controls. Design the hoist control to return to the "stop" 

position when the operator removes his/her hand from the control 

lever. Whenever the control lever is in the stop position, the brakes 

must automatically apply and the power must cut off. All hoist 

controls and the emergency power cutoff must be within reach from a 

single operating position. 

4. Guides. Equip shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep with 

guide rails or guide cables to prevent the cage or bucket from swaying. 
Section 23—Tunnel and Shaft Construction 

October 2009 23-17 

When sinking shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep, keep the 

guide rails or cables as close as possible to the bottom of the shaft. 

Maintain rail guides within one rail length of the bottom. Provide a 

safe means of access from the bottom landing to the bottom of the 

shaft. When sinking shafts less than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep, 

guide cages, skips, and buckets that may swing, bump, or snag against 

shaft sides or other structural protrusions by fenders, rails, ropes, or a 

combination of those means. Guide cages, skips, and buckets in all 

completed shafts by ropes or rails for the full length of their travel. 

5. Broken-Rope Safety. Equip cages, skips, or buckets operating on 

guides or guide cables in shafts more than 75 feet (22.86 meters) deep 

with a broken-rope safety device, or equivalent, that will stop and hold 

a weight that is 150 percent of rated capacity in the event of a hoisting 

cable failure. 

6. Limit Stops. Equip hoists with approved-type limit switches that 

will automatically stop the cage or bucket at the limits of travel. 

7. Communications. Provide hoist operators with a closed-circuit 

communications system to each landing station. Locate a speakermicrophone so that the operator can communicate with individual 

landing stations during the hoist. 

8. Performance Inspections and Tests. Following installation and 

before use, at 6-month intervals thereafter, and after modification or 

repair of the critical components, inspect each hoist and load test it 

under the direction of the PE or a qualified person certified by the PE 

to conduct such inspections and tests. Maintain a comprehensive 

report detailing the required inspections and test procedures and 

results. The PE, or his or her designee, must sign and maintain the 

report. Include a broken rope drop test to verify that safety clamps 

function properly and that the guide ropes/rails, their supports, and the 

bucket/cage are able to withstand the imposed load. 

(Note: ANSI A10.5, "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists," under 

"Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and Disposal," details one 

method for conducting such tests.) 

Further, performance test the hoist with a test load of 125 percent 

through all limits of travel to ensure satisfactory operation of limit 

switches, speed indicators, braking systems, and controls. 

9. Periodic Inspection and Tests. A competent person must visually 

check all hoisting machinery equipment, anchorages, and hoisting rope 

at the beginning of each shift and during hoist use, as necessary. A 

competent person must check each safety device at least weekly during 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

23-18 October 2009 

hoist use to ensure suitable operation and safe condition. Periodic 

inspections and tests must conform to the PE's recommendations. 

c. Overhead Protection. Do not hoist or lower material or tools while 

personnel are working at the bottom of a shaft unless a barrier of adequate 

strength is installed to protect the personnel from falling objects or 

material. Do not lower any load, cage, skip, or bucket directly to the 

bottom of a shaft when personnel are working there. All such equipment 

must stop at least 15 feet above the bottom of the shaft and remain there 

until the signal person at the bottom of the shaft gives the signal to lower. 

23.12.4 Suspended or Movable Work Platforms. Design, inspect, and test 

suspended or movable work platforms in accordance with applicable 

provisions of this section and the section, "Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, 

and Conveyors." The term "platform" in this subsection is synonymous with 

the terms skip or cage, in referenced subparagraphs, subsections, or standards. 

23.12.5 Small-Diameter Shafts. Provide small-diameter shafts, such as 

manholes, wells, or test pits that employees must enter, with a steel casing, 

concrete pipe, timber cribbing, or other support adequate to retain surrounding 

earth. 

23.12.6 Inspection. Following a blast, check the walls, ladders, supports, 

blocking, and wedges to determine if they have loosened. If they are loose or 

unsafe, make repairs before continuing work in the shaft. 

23.13 Requirements for Tunneling in Soil 

23.13.1 Support. When excavating by conventional methods, do not extend 

the excavation more than 2 feet in advance of the tunnel supports. When 

using continuous mining machines, keep the support within 4 feet of the face 

or shield. Do not permit employees under unsupported or unshielded sections 

of the tunnel. 

23.13.2 Voids. Fill, block, or brace voids behind ring beams, liner plates, or 

other supports to prevent caving. 

23.13.3 Design of Support. A PE must design support systems for tunnels 

excavated in soil. 

23.14 Requirements for Compressed-Air Work 

The employer must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.803, 

"Compressed Air," when operations involve work in a compressed-air 

environment. 
October 2009 24-1 

Section 24 

Blasting Operations 

This section discusses blasting operations, with specific focus on the following 

areas: 

• General Requirements 

• Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation 

• Transporting Explosives 

• Transporting Explosives Underground 

• Storing Explosives 

• Handling Explosives 

• Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents 

• Wiring operations 

• Firing explosives 

• Inspection following a blast 

• Misfires 

• Using safety fuses 

• Using detonator cord 

• Underwater blasting 

24.1 General Requirements for Blasting Operations 

In addition to the requirements of this section, the transportation, handling, 

storage, and use of explosives are subject to provisions of ANSI A10.7 - Safety 

Requirements for Transportation, Storage, Handling, and Use of Commercial 

Explosives and Blasting Agents; 29 CFR 1910.109 - Explosives and Blasting 

Agents; 29 CFR 1926, Subpart U - Blasting and the Use of Explosives (1926.900 

to 1926.914); and 27 CFR Part 55 - Commerce in Explosives. 

24.1.1 Competent Supervision. A blasting supervisor must be designated to 

direct and supervise all blasting operations. This includes the transportation, 

handling, storage, and use of explosives and blasting agents. The supervisor must 

provide written records of past experience to the employer as evidence of 

competency. 

24.1.2 Qualifications. 

a. Personnel. Employees who transport, store, handle, or use explosives 

or blasting agents must be at least 21 years of age. They must be able to 

give and understand written and verbal instructions. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-2 October 2009 

b. Blasters. Blasters must be qualified through training, knowledge, and 

experience in transporting, storing, handling, and using explosives, and 

have a working knowledge of State and local laws and regulations which 

pertain to explosives. Blasters must hold a Federal, State, or local license 

or certificate, have proof of formal training attended within the last 

5 years, or three recommendations from past employers or explosives 

manufacturers testifying to the blaster’s knowledge and ability to perform 

in a safe manner the type of blasting that will be required. 

24.1.3 Blasting Plan. Submit a comprehensive blasting plan before the start of 

blasting operations and have it approved. The blasting plan may be submitted as 

part of the overall site safety plan, as required by the "Contractor Requirements" 

section of these standards (for contract operations) or as a supplementary plan to a 

Job Hazard Analysis. Explosives must not be transported onto the jobsite before 

the plan has been approved. The plan must identify proposed methods and 

procedures for conforming with referenced standards and regulations, and it must 

include the following information: 

• Method and equipment for transporting explosives and detonators 

• Type and location of storage facilities 

• Type and quantity of explosives and detonators 

• Primer assembly procedure and location 

• Employee training programs 

• Provisions for protecting people, structures, and private and public 

property 

• Provisions for developing and distributing a daily blasting plan 

covering hole diameter, spacing, loading, and delay patterns 

• Provisions for disposal of explosives, blasting agents, and associated 

materials 

24.1.4 Security and Inventory. Secure and protect explosives from theft. 

Maintain an accurate running inventory of all explosives stored at the jobsite. 

Such records must be available. Promptly report any loss or theft to the 

appropriate authorities. 

24.1.5 Notifications. Notify the owners and operators of the facility and take all 

necessary precautions for the safe control of the blasting operations before 

beginning blasting operations in the immediate vicinity of buildings, public roads, 

overhead powerlines, utility services, or similar facilities. At least 24 hours 

before blasting in the vicinity of gas, electric, water, communications, or other 

utilities is to begin, the blasting supervisor must notify appropriate utility 

representatives. 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-3 

24.1.6 Smoking Restrictions. Prohibit smoking, firearms, matches, open flame 

lamps, fire, heat-producing devices, and sparks in or near explosive storage sites 

or in areas where explosives are handled, transported, or used. 

24.1.7 Thunderstorms. Discontinue the handling or use of explosives during 

the approach and progress of a thunderstorm. All employees must leave the 

danger areas and seek a place of safety when these conditions are present. Install 

an approved lightning warning device capable of detecting atmospheric 

conditions that could produce lightning on the jobsite. Warning devices must be 

acceptable to the COR or office head before installation. 

24.1.8 Damage Control. Take precautions to minimize ground vibration, 

airblast, and flyrock. Include a damage control section in the site blasting plan 

that addresses these issues. Use blasting mats where flyrock damage is possible. 

Use modern blasting seismographs and methods to measure ground vibrations and 

air blast levels at designated structures or locations. Unless otherwise specified, 

control the blasting so that ground vibrations and airblast levels do not exceed the 

following: 

Ground Vibration Limits1

Peak Particle Velocity (inches per second) 

Type of Structure2

At Low Frequency3

(<40 Hertz) 

At High Frequency 

(>40 Hertz) 

Modern homes, drywall 

interiors 0.75 2.0 

Older homes, plaster on 

wood lath construction for 

interior walls 

0.5 2.0 

Reference: Siskind, D.E., M.S. Stagg, J.W. Kopp, and C.H. Dowding, “Structure Response and 

Damage Produced by Ground Vibration from Surface Mine Blasting.” U.S. Department of the 

Interior, Bureau of Mines, Report of Investigations RI 8507, 1980. 1

The graph in Appendix B of the above reference may be used in lieu of the limits listed in this 

table. 2

For precarious structures not listed in the table, use the limits for older homes; for all other 

structures not listed in the table, use the limits listed for modern homes. 3

All spectral peaks within 50 percent amplitude of the predominant frequency must be analyzed. 

Airblast Limits 

Instrumentation Air Blast (decibels) 

0.1 hertz high-pass system 134 

2 hertz high-pass system 133 

5 or 6 hertz high-pass system 129 

C-slow (for events not exceeding 2 seconds’ duration) 105 

Reference: Siskind, D.E., V.J. Stachura, M.S. Stagg, and J.W. Kopp, “Structure Response 

and Damage Produced by Airblast from Surface Mining,” U.S. Department of the Interior, Bureau of 

Mines, Report of Investigations RI 8485, 1980. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-4 October 2009 

24.1.9 Warning Signs. Post warning signs at access points to blasting areas. 

24.1.10 Destruction of Explosives. Deteriorated or damaged explosives, 

blasting agents, blasting supplies are prohibited. Destroy and remove these and 

all excess explosives from the site in accordance with the specific written 

instructions of the manufacturer. 

24.1.11 Empty Explosive Containers. Destroy empty boxes and combustible 

packing materials which have contained explosives in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s disposal procedures. If disposal is through burning, all personnel 

must remain at least 100 feet from the burning site once the material has been 

ignited and until no visible flames or smoke have been detected for 1 hour. 

24.1.12 Fire. If a fire begins that involves explosives, or where the danger of the 

fire contacting explosives is imminent, do not fight the fire. All personnel must 

seek safe shelter; guard the fire area to prevent intruders. 

24.2 Radio and Electromagnetic Radiation 

Take adequate precautions to prevent accidental discharge of electric blasting 

caps from current induced by radar, radio transmitters, powerlines, and similar 

sources of electromagnetic radiation. 

24.2.1 Mobile Radio Transmitters. Mobile radio transmitters or cellular 

telephones within 100 feet of electric blasting caps or delays not in their original 

containers are prohibited unless de-energized and effectively locked. 

Post warning signs at least 36 by 42 inches in size, stating BLASTING ZONE—

TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIOS AND CELLULAR TELEPHONES, on all public 

roads within 1,000 feet of blasting operations, using electronic detonators. 

24.2.2 Non-electric Firing Systems. If it is not possible to observe the safe 

clearance distances from radio frequency (RF) transmitter stations, as set forth in 

Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME) publication 20, "Safety Guide for the 

Prevention of Radio Frequency Radiation Hazards in the Use Of Electric Blasting 

Caps," use nonelectric firing systems to blast. Electrical detonators must not be 

stored or used within the IME-specified distances of a transmitter station. 

24.3 Requirements for Transporting Explosives 

Transporting explosives by air, water, or on public highways must comply with 

the provisions of US Department of Transportation Regulations contained in 

46 CFR 146-149 - Water Carriers; 49 CFR 171-177 Subchapter C - Hazardous 

Materials Transportation; and 49 CFR 390-397, "Motor Carriers." 

24.3.1 Vehicles. Vehicles used to transport explosives must conform to the 

following requirements: 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-5 

a. They must be in good repair, with all electrical wiring completely 

protected and securely fastened to prevent short circuits. 

b. They must have tight floors. Cover any exposed spark-producing metal 

with wood or other nonsparking material to prevent contact with 

containers of explosives. 

c. Do not load them beyond rated capacity, and secure the explosives to 

prevent shifting or dislodgment. 

d. Transport explosive materials in open-bodied motor vehicles only if 

they have been loaded into a portable magazine that is securely fastened to 

the truck bed. Never transport explosive materials in open-bodied motor 

vehicles that depend on a fire-resistant tarpaulin cover for protection. 

e. Mark vehicles transporting explosives with reflectorized signs on both 

sides and the front and rear with "EXPLOSIVES" in red letters. Make 

letters at least 4 inches high on a white background or placarded in 

accordance with 49 CFR Part 172, Subpart F - "Placarding." 

f. Equip them with two or more fire extinguishers with a rating of at least 

2-A:40-B:C. 

g. Inspect them daily before use to ensure that the vehicle is in proper 

condition for safe transportation. The inspection must determine that fire 

extinguishers are charged and ready; electric wiring is protected and 

fastened to prevent short circuiting; chassis, motor, pan, and underbody 

are reasonably clean and free of oil and grease; fuel tanks and lines are 

secure and have no leaks; tires are in serviceable condition with proper 

inflation; and lights, brakes, horns, wipers, etc., are functioning properly. 

24.3.2 Vehicle Operators. Motor vehicle operators transporting explosives must 

be at least 21 years old and be properly licensed drivers. Drivers must be 

physically fit, careful, capable, and reliable. Drivers must not be unlawful users 

of, or addicted to, alcohol, narcotics, or dangerous drugs. Drivers must be 

familiar with applicable local, State, and Federal laws and regulations governing 

the transportation of explosive materials. Transportation on Federal highways or 

other public roads requires a commercial driver's license. 

24.3.3 Caps and Detonators. Do not transport blasting caps and detonators with 

other explosives unless the blasting caps or detonators are in a closed metal 

storage container that has at least a 2-inch wood lining. Such containers must be 

at least 2 feet away from other explosives. 

24.3.4 Flammable Materials. Do not transport spark-producing tools, carbides, 

oil, matches, firearms, acids, storage batteries, oxidizing or corrosive compounds, 

or flammable materials with explosives. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-6 October 2009 

24.3.5 Parking. Attend vehicles containing explosives at all times. Do not park 

loaded vehicles, even if attended, near any bridge, tunnel, or other structure that 

may be occupied or locations where people may congregate or assemble. 

24.3.6 Fueling. Do not refuel vehicles while they are carrying explosives. 

24.3.7 Smoking Restrictions. Employees who transport, handle, or use 

explosives must not smoke or carry on their persons or in the vehicle matches, 

lighters, firearms, ammunition, or flame-producing devices of any description. 

24.3.8 Riders. Permit only the authorized driver and helper to ride on trucks 

transporting explosives or detonators. 

24.4 Requirements for Transporting Explosives Underground 

In addition to the requirements set forth in the previous subsection, 

"Requirements for Transporting Explosives," the provisions of this subsection 

apply to underground transportation of explosives. 

24.4.1 Hoists. Notify the hoist operator before transporting explosives or 

blasting agents in a shaft conveyance. Do not permit any person to ride a hoist or 

shaft conveyance transporting explosives or blasting agents. Do not transport 

detonators while transporting explosives. 

24.4.2 Powder Cars and Trucks. Convey explosives and blasting agents only 

in specifically built or equipped insulated powder cars or truck-mounted 

containers approved by the State entity having jurisdiction. Mark powder cars 

with reflectorized signs on both ends and sides with "EXPLOSIVES" in letters at 

least 4 inches high against a sharply contrasting background at all times that there 

are explosives in the car. Cover or remove the signs when no explosives are 

present. Do not transport explosives or blasting agents on a locomotive; at least 

two car lengths must separate the locomotive from the powder car. Pull (do not 

push) powder cars. 

24.4.3 Common Transport of Detonators and Explosive Materials. 

Physically separate compartments for transporting both detonators and explosive 

materials in the same conveyance or car by at least 24 inches or by a solid 

partition at least 6 inches thick. Do not transport detonators and other explosive 

materials together in any shaft-conveyance. 

24.4.4 Transportation of Personnel and Explosives. No personnel, other than 

the transport operator, helper, and the individuals handling the explosives may 

ride transports carrying explosives. 

24.4.5 Truck Transportation. Trucks transporting explosives underground 

must meet other applicable provisions of these standards and have their electrical 

systems checked weekly to detect possible electrical hazards. A written record of 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-7 

such inspections must be maintained. Auxiliary lights on truck beds powered by 

the truck's electrical system are prohibited. Do not store explosives in trucks. 

24.4.6 Transporting Explosives to the Face or the Loading Area. Take only 

the quantity of explosives or blasting agents estimated necessary for the blast to 

the face or loading area. Take explosives or blasting agents to the loading area 

only after the drilling has been completed and the holes are ready to be loaded. 

Remove surplus explosives and blasting agents from the area before wiring up the 

blast. 

24.4.7 Makeups. Make up primers and delays at the face or loading area, unless 

a primer-makeup plan is submitted and approved. 

24.5 Explosives Storage 

24.5.1 Requirement. Store explosives and related materials in approved 

magazines and in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Bureau of 

Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms as set forth in 27 CFR 55, "Commerce in 

Explosives." Magazines must be bulletproof, rodent-resistant, weather-resistant, 

ventilated, and constructed to the standards of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, 

and Firearms, or the Institute of Makers of Explosives. 

24.5.2 Magazine Location. Locate explosives magazines in accordance with the 

State and local laws. The COR or office head must approve the proposed sites 

before location or construction. Consider contractor and Government offices, 

shops, etc., to be inhabited buildings when determining magazine locations, 

quantities, and safe distances. 

24.5.3 Notifications. Notify local authorities, such as law enforcement agencies 

and fire departments, of the type, planned quantity, and storage location on the 

site before bringing explosives onto a site for storage. 

24.5.4 Detonators. Do not store blasting caps, electric blasting caps, detonating 

primers, and primed cartridges in the same magazine as other explosives or 

blasting agents. Locate detonator magazines at least 100 feet from magazines 

containing other explosives or blasting agents, if unbarricaded, and at least 50 feet 

away, if barricaded. 

24.5.5 Combustible Materials. Do not permit smoking or open flame within 

100 feet of storage magazines. Remove vegetation and combustible material 

within 25 feet of all magazines. 

24.5.6 Security. Securely lock magazines at all times except to inspect or move 

explosives. Maintain an inventory of all storage and withdrawal of explosives. 

Inspect magazines storing explosives at least every 7 days to ensure that there has 

been no unauthorized entry or removal of explosives. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-8 October 2009 

24.5.7 Posting. Post areas around magazines with "EXPLOSIVES" signs. Place 

the signs so that a bullet passing through the sign will not strike a magazine. 

24.5.8 Storage. Store explosives in their original containers. Store containers of 

explosives with the top side up as designated on the container. Use the oldest 

stock of explosives first. 

24.5.9 Maintenance. Promptly remove debris and combustible material from 

magazines. When magazine floors become stained with explosives, clean them in 

accordance with the explosive manufacturer’s instructions. 

24.5.10 Transfer In and Out. Provide for the safe transfer of explosives in and 

out of magazines, including providing ramps or walkways, as necessary. 

24.5.11 Storage Underground. Do not permanently store explosives 

underground. Temporary storage must comply with the following requirements: 

a. Powder Cars. Restrict temporary storage to limited supplies stored in 

specially designed powder cars located at least 1,000 feet from the face or 

blasting area. Do not permit transformers, storage of flammable materials, 

welding, open flame, smoking, and other ignition sources within 100 feet 

of the powder car. 

b. Posting and Lighting. Designate the storage area or siding by a red 

light visible in all directions, and post both ends of the powder car with a 

luminous sign, stating "EXPLOSIVES - NO SMOKING, FLAME, OR 

WELDING WITHIN 100 FEET." 

c. Protection. Locate or barricade the powder car to protect it from 

damage. Design siding or car-passes, when used for temporary storage, to 

protect the powder car from accidental entry by other cars and to prevent 

accidental entry of the powder car to the main line. The protective devices 

installed are subject to approval of both the employer and the State entity 

having jurisdiction. 

24.6 Requirements for Handling Explosives 

24.6.1 Handling Explosives. Handle explosives carefully. Do not drop, throw, 

or slide them. Carry detonators, primers, and other explosives in separate 

containers when transporting them manually. When they are not in their original 

containers, place them in a suitable nonmetallic container for manual 

transportation. 

24.6.2 Removal from Containers. Remove explosives from their original 

containers only as needed for immediate use. Use only nonsparking tools or 

devices to open such containers. Dispose of empty containers and packing in 

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, or promptly burn them in 

an approved location. 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-9 

24.7 Loading Explosives and Blasting Agents 

24.7.1 Planning. Plan and schedule excavation so that drilling and loading 

operations will not conflict. Do not permit loading within 50 feet of drilling 

operations. Do not permit any activity, other than that which is required for 

loading holes, within 50 feet of loaded holes or holes that have the explosives in 

place, ready to load. A qualified blaster must supervise loading operations. 

24.7.2 Drilling. Do not drill in an area already blasted until examining 

remaining "bootlegs" (holes that do not detonate full depth) for unexploded 

charges, as well as the total area, to make sure no unexploded charges remain. Do 

not insert drills, picks, or bars into bootlegs, even if examination fails to disclose 

explosives. 

24.7.3 Loading Areas. Make boreholes ready for loading, and remove 

equipment and tools not used for loading from the area before delivering the 

explosives to the site. Isolate the loading areas with appropriate signs or 

temporary barricades to prohibit access by unauthorized people. While the bare 

holes are being loaded with explosives, exclude all personnel, other than those 

involved in the loading of boreholes, from the blast site. 

24.7.4 Boreholes. Make boreholes large enough to permit loading of cartridges 

and explosives without forcing. Prime, load, tamp, and fire as promptly as 

possible with a minimum of exposure to personnel. 

24.7.5 Tamping. Tamp only with wooden or plastic tamping poles without 

exposed metal parts. Nonsparking metal connectors on jointed poles are 

permissible. Seat cartridges by even, steady pressure, and do not tamp primers. 

24.7.6 Priming. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations in priming 

cartridges. Make primers up only at the loading area and in quantities limited to 

the number required for a single round of blasting. 

24.7.7 Stemming. Stem all blastholes in open work with noncombustible 

material to the collar or to a point that will confine the charge. 

24.7.8 Extraneous Electricity. Prohibit electric conductors, electric equipment, 

and all sources of ignition in or adjacent to the loading area. Remove lights 

50 feet from the face before starting to load in tunnels and shafts. If stray currents 

are suspected, thoroughly check out the area with suitable instruments. If stray 

currents cannot be eliminated, use nonelectrical detonators, delays, and caps. 

24.7.9 Shunts. Do not remove the manufacturer's shunt from the cap leg wires 

until you complete loading and connect the cap into the blasting circuit. 

24.7.10 Sprung Holes. Do not chamber (spring) boreholes. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-10 October 2009 

24.7.11 Blasting Mats. Where blasting may expose personnel or property to 

injury or damage from flying material, cover the charges with blasting mats. 

Carefully protect the blasting circuits, and do not permit the circuits to contact 

steel mats. 

24.7.12 Loading and Shooting. Do not leave loaded holes unattended or 

unprotected. If possible, fire all holes loaded on a shift during that same shift. If 

it is necessary to delay firing because of an emergency, isolate the area and post 

watchpersons to prevent entry to the area. Conduct aboveground blasting 

operations between sunup and sundown. 

24.7.13 Pneumatic Loading Systems. Conduct the hazards from static 

electricity and stray currents associated with pneumatically loading boreholes 

with blasting agents, take the following precautions: 

a. Use only approved pneumatic loaders. 

b. Effectively ground and bond the entire system, including placers, 

valves, and loading hose. Ground at the face in tunnels and shafts. Do not 

use piping and rails to ground the system. 

c. Following installation of the ground, check the ground with an 

approved meter to ensure that the resistance is within safe limits. 

d. Use loading hoses of an approved, nonsparking, semiconductive 

material designed to maintain static electricity within safe limits. 

24.7.14 Underground Use of Blasting Agents. Before using blasting agents 

underground, a powder technician representing the explosive manufacturer or 

supplier must inspect the proposed method of loading and the loading equipment. 

Submit written evidence of such inspection and approval of the systems. 

24.8 Wiring Operations 

24.8.1 Firing Devices. Use an electric blasting machine to fire blasts using 

electronic detonators. Do not fire blasts by connection to any other electrical 

system. Fire blasts using nonelectric detonators with a blasting machine or 

starting device prescribed by the detonator manufacturer. Do not use cap and fuse 

firing underground or in the excavation of shafts. Do not use electric blasting 

caps within 500 feet of energized high-voltage lines or facilities. 

24.8.2 Wiring Procedure. Do not remove the manufacturer's shunt from the cap 

leg wires until the cap has been connected to the leadlines or to another cap in 

preparation for the assembly of two or more caps into a single series. When firing 

two or more series of caps as a series-parallel system, make sure that the caps in 

each series are the same in number (quantity, not delay periods), and test each 

series separately with an approved blasting galvanometer to: (1) ensure that the 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-11 

series is complete, and (2) ensure that each series has the same resistance and that 

the resistance is close to the calculated resistance for the series. If the first 

reading indicates an incomplete circuit, locate the fault and correct it. If the 

second reading indicates a higher or lower resistance than calculated, correct the 

situation before final hookup and firing. 

24.8.3 Electric Caps and Delays. All caps and delays in a shot must be made by 

the same manufacturer, and the number in a circuit must not exceed the capacity 

of the blasting machine or power source. 

24.8.4 Galvanometer Testing. Make the following tests with an approved 

blasting galvanometer during all wiring operations: 

(1) Test the circuit, including all caps, before connecting it to the firing 

line. 

(2) Check the firing line before connecting it to the blasting machine or 

power source. 

24.8.5 Firing Lines. Firing lines must be of sufficient current-carrying capacity 

but not smaller than No. 14 gauge solid copper wire or equivalent. Do not 

connect the firing line to the blasting machine or power source until you have 

completed and tested the wiring and cleared the blast area. Do not ground a 

power circuit used for firing electric blasting caps. 

24.8.6 Connecting and Lead Wires. Connecting and lead wires must be 

insulated single solid wires of sufficient current-carrying capacity. 

24.8.7 Power Circuit. When using a power circuit for firing, lock the firing 

switch in the "OFF" (open) position at all times, except when firing. Design the 

power circuit so that the firing lines to the cap circuit are automatically shortcircuited when the switch is in the "OFF" position. Entrust the keys to the firing 

switch only to the blaster. In underground operations, the firing circuit must have 

a "lightning" gap of at least 5 feet, located between the firing switch and the 

source of power. Bridge the gap with a flexible jumper cord just before firing the 

blast. 

24.9 Firing 

24.9.1 Preparation. Before connecting the firing line to the power source, notify 

all personnel in the danger area of the blast and remove them to a safe area. Make 

satisfactory arrangements for evacuating the danger area and ensuring that no one 

enters the area before the blast. 

24.9.2 Responsibility. The blaster must be in charge of the blasting machine or 

firing switch, and must connect the firing line to the firing device. The blaster 

must make all connections from the cap circuit back to the firing device, and the 

firing line must remain shorted until connected to the firing device immediately 

before firing. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-12 October 2009 

24.9.3 Blasting Signal. Sound the following blasting signal on a clearly audible 

whistle, horn, or siren before each surface or underground blast: 

• Blasting warning: A 1-minute series of long blasts 5 minutes before 

the blast signal 

• Blast signal: A series of short blasts 1-minute before the shot 

• All clear: A prolonged blast following inspection of the blast area 

24.9.4 Posting Blasting Signals. Post blasting signals at all access points, and 

before each shot, post competent flagpersons at all access points to the danger 

area. 

24.9.5 Disconnecting. Immediately following the blast, disconnect the firing 

line from the firing power source or blasting machine and shunt it. Lock firing 

switches open. 

24.10 Inspections Following a Blast 

24.10.1 All Blasts. Before the all-clear signal, the blaster must thoroughly 

inspect to determine if all charges have fired. The blaster must carefully check 

wires and search for unexploded charges. 

24.10.2 Underground. In addition to the previously listed requirements, check 

and test the heading for adequate ventilation and safe concentrations of dusts, 

toxic vapors, and gases. Also, before permitting personnel in the heading, scale 

the face and make it safe. 

24.10.3 All-Clear Signal. Sound the all-clear signal only after satisfactorily 

completing the inspection. 

24.11 Requirements Regarding Misfires 

If you suspect or find a misfire, keep all personnel, except the blaster and 

employees necessary to handle the misfire, out of the danger area. Prohibit all 

work in the danger area except that necessary to remove the misfire hazard. If a 

misfire occurs while using cap and fuse, all personnel must remain at a safe 

distance from the charge for at least 1 hour. If other electric or nonelectric 

initiating methods are used, the blasting supervisor may reduce the waiting period 

to 30 minutes. 

24.11.1 Refiring. Refiring is the desired method of clearing misfires. The 

following actions are mandatory: 

a. For electrically fired blasts in which broken wires or faulty connections 

caused the misfire, make repairs, reconnect the firing line, and attempt to 

fire the charge. 

b. For misfires originally initiated by detonating cord or nonelectrical 

detonators, the blaster must inspect lines coming out of the holes, and if 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-13 

they appear to be intact, the blaster can reconnect them and attempt to 

detonate the misfired holes. 

c. In blastholes where leg wires are discontinuous or leads or detonating 

cord cut off, there may still be explosives in the hole that can be reprimed 

and fired. Remove any stemming in the hole. Float stemming out with 

water. Place a new primer in the hole and attempt to fire the charge. 

24.11.2 Removal of Explosives. This procedure must be the last resort. Perform 

it only when refiring has failed or when refiring would present a hazard. Remove 

explosives by washing them out with water, or, if the misfire is underwater, blow 

them out with air. 

24.11.3 Work Restrictions. Do not permit drilling, digging, or picking until: 

(1) you have detonated all missed holes or removed the explosive, and (2) the 

blaster has approved the resumption of work. 

24.12 Requirements for Using Safety Fuses 

Use safety fuses only where sources of extraneous electricity make the use of 

electric caps dangerous. Do not use damaged fuse or fuse with sharp kinks. 

24.12.1 Capping. Before capping a safety fuse, cut a short length from the end 

to ensure a fresh-cut end in each blasting cap. 

24.12.3 Crimper. Use cap crimpers of approved design for attaching blasting 

caps to safety fuse. 

24.12.4 Length of Fuse. The minimum length of safety fuse must be as required 

by State law, but it must not be less than 30 inches. Provide the blaster sufficient 

time to permit the blaster to reach a place of safety. 

24.12.5 Multiple Cap and Fuse Use. At least two blasters must be present when 

multiple cap fuse blasting is done by hand lighting methods. Each blaster must 

light no more than 12 fuses when using hand-lighting devices. 

24.12.6 Mudcapping. Do not use cap and fuse to fire mudcap charges unless 

you separate the charges sufficiently to prevent one charge from dislodging other 

shots in the blast. 

24.13 Use of Detonating Cord 

24.13.1 Care in Use. Use only detonating cord consistent with the type and 

physical condition of the borehole, stemming, and the type of explosive. 

Consider and handle detonating cord in the same manner as other explosives. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

24-14 October 2009 

24.13.2 Installation. Cut the line of detonating cord extending out of a borehole 

or from a charge from the supply spool before loading the remainder of the hole 

or placing additional charges. All runs must be free of loops, sharp kinks, or 

angles that take the cord back toward the oncoming line of detonation. 

24.13.3 Connections. Detonating cord connections must be competent and 

positive and in accordance with approved and recommended methods. Make 

knot-type or other cord-to-cord connections only with detonating cord in which 

the explosive core is dry. Inspect connections before firing. 

24.13.4 Use of Delays. When using detonating cord millisecond-delay 

connectors or short-interval-delay electric blasting caps with detonating cord, 

follow the manufacturer's recommendations. 

24.13.5 Connecting Blasting Caps. When connecting blasting caps to 

detonating cord, tape or otherwise attach the cap securely along the side or the 

end of the cord, with the end of the cap containing the explosive pointed in the 

direction in which the detonation is to proceed. 

24.13.6 Detonators. Do not bring detonators for firing the trunkline to the 

loading area, and do not attach the detonating cord until everything else is in 

readiness for the blast. 

24.14 Underwater Blasting 

24.14.1 Supervision. A competent blaster must conduct all blasting operations. 

Do not fire any blast without that person’s approval. 

24.14.2 Loading Tubes. Do not use loading tubes and casings of dissimilar 

metals for electric or other stray-current-affected detonators or explosives. When 

tubes are necessary, load these electrically affected devices through nonsparking 

loading tubes. 

24.14.3 Detonators. For underwater blasting operations, use only water-resistant 

blasting caps and detonating cord or other detonators and/or firing systems and 

methods approved by the manufacturer. 

24.14.4 Marking Charges. When placing more than one charge underwater, 

attach a float device to an element of each charge so that it will be released by the 

firing. Handle misfires using precautions and procedures in this section. 

24.14.5 Blast Warning. In addition to the standard audible blast warning, 

display blasting flags. 

24.14.6 Boats in Area. Do not fire blasts while any vessel underway is within 

1,500 feet of the blasting area. Notify those onboard vessels moored or anchored 

within 1,500 feet before the blast is fired. 
Section 24—Blasting Operations 

October 2009 24-15 

24.14.7 Swimming and Diving. Do not fire blasts when swimmers or divers are 

in the vicinity and exposed to injury from the blast. 

October 2009 25-1

Section 25 

Concrete, Masonry Construction, and Formwork 

This section sets forth the requirements for concrete, masonry construction, and 

formwork. It specifically addresses plant and equipment, concrete conveyance 

systems, reinforcing steel, surface preparation, formwork and falsework, vertical 

shoring, tubular welded frame shoring, tube and coupler shoring, single-post 

shores, vertical slip forms, releasing and moving forms, precast concrete, lift-slab, 

and masonry construction. 

25.1 Plant and Equipment 

25.1.1 General. Design, operate, and maintain all equipment, facilities, and 

formwork for concrete and masonry construction according to the 

requirements of this section, other applicable parts of these standards, the 

subsection, "Other Mechanized Construction Equipment," and the current 

edition of ANSI A10.9, "Construction and Demolition Operations—Concrete 

and Masonry Work." 

25.1.2 Batching and Screening Plants. Design and construct concrete 

batching and screening plants, aggregate production plants, hoppers, bins, 

silos, and related equipment with an adequate safety factor to prevent 

structural failure or collapse. Refer to the subsection, "Other Mechanized 

Construction Equipment" for certification requirements. Design and equip 

batching plants, aggregate plants, and conveyor systems with mechanical dust 

control systems and water spray systems (or other acceptable means) to keep 

airborne dust concentrations within acceptable exposure limits. Comply with 

permit-required confined space and hazardous energy control procedures 

when entering silos, storage bins, tunnels, shafts, or similar enclosed areas. 

25.1.3 Bulk Storage Bins. Bulk storage bins, containers, and silos must have 

conical or tapered bottoms and be able to start material flow mechanically or 

pneumatically. 

25.1.4 Loading Skips. Install protective guardrails on each side of loading 

skips if loading skips are one cubic yard or larger. Equip loading skips with a 

mechanical device to clear the skip of material. 

25.1.5 Bull Floats. Where bull float handles may contact energized electrical 

conductors, establish a hazardous energy control clearance and lock out the 

power to those conductors. 

25.1.6 Powered Concrete Trowels. Equip manually guided powered and 

rotating concrete troweling machines with a control switch or positive 

mechanical release device that automatically stops trowel rotation when the 

operator releases the equipment handle.
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-2 October 2009 

25.1.7 Concrete Buggies. Handles of concrete buggies must not extend 

beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy. 

25.1.8 Concrete Buckets. Concrete buckets equipped with hydraulic or 

pneumatically operated gates must have positive safety latches or similar 

safety devices to prevent premature or accidental dumping. Design the 

buckets so aggregate does not accumulate on the bucket’s top and sides. Do 

not ride concrete buckets or permit personnel under buckets that are being 

raised or lowered into position by cranes or cableways. Do not route elevated 

concrete buckets over employees. Concrete buckets with manually operated 

gates must be self-closing. Maintain all buckets in structurally sound 

condition. A professional engineer (PE) must approve any alterations that 

affect structural competency. 

25.1.9 Transmix Trucks. Transmix trucks and concrete pumping trucks, 

including operating procedures, must conform with requirements in this 

subsection and the subsection "On-Highway Equipment." 

25.1.10 Personal Protective Equipment. Employees placing or finishing 

concrete must wear applicable protective equipment, but never less than longsleeved shirts, long pants, rubber safety boots, gloves, hardhat, and eye glasses 

with side shields. Make eyewash facilities available at each placement or 

finishing operation. 

25.1.11 Lockout/Tagout. Lock out and tag equipment, such as compressors, 

mixers, screens, and concrete pumps, before performing maintenance or repair 

work. 

25.2 Concrete Conveyance Systems 

25.2.1 General. "Concrete Conveyance Systems" are defined as mechanical 

devices used to move concrete from the receiving hopper of the system to the 

point of use (i.e., pumps, tremies, conveyor belts, flexible hoses, pipelines, 

and the structures or mobile equipment on which the system is installed). 

They do not include concrete buckets hoisted by cranes, cableways, or 

specialized hoisting systems, or transmix trucks used to convey concrete from 

the batch plant to the placement site. These types of mechanical devices are 

covered elsewhere in these standards. 

25.2.2 Requirements. The manufacturer or a PE must design and certify all 

concrete conveyance systems as safe for intended use. The contractor or 

owner/operator must operate, maintain, inspect, and test the systems in 

accordance with the more stringent requirements set forth in the 

manufacturer’s instructions, PE's specifications or these standards. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-3

25.2.3 Concrete Pumping Systems 

a. General. Concrete pumping systems consist of a concrete pump, 

pipeline (slickline) including short or long beds, couplings, intermediate 

and end hoses, and all supporting structures and equipment. Pipe 

accessories may include shutoff valves, direction change valves, 

articulating pipe connections, telescoping pipes, cleaning heads, trap 

baskets, and taper (transition) pieces. Concrete pumping systems may be 

stationary or mobile, or a combination of both types. 

Design, install, test, and operate all systems and supporting equipment 

according to the more stringent requirements contained or referenced in 

these standards or in the manufacturer’s or PE's specifications. 

b. Concrete Pumping Line (slickline, intermediate or end hoses, bends, 

couplings, transitions, etc.). 

1. General. The manufacturer must certify that all materials, pipes, 

and accessories are safe to use in concrete pumping systems and are 

within the calculated design pressures. Remove piping and accessories 

from service whenever rupture safety factors (bursting pressure 

divided by maximum obtainable pump pressure) are less than two 

(and, preferably, four). All hoses must be approved for concrete 

pumping operations and maximum anticipated operating pressures. 

Affix maximum approved operating pressures to the hose. Install 

hoses according to manufacturer’s approved methods and procedures. 

Provide safety lashings that can support a fully loaded hose at all hose 

connections. The manufacturer must approve, in writing, any field 

repairs to hoses, pipes, or couplings. 

2. Couplings. Couplings may be bolt, snap, toggle, or cup-tension 

type. Secure snap or toggle couplings against accidental opening 

using safety pins or equivalent devices (see figure 25-1). Clearly mark 

couplings with shoulder diameter and pressure rating. Couplings must 

have a pressure rating two times greater than the pump’s maximum 

manufacturer’s rating. Adjustable coupling eyebolts must have stops 

on adjustment threads to prevent overadjusting. 

3. Assembly 

(a) A competent person, trained and experienced in the type of 

systems being installed, must directly supervise their assembly. 

Do not assemble or use a concrete pumping system on the 

construction site unless the system supervisor has a manufacturerapproved piping wall thickness monitoring and replacement 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-4 October 2009 

procedure (ultrasonic, weepholes, etc.). Test all piping system 

components in accordance with the procedure before onsite use, 

unless written evidence proves that a satisfactory testing procedure 

is in place and functioning. 

Figure 25-1.—Pipe couplings. 

(b) Adjoining pipe terminations must be compatible with each 

other and the coupling. Mating pipe terminations must be the same 

diameter as marked on the coupling. It is not acceptable to 

construct the flange shoulder by welding, screwing, or otherwise 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-5

attaching an external ring to the pipe or grooved-type flanges the 

same diameter as the pipe. 

(c) Securely brace and anchor all piping to minimize movement 

and to ensure that line parts will be restrained if failure occurs. A 

PE or the manufacturer must approve any piping attached to or 

supported from structural members or formwork, as well as piping 

installed on equipment that may impose loadings beyond design 

criteria. 

c. Placing Booms 

1. General. The manufacturer or a PE must design and certify 

placing booms and all supporting structures or equipment. Delivery 

piping, intermediate or end hoses, couplings, and accessories 

supported by or used with placing booms must conform with this 

section. Anchor each section of rigid pipeline or hose to the boom, so 

no section can fall from the boom in the event of coupling or adapter 

failure. Metal pipe swivels are the preferred method for 

accommodating boom folding actions. 

Equip all hydraulic cylinders with hydraulic pressure relief valves that 

automatically prevent boom or cylinder damage. Use placing booms 

only for hoisting system piping, accessories, and the concrete being 

conveyed. 

2. Mountings. Design and operate trailers and trucks with mounted 

placing booms (see figure 25-2) according to the requirements in the 

section, "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" and 

Department of Transportation regulations. Inspect and brake test them 

in accordance with the references above. The manufacturer or a PE 

must design stationary boom mountings. Visibly display the weight of 

booms, attachments, and accessories on the boom. Clearly display on 

the boom or in the operating instructions all outriggers, jacks, or other 

stabilizing features required by the manufacturer or PE. Visibly mark 

outriggers with maximum load imposed on supporting surface. Locate 

outrigger controls so the operator can continuously observe the 

outrigger whenever it is being extended or retracted. 

3. Controls and Gauges 

(a) Mount permanently installed controls so the boom or other 

moving parts cannot strike the operator and so the operator has a 

clear view of the receiving hopper. Adequately light control 

panels and operator platforms during night operations. Access to 

elevated control stations must be in accordance with these 

standards. Fall protection systems meeting requirements in the 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-6 October 2009 

section, "Mobile and Mechanized Stationary Equipment," must be 

in place on the platform. Protect all operating platforms with 

adequate guardrails. 

(b) Mark all controls with symbols or wording that clearly shows 

their function. When possible, ensure that the direction of control 

movement corresponds with direction of motion. Arrange the 

controls to prevent unintentional motion by the operator. All 

controls must be deadman type. 

Figure 25-2.—Crane boom mounted concrete conveyor system. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-7

(c) Ensure that combination stationary and remote control systems 

for booms can only be operated from one location at a time. All 

control panels (stationary or remote) must lock in the "off" position 

when unattended. 

(d) When the operator cannot see gauges that detect critical 

temperatures and pressures, equip the pumping system with 

automatic shutoff or control devices that limit temperatures or 

pressures to within predetermined safe limits. 

(e) Provide an emergency, all function, stop button on all control 

panels. The button must be easily identifiable by size and color 

and be accessible from the normal working surface. 

(f) Radio remote controls must be Federal Communications 

Commission (FCC) certified for two-way communication and have 

shielding, filtering, and discrete coding to prevent accidental 

stimulation of the receiver. 

4. Performance Inspection and Testing 

(a) Stationary Mounting. After making major repairs or 

alterations to critical structural members, or when directed by the 

Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) or office head, 

performance inspect and load test stationary-type placing booms in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s or PE's instructions. 

Initially mounting a placement boom on a new stationary 

supporting structure, or at a new location, is considered a major 

alteration. Performance and load testing must be completed before 

use at the new location. When moving the boom between tested 

structures or locations, additional load tests are not necessary, 

unless required by the COR or office head. However, 

operationally test the placement boom before conveying concrete. 

This test must include: (1) fully extending all boom sections to a 

horizontal position with end hose attached; (2) rotating the boom 

through 360 degrees or maximum degrees of operation; (3) raising 

extended boom to vertical position and rotating through 360 

degrees or maximum degrees possible; and (4) testing relief valve 

settings by folding boom sections against each other. 

(b) Mobile Mountings. Performance inspect and load test 

placement booms mounted on truck chassis or trailers after repair 

or alterations to critical components and when directed by the COR 

or office head. Further, when relocating them to any load tested 

location, subject them to the more stringent operational test 

described in the previous subparagraph or in the manufacturer or 

PE's instructions. The load testing requirement for supplier-owned 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-8 October 2009 

and operated truck- and trailer-mounted units may be waived 

when: (1) the equipment is used onsite sporadically or for short 

intervals; (2) no critical defects are found after visual inspection 

and conducting operational tests; (3) the owner/operator has 

written confirmation that the boom and supporting equipment have 

satisfactorily passed a performance inspection and load test 

following the repairs or alterations. 

(c) Performance Inspection and Load Test Procedures. 

Conduct performance inspections of all critical components to 

ensure they meet the minimum recommended levels specified in 

the manufacturer’s or PE's operating or inspection manuals. If the 

information is unavailable, the manufacturer or PE must develop it 

for use in making the inspection. Conduct load tests with test 

weights spaced along the boom as specified by the manufacturer or 

PE. Load test data supplied by the manufacturer or PE is 

unacceptable unless it adequately tests all critical structural 

components and tipping moments to 100 percent of manufacturer’s 

maximum rated conditions, and load-limiting devices are tested to 

activating limits. 

d. Concrete Pumps 

1. General. A manufacturer or PE must design and certify concrete 

pumps for intended use and pressures. Truck chassis, trailers, skids, or 

railcars that have mounted pumps must conform with applicable 

requirements of these standards, including the sections on "Mobile and 

Mechanized Stationary Equipment" and "Tunnel and Shaft 

Construction," and this section. Skid-mounted pumps must have 

sufficient eyes for attaching slings or special hoisting devices. Affix a 

permanent notice to the pump, stating overall weight of pump and 

supporting structures. 

Support, anchor, and stabilize pumps in accordance with 

manufacturer’s or PE's requirements. All docks, outriggers, or axle 

locks specified by the manufacturer or PE must accompany the unit 

and be placed in recommended operating position before starting 

pumping operations. 

2. Controls and Gauges. Mount permanently installed controls so 

the operator can observe all critical pump components. Adequately 

light control panels and operating platforms during night operation. 

Mark controls with symbols or wording that clearly shows their 

functions. Ensure that combination stationary and remote control 

panels for pumps can only be operated from one location at a time. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-9

All control panels must lock in the "off" position when unattended. If 

the operator cannot directly view gauges for detecting critical 

temperatures and pressures, equip them with an automatic shutoff or 

control devices that limit temperature and pressure to within 

predetermined safe limits. Provide an emergency shutoff button on all 

control panels. The buttons must be easily identifiable by size and 

color and be accessible from normal work surfaces. Radio remote 

controls must be FCC certified for two-way communication and have 

shielding, filtering, and discrete coding to prevent accidental 

stimulation of the receiver. 

3. Specific Requirements. Guard all dangerous moving parts. 

Position the receiving hopper so concrete can readily flow from 

transmix trucks or other concrete conveyance equipment discharge 

chute into the hopper. Provide a hinged grill to prevent access to 

dangerous moving parts. Securely mount the grill on the hopper with 

an interlocking arrangement that prevents access until feed, agitator, 

and valve mechanisms are rendered inoperative. Grill parallel bar 

spacings must be no more than 3/4 inches apart and be able to support 

a 250-pound load. 

Construct inlet and outlet valves and chambers to restrict personnel 

access until all energy sources are locked out and stored energy is 

dissipated. 

e. General Operating Requirements 

1. Competent personnel must install and operate concrete pumping 

systems and equipment. 

2. Personnel may work on piping systems or supporting structures 

only after all inline pressures have been relieved by running the pump 

in reverse or opening air or water relief valves. 

3. Position pumps so trucks can avoid backing. If backing is 

necessary because of site conditions that you cannot modify, a signal 

person must stand to the side of the truck and direct it. Prevent 

pedestrians and vehicle traffic from entering the pump area during 

backing operations. 

4. Trucks with installed pumps and placing booms that use truck 

engine power to operate the equipment must conform fully with the 

"Mobile and Mechanized Stationary Equipment" section and all other 

applicable provisions of these standards. 

5. End hoses must not exceed lengths specified by the manufacturer or 

PE. Do not allow placing booms to drag end hoses laterally. 

Manually relocate hose using pulling slings. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-10 October 2009 

6. When operating or transporting placing booms close to highvoltage power lines, comply with these and other applicable standards. 

7. When relocating placing booms and end hose outside the operator’s 

visible range, a signal person must give full attention to directing the 

operation. 

8. Do not externally brace placing booms or lay them on any 

supporting structure during pumping operations unless approved by 

the manufacturer or PE. 

9. All outriggers, jacks, or other stabilizing features required by the 

manufacturer or PE must accompany the boom or pump and be in 

recommended operating position before conveying concrete. 

10. Do not relocate mobile-mounted placing booms or withdraw 

outriggers unless the boom is in defined transport position. 

25.3 Reinforcing Steel 

25.3.1 Lateral Supports. Laterally support reinforcing steel for walls, piers, 

columns, and similar structures to prevent overturning or collapse. The lateral 

supports for reinforcing steel must be able to withstand the forces applied 

during construction. 

25.3.2 Rigging. Securely tie together bundles of reinforcing steel before 

moving by crane or cableway to prevent slipping. Use two-part slings to 

handle steel more than 20 feet long. 

25.3.3 Impalement. Cover exposed rebar onto or into which employees 

could fall to eliminate the hazard of impalement. Do not use plastic cap 

coverings for impalement protection, but you may use them to cover the ends 

of horizontal rebar. Cover vertically protruding rebar with wood troughs or 

other substantial material. 

25.3.4 Positioning Device Systems. Employees must use a positioning 

device (see the section on "Fall Protection") when working in a stationary 

location 6 feet or higher above any adjacent work surfaces or when placing 

and tying reinforcing steel in walls, piers, columns, etc. Employees must use 

a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements of the section on "Fall 

Protection" when moving on reinforcing steel higher than 24 feet above 

adjacent surfaces. 

25.3.5 Walkways. Reinforcing mats used as walkways must have planking 

to ensure safe footing. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-11

25.3.6 Prohibited Uses. Do not use reinforcing steel as guy attachments at 

deadmen or other anchorage points for scaffolding hooks, for stirrups, or as a 

load-bearing member of any lifting device. 

25.3.7 Wire Mesh Mats. Secure wire mesh reinforcing mats at each end to 

prevent recoiling. Secure unrolled wire mesh on each side of a proposed cut 

before cutting the mesh. 

25.3.8 Post-Tensioning Operations. Do not permit employees, except those 

essential to post-tensioning operations, to be behind the jack during tensioning 

operations. Erect signs and barricades to limit employee access to the posttensioning area during tensioning operations. 

25.4 Surface Preparation 

25.4.1 Green Cutting or Abrasive Blasting. Employees engaged in green 

cutting must wear eye and face protection. Employees engaged in wet or dry 

abrasive blasting using silica sand must wear an approved abrasive blasting 

air-line respirator, heavy-duty footwear, and hardhat. (See the section, 

"Personal Protective Equipment," for specific requirements.) 

25.5 Formwork and Falsework 

25.5.1 Design and Erection. In addition to the specific requirements set 

forth in this section, the design and erection of formwork or falsework shall be 

in accordance with specifications, pertinent provisions of the latest edition of 

ACI 347, “Guide to Formwork for Concrete,” and ACI 318, “Building Code 

Requirements for Reinforced Concrete,” and current edition of ANSI A10.9, 

“Safety Requirements for Masonry and Concrete Work.” 

25.5.2 Safety Factor. Design, erect, brace, and maintain formwork, 

falsework, structural shoring, and bracing to safely support all vertical and 

lateral loads that might be applied until the structure can support such loads. 

Incorporate the minimum safety factors (as specified in ANSI A10.9, 

"Construction and Demolition Operations - Concrete and Masonry Work") in 

the design and erection of all framework, shoring, falsework, and formwork 

accessories. 

25.5.3 Construction Loads. Do not impose any construction loads on the 

partially completed structures unless such loading has been considered in the 

design and is shown on the formwork design drawings or specifications. 

25.5.4 Drawings and Plans 

a. A PE must approve and sign detailed design calculations and working 

drawings for all formwork or vertical shoring installations when any of the 

following conditions exist: 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-12 October 2009 

• The height, as measured from the top of the sills to the soffit of the 

superstructure, exceeds 14 feet 

• Individual horizon span lengths exceed 16 feet 

• Provisions are made for vehicular or railroad traffic through the 

falsework or vertical shoring. 

b. For all formwork and vertical shoring installations not discussed in 

subparagraph a. above, one of the following must approve and sign the 

formwork plan or shoring layout: 

• A PE 

• A manufacturer’s authorized representative 

• A contractor’s representative, qualified in using and erecting 

formwork and vertical shoring. 

c. Make drawings or plans showing the jack layout, formwork, shoring, 

working decks, and scaffolding available at the jobsite. 

25.5.5 Form Anchors. Design form anchors that support forms and 

scaffolding with a minimum safety factor of three. Impose no load on form 

anchors or concrete anchorages until the concrete has set the minimum period 

of time set forth in the subsection, "Releasing and Moving Forms." Form 

sections supported by form anchors must be no more than 50 feet long and 

must be designed and installed so that no forces, incurred by form or 

anchorage failure, can transfer to an adjacent section. 

25.5.6 Housekeeping. In all areas where persons must work or pass, remove 

and stockpile all stripped forms and shoring promptly after stripping. Pull or 

cut protruding nails, wire ties, and other unneeded accessories to avoid 

hazards. 

25.5.7 Fall Protection. Employees, when working 6 feet or more above any 

adjacent work surface (and not protected by fixed scaffolding, guardrails, or 

safety net) must use a personal fall protection system. Employees working in 

a stationary position may use a positioning system, but only until they need to 

relocate to a new position. 

25.6 Vertical Shoring 

25.6.1 Additional Loading. Temporarily store reinforcing rods, materials, or 

equipment on top of formwork only if structures have been designed or 

strengthened to support the additional loading. Do not load eccentric loads on 

shore heads or similar members, unless these members are designed for 

intended loading. 

25.6.2 Sills. Sills used in shoring must be sound, rigid, and able to carry the 

maximum intended load. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-13

25.6.3 Shoring Equipment. Inspect all shoring equipment before erection to 

make sure it conforms to the shoring layout. Do not use damaged equipment 

for shoring. 

25.6.4 Inspection. Inspect erected shoring equipment immediately before, 

during, and after placing concrete to make sure shoring equipment meets the 

requirements specified on the formwork drawings. Immediately reinforce or 

reshore any damaged or weakened shoring equipment. 

25.6.5 Reshoring. Provide reshoring when necessary to safely support slabs 

and beams after stripping or where such structures are subject to 

superimposed loads. 

25.6.6 Removal of Shoring. Remove shoring equipment only after concrete 

has reached the minimum strength required in the formwork and shoring 

design and a PE or supervisor has inspected and approved the placement. 

Plan removal so you do not overload in-place shoring equipment. 

25.7 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring 

25.7.1 Safe Loading. Do not load metal tubular frames used for shoring 

beyond the safe working load recommended by the manufacturer. Design 

metal tubular frame shoring with a minimum safety factor of 2.5. 

25.7.2 Condition. Locking devices on frames and braces must be in good 

working order; coupling pins must align the frame or panel legs; pivoted cross 

braces must have their center pivot in place; and all components must be in 

good serviceable condition. Promptly repair or replace faulty or damaged 

parts and components. 

25.7.3 Inspection. Make a thorough inspection after erection to ensure that: 

(1) spacing between towers and cross brace spacing does not exceed that 

shown on the layout and that all locking devices are in the closed position; 

(2) the devices for attaching the external lateral stability bracing are securely 

fastened to the legs of the shoring frames; (3) baseplates, shoreheads, 

extension devices, or adjustment screws are in firm contact with the footing 

sill and the form. 

25.8 Tube and Coupler Shoring 

25.8.1 Design. Design the tube and coupler shoring for the maximum 

intended loading with a minimum safety factor of 2.5. 

25.8.2 Couplers. Couplers (clamps) must be of structural-type metal, such as 

drop-forged steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. Do not use 

gray cast iron or couplers that are deformed, broken, or have defective or 

missing threads or bolts. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-14 October 2009 

25.8.3 Inspection. Make a thorough inspection after erection to ensure that: 

a. The shoring has been erected as shown on the layout drawings. 

b. The spacing between posts does not exceed that shown on the layout. 

c. All interlocking tubular members and couplings are properly installed 

and tightened. 

d. All baseplates, shore heads, extension devices, or adjustment screws 

are in firm contact with the footing still and the form material and snug 

against the legs of the frames. 

25.9 Single-Post Shores 

25.9.1 Design. Single-post shoring layouts must provide for the maximum 

intended loading with a minimum safety factor of 3. When using single-post 

shores in more than one tier, a PE with structural experience must design and 

inspect them. 

25.9.2 Bracing. Horizontally brace single-post shores longitudinally, 

transversely, and diagonally. Install the bracing while erecting shores. 

25.9.3 Inspection. Inspect single-post shores and adjusting devices before 

use. Do not use fabricated shores and adjusting devices that are heavily 

rusted, bent, dented, rewelded, damaged, or defective. Do not use timber 

shores and timber components of fabricated shores if split, knotted, broken, or 

otherwise structurally defective. 

25.9.4 Baseplates and Shore Heads. Baseplates and shore heads of singlepost shores must be in firm contact with the footing sill and the form 

materials. 

25.9.5 Angled Formwork. When formwork is at an angle or sloping, or 

when the shored surface is sloping, specially design the shoring for such 

loading. 

25.9.6 Adjustment. Do not adjust single-post shores after concrete is in 

place. 

25.10 Vertical Slip-Forms 

25.10.1 Design and Supervision. A PE, experienced in slip-form design, 

must design all vertical slip-forms. Drawings prepared by the PE, showing 

the jack layout, anchorages, formwork, scaffolding, etc., together with 

installation, jacking, and leveling instructions, must be available at the jobsite 

and followed. A person experienced in slip-form operations must supervise 

form installation, movement, and leveling. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-15

25.10.2 Jack Supports. Design steel rods or pipe on which the jacks climb 

(or by which forms are lifted) for that intended purpose. Encase supports in 

concrete or anchor them. Supports anchored or secured by form anchors must 

use two or more independent form anchors, separated a minimum of 5 feet 

vertically. 

25.10.3 Vertical Loading. Position jacks and vertical supports so the 

vertical loads are distributed equally. Do not exceed the capacity of the jacks. 

25.10.4 Line and Plumb. Keep the form structure in line and plumb during 

jacking operations. 

25.10.5 Lifting. When lifting, proceed steadily and evenly. Do not exceed 

the predetermined safe rate of lift. 

25.10.6 Bracing. Provide lateral and diagonal form bracing to prevent 

excessive distortion of the structure during jacking. 

25.10.7 Holding Devices. Provide the jacks or other lifting devices with 

mechanical dogs and other automatic holding devices to provide protection in 

case the power supply or the lifting mechanism fails. 

25.10.8 Scaffolding and Platforms. Vertical lift forms must have 

scaffolding or work platforms that completely encircle the area of placement. 

25.10.9 Supervision. An experienced supervisor must oversee vertical slipform operations. The supervisor must be present on the deck during slipping. 

25.11 Releasing and Moving Forms 

25.11.1 Lifting. When raising or moving forms by crane, cableway, Aframe, or similar mechanical lifting device, securely attach the forms to wire 

rope slings that have a minimum safety factor of eight. Equip the panels and 

form sections with hoisting brackets to attach slings. Remove loose tools and 

materials before moving forms. Use taglines for controlling forms whenever 

necessary to protect personnel or structures. 

25.11.2 Riding Forms. Employees must not ride forms or form scaffolding 

as it is raised or moved, with the exception of vertical slip-forms. 

25.11.3 Releasing. Adequately brace or secure vertical and overhead forms 

before releasing them. Before releasing and moving forms, relocate 

employees at lower levels who may be exposed to falling materials. 

25.11.4 Form Removal. Do not remove forms until the concrete being 

supported is sufficiently strong to support its weight with all loads placed on 

it, to ensure safe removal of the forms, shoring, and bracing. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

25-16 October 2009 

25.12 Precast Concrete 

25.12.1 Requirement. Brace precast concrete walls, structural framing, or 

tilt-up wall panels until after permanent connections are made. A PE must 

design temporary bracing that provides at least 15 pounds per square foot on 

projected surfaces. 

25.12.2 Temporary Bracing. A PE must design temporary bracing for 

precast concrete walls, structural framing, or tilt-up wall panels. Such bracing 

must provide at least 15 pounds per square foot on projected surfaces. 

25.12.3 Suspended Loads. Do not allow employees under precast concrete 

members being lifted or tilted into position. 

25.12.4 Lifting Inserts. The lifting inserts for tilt-up concrete members must 

be able to support at least two times the maximum intended load. Other types 

of lifting inserts for precast concrete members must be able to support at least 

four times the maximum intended load. Lifting hardware must be able to 

supporting at least five times the maximum intended load. 

25.13 Lift-Slab 

25.13.1 Lift-Slab Operations. A PE, experienced in lift-slab construction, 

must design and plan lift-slab operations. Such plans must include detailed 

instructions and sketches that show the prescribed method of erection and 

ensure lateral stability of the building/structure during construction. 

25.13.2 Jacks/Lifting Units. Mark jacks/lifting units to show the rated 

capacity established by the manufacturer. Design jacks/lifting units with a 

minimum safety factor of 2.5. Do not load jacks/lifting units beyond their 

rated capacity. 

a. Jacking equipment includes any load-bearing component used to carry 

out the lifting operation, such as threaded rods, lifting attachments, lifting 

nuts, hook-up collars, t-caps shear heads, columns, and footings. 

b. Design and install jacks/lifting units so they will neither lift, nor 

continue to lift, when loaded beyond their rated capacity. 

c. Install a safety device for jacks/lifting units to ensure that loads will 

remain supported in any position if jacks malfunction. 

25.13.3 Jacking Operations. Synchronize jacking operations so the slab will 

remain level at all support points to within a 1⁄2-inch tolerance at all times. 

a. If leveling is automatically controlled, install a device that will stop the 

operation when the tolerance is exceeded or when the jacking system 

malfunctions. 
Section 25—Concrete, Masonry 

Construction, and Formwork 

October 2009 25-17

b. If manual controls maintain leveling, locate these controls in a central 

location; an experienced, competent person must attend the controls 

during lifting. Limit the maximum number of manually controlled 

jacks/lifting units on one slab so the operator can maintain the slab level. 

The maximum number must not exceed 14. 

c. Only employees who are not essential to the jacking operation may 

remain beneath a slab during lifting. During jacking operations, only 

employees who are essential to the jacking operation may remain in the 

building/structure. 

d. When making temporary connections to support slabs, secure wedges 

with tack welding, or an equivalent method, to prevent them from falling 

out of position. Release lifting rods only after securing column wedges. 

e. A certified welder, familiar with the welding requirements specified in 

the plans and specifications for the lift-slab operation, must perform all 

welding on temporary and permanent connections. Do not execute load 

transfer from jack/lifting units to building columns until the welds on the 

column shear plates cool to air temperature. 

f. Make sure jacks/lifting units are secured to building columns so they do 

not dislodge or dislocate. Design and install equipment so the lifting rods 

cannot slip out of position. 

25.14 Masonry Construction 

25.14.1 Requirements. Establish a limited access zone when erecting a 

masonry wall. The limited access zone must equal the height of the wall to be 

constructed, plus 4 feet, and must run the length of the wall. Establish the 

limited access zone before starting construction and locate it on the side of the 

wall that will not be scaffolded. Only employees directly involved in the 

construction of the wall may enter the limited access zone. The limited access 

zone must remain in place until the wall is adequately supported to prevent 

collapse. The supports must be able to withstand a load of at least 15 pounds 

per square inch. Walls over 8 feet high must have supports in place until 

permanent supporting elements of the structure are in place. 

25.14.2 Equipment. Guard masonry saws with (a) a semicircular enclosure 

over-blade and (b) a slotted horizontal hinged bar mounted underneath the 

guard enclosure to retain fragments of shattered blades. Equip saws with 

dust-control systems or make provisions for wet sawing that control airborne 

dust concentrations. 

25.14.3 Scaffolding. Design masonry scaffolding for a minimum loading of 

50 pounds per square foot. In all other respects, design, install, inspect, and 

maintain masonry scaffolding in accordance with applicable provisions in the 

section, "Walking and Working Surfaces." 

October 2009 26-1 

Section 26 

Steel Erection 

This section sets forth Reclamation’s requirements for erecting steel structures. It 

covers the following specific areas: 

• General Requirements 

• Permanent Flooring 

• Temporary Flooring 

• Other Flooring 

• Structural Steel Erection 

• Plumbing-Up 

• Bolting 

• Riveting 

• Fire Protection 

26.1 General Requirements for Erecting Steel Structures 

Storage, handling, and erecting of steel structures, buildings, or structural 

components or members must conform to the applicable requirements of these 

standards and the current edition of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

A10.13, "Safety Requirements for Steel Erection." 

26.1.1 Fall Protection. Develop a fall protection program before starting 

steel erection. Include all phases of the steel erection in the program and 

eliminate, to the extent possible, employee exposure to falls. 

a. Detail the steps to be taken to provide protection for employees 

exposed to potential falls. 

b. Provide a training program that enables all involved employees to 

recognize the fall hazards and the procedures to follow to minimize the 

hazard. 

26.2 Requirements for Installing Permanent Flooring 

26.2.1 Installation. Install permanent floors as the erection of structural 

members progresses. Install no more than eight stories between the erection 

floor and the uppermost permanent floor, except where the design maintains 

the structural integrity. 

26.2.2 Bolting and Welding. Erect no more than four floors or 48 feet of 

unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or the uppermost 

permanently secured floor. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

26-2 October 2009 

26.3 Requirements for Installing Temporary Flooring 

26.3.1 Planking. Solidly plank or deck the derrick or erection floor over its 

entire surface except for access openings. Planking or decking must be 

sufficiently thick and strong to supporting the working load. Never use 

planking less than 2 inches thick, full dimension undressed. Lay planking 

flush and secure it to prevent movement. 

26.3.2 Skeleton Steel Erection. Where erecting skeleton steel, maintain a 

tightly planked and substantial floor within two stories or 30 feet, whichever 

is less, below and directly under that portion of each tier of beams on which 

employees are performing any work. If installing a tightly planked and 

substantial floor is not practicable, install safety nets. 

26.3.3 Safety Nets. On buildings or structures not adaptable to temporary 

floors, and where scaffolds are not used, install and maintain safety nets 

whenever the potential fall distance exceeds two stories or 25 feet. The nets 

must clear the surface of structures below. 

26.3.4 Temporary Planking Removal. Remove temporary planking 

successively, working toward the last panel of temporary floor, so that 

employees work from the planked floor. Protect employees removing planks 

from the last panel by safety harness with safety lines attached to a catenary 

line or other substantial anchorage. 

26.4 Requirements for Installing Other Flooring 

26.4.1 Double-Wood Floors. In erecting buildings with double-wood floor 

construction, complete the rough flooring, including the tier below the one on 

which floor joists are being installed, as the construction progresses. 

26.4.2 Single-Wood Floor. For single-wood floors or other flooring 

systems, keep the floor immediately below the story where the floor joists are 

being installed planked or decked over. 

26.5 Requirements for Structural Steel Erections 

26.5.1 Solid-Web Structural Members. In placing solid-web structural 

members, do not release the hoisting line until the member is secured with at 

least two bolts or the equivalent at each connection. Draw the bolts up 

wrench tight. 

26.5.2 Open-Web Joists. Place open-web steel joists on structural steel 

framework only after such framework is permanently bolted, riveted, or 

welded. 
Section 26—Steel Erection 

October 2009 26-3 

26.5.3 Bar Joists. In steel framing, where bar joists are used and the 

columns are not framed in at least two directions with structural steel 

members, field bolt a bar joist at the columns to provide lateral stability during 

construction. 

26.5.4 Long-Span Joists. Where long-span joists or trusses 40 feet or longer 

are used, provide lateral stability by installing a center row of bolted bridging 

before slacking the hoisting line. 

26.5.5 Securing Structural Members. Securely bolt or fasten into position 

each structural steel member before releasing the loadline. When setting steel 

trusses, temporarily cross brace them until permanent bracing is installed. 

26.5.6 Taglines. Use a tagline or guide rope on all hoisted loads that expose 

employees to the swing of the load. 

26.5.7 Temporary Support. Before lifting falls are unhitched, either draw 

the anchor bolts down tightly when columns are being set on base plates or 

shims, or guy and support them to prevent collapse. 

26.5.8 Connectors. Whenever possible, "connectors" must straddle the beam 

instead of walking along the top flange. 

26.6 Requirements for Plumbing-Up 

26.6.1 Connections. Secure connections of the equipment used in plumbingup. Properly secure turnbuckles to prevent unwinding when under stress. 

26.6.2 Guys. Position plumbing-up guys and related equipment so that 

employees can work on the connection points. Remove the plumbing-up guys 

only under the supervision of a competent person. 

26.7 Requirements for Bolting 

26.7.1 Drift Pins. When knocking out bolts or drift pins, provide a means to 

keep them from falling. 

26.7.2 Impact Wrenches. Equip impact wrenches with a locking device to 

retain the socket. 

26.7.3 Containers. Provide containers for storing and carrying bolts, drift 

pins, and rivets. Secure the containers against accidental displacement when 

aloft. 

26.7.4 Drilling and Reaming. Two employees must operate drilling and 

reaming machines unless the handle is firmly secured to resist the torque 

reaction of the machine if the reaming or drilling bit should bind. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

26-4 October 2009 

26.8 Requirements for Riveting 

26.8.1 Riveting Hammers. Properly install a safety wire on the snap and on 

the handle of the pneumatic riveting hammer and use it at all times. The wire 

must be at least No. 9 (B&S gauge) leaving the handle, and the wire on the 

snap must be at least annealed No. 14, or equivalent. 

26.8.2 Removing Rivets. When knocking off or backing out rivet heads, 

provide a means to keep them from falling. 

26.9 Requirements for Fire Protection 

26.9.1 Fire Protection. In accordance with the section, "Fire Prevention and 

Protection," develop a fire protection and prevention plan before erecting any 

major structure. 

26.9.2 Welding and Cutting. Take precautions to prevent sparks or fires in 

accordance with the section, "Hand Tools, Power Tools, Pressure Vessels, 

Compressors, and Welding." 

26.9.3 Riveting. Only rivet in the vicinity of combustible material when fire 

extinguishers or hoselines are readily available to extinguish fires. 
October 2009 27-1 

Section 27 

Reclamation Drilling Standards 

This section establishes specific safety standards and safe work practices for earth 

and rock drilling operations. The standards do not apply to drilling powder holes 

for excavation. 

27.1 Standards for Site Selection and Working Platforms 

27.1.1 Preparation of the Work Site. Clear the work site to provide 

adequate room for the drill platform and supplies. In preparing a work site 

located on adverse topography, guard against flooding, caving, slides, and 

loose boulders. Stabilize the drill platform with outriggers or adequate 

timbering. 

27.1.2 Underground Utilities and Overhead Lines. Survey the work site to 

determine the presence of underground or overhead utilities before setting up 

the drill rig. Locate and mark the underground utilities. Maintain a minimum 

of 15 feet of clearance from buried utilities unless the location of the utilities 

is positively determined by exposing them. Meet the requirements of the 

"Electrical Safety" section for equipment operation adjacent to high voltage 

lines, except maintain a minimum 30-foot clearance between any part of the 

drill or mast and the powerline, regardless of voltage. 

27.1.3 Drainage. Provide a drain for the drill water to flow from the work 

site. Extend the drain far enough to prevent undercutting of the foundation. 

27.1.4 Drill Platform Design. Ensure drill platforms provide an adequate 

working space for the drilling operation and have a firm stable foundation. A 

professional engineer must design unusual drill platforms. 

27.1.5 Mud Pits and Drainage Excavations. Ensure mud pits and drainage 

excavations are safely sloped and located to provide minimum interference 

with work. Where necessary, provide suitable barricades, catwalks, etc. to 

reduce the possibility of injury. Use ladders in pits or excavations 4 feet deep 

or more. 

27.1.6 Lighting. Illuminate all working surfaces with a minimum of 10-foot 

candles. 

a. Ensure all electrical wiring for illumination purposes meets National 

Electrical Code. Qualified personnel must install all wiring. 

b. Use heavy duty, outdoor, nonshattering light bulbs, unless the bulbs are 

enclosed by the fixture. 

c. Maintain the lighting circuits in good repair. Remove defective wiring 

or fixtures from service. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

27-2 October 2009 

27.1.7 Flammable Liquids. Store, handle, and dispense flammable liquids 

in accordance with the section, "Standards for Material Handling, Storage, and 

Disposal." 

27.2 General Requirements for Drill Rigs 

Drilling rigs must meet the following requirements regarding how they are 

equipped, labeled, operated, and maintained. 

27.2.1 Control Levers. Post labels clearly indicating the function and 

direction of the control levers on the power unit controls of all drills. Where 

practicable, design operating unit controls to return to neutral when the 

control levers are released. 

27.2.2 Safety Shutoff. Install at least two emergency safety power shutoff 

devices on all units. Locate one switch within easy reach of the operator and 

one within easy reach of the helpers at ground level near the drill or auger 

head. You may connect a safety line to an emergency stop switch instead of 

using the two emergency stop switches. Clearly label emergency stop devices 

or make them readily identifiable in some other way. Check daily to ensure 

that they work. 

27.2.3 Operator. Only qualified personnel instructed in the operation of the 

particular equipment may operate the power unit. 

27.2.4 Lubrication and Repair. Lubricate all drilling equipment routinely. 

Shut down equipment during manual lubrication and during repairs or 

adjustments. 

27.2.5 Preventive Maintenance. Provide an effective preventive 

maintenance program for periodic inspections at such intervals as are 

necessary to ensure safe operation and adequate maintenance. 

27.2.6 Refueling. Do NOT refuel internal combustion engines while they are 

running. Where practicable, position or shield the fuel tank to avoid 

accidentally spilling fuel on the engine or exhaust manifold during refueling. 

27.2.7 Inspection. A competent person must inspect drilling equipment 

before each shift to determine if it is in safe operating condition. Correct any 

damage or deficiencies before using the equipment. Maintain written records 

of all deficiencies and repairs. 

a. Develop an inspection checklist based on the manufacturer’s 

recommendations and the requirements of this section for each piece of 

drilling equipment. Inspect drilling equipment at least monthly and 

maintain a written record. Use the inspection checklist to document the 

monthly inspection. 
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling 

Standards 

October 2009 27-3 

b. Give hoisting units on the drill an annual performance test to the 

maximum rated load. 

c. Inspect truck-mounted drill rigs annually for compliance with the 

applicable Department of Transportation regulations. 

27.2.8 Gears and Moving Parts. Isolate or guard belts, gears, shafts, 

pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, and other type moving drives as set forth 

in the current edition of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B15.1, 

"Safety Code for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus." 

27.2.9 Fire Extinguishers. Carry a 2-A:40-B:C dry chemical fire 

extinguisher on the unit and remove it to a position within 25 feet of the work 

site during drilling operations. Inspect extinguishers at least once every 

month. A qualified inspector must conduct annual maintenance inspections 

and tagging. 

27.2.10 Exhaust Systems. Equip engine exhaust systems with spark 

arresters when operated where sparks constitute a fire hazard. 

27.2.11 Raising Mast. Clear personnel from the immediate area before 

raising the mast, except for the operator and a helper if necessary. Check to 

ensure safe clearance from energized power lines or equipment. Remove 

unsecured equipment from the mast before raising the mast. Adequately 

secure cables, mud lines, and cat lines to the mast before raising the mast. 

27.2.12 Securing Mast to Rig. Secure the mast to the rig in an upright 

position using the original pins or bolts or equivalent pins and bolts, after it is 

raised. 

27.3 Truck-Mounted Drills 

27.3.1 General. Provide platforms, steps, handholds, and guardrails on the 

equipment to ensure safe access and footing. Coat the platform and decks 

with a nonskid surface. 

27.3.2 Truck Movement. Do NOT move trucks backwards unless the driver 

has personally inspected the area behind the truck. Use a spotter in restricted 

or congested areas or in areas where workers are located. Equip trucks with 

serviceable automatic backup alarms. 

27.3.3 Transporting Drill Equipment. Thoroughly inspect drill equipment 

before moving it to ensure that the mast, drill rods, tools, and other supplies 

and equipment are secure to prevent displacement while in transit. Observe 

applicable traffic laws when moving drill equipment over public roads. Check 

steering mechanism, brakes, lights, load limits, and proper flagging or lighting 

of load extensions. Do not move trucks until the mast is secured in the 

transport position. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

27-4 October 2009 

27.4 Skid-Mounted Units 

27.4.1 Towing Equipment. Equipment used to skid drill units must have 

adequate power to safely control the intended loads. Provide an adequate 

means for braking the skid unit when moving a skid mounted drill down a 

slope. Skidding operations must meet the requirements in the section on 

"Mechanized and Stationary Equipment," specifically "Unusual Equipment 

Configurations." 

27.4.2 Access. Provide employees with a safe means of access to the skidmounted drill unit. 

27.4.3 Tie Downs/Anchors. Secure the drill while raising the mast or during 

drilling operations with either a deadman or by weighting or bolting it down 

to prevent the drill from tipping over. 

27.5 Drilling Operations 

27.5.1 General. Before starting the power unit, disengage all gears, set the 

cable drum brake, and make sure no rope is in contact with the cathead. 

27.5.2 Safety Chains. Use a safety chain and cable arrangement to prevent 

water swivel and mud line whip. 

27.5.3 Water Swivels and Hoisting Plugs. Check all water swivels and 

hoisting plugs daily for possible frozen bearings and lubricate properly before 

using. A frozen bearing could cause mud line whip and injure employees. 

27.5.4 Breaking Operation. The operator must have eye contact with the 

employee placing the tongs, forks, or wrenches when breaking drilling tools, 

rods or casing with the use of the drill’s power. 

27.5.5 Chuck Jaws. Periodically, check the chuck jaws and replace them as 

necessary. 

27.5.6 String of Drill Rods. Do not tighten the chuck jaws against a moving 

drill string. Use a cat line or hoisting cable and plug for braking before 

tightening the chuck. 

27.5.7 Supporting Drill Rods. Use mechanical means to raise or lower drill 

rods. 

27.5.8 Drilling with Air. When drilling with air, direct the exhaust into a 

dust collection system, divert it through a long discharge hose away from 

drilling personnel, or dampen it with water or a wetting agent to control the 

dust. Direct the cuttings to the side away from employees. 
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling 

Standards 

October 2009 27-5 

27.5.9 Cleaning Drill Rods. When using drilling fluids, use a rubber or 

other suitable wiper to remove material from the drill rods when removing 

them from the drill hole. 

27.5.10 Pipe Wrench Jaws. Check pipe wrench jaws periodically and 

replace them as they become worn. 

27.5.11 Draining of Drill Rod. Allow drill rods to drain completely 

following breaking and before removing them from the working area. 

27.5.12 Hoisting of Drill Rod. The operator must exercise care to avoid a 

sudden release of the drill rod while the rod is being carried from the hole. 

27.5.13 Hoist Capacity. Determine the hoist capacity and weight of the drill 

rod to prevent collapse of the mast during drill string removal. Do NOT 

exceed the operating capacity of the mast and hoist. 

27.5.14 Cleaning of Auger Flights. Do NOT clean auger flights while the 

auger is rotating. 

27.5.15 Auger Sections. Avoid mismatching auger sections. Do NOT use 

different brands and different weights in the same auger string. 

27.5.16 Fitting Pins. Use only tight-fitting pins designed for the auger. 

Inspect all connectors daily, and do not use any defective connectors. 

27.5.17 Drill Hole Protection. Adequately cover or protect unattended drill 

holes to prevent animals or people from accidently falling into them. 

27.5.18 Warning Signs. On all equipment, install a durable warning sign 

containing the following wording in full view of the operator: 

• All personnel must be clear before starting machine 

• Stop the auger to clean it 

• Stop engine when repairing, lubricating, or refueling 

• Do not wear loose fitting clothing or gauntlet-type gloves 

27.6 Underground Drilling Operations 

27.6.1 General Requirements. All drilling activities conducted underground 

must comply with the section, "Tunnel and Shaft Construction" of this 

standard and 29 CFR 1926, Subpart S, "Tunnels and Shafts, Caissons, 

Cofferdams, and Compressed Air," of the Safety and Health Regulations for 

Construction. 

27.6.2 Access. Provide and maintain a safe means of access to all 

underground working places. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

27-6 October 2009 

27.6.3 Lowering and Hoisting Equipment in Shafts. Do not carry heavy 

equipment down ladders into a shaft. Provide mechanical hoisting devices to 

lower and hoist equipment in shafts more than 10 feet deep. 

27.6.4 Unattended Shafts. Use barricades equipped with gates or doors to 

restrict access to unattended shaft openings. Fence and post subsidence areas 

that present hazards. 

27.6.5 Evacuation Plan. Develop evacuation plans and procedures before 

startup and make them known to all employees. 

27.6.6 Underground Ventilation. Mechanically ventilate underground work 

areas in accordance with the section, "Tunnel and Shaft Construction." 

Provide a minimum air velocity of 100 feet per minute (FPM) over the gross 

bore area of the underground workings. 

27.6.7 Scaling Work Areas. Thoroughly scale work areas before any 

drilling operations and periodically during all underground work. 

27.6.8 Walkway. Maintain a clear walkway and do not allow equipment or 

materials to obstruct the passageway. 

27.6.9 Drainage. Provide and maintain drainage away from the work site. 

27.6 .10 Lighting. Install and maintain sufficient lighting in work areas and 

access ways. Illuminate all work areas with a minimum of 10-foot candles. 

27.6.11 Electric Service Lines. All work areas must have electrical service 

lines that are insulated, strung on insulators, and separated from water, air, or 

telephone lines. 

27.6.12 Hardhats. Employees must wear hardhats conforming with 

ANSI Z89.1, type I, class E. 

27.6.13 Miner’s Lamps. Provide miner’s lamps to all employees who work 

underground and ensure all employees wear them while working 

underground. Install a lighting system to provide illumination. 

27.6.14 Rain Clothing. Wear rain suits if conditions warrant. 

27.6.15 Anchors. Install rock bolts or anchors in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s instructions. Rock bolts or anchors used for lifting and pulling 

must have a safety factor of 5. Adequately torque all rock bolts in accordance 

with manufactures’ recommendations. 

27.6.16 Column Mounted Drill Units. Securely stabilize all column mount 

drills with necessary timbers and wedges adjacent to column foot plates. 

Drive wedges into place and nail them to adjacent timbers to prevent vibration 

movement. 
Section 27—Reclamation Drilling 

Standards 

October 2009 27-7 

27.6.17 Flammable Liquids or Gases. Do not allow flammable liquids or 

gases underground, except as needed for welding and cutting. 
October 2009 28-1 

Section 28 

Watercraft and Dredging 

This section sets forth the requirements for watercraft and dredging. The 

requirements for actual watercraft and dredging equipment are discussed, as well 

as the requirements for personnel performing such watercraft and dredging 

operations. Inspection, training, certification, and various operating activities are 

discussed in detail. 

28.1 General Requirements for Watercraft Operations 

28.1.1 Requirement. Construct all watercraft and perform all watercraft 

operations according to the requirements of these standards, as well as 

applicable U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), Department of the Interior, State, and 

local requirements. 

28.1.2 Inspection and Certification. Inspect, certify, license, and number 

all watercraft and equipment according to applicable regulations of USCG and 

other jurisdictional entities before placing them in service. 

28.1.3 Capacity Plates. Plainly mark on all watercraft the maximum 

occupancy and carrying capacity allowed onboard for safe passage (i.e., 

USCG maximum capacities). Do not exceed this maximum occupancy or 

carrying capacity. 

28.1.4 Loading. Make sure each boat has enough room, freeboard, and 

stability to safely carry the maximum cargo and passengers under various 

weather and water conditions. 

28.1.5 Flame Arresters. Equip gasoline engines, except for outboard types, 

with a USCG-approved backfire flame arrestor. Make sure the arrestor is 

attached to the air intake with a flame-tight connection. It must be kept clean 

and in serviceable condition. 

28.1.6 Fire Extinguishers. For watercraft less than 65 feet in length, at least 

one USCG-approved fire extinguisher, rated 2-A:40-B:C or greater, must be 

carried onboard. Watercraft 65 feet or larger must carry sufficient fire 

extinguishers to meet USCG requirements. Watercraft with gasoline or liquid 

petroleum gas powerplants located in a compartment or confined location 

must have a fixed automatic carbon dioxide (or equivalent) fire-extinguishing 

system. 

28.1.7 Ventilation. Watercraft with permanently installed gasoline engines 

must have powered ventilation systems to remove gasoline vapors from the 

vessel. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

28-2 October 2009 

28.1.8 Fuel. Store fuel in approved containers suitable for marine use. Fuel 

lines must be equipped with a valve to cut off fuel flow. In addition, if the 

watercraft will not be in use for a period of 8 hours or longer, then the valve 

must be closed. 

28.1.9 Navigation Lights. Watercraft must be able to display navigation 

lights required by USCG. Display navigation lights between sunset and 

sunrise and any other time visibility is reduced (fog, haze, rain, etc.). 

28.1.10 Operator Training and Qualification. Reclamation employees and 

others who operate a Reclamation-owned watercraft must first be certified or 

licensed to operate watercraft in accordance with DOI 485 DM 22. NonReclamation employees who operate watercraft owned by others must be 

qualified in accordance with USCG, State, and local regulations. 

28.1.11 Float Plans. If the operator expects watercraft activities to take 

longer than 4 hours from time of departure until time of return, a float plan 

must be prepared. The float plan must include the following information: 

• Watercraft information (vessel make/model or local identifier) 

• Personnel onboard 

• Activity to be performed 

• Expected time of departure, route, and time of return 

• Means of communication (if any) 

28.1.12 Personal Flotation Devices (PFD) Equip watercraft with one 

USCG-approved PFD for each occupant, and once USCG-approved throwable 

device onboard the watercraft. Wear a PFD whenever you are onboard a 

watercraft or working around bodies of water where a drowning hazard exists. 

Refer to the section on "Personal Protective Equipment." 

28.1.13 Safety Equipment. Equip all watercraft with adequate safety 

equipment to meet USCG requirements and any hazards that may be 

encountered during normal operations. 

28.1.14 Swimming. You must not swim from watercraft or any floating 

equipment unless you are a certified diver whose duties require such 

swimming. 

28.2 Dredging Operations 

28.2.1 Inspections. A qualified person must inspect dredges and related 

equipment before they are entered into service, and at least yearly thereafter, 

to make sure they are in safe operating condition. The inspector must have a 

recognized degree, certificate, or license, or professional standing, as well as 

extensive knowledge, training, and experience in solving problems related to 

the work. Inspections must be documented and accessible to personnel. 
Section 28—Watercraft and 

Dredging 

October 2009 28-3 

28.2.2 Maintenance and Repair. Before performing repair or maintenance 

work on the pump, suction, or discharge lines below the water line, or within 

the hull, in addition to the normal process of securing hoisting machinery, you 

must raise the ladder (or drag arm) above the water line and positively secure 

it. Set blank or block plates in suction or discharge lines as appropriate. Also 

see the section on "Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)." 

28.2.3 Pipeline Marking. Dredge pipelines that float or are supported on 

trestles must display appropriate lights at night and when visibility is 

restricted, in accordance with USCG regulations and 33 CFR 88.15. 

28.2.4 Public Notification. Issue public notices where dredging activity may 

pose hazards to navigation or to the public. 

28.2.5 Safety Plans. Prepare a comprehensive safety plan for each dredging 

operation. Make the plan location specific and include provisions for 

communications and emergency response. 

28.2.6 Submerged Dredge Pipeline 

a. Where a pipeline crosses a navigation channel or other area subject to 

boat traffic, submerged pipeline must rest on the channel bottom. The top 

of the pipeline and any anchor securing the pipe must be no higher than 

the maximum draft of traffic expected in the area where pipe is placed. 

b. When buoyant or semibuoyant pipeline is used, the dredge operator 

must make sure the pipeline remains fully submerged and on the bottom. 

When raising the pipeline, warn boat traffic of the pipeline hazard. 

Adequately mark the entire length of the pipeline as required by the 

USCG. 

c. Mark the entire location of the submerged pipeline with signs, buoys, 

lights, or flags as required by USCG and as approved by the authority 

having jurisdiction. 

d. Conduct routine inspections of the submerged pipe to ensure 

anchorage. 

e. Remove all anchors and related materials when removing the 

submerged pipe. 

28.2.7 Floating Pipeline. Floating pipeline is any pipeline not anchored on 

the channel bottom. Clearly mark floating pipeline, including rubber 

discharge hoses. Do not allow pipelines to fluctuate between the water 

surface and the channel bottom or to lie partially submerged. 

a. If floating pipelines are used as accessways, equip them with a 

walkway and handrail on one side. Personnel using the walkway or 

working on the pipeline must wear an approved PFD. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

28-4 October 2009 

28.2.8 Dredge Design. Design dredges so that a failure or rupture of any of 

the dredge pump components (including dredge pipe) will not cause the 

dredge to sink. 

a. Dredge Pumps. Any dredge with a dredge pump below the water line 

must have a bilge alarm or automatically shut down in the event of a pump 

leak. 

b. Fall Protection. Provide guardrails, bulwarks, or taut cable guard 

lines for deck openings, elevated surfaces, or other locations where a 

person may slip or fall from them. Guardrails and taut cable guard lines 

must comply with the requirements for standard guardrails. 

c. Walking and Working Surfaces 

1. Provide anti-slip surfaces on all working decks, stair treads, vessel 

ladders, and other walking or working surfaces that may become wet 

during operations. 

2. Remove obstructions in walking and working surfaces if possible. 

Where obstructions cannot be removed, post appropriate warning signs 

or distinctively mark them in accordance with section 9 and 

ANSI Z535.1. 

3. Where the distance between the vessel and docks or landings 

exceeds 18 inches horizontal or 12 inches vertical, provide gangways. 

Gangways must be at least 22 inches wide, with standard railings, and 

be able to support 250 pounds (with a safety factor of 4:1) at its 

midpoint. 

28.2.9 Relocation. A qualified person must directly supervise any 

mobilization, demobilization, or relocation of dredges, support barges, or 

other support equipment. 
October 2009 29-1 

Section 29 

Marine and Diving Operations 

This section establishes the requirements for marine and diving operations, 

oversight of contractor diving operations and Reclamation diving operations. 

Issues discussed include dive team requirements, diver qualifications, predive 

planning, hazard control measures, supervision, equipment, recordkeeping, 

accident reporting and first aid, recompression, surface-supplied air diving, scuba 

diving, and communication systems. 

29.1 Requirements for Contractor Diving Operations 

29.1.1 General Requirements. Conventional hardhat and lightweight 

surface supplied and scuba diving operations must conform to the more 

stringent requirements of this subsection or 29 CFR 1910, Subpart T, 

“Commercial Diving Operations.” Use regulations contained in the 

U.S. Navy Diving Manual, volumes I through V, to resolve issues not covered 

by these or referenced standards. 

29.1.2 Hazard Control Measures. Bring diving equipment to the worksite 

only after a Safe Practices Manual, diving plan, and dive hazard analysis have 

been developed and the Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR) or Dive 

Master has approved it. The dive hazard analysis and diving plan must 

specifically address safety procedures for each separate diving location or 

mode and include policies to ensure compliance with these and referenced 

standards. If conditions change, cease diving operations until you reevaluate 

conditions and implement appropriate controls. 

29.1.3 Diver Qualifications. Divers, including those on standby, must have 

a certificate of training from a recognized diving school or certified record of 

past diving experience. Prior to commencing diving operations, submit 

divers’ names and qualifications to the COR or Dive Master. Divers must be 

at least 18 years old and be fully familiar with the equipment, diving system, 

and emergency procedures to be used. Divers must have undergone a medical 

examination within the past year that certifies them as physically fit for 

diving. In addition, a diver may dive to depths greater than 100 feet seawater 

equivalent only if they have previous experience diving to the maximum 

depth required in the planned dive. Divers must not take part in diving 

operations if they have severe colds, sinus or ear infections, alcohol 

intoxication or its aftereffects, drug addiction, fatigue, acute illness, or vertigo. 

All dive team members must be trained in cardiopulmonary resuscitation, first 

aid (American Red Cross standard course, or equivalent), and oxygen first aid. 

29.1.4 Supervision. A designated, experienced, onsite Dive Master must 

personally supervise all diving operations, including use of personnel and 

decompression. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-2 October 2009 

29.1.5 Equipment. Use a tagging or logging system to record equipment 

modification, repair, test, calibration, or maintenance services. Include the 

date and type of work performed and the name or initials of the person who 

did the work. 

a. Air Compressor System. Compressors that supply air to the surfacesupplied air (SSA) diver must have a volume cylinder with a check valve 

on the inlet side, a pressure gauge, a relief valve, a drain valve, and a 

carbon monoxide filter and alarm system. Compressors must have the 

capacity to overcome any line loss or other losses and deliver a minimum 

of 4.5 cubic feet per minute to each diver at the maximum working depth. 

Locate air compressor intakes away from areas containing exhaust or other 

contaminants. Respirable air supplied to a diver, or to air tanks, must not 

contain: 

1. Carbon monoxide (CO) greater than 10 parts per million (ppm). 

2. Carbon dioxide (CO2) greater than 1,000 ppm. 

3. Oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter. 

4. A noxious or strong odor. 

Test the air compressor system output for air purity at least every 

6 months, by taking samples at the connection to the distribution system. 

b. Compressed Gas Cylinders. Compressed gas cylinders must: 

1. Be designed and maintained according to the applicable provisions 

of 29 CFR 1910.101(a). 

2. Be stored in a ventilated area and protected from excessive heat. 

3. Be secured against falling. 

4. Have shutoff valves recessed into the cylinder or protected by a 

cap, except when in use, when manifolded, or when used for diving. 

29.1.6 Surface-Supplied Air Diving 

a. Auxiliary Air Supply. Provide an auxiliary air supply during all 

dives. The auxiliary air supply must have a standby compressor or air 

flasks with a capacity of 72 cubic feet or more. Compressors that are used 

for diving operations must not be used for any other purpose. Auxiliary 

air supply must meet the requirements in the subsection, "Air Compressor 

System." 

b. Decompression. A recognized decompression specialist must prepare 

decompression tables. Post decompression times inside and outside 

decompression chambers. 
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations 

October 2009 29-3 

c. Decompression Chamber. The following circumstances require an 

onsite, dual-lock, multiplace decompression chamber (capable of 

recompressing the diver to a minimum of 165 feet seawater equivalent) 

and trained operating personnel: 

• Diving operations that are outside the no-decompression limits or 

to depths greater than 100 feet seawater 

• When surface recompressing capabilities are recommended by the 

decompression specialists, Dive Master, or where necessitated by 

onsite conditions 

Decompression chambers must accommodate at least two persons. 

d. Decompression Dives. Divers engaged in dives outside nodecompression limits or engaged in mixed-gas diving must remain awake 

and close to an attended decompression chamber for at least 1 hour 

following the dive. The diver must be able to contact a decompression 

chamber facility during the 4-hour period immediately following treatment 

or after leaving the water. 

e. Communications. Equip divers and standby divers with 

communication systems that permit simultaneous, two-way conversations 

between the diver, his tender, other divers and tenders, and the Dive 

Master. Communication systems must be operable from the time the diver 

puts on his helmet or mask until it is removed. 

f. Minimum Crew Size. Two divers must be available on any one diving 

operation. The standby diver must be available, suited up, and ready to 

dive in an emergency. The standby diver must not serve as a tender. The 

minimum crew must consist of at least four persons: the Dive Master, a 

diver, a standby diver, and a tender. For each diver added to the crew, one 

tender must also be added. 

g. Reserve Breathing Gas Supply. Each diver using lightweight SSA 

must carry a reserve breathing gas tank. When heavy, deep-sea diving 

gear are used, when diving to depths exceeding 100 feet of seawater, or 

when diving outside the no-decompression limits, the standby diver must 

have an extra breathing gas hose for the working diver. 

29.1.7 Scuba Diving 

a. Requirement. Scuba diving is permitted only when sanctioned by the 

contract specifications and authorized in writing by the contracting officer. 

b. Maximum Depths. Limit scuba diving to depths and times that will 

not require decompression staging as set forth in the U.S. Navy Standard 

Air Decompression Tables. Scuba dives depths must not exceed 100 feet 

of seawater after altitude adjustment. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-4 October 2009 

c. Compressed Air. Oxygen or mixed gases are prohibited, except for up 

to 40 percent nitrox, when used in accordance with the National Oceanic 

and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) Diving Manual: Diving for 

Science and Technology, Chapter 15, "Nitrox Diving" and Appendix VII, 

"Nitrox Dive Tables." Use only open circuit scuba systems. 

d. Diving Equipment. A recognized approving agency must approve 

scuba diving equipment. Use and maintain scuba diving equipment in 

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 

e. Buddy System. A dive may be made singly if the dive is less than 

20 feet deep, there is little current, and visibility is good (at the discretion 

of the Dive Master). All other dives with scuba gear must use a buddy 

system. 

f. Standby Diver. Provide a standby diver for each diver or buddy pair. 

The standby diver must be a qualified, fully equipped scuba diver and 

remain on the surface, close to the diver. 

g. Standard Equipment. Scuba divers must wear buoyancy 

compensators and have a depth indicating device, timing device, cutting 

tool, compass, submersible pressure gauge (or integrated dive computer) 

to monitor cylinder/system air pressure, and an alternate second stage air 

source, such as an octopus or safe second. 

29.2 Requirements for Reclamation Diving Operations 

29.2.1 Regulations and Policy. Reclamation diving operations must comply 

with the requirements of 29 CFR 1910, Subpart T, “Commercial Diving 

Operations.” The policies and guidelines for Dive Team establishment, 

review, training, certification, and diver qualifications are contained in 

Department of the Interior Manual 485 (Safety and Health Handbook), 

Chapter 27, “Underwater Diving Safety.” Use the U.S. Navy Diving Manual, 

Volumes I, II, and V, to resolve issues not covered by these or referenced 

standards. 

29.2.2 Reclamation Oversight. A Bureau Diving Safety Board and a 

Regional Diving Advisory Committee (RDAC) must oversee Reclamation 

diving operations. These organizations must provide guidance for the safety 

of all diving operations. They are responsible for: 

a. Establishing a Bureau of Reclamation Safe Practices Manual for 

Underwater Inspection Program. 

b. Reviewing diving activities. 

c. Establishing qualifications for divers. 
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations 

October 2009 29-5 

d. Providing periodic diver training opportunities. 

e. Approving dive teams and Dive Masters. 

f. Reviewing all diving operations and accidents. 

29.2.3 Diving Operations. 

a. General. Sufficiently train and equip Reclamation dive team members 

with resources to safely perform diving operations. 

b. Restrictions on Specialized Diving. Reclamation teams must not 

undertake specialized operations, such as underwater welding, gas or 

electric arc cutting and burning, or explosive demolition. Permitted 

activities include minor maintenance (such as removing rocks and debris 

from stilling basins; operating small, hand-held, nonelectric power tools; 

inspections; and assisting surface maintenance crews with installation or 

cleaning operations). 

c. Recordkeeping. 

1. Each diver must maintain a dive log that contains, at a minimum, 

the following information: 

• Names of dive team members (including Dive Master) 

• Location 

• Date 

• Time 

• Diving mode 

• General nature of the work performed 

• Appropriate surface and underwater conditions 

• Maximum depth and bottom times 

• Any accidents or unusual conditions encountered 

RDAC will ensure that accurate dive logs are maintained and tabulated 

on an annual basis. 

2. Maintain a log of all equipment modifications, repairs, tests, 

calibrations, and maintenance. 

3. Maintain the underwater diving safety records identified above and 

other dive team records in accordance with table 29-1. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-6 October 2009 

Table 29-1.—Dive team recordkeeping 

Record Instructions Retention period1

 Responsibility 

Injury or illness requiring 

hospitalization of 

24 hours 

Notify RDAC, report using 

SMIS system within 6 days; 

CA-1 within 2 days 

5 years (SMIS) 

Permanent (CA-1) 

Team leader 

Minor diving injuries Report using SMIS system 

within 6 days; (CA-1) within 

2 days 

5 years (SMIS) 

Permanent (CA-1) 

Team leader 

Safe practices manual Retain copy at dive site Current document Dive Master 

Depth-time profiles Individual records Until transferred to the 

dive log 

Diver 

Recording of dives (dive 

log) 

Individual records (tabulated 

annually) 

1 year, unless an 

accident; in case of 

accident, 5 years 

Dive Master 

Dive hazard analysis and 

briefing notes 

Review and discuss dive 

hazard analysis prior to 

each dive. 

1 year Dive Master 

Dive team medical 

records and medical 

clearance 

Keep with medical records. 

Retain copy of medical 

clearance at dive site. 

5 years; most recent 

clearance (1 year) 

Team leader 

Equipment inspections, 

repairs, maintenance, 

and calibration 

Keep current record until 

equipment is withdrawn from 

service. 

Most current tag or entry Team leader 

Dive training and dive 

training summary 

Individual diver must 

maintain it as a continuous 

record; annual summary at 

dive site. 

Continuous running 

record; summaries 

every 5 years 

Team leader 

Compressor air quality Check every 180 days. Most current record Team leader 1

 Records required to be retained 5 years (with the exception of minor injuries report) must be forwarded by 

Reclamation to the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and 

Human Services. 

d. Dive Plan and Hazard Analysis. Prepare a dive plan and hazard 

analysis before each diving activity. All personnel involved must review 

the dive plan and hazard analysis before suiting up. As a minimum, the 

plan must contain the following: 

1. Names and duties of dive team members, including diving 

supervisor. 

2. Date, time, and location of the dive operation. 

3. Diving mode to be used (scuba, surface-supplied air, etc.), 

including a description of the backup air supply. 

4. A description of the work divers will perform, and inspection 

requirements. 

5. Surface and underwater conditions, including visibility, 

temperature, thermal protection, and currents. 
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations 

October 2009 29-7 

6. Activity hazard analysis for each phase of work, including the 

hazards of flying after diving. 

7. Maximum depth and bottom time (make altitude adjustments to 

dive tables for dives at altitudes of 1000 feet or more above sea level). 

8. Emergency management plan, including emergency procedures, 

means of notification, telephone numbers (for ambulance, doctors, and 

Divers Alert Network), locations of evacuation route, and emergency 

assistance. 

9. Lockout/tagout procedures, including how to deal with differential 

water pressures due to unequal water elevations. 

10. Equipment servicing records, procedures, and checklists and 

requirements for special tools and equipment. 

29.2.4 Accident and Incidents. Report all accidents that occur in connection 

with a diving activity, following standard accident reporting procedures (see 

table 29-1). In addition, the team leader must submit to the RDAC a 

comprehensive analysis of each accident or incident involving a diver. The 

purpose of the accident and incident analyses is to identify hazardous 

situations and constructively prevent their recurrence. 

29.2.5 Diving Supervision. The Dive Master must attend each diving 

operation. The Dive Master is responsible for predive planning, the dive 

hazard analysis, and the conduct and safety of the dive. The Dive Master’s 

decisions are final. However, a diver who considers a diving operation unsafe 

is not required to participate in the dive. 

29.2.6 Required Divers. At least three divers must be present during all 

Reclamation dives. In addition to the diver, there must be a standby safety 

diver and the Dive Master. Top side personnel are responsible for tending the 

diver, recordkeeping, and controlling any surface-supplied breathing air 

equipment. This requirement may be varied only with the approval of the 

Dive Master and RDAC. 

29.2.7 Predive Briefing. Before beginning work on a dive operation, the 

dive team, facility representatives, and/or others involved in, or affected by, 

the operation must meet to review the dive plan and dive hazard analysis and 

to coordinate the diving operation. Maintain a record of the briefing notes. 

29.2.8 Safe Practices Manual. Make the Safe Practices Manual available at 

each dive location. 

29.2.9 Maximum Depth. Limit diving operations to depths and times that 

will not require decompression staging, in accordance with the U.S. Navy 

standard air decompression tables and the altitude conversion tables 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-8 October 2009 

developed by R.L. Bell and R.E. Borgwardt (1975). When diving, do not 

exceed 100 feet of seawater (after altitude conversion). 

29.2.10 Clearance and Lockout Procedures in Areas of Hazardous 

Energy Sources. Use clearance and lockout procedures where hazardous 

energy sources exist. When diving near dams, powerplants, pumping plants, 

or diversion structures with mechanical or electrical features that could pose a 

hazard to divers, a technical representative from the project at which the dive 

is being made must be present or in direct communication to assist the divers. 

All divers must review the clearance before beginning diving operations. 

Clearance procedures and lockouts must conform with the section, "Control of 

Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout)" of this standard. 

29.2.11 Pressure Differentials. Review diving operations for potential 

hazards to divers before beginning to dive on the upstream or high-pressure 

side of open or badly leaking gates, valves, diversion structures, or other 

features where a combination of flow and pressure differential could 

immobilize a diver. 

29.2.12 Equipment. Equip each diver to ensure personal safety. No diver is 

required to dive with a type or brand of equipment they consider unsafe. 

Divers must not dive with equipment known to be damaged or improperly 

maintained. 

a. Basic Auxiliary Requirement. The basic auxiliary requirement for 

each scuba diver includes, but is not limited to: 

1. Buoyancy compensating device. 

2. Depth indicating device. 

3. Timing device. 

4. Cutting tool. 

5. Compass. 

6. Submersible pressure gauge (or integrated dive computer) to 

monitor cylinder/system air pressure. 

7. Alternate second stage air source, such as an octopus or safe 

second. 

b. Equipment Inspection. Before diving operations begin, and every 

day during dive operations, dive team personnel must inspect the 

equipment to make sure it is in proper operating condition. Record 

inspection results in a dive log or as required by the Safe Practices 

Manual. 
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations 

October 2009 29-9 

c. Air Cylinders. Every year, have all air cylinders visually inspected by 

a certified cylinder inspector, attach an inspection sticker to the cylinder 

and issue a certificate. Hydrostatically test the cylinders every 5 years in 

accordance with U.S. Department of Transportation regulations. 

Permanently mark the cylinder with the most recent test date. 

d. Regulators. A diver’s first and second stage regulators must be 

professionally inspected at least once a year, or more frequently if 

recommended by the manufacturer. Retain the inspection certificate until 

the next inspection or maintenance. 

29.2.13 Diving Flag. Fly a red flag 

with white diagonal stripe (see 

figure 29-1) at all times when divers are 

working near motor boats or other 

dangerous watercraft, or where mandated 

by State or national Coast Guard 

regulations. 

29.2.14 Surfacing. Divers must surface 

when the cylinder pressure reaches 500 

pounds per square inch or at the first 

signs of equipment malfunction. 

29.2.15 Recompression Chamber 

Location. Include in the dive hazard 

analysis all emergency telephone 

numbers, including the Divers Alert Network (DAN) and the local hospital. 

DAN maintains a listing of the closest recompression chambers for each day. 

The dive hazard analysis must also specify the most effective mode of 

transportation to the hospital, as determined by the Dive Master. 

29.2.16 Repetitive Dive Tables. Keep repetitive dive tables at the dive site 

as part of the dive plan and dive hazard analysis. 

29.2.17 Emergency First Aid Equipment. Make emergency first aid 

equipment immediately available to the dive team. Include in the dive plan 

and dive hazard analysis the location and telephone number of an ambulance 

service and hospital near the dive area. Emergency first aid equipment must 

include a first aid kit, spine board, and a demand-type oxygen unit able to 

deliver at least 15 liters of oxygen per minute. When traveling to remote sites 

where professional medical assistance is more than 1-1/2 hours away, have 

Remote Emergency Medical Oxygen available at all times. 

29.2.18 Post-Dive Restrictions 

a. Commercial Flying. Wait a minimum of 12 hours after completing a 

single no- compression dive, or 24 hours after multiple days of diving or 

decompression dives. 

Figure 29-1.—Diving flag. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-10 October 2009 

b. Driving to Altitude. Divers shall correct for altitude prior to diving by 

assuming the highest point to be reached after the dive is the altitude of the 

dive. Refer to the Travel Delay Table and Altitude Modifications 

discussion in Bureau of Reclamation Safe Practices Manual for 

Underwater Inspection Program. 

29.2.19 Individual Safety. Divers are ultimately responsible for their own 

safety. It is the diver’s responsibility and privilege to refuse to dive if, in the 

diver’s judgment, conditions are unsafe, unfavorable, or the dive would 

violate the dictates of their training, judgment, or these regulations. 

29.2.20 Transporting Cylinders. Transport all dive cylinders in racks 

designed for this purpose or secure them safely. Shade dive cylinders and 

maintain the temperature at less than 100 F if possible. If the temperature, 

elevation, or other conditions cannot be controlled, reduce the pressure to 

avoid exceeding the cylinder’s working pressure. 

29.2.21 Scuba Diving 

a. Compressed Air. Use only open-circuit type scuba equipment using 

compressed air. Obtain compressed air from a reliable source, meeting the 

specifications of Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Standard G7.1, 

Commodity Specification for Air. 

b. Penetration Drive. You must not dive with scuba, under overhead 

obstructions, or when vertical access to the surface is restricted if you can 

become disoriented as to the egress direction. Limit penetration to less 

than 50 feet. 

c. Standby Diver. Provide a standby diver for each working unit or pair 

of divers. The standby diver must be suited up and have all diving gear 

available for immediate use. Position the standby diver to respond quickly 

to the needs of the divers. 

d. Buddy System. Conduct all scuba diving activities using a buddy 

system, unless the Dive Master determines that two divers working in 

close proximity will increase the hazards. A single diver may work alone, 

subject to the following conditions: 

1. The working depth does not exceed 20 feet, or 30 feet with 

approval by the Dive Master and Safety Manager. 

2. A standby diver is provided for the single diver. 

3. The Dive Master, standby diver, and diver clearly understand that 

the diver will be working alone. 

4. The Dive Master, standby diver, and diver agree, in advance, on the 

exact operation. The diver must not alter the agreed-upon operation or 

stray from the prescribed locality. 
Section 29—Marine and Diving Operations 

October 2009 29-11 

29.2.22 Surface-Supplied Air Diving. SSA diving is permitted only if 

divers, standby divers, and console operators have successfully completed 

SSA training by an RDAC-approved instructor from an accredited or 

nationally recognized organization. 

a. Air Supply. Each diving operation must have a primary breathing air 

supply sufficient to support divers for the duration of the planned dive. 

Air supply to SSA must be a manifold control system of scuba cylinders 

that meet the criteria of this section or a volume tank specifically designed 

for use in a breathing air system. A manifold system must be at least a 

two-cylinder system and allow cylinders to be changed without shutting 

down the air supply. 

b. Air Quality. Respirable air that will be supplied to divers through 

cylinders must be obtained from suppliers whose air is tested every 6 

months by an independent tester. Respirable air must not contain: 

1. Carbon monoxide greater than 10 ppm. 

2. Carbon dioxide greater than 1,000 ppm. 

3. Oil mist greater than 5 milligrams per cubic meter. 

4. A noxious or pronounced odor. 

c. Reserve Breathing Air. Equip each diver with a reserve breathing 

supply that the diver can immediately turn on if the primary air source is 

lost. 

d. Umbilicals. Mark umbilicals in 10-foot increments to 100 feet, 

beginning at the diver’s end, and in 50-foot increments thereafter. 

Umbilicals must be made of kink-resistant materials. Include a safety line 

as an integral part of each umbilical. Umbilicals must have a nominal 

breaking strength of at least 1,000 pounds. 

e. Helmets. SSA helmets and masks must have a check valve at the 

attachment between the helmet or mask and hose. They must also have an 

exhaust valve. Helmets and masks must have a minimum ventilation rate 

capacity of 4.5 cubic feet per minute at the depth in which they are 

operated. 

f. Weight System. Equip divers with a weight belt that can release 

quickly. 

g. Safety Harness. Divers must wear a safety harness. The safety 

harness must have a positive buckling device and an attachment point for 

the umbilical and safety line. 

h. Equipment Records. Record each equipment modification, repair, 

test, calibration, or maintenance service in the equipment log. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

29-12 October 2009 

i. Minimum Crew Size. At least two divers must be available on any 

one diving operation. The standby diver must be suited up and ready to 

dive in an emergency. The standby diver must not serve as a tender. The 

crew must consist of at least four persons: the Dive Master, a diver, a 

standby diver, and a tender. For each diver added to the crew, one tender 

must also be added. 

j. Dive Tender. While in the water, each diver must be continuously 

tended by one tender. 

k. Penetration Dive. Station an SSA diver at the underwater point of 

entry when diving takes place in enclosed or physically confining area. 

Limit penetration to 300 feet total distance. 

l. Standby Diver. While a diver is in the water, the SSA standby diver 

must be suited up and ready to dive in an emergency. 

m. Communication System. All SSA diving operations require 

electronic communication systems. The communication system must 

provide diver-to-diver and diver-to-surface communication. If voice 

communications are lost, terminate all diving. 
October 2009 Append-i 

Contents for Appendices A-L 

Page

Appendix A – Job Hazard Analysis ........................................................ A-1 

Appendix B – Contractor Safety Program ............................................. B-1 

Program Outline.......................................................................................... B-1 

 I. General Requirements................................................................... B-1 

 II. Medical......................................................................................... B-2 

 III. Communications ......................................................................... B-2 

 IV. Occupational Health ................................................................... B-2 

 V. Machinery and Mechanical Equipment ....................................... B-2 

 VI. Excavation and Demolition ........................................................ B-2 

 VII. Working Surfaces...................................................................... B-3 

 VIII. Protection of the Public............................................................ B-3 

 IX. Marine and Diving Operations ................................................... B-3 

 X. Electrical Facilities....................................................................... B-3 

 XI. Required Safety Program Coordination...................................... B-3 

Appendix C – Electrical Grounding........................................................ C-1 

Low-Voltage Equipment Grounding .......................................................... C-1 

Equipment Grounding................................................................................. C-1 

The Earth Shall Not Be Used as the Sole Equipment Grounding 

Conductor.......................................................................................... C-1 

A Grounding Electrode or Ground Rod is Not for the Purpose of 

Clearing Ground Faults in Low-Voltage Circuits............................. C-2 

Building Steel is Not Permitted to be Used as the Required 

Equipment Grounding Conductor (See NEC 250-58)...................... C-3 

Reclamation Does Not Permit Conduit, Cable Tray, Electrical 

Metallic Tubing (EMT), Liquidtite Conduit, Flexible 

Conduit (Flex), or Any Other Conductive Raceways as 

Equipment Grounding Conductors ................................................... C-3 

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI), for 125-Volt, 15- and 

20-Amp Receptacles Are Required in All Damp and 

Wet (Conductive) Locations and Any Other Location Where 

Conductive Material is Nearby......................................................... C-4 

Caution When Using Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators .............. C-4 

Portable and Vehicle (Trailer or Truck) Mounted Generators Do 

Not Require Ground Rods ................................................................ C-4 

Do Not Use Electrical Enclosure and Other Steel Structures as 

Equipment Grounding Conductors ................................................... C-4 

Electrical Enclosure .................................................................................... C-5 

Tools and Appliances.................................................................................. C-5 

Portable Cords/Extension Cords................................................................. C-5 
Append-ii October 2009 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Ground Fault Protection While Using Temporary Power .......................... C-6 

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters ............................................................... C-7 

Appendix D – Wire Rope ......................................................................... D-1 

1.0 General............................................................................................... D-1 

1.1 General .................................................................................... D-1 

1.2 Materials.................................................................................. D-1 

1.3 Terminology ............................................................................ D-1 

2.0 Wire Rope End Connectors ............................................................... D-4 

2.1 General .................................................................................... D-4 

2.2 Wire Rope Clip Connectors .................................................... D-4 

2.3 Wedge Socket.......................................................................... D-8 

2.4 Handmade Spliced Eyes.......................................................... D-10 

2.5 Manufactured Eye Splices....................................................... D-10 

2.6 Average Efficiency of Well-Made End Connectors on 

Terminals ............................................................................ D-10 

3.0 Common Safety Factors and Maximum (Safe) Working Loads ....... D-11 

3.1 Safety Factors .......................................................................... D-11 

3.2 Maximum (Safe) Working Load ............................................. D-11 

4.0 Inspection and Retirement of Wire Rope........................................... D-12 

Appendix E – Slings.................................................................................. E-1 

Types........................................................................................................... E-1 

Definitions................................................................................................... E-1 

Safe Practices.............................................................................................. E-3 

Appendix F – Record of Performance Inspection and Test—Crawler, 

 Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes ......................................... F-1 

General........................................................................................................ F-1 

Performance Inspection .............................................................................. F-8 

Performance Test Procedure.............................................................. F-8 

Computation of Test Radius .............................................................. F-9 

Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures .................................. F-9 

Part I - General................................................................................... F-9 

Part II – Braking System, Features, Components, Accessories......... F-10 

Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures............................. F-11 

Appendix G – Record of Performance Inspection and Brake Test— 

 On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment........................................... G-1 

General........................................................................................................ G-1 

Performance Inspection .............................................................................. G-1 
October 2009 Append-iii 

Contents (continued) 

Page

Brake Performance Test Record ................................................................. G-4 

Part I - General ................................................................................. G-4 

Part II – Braking Systems Features, Components, Accessories, 

and Performance Capabilities ........................................................... G-4 

Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures ........................... G-6 

Appendix H – Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake Test— 

 Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction Machines, Loaders, 

 Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders, Tractor Water Wagons, and 

 Similar-Type Machines ................................................................... H-1 

General........................................................................................................ H-1 

Performance Inspection .............................................................................. H-1 

Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures .................................. H-5 

Part I - General ................................................................................. H-5 

Part II – Braking Systems, Features, Components, and 

 Accessories .................................................................................. H-5 

Part III – Brake Testing Methods and Procedures ........................... H-7 

Appendix I – Cleanout Operations.......................................................... I-1 

Appendix J – Explosives........................................................................... J-1 

Appendix K – Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms............. K-1 

Appendix L – Referenced Material......................................................... L-1 
October 2009 A-1 

Appendix A 

Job Hazard Analysis 

Job Hazard Analysis #___ 

Project: Job: Location:

Job description: 

Analysis by: 

Date: 

Reviewed by: 

Date: 

Points of contact : 

Phone number: 

Requirements, including 

training, certifications, 

aurhorizations, permits, and 

licenses: 

Participants: 

Equipment: Applicable regulatory considerations: 

Sequence of Steps Potential Accidents or Hazards Preventive Measures (including 

personal protective quipment) 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Tasks with Potential Exposure to Hazardous Materials, Physical Agents, or Hazardous Conditions

Analysis by: 

Date: 

Reviewed by: 

Date: 

Points of contact: 

Tasks Name of Material or Physical Agent Location Control

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Job Inventory of Hazardous Chemicals

Analysis by: 

Date: 

Reviewed by: 

Date: 

Points of contact: 

Name of chemical Route of entry and physical state Controls 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

1. 

2. 

3. 
October 2009 B-1 

Appendix B 

Contractor Safety Program 

Unless waived by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR), prime and 

supplementary safety program submittals must, as a minimum, address all 

appropriate contractual requirements shown under the program outline. Program 

items will be so detailed that reviewers can ascertain adequacy. The original 

program submittal can cover all work phases, or only address the initial work 

phase with timely supplementary submittals as major work phases occur. 

Contractors desiring to follow this latter course of action will, in the initial 

submission, clearly define the original work covered and the work phases to be 

covered by supplements. 

In no case will any phase of work commence until a program for that portion of 

the work has been accepted by the COR. Original and supplemental submissions 

covering hazardous operations and/or activities will include a standing operating 

procedure (SOP) and hazard analysis. The SOP will break down the operation or 

activity into specific basic steps. The hazard analysis will define the hazards 

associated with each basic step and proposed method(s) for eliminating or 

minimizing the hazard. Such methods will outline, as a minimum, employee 

training requirements, personal protective equipment requirements, procedural 

changes, methods for evaluating program effectiveness, etc. 

All activities involving use of hazardous and/or toxic materials, work in confined 

spaces, work at heights over 6 feet, or underwater require an SOP and hazard 

analysis. Material Safety Data Sheets will be attached to all SOPs governing 

work that involves use of hazardous or toxic materials. 

Program Outline 

I. General Requirements

A. Statement of Policy 

B. Statement of Safety and Health Responsibilities 

C. Statement of Compliance with Regulations, Standards, and Codes 

D. Statement of Subcontractor Compliance 

 E. Safety Inspection Procedures 

 F. Accident Investigation and Reporting Procedures 

 G. Applicable Emergency Plans 

 H. Confined Space Procedures 

 I. Lockout/Tagout Procedures 

 J. Fire Protection Plans 

1. Type and location of suppression equipment or systems 

 2. Offsite assistance agreement 

 3. Temporary heating devices 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

B-2 October 2009 

II. Medical

A. Facilities 

 B. Training 

 C. Certifications 

 D. Physician 

 E. Ambulance (Name, location, and telephone number) 

 F. Physical Qualification of Employees 

 G. Records 

III. Communications

A. Employee Training 

 B. Safety Meetings 

 C. Onsite Training 

 D. Supervisor Training 

IV. Occupational Health

A. Procedures and Equipment to Minimize Hazards 

B. Testing program for employees and work environments 

 C. Qualified personnel 

 D. Personal protective equipment 

 E. Ventilation plans 

V. Machinery and Mechanical Equipment

A. Procedures and Equipment to Minimize Hazards 

1. Testing program for employees and work environments 

 2. Mobile and stationary equipment 

B. Inspection Procedures 

 C. Maintenance Procedures 

 D. Operating Personnel 

 E. Protective Safety Devices and Certifications 

F. Elevators and Aerial Lifts 

VI. Excavation and Demolition

A. Tunnels and Shafts 

1. Internal combustion engines 

 2. Ventilation plans 

 3. Transportation systems and equipment 

 4. Work environment testing 

 5. Ground support 

B. Blasting 

1. Blaster certification 

 2. Written procedures 

 3. Storage 

 4. Transportation 
Appendix B—Contractor 

Safety Program 

October 2009 B-3 

C. Excavations Other Than Tunnels and Shafts 

1. Slide protections 

 2. Support systems 

 3. Inspections 

 4. Access 

D. High Scaling 

1. Definition 

 2. Personal protective equipment 

 3. Standing operating procedure 

E. Haulage 

1. Haul roads 

2. Equipment and Procedures 

VII. Working Surfaces

A. Access 

1. Ladders 

 2. Platforms, stairways, and ramps 

B. Personal Protective Equipment 

 C. Scaffolding 

 D. Safety Nets 

VIII. Protection of the Public

A. Signs and Barricades 

B. Flagging Procedures 

 C. Jurisdictional Approvals 

IX. Marine and Diving Operations

 Detailed Plan and Written Procedures 

X. Electrical Facilities

Substations 

This outline provides guidance in preparing a safety program and does not cover 

all material that may be necessary. The contractor must review specifications and 

all safety and health regulations to ensure a comprehensive plan. 

XI. Required Safety Program Coordination

1. Confined Space Program 

2. Electrical and Lockout/Tagout Program 
October 2009 C-1 Appe

Appendix C

Electrical Grounding 

Low-Voltage Equipment Grounding 

The most frequently cited Office of Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 

electrical violation is improper occupational grounding of equipment or circuits 

(Source: National Institute 

of Safety and Health 

[NIOSH] publication 98-

131).

Equipment Grounding 

Equipment grounding must 

comply with the National 

Electric Code (NEC) Article 

250. All noncurrentcarrying metal enclosures 

for electrical equipment or 

wiring must be grounded. 

Equipment grounding means 

a continuous copper 

conductor connected 

between the grounding 

electrode (rod/grid) 

connection, at the source 

transformer, and at each 

enclosure and equipment 

frame. This is the most 

critical concept in 

equipment grounding. 

Figure C-1 (right) shows an 

outdoor three-phase supply 

for a building remote from 

the powerplant and the 

building service disconnect. 

Note in figure C-1, between 

the transformers and the 

service disconnect, the 

grounded conductor 

(neutral) and the equipment 

Power conductors

from transformer

Building

service

disconnect

Neutral and equipment

ground from transformer

Service disconnect

circuit breaker or 

fusible disconnect switch

Equipment grounding 

conductor to 

equipment enclosures

Neutral conductor to

single phase 

loads if needed

Power conductors

to loads

Ground rod

25 ohm resistance to

earth is acceptable

sec NEC 250-84

Power conductors to

building service

disconnect below

Equipment Ground and

neutral to building

service disconnect below

“Down line”

grounding electrode 

conductor from transformer 

cans and neutral point of

transformer

Pole “butt ground,”

bare copper wire is

wrapped around

bottom of pole to serve

as “ground electrode”

or ground rod

Figure C-1. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

C-2 October 2009 

grounding conductor is the same conductor. This is permitted only on the line 

side of the service disconnect. On the load side of the service disconnect, the 

neutral cannot be used as the equipment grounding conductor. Even though the 

neutral may be needed for single-phase loads. There must be an equipment 

grounding conductor, run from the service disconnect ground connection to each 

enclosure and equipment frame (see NEC 250-23). 

The Earth Shall Not Be Used as the Sole Equipment Grounding 

Conductor 

There must be an electrically continuous (unbroken) conductor, installed between 

each electrical enclosure and the grounding electrode conductor (rod/grid/bed) at 

the source transformer (see NEC 250-51). 

As shown in figure C-2, connections-to-earth (ground rods) and the earth have a 

resistance too high to be an effective equipment grounding conductor. 

Assume low

resistance 

connection

to earth

25 ohm

ground rod

Fault current through earth

Breaker

Ground fault

Figure C-2. 

The most common misconception is that fault current is trying to “get to ground.” 

The correct concept is that fault current uses the earth as a conductor to complete 

the circuit back to the source transformer. The problem is that the earth, and 

connections to earth, are not good conductors. 

A Grounding Electrode or Ground Rod Is Not for the Purpose of 

Clearing Ground Faults in Low-Voltage Circuits 

A ground electrode or ground rod is intended to dissipate static, switching surges, 

and lightning. A ground rod and earth present a resistance too high for lowvoltage breakers and fuses to open quickly. There must be a low-impedance 

equipment grounding conductor between each electrical enclosure and the source 

transformer grounding electrode. 

During a ground fault, enough current must flow to open a breaker or fuse quickly 

to prevent shock, electrocution, or equipment damage. Even a few ohms in the 

grounding circuit will prevent, or greatly slow, the opening of a breaker or fuse. 
Appendix C—Electrical Grounding 

October 2009 C-3 

If there is a ground fault and the circuit is not cleared, electrical enclosures, motor 

frames, and other conductive structures such as handrails and walkways can 

become energized. A person touching any of these may be shocked fatally or 

electrocuted. 

For example, if you do not have an equipment grounding conductor, but you do 

have a good ground rod (NEC 250-84 indicates that a good ground rod is 

25 ohms), Ohms law (I = V/R) gives the current flow. On a 480/277-volt system, 

voltage to ground is 277 volts. Therefore, the ground fault current would only be: 

I = 277/25 or 11 amps. This would not trip even a 15-amp breaker. In a 120-volt 

circuit, only 10 ohms in the equipment grounding circuit will make a 15-amp 

breaker fail to trip (I = 120/10 = 12 amps). This is not very much resistance; a 

rusty bolt can easily add this to a grounding circuit. As mentioned above, a shock 

or electrocution is the likely result. This illustrates why a low impedance 

equipment grounding conductor is so important.

Equipment grounding conductors must be run with the circuit conductors (see 

NEC 250-57b). This reduces impedance in the circuit facilitating opening the 

breaker or fuse. 

Building Steel Is Not 

Permitted to be Used as 

the Required Equipment 

Grounding Conductor 

(See NEC 250-58) 

At right is a 3-phase 

transformer set-up inside a 

plant. Due to high impedance, 

rust and poor electrical 

connections where steel beams 

intersect. Building steel may 

be used as the grounding 

electrode (ground rod), but 

never as the equipment 

grounding conductor. A 

copper equipment grounding 

conductor must be installed to 

each enclosure and load. 

Reclamation Does Not Permit Conduit, Cable Tray, Electrical Metallic 

Tubing (EMT), Liquidtite Conduit, Flexible Conduit (Flex), or Any 

Other Conductive Raceways as Equipment Grounding Conductors 

Time, rust, moisture, vibration, and temperature changes all reduce integrity of 

the numerous electrical connections along the length of these enclosures. This 

STATION SERVICE

Equipment grounding conductor

Transformer

Neutral

Main bonding jumper

Equipment grounding conductor

run with power conductors

Neutral terminal

Circuit

breaker

To loads

Structural steel used

as grounding electrode.

Must not be used as

sole equipment

grounding conductor.

480/277Y

A B

N

G

C

Figure C-3. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

C-4 October 2009 

increases resistance and prevents clearing the circuit in event of a ground fault. 

Therefore, Reclamation requires a copper grounding conductor be run with the 

power conductors from the source transformer grounding electrode connection to 

all enclosures and equipment frames, such as motor starters, motors, junction 

boxes, breaker panels, control panels, heaters, light fixtures, etc. Portable hand 

lamps with metal guards must also be grounded (see NEC 410-42b).

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI), for 125-Volt, 15- and 

20-Amp Receptacles Are Required in All Damp and Wet (Conductive) 

Locations and Any Other Location Where Conductive Material Is 

Nearby 

Any location is considered a damp/wet/conductive location if floors/walls are 

concrete, cinder block, or tile (see NEC 110-16(a)0. Outside locations require 

GFCI protection. Bathrooms, kitchens, shops and most other locations at 

Reclamation facilities are conductive locations and require GFCIs (see NEC 

Article 210, 1999 edition). If the standing surface is conductive material, or if 

grounded conductive material is within reach of a tool/appliance after it is 

plugged into a receptacle, the circuit must be GFCI protected. GFCI s must be 

tested each month or before each use by pressing the test button. Do not use a 

GFCI tester, as many of the designs are incorrect for proper testing. 

Caution When Using Portable and Vehicle Mounted Generators 

Reclamation requires GFCIs on all 120-volt receptacles mounted on any 

generator or vehicle frame. Most portable/vehicle-mounted generators have 

regular 120-volt receptacles without GFCIs. The neutrals are seldom grounded 

by the factory. See FIST 5-3 for the proper method to ground the neutrals and 

replace regular 120-volt receptacles with GFCIs on these generators. This work 

must be done by qualified electricians. 

Portable and Vehicle (Trailer or Truck) Mounted Generators Do Not 

Require Ground Rods 

If the aforementioned generators power only loads on the vehicle (such as lights), 

or if they power only cord and plug connected equipment from receptacles on the 

generator or vehicle, then they do not require grounds (see NEC 250-6). All 

neutrals on120/24-volt generators must be grounded (FIST 5-3), and ground pins 

of the 125-volt receptacles (GFCIs) must be bonded to the generator frame (not 

the vehicle frame). 

Do Not Use Electrical Enclosures and Other Steel Structures as 

Equipment Grounding Conductors 

For example, in the paragraph above, if the ground pins were bonded to a trailer 

frame, fault current would have to travel from the grounding pin to the steel frame 
Appendix C—Electrical Grounding 

October 2009 C-5 

of the trailer, along the steel trailer frame, to the generator frame, then to the 

generator winding. A rusty bolt or weld can add enough resistance to prevent 

opening a circuit breaker or fuse. 

Electrical Enclosure 

Inside an electrical enclosure, all grounding conductors must terminate on the 

same grounding connection. If there is more than one termination point for 

grounding conductors, a copper jumper must be installed between these two 

points, so the total grounding circuit will be copper. If this is not done, fault 

current must use the steel of the box and connections to the steel box as part of the 

equipment grounding conductor. Steel rusts and is not as good a conductor as 

copper; in addition, vibration and temperature changes loosen threaded 

connections. This adds resistance to the equipment grounding path and can easily 

prevent opening the breaker or fuse. Enclosures, walkways, and other conductive 

structures become energized. A shock or electrocution is the likely result. 

Tools and Appliances 

NEC 250-114 requires all cord and plug connected tools and appliances to be 

grounded. There are three exceptions that apply to powerplant usage: 

1. Double insulated tools and appliances do not need to be grounded. Tools 

and appliances must be “listed.” This means it must carry an Underwriters 

Laboratory (UL) or other testing laboratory label. In addition, it must be 

clearly marked “Double Insulated.” It is recommended that Reclamation use 

“double insulated” tools and appliances whenever possible. Independent 

testing laboratories have proven, through testing, that double insulated tools 

are “no less safe” or even more safe than grounded tools. 

2. Tools and portable hand lamps are not required to be grounded if they are 

supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded secondary of 

not over 50 volts.

3. Toasters that may be in lunch rooms must not be grounded. Toasters do 

not appear in article 250 of the NEC; however, it has been addressed and 

tested by UL and has been found safer to remain ungrounded. UL testing and 

experience has shown that one will insert a knife or fork into the slots to 

remove stuck toast. Heating elements can easily be touched with a knife or 

fork while it is against the case, causing arcs, sparks, and perhaps a shock if 

the toaster is grounded. Therefore, toasters are to remain as they come from 

the manufacturer (that is, ungrounded). 

Portable Cords/Extension Cords 

All extension cords used at Reclamation facilities must be the grounding type. 

Never use an extension cord that has a missing ground pin, a damaged jacket, or a 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

C-6 October 2009 

jacket that is pulled away from an end cord connector. All cords must be 

U.L. listed and be rated for “hard usage” or “extra hard usage.” See NEC 

Table 400-4 for cord types and permitted usage. All cords used in Reclamation 

powerplants or construction sites must be rated for damp locations and/or outdoor 

use. The NEC article ratings show “damp locations.” UL and some 

manufacturers rate some cords for “outdoor use.” Either of these are acceptable 

for general use around Reclamation powerplants or construction sites. Cords that 

must be underwater must be rated “submersible.” Some “outdoor-use” rated 

cords are also rated for submersible use; however, the specific manufacturer must 

be contacted to determine this use. 

Caution: Standard SO cord with “jute” or paper filler is not suitable for use in 

wet or submersible locations. Jute and paper are natural fibers and will act as a 

wick, pulling water along the inside of the cord to electrical connections if the 

cord is nicked and is in a wet location. 

Depending on the application, the following cord types and markings are 

permitted for portable cords or cables at Reclamation facilities. Others are also 

permitted if the applications meet NEC article 400 requirements. See NEC article 

400 for ampacities and acceptable cord uses. See NEC 400-8 for uses not 

permitted. 

“Water Resistant” indicates the cord is suitable for immersion in water; however, 

it may not be suitable for extended use outdoors, as it is not sunlight (UV) 

resistant. “W” indicates suitability for use outdoors and for immersion in water. 

“Outdoor” or “W-A” indicates suitability for use outdoors but not for submersion 

in water. 

Some manufacturers make “Water Resistant,” “Outdoor,” “W-A,” and type “W” 

as all the same cord but marked with only one of the above designations. Check 

with the supplier or manufacturer if there is a question of proper application of a 

cord or cable.

Do not run over portable cords or cables with pickup trucks, fork trucks or other 

vehicles. The internal conductors can be crushed together and cause ground faults 

and line-to-neutral faults. This is impossible to detect by looking at the outer cord 

jacket. When it is plugged into a receptacle for use with a tool, the tool case can 

become energized, causing a shock or electrocution. If a cord cannot be 

unplugged, build a protective bridge for the cord out of boards or other material. 

Ground Fault Protection While Using Temporary Power 

This applies to Reclamation and contractor activities involving temporary wiring 

used to supply power for equipment or tools during construction, maintenance, 

repair, remodeling, or similar activities (see NEC 305-6). 

Ground fault protection for personnel shall be provided for all temporary wiring 

installations to comply with the paragraph below. 
Appendix C—Electrical Grounding 

October 2009 C-7 

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters 

All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacles that are not a part of the 

permanent wiring of a building or structure, and that are in use by personnel shall 

have GFCI protection. Cord sets that have built in GFCIs are permitted. This 

applies to all extension cords and portable generators (see the above sections 

where these items are covered). 

125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacles that are a part of the 

permanent wiring of a building or structure require GFCIs in all conductive areas. 
October 2009 D-1 

Appendix D 

Wire Rope 

1.0 General 

Data included in this appendix and the section on “Slings, Chains, and 

Accessories” include general information and specific requirements about the 

design and construction characteristics of commonly used wire rope and 

accessories. 

1.1 General. Wire rope design and construction characteristics shown in this 

appendix are for reference only. Manufacturer’s specification data may differ from 

these and must be used in determining safe working loads and proper application. 

1.2 Materials. Wire rope may be manufactured from many grades and types of 

steel and alloys. They may be constructed from nonferrous materials or coated 

wires. Some of the more common grades with the differing designations are as 

follows: 

a. Improved plow steel—monitor steel—purple grade—Level 3 steel1

b. Extra improved plow steel—monitor AA grade—purple plus—Level 4 

steel1, 2

1.3 Terminology. Cross section AA. 

 General view. 

1.3.1 Wire Rope. Figure D-1 shows the general terminology, structure, 

and cross-sectional views of wire rope. 

1.3.2 Cores for Wire Rope. The core is the central member about which 

the main strands are laid. The principal function of the core is to provide a 

bearing for the strand. This foundation maintains the proper lateral 

position of the strands and permits their relative longitudinal motion in 

adjusting the distribution of stress. Figure D-2 shows the three common 

types of cores used in wire rope. 

1.3.3 Wire Rope Lays. The lay direction of a wire rope is the direction in 

which the strands rotate around the rope, as seen receding from the 

observer and viewed from above. The lay direction of outer wires of a 

single strand is determined in the same manner. Figure D-3 shows the 

various lay combinations. 

 1

 These two major grade classifications and corresponding rope breaking strengths may vary 

with different manufacturer’s and date of manufacturing. 

2 Application of these high strengths should be under the direction of manufacturer or a 

professional engineer.
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-2 October 2009 Figure D-1.—General terminology, structure, and cross-sectional views of wire rope. 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-3 

Figure D-2.—Three common types of cores used in wire rope. 

Figure D-3.—Various combinations 

of wire rope lays. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-4 October 2009 

The lay as a unit of measure is the length a single strand extends in 

making one complete turn around the rope. Lay length is measured in a 

straight line parallel to the centerline of the rope; not by following the path 

of the strand. 

1.3.4 Rope Diameter. Figure D-4 

shows the right and wrong way to 

measure rope diameter. 

1.3.5 Rope Class. Wire rope is 

designed by class: 6x7 (6 strands, 

7 wires); 6x19 (6 strands, 19 main 

wires per strand); 6x37 (6 strands, 

nominally 37 wires per strand). 

When “nominally” is used, the 

number of wires per strand may 

vary significantly (i.e., 6x19 

nominal may have from 9 to 

26 wires per strand). 

2.0 Wire Rope End 

Connectors (fittings, end 

attachments, terminals) 

2.1 General. Choosing proper end 

connectors (fittings) to be used with 

wire rope is second in importance 

only to selecting the rope itself. 

Connectors are subjected to the same 

loads as the wire rope used and must 

be properly designed and built to 

withstand the stresses imposed on 

them. 

2.2 Wire Rope Clip Connectors. 

Wire rope clip connectors may use 

the U-bolt type or the twin base clip 

(“First” grip, double saddle) type. 

Use only new clips in making wire 

rope clip connectors. 

2.2.1 U-bolt Type Clip. U-bolt clips 

shall be constructed of drop-forged 

steel bases protected by an 

Figure D-4.—Right and wrong way to 

measure rope diameter. 

Figure D-5.—U-bolt clip construction details. 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-5 

application of a galvanized zinc coating (see figure D-5). Approximate dimensions 

and construction details are shown in table D-1. 

Table D-1.—Dimensions for U-bolt clips 

Dimensions 

Rope (inches) diameter 

(inches) A D E K N O T Y 

Approximate 

weight 

(pounds) 

1/8 

3/16 

1/4 

5/16 

3/8 

13/16 

15/16 

1-3/16 

1-5/16 

1-5/8 

7/32 

1/4 

5/18 

3/8 

7/16 

7/16 

8/16 

5/8 

3/4 

13/16 

25/64 

1/2 

21/32 

23/32 

28/32 

15/16 

1-7/32 

1-11/32 

1-11/16 

1-15/16 

16/32 

19/32 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

23/32 

31/32 

1-1/32 

1-5/16 

1-1/2 

16/16 

1-5/32 

1-7/16 

1-11/16 

1-15/16 

.05 

.08 

.17 

.30 

.41 

7/16 

1/2 

9/16 

5/8 

3/4 

1-13/16 

1-29/32 

2-1/16 

2-1/16 

2-1/4 

1/2 

1/2 

9/16 

9/16 

5/8 

1-1/16 

1-1/16 

1-7/16 

1-7/16 

1-9/16 

1-1/84 

1-1/8 

1-7/32 

1-11/32 

1-25/84 

2-3/8 

2-3/8 

2-13/16 

2-13/16 

3-3/8 

1-3/16 

1-3/16 

1-5/16 

1-5/16 

1-1/2 

1-7/8 

1-7/8 

2-1/4 

2-1/4 

2-3/4 

2-8/32 

2-9/32 

2-31/64 

2-1/2 

2-27/32 

.65 

.75 

1.00 

1.00 

1.40 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

2-11/16 

2-5/8 

2-13/16 

3-1/8 

3/4 

3/4 

3/4 

7/8 

1-13/16 

2-1/8 

2-1/4 

2-1/2 

1-5/8 

1-49/84 

1-28/32 

2-11/64 

3-7/8 

4-1/4 

4-5/8 

5-1/8 

1-3/4 

1-7/8 

2 

2-5/16 

3-1/8 

3-1/2 

3-7/8 

4-1/4 

3-11/32 

3-15/32 

3-18/32 

4-1/8 

2.40 

2.50 

3.00 

4.50 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

1-5/8 

1-3/4 

3-1/8 

3-17/32 

3-5/8 

3-13/16 

7/8 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

2-11/16 

2-13/16 

2-7/8 

3-3/16 

2-5/16 

2-23/32 

2-21/32 

2-58/64 

5-1/2 

5-13/16 

6-5/16 

6-7/8 

2-3/8 

2-19/32 

2-3/4 

3-1/16 

4-5/8 

4-15/16 

5-5/16 

5-3/4 

4-3/16 

4-5/16 

4-3/4 

5-9/32 

5.20 

5.90 

7.30 

9.80 

2 

2-1/4 

2-1/2 

2-3/4 

3 

4-7/16 

4-9/16 

4-11/16 

5 

5-5/16 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-1/2 

3-5/8 

4 

4-3/8 

4-1/2 

5-1/32 

3-9/32 

3-15/16 

4-7/16 

4-7/8 

5-11/32 

7-11/16 

8-3/8 

8-15/16 

9-8/16 

10-11/16 

3-3/8 

3-7/8 

4-1/8 

4-3/8 

4-3/4 

6-7/16 

7-1/8 

7-11/16 

8-5/16 

9-2/16 

5-7/8 

6-3/8 

6-5/8 

6-7/8 

7-5/8 

13.40 

15.70 

17.90 

22.00 

30.50 

There is only one correct way to attach U-bolt clips to wire rope ends. 

The base of the clip bears on the live end of the rope; the “U” of the bolt 

bears on the dead end with a thimble installed in the eye (see figure D-6). 

The approximate number of clips and their spacing distance is shown in 

table D-2 and figure D-7. Consult the clip manufacturer for exact number 

of clips required and spacing dimensions. 

2.2.2 Twin Base Clips. Twin base clips must be constructed of drop 

forged steel bases protected by an application of zinc coating (galvanized). 

Approximate dimension and construction details are shown in table D-3. 

Number of clips and their spacings are the same as shown for U-bolt clips. 

Twin-base clips are installed as shown in figure D-8. Because of their 

special design, there is no top or bottom, and they cannot be installed 

incorrectly. 

Additional information on installation of wire rope clips is in the Rigging 

Manual. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-6 October 2009 

2.2.3 Joining Wire Ropes. Figure D-9 shows an acceptable method for 

joining wire ropes using a combination of clips and thimbles. 

Figure D-6.—Right and wrong way to clip wire rope. 

Table D-2.—Dimensions of twin-base clips 

Dimensions 

Rope (inches) 

diameter 

(inches) A B D d J K L 

N 

approx 

Approximate 

weight 

(pounds) 

1/4 

5/16 

3/8 

7/16 

1/2 

15/16 

1-1/16 

1-1/16 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-11/32 

1-37/64 

1-7/8 

1-7/8 

1/4 

5/16 

3/8 

7/16 

1/2 

3/8 

3/8 

7/16 

1/2 

1/2 

1-1/4 

1-16/32 

1-13/16 

2-11/64 

2-11/64 

21/64 

7/16 

31/64 

9/16 

9/16 

1/2 

5/8 

3/4 

1 

1 

1-5/8 

1-15/16 

2-3/8 

2-3/4 

2-3/4 

.21 

.26 

.38 

.60 

.60 

9/16 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/2 

1-1/2 

1-3/4 

2-1/8 

2-1/4 

2-8/32 

2-8/32 

2-27/64 

2-61/64 

3-1/16 

8/16 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

5/8 

5/8 

5/8 

3/4 

3/4 

2-11/16 

2-11/16 

2-3/4 

3-5/16 

3-23/32 

11/16 

11/16 

55/64 

31/32 

1-3/16 

1-1/4 

1-1/4 

1-1/2 

1-3/4 

2 

3-1/2 

3-1/2 

3-3/8 

4-1/8 

4-5/8 

1.08 

1.08 

1.34 

2.20 

2.68 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

2-5/16 

2-1/2 

3 

3 

3-3/16 

3-8/16 

4-1/8 

4-1/8 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1 

4-3/32 

4-1/4 

5-9/16 

5-9/16 

1-8/32 

1-11/32 

1-9/16 

1-9/16 

2-1/4 

2-1/2 

2-3/4 

3 

5 

5-1/4 

7 

7 

2.96 

4.03 

6.58 

6.58 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-7 

Figure D-7.—Spacing dimensions for clips. 

Table D-3.—Approximate design safety factors for wire rope 

Type of service 

Approximate 

safety factors 

a. Mobile cranes 

Running ropes 

Standing or pendant lines 

b. Overhead and gantry cranes 

c. Overhead hoists (underslung) 

d. Portal, tower, pillar cranes 

Running ropes 

Standing ropes 

e. Hammer head tower cranes 

f. Power passenger and freight elevators 

g. Rope guided workmen hoist 

Hoist ropes 

Guide ropes 

h. Personnel hoists 

i. Derricks 

Guy 

Hoist 

j. Slings 

k. Material hoists 

3.5 

3.0 

5.0 

5.0 

3.5 

3.0 

5.0 

7-12 

8.9 

7.0 

8-11 

3.0 

3.5 

5.0 

7.0 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-8 October 2009 

Figure D-8.—Twin-base clip installation. 

Figure D-9.—Wire ropes joined with clips and thimbles. 

2.3 Wedge Socket. The construction industry uses wedge sockets 

extensively because they attach easily to a wire rope. In applying the 

socket, the live rope should lead out of the socket in a straight line. Figure 

D-10 shows a wedge socket. Figure D-11 shows two recommended 

methods of attaching the socket to the wire rope. 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-9 

Figure D-10.—Wedge socket. 

Figure D-11.—Two recommended methods of attaching the socket to the wire rope. 

Regularly inspect the integrity of the wire rope at the point of exit at the dead-end 

side. High-velocity spin of wire rope when loading and unloading causes the rope 

to flip-flop, fatigue, and finally break off. When the wire rope has delivered each 

one-fifth of service life, remove the portion through the wedge and move the wedge 

up the rope to a new location. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-10 October 2009 

2.4 Handmade Spliced Eyes. Spliced eyes are frequently used as wire rope end 

attachments (see figure D-12). They must incorporate rope thimbles to maintain 

rope strength and reduce wear. Because of the many forms of eye splices and the 

varying efficiencies, do not use these types of attachments in slings or hoisting 

operations. 

Figure D-12.—Example of a handmade spliced eye. 

2.5 Manufactured Eye Splices. Manufactured eye splices, such as flemish eye, 

flemish eye plus serving, and flemish eye plus pressed metal sleeve are the most 

efficient attachments and should be considered for all hoisting operations. The zinc 

and swagged sockets are an excellent attachment for use in permanent nonmovabletype installation such as pendant lines and guy wires. They, like the manufactured 

eyes, must be constructed by well-trained, qualified personnel to ensure reliability. 

2.6 Average Efficiency of Well-Made End Connectors on Terminals 

a. Standard open and closed sockets. 

Attached with pure molten zinc: 100 percent 

b. Flemish eye and pressed metal sleeve 

or swaged sockets on IWRC rope: 100 percent 

c. Mechanically spliced eyes: 90 percent 

d. Handmade eye splices: 80-90 percent 

e. U-bolt clips (drop forged, new): 70-80 percent 

f. Cast steel wedge sockets: 70 percent 

Note: Percentages relate to rope breaking strength (i.e., a swaged socket has the 

same strength (100 percent) of the wire rope. 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-11 

3.0 Common Safety Factors and Maximum (Safe) Working Loads 

3.1 Safety Factors. The total stress in a wire rope, in service, is composed of 

several separate elements. These are reduced to a single tensile load value. When 

this value exceeds the breaking strength of the wire rope, a failure occurs. 

The factor to provide a margin of safety between the applied tensile forces and the 

breaking strength of the rope is defined as the factor of safety. 

Minimum safety factors for wire rope used in different types of service are 

contained in national standards (i.e., ANSI 17.1 safety code for elevators and 

escalators, ANSI/ASME B30.5 Mobile and Locomotive Cranes). 

Table D-3 shows a partial compilation of approximate design safety factors. Refer 

to appropriate standards for precise requirements. 

3.2 Maximum (Safe) Working Load. Calculate the maximum safe working load 

of wire rope, dividing the manufacturers’ supplied breaking strength by the safety 

factor. 

Example: Calculate the maximum safe working load of a single-leg sling 

made from a 1/2-inch-diameter, 6X19 class wire rope constructed of 

improved plow steel (purple grade) material with poured zinc fittings and 

an independent wire rope core (IWRC). 

(1) Obtain the breaking strength of the wire rope from the 6X19 class 

table shown under paragraph 2.4.1 of this appendix (11.5 tons or 

23,000 pounds). 

(2) Find the appropriate safety factor (5) for slings from table D-3 or 

from subsection 17.4 of the text. 

(3) Divide the breaking strength (23,000 pounds) by the safety 

factor (5) to obtain the maximum (safe) working load (4,600 pounds). 

Max (safe) working load = 23,000 pounds

 5 

Conversely, to determine the actual safety factor under any condition of loading, 

multiply the rope breaking strength by the number of parts of line under load and 

divide this product by the actual working load. 

Example: Using a 1/2-inch-diameter, 6X19 class wire rope with the 

breaking strength shown, in a two-part line hoisting operation with a 

maximum load including weight of blocks, hooks, etc., of 9,200 pounds, 

calculate the actual safety factor. 

23,000 pounds X 2 46,000 pounds

9,200 pounds 9,200 pounds 

= 4,600 pounds (1)

= = 5 safety factor 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

D-12 October 2009 

Note: Consult the table of required safety factors or specify safety factor 

requirements contained in national standards to determine what type of 

service this specific hoisting system can be used for. In any service 

requiring a safety factor of 5 or less, the system would be satisfactory. In 

any system requiring a safety factor greater than 5, the system would be 

unsatisfactory. 

Exercise caution in using this simplified method of calculation as some dynamic 

forces may need to be included in the maximum loading figure. Also, other factors 

such as sheave diameters, friction losses, hot environments, etc., may require higher 

safety factors. 

4.0 Inspection and Retirement of Wire Rope 

Eventually, all wire ropes deteriorate to the point that they are no longer safe for 

use. The frequency of inspections, the extent of the inspection, and the criteria for 

condemning wire ropes vary greatly for each type of service. Inspection 

frequencies and rope retirement criteria are usually found in specific national 

standards. If no standards exist for the type of service anticipated, the rope or 

equipment manufacturer or a professional engineer must develop the criteria. In 

no case shall the rope retirement criteria allow rope to be continued in any 

hoisting or load carrying service when one or more of the following deficiencies 

exist: 

(a) Ropes are not of proper size, grade, or construction for the particular 

performance or function. 

(b) In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or three 

broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. (A rope lay is the length along the rope 

in which one strand makes a complete revolution around the rope.) 

(c) In pendants or standing ropes, evidence of more than one broken wire in one lay. 

(d) Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of more than one-third of the 

original diameter of the outside wires. 

(e) Evidence of severe corrosion. 

(f) Severe kinking, crushing, or other damage resulting in distortion of the rope 

structure. 

(g) Evidence of any heat damage from a torch or arc caused by contact with 

electrical wires. 

(h) Reduction from nominal rope diameter of more than 3/64 inch for diameters up 

to and including 3/4 inch; 1/16 inch for diameters 7/8 to 1-1/8 inches; and 3/32 inch 

for diameters 1-1/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches. Marked reduction in diameter indicates 
Appendix D—Wire Rope 

October 2009 D-13 

deterioration of the core, resulting in lack of proper support for the load carrying 

strands. Excessive rope stretch or elongation may also indicate internal 

deterioration. 

(i) Evidence of “bird caging” or other distortion resulting in some members of the 

rope structure carrying more load than others. 

(j) Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires in the vicinity of attachments. 

See separate appendix on “Slings” for retirement criteria for wire rope used in 

slings. 
October 2009 E-1 

Appendix E 

Slings 

Types 

This appendix covers the types of slings made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, 

metal mesh, synthetic fiber rope (conventional, three-strand construction), 

synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene), and synthetic round slings. 

Definitions 

“Angle of loading” is the inclination of a leg or branch of a sling measured from 

the horizontal or vertical plane, provided that an angle of loading of 5 degrees or 

less from the vertical may be considered a vertical angle of loading. 

“Basket hitch” is a sling configuration in which the sling is passed under the load 

and has both ends, end attachments, eyes, or handles on the hook or a single 

master link. 

“Braided wire rope” is a wire rope formed by plaiting component wire ropes. 

“Bridle wire rope sling” is a sling composed of multiple wire rope legs with the 

top ends gathered in a fitting that goes over the lifting hook. 

“Cable-laid endless sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made endless by 

joining the ends of a single length of cable-laid rope with one or two more 

metallic fittings. 

“Cable-laid grommet-hand tucked” is an endless wire rope sling made from one 

length of rope wrapped six times around a core formed by hand tucking the ends 

of the rope inside the six wraps. 

“Cable-laid rope” is a wire rope composed of six wire ropes wrapped around a 

fiber or wire rope core. 

“Cable-laid rope sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made from a cablelaid rope with eyes fabricated by pressing or swaging one or more metal sleeves 

over the rope function. 

“Choker hitch” is a sling configuration with one end of the sling passing under the 

load and through an end attachment, handle, or eye on the other end of the sling. 

“Coating” is an elastomer or other suitable material applied to a sling, or to a sling 

component, to impart desirable properties. 

“Cross rod” is a wire used to join spirals of metal mesh to form a complete fabric. 

“Fabric (metal mesh)” is the flexible portion of a metal mesh sling consisting of a 

series of transverse coils and cross rods. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-2 October 2009 

“Female handle (choker)” is a handle with a handle eye and a slot sized to permit 

passage of a male handle, thereby allowing the use of a metal mesh sling in a 

choker hitch. 

“Handle” is a terminal fitting to which metal mesh fabric is attached. 

“Handle eye” is an opening in a handle of a metal mesh sling, shaped to accept a 

hook, shackle, or other lifting device. 

“Hitch” is a sling configuration in which the sling is fastened to an object or load, 

either directly to it or around it. 

“Link” is a single ring of a chain. 

“Male handle (triangle)” is a handle with a handle eye. 

“Master coupling link” is an alloy steel, welded coupling link used as an 

intermediate link to join alloy steel chain to master links. 

“Master link” or “gathering ring” is a forged or welded steel link used to support 

all members (legs) of an alloy steel chain sling or wire rope sling. 

“Mechanical coup link” is a nonwelded, mechanically closed, steel link used to 

attach master links, hooks, etc., to alloy steel chain. 

“Proof load” is the load applied when performing a proof test. 

“Proof test” is a nondestructive tension test performed by the sling manufacturer, 

or an equivalent entity, to verify construction and workmanship of a sling. 

“Rated capacity” or “working load limit” is the maximum working load 

permitted. 

“Reach” is the effective length of an alloy steel chain sling measured from the top 

bearing surface of the upper terminal component to the bottom bearing surface of 

the lower terminal component. 

“Selvage edge” is the finished edge of synthetic webbing designed to prevent 

unraveling. 

“Sling” is an assembly that connects the load to the material handling equipment. 

“Sling manufacturer” is a person or organization that assembles sling components 

into their final form for sale to testers. 

“Spiral” is a single transverse coil that is the basic element that metal mesh is 

fabricated from. 

“Strand laid endless sling-mechanical joint” is a wire rope sling made endless 

from one length of rope with the ends joined by one or more metallic fittings. 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-3 

“Strand laid grommet-hand tucked” is an endless wire rope sling made from one 

length of strand wrapped six times around a core, formed by hand-tucking the 

ends of the strand inside the six wraps. 

“Strand laid rope” is a wire rope made with strands (usually six or eight) wrapped 

around a fiber core, wire strand core, or independent wire rope core (IWRC). 

“Vertical hitch” is a method of supporting a load by a single, vertical part or leg 

of the sling. 

Safe Practices 

Whenever any sling is used, observe the following practices: 

(1) Do not use damaged or defective slings. 

(2) Do not shorten slings with knots, bolts, or other makeshift devices, or 

kink sling legs. 

(3) Do not load slings in excess of their rated capacities. 

(4) Balance the loads of slings used in a basket hitch to prevent slippage. 

(5) Securely attach slings to their loads. 

(6) Pad or protect slings from the sharp edges of their loads. 

(7) Keep suspended loads clear of all obstructions. 

(8) Keep all employees clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended 

loads. 

(9) Do not place hands or fingers between the sling and its load while the 

sling is being tightened around the load. 

(10) Prohibit shock loading. 

(11) Do not pull a sling from under a load when the load is resting on the 

sling. 

(12) Do not drag slings on the floor or over an abrasive surface. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-4 October 2009 

Table E-1.—Correction table to compensate for chain link wear

Reduce safe working 

Load by following % when 

 diameter at worn section is 

as follows 

(inches)

Original nominal 

chain stock 

diameter 

(inches) 5% 10%

Remove from service 

when diameter Is 

(inches)

1/4 = 0.250 0.244 0.237 0.233 

3/8 = 0.375 0.366 0.356 0.335 

1/2 = 0.500 0.487 0.474 0.448 

5/8 = 0.625 0.609 0.593 0.559 

3/4 = 0.750 0.731 0.711 0.671 

7/8 = 0.875 0.853 0.830 0.783 

 1 = 1.000 0.975 0.949 0.895 

1 1/8 = 1.125 1.100 1.070 1.010 

1 1/4 = 1.250 1.220 1.190 1.120 

1 3/8 = 1.375 1.340 1.310 1.230 

1 1/2 = 1.500 1.460 1.430 1.340 

1 5/8 = 1.625 1.590 1.540 1.450 

1 3/4 = 1.750 1.710 1.660 1.570 

1 7/8 = 1.875 1.830 1.780 1.680 

 2 = 2.000 1.950 1.900 1.790 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-5 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-6 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-7 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-8 October 2009 

Table E-5.—Safe working load for single leg slings, cable-laid rope–mechanical splice 

7 x 7 x 7 and 7 x 7 x19 constructions galvanized aircraft grade rope 7 x 6 x 19 

IWRC construction improved plow steel grade rope 

Rope Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb) 

Diameter 

(inches) Constr Vertical Center 

Vertical 

basket1

1/4 

3/8 

1/2 

5/8 

3/4 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

0.50 

1.1 

1.8 

2.8 

3.8 

0.38 

0.81 

1.4 

2.1 

2.9 

1.0 

2.2 

3.7 

5.5 

7.6 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

2.9 

4.1 

5.4 

6.9 

8.2 

9.9 

2.2 

3.0 

4.0 

5.1 

6.2 

7.4 

5.8 

8.1 

11.0 

14.0 

16.0 

20.0 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

1-5/16 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

3.8 

5.0 

6.4 

7.7 

9.2 

10.0 

11.0 

13.0 

2.8 

3.8 

4.8 

5.8 

6.9 

7.5 

8.2 

9.6 

7.6 

10.0 

13.0 

15.0 

18.0 

20.0 

22.0 

26.0 

1

 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 10 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature 

around which the body of the sling is bent, and d = diameter of rope. 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-9 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-10 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-11 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-12 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-13 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-14 October 2009 

Table E-11.—Safe working load for strand laid grommet– hand tucked improved plow 

steel grade rope 

Rope body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb) 

Diameter 

(inches) Constr Vertical Choker 

Vertical 

basket1

1/4 

5/16 

3/8 

7/16 

1/2 

9/16 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

7 x 19 

0.85 

1.3 

1.9 

2.6 

3.3 

4.2 

5.2 

7.4 

10.0 

13.0 

16.0 

0.64 

1.0 

1.4 

1.9 

2.5 

3.1 

3.9 

5.6 

7.5 

9.7 

12.0 

1.7 

2.6 

3.8 

5.2 

6.7 

8.4 

10.0 

15.0 

20.0 

26.0 

32.0 

1-1/4 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

7 x 37 

7 x 37 

7 x 37 

18.0 

22.0 

26.0 

14.0 

16.0 

19.0 

37.0 

44.0 

52.0 

1

 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature 

around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body. 

Table E-12.—Safe working load for cable laid grommet–hand tucked 7 x 6 x 7 and 7 x 

6 x 19 constructions improved plow steel grade rope 7 x 7 x 7 construction 

galvanized aircraft grade rope 

Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb) 

Diameter 

(inches) Constr Vertical Choker 

Vertical 

basket1

3/8 

9/16 

5/8 

7 x 6 x 7 

7 x 6 x 7 

7 x 6 x 7 

1.3 

2.8 

3.8 

0.95 

2.1 

2.8 

2.5 

5.6 

7.6 

3/8 

9/16 

5/8 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

1.6 

3.5 

4.5 

1.2 

2.6 

3.4 

3.2 

6.9 

9.0 

5/8 

3/4 

15/16 

1-1/8 

1-5/16 

1-1/2 

1-11/16 

1-7/8 

2-1/4 

2-5/8 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

7 x 6 x 19 

3.9 

5.1 

7.9 

11.0 

15.0 

19.0 

24.0 

30.0 

42.0 

56.0 

3.0 

3.8 

5.9 

8.4 

11.0 

14.0 

18.0 

22.0 

31.0 

42.0 

7.9 

10.0 

16.0 

22.0 

30.0 

39.0 

49.0 

60.0 

84.0 

112.0 

1

 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature 

around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body. 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-15 

Table E-13.— Safe working load for strand-laid endless slings—mechanical joint 

improved plow steel grade rope 

Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb) 

Diameter 

(inches) Constr Vertical Choker 

Vertical 

basket1

1/4 

3/8 

1/2 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

6 x 19 IWRC 

0.92 

2.0 

3.6 

5.6 

8.0 

11.0 

14.0 

18.0 

0.69 

1.5 

2.7 

4.2 

6.0 

8.1 

10.0 

13.0 

1.8 

4.1 

7.2 

11.0 

16.0 

21.0 

28.0 

35.0 

1-1/4 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

6 x 37 IWRC 

6 x 37 IWRC 

6 x 37 IWRC 

21.0 

25.0 

29.0 

15.0 

19.0 

22.0 

41.0 

50.0 

59.0 

1

 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature 

around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body. 

Table E-14.—Safe working load for cable-laid endless slings–mechanical joint 

7 x 7 x 7 and 7 x 7 x 19 constructions galvanized aircraft grade rope 

7 x 6 x 29 IWRC construction improved plow steel grade rope 

Cable body Safe working load, tons (2,000 lb) 

Diameter 

(inches) Constr Vertical Choker 

Vertical 

basket1

1/4 

1/8 

1⁄2 

5/8 

3/4 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

7 x 7 x 7 

0.83 

1.8 

3.0 

4.5 

6.3 

0.62 

1.3 

2.3 

3.4 

4.7 

1.6 

3.5 

6.1 

9.1 

12.0 

5/8 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

 7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

7 x 7 x 19 

4.7 

6.7 

8.9 

11.0 

14.0 

17.0 

3.5 

5.0 

6.6 

8.5 

10.0 

12.0 

9.5 

13.0 

18.0 

22.0 

28.0 

33.0 

3/4 

7/8 

1 

1-1/8 

1-1/4 

1-3/8 

1-1/2 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

7 x 6 x 19 IWRC 

6.2 

8.3 

10.0 

13.0 

16.0 

18.0 

22.0 

4.7 

6.2 

7.9 

9.7 

12.0 

14.0 

16.0 

12.0 

16.0 

21.0 

26.0 

31.0 

37.0 

43.0 

1

 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater, where D = diameter of curvature 

around which the rope is bent, and d = diameter of rope body. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-16 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-17 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-18 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-19 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-20 October 2009 
Appendix E—Slings 

October 2009 E-21 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

E-22 October 2009 

Table E-21.—Single leg polyester roundslings–endless and eye and eye type 

(safe working load in pounds) 

Size 

(see note) Vertical Choker 

Vertical 

basket 

60° 

basket 

45° 

basket 

30° 

basket 

1 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600 

2 5,300 4,200 10,600 9,200 7,500 5,300 

3 6,400 6,700 16,800 14,500 11,900 8,400 

4 10,600 8,500 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600 

5 13,200 10,600 26,400 22,900 18,700 13,200 

6 16,800 13,400 33,600 29,100 23,800 16,800 

7 21,200 17,000 42,400 36,700 30,000 21,200 

8 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,400 25,000 

9 31,000 24,800 62,000 53,700 43,800 31,000 

10 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,300 56,600 40,000 

11 53,000 42,400 106,000 91,800 74,900 53,000 

12 66,000 52,800 132,000 114,300 93,300 66,000 

13 90,000 72,000 180,000 155,900 127,300 90,000 

Note: Roundslings are identified by the vertical rated load shown on the tag. The size 

numbers in this column have been adopted by the Web Sling and Tiedown Association to describe 

certain polyester round slings. They are included for reference only. 
October 2009 F-1 

Appendix F 

Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

General 

All mobile cranes must be performance inspected and tested by the owner and/or 

contractor in accordance with the provisions contained herein; in the section 

entitled “Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors; and on attached forms 

entitled “Brake Performance Test Record” and “Performance Load Test Record.” 

Such inspections and tests must be conducted (a) prior to initial onsite operation; 

(b) periodically, but at least once each 12-month period; (c) whenever the crane 

is modified, altered, or undergoes extensive repair, including rerigging; and 

(d) when directed by the Contracting Officer’s Representative (COR). For 

contractor equipment, such inspections and tests must be conducted in the 

presence of a Reclamation representative and recorded in the appropriate places 

on inspection records. The forms will then be signed by a contractor and 

Reclamation representative and submitted to Reclamation. Initial and periodic 

crane inspections and tests will be conducted onsite after the crane has been 

assembled or reassembled and fully rigged for operation. Manufacturer’s, 

contractor’s, or owner’s offsite inspections and tests must not be conducted until 

all appropriate performance inspection items are found to be available and in 

acceptable condition. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-2 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(1) Manufacturer’s 

operating and 

maintenance 

manuals 

Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance 

instructions and manuals must accompany all 

mobile hoisting equipment. These manuals set for 

the inspection operation and maintenance criteria 

that is not available from any other source. 

(2) Maintenance 

“frequent” and 

“periodic” 

inspection records 

Inspection and maintenance records must be 

complete and current. Unless owner can produce 

these records, this performance inspection will not 

be continued until the appropriate maintenance and 

inspections are completed and current records 

developed. (See ANSI/ASME B30.5) 

(3) Reverse signal 

alarm 

An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and 

functions when unit is placed in reverse gear or is 

moving in reverse. The alarm has been field 

tested. 

(4) Audible 

warning device 

The crane is equipped with an audible warning 

device having the control lever(s) within reach of the 

operator(s) when seated in the operating 

position(s). 

(5) Lights On-highway type equipment has, as a minimum, 

two taillights, two stoplights, flashing emergency 

lights (forward and backward), turn signals (forward 

and backward), or combination turn, flashing, 

stopping lights, and backup light. DOT 

requirements shall govern when applicable. Offhighway type equipment must have two headlights, 

two combination stop and tail lights, and backup 

light. On- or off- highway equipment, when used in 

restricted visibility situations, must have floodlamps 

to illuminate working areas. 

(6) Cabs Cabs are provided with safety glazed windows in 

the front and both sides. Visibility forward includes 

a vertical range adequate to cover the boom point at 

all times. A windshield wiper is provided for front 

window. An effective heater and defroster system is 

provided. Cab doors (whether of sliding or swinging 

type) have a restraining system while crane is 

traveling or operating. Operator’s door swings 

outward or slides rearward. Operator is provided 

clear passageway from the operator station to exit 

door. 

(7) Access Walking surfaces are of the skid-resistant type. 

Platforms are provided with guardrails. Access 

system incorporates the three-point support 

method. One foot - 2 hands; 1 hand - 2 feet on 

ladders or handholds at all times. (See SAE J185 

or Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations 

399.207, Truck and Tractor Access Regulations.) 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-3 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(8) Fire 

extinguishers 

One 2A 40 B:C fire extinguisher is mounted near 

operator’s station and accessible from a ground 

location. 

(9) Fenders Truck-mounted cranes are equipped with fenders. 

Self-propelled cranes are equipped with 

manufacturer available fenders. 

(10) Seat belts Truck-mounted cranes have seat belts conforming 

to DOT standards. Self-propelled cranes have seat 

belts conforming to DOT or appropriate SAE 

standards. 

(11) Guarding Exposed moving parts, such as gears, chains, 

reciprocating or rotating parts, are guarded or 

isolated. 

(12) Exhaust 

system 

Engine exhaust gases are piped outside of cab 

and/or discharged away from operator. Exhaust 

pipes are guarded or insulated to protect operating 

and maintenance personnel. 

(13) Swing 

clearance 

protection 

Materials for guarding rear swing area are available. 

(14) High-voltage 

warning sign 

High-voltage warning signs displaying Reclamation 

requirements are installed at operator’s station and 

at strategic locations on the crane. 

(15) Operator 

physical exam 

Operator has evidence of undergoing and 

satisfactorily completing a physical examination 

within the preceding 12 months. 

(16) Boom stops Telescoping shock-absorbing or hydraulic-type 

boom stops meeting SAE J 220 (see SAE J220) are 

installed in a manner that resists boom overtopping. 

(17) Jib boom 

stops 

Jib booms are restrained from backward 

overturning. 

(18) Boom angle 

indicator 

A boom angle indicator, readable from the operator 

station, is installed and field tested for accuracy. 

(19) Boom hoist 

disconnect 

A boom hoist disconnect, shutoff or hydraulic relief, 

is provided to automatically stop the boom hoist 

when the boom reaches a predetermined high 

angle. The disconnect has been field tested. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-4 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(20) Two-block 

damage 

prevention device 

All cranes with telescoping booms are equipped 

with a two-block damage prevention feature that 

has been onsite tested in accordance with 

manufacturer’s requirements. All cranes to be used 

in manskip or shaft sinking operations are equipped 

with two-block prevention devices on all hoistlines 

intended to be used in the operation. The two-block 

device has automatic capabilities for controlling 

functions that may cause a two-blocking condition. 

A two-block prevention device which sounds an 

alarm only is not acceptable. Two-blocking devices 

have been tested during this inspection. 

(21) Powercontrolled lowering Cranes for use in manskip or shaft sinking 

operations are equipped for power-controlled 

lowering operation on all hoistlines. Cranes with free 

(22) Leveling 

indicating device 

A device or procedure for leveling the crane is 

provided. 

(23) Sheaves Sheave grooves are smooth and free from surface 

defects, cracks, or worn places that could cause 

rope damage. The bottom of the sheave groove 

forms a close-fitting saddle for the rope being used. 

Lower load blocks are equipped with close-fitting 

guards. Load hoisting sheaves have a pitch 

diameter not less than 18 times the nominal 

diameter of rope used. Lower block pitch diameters 

are not less than 16 times the nominal rope 

diameter. 

(24) Main boom, 

jib boom, boom 

extension 

Boom jibs, or extensions are not cracked or 

corroded. Bolts and rivets are tight. Certification 

that repaired boom members meet manufacturer’s 

original design standard must be attached to this 

form. Noncertified repaired members must not be 

used until recertified. 

(25) Load hooks 

and hook blocks 

Hooks and blocks are permanently labeled with 

rated capacity. Hooks and blocks are 

counterweighted to overhaul line from highest hook 

position. Hooks do not have cracks or throat 

openings more then 15 percent of normal or twisted 

off center more than 10 degrees from the 

longitudinal axis. All hooks are equipped with 

effective safety catches. 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-5 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(26) Ropes Ropes are proper size, grade, and construction for 

the particular performance or function. They do not 

have the following deficiencies: 

a. In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken 

wires in one rope lay, or three broken wires in one 

rope lay, or three broken wires in one strand in one 

rope lay. (A rope lay is the length along the rope in 

which one strand makes a complete revolution 

around the rope.) 

b. In pendants or standing ropes, evidence of more 

than one broken wire in one lay. 

c. Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of 

more than one-third of the original diameter of the 

outside wires. 

d. Evidence of visible corrosion. 

e. Kinking, crushing, or other damage resulting in 

distortion of the rope structure. 

f. Evidence of any heat damage from a torch or arc 

caused by contact with electrical wire. 

g. Reduction from nominal rope diameter of more 

than 

3/64 inch for diameter up to and including 3/4; 1/16 

inch for diameters 7/8 inch to 1-1/8 inches; 3/32 

inch for diameters 

1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inches. Marked for reduction in 

diameter indicates deterioration of the core, 

resulting in lack of proper support for the loadcarrying strands. Excessive rope stretch or 

elongation may also be an indication of internal 

deterioration. 

h. Evidence of “bird caging” or other distortion 

resulting in some members of the rope structure 

carrying more load than 

others. 

i. Noticeable rusting or development of broken 

wires in the vicinity of attachments. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-6 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(27) Hydraulic 

hoses, fittings, and 

tubing 

Flexible hoses are sound and show no signs of 

leaking at the surface or its junction with the metal 

and couplings. Hoses show no blistering or 

abnormal deformation to the outer covering. There 

are no leaks at threaded or clamped joints that 

cannot be eliminated by normal tightening or 

recommended procedures. There is no evidence of 

excessive abrasion or scrubbing on the outer 

surfaces of hoses, rigid tubing, or hydraulic fittings. 

(28) Outriggers Outrigger number, locations, types, and type of 

control are in accordance with manufacturer’s 

specifications. Outriggers are designed and 

operated to relieve all weight from wheels or racks 

within the boundaries of the outriggers. If not, the 

manufacturer’s specifications and operating 

procedures must be clearly defined. Outriggers are 

visible to the operator or a signal person during 

extension or setting. 

(29) Load rating 

chart 

A durable rating chart(s) with legible letters and 

figures is attached to the crane in a location 

accessible to the operator while at the controls. The 

rating chart contains the following data: 

a. A full and complete range of manufacturer’s 

crane 

b. Optional equipment on the crane such as 

outriggers and extra counterweight which affect 

ratings. 

c. A work area chart for which capacities are listed 

in the load rating chart (i.e., overside, over read, 

over front). 

d. Weights of auxiliary equipment (i.e., load block, 

jibs, boom extensions). 

e. A clearly distinguishable list of ratings based on 

structural, hydraulic, or other factors rather than 

stability. 

f. A list of no-load work areas. 

g. A description of hoistline reeving requirements. 

(30) Hoisting rope 

specifications 

Rotation-resistant rope and fiber core rope are not 

being used for boom hoist reeving. Socketing is 

being done in the manner specified by 

manufacturer. Eye splices meet manufacturer’s 

requirements or these standards. 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-7 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(31) Tires Tires are the size recommended by the 

manufacturer for the anticipated load. Tire 

conditions are satisfactory, and the tires are inflated 

to recommended pressures. 

(32) Braking 

systems 

(a) Trucks and self propelled cranes: Truck cranes 

and self propelled cranes mounted on rubber-tired 

chassis or frames manufactured after July 1, 1967, 

are equipped with a service brake system, 

secondary stopping (emergency brake) system, and 

a parking brake system. All systems conform to 

J/ISO 3450, Braking Performance Rubber-tired 

Construction Machines, or Department of 

Transportation Federal Motor Carrier Safety 

Regulations 393.40 applicable provisions of this 

appendix and RSHS. Rubber-tired equipment 

manufactured prior to July 1967 are equipped with 

an effective service braking system having, as a 

minimum, features, components, accessories, and 

capabilities set forth on form entitled “Brake 

Performance Test Record.” The units are also 

equipped with an effective secondary stopping 

system meeting these requirements unless the 

owner/operator can show written evidence that such 

systems were not required by the standards or 

regulations in force at the date of manufacture and 

are not available from the manufacturer. The 

braking systems have been inspected and tested 

and found to be in conformance with applicable 

requirements contained in the referenced standards 

and on an attached brake performance test record 

form. Further, the inspection and test results have 

been recorded on the aforementioned form. 

(b) Crawler cranes: Crawler cranes are provided 

with brakes or other locking devices that effectively 

hold the machine stationary on level grade during 

the working cycle. The braking system is capable of 

stopping and holding the machine on the maximum 

grade recommended for travel. The brakes or locks 

are arranged to engage or remain engaged in the 

event of loss of operating pressure or power. 

(c) Locomotive cranes: Locomotive cranes are 

provided with an effective braking system(s) that is 

capable of stopping and holding the cranes on the 

maximum grade recommended for travel. Further, 

a manual engagement means is provided to hold 

the machine stationary during the working cycle. 

Such means must be arranged to engage or remain 

engaged in the event of loss of operating power or 

pressure. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-8 October 2009 

Performance Inspection 

The performance inspection must as a minimum, include the following features, 

components, accessories, and tests. 

Performance Test Procedure 

Upon completion of a satisfactory performance inspection and Part I of the 

performance load test record form, the crane can be prepared for testing. The 

crane must be placed on level ground (or railroad tracks if rail type). Outriggers, 

if provided, must be firmly set and relieve all weight from wheels within the 

boundary of the outriggers. The owner or contractor must select a test weight and 

boom radius that will provide a test load of 110 percent of the manufacturer’s 

rating for the selected radius when the boom angle is between 30 degrees and 60 

degrees above the horizontal. The load will be raised and lowered and rotated 

through 360 longitudinal degrees or manufacturer’s specified maximum degree of 

rotation. The load must remain in the raised position for 10 minutes, then be 

lowered to the ground and critical load-bearing parts inspected for damage. 

(Note: Paint chipping or cracking, or deformation of structural members usually 

denotes a serious structural deficiency.) This testing procedure is basic for all 

cranes. Cranes to be used with jibs or boom tip extensions or manually extended 

boom sections must have these components tested in accordance with the above 

procedures. (Note: If the jib or boom extension is to remain in place during main 

hoist line operation, the basic test must be conducted with the jib or extension in 

place and test loads adjusted accordingly). 

Hydraulic or other type cranes with telescoping booms must be further tested 

during telescoping operations. Cranes to be used in pick and carry operations 

must be tested with a load consistent with owner/contractor intended operation 

but never greater than the manufacturer’s Secom-mediation. Cranes to be used in 

manskip or shaft sinking operations must be further tested in the power-controlled 

lowering mode. This test can be integrated into the basic testing procedure by 

raising the load a second time and lowering it under power to near ground level, 

and suspending it there an additional 10 minutes. Cranes without free falling 

capabilities need only be tested in the power-controlled lowering mode. (Caution: 

Exercise extreme care in determining mobile cranes test load). 

Once manufacturer’s rating charts are consulted to determine maximum loading at 

chosen radius, rigging limitations must be computed to ensure wire rope safety 

factors are not exceeded. Such determination is made by: (1) adding selected 

load weight to weight of all auxiliary handling devices such as hoist block, hooks, 

slings, etc.; (2) dividing this figure by number of parts of line to obtain hoisting 

load per single part of line; (3) obtaining manufacturer’s specified breaking 

strength for type of rope being used (i.e., a 3/4-inch Manioc steel rope of 6 - by 

35 filler wire constructed with independent wire rope core has a breaking strength 

of 25.6 tons); and (4) dividing or guy ropes. Compare this resultant figure with 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-9 

single part line load to determine if selected load exceeds safe load. If safe load is 

exceeded, a new weight consistent with calculated line load must be chosen. 

(Note: Calculated safe single part line load multiplied by number parts of line 

sets the maximum crane load rating under existing rigging conditions regardless 

of maximum crane rating set by manufacturer). 

Computation of Test Radius1

Wt = Test weight (weight + sheave + rigging or dynamiter reading) = lbs. 

W.c. = Computed weight = test weight = Wt = = lbs. 

W.g. = Crane chart rated capacity (use next weight greater than W.c.) = lbs. 

WL = Crane chart rated capacity (use next weight less than W.c.) = lbs. 

W = Weight difference (W.g. - W.c.) = ____ - ____ = lbs. 

WO = Weight difference (W.g. - WL) = ____ - _____ = lbs. 

R. = Radius shown on crane chart for W.g. = ft. 

RLL = Radius shown on crane chart for WL = ft. 

r = Radius difference (RLL - R.) = _____ - _____ = ft. 

Ro = Computed radius difference = w x r = --x– = ft. 

 WO 

Tr = Test radius (R. + Ro) + ____ + ____ = ft. 

 

 1

 Contractor’s test radius can be checked by the above formula for an estimate, but is 

not to be used for determining the actual test radius. 

Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures 

Part 1 - General 

Truck cranes and self-propelled cranes mounted on rubber tired chassis or frames 

must have braking systems conforming to the section entitled “Mobile and 

Stationary Mechanized Equipment” and Item 32 of performance inspection 

criteria. Further, the crane’s braking systems must incorporate the features, 

components, accessories, and performance capabilities required under parts II and 

III of this form. 

Cranes that meet the requirements of item 32 and part II of this form and the 

section entitled “Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment” shall be brake 

tested in accordance with the requirements, methods, and procedures described in 

that section and in part III of this form. Record the results in parts V, VI, and VII 

of this form. Sign the completed form in part VIII and submit it to Reclamation. 

Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be place into service or performance load 

tested until the braking system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-10 October 2009 

Part II - Braking Systems, Features, Components, Accessories 

A. Service Braking System 

1. All cranes must have an effective service braking system. The service 

brake system must be capable of stopping and holding an unloaded crane 

on a 25-percent grade with the boom and other applicable components in 

the transport position recommended by the manufacturer. This 

requirement applies to both forward and reverse directions. The braking 

system also must be capable of bringing the crane to a stop within the 

distances and under the conditions specified in part III. 

2. The service braking system must be the type that can be foot-applied or 

released by the operator while sitting in the operating position. 

3. Cranes must have service brakes on all wheels except: 

a. Truck cranes with three or more axles need not have brakes on the 

front wheels unless equipped with two steerable axles, and then the 

wheels on one such axle must be equipped with brakes. 

b. Self-propelled cranes may have only two braked wheels (one 

lefthand, one right-hand) if the system meets the stopping distance 

requirements (part III). 

B. Secondary Braking System 

1. All cranes, unless exempted by paragraph 20.6.3 of RSHS or item 32, 

must have an secondary braking system. 

2. The system must be capable of being applied manually by a person 

seated in the operating position. The system must be arranged so it cannot 

be released from the operator’s seat after any application, unless 

immediate replication can be made from the operator position. 

3. The system may, in addition to manual activation, be activated 

automatically. If equipped with an automatic activation feature, the 

automatic application must occur after a warning device is activated. 

4. The system must be capable of bringing the crane to a stop within the 

distances and under the conditions specified in part III. 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. All cranes must have an effective parking brake system. 

2. The braking system must be capable of being applied by a person 

seated in the operator’s seat. 

3. The braking system can be applied by the driver’s muscular efforts, by 

spring actions, or by other energy, provided that the brake will remain in 

the applied position despite any contraction of brake parts, exhaustion of 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-11 

energy source, or leakage of fluid. The brake shall be such that it cannot 

be released unless adequate energy is available to make immediate further 

application with required effectiveness. 

4. The braking systems must be capable of holding the crane stationary 

under the conditions specified in part III. 

D. Features, Components, Accessories 

1. Braking systems utilizing air, or vacuum energy assist devices must be 

equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available for 

braking. 

2. Braking systems utilizing air, hydraulic (other than brake pedal 

pressure), or vacuum assist energy devices must be equipped with a 

readily visible or audible continuous warning device at the operator’s 

position. The device will actuate: (a) before air or hydraulic pressure 

drops below 50 percent or maximum operating energy level; (b) when 

vacuum in the supply reservoir is less than 8 inches of mercury; or (c) 

before or upon application of dual hydraulic type systems. Gauges 

indicating pressure or vacuum do not meet this requirement. 

3. All braking systems utilizing air, pressure, or vacuum for braking must 

have reserve capacity or a reservoir of sufficient capacity to ensure a fullservice brake application with the engine stopped, without depleting the 

air pressure or vacuum below 70 percent of operating pressure or vacuum. 

Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures 

All trucks and self-propelled cranes mounted on rubber-tired chassis or frames 

must undergo the braking performance tests required by the section entitled 

“Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment.” Conduct such tests in 

accordance with the following methods and /or procedures. 

A. General 

1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems at full 

charge. 

2. Units must be tested in an unloaded condition with all attachments and 

components in the transport position recommended by the manufacturer. 

3. All stopping tests must be conducted from a 20-mile-per-hour speed. 

4. Stopping tests must be conducted with the transmission in the gear 

range commensurate with the 20-mile-per-hour testing speed. The power 

train may be disengaged prior to completing the stop. 

5. Auxiliary retarders must not be used in the test unless the retarders are 

simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-12 October 2009 

6. Stopping distances must be measured from the point at which the brake 

control is applied to the point at which the machine stops. 

7. Means must be provided to determine equipment weight and stopping 

distance with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test speed with 

an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent. 

B. Service and Secondary Braking System 

1. Service and secondary braking tests must be conducted on a level (less 

than 1-percent grade in direction of travel and 3 percent at right angles to 

travel), clean, swept dry surfaces at least 18 feet 0 inches wide. The 

course length will be sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 miles per 

hour and providing a stopping distance equal to 1-1/2 times that shown for 

the emergency braking system. 

Units utilizing a dual system for meeting emergency brake system 

requirements must have each system independently tested (i.e., each 

system of a dual hydraulic system must be tested independently). 

2. Service and secondary braking system must have the following 

stopping capabilities when traveling at 20 miles per hour: 

Machine GVWR Service brake Secondary brake

Up to 50,000 55 feet 146 feet 

Over 50,000 62 feet 156 feet 

The unit will not deviate from a 12-foot-wide lane before or during the 

test. Do not permit any wheels to drag during the service brake tests. 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. Conduct parking brake system tests on a dry, swept, 15-percent grade 

surface. Conduct the tests with the unit facing both up and down the 

slope. 

2. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake is set, release all other 

holding devices and braking systems and place the transmission in the 

neutral position. Any energy assist sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) will 

be depleted. The unit must remain in this condition without movement for 

5 minutes. 

D. Energy Recovery Test 

1. The braking system’s primary power source must have the following 

recovery capabilities: 

a. Air. Seventy percent of maximum brake pressure when the service 

brakes are fully applied 12 times at the rate of 4 applications per 

minute with the engine running at maximum governed revolutions 

per minute. 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-13 

b. Vacuum. Seventy-percent maximum brake vacuum after one full 

(pedal depressed to full limit of travel) service brake application with 

engine stopped. 

c. Hydraulic. Pedal cannot be depressed to within 1 inch of floor or 

limit of travel on any one full application of the pedal. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-14 October 2009 

BRAKE PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD

TRUCK CRANES AND SELF-PROPELLED CRANES MOUNTED ON RUBBER-TIRED CHASSIS OR FRAMES

General Information

Date of Test Specification No. 

Contractor Subcontractor 

Description (Make and Model) 

Serial No., or Contractor’s No. Year of Manufacture 

Service Brake System Test

Type (air, vacuum, mechanical, hydraulic, comb.) No. of axles with Brakes 

Condition of Test Course (Surface and Grade) 

Weight of Vehicle (Manufacturer’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating- GVWR) 

Pressure or Vacuum Maintained During Braking 

 9 Satisfactory 9 Deficient 

Pressure or Vacuum Recovery 

Warning Device for Stored Energy Systems 

 9 Satisfactory 9 Deficient 

Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table) 

Feet Traveled________ Feet Traveled________ 

1st Trial Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9 2nd Trial Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Holding Performance on Grade 

Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Emergency Stopping System

Type Manual Only Manual/Automatic 

Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table) 

Feet Traveled________ 

Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Parking System Tests

Holds on 15% Grade Forward Reverse 

 9 9

Remains Applied for 5 Minutes 

Forward 9 Reverse 9

Signatures

Tested by (Contractor Representative): 

Signature: 

Title: 

Witnessed by (Government Rep): 

Signature: 

Title: 
Appendix F—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 F-15 

PERFORMANCE LOAD TEST RECORD 

(Crawler, Locomotive, Truck and Wheel Cranes)

Part I

Specification No. Name of Contractor 

Make Model Serial No. 

Rated Capacity Counterweight lbs. 

Length of Boom (if hydraulic, open / closed) Condition of Boom 

Length of Jib Weight Condition of Jib Rated Capacity 

Length of Boom Extension Weight Condition of Extension Rated Capacity 

Boom Hoist Line Size Breaking Strength No. Parts of Line Pendant Line Size 

Load Line Size (main) Breaking Strength No. Parts of Line Class Rotation 

Resistance 

yes no 

Whipline Size (runner or 

aux)

Breaking Strength No. Parts of Line Class Rotation 

Resistance 

yes no 

Sheave Pitch Diameter Boom Hoisting Load Hoisting Load Block (lower) 

Equipped with Power Controlled Lowering: 9 Load line 9 Whipline 9 Jibline 9 Boom 

hoist line 

Type Boom Stops Main Boom Jib Boom Condition of Stops-Main Boom Jib Boom 

Type Mounting: 9Track 9Crawler Standard 9Truck 9 Self-Propelled (rubber tired) 

Part II Performance Test- Main Boom

Test Load in Pounds (include sheave rigging and weight of other equipment as 

specified by owner’s manual)

Test Radius Boom 

Angle 

Manufac. 

Load 

Rating at 

Radius 

Degree of Swing Outriggers 

Satisfactory: 9 Lifting 9 Swinging 9 Lowering 9 Braking 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

F-16 October 2009 

Part III Travel under Load Test 

(if crane is going to travel under load on actual work)

Load in Pounds Boom Radius Load Rating at Radius 

Part IV Performance Test - Jib or Boom Extension

Load in Pounds Boom Radius Jib Used 

Degree of Swing Outriggers 

Satisfactory: 9 Lifting 9 Swinging 9 Lowering 9 Braking 

Remarks: 

Part V Signatures

Bureau Representative 

Date: 

Contractor Representative 

Date: 

Note: (1) Load testing of cranes will be conducted in accordance with performance testing requirements contained herein and 

set forth in the section entitled, “Hoisting Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors.” (2) Contractors are responsible for equipment 

meeting or exceeding minimum specified requirements and/or standards, conducting required load tests, and signature of 

Government representative on the form only indicates the contractor did effect tests in accordance with Reclamation 

requirements. (3) Load tests will not be conducted until performance inspection requirements have been met.
October 2009 G-1 

Appendix G 

Record of Performance Inspection and Break Test—

On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment 

General 

Nonexempt on-highway trucks, truck tractor/trailer combinations, transmix 

trucks, dump trucks, buses, manhaul units, and rubber-tired excavators and other 

similar on-highway-type equipment must be performance inspected and tested by 

the contractor and/or owner in accordance with provisions contained herein and in 

the section entitled "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment." (Cranes 

will be inspected and tested in accordance with the section entitled "Hoisting 

Equipment, Piledrivers, and Conveyors.") The contractor/owner must conduct the 

inspections and tests prior to initial onsite use, annually thereafter, and when 

directed by Reclamation. 

Initial and annual inspections and tests must be conducted in the presence of a 

Bureau of Reclamation representative and recorded using performance inspection 

criteria below and on the "Brake Performance Test Record" or a form that 

provides the same information. The form will then be signed and submitted to the 

appropriate Reclamation representative. Initial and periodic inspections and tests 

must be conducted onsite after the vehicle has been assembled or reassembled and 

prepared for operation. Manufacturer, contractor, or owner offsite inspections 

and tests must not be conducted until all appropriate performance inspection items 

are found to be available and in acceptable condition. 

Performance Inspection 

The performance inspection must, as a minimum, include the following features, 

components, accessories, and tests. 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(1) Manufacturer’s operating 

and maintenance manual 

Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manuals 

or similar instructions must accompany equipment. 

(2) Maintenance and inspection 

records 

Maintenance and inspection records must 

accompany the equipment. Unless the owner can 

produce such records, a complete inspection and 

maintenance program will be carried out and 

recorded. 

(3) Reverse signal alarm An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and 

functions when unit is placed in reverse gear or is 

moving in reverse. Requirements for this device 

may be waived if the equipment will not be operating 

in close proximity to personnel on foot or in 

congested areas. The alarm has been field tested. 

(4) Audible warning device The unit is equipped with an audible warning device 

having the control lever within reach of the operator 

when seated in the operating position. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

G-2 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(5) Lights Equipment meets DOT requirements but never less 

than two headlights (one on each side), one red 

taillight on each side, one red stoplight on each 

side, and directional signal lights on each side both 

front and rear. Backup lights and floodlamps to 

illuminate working areas in restricted visibility 

situations. 

(6) Cabs All equipment must have cabs with shatter-resistant 

glazing in all windows, heaters, defrosters, rearview 

mirrors, and windshield wipers. Windshield must be 

free of discoloration or damage that affects safe 

operation. There must be at least one window on 

each side of driver compartment. Engine exhaust 

gases are piped outside and/or discharged away 

from operation. 

(7) Towing Towing devices used on any combination of 

vehicles must be structurally adequate for the load 

imposed and securely and properly mounted. A 

locking device must be provided on fifth-wheel and 

tow bar systems to prevent accidental separation of 

units. Safety chains must be provided for towed 

units up to 

3,000 pounds gross weight, and automatic break 

away stopping systems for towed units over 3,000 

pounds gross weight. 

(8) Fenders and mudflaps All equipment with maximum speed exceeding 15 

mph and traveling on unsurfaced roads are provided 

with fenders and splash and stone throw protection. 

Haul trucks must conform to these requirements 

regardless of road surface. Trucks with beds or 

other structural members extending beyond wheel 

width and in a manner that prevents or eliminates 

danger from wheel thrown objects meets fender 

requirements. Reclamation may exempt fenders 

when not available from manufacturer. 

(9) Seatbelts Seatbelts and anchorages meeting DOT 

requirements are installed for the operator and all 

passengers. 

(10) Emergency equipment Vehicles exceeding 10,000 pound gross weight, 

buses, and manhaul units, are equipped with one 

12-inch square red flag, three reflective markers, 

wheel chocks for each unit, one 2-A:40-B:C dry 

chemical fire extinguisher. When transporting 

flammable or explosive cargo, two 2A 40 B:C 

extinguishers are required. 

(11) Access Access to cab or other work location on the 

equipment has sufficient steps and handholds to 

provide a three-point contact system for employees 

ascending or descending from work or operator 

positions. The first step is no more than 24 inches 

from ground level, or no more than 20 inches, 

unless means are provided for two handholds. 
Appendix G—Record of Performance Inspection and 

Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment 

October 2009 G-3 

Item Description 

Available/ 

Acceptable 

(12) Fill openings Fill hatches on water tank trucks or trailers are 

guarded by either reducing the size of the opening 

to a maximum of 8 inches in diameter or by 

attaching a heavy metal grill over the opening. 

(13) Dump trucks Dump trucks of all descriptions are equipped with: 

(1) latches or other means for preventing accidental 

movement of trip handles or dump body operating 

levers. (2) A permanent mounted manual device to 

prevent accidental lowering of dump body or bed. 

(3) Cab protection if loaded or unloaded by crane, 

loader, or shovel. Trucks without this protection are 

equipped with a readily visible sign instructing the 

operator to leave the cab during loading or 

unloading operations. 

(14) End-dump trailers 

designed for on-highway 

hauling and used in off-road 

hauling 

End-dump trailers are equipped with a tipover 

protection device with continuous monitoring display 

of the trailer box position at the equipment operator 

station to provide the operator with a quick and 

easily read indicator that shows safe, marginal, and 

unsafe degrees of lateral tilt. Additional 

requirements are: 

(1) an indicating audible alarm that signals an 

unsafe degree of tilt (alarm should have an on-off 

switch so it can be switched off when not dumping); 

(2) sufficient indicator lighting to be visible for night 

operations; and (3) hookup flexibility for easy 

interchange between tractors and trailers. 

(15) Transmix trucks lockout 

device 

Transmix trucks are equipped with a lockout device 

that prevents use of exterior controls until interior 

gear arrangement and brakes are in proper position. 

Providing equal protection acceptable to 

Reclamation meets this requirement. 

(16) Braking systems A bus, truck, tractor, or combination of vehicles or 

similar type equipment have the following braking 

systems conforming to these requirements, the 

RSHS, and DOT requirements. 

1. A service braking system. 

2. A parking brake system. 

3. A secondary brake system. (Equipment 

manufactured prior to July 1967 may be exempted 

from this requirement unless the system was 

available from the manufacturer at date of 

manufacture, is presently available from the 

manufacturer, or was required by the standard in 

force at time of manufacture.) 

The above braking systems have been installed, 

inspected, and tested and found to be in 

conformance with applicable requirements 

contained in the referenced standards and on the 

Brake Performance Test Record form. Further, the 

inspection and test results have been recorded on 

the aforementioned form. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

G-4 October 2009 

Brake Performance Test Record 

Part I - General 

Nonexempt on-highway type trucks, truck-tractor/ combinations, transmix trucks, 

dump trucks, excavators, and similar on-highway type equipment must have 

braking systems conforming to Reclamation Safety and Health Standards and 

performance inspection criteria. The equipment must incorporate the features, 

components, accessories, and performance capabilities required under part II and 

part III. 

Equipment found to meet the requirements of this form and RSHS section entitled, 

"Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" must be brake tested in 

accordance with the requirements, methods, and procedures described in part III 

and the RSHS. Results must be recorded in parts V, VI, and VII of this form. The 

completed form must be signed in part VIII and submitted to Reclamation. 

Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be placed into service until the braking 

system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested. 

Part II - Braking Systems Features, Components, Accessories, and 

Performance Capabilities 

A. Service Braking System 

1. All equipment must have an effective service braking system. The service 

brake system must have the capability of stopping and holding the equipment 

when loaded to the gross vehicle weight (GVW) on the maximum slope of 

intended travel. This requirement applies to both forward and reverse directions. 

The braking system also must be capable of bringing the equipment to a stop 

within the distances and under the conditions specified in part III. 

2. The service brake system is the type that is foot applied or released by the 

operator while sitting in the operating position. 

3. Equipment must have brakes on all wheels. 

B. Secondary Braking System 

1. All equipment, unless exempted, has a secondary brake system. 

2. The system is capable of being applied manually by a person seated in the 

operating position. The system is arranged so it cannot be released from the 

operator’s seat after an application, unless immediate reapplication can be made 

from the operator position. 
Appendix G—Record of Performance Inspection and 

Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment 

October 2009 G-5 

3. The secondary brake system can be separate from the service brake system or 

an interconnected system. If an interconnected system is used, it must be 

designed, constructed, and maintained so failure of any part of the operating 

mechanism of one or more systems (except service brake activation pedal or valve 

in a dual hydraulic system) does not reduce the effectiveness of the vehicle’s 

stopping capability below the secondary brake stopping performance 

requirements. 

4. The system may, in addition to manual activation, be activated automatically. 

If equipped with an automatic feature dependent upon pressure or vacuum forces, 

the automatic application will not occur until a warning device is activated. 

5. The system must be capable of bringing the equipment to a stop within the 

distances and under the condition specified in part III. 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. The equipment has an effective parking brake system or combination maxibrake parking brake system. 

2. The parking brake is capable of being applied by a person seated in the 

operator’s seat. 

3. The parking brake may be applied by the driver’s muscular effort, or by spring 

action, or by any other energy, provided that energy source is isolated from other 

sources. 

4. The parking brake system is held in the applied position by energy other than 

fluid pressure, air pressure, vacuum, or electric energy. The system must be such 

that it cannot be released unless adequate energy is available upon release to make 

further application with the required effectiveness. 

5. The braking system is capable of holding the equipment stationary under the 

conditions specified in part III. 

D. Features, Components, Accessories 

1. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic, or vacuum energy must be 

equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available for braking. 

2. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic, or vacuum energy must be 

equipped with a readily visible or audible low energy, continuous warning device 

at the operator’s position. The device will activate: (a) before air or hydraulic 

pressure drops below 50 percent of maximum energy level; (b) when vacuum in 

the supply reservoir is less than 8 inches Hg, (c) before or upon application of 

dual hydraulic type systems. Gages indicating pressure or vacuum are not 

acceptable for meeting this requirement. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

G-6 October 2009 

3. Braking systems may use common components (see secondary brake system 

requirements). 

4. Braking systems utilizing air, stored hydraulic pressure, or vacuum for braking 

must be equipped with reserve capacity or a reservoir of sufficient capacity to 

insure a full service brake application with the engine stopped without depleting 

the air or hydraulic pressure or vacuum below 70 percent of operating pressure of 

vacuum. 

Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures 

All equipment referenced in this appendix and section entitled "Mobile and 

Stationary Mechanized Equipment," unless exempted, must undergo the braking 

performance tests required. Such tests must be conducted in accordance with the 

following methods and/or procedures. 

A. General 

1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems at full charge. 

2. Units must be tested at maximum loading. 

3. All dynamic stopping tests must be conducted from a 20-mile-per-hour speed. 

4. Stopping tests must be conducted with the transmission in the gear range 

 commensurate with the 20-mile-per-hour testing speed. The power 

train may be disengaged prior to completing the stop. 

5. Auxiliary retarders must not be used in the test, unless the retarders are 

simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system. 

6. Stopping distances must be measured from the point at which the brake control 

is applied to the point at which the machine stops. 

7. Means must be provided to determine weight of the equipment and stopping 

distance with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test speed with an 

accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent. 

B. Service and Secondary Braking System 

1. Service and secondary dynamic braking tests must be conducted on a level 

(less than 

1-percent grade in direction of travel and 3-percent grade at right angles to travel) 

clean, swept dry surfaces at least 18 feet 0 inches wide. The course length must 

be sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 miles per hour and providing a stopping 

distance equal to 1-1/2 times that shown for the emergency braking system. Static 

service brake holding tests shall be conducted on maximum grade of intended 

travel. 
Appendix G—Record of Performance Inspection and 

Brake Test—On-Highway Type Mobile Equipment 

October 2009 G-7 

2. Service and secondary braking system must have the following stopping 

capabilities when traveling at 20 miles per hour: 

Equipment Service Break Secondary break

Light trucks and buses to 10,000 pounds 25 85 

Trucks and buses over 10,000 pounds 35 85 

Combination of vehicles 45 85 

The units must not deviate from a 12-foot-wide lane prior to or during tests. No 

wheels shall drag during the service braking test. 

3. Units utilizing a dual system for meeting emergency brake system 

requirements must have each system independently tested (i.e., each system of a 

dual hydraulic system can be tested independently by freely releasing the fluid to 

the atmosphere at the point of simulated failure in the dormant system). Each 

system must be capable of stopping the machine in the distance shown under 

secondary brakes. 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. Parking brake system tests must be conducted on a dry, swept, 15-percent 

grade surface. The tests must be conducted with the unit facing both up and down 

the slope. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake set, all other holding 

devices must be released and the transmission placed in the neutral position. Any 

energy assist sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) will be depleted. The unit must 

remain in this condition without movement for 5 minutes. 

D. Energy Recovery Test 

1. Air and air assist systems. With engine off and brakes applied listen for 

sounds or not any other evidence of air leakage. If no leakage is found, make a 

full-pressure application and hold for 1 minute. Pressure must not drop below 70 

percent of operation pressure. Again, check for sounds or leakage of air. 

2. Vacuum and vacuum assist systems. Turn engine off and depress the brake 

pedal with a light pressure for 10 seconds, and then press hard for 10 seconds. 

Determine if brake pedal moves or there is noise or other evidence of leaking 

system. Vacuum loss should not exceed 70 percent of normal operating level, nor 

should the brake pedal come within 1 inch of floor or travel stop. 

3. Hydraulic or stored hydraulic pressure systems. Follow the procedure for 

vacuum system for straight hydraulic system or air system procedures for stored 

hydraulic pressure system. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

G-8 October 2009 

BRAKE PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD

Non-Highway Type Trucks 10,000 Pounds GVW and Over, Truck-Tractor/Trailer Combinations, 

Transmix Trucks, Dump Trucks, Excavators, and Similar Type Equipment 

General Information

Date of Test Specification No. 

Contractor Subcontractor 

Description (Make and Model) 

Serial No., or Contractor’s No. Year of Manufacture 

Service Brake System Test

Type (air, vacuum, mechanical, hydraulic, comb.) No. of axles with Brakes 

Condition of Test Course (Surface and Grade) 

Weight of Vehicle (Manufacturer’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating- GVWR) 

Pressure or Vacuum Maintained During Braking 

 9 Satisfactory 9 Deficient 

Pressure or Vacuum Recovery 

Warning Device for Stored Energy Systems 

 9 Satisfactory 9 Deficient 

Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table) 

Feet Traveled________ Feet Traveled________ 

1st Trial Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9 2nd Trial Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Holding Performance on Grade 

Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Emergency Stopping System

Type Manual Only Manual/Automatic 

Stopping Distance (Satisfactory or Deficient in Comparison with Appropriate Table) 

Feet Traveled________ 

Satisfactory 9 Deficient 9

Parking System Tests

Holds on 15% Grade Forward Reverse 

 9 9

Remains Applied for 5 Minutes 

Forward 9 Reverse 9

Signatures

Tested by (Contractor Representative): 

Signature: 

Title: 

Witnessed by (Government Rep): 

Signature: 

Title: 
October 2009 H-1 

Appendix H 

Record of Performance—Inspection and Brake 

Test—Off-Highway, Wheel-Type Construction 

Machines, Loaders, Dumpers, Scrapers, Graders, 

Tractor Water Wagons, and Similar-Type Machines 

General 

All nonexempt, off-highway, wheel-type construction machines described above 

and in section 20 of Reclamation Safety and Health Standards must be 

performance inspected and brake tested by the owner and/or contractor: (a) prior 

to initial onsite operation; (b) at least once annually thereafter; and (c) whenever 

directed to do so by Reclamation. 

Such inspections and tests must be conducted in the presence of a Bureau of 

Reclamation representative and recorded in the appropriate places on this form. 

The form will then be signed and submitted to Reclamation. Initial and periodic 

performance inspection and brake tests must be conducted onsite after each unit 

has been assembled, reassembled, and/or prepared for operation. Manufacturer's 

or owner's offsite inspection and tests must not be substituted for onsite 

inspections and tests. Performance brake tests must not be conducted until all 

appropriate inspection items are found to be available and in acceptable condition. 

Performance Inspection 

The performance inspection must, as a minimum, include the following features, 

components, accessories, and tests. 

Item Description 

Available/ 

acceptable 

(1) Manufacturer's 

operating and 

maintenance manuals 

Manufacturer's operating and 

maintenance manuals shall accompany 

all off-highway, rubber-tired equipment 

covered by section 20 and this appendix. 

These manuals set forth inspection, 

operation, and maintenance criteria that 

is not available from any other source. 

(2) Maintenance and 

"frequent" and "periodic" 

inspection records 

Inspection and maintenance records 

must be complete and current. Unless 

owner can produce these records, brake 

tests will not be conducted until the 

appropriate maintenance and 

inspections have been performed and 

current records developed. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

H-2 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

acceptable 

(3) Reverse 

signal alarm 

An automatic reverse signal alarm is installed and 

functions when machine is placed in reverse gear or 

is moving in reverse. It has been field tested. 

(4) Audible 

warning 

device 

All operator-controlled machines are equipped with 

an audible warning device having the control lever(s) 

within reach of the operator(s) when seated in the 

operating position(s). The device has been field 

tested. 

(5) Lights Off-highway use. A minimum of two head lamps 

mounted symmetrically on the front. Head lamps 

must provide adequate illumination for a distance that 

exceeds machine maximum stopping distance at 

maximum speed. Two stop lamps at rear of 

machines for day operation, plus two tail lamps and 

one backup lamp for night operation. Work area 

floodlamps for night operation, including scraper bowl 

lamp, motor grader blade and front lamp, bucket 

lamps, ripper lamps. One rotating amber lamp visible 

in all directions on motor graders, front-end loaders 

and similar slow moving machines used on public or 

haul roads or in borrow or fill areas. On-highway use 

equipment intended for use on highways, public 

roads, or in public accessible areas must be 

equipped for highway operation. 

(6) Cabs Cabs are provided with safety glazed windows, 

heaters, defrosters, windshield wipers, door 

restraints, and rearview mirror on bidirectional 

machines. 

(7) Access Walking surfaces are of the skid-resistant type. 

Platforms are provided with guardrails. Access 

systems incorporate the three-point support method; 

one foot- two hands; one hand-two feet on handholds 

or ladders at all times. 

(8) Fire 

extinguisher 

or fire 

suppression 

systems 

Two 2A 40 B:C extinguishers are required on 

vehicles transporting flammable or explosive 

materials. Two 2A 40 B:C extinguishers and a fixed 

nozzle fire- suppression system are required on all 

diesel-powered equipment operated underground. 

All other equipment must be equipped with the type 

and number of extinguishers or suppression systems 

deemed necessary by Reclamation. 

(9) Fenders Machines with a maximum speed exceeding 15 mph 

are equipped with fenders or operator tire guards 

conforming to SAE J321 or devices providing 

equivalent protection. 
Appendix H—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 H-3 

Item Description 

Available/ 

acceptable 

(10) Seatbelts Machines with installed ROPS are equipped with 

operable seatbelts conforming with criteria set forth in 

applicable SAE standards (See table-1, RSHS 

section 20.) Only seatbelts permanently and legibly 

marked or labeled with: (1) year of manufacture; (2) 

model and style number; (3) trademark of 

manufacturer, distributor, or importer; and (4) design 

and test data certification are acceptable. 

(11) Exhaust 

systems 

Engine exhaust gases are piped outside of cab 

and/or discharged away from operator. Exhaust 

pipes are guarded or insulated to protect operating 

and maintenance personnel. 

(12) ROPS Machine is equipped with a rollover protective 

structure that has a permanently attached label that 

certifies the structure conforms to applicable SAE 

standard. Nonlabeled structures must not be used 

without a manufacturer's or PE's written confirmation 

that the structure meets the aforementioned criteria 

or practices. ROPS showing signs of damage, 

repair, or modification must not be used on 

equipment unless recertified. 

(13) FOPS Machine is equipped with falling object protective 

structure unless the contractor representative notes 

on this inspection report that the machine will not be 

loaded and/or used in a manner that would subject 

the operator to falling material. Installed FOPS will 

be certified as conforming with SAE J/ISO 3449 

criteria by a permanent label on the structure or the 

contractor has a written certification from the 

manufacturer or PE. 

(14) Operator 

enclosure 

Tractors, loaders, or forestry machines used in tree 

clearing operations, winching operations, or other 

operations where objects may intrude into the 

operator's area are equipped with enclosures 

conforming to SAE J1084. Equivalent protective 

enclosures acceptable to Reclamation meet this 

requirement. 

(15) 

Emergency 

steering 

Wheeled earthmoving machines such as tractors, 

scrapers, wheel loaders, graders, and dumpers 

manufactured in or after 1980 using a power steering 

system are equipped with emergency steering 

provisions meeting SAE J1511. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

H-4 October 2009 

Item Description 

Available/ 

acceptable 

(16) Dump 

truck safety 

devices 

Dump trucks of all descriptions are equipped with: 

a. Trip handle or dump-body operating levers, safety 

latches, or an equivalent protective system for 

preventing accidental movement of the lever. 

b. Permanently mounted device for preventing 

accidental lowering of dump body or bed during 

inspection or maintenance operations. 

c. Operator protective cab shield or canopy to protect 

operator during machine loading or unloading 

operations. Machines without this protection will 

display a suitable warning sign directing the operator 

to leave the cab during the loading or unloading 

process. 

(17) Brake 

systems 

All off-highway, wheel-type machines (regardless of 

age) are equipped with an operable and effective 

service braking system, emergency stopping (brake) 

system, and parking brake system. The braking 

systems conform fully with the criteria contained in 

SAE J/ISO 3450, this appendix, and RSHS section 

20. If the machine was manufactured prior to 1980, 

its braking system may conform with the SAE 

standard under which it was manufactured, if that 

standard requires the three braking systems and 

failure of a common component or system will not 

reduce machine stopping capability below the 

emergency stopping performance criteria shown on 

the attached "Brake Performance Test Record" form. 

In no circumstances can dropping the scraper bowl, 

loader bucket, or grader/tractor blade or equipment 

loads be considered as an emergency braking 

system. 

Reclamation may exempt emergency braking 

systems requirements for compactors and rollers 

manufactured prior to 1976 if such systems are not 

available from the manufacturer. Additionally, 

compactors and rollers intended for use on 3 percent 

or less grades can be Reclamation exempted from 

brake performance test requirements. 

The braking systems have been inspected, tested, 

and found to conform with applicable requirements 

contained in the referenced standards and on 

attached brake performance test record form. 

Further, the inspection and test results have been 

recorded on the inspection form. 
Appendix H—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 H-5 

Braking System Requirements and Test Procedures 

Part I - General 

Nonexempt, off-highway, wheel type machines must have braking systems 

conforming to the section "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" and 

item 17 of this appendix (performance inspection criteria). Further, the machines 

braking systems must incorporate the features, components, accessories, and 

performance capabilities required under parts II and III of this form 

Machines found to meet the requirements of item 17 and part 11 of this form and 

the section "Mobile and Stationary Mechanized Equipment" must be brake tested 

in accordance with the requirements, procedures, and methods described in part 

III of this form. Results must be recorded in parts V, VI, and VII of this form. 

The completed form shall be signed in part VIII and submitted to Reclamation. 

Equipment failing brake test(s) must not be placed into service until the braking 

system has been repaired and satisfactorily tested. 

Part II - Braking Systems, Features, Components, and Accessories 

A. Service Braking System 

1. All machines must have an effective service braking system. The 

service braking system must have the capability equivalent to holding the 

respective machine under the following conditions: 

Machine Grade Condition 

Loaders 30% Loaded to manufacturer's gross weight rating and 

distribution with bucket in SAE carry position. 

Dumpers and 

tractor scrapers 

25% Loaded to manufacturer's gross weight rating and 

distribution. 

Graders 30% Cutting edge to be in the transport position. 

Tractors with 

dozers 

30% Lowest part of cutting edge to be 18 feet above test 

surface 

Compactor loaders 20% All conditions of loading 

2. The braking system must be capable of bringing the machine to a stop 

within the distances and under the conditions specified in part III. 

3. The service braking system must be of the type that can be applied or 

released by the operator while sitting in the operating position. 

4. All tractor scrapers and dumpers must have braked wheels on at least 

one axle of the prime mover and one axle of each trailing unit. All other 

machines may have only two braked wheels (one right hand, one left 

hand) if the system meets stopping distance requirements of part Ill. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

H-6 October 2009 

5. With the machine stationary, the service braking system's primary 

power source must have the capability of delivering at least 70 percent of 

maximum brake pressure when the brakes are fully applied twelve 

(12) times at rate of four (4) applications per minute with the engine at 

maximum governed speed for dumpers and tractor scrapers and twenty 

(20) times at the rate of six (6) applications per minute for loaders, 

graders, tractors with dozer, compactors, and rollers. 

6. The service braking system using stored energy must be equipped with 

a warning device that activates before system energy drops below 50 

percent of manufacturer's specified maximum operating energy level. The 

device must be readily visible and/or audible to the operator and provide a 

continuous warning. Gages indicating pressure or vacuum do not meet 

these requirements. 

B. Emergency Stopping Systems 

1. All machines, unless exempted elsewhere, must be equipped with an 

emergency stopping system. 

2. The emergency stopping system must be capable of bringing the 

machine to a stop within the distance and under the conditions specified in 

part III. 

3. The emergency system must be capable of being applied from the 

operator's position. The system must be arranged so that it cannot be 

released by the operator unless immediate reapplication can be made from 

the operator's seat to stop the machine or combination of machines. 

4. In addition to the manual control, the emergency stopping system may 

also be applied automatically. If an automatic system is used, the 

automatic application must occur after the warning device is actuated. 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. All machines must be equipped with a parking system capable of being 

applied from the operators position. The brake must be such that it cannot 

be released unless immediate reapplication can be made by the operator. 

2. The parking system, when applied, must maintain the parking 

performance despite any contraction of the brake parts, exhaustion of 

energy, or leakage of any kind. 

D. Features, Components, and Accessories 

1. Braking systems utilizing stored energy or vacuum assist device must 

be equipped with a gage that indicates the pressure or vacuum available 

for braking. 
Appendix H—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 H-7 

2. Braking systems may use common components; however, a failure of a 

common component must not reduce the effectiveness of the machine 

stopping capability below the emergency stopping performance 

requirement. 

Part III - Brake Testing Methods and Procedures 

All off-highway, wheel-type machines described in the RSHS section, "Mobile 

and Stationary Equipment" and, unless exempted elsewhere, must undergo the 

braking performance tests required. Such tests must be conducted in accordance 

with the following methods and procedures. 

A. General 

1. All tests must be conducted with applicable braking systems fully 

charged. 

2. Units will be tested under the following condition: 

Machine Conditions 

Loaders Unloaded with bucket in carry position (The vertical 

distance from ground to center-line of bucket hinge pin, 

with the angle of approach at 15 degrees 

Dumpers and tractor 

scrapers 

Loaded to manufacturer's gross machine weight rating 

and distribution. 

Tractors with dozers Lowest part of cutting edge 18 inches above test surface. 

Compactors or rollers Maximum fuel, oil, sprinkler system water, and ballast as 

actually in use when operating. 

Graders Cutting edge to be in the transport position. 

3. All dynamic stopping tests must be conducted from 20 mph, except 

compactor and roller stopping tests will be conducted from 10 mph or the 

maximum rated speed, if less than 10 mph. 

4. Stopping tests shall be conducted with the transmission in the gear 

range commensurate with 20 mph testing speed. The power train may be 

disengaged prior to completing the stop. On machines using hydrostatic 

drives, the drive train shall be disengaged to eliminate the retarding torque 

of the transmission. 

5. Auxiliary retarders shall not be used in the test unless the retarder is 

simultaneously activated by the applicable brake control system. 

6. Stopping distances shall be measured from the point at which the brake 

control is applied to the point at which the machine stops. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

H-8 October 2009 

7. Means shall be provided to determine weight of equipment and 

stopping distances with an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent and test 

speeds with an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent. 

B. Services and Emergency Braking Systems 

1. Service and emergency dynamic braking tests shall be conducted on a 

level (less than 1 percent grade in direction of travel and 3 percent at right 

angles to travel) clean swept dry surface. The course length will be 

sufficient for accelerating from 0 to 20 mph (10 mph for compactors and 

rollers) and providing a stopping distance equal to 1-1/ 2 times that shown 

for the emergency braking system. Static service brake holding tests shall 

be conducted on the greater of 15 percent grade or maximum grade of 

intended travel. 

2. Service and emergency braking systems shall have the following 

stopping capabilities in feet when traveling at 20 mph (10 mph for 

compactors and rollers). 

Machine 

Machine weight 

(lbs) 

Service 

braking 

Emergency 

 braking 

Loaders tractors with dozers Up to 36,000 

Over 36,000 to 70,000 

Over 70,000 to 140,000 

Over 140,000 to 280,000 

Over 280,000 

45 

61 

75 

89 

111 

135 

183 

225 

267 

333 

Dumpers Up to 100,000 

Over 100,000 to 200,000 

Over 200,000 to 400,000 

 59 

74 

96 

118 

153 

173 

202 

231 

Combination 

dumpers and dumper trains 

Up to 100,000 

Over 100,000 to 200,000 

Over 200,000 to 400,000 

Over 400,000 

Over 400,000 

59 

89 

125 

177 

153 

192 

241 

310 

Tractor scrapers Up to 50,000 

Over 50,000 to 100,000 

Over 100,000 to 150,000 

Over 150,000 

58 

73 

88 

102 

151 

170 

190 

209 

Graders Up to 35,000 

Over 35,000 to 70,000 

Over 70,000 

42 

54 

75 

126 

162 

225 

Compactor rollers Up to 12,000 

Over 12,000 to 30,000 

Over 30,000 

23.7 

27.4 

31.1 

56.5 

60.2 

63.9 
Appendix H—Record of Performance Inspection and Test— 

Crawler, Locomotive, Truck, and Wheel Cranes 

October 2009 H-9 

C. Parking Brake System 

1. Parking brake systems must be conducted on a dry, 15-percent grade 

surface. The tests must be conducted with the unit facing both up and 

down the slope. Once the unit is in place and the parking brake set, all 

other holding devices and braking systems must be released and the 

transmission placed in the neutral position. Any stored energy assist 

sources (air, vacuum, hydraulic) must be depleted. The unit must remain 

in this condition without movement for 5 minutes. 

D. Energy Recovery Test 

Energy recovery tests must be conducted as follows: 

a. Machine will be placed on the stopping test surface. The engine speed 

will be increased to the maximum governed revolutions per minute. The 

system storage pressure or vacuum will be allowed to increase until gages 

indicate the system is at the manufactured full rated level. The brakes on 

dumpers and tractor scrapers must be fully applied four times per minute 

for 3 consecutive minutes. During this test procedure, the 

pressure/vacuum gage must never read less than 70 percent of full rated 

reading. The brakes on loaders, graders, tractors with dozer, compactor, 

and rollers must be fully applied 6 times per minute for 3-1/2 consecutive 

minutes. During this test procedure, the gage must never read less than 70 

percent of full rated reading. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

H-10 October 2009 

 
October 2009 I-1 

Appendix I 

Cleanout Operations 

Clean all concrete placing pipelines using one or more of the following 

procedures: 

1. Suction. Insert a soft, sponge rubber ball into the end hose. Use the pump 

to suck the concrete and ball back into the hopper. 

2. Water Pressure Procedure. Attach a specialized pipe cleaning head to 

the pump side of the pipeline. Make a paper plug from wet, double-folded, 

close-furled empty cement bags; place it in the head, followed by a sponge 

rubber ball; and arrange it so the bags contact the concrete. Apply water 

pressure to the ball through a head connection. 

If the concrete and water are to be wasted at the discharge end, leave the 

bends and end hoses in place. If the water is to be retained in the pipe and 

returned to the pump, remove the elbows and end hoses and attach a catch 

basket to the end of the pipe. Arrange the catch basket so the plug and ball 

remain in the end of the pipe and seal in the water. Then, use air or water 

pressure to force the water back through the pipe to the pump. 

3. Compressed Air Procedure. This procedure for cleaning pipelines is 

very hazardous and requires exact methods and special equipment to ensure 

safety of personnel. Only use this procedure with the approval of the 

Contracting Officer's Representative or office head and in accordance with the 

following, or equivalent, safe methods: 

a. Have a trained employee supervise blowing out operations. 

b. Move all nonessential personnel to a safe location. 

c. Equip the pipeline inlet end with a blowing hood, complete with ball 

and plug. 

d. Remove bends and end hose from pipeline discharge end. Attach a 

catch basket to the pipeline discharge end. The catch basket must be 

correctly sized to allow the concrete to flow freely, while preventing the 

plug and ball from exiting the pipeline and breaking the hermetical seal 

that keeps the compressed air in the line. 

e. Slowly build up pressure in the pipe until the air gauge indicates 

movement of concrete, but never beyond 150 pounds per square inch. 

Constantly monitor the air pressure until the plug enters the catch basket. 

f. Relieve the air pressure to zero gage pressure through an air relief cock 

in the blowing head before working on the line or removing the catch 

basket and plug. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

I-2 October 2009 

Caution: Exercise extreme care when cleaning vertical pipes with 

compressed air. High-pressure air pockets that cannot be relieved through the 

relief cock can be created in the line where the concrete column separates. 

Column separation occurs when the bottom of the line is disconnected before 

the blowing head is attached. 
October 2009 J-1 

Appendix J

Explosives 

Distance for Storage 

Table J-1.—Distances for storage of explosives 

Explosives Distances in feet when storage is barricaded 

Pounds 

over 

Pounds 

not over 

Inhabited 

buildings 

Passenger 

railways 

Public 

highways 

Separation of 

magazines 

2 5 70 51 30 6 

5 10 90 64 35 8 

10 20 110 81 45 10 

20 30 125 93 50 11 

30 40 140 103 55 12 

40 50 150 110 60 14 

50 75 170 127 70 15 

75 100 190 139 75 16 

100 125 200 150 80 18 

125 150 215 159 85 19 

150 200 235 175 95 21 

200 250 255 189 105 23 

250 300 270 201 110 24 

300 400 295 221 120 27 

400 500 320 238 130 29 

500 600 340 253 135 31 

600 700 355 266 145 32 

700 800 375 278 150 33 

800 900 390 289 155 35 

900 1,000 400 300 160 36 

1,000 1,200 425 318 165 39 

1,200 1,400 450 336 170 41 

1,400 1,600 470 351 175 43 

1,600 1,800 490 366 180 44 

1,800 2,000 505 378 185 45 

2,000 2,500 545 408 190 49 

2,500 3,000 580 432 195 52 

3,000 4,000 635 474 210 58 

4,000 5,000 685 513 225 61 

5,000 6,000 730 546 235 65 

6,000 7,000 770 573 245 68 

7,000 8,000 800 600 250 72 

8,000 9,000 835 624 255 75 

9,000 10,000 865 645 260 78 

10,000 12,000 875 687 270 82 

12,000 14,000 885 723 275 87 

14,000 16,000 900 756 280 90 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

J-2 October 2009 

Table J-1. Distances for storage of explosives (continued)

Explosives Distances in feet when storage is barricaded 

Pounds 

over 

Pounds 

not over 

Inhabited 

buildings 

Passenger 

railways 

Public 

highways 

Separation of 

magazines 

16,000 18,000 940 786 285 94 

18,000 20,000 975 813 290 98 

20,000 25,000 1,055 876 315 105 

25,000 30,000 1,130 933 340 112 

30,000 35,000 1,205 981 360 119 

35,000 40,000 1,275 1,026 380 124 

40,000 45,000 1,340 1,068 400 129 

45,000 50,000 1,400 1,104 420 135 

50,000 55,000 1,460 1,140 440 140 

55,000 60,000 1,515 1,173 455 145 

60,000 65,000 1,565 1,206 470 150 

65,000 70,000 1,610 1,236 485 155 

70,000 75,000 1,655 1,263 500 160 

75,000 80,000 1,695 1,293 510 165 

80,000 85,000 1,730 1,317 520 170 

85,000 90,000 1,760 1,344 530 175 

90,000 95,000 1,790 1,368 540 180 

95,000 100,000 1,815 1,392 545 185 

100,000 110,000 1,835 1,437 550 195 

110,000 120,000 1,855 1,479 555 205 

120,000 130,000 1,875 1,521 560 215 

130,000 140,000 1,890 1,557 565 225 

140,000 150,000 1,900 1,593 570 235 

150,000 160,000 1,935 1,629 580 245 

160,000 170,000 1,965 1,662 590 255 

170,000 180,000 1,990 1,695 600 265 

180,000 190,000 2,010 1,725 605 275 

190,000 200,000 2,030 1,755 610 285 

200,000 210,000 2,055 1,782 620 295 

210,000 230,000 2,100 1,836 635 315 

230,000 250,000 2,155 1,890 650 337 

250,000 275,000 2,215 1,950 670 360 

275,000 300,000 2,275 2,000 690 385 

Note 1. “Explosive materials” means explosives, blasting agents, and detonators. 

Note 2. “Explosives” means any chemical compound, mixture, or device, the primary or common 

purpose of which is to function by explosion. A list of explosives determined to be within the 

coverage of “18 U.S.C. Chapter 40, Importation, Manufacture, Distribution and Storage of 

Explosive Materials” is issued annually by the Director of the Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms 

Division. 

Note 3. “Blasting agents” means any material or mixture, consisting of fuel and oxidizer, 

intended for blasting, not otherwise defined as an explosive, provided that the finished product, as 

mixed for use or shipment, cannot be detonated by means of a number 8 test blasting cap when 

unconfined. 

Note 4. “Detonator” means any device containing a detonating charge that is used for initiating 

detonation in an explosive. The term includes, but is not limited to, electric blasting caps of 

instantaneous and delay types, blasting caps for use with safety fuses, and detonating-cord delay 

connectors. 
Appendix J—Explosives 

October 2009 J-3 

Note 5. “Magazine” means any building or structure, other than an explosives manufacturing 

building, used for the permanent storage of explosive materials. 

Note 6. “Natural barricade” means natural features of the ground, such as hills, or timber of 

sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen from the 

magazine when the trees are bare of leaves. 

Note 7. “Artificial barricade” means an artificial mound or revetted wall of earth with a minimum 

thickness of 3 feet. 

Note 8. “Barricaded” means that a building containing explosives is effectually screened from a 

magazine, building, railway, or highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barricade of 

such height that a straight line from the top of any sidewall of the building containing explosives to 

the eave line of any magazine, or building, or to a point above the center of a railway or highway, 

will pass through such intervening natural or artificial barricade. 

Note 9. “Inhabited building distance” is the minimum allowable separation between explosive 

storage areas and public/private places of residence or assembly, commercial facilities and utilities, 

recreational facilities, project visitor areas, and Government and contractor work and storage areas 

or places where workers gather, whether indoors or outdoors. 

Note 10. “Railway” means any steam, electric, or other railroad or railway which carries 

passengers for hire. 

Note 11. “Highway” means any street or public road. “Public Highways Class A to D” are 

highways with average traffic volume of 3,000 or less vehicles per day as specified in “American 

Civil Engineering Practice” (Abbett, Vol. 1, Table 46, Sec. 3-74, 1956 Edition, John Wiley and 

Sons). 

Note 12. When two or more storage magazines are located on the same property, each 

magazine must comply with the minimum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways, 

and highways, and, in addition, they should be separated from each other by not less than the 

distances shown for “Separation of magazines,” except that the quantity of explosives contained in 

cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing of said cap magazines from magazines 

containing other explosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from each other by less 

than the specified “Separation of magazines” distances, then such two or more magazines, as a 

group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total quantity of explosives stored in such 

group must be treated as if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any magazine of the 

group, and must comply with the minimum distances specified from other magazines, inhabited 

buildings, railways, and highways. 

Note 13. Storage in excess of 300,000 pounds of explosives in one magazine is prohibited. 

Note 14. This table is not applicable to transportation of explosives or any handling or temporary 

storage necessary or incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projectiles, or other 

heavily encased explosives. 

For transportation purposes, the Department of Transportation in Title 49 Transportation CFR 

Parts 1-199 subdivides explosives into three classes: 

Class A—Maximum Hazard 

Class B—Flammable Hazard 

Class C—Minimum Hazard 

Note 15. All types of blasting caps in strengths through No. 8 cap should be rated at 11⁄2 pounds 

of explosives per 1,000 caps. For strengths higher than No. 8 cap, consult the manufacturer. 

Note 16. For quantity and distance purposes, detonating cord of 50 or 60 grains per foot should 

be calculated as equivalent to 9 pounds of high explosives per 1,000 feet. Heavier or lighter core 

loads should be rated proportionately. 

Note 17. When a building containing explosives is not barricaded, the distance shown in the 

above tables should be doubled. 

Note 18. These tables are for minimum distances applicable to any human exposed to explosive 

hazards on or off Government-owned property. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

J-4 October 2009 

Table J-2.—Recommended separation distances of ammonium nitrate 

and blasting agents from explosives or blasting agents1

Donor weight 

Minimum separation distance 

of receptor when barricaded 2

(feet) 

Pounds 

over 

Pounds not 

over 

Ammonium 

nitrate3

Blasting 

agent4

Minimum thickness 

of artificial 

barricades5

(inches) 

 100 3 11 12 

100 300 4 14 12 

300 600 5 18 12 

600 1,000 6 22 12 

1,000 1,600 7 25 12 

1,600 2,000 8 29 12 

2,000 3,000 9 32 15 

3,000 4,000 10 36 15 

4,000 6,000 11 40 15 

6,000 8,000 12 43 20 

8,000 10,000 13 47 20 

10,000 12,000 14 50 20 

12,000 16,000 15 54 25 

16,000 20,000 16 58 25 

20,000 25,000 18 65 25 

25,000 30,000 19 68 30 

30,000 35,000 20 72 30 

35,000 40,000 21 76 30 

40,000 45,000 22 79 35 

45,000 50,000 23 83 35 

50,000 55,000 24 86 35 

55,000 60,000 25 90 35 

60,000 70,000 26 94 40 

70,000 80,000 28 101 40 

80,000 90,000 30 108 40 

90,000 100,000 32 115 40 

100,000 120,000 34 122 50 

120,000 140,000 37 133 50 

140,000 160,000 40 144 50 

160,000 180,000 44 158 50 

180,000 200,000 48 173 50 

200,000 220,000 52 187 60 

220,000 250,000 56 202 60 

250,000 275,000 60 216 60 

275,000 300,000 64 230 60 

Note 1. Recommended separation distances to prevent explosion of ammonium nitrate and 

ammonium nitrate-based blasting agents by propagation from nearby stores of high explosives or 

blasting agents referred to in the table as the “donor.” Ammonium nitrate, by itself, is not considered 

to be a donor when applying this table. Ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate-fuel oil or 

combinations thereof are acceptors. If stores of ammonium nitrate are located within the 

sympathetic detonation distance of explosives or blasting agents, one-half the mass of the 
Appendix J—Explosives 

October 2009 J-5 

ammonium nitrate should be included in the mass of the donor. The distances apply to the 

separation of stores only. The “Table of Distances” shall be used in determining separation 

distances from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public highways. 

Note 2. When the ammonium nitrate gas and/or blasting agent is not barricaded, the distances 

shown in the table shall be multiplied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high 

velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies, sheet metal structures, metal 

containers, and the like which may enclose the “donor.” Where storage is in bullet-resistant 

magazines1

 recommended for explosives or where the storage is protected by a bullet-resistant 

wall, distances and barricade thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in the “Table of Distances” 

are not required. 

Note 3. The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that passes the insensitivity test 

prescribed in the definition of ammonium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant Food 

Institute;2

 and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test shall be stored at separation distances 

determined by competent persons and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 

Note 4. The distances referred to in Note 3 apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting agents 

which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) 

regulations. 

Note 5. Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the prescribed minimum thickness of 

earth or sand are acceptable artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber of 

sufficient density that the surrounding exposures, which require protection, cannot be seen from the 

“donor” when the trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable. 

Note 6. When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in determining the distances to be 

maintained from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public highways, it may be counted at 

one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is lower. 

 

 

 1 For construction of bullet-resistant magazines, see IME Publication No. 1. 

 2 Definition and Test Procedures for Ammonium Nitrate, Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, November 1964. 

Reprinted from Recommended Separation Distances of Ammonium Nitrate and Blasting Agents from Code for the manufacture, transportation, storage, 

and use of explosive materials, NFPA 495, Copyrighted by National Fire Protection Association. Reproduced by permission. 
October 2009 K-1 

Appendix K 

Glossary of Terms, Definitions, and Acronyms 

The following definitions apply to this and other documents related to the U.S. 

Bureau of Reclamation Safety and Occupational Health Standards unless 

specifically stated in the section. 

Abatement Plan A written plan identifying the deficiency, date of 

correction, individual(s) responsible for correction, 

interim corrective measures, and a justification for 

delay in immediate correction of the deficiency. 

Accepted/Acceptable A term denoting when a written procedure, practice, 

method, program, engineering design, or employee 

qualification criteria submittal, which, after a 

cursory review by an authorized Reclamation 

representative, is determined to generally conform 

to safety and health or contractual requirements. 

Acceptance or acceptability of such submittals in no 

way relieves the submitting entity from ensuring 

employees a safe and healthful work environment 

or complying with all contractual requirements and 

good engineering practices. 

Accident An unplanned event that results in injury, illness, 

death, property damage, mission interruption, or 

other loss that has a negative effect on the mission. 

Approved A method, equipment, procedure, practice, tool, 

etc., which is sanctioned, confirmed, as acceptable 

for a particular use or purpose by a person or 

organization authorized to render such approval or 

judgment. 

Attendant An attendant is a person trained, authorized, and 

designated to perform attending duties as prescribed 

in the confined space program. The individual must 

have no other tasks except to be stationed outside 

the permit required confined space to monitor the 

entrants. 

Authorized Person A person approved or assigned by the employer to 

perform a specific type of duty or to assume a 

specific responsibility. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

K-2 October 2009 

Blanking or Binding The absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the 

fastening of a solid plate that completely covers the 

bore and that is capable of withstanding the 

maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no 

leakage beyond the plate. 

Buddy System A team of two diving partners on a diving 

operation. The buddy divers are jointly responsible 

for the assigned mission. Each diver keeps track of 

depth and time during the dive. Each diver must 

watch out for the safety and well-being of his buddy 

and be alert for symptoms of nitrogen narcosis, 

decompression sickness, and carbon dioxide 

intoxication. 

Certification The process and documentation of testing and 

validating an individual, system, or component, 

preferably by an independent testing agency, for 

compliance with established criteria. 

Certified or Licensed One who possesses a license or certificate issued by 

a recognized authority, attesting that he/she has 

been trained and/or tested and is competent and 

qualified in a specific field of endeavor. 

Certified or Licensed One who possesses a certificate or license (or has 

 (employee, craftsman, been licensed or certified by a recognized authority) 

 or professional) attesting that he/she has been trained or tested and 

 is competent and qualified in a specific field of 

 endeavor. 

Clearance A process used to establish, under tightly controlled 

discipline, a safe environment in which workers can 

perform their tasks on specific electrical, hydraulic, 

pneumatic, or mechanical equipment and/or 

facilities. It includes the actions of systematically 

isolating the equipment from all sources of 

hazardous energy and using lockout/tagout 

procedures for the operating and control points for 

these sources of energy. It also includes a written 

statement with documentation (switching program) 

declaring that the equipment to be worked on has 

been deenergized and isolated from hazardous 

sources of energy 
Appendix K—Glossary of Terms, 

Definitions, and Acronyms 

October 2009 K-3 

Clearance (minimum The distance from uninsulated, energized equipment 

 distance) that is considered safe. The term "minimum 

 distance" is preferred to avoid confusion with 

 "Clearance." 

Codes Rules and standards adopted by a governmental 

agency as mandatory regulations having the force 

and effect of law. Also used to describe a body of 

standards. 

Collateral Duty Safety An employee who is formally charged, on a 

 Representative (CDSR) part-time basis, with safety program duties and 

 responsibilities, in addition to regularly assigned 

 duties. The assigned CDSR must have training 

 prior to assuming the assignment, and periodically 

 during the period of assignment. 

Competent Person A person who by training and/or experience is 

capable of performing specifically assigned duties 

and responsibilities. Further, the person is capable 

of recognizing existing and predictable hazards or 

conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or 

dangerous and is authorized to initiate prompt 

corrective action. 

Confined Space A confined space is a space that is large enough and 

configured for an employee to enter and perform 

assigned work, but has limited or restricted means 

of entry and egress, and is not designed for 

continuous human occupancy. 

Confined Space Program A confined space program is a site-specific program 

that establishes the procedures for entry into permit 

required confined spaces, and identifies the persons 

authorized to perform the various duties at each 

entry. 

Contaminant Any material, that, by nature of its composition or 

reaction with other materials, is potentially capable 

of causing injury, death, illness, damage, loss, or 

pain. 

Contractor Any individual or firm under contractual agreement 

with Reclamation or its subunits for the 

performance of services and products, such as 

construction, maintenance, and hazardous waste 

activities, including subcontractors of a prime 

contractor. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

K-4 October 2009 

Danger A term denoting liability or potential to cause 

injury, death, illness, damage, loss, or pain. 

Deadman Switch A switch that requires constant pressure to supply 

electrical current to the circuit. 

Defect Any characteristic or condition that weakens or 

reduces the strength of a procedure, material, or 

object of which it is a part. 

Designated Person An employee who has been trained or is qualified 

and assigned the responsibility to perform a specific 

task. 

Double Block and The closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and 

 Bleed locking or tagging two in-line valves and by 

 opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve 

 in the line between the two closed valves. 

Employer A contractor or Reclamation project/area manager 

 who has employees engaged in work for or in 

 Reclamation controlled areas. 

Energized Facility Maintenance work on an energized conductor or 

 Maintenance part of its supporting structure. Also includes work 

 on a deenergized component (busing, disconnect 

 switch, etc.) located near an energized conductor 

 or part. 

Engulfment The surrounding and effective capture of a person 

by a liquid or flowable solid substance that can be 

aspirated to cause death by filling and plugging the 

respiratory system or that can exert enough force on 

the body to cause death by strangulation, 

constriction, or crushing. 

Entrant An entrant is a person trained and authorized to 

enter confined spaces under conditions documented 

in the confined space permit. 

Entry Supervisor A person trained, authorized, and designated (such 

as employer or foreman) by a written permit to be 

responsible for determining if acceptable entry 

conditions are present at a permit required confined 

space, authorizes each entry, oversees entry 

operations, and terminates entries when violations 

or hazards occur. The entry supervisor may also 

serve as an attendant if the individual meets 

requirements as an attendant. 
Appendix K—Glossary of Terms, 

Definitions, and Acronyms 

October 2009 K-5 

Equipment Any machine, device, or apparatus—electrical, 

mechanical, or hydraulic—including transmission 

lines, piping systems, and waterways. 

Foreman The person directly in charge of personnel at the 

 (Job Supervisor) worksite, regardless of operating or payroll title. 

Groundman A person working at ground level in support of a 

lineman working aloft. 

Hazard A dangerous condition, potential or inherent, that 

can bring about an interruption or interfere with the 

expected orderly progress of an activity. 

Hazardous An atmosphere that may expose employees to the 

 Atmosphere risk of death, incapacitation, impaired ability to 

 self-rescue unaided, injury, or acute illness. 

 Hazardous atmospheres include flammable gas, 

 vapor, or mist, airborne combustible dust, oxygen 

 concentration below 19.5 percent or above 

 23.5 percent, concentrations of substances that 

 exceed dose or permissible exposure limits, or other 

 atmospheric condition immediately dangerous to 

 life or health. 

Hazardous A physical condition or circumstance that is a 

 Condition precondition of an accident occurrence. 

Hazardous Refers to any substance which, by reason of being 

 Substance or Material explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, 

 oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise harmful, is 

 likely to cause illness or injury. 

Heavy Gear Diver-worn, deep-sea dress, including helmet, 

breastplate, dry suit, and weighted shoes. 

High Scaling Manually or mechanically removing, drilling, 

blasting, rock bolting, grouting, shoring, forming, 

inspecting, surveying, or testing rock, concrete, or 

other materials on vertical faces and slopes or 

inclines steeper than 1:1 or where workers and 

machinery require external assistance to maintain 

stability. 

High Voltage Refers to all voltages of 600 volts or greater, unless 

otherwise defined in the text of this manual. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

K-6 October 2009 

Hot Line Order A statement with documentation from the 

Operations Supervisor to the Job Supervisor that 

specific work may be done on or near a line or 

other equipment without requiring that it be 

disconnected from all sources of energy. The 

equipment is to be considered energized or “hot” 

(see FIST Volume 1-1 for application). 

Immediately Dangerous to A condition or practice that poses an immediate 

 Life and Health (IDLH) threat to life and health, or an immediate threat of 

 severe exposure to contaminants, such as toxic or 

 radioactive materials which are likely to have 

 adverse delayed effects on health. 

Imminent Danger Any condition or practice that could reasonably be 

expected to cause death or serious physical harm 

before normal abatement actions can be taken. 

Incident For reporting purposes, an unplanned event 

involving people, equipment, or the environment 

that could have resulted in an injury, illness, or loss, 

but did not. 

Industrial An individual who, by virtue of education, 

 Hygienist training, special studies, certification, and 

 experience, has acquired competence in industrial 

 hygiene. He/she is capable of recognizing the 

 environmental factors, toxic chemicals, and stress 

 of work operation; evaluating those factors based 

 on experience and quantitative measurement 

 techniques; and recommends methods to 

 eliminate, control, or reduce such stresses. 

Job Hazard A study of a job or activity to (1) identify hazards or 

 Analysis potential accidents associated with each step or task, 

 and (2) develop solutions that will eliminate, 

 mitigate, or prevent such hazards or accidents. A 

 job hazard analysis should be an integral part of the 

 written procedures for work activities. 

Lineman A payroll classification or title given a craftsperson 

whose duties include climbing wood poles or steel 

structures to perform work on electric power 

transmission and distribution circuits. 
Appendix K—Glossary of Terms, 

Definitions, and Acronyms 

October 2009 K-7 

Office Head Unless otherwise indicated, means the Reclamation 

official responsible for the area or work activity to 

which the standard applies. Usually, the Area 

Manager, Project Manager, or Project Construction 

Engineer; but in some organizations, the Chief, 

Power Division; Chief, Field Division; or similar 

official. 

O&M Employee Any person directly involved with the operation and 

maintenance of facilities or features of a 

Reclamation power or water system or involved in 

activities supporting the O&M function. 

Onsite Construction All construction activities performed under 

 Operations Bureau of Reclamation contract which are carried 

 out within the confines of the project or 

 construction site as specified in the contract 

 document. It also includes all activities on offsite 

 property used by the contractor or his 

 subcontractors for the primary purpose of 

 implementing work under the contract 

 (i.e., borrow pits, repair shops, warehousing, 

 equipment fabrication, and assembly sites, etc.). 

Performance Inspection Inspection and tests to determine if equipment can 

 and Tests safely perform its intended functions. 

Permit Required A confined space in which one or more of the 

 Confined Space following conditions may exist: (a) the space 

 contains, or may contain an atmospheric hazard; 

 (b) the space contains an engulfment hazard 

 (i.e., water or other flowable material that may 

 engulf an entrant); (c) the space has a configuration 

 which may trap an entrant; (d) the space has any 

 other serious safety or health hazard. A formal 

 process and documentation (entry permit) which 

 includes entry and work procedures, atmospheric 

 monitoring, hazards, and emergencies, is required. 

Personal Protective The term shall include, but is not limited to, devices 

 Equipment (PPE) designed to be worn by workers for eye, face, head, 

 respiratory, hand, arm, body, leg, foot, and fall 

 protection. 

Procedure A course of action by which work is initiated, 

 performed, controlled, and completed. A procedure 

 establishes what action is required, who is required 

 to act, and when the action is to take place. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

K-8 October 2009 

Professional Engineer One possessing a recognized degree from an 

accredited college and a current engineering 

registration certificate, and who, by knowledge of 

appropriate national standards, training, and 

experience, has successfully demonstrated the 

ability to design, analyze, and determine proper 

application of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, and 

structural equipment and systems and their proper 

application. 

Prohibited Conditions A condition within a confined space that indicates 

that a control measure specified in the permit has 

become ineffective, or that a hazard exists within 

the space which was not anticipated and for which 

no control measure is in place. Immediate 

evacuation is necessary when a prohibited condition 

is identified. 

Qualified Refers to one who, by possession of a recognized 

degree, certificate, or professional standing, or who 

by extensive knowledge, training, and experience, 

has successfully demonstrated ability to solve or 

resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the 

work, or the project. 

Radiation Specialist An individual who, by virtue of education, training, 

certification, or experience, possesses the expertise 

necessary to develop and implement methods and 

procedures for the evaluation of radiation hazards to 

the subject matter, the work, or the project. 

Safe Relatively free from danger or hazard which could 

cause or result in injury, illness, or damage. 

Safety Factor The ratio of the ultimate braking strength of a 

member or piece of material or equipment to the 

actual working stress or safe working load when in 

use. 

Safety and Health An individual who, by virtue of education, training, 

 Professional certification, and experience, has achieved 

 professional status in the safety field. 

Scuba Am acronym for Self-Contained Underwater 

Breathing Apparatus, in which the supply of 

breathing mixture carried by the diver is 

independent of any other source. 
Appendix K—Glossary of Terms, 

Definitions, and Acronyms 

October 2009 K-9 

Special Work A statement that formalizes and documents the 

 Permit preparation and coordination between Reclamation 

 and non-Reclamation personnel for Clearances 

 and Hot Line Orders to facilitate work by 

 non-Reclamation forces on or near Reclamation 

 power facilities. 

Supervisor A person held responsible for the behavior and 

 production of a group of employees. 

Surface-Supplied Air A diving mode in which the diver in the water is 

 (SSA) supplied from the dive location with compressed 

 air for breathing. 

Threshold Limit Values The limit below which the effects of airborne 

substances cease to be perceptible and dangerous to 

employees who may be repeatedly exposed, day 

after day. 

Toxic Of, pertaining to, or caused by poison; poisonous; 

harmful. 

Unsafe Condition Any physical state that is not acceptable or that 

presents risks to personal safety, or that has the 

potential to cause personal injury, illness, and/or 

damage to property. Also, any physical state that 

contributes to a reduction in the degree of safety 

normally present. 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

K-10 October 2009 

Acronyms 

ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial 

Hygienists 

ACI American Concrete Institute 

AGCA Associated General Contractors of America 

ANSI American National Standards Institute 

API American Petroleum Institute 

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

AWS American Welding Society 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations 

CO Contracting Officer 

COR Contracting Officer's Representative 

DM Department Manual 

DOT Department of Transportation 

EMT Emergency Medical Technician 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency 

FAA Federal Aviation Administration 

FHA Federal Highway Administration 

FOPS Falling Object Protection Structure 

FR Flame Resistant 

HEW Health, Education, Welfare 

HHA Health Hazard Analysis 

JHA Job Hazard Analysis 

LPG or LP-gas Liquefied Petroleum Gas 

LPN Licensed Practical Nurse 

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet 
Appendix K—Glossary of Terms, 

Definitions, and Acronyms 

October 2009 K-11 

MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration 

MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices 

NEC National Electrical Code 

NESC National Electrical Safety Code 

NFPA National Fire Protection Association 

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

NRC Nuclear Regulatory Commission 

NRR Noise Reduction Rating 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

PCSA Power Crane and Shovel Administration 

PEL Permissible Exposure Limits 

PFD Personal Flotation Devices 

POL Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants 

PPE Personal Protective Equipment 

RF Radio Frequency 

RN Registered Nurse 

ROPS Rollover Protective Structures 

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers 

TLV Threshold Limit Value 

TWA Time Weight Average 

UL Underwriters Laboratories 

USC United States Code 

USCG U.S. Coast Guard 
October 2009 L-1 

Appendix L 

Referenced Material 

These references apply unless superseded by more current standards. 

American Concrete Institute, Box 19150, Redford Station, 22400 West Seven 

Mile Road, Detroit MI 48219 

Publication SP4, “Formwork for Concrete” 

American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Box 1937, 

Cincinnati OH 45201 

“Industrial Ventilation” 

“Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents in 

the Work Environment” 

American Lumbering Standards Committee, PO Box 210, Germantown MD 20874 

American Lumbering Standards 

American Lumbering Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York NY 10018 

American National Standards Institute: http://www.ansi.org 

A10.3, “Safety Requirements for Powder Actuated Fastening System” 

A10.4, “Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists and Employee 

Elevators for Construction and Demolition Operations” 

A10.5, “Safety Requirements for Material Hoists” 

A10.6, “Safety Requirements for Demolition” 

A10.7, “Safety Requirements for Transportation, Storage, Handling, and 

Use of Commercial Explosives and Blasting Agents” 

A10.8, “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition 

Operations–Scaffolding” 

A10.9, “Construction and Demolition Operations–Concrete and Masonry 

Work” 

A10.13, “Safety Requirements for Steel Erection” 

A10.14, “Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, and 

Lifelines for Construction and Demolition Use” 

A10.15, “Safety Requirements for Dredging” 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

L-2 October 2009 

A10.22, “Safety Requirements for Rope Guide Non-Guided Worker’s 

Hoists” 

A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems” 

A14.1, “Safety Requirements for Portable Wood Ladders” 

A14.2, “Safety Requirements for Portable Metal Ladders” 

A14.3, “Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders” 

A14.4, “Safety Requirements for Job-Made Wooden Ladders” 

A17.1, “Elevators and Escalators” 

A17.2, “Inspector’s Manual for Elevators and Escalators” 

A90.1, “Safety Standards for Manlifts” 

A92.2, “Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial Devices” 

A120.1, “Safety Code for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building 

Maintenance” 

B7.1, “Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels” 

B11.1, “Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use for Machine 

Tools– Mechanical Power Presses” 

B15.1, “Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus” 

B20.1, “Safety Standard for Conveyors and Related Equipment” 

B30.2, “Overhead and Gantry Cranes” 

B30.3, “Hammerhead Tower Cranes” 

B30.4, “Safety Standard for Portal, Tower, and Pillar Cranes” 

B30.5, “Mobile and Locomotive Truck Cranes” 

B30.6, “Derricks” 

B30.7, “Base Mounted Drum Hoists” 

B30.8, “Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks” 

B30.9, “Slings” 

B30.10, “Hooks” 

B30.11, “Monorails and Underhung Cranes” 

B30.12, “Handling Loads Suspended from Rotor Craft” 
Appendix L—Referenced 

Materials 

October 2009 L-3 

B30.14, “Side Boom Tractors” 

B30.16, “Overhead Hoists (Underhung)” 

B30.17, “Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single 

Girder, Underhung Hoist)” 

B30.19, “Cableways” 

B30.22, “Articulating Boom Cranes” 

B31.1, “Power Piping” 

B56.1, “Low Lift and High Lift Trucks” 

C2, “National Electrical Safety Code” 

C95.2, “Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard Warning Symbol” 

D6.1, “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and 

Highways” 

HST-6M, “Performance Standards for Air Wire Rope Hoists” 

N2.1, “Warning Symbols–Radiation Symbol” 

RP7, “Practice for Industrial Lighting” 

S1.4, “Specification for Sound Level Meters” 

S1.25, “Personnel Noise Specification for Dosimeters” 

S3.19, (Formerly 224.22) “Method for the Measurement of Real-Ear 

Protection of Hearing Protectors and Physical Attenuation of Earmuffs” 

S12.6, “Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of 

Hearing Protectors” 

Z41, “Personal Protection–Protective Footwear” 

Z49.1, “Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes” 

Z87.1, “Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face 

Protection” 

Z88.2, “Practices for Respiratory Protection” 

Z89.1, “Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers” 

Z136.1, “Safe Use of Lasers” 

Z308.1, “Minimum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type First Aid Kits” 

Z535.1, “Safety Color Code” 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

L-4 October 2009 

Z535.2, “Environmental and Facility Safety Signs” 

Z535.3, “Criteria for Safety Symbols” 

Z535.4, “Product Safety Signs and Symbols” 

Z535.5, “Accident Prevention Tags” 

American Petroleum Institute, 2101 L. Street, Washington DC 20037 

American Petroleum Institute Standards 

American Plywood Association, PO Box 11700, Tacoma WA 98411 

 Group BB, Group 1, Exterior 

 (Plywood Products Standard PSI-74) 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, 

New York NY 10017 

 ASME Boiler and Pressure Code 

 ASME Boiler and Pressure Code, Sec. VIII, “Unfired Pressure Vessels” 

ASME 13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems” 

American Welding Society 

F4.1, “Recommended Safe Practices for the Preparation of Welding and 

Cutting of Containers and Piping” 

Compressed Gas Association, 1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004, 

Arlington VA 22202-4102 

G-7.1, “Commodity Specification for Air” 

Construction Safety Association of Ontario, 21 Voyager Court South Etobicoke, 

Ontario, Canada M9N 5M7 

“Crane Handbook” 

“Mobile Crane Handbook” 

“Rigging Manual" – Designated as "Reclamation Rigging Manual” 

E. I. du Pont DeNemours & Company (Inc.), Technical Service Section, 

Explosives Products Division, Wilmington DE 19898 

“Blasters’ Handbook” (16th edition or later) 
Appendix L—Referenced 

Materials 

October 2009 L-5 

Factory Mutual Engineering, 1000 Fourth Street, Suite 700, San Rafael CA 

94901 

Factory Mutual Standards 

Factory Mutual Laboratories 

Factory Mutual Engineering 

Federal Specifications 

QQ-P-416, “Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)” 

RR-S-001302, “Safety Equipment, Climbing” 

Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York NY 

10017 

National Electric Manufacturers' Association 

 EW 1, "Electric Arc Welding Power Sources" 

National Fire Protection Association, 470 Atlantic Avenue, Boston MA 02210 

NFPA No. 10, “Portable Fire Extinguishers” 

NFPA No. 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems” 

NFPA No. 30, “Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code” 

NFPA No. 31, “Oil Burning Equipment” 

NFPA No. 33, “Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible 

Materials” 

NFPA No. 51B, “Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot 

Work” 

NFPA No. 58, “Storage and Handling Liquefied Petroleum Gases” 

NFPA No. 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC) 

NFPA No. 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for 

Employee Workplaces” 

NFPA No. 101, “Life Safety Code” 

NFPA No. 251, “Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and 

Materials” 

NFPA No. 385, “Flammable and Combustible Liquid Tank Vehicles” 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

L-6 October 2009 

National Forest Products Association 

“National Design Specifications for Wood Construction” 

Reclamation, Bureau of 

FIST Volume 1-1, “Hazardous Energy Control Program” 

FIST Volume 3-6, “Storage Battery Principles and Maintenance” 

FIST Volume 3-29, “Energized Facility Maintenance” 

FIST Volume 4-1, “Maintenance Schedules and Records” 

FIST Volume 5-1, “Personal Protective Grounding” 

“Record of Inspection and Test – Cranes and Hoisting Equipment” 

“Contractor’s Report of Recordable Injury/Illness” 

“Brake Performance Test Record – Truck Cranes and Self-Propelled 

Cranes Mounted on Rubber-Tired Chassis or Frames” 

“Brake Performance Test Record – Off-Highway Type Trucks 10,000 

Pounds GVW and Over, Truck-Tractor/Trailer Combinations, Transmix 

Trucks, Dump Trucks, Excavators, and Similar Type Equipment” 

“Brake Performance Test Record – Off-Highway Wheel-Type 

Construction Machines” 

“Contractor Monthly Summary of Occupational Injuries/Illnesses 

Experience” 

“General Design Standards, Design Standard No. 1, Chapter 3, "Safety 

Design Standards” 

Society of Automotive Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale PA 

15096 

J101, “Hydraulic Wheel Cylinders for Automotive Drum Brakes” 

J115, “Safety Signs” 

J167, “Overhead Protection for Agricultural Tractors - Test Procedures 

and Performance Requirements” 

J185, “Access Systems for Off-Road Machines” 

J220, “Crane Boomstop” 

J321B, “Tire Guards for Protection of Operators of Earthmoving Haulage 

Machines” 

J386, “Operator Restraint System for Off-Road Work Machines” 
Appendix L—Referenced 

Materials 

October 2009 L-7 

J682, “Fenders and Mudflaps” 

J1029, “Lighting and Markings of Construction, Earthmoving Machinery” 

J1040, “Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) 

for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry, and Mining Machines” 

J1042, “Operator Protection for General Purpose Industrial Equipment” 

J1084, “Operator Protective Structure Performance Criteria for Certain 

Forestry Equipment” 

J1116, “Categories of Off-Road Self Propelled Work Machines” 

J1194, “Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Wheeled Agricultural 

Tractors” 

J/ISO 3449, “Earthmoving Machines, Falling-Object Protective 

Structures - Laboratory Test and Performance Requirement” 

J/ISO 3450, “Earthmoving Machinery - Braking Systems, Rubber-Tired 

Machines - Systems and Performance Requirements and Test Procedures” 

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago IL 60611 

U.S. Department of Labor 

Mine Safety and Health Administration 

Information Circular 8183, “Mobile Diesel-Powered Equipment 

for Non-Coal Mines Approved by the Bureau of Mines, 1951-62” 

Report of Investigations 5616, “Safety With Mobile DieselPowered Equipment Underground” 

30 CFR Part 32, “Diesel Engines Certification and Diesel 

Equipment for Use in Non-Gassy Coal Mines” 

30 CFR Part 36, “Mobile Diesel-Powered Transportation 

Equipment for Gassy Non-Coal Mines and Tunnels” 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

29 CFR 1910, Subpart T, “Commercial Diving Operations” 

29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart Z, “Toxic and Hazardous Substances” 

29 CFR 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction” 

29 CFR 1926.104, “Safety Belts, Lifelines, Lanyards” 

29 CFR 126.153, “Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LP-Gas)” 
Reclamation Safety and 

Health Standards 

L-8 October 2009 

29 CFR 1926.200, “Accident Prevention Signs and Tags” 

29 CFR 1926.251, “Rigging Equipment for Material Handling” 

29 CFR 1926.803, “Compressed Air” 

29 CFR 1926, Subpart U, “Blasting and the Use of Explosives” 

29 CFR 1926.959, “Lineman’s Body Belts, Safety Straps, and Lanyards” 

U.S. Department of Transportation 

Coast Guard 

46 CFR Parts 146-149, “Dangerous Cargoes” 

Federal Aviation Administration 

Federal Highway Administration 

49 CFR Parts 390-399, “Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations” 

49 CFR Parts 171-179, “Hazardous Materials Regulations” 

49 CFR Part 195, “Transportation of Hazardous Liquids by 

Pipelines” 

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 

49 CFR 571, “Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards” 

Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 

U.S. Department of the Treasury 

Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms 

27 CFR 55, “Commerce in Explosives” 

U.S. Navy 

U.S. Navy Diving Manual, Volumes I through V 

U.S. Navy Standard Decompression Tables 

U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission 

Title 10, Chapter 1, CFR Part 20, “Standards for Protection Against 

Radiation” 
Index-1 

Index 

A 

abrasive blasting, 7-43, 25-11 

abrasive wheels, 17-3, 17-4 

accident prevention tags, 9-1, 9-4, 9-5 

accident reporting, 3-4, 29-1, 29-7 

acids, 8-7, 12-15, 18-5, 24-5 

aerial lifts, 13-15, 20-1, 20-14, 20-15 

A-frame trucks, 19-23, 20-14 

air, 2-3, 7-2, 7-3, 7-6 through 7-17, 7-28, 7-29, 7-30, 7-33, 7-34, 7-37 through 

7-39, 7-40, 10-8, 10-9, 11-8, 11-11, 12-14, 14-4 through 14-6, 14-9, 15-3, 17-1, 

17-2, 17-10, 17-11, 17-13, 17-15, 17-16, 19-17, 19-30, 19-32, 19-40, 20-7, 21-5, 

21-7, 21-10, 22-5, 23-2 through 23-7, 23-9, 23-18, 24-3, 24-4, 24-13, 25-9, 25-11, 

25-17, 27-4, 27-6, 28-1, 29-1 29-2, 29-4, 29-6 through 29-11 

aircraft, 5-2, 18-3, 19-25 through 19-27 

ambulance service, 4-3, 5-3, 14-6, 29-9 

animals, 27-5 

arc welding and cutting, 17-1 

asbestos, 7-39 through 7-42, 20-7 

asphalt, 1-1, 11-9, 11-10 

B 

backup alarms, 27-3 

barricades, 9-1, 9-4, 11-13, 13-1, 20-3, 20-18, 22-1, 22-3, 22-4, 24-9, 25-11, 27-1, 

27-6 

battery charging, 12-1, 12-14, 12-15, 20-13 

belts, 8-11, 13-6, 13-11, 16-2, 16-4, 19-30, 20-16, 25-2, 27-3 

biological monitoring, 7-43, 7-45 

blasting agents, 24-1, 24-2, 24-4, 24-6, 24-7, 24-10 

blasting mats, 24-3, 24-10 

blasting operations, 24-1, 24-2, 24-4, 24-10, 24-14 

blasting signals, 24-12 

bloodborne pathogens, 7-25, 7-27 

boatswain’s chairs, 19-7 

boilers, 7-41, 17-1, 17-10, 19-24 
Index-2 

brakes, 13-16, 17-6, 19-16, 19-17, 19-22, 19-38, 19-41 through 19-43, 20-2, 20-3, 

20-6, 23-14, 23-16, 24-5, 27-3 

burning areas, 10-7 

C 

cableways, 19-5, 19-21, 19-22, 25-2 

capacitors, 15-10 

caustics, 8-7 

cement, 11-1, 11-3, 11-13 

certification, 3-1, 4-2, 7-10, 12-1, 15-7, 16-5, 16-7, 16-8, 17-10, 19-5, 20-2, 20-9, 

20-11, 20-13 through 20-15, 20-17, 21-3, 25-1, 28-1, 29-4 

chain saws, 8-7, 17-2 

chains, 8-10, 12-10, 15-6, 17-12, 17-13, 17-18, 18-1 through 18-3, 19-30, 20-14, 

20-16, 23-14, 23-16 

chemicals, 6-1, 7-4, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25, 8-7, 8-11, 8-13, 15-6 

clearance procedures, 12-17, 15-1, 29-8 

clothing, 6-6, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-30, 7-34, 7-44, 8-6 through 8-10, 11-9, 

12-2, 12-4, 12-17, 17-15, 17-18, 19-26, 21-7, 21-8, 27-5 

codes, 2-1, 4-1, 4-2, 7-21, 7-23, 10-2, 12-1, 12-16, 17-10 

cofferdams, 22-8, 23-14, 27-5 

cold stress, 7-29 

combustible liquids, 10-1, 11-1, 11-4 through 11-9, 11-12, 17-15, 23-10 

combustible materials, 10-2, 10-3, 11-1, 12-15, 17-14, 24-7 

compactors, 20-10, 20-11 

compressed air, 7-40, 15-10, 17-2, 17-10, 17-13, 20-7, 20-10, 23-1, 23-14, 23-18, 

27-5, 29-4, 29-10 

compressed gas cylinders, 17-1, 17-12, 17-13, 29-2, 29-10 

concrete conveyance systems, 25-1, 25-2 

concrete forms, 17-3 

confined spaces, 10-4, 11-2, 14-1 through 14-7, 16-9, 17-12, 17-16, 17-18 

conveyors, 19-1, 19-20, 19-21, 20-1, 20-2, 20-14, 20-17, 22-7, 23-10, 23-15, 

23-16, 23-18 

cranes, 12-5, 12-6, 13-11, 13-16 through 13-20, 17-18, 19-1 through 19-7, 19-10 

through 19-14, 19-29, 19-30, 19-32, 19-38 through 19-42, 20-7, 20-8, 20-10, 

22-7, 23-15, 25-2 

cutting, 7-43, 8-2 through 8-4, 10-1, 13-11, 15-6, 17-1, 17-3, 17-5, 17-13 through 

17-17, 19-25, 23-10, 25-11, 26-4, 27-7, 29-4, 29-5 

cutting and welding, 8-2, 17-13 
Index-3 

cylinders, 7-10, 7-12, 7-15, 10-5, 10-8, 11-11, 13-17, 17-1, 17-12, 17-13, 17-16, 

17-17, 20-6, 23-3, 25-5, 29-2, 29-9 through 29-11 

D 

definitions, 14-1, 14-2, 15-2 

demolition, 7-43, 12-10, 12-13, 13-23, 25-1, 25-11, 29-5 

detonating cord, 24-13, 24-14 

diving operation, 29-1 through 29-5, 29-7, 29-8, 29-11, 29-12 

drilling operation, 24-9, 27-1, 27-3, 27-4, 27-6 

drinking water, 7-21 

dump trucks, 20-7 

dust control, 20-18, 23-8, 25-1 

E 

earthmoving equipment, 20-2, 20-3 

eating facilities, 7-20 

education, 17-10, 23-7, 7-30 

electric lines, 22-1 

electrical wiring, 11-9, 12-13, 24-5, 27-1 

electromagnetic radiation, 24-1, 24-4 

elevators, 6-1, 19-17 

emergency equipment, 6-1, 6-2, 6-4, 11-1, 20-5 

emergency plans, 6-1 

enclosed spaces, 17-15 

energized equipment, 8-9, 8-10 

excavation, 19-25, 22-1 through 22-7, 23-5, 23-7, 23-8, 23-11, 23-12, 23-15, 

23-18, 24-9, 24-10, 27-1 

excavation operations, 22-1, 23-7, 23-8, 23-11 

explosives, 20-5, 23-1, 24-1 through 24-9, 24-13, 24-14 

exposure monitoring, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-7, 7-18, 7-39, 7-43, 7-45 

21-2, 21-5 

explosive magazines, 23-10 

extension cords, 12-11 

eye and face protection, 8-2, 8-5, 17-15, 25-11 

eyewash facilities, 25-2 
Index-4 

F 

fenders, 19-32, 20-4, 23-17 

fire extinguishers, 10-6, 10-7, 11-2, 11-9, 17-14, 20-5, 23-10, 24-5, 26-4, 27-3, 

28-1 

fire prevention, 6-7, 10-1, 11-2 

fire protection, 7-23, 9-3, 10-6 through 10-10, 11-1, 17-14, 17-15, 23-10, 26-4 

firearms, 2-2, 24-3, 24-5, 24-6 

first aid and medical facilities, 8-11 

first aid kits, 5-1, 5-2 

fixed ladders, 13-1 through 13-3, 19-11, 19-25 

flammable gases, 10-2, 17-18, 23-6, 23-7 

flammable liquids, 10-4, 10-6, 10-7, 11-4, 11-6, 11-8, 27-2, 27-7 

floating cranes, 19-2, 19-13, 19-14, 19-29, 19-41 

foot protection, 8-7, 23-2 

footings, 22-1, 22-3, 22-7, 25-10, 25-13, 25-14, 25-16 

foremen, 3-4 

form scaffolds, 13-14 

forms, 17-3, 25-1, 25-12, 25-15, 24-15 

fueling, 10-2, 10-4, 24-6 

G 

garbage, 7-23 

gas welding and cutting, 17-1, 17-18 

gates, 12-2, 13-3, 13-22, 15-2, 15-10, 19-15, 19-18, 25-2, 27-6, 29-8, 9-4 

gears, 13-17, 19-30, 20-2, 20-3, 20-16, 23-15, 23-16, 27-3, 27-4 

glasses, 7-21, 8-2, 8-8, 8-10, 16-9, 22-2, 25-2 

gloves, 5-2, 7-25, 7-26, 7-34, 8-6 through 8-9, 12-2 through 12-4, 12-7, 12-10, 

12-15, 16-9, 17-13, 19-26, 25-2, 27-5 

grounding, 10-3, 11-8, 11-12, 12-1, 12-2, 12-7, 12-10 through 12-14, 17-1, 17-18, 

19-26, 23-2 

groundwater, 21-9, 22-4 

guarding, 13-23, 17-1, 17-3, 17-4, 17-7, 20-16, 23-12, 23-15 

guardrails, 11-8, 11-9, 12-2, 13-1, 13-4 through 13-6, 13-9, 13-10, 13-14, 13-21 

through 13-24, 16-1, 19-11, 19-22, 20-10, 20-16, 22-4, 22-8, 23-11, 25-1, 25-6, 

25-12, 27-3, 28-4 
Index-5 

H 

hand signals, 19-7, 19-16, 19-27 

hardhats, 23-2, 27-6 

haul roads, 20-17, 20-18 

hazardous locations, 9-5, 11-10, 12-1, 12-13, 13-23, 19-21, 20-13 

hazardous materials, 6-4 through 6-6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-4, 9-4, 11-1, 13-23, 20-5 

hearing protectors, 7-19, 7-20, 8-6 

heat stress, 7-1, 7-28 

heating devices, 10-2 through 10-4, 10-6, 11-10 

helicopters, 19-27 

high-voltage lines, 12-5, 12-6, 19-7, 20-15, 24-10 

hoisting equipment, 12-7, 13-7, 13-17, 19-1 through 19-10, 19-24, 19-29, 20-1, 

20-2, 20-14, 22-5, 22-7, 23-15 through 23-18, 27-6 

hooks, 8-11, 13-18, 16-1, 17-8, 18-1 through 18-3, 18-8, 18-9, 19-7, 19-26, 19-29, 

19-31, 19-33, 20-14, 23-14, 25-11 

horns, 10-7, 24-5 

housekeeping, 2-3, 7-43, 10-1, 11-1, 11-10 through 11-13, 12-15, 25-12 

hydraulic fluids, 23-10 

I 

illumination, 7-1, 7-46, 12-11, 22-2, 22-4, 23-1, 27-1, 27-6 

impact wrenches, 26-3 

industrial trucks, 20-1, 20-4, 20-12, 20-13 

inspection, 3-1, 3-2, 5-2, 7-10, 8-7, 8-12, 10-6, 12-13, 13-7, 13-8, 15-7, 15-9, 

16-2, 16-5, 16-6, 16-7, 17-8, 17-10, 18-2, 19-3, 19-4, 19-5, 19-7, 19-11, 19-15, 

19-18, 19-20, 19-22, 20-5 through 20-12, 21-2, 21-12, 22-2, 23-13, 24-5, 24-10, 

24-12, 25-8, 25-13, 25-14, 27-2, 29-6, 29-8, 29-9, 

ionizing radiation, 7-30, 7-31, 7-32, 7-35, 7-36, 9-5 

J 

JHA, 4-1, 4-2, , 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-11, 7-16, 7-17, 8-1, 9-5, 11-3, 11-9, 12-1, 12-2, 

12-10, 12-16, 12-18, 13-15, 16-9, 19-12, 19-23, 20-2, 20-17, 22-1 

job hazard analysis, 3-1, 4-1, 5-1, 7-5, 7-6, 7-17, 7-42, 11-3, 12-1, 12-16, 16-7, 

16-9, 17-16, 19-12, 20-2, 20-13, 22-1, 22-7, 24-2 
Index-6 

L 

ladders, 7-46, 11-10, 13-1 through 13-5, 13-11, 13-15, 14-5, 17-18, 19-11, 19-20, 

19-25, 19-32, 20-10, 20-14, 20-15, 22-2, 22-7, 23-18, 27-1, 27-6, 28-4 

lasers, 7-36, 7-37, 8-6, 9-5 

lifelines, 8-11, 13-6, 13-11, 13-15, 16-1, 16-2, 16-4, 16-5 

lift trucks, 2-4, 20-12, 20-15 

lighting, 7-46, 8-13, 10-3, 11-8, 12-11, 12-13, 12-14, 14-5, 19-21, 19-27, 20-5, 

22-1, 22-2, 23-1, 23-3, 23-4, 23-10, 24-13, 27-1, 27-3, 27-6 

lime, 11-1, 11-3, 11-13 

linemen’s belts, 16-4 

liquefied petroleum gas, 23-10 

load test, 19-4, 19-6, 19-42, 20-15, 23-17, 25-7, 25-8 

loaders, 19-5, 19-24, 20-7, 20-9 through 20-11, 24-10 

loads, 13-7, 13-14, 13-22, 17-9, 18-1, 18-5, 18-6, 18-8, 18-9, 19-2, 19-4, 19-6 

through 19-9, 19-17, 19-24, 19-26, 19-29, 19-36, 19-41, 20-2, 20-10, 20-13, 22-5, 

25-11 through 25-13, 25-15, 25-16, 26-3, 27-4 

lockout/tagout, 12-17, 15-1, 15-5, 19-21, 20-16, 25-2, 28-3, 29-7, 29-8 

lumber storage, 11-3 

M 

machinery, 3-2, 12-5, 13-6, 17-2, 17-4, 17-16, 20-4, 20-5, 23-10, 23-12, 23-17, 

28-3 

material hoists, 13-7, 19-1, 19-14, 19-16, 23-17 

material safety data sheets, 6-4 

mechanized equipment, 19-23, 20-1, 20-16, 23-14, 25-5 

medical facilities, 5-1, 8-11 

mobile equipment, 12-7, 16-2, 20-1, 20-3, 20-5, 20-17, 22-4, 23-15, 25-2 

N 

nailers, 17-3 

nets, 8-11 through 8-13, 11-1, 11-6, 13-6, 13-23, 13-24, 16-1, 17-13, 26-2 

noise, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-17 through 7-20, 8-6, 12-10, 16-8, 19-11, 21-9, 21-11, 23-4, 

23-10 

noise exposure, 7-1, 7-18, 7-19 
Index-7 

O 

oil, 7-12, 10-3, 15-10, 17-10, 17-13, 19-29, 23-10, 24-5, 29-2, 29-11 

overcurrent protection, 12-1, 12-11, 12-12 

overhead lines, 12-1, 12-3, 12-4, 12-6, 27-1 

overhead protection, 8-11, 13-5, 13-6, 13-10, 13-18, 13-24, 19-15, 19-18, 19-21, 

19-25, 20-5, 22-5, 23-18 

oxygen, 7-11, 7-12, 8-4, 10-2, 14-4, 14-5, 17-12, 17-13, 17-16, 17-17, 22-5, 23-3, 

23-6, 23-7, 23-10, 29-1, 29-4, 29-9 

P 

paint, 7-43, 10-9, 11-11. 11-12, 17-3, 19-15 

personal protective equipment, 6-4 through 6-6, 7-2, 7-4, 7-8, 7-16, 7-18, 7-24, 

7-26, 7-27, 8-1, 8-8, 8-9, 11-3, 11-9, 11-12, 12-2, 12-3, 12-16, 12-17, 13-16, 14-4, 

14-5, 16-9, 17-2, 17-3, 17-13, 17-15, 19-14, 19-26, 21-2, 21-6, 21-8, 22-2, 23-2 

personnel hoists, 13-15, 19-1, 19-18 through 19-20, 19-23, 20-17, 22-2 

physical qualifications, 4-2, 16-7, 19-5 

piledrivers, 19-1, 19-24, 19-25, 20-1, 20-2, 20-14, 22-7, 23-15, 23-16, 23-18 

piling, 11-2, 19-24, 19-25, 22-3, 22-6 

pipe, 9-4, 10-8, 11-1, 11-3, 11-4, 11-9, 13-21, 13-24, 17-9, 17-11, 23-2, 23-10, 

23-11, 23-18, 25-3 through 25-5, 25-15, 27-5, 28-3, 28-4 

plants, 13-1, 19-30, 25-1, 29-8 

platforms, 7-46, 8-11, 13-1, 13-4 through 13-11, 13-15 through 13-24, 19-7, 

19-11, 19-18, 19-20 through 19-23, 20-10, 20-15, 20-16, 23-14, 23-18, 25-5, 

25-6, 25-8, 25-15, 27-1, 27-3 

pneumatic tools, 17-1, 17-2 

poles, 11-4, 13-6, 16-4, 24-9 

powder-actuated tools, 17-1, 17-6, 17-7 

power saws, 17-1, 17-6 

power tools, 8-7, 12-7, 17-1, 17-2, 23-10, 26-4, 29-5 

pressure vessels, 17-1, 17-10, 19-24, 23-10, 26-4 

Q 

qualifications, 2-2, 4-2, 7-7, 7-27, 12-17, 14-7, 16-7, 17-10, 19-1, 19-5, 20-12. 

21-3, 21-4, 24-1, 29-1, 29-4 
Index-8 

R 

radiation, 7-1, 7-2, 7-30 through 7-38, 17-18, 8-2, 9-1, 9-5, 17-18, 24-1, 24-4 

ramps, 13-1, 13-4, 13-5, 13-8, 20-12, 20-17, 22-2, 24-8 

records, 3-2, 3-4, 7-3, 7-6, 7-7, 7-15, 7-17, 7-20, 7-25, 7-27, 7-32, 7-34, 7-35, 

7-39, 7-40, 7-45, 8-12, 12-17, 18-4, 19-5, 23-9, 23-13, 24-1, 24-2, 27-2, 29-5 

through 29-7 

reference material, 7-24 

reinforcing steel, 13-10, 13-23, 25-1, 25-10, 25-11 

reports, 7-9, 7-25, 7-35, 17-10 

respiratory protection, 6-4, 7-1, 7-2, 7-6, 7-7, 7-10, 7-33, 7-39, 7-44, 7-45, 11-9, 

17-15, 17-16, 21-3 through 21-5 

rigging, 11-3, 13-11, 13-16, 13-19, 16-2, 18-1, 18-2, 18-5, 19-8, 19-26, 19-27, 

19-36, 25-10 

ring buoys, 8-10 

riveting, 13-7, 26-1, 26-4 

roads, 9-4, 11-13, 20-5, 20-17, 20-18, 24-2, 24-4, 24-5, 27-3 

rock bolting, 16-5, 22-3, 23-13 

rollover protection, 20-4 

roof openings, 13-21, 13-22 

ropes, 8-11, 8-12, 13-9, 13-10, 13-21, 16-6, 16-8, 18-1, 18-4, 18-5, 19-3, 19-16, 

19-19, 19-30 through 19-33, 20-6, 22-7, 23-17 

S 

safety, 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 3-1, 3-2, 3-4, 4-1, 4-3, 6-1 through 6-3, 7-25, 7-30, 7-31, 

7-36, 7-42, 8-2, 8-6, 8-8, 8-11, 9-1 through 9-3, 10-3, 11-1, 11-5, 11-8, 11-10, 

11-11, 12-1, 12-2, 12-6, 12-11, 12-14, 12-16, 12-17, 13-1 through 13-3, 13-5, 

13-6, 13-9 through 13-11, 13-14 through 13-25, 14-1, 14-2, 14-6, 15-5, 15-6, 16-1 

through 16-9, 17-2 through 17-4, 17-7, 17-8, 17-11, 17-13, 18-1 through 18-3, 

18-6 through 18-8, 19-6, 19-8, 19-11, 19-15, 19-19, 19-22, 19-25 through 19-33, 

20-1, 20-6, 20-7, 20-14 through 20-16, 21-1, 21-3, 21-6, 21-8, 21-9, 21-11, 22-1, 

22-2, 22-3, 23-1, 23-11, 23-12, 23-14, 23-17, 24-1 through 24-3, 24-13, 25-1 

through 25-3, 25-11 through 25-16, 26-2, 26-4, 27-1, 27-2, 27-4, 27-6, 28-2 

through 28-4, 29-1, 29-4, 29-5, 29-7, 29-8, 29-10, 29-11 

safety belts, 8-11, 13-11 

safety equipment, 4-2, 28-2 

safety factor, 8-11, 13-3, 13-5, 13-6, 13-9, 13-14, 13-17 through 13-21, 16-2, 18-1 

through 18-3, 18-6 through 18-8, 19-19, 20-14, 25-1, 25-3, 25-11 through 25-16, 

27-6, 28-4 
Index-9 

safety fuse, 24-1, 24-13 

safety glasses, 8-2, 8-8, 16-9, 22-2 

safety inspection, 3-2 

safety line, 16-5, 19-11, 26-2, 27-2, 29-11 

safety meeting, 3-2, 4-1 

safety nets, 8-11, 13-23, 16-1, 26-2 

safety program, 3-1, 3-2, 3-4, 7-31, 7-34, 20-1, 23-1 

safety shoes, 13-2, 22-2 

sand and gravel, 19-21 

sanitation, 7-1, 7-20, 7-22, 7-23 

scaffolding, 13-5 through 13-7, 13-15, 13-20, 16-1, 19-7, 25-11, 25-12, 25-14, 

25-15, 25-17, 8-11 

scaling, 7-46, 8-2, 16-1, 16-5, 22-3, 23-11, 23-13, 27-6 

scuba diving, 29-1, 29-3, 29-4, 29-10 

shafts, 8-2, 12-11, 17-15, 17-18, 19-21, 19-24, 19-30, 20-16, 22-1, 22-4, 23-1, 

23-3, 23-4, 23-13 through 23-18, 24-9, 24-10, 25-1, 27-3, 27-5, 27-6 

signalperson, 19-22 

signals, 9-1, 9-5, 19-7, 19-15, 19-16, 19-20, 19-27, 20-18, 22-8, 24-12 

signs, 5-1, 7-2, 7-9, 7-24, 7-33, 7-36, 7-40, 7-41, 8-1, 9-1 through 9-5, 10-8, 11-8, 

11-13, 12-1 through 12-3, 12-5, 12-14, 17-12, 19-21, 19-29, 19-30, 19-32, 20-18, 

21-5, 22-2, 24-4 through 24-6, 24-8, 24-9, 25-11, 28-3, 28-4, 29-9 

sleeping facilities, 7-23 

slings, 11-1, 13-11, 17-13, 18-1 through 18-9, 19-26, 20-6, 23-16, 25-8 through 

25-10, 25-15 

slip-forms, 25-14, 25-15 

sound levels, 7-18 

special work permits, 12-10 

spray painting, 7-43, 11-12 

stairways, 11-12, 13-1, 13-3 through 13-5, 13-11, 13-15, 13-22, 19-11, 19-20, 

19-25, 20-10 

stationary mechanized equipment, 19-23, 20-1, 20-16, 23-14, 25-5 

statutes, 2-1 

steel erection, 26-1, 26-2 

storage, 7-4, 7-10, 7-15, 7-24, 7-30, 7-32, 7-33, 7-44, 7-47, 8-1, 8-11, 10-1, 10-2, 

10-5, 10-9, 11-1 through 11-7, 11-11, 11-12, 12-15, 13-24, 15-10, 16-2, 17-1, 

17-3, 17-12, 17-13, 18-6, 19-29, 19-32, 19-33, 20-6, 20-14, 21-6, 21-9, 21-10, 

23-1, 23-10, 23-17, 24-1 through 24-5, 24-7, 24-8, 25-1, 26-1, 27-2 

subcontracts, 3-1 

substations, 13-1 

surface preparation, 25-1, 25-11 
Index-10 

T 

taglines, 11-4, 13-10, 19-7, 19-25, 25-15, 26-3 

tar, 11-1, 11-9, 11-10 

temporary wiring, 12-1, 12-10 through 12-12 

testing, 7-6, 7-7, 7-9, 7-15, 7-17, 7-20, 8-7, 8-11, 10-4, 10-9, 11-8, 12-3, 12-7, 

12-9, 12-10, 12-13, 12-16, 13-10, 13-11, 13-19, 14-3 through 14-6, 15-4, 15-11, 

15-12, 16-2, 16-5, 17-6, 17-8, 17-10, 17-17, 18-8, 19-1, 19-4, 19-5, 19-7, 19-10 

through 12, 19-14, 19-21, 19-23, 19-35, 19-36, 19-38, 19-43, 20-2, 20-7, 20-8, 

20-11, 20-12 through 20-15, 20-17, 21-7, 23-8, 23-11, 23-13, 25-4, 25-7 

thinners, 11-10, 11-11 

toilet facilities, 7-21, 7-22 

tools, 4-2, 7-37, 8-9, 9-5, 11-13, 12-2 through 12-4, 12-9, 12-14, 12-16, 13-1, 

13-3, 13-7, 13-13, 13-18, 15-6, 15-11, 17-1 through 17-9, 20-3, 20-12, 21-11, 

23-12, 23-14, 23-18, 24-5, 24-8, 24-9, 25-15, 27-3, 27-4, 29-7 

tower cranes, 19-2, 19-13, 19-29 

toxic gases, 7-15 

toxic materials, 7-45, 8-7, 11-13, 17-16, 22-5 

traffic control, 9-1, 9-4, 9-5, 20-18 

training, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-4, 5-1, 6-1 through 6-6, 7-2 through 7-7, 7-9, 7-16, 7-17, 

7-20, 7-24, 7-27 through 7-31, 7-41 through 7-45, 8-1, 8-12, 10-1, 11-12, 12-1, 

12-4, 12-16, 12-17, 13-25, 14-1, 14-3, 14-6, 14-7, 15-1, 15-4, 15-8, 15-9, 15-11, 

16-6 through 16-9, 18-1, 19-4, 19-5, 20-1, 20-13, 21-2 through 21-4, 21-6, 21-9, 

23-3, 23-7, 23-11, 24-2, 26-1, 28-1, 28-2, 29-1, 29-4 through 29-6, 29-10, 29-11 

transformers, 8-9, 11-12, 12-10, 12-14, 23-2, 24-8 

tunnels, 7-46, 8-2, 12-11, 14-1, 17-18, 19-21, 22-1, 23-1, 23-4, 23-13, 23-14, 

23-18, 24-9, 24-10, 25-1, 27-5 

tunnels and shafts, 22-1, 23-1, 23-13, 23-14, 24-9, 24-10, 27-5 

U 

unfired pressure vessels, 17-1, 17-10 

V 

variances, 2-1 

vehicles, 5-2, 11-8, 11-9, 11-11, 12-5, 20-5, 20-8, 20-10 through 10-12, 20-18, 

24-5, 24-6 
Index-11 

ventilation, 7-2, 7-21, 7-26, 7-39, 7-40, 10-3, 11-7, 11-11, 11-12, 12-14, 14-5, 

14-6, 17-15, 17-16, 20-13, 22-5, 23-4 through 23-7, 23-9, 23-14, 24-12, 27-6, 

28-1, 29-11 

ventilation requirements, 10-3, 23-9 

W 

walkways, 7-46, 11-13, 12-11, 17-18, 19-11, 20-10, 22-1, 22-2, 22-4, 22-8, 24-8, 

25-10 

wall openings, 13-22 

washing facilities, 7-22, 7-44, 11-3 

waste disposal, 7-23, 7-34, 11-12 

water, 2-3, 7-17, 7-20 through 7-22, 7-26 through 7-30, 8-10, 8-13, 10-5, 10-7 

through 10-10, 12-12, 12-14, 14-2, 15-1, 15-3, 17-10, 19-14, 19-24, 19-41, 20-10, 

21-7, 21-8, 22-1, 22-4, 23-2, 23-8, 23-11, 24-2, 24-4, 24-13, 24-14, 25-1, 25-9, 

27-1, 27-4, 27-6, 28-1 through 28-4, 29-3, 29-7, 29-12 

water hazard, 8-10 

welding, 7-15, 7-43, 8-2 through 8-4, 8-6, 8-11, 10-1, 13-7, 13-11, 13-18, 15-3, 

17-1, 17-13 through 17-18, 23-10, 24-8, 25-4, 25-17, 26-1, 26-4, 27-7, 29-5 

welding and cutting, 8-11, 10-1, 17-1, 17-13, 17-15 through 17-18, 23-10, 27-7 

wire rope, 13-10, 13-11, 13-17, 13-18, 13-21, 16-1, 17-18, 18-1 through 18-4, 

19-8 through 19-10, 19-18, 19-19, 19-39, 23-12, 23-15, 25-15 

wiring, 11-8, 11-9, 12-1, 12-2, 12-10 through 12-14, 23-2, 23-4, 24-1, 24-5, 24-7, 

24-10, 24-11, 27-1 

woodworking, 17-1, 17-4, 17-5